NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY LIBRARY EVANSTON ILLINOIS À* NEW , // M E T H O ÎÎ Of learni f GREEt fE: Containing Declensions, Conjugations, Resolution of Veres^ Syntax, Quantity, Accents, Dialects, and Poetic Licence. Digeßed in the cleareß and concißß Order, k * \ WITH Variety of Solid Remarks, Neceflaiy for the attaining A complete Knowledge of this an g u age, and For underftandxns the Greek Writers. Tranßated from the French of the Meßeurs de Port Royal, By Mr. NUGENT. The Third Edition, carefully revifed and correöed. , LONDON, Printed for J. Nourse, in the Strand, Bookfeller to His Majesty. m.dcc.lxxvii. 4-^5 LÍ1-X / Z ö ¿ ¿ * ». ». A A .4. A ■». -4. A A -♦. .» ». ^ ♦ .*■ .*. ■»■ ♦. -» A A M A A .».,» A A ^VvVvvvVvvTVvv^^yvVTvWWvv^WWWVWWWWv THE TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. o illuílrate the grammatical art, was t T I favourite employment of many of Z t the greateft men of ancieht and mo- dern times j but none deferves a higher commendation than the author of the following performance. This' was the learned Claude Lan¬ celot, member of the celebrated fociety of Port Royal, in the neighbourhood of Paris. He was born in that capital in 1613, and educated from the age of twelve in the feminary of St. Nicholas du Chardonnier, where he entered himfelf in the year 1627. After hé had finiihed his ftudies, he retired to Port Pfoyal, and was employed in the education of youth. This province he executed with the utmoft diligence, and made fuch im- A 2 prove- Iv THE TRANSLATOR'S proveinents in the art of teaching, as to draw up thofe excellent methods of learning the Latin, Greek, Italian, and Spaniih tongues, generally called Tèe Port Poyal Grammars. He is like- wife faid to have written the 'Jardin des racines Grecquest and, laíl of all, Phe General and Pa" tional Grammar. But of all our author's performances, the pre- fent work is generally reckoned to deferve the preference. The order and perfpicuity that ihine through the whole, and the profound knowledge of the principles and analyfis of the Greek lan¬ guage, are not to be matched, in any other writer. He had made an excellent ufe of the grammarians that went before him j and by his method he far outilripped them all. This con¬ fias in drawing up his infirudlions in vulgar idiom, as more eafy than Latin to young begin¬ ners ; in diftinguiihing neceffary rules from others", by way of text and annotations ; in re¬ trenching fuperfiuities, by reducing the ten de¬ cían fions of former grammarians tp three, and the thirteen conjugations to two j in difpofing the tenfes in' fuch a manner, as to render it eafier to afcend to the theme of the verb ; in fubjoin- ing the dialedls in their proper places; in com¬ prehending the refolutioiî of verbs within a few rules ; in reftifying and methodizing the rules of fyntax, and pbferving iimilar conilrudtions between the Latin and the Greçk ; and lailly, in treating the fubjedt in a rational and critical manner, fo as not to proceed merely on the foot of authority, but to appeal likewife to thç rear fon and judgment of the fcholar. It PREFACE. V ît is now about a dozen years; íiñce, I Un¬ dertook to tranflate this work, at the defire of feveral members of our two learned univerfities. The many editions of the original abroad, and the feveral extraits and abridgments of it in moil parts of Europe, were an encouragement to the undertaking. The fuccefs has anfwered, and I may juftly fay, exceeded my expectation j when I donfider that the tranflation was printed at a time that I was in Germany, and incapable of fuperintending the prefs. It is true a perfon* known in the literary world, was employed /or that purpofe ; but either through want of being acquainted, with my hand-writing, or through difufe of Greek literature, or through fome other caufe'which I cannot divine, he fuifered the work to go abroad, too incorred, I muft own; for the ufe it was intended to fervel However, as the public have been fo indulgent, as to ac¬ cept it with all its faults, I muft return them my thanks ; and I hope I have made fome amends, by the extraordinary care beftowed upoii this fecoiid edition. The whole copy hath been carefully revifed and compared with the original ; the feveral errors have been correCled, and many paifages altered and retouched, efpecially the preface, which may be faid to be a new tranfla¬ tion. The quotations from the dailies have been alfo compared and correded in a multitude of places. A ftrid adherence to the original has been obferved throughout j except the rendering the rules into metre: for this not being an ele¬ mentary introdudion, but a complete fyftem, if fo I may expreft myfelf, of the Greek language, fuch puerile verfification hath been judged im- proper 4 A 3 With vi THE TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. With the revifal of this work I finifli my tranflations of all the grammatical pieces of Meilleurs de Port Royal*; a taik, I own, of more labour than reputation : yet if my labour hath been of fervice to our Britiih youth ; and if in this toilfome province, I may be alfo faid to have deferved well of this moft ufeful art, my ambition is fatisfied. * Except the Spanifli Grammar : they are all printed for J. Nourfe in the Strand. PRE. itîUîîîîÂîîiîittîîîîîiitîiîiimîîîiîîôîi PREFACE, ' CONCERNING tlîE REStORATION OP GREEK LEARNING IN EUROPE, : AND THOSE WHO CONTRIBUTED MOST THERETO* WITH Some General Direñions relating to the Method of Teaching . and Learning properly the Greek Tongue j A w D A Critical Account of the moft celebrated Authors, whethef facred Or profane, who have written in this Language. i. Of the ancients^ that have treated of the Greek tongue ; and of the difference between learning a living and a dead language. Present thee at lengthj deaf reader, with ^ J ^ my New Method of learning Greek, whiphj ^ though demahded hitherto with importu- nity, ftill (as I was defirous of rendering it at leaft as ferviceable as that of the Latin tongue) 1 could have hardly been induced to publiih fo foonj if the repeated entreaties of my friends had not obliged me to it. The arduoufnefs of the undertaking, and the confcioufnefs of my incapacity, would have de¬ terred me even from attempting it, had I not been en¬ gaged by fuperior authority. I ihould have been en¬ tirely filent, in order to make room for fo many learned men, who have been, and are ftill employed on the fame fubjeit : but I was perfuaded, that this work, though inferior in merit to feveral others, would A4 be vüi PREFACE. be pcrhap» attended with fome utility, as it is digeilcd in a method entirely new, and has been allowed by fome gentlemen, who have ufed it,within thefe few years, to have been of very great fervice to them. The Greek language has been always in fuch high repute, that there never have been wanting men of abilities, vho have employed their time and ftudy in illuftrating it. This advantage it has above all others, that there.is not one, which has been fo varioufly and copioufly handled, having had mafterS, who taught it regularly, and wrote grammars on it, a confiderable time before the Hebrew, which is, notwithftanding, the moíl: ancient of all languages, and from whence the Greek itlelf derives its origin. Suidas has tranfmiited to us a very i.onourable charafter of feveral of thofe authors, the greateft part of whofe writings hath periih- ed, through the injuries of time. Among thofe that have come down to us, we may reckon particularly Apollonius of Alexandria, furnamed the Difficult, who flouriihed under Marcus Aurelius, about fifteen hun¬ dred years ago, and Herodian his fon*, fuppofed to be the very fame whofe hiftory is extant. To thefe we may add Tryphon, who is thought to be the per- fon, that lived in the reign of Auguftus -, as alfo The- odofius, Dionyfius, Cherobofcus, and fome others. But notwithftanding that thofe authors are valuable for their erudition, and confidered as ftreams that flow by fo much the purer, as they were nearer to the foun» tain-head; having written at a time, when the lan¬ guage fubfifted in its full vigour ; ftill, we may ven¬ ture to affirm, that they are defeilive in feveral points, with regard to order and method. There is a very wide difference between the manner of handling a living, and that of teaching a dead language : and never are grammars lefs perfcit, than when the lan¬ guage is moflí- fo ; becaufe, in this cafe, ufe fupplics every deficiency of art. Thus we fee, thaj the Romans had no better me¬ thod of perfeóting themfelves in this language, than that of lending their children to ftudy at Athens, in * Gefner in Bibl. order PREFACE. ix order, to learn it there, in its full purity: a prafbice which,ftill obtained long after the ruin of their re¬ public. But no fooner was the imperial feat transfer¬ red to Conftantinople, than the Greek tongue began confiderably to decline from its purity, becaufe of thé • mixture of Romans who flocked to that capital, and not only preferved all their own particular names of offices and dignities, but even introduced feveral other words. At length, when through the inundation of Barbarians, ignorance had fpread itfelf over all Eu¬ rope, without fparing even Greece, which was always confidered as the feat of learning j this language came to be fo disfigured, as hardly to retain the leaft fea¬ tures, by which it could be known to foreigners, or even to the Greeks themfelves, among whom, though it be not quite extinft, yet the ruins are very im- perfed. II. Refioration of the Greek tongue in Europe^ and particularly in France and Italy. The fatal deftrudion of the Eaftern empire was attended with this advantage to us, that it forced the - few men of letters in that celebrated monarchy, to fly for refuge into the Weft, where they contributed to the reftoration of learning. Hiftory remarks, among others, Emanuel Chryfo- loras, who having been fent into Europe by John Palasologus', emperor of Conftantinople, to implore the affiftance of Chriftian princes, and having dif- charged his embaíTy. with great fidelity , and diligence, fettled afterwards in Italy, and taught at Venice, Flo¬ rence, Rome, and Pavia. He left behind him feveral very eminent pupils, fuch as Philelphus, Gregory of Tifernum, Leonard of Arezzo, Poggius, and others : at length he went to Conftance, and died there, at the time of holding the council, which ended in the year 1418. Argyropylus çi Conftantinople held a profelTorihip alfo at-Florence, fome time after Chryfoloras, and was preceptor to Peter of Medicis, and to his fon Laurence. Chalcondylas fucceedcd him ; but having been X PREFACE. been obliged to withdraw himfelf from the períécu^ tion of his enemy Politianus, he retired to Milan, whither he had been invited by Lewis Sforza, and was appointed public profeiTor in that city. Gaza of TheflTalonica came into Italy, after his country had been wrefted from the Venetians, which happened in the year 1444. He flouriihed at the fame time with George of Trebifond, to whom Pope Eu¬ gene the Fourth committed the direilion of one of the colleges at Rome. And Gaza had a benefice in Cala¬ bria, where he refided the greateft part of his time. France, ever produdtive of men of genius, had, much about this time, the pleafure of feeing this language revived, after having loft all knowledge of it fuch a vaft number of years ; and for this ihe was in¬ debted to feveral great men, who reforted thither to ihew their literature. Gregory, native of Tifernum in Italy, one of the difciples of Chryfoloras, was the firft who paved the way. He repaired to Paris fo early as . the commencement of the reign of Lewis XI. There he met with a favourable reception, from the redtor, and the univerfity, and was admitted a public profeflbn This kind treatment was the means of drawing thither, a ihort time after, Jerom of Sparta, who fucceeded him, and had Reuchlinus or Capnion, and Budseus for his auditors: Tranquillos of Andronica came dfterwards, and was the laft of thofe,- who vifited France in that king's reign. John Lafcans, poíTeíTed of all the qualities of a man illuftrious for birth and abilities, left Italy likewife to refide in this kingdom. But this did not happen till after the death of Laurence of Medicis, who had en¬ tertained him very honourably, and employed him in colleéling the famous library of Florence: -for which purpofe he made a voyage to Africa, and to the Le¬ vant, and inriched it with the fcarceft manufcripts he could, find. He was beloved by two of our kings, Charles VIII. and Lewis XII : the latter employed him as agent, to treat with the Venetians. Under him, Budteus perfeded himfelf in this lan¬ guage, to fuch a degree, as to be looked upon as the 3 wonder PREFACE. xî Wonder of the age he lived in v having cleared up the obfcureft paflages of all Greek antiquity. He was in very great favour with Francis I. who honoured him with the office of matter of Requetts, at a time when there were only four : at his defire the fame prince colleâed the royal library, which has been al¬ ways confidercd as one of the firtt in Europe ; and he alfo founded the profettbrlhips for languages and the mathematics, fo early as the year 1530, to which the reft have been added fince. Then it was that the Greek tongue began to be efteemed and cultivated all over Europe. The uni- verfity of Paris, ever fertile of great men, was one of thofe that contributed mottly to this progrefs of .Greek literature. It is fhe that gave the firtt encouragement to Jerom Alexander. After he had taught the Greek language for fome time in her fchools, Ihe judged him worthy of the direftion of one of her colleges : this made him known to Leo X. by whom he was fent nuntio into Germany, afterwards he was made biihop of Brindifi by Clement VIL and at length, Paul III. created him cardinal. It is íhe that, trained up the Capnions, the Erafmus's, the Gefners, who diffufed the rays of learning through Germany and the Netherlands. It is Ihe that formed Budieus and Henry Stephens, the chief promoters of Greek lite¬ rature ; the firtt by his Commentaries, and the fécond by his Thefaurus : from whence all thofe, who after¬ wards handled the fame fubjeft, have borrowed the bétt part of their ttock. It is ihe, in fine, that in guife of an univerfal nurfery, produced in former times, and ttill continues to produce men not lefs va¬ luable for the knowledge of this tongue, than for their ikill in all other arts and fciences. III. Of thofe who have written on the Greek grammar in thefe latter ages, whether in Greek or Latin. But to trac# things' a little higher, and to return to the natives of Greece, whom I had quitted. Chryfoloras was the firtt, that attempted to publitti any abridgment of tbe Greek grammar in Italy, • from xii P R E F A C E. from whence this language had been exiled upward» of feven hundred years, as is attefted by Leonardus Aretinus, his difciple, one of the moft learned men of , his time, and who has written his life. After him, Gaza obtained the applaufe of all the learned, by his grammar, which he divided into four books. But Chalchondylas finding him obfcure and difficult, endeavoured to lay down eafier rules for beginners. " ^ And, finally, Coniiantine Lafcaris having had the advantage of coming after them, ftrove to render him- felf jnore copious and intelligible in feveral things, reftoring part of the ancient glory of Athens at Mcfli- na, where he was profeflbr in the year 1470. Since that time, Europe has never been without ■writers on this fubjeft. Several, in imitation of the na¬ tive Greeks, who have left us precepts on their own language, began to publiih inftrudlions alfo in Latin ; among whom, the moil efteemed, are Urbanus, pre¬ ceptor of I.eo X. and Caninius, profeiTor in the uni- Verfity of Paris. < Clenardus likewife acquired great reputation, by his fmall abridgment of grammar, which he publiihed in Flanders, in the year 1536: but he had not time to revife it ; for very foon after he went to Spain, where he was preceptor to the king of Portugal's bro¬ ther. From thence he crolTed over into Barbary, to learn Arabicj into which tongue he was defirous of tranflating the Scripture, with a real Chriilian view of- promoting the converfion of the Mahometans : at length he returned to Spain, where he died, towards the year 1542. But foon after him fucceeded Ramus, a man in whom the univerlity of Paris may really glory; fince he is confidered in great meafure as the reftorer of all human fcience. He endeavoured, therefore, to illuílráte this, as he had done all other arts ; and purfuant to this defign, he wrote his grammar, which was pub¬ liihed at Paris in the year 1557, and afterwards in Germany, where it was immediately embraced by almoft every fchool ; whilil his enemies endeavoured to PRE F'A CE. xiii to decry him at Paris, and at laft murdered him in the year 1572. We find that feveral learned men have purfued his method fince, as, among others, Henry Cranzius and Sylburgius to whom we may join Alftedius and Sanftius, though they have turned a little out of the path that had been beaten by their predeceflbrs. Juftly may we therefore fay, that if Ramus did not make a full difcovery of the right method of teaching this and other arts ; he was at leaft, one of the firft that began the inquiry, and that excited others, by his example: infomuch, that the glory is intirely due to the univerfity of Paris, the parent of fo celebrated a genius. It is to her I confecrate thefe poor endeavours, frotn whence if any utility may chance to arife, it will be all owing to Alma mater. For having made a decla¬ ration of advancing nothing of my own head, but only of Golleding fuch obfervations, whether ancient or modern, as I ihought rnoft curious, I may ac¬ knowledge myfelf chiefly indebted to Caninius, who was bred at this univerfity, and to Sylburgius and Sand) us, whom we muft confider as the difciples of Ramus. Not but that I have alfo made a proper ufe of others, and particularly of Voflius. But as the greateft part of what he has added to Clenardus, in order to form the grammar which goes by his name, is almoft in¬ tirely borrowed from Sylburgius and Caninius ; I ihould rob thofe two learned men of their due praife, did I not bear witnefs to their ability, and acknow¬ ledge the aififtance they have afforded me. Some help I havclikewife received from Crufius,Tfchonder, Gualtper, Surcin, Enoc, Gretfer, Golius, Huldric, Alftedius, and feveral others : not to mention the great etymologift Euftathius, Hefychius, Phavorinus, Budieus, H. Stephen, Gefner, Conftantine, Scapula, and other old or jiew diftionaries, fcholiafts, commen¬ tators, and authors, whom I have either carefully perufed, or occafionally confulted^ - xiv PRE F A C Ë. IV. Use motive of undertaking this nevo grammar^ and drawing it up in French. Now if any body ihould be furprized at feeing me propofe a nêw method of learning the Greek tongue,, efter I had acknowledged that fo many grammarians . have already treated of this fubjecl ; it is eafy to an- fwer, that, although the language continues always the fame, yet the art of teaching it may be new. ' Deriving the fame materials from the fame fource, 'we may infinitely diverfify the manner of handling them, wherein we give a further opportunity to ad-r mire the beauty of this language, and the fertility of this art, the key and entrance to all others. But I ihall likewife add, that Clenardus, who has hitherto obtained pretty much in the fchools, has ne¬ ver been judged fuificient. The'Greek language, as Conftantine Lafcaris very juftly remarks, is like untó a wide ocean ; and in vain would you ' pretend to circumfcribe the knowledge of it within the limits of ' a fimple abridgment. I am not ignorant that feveral have attempted to illuftrate or enlarge the above au¬ thor. Bur my endeavours towards facilitating a tho¬ rough acquirement of this language, ought to be fo much the more acceptable, as it feemeth proper, after fo many books, upon this fubjedl written in Greek and Latin, that there ihould be one alfo in our native idiom, for the honour of this great kingdom. No body, as L know of, has yet undertaken it, fo as to include all the rules neceíTary for the knowledge of this tongue ; though it is unqueftionable, that this is the beft way to comprehend them more readily, and to recoiled: them with greater eafe. V. Order and divtßon of this whole work. The ceconomy J-purfue is alfo quite new: for having found by experience, that Clenardus's method was not the moil ufeful, and that of Ramus was fomewhat intricate and incommodious, which Sylbur^- gius had in- part taken notice ef,, and Sandius had a PREFACE. mind to remedy, by following another path : I have therefore made fuch ufe of all thofe authors, as to pick out what I judged moft worthy of notice, with¬ out entering into things that feemed too intricate and remote from the common method now received in France. This work I have divided into nine books: the firft treats of the analogy of Içtters, of their pronunciation, and of the changes and relations they bear to each other ; which is the foundation of what follows : the fécond treats of declenfions, nouns, and pronouns : the third of the conjugation of verbs in a : the fourth of the conjugation of verbs in ¡ai : the fifth of defec* tive verbs, and the inveftigation of the theme the fixth of indeclinable participles -, with a very ufeful treatife on the derivation and compofition of nouns : the feventh of fyntax : the eighth of curious remarks on all the parts of fpeech : and the ninth of quantity and accents with a review of the dialeûs, and of poetic licence. I reduce all the declenfions. to two *, one parifyl- labic, and the other imparifyllabic : but I fubdivide the parifyllabic again into two ; one following the fe¬ minine article, and entirely analogous to the firft of the Latins : the other following the mafculine article, and analogous to their fécond declenfion ; as the im¬ parifyllabic is to the third, and the contraéis to the other twoj which are properly no more than a branch pf the third. I likewife reduce all the conjugations to two; one of verbs in w, and the other of verbs in : but I di¬ vide alfo thofe verbs in « into two forts, viz. one of barytonous verbs, and the other of circumflexed ; which I have caufed to be printed in two different co¬ lours, that the different manner of conjugating them may immediately ftrike the eye, without any danger of confufioh. The difpofition of the tenfes, and their formation, are alfo new. For having obferved, that the preterit and the aorift depend in many "things on the future, 1 thought it would be proper to place the latter tenfe before xvî PREFACE, before the other two: and having found, by expe^ rience, as well as Ramus, Sylburgius, Cranzius, Sanfbius, and feveral others, that this long genealogy of tenles, whereby they are made to defcend fuccefi lively the one from the other, is as inconvenient in praótice, as it feems plaufible to thofe that have not well examined it ; becaufe it fatigues the mind in fo tedious a circuit, and hinders it from finding the theme of the verb fo readily as one could wiih : I have therefore given a method of reducing them all im¬ mediately to the future aftive, which is as well known as the prefent. Thus, in whatfoever tenfe or mood I find myfelf, whether aftive, paflive, or middle, I afcend com¬ monly to the theme of the verb in two fteps, which is not fometimes compaffed in fix or feven in the ordi¬ nary method. In each place I have given all the dialefts, together with obfervations proper for every fort of nouns and pronouns, or particular to each tenfe of verbs} know¬ ing, by experience, how troublefome it is to be obliged to look out for what relates to the fame fub- jedt in two of three different places. But I have diftin- guifhed thefe, in fuch a manner, by the difierence of the type, that there is no danger of their incommoding thofe who choofe to overlook them. As to what regards the nouns and pronouns, having given at firft the manner of declining them according to the common tongue, I have afterwards exhibited tables, which include the terminations, with all the different dialedts; infomuch that every thing that is neceifary may be feen at one view. And concerning the verbs, I give at firfi: a table for conjugating, either the aftivc, or paffive voice, choof- ing, with SanCtius, rioo, for an example of the bary- tonous verbs, as one of the moil fimple, and to which the reft may be eaficr reduced. Afterwards I treat of each tenfe in particular, leaving ruVlw, for a paradigm, in favour of thofe who are ufed to it : and putting the common form in a large letter, I fubjoin the dialeCts to each perfon in a fmaller chara(^er j and then I give a Ihort PREFACE. xviî A íhort account of thofe faid dialefts, to explain their analogy, and render them more eafy to retain. For which reafon I have not judged it neceíTary to mention them all in the rules, but have contented myfelf with including thofe that were moil: neccflary, or might cafieft efcape the memory. But having confidered how ufeful it is for beginners to have a knowledge of the invefligation of the themes I have comprifed the whole of it in very eafy rules; though, among thofe who have endeavoured to digeft the Greek grammar into Latin verfe, I know not one that has ever attempted it. With regard to the fyntax, I have reduced it to a very fmall, but fufficient number of principles ; fup- pofing the learner to be fomewhat acquainted with the Latin fyntax. If there is any thing particular, I have referved it either for the annotations that are in a fmall letter at the end of each rule; or for the eighth book, which confiils intirely of curious and folid remarks ; and I have pointed out the reafon of each government, in order to be better prepared for the reading of authors, which ought to be our chief aim in this ftudy. VI. Three things necejfary for learning a language. I AM of opinion, that it will not be improper to obferve three things, which will particularly contri¬ bute towards forwarding this defign. The firft is a competent knowledge of grammar ; the fécond the knowledge of words ; and the third, to be acquainted with the phrafeology; without which qualifications it is impoifible ever to attain to a thorough knowledge of any language. If the Greek is fomewhat more difficult than the Latin, with regard to the two firft articles, it has at leaft this advantage, that it is much eafier with refpedfe to the Jaft, which contains almoft inconceivable diffi¬ culties in. the Latin. The Latin idiom is much wideT. from ours than the Greek. Having fewer terms, it is obliged to give a greater extent to the fame expref- fion ; and to vary the phrafe, and manner of conne TCO», and tv(. 308 5. From the perfeâ middle. 310 Chap. VI. Ofcompound words, and particularly ' of nouns. 311 1. Compounded of two nouns. ibid. 2. Words componnded with a verb and a noun. 313 BOOK VII. Of the Greek fyntax. 1. IntroduAion to fyntax. 315 2. Changes of fy Hables, by rea- fon of the conûruâion. 316 3. Of pointing. 317 Chap. I. How far the Greek concord differs from the La¬ tin. 319 To diftinguilh attraâion from government. ibid. Of the relative. , 321 Of the infinitive. 322 The manner of fupplying the gerund in Greek. 325 Difiiculties relating to the go¬ vernment of the infinitive. 326 Of participles. 327 Of a neuter plural joined to a fingular, 329 Chap. II. How far the Greek tongue differs from the Latin with refpeâ to government ; and firff of the prepofitions, and of local interrogations. 330 The governniont of prepofi¬ tions. ibid. A lift of Greek prepofitions, with their particular ele¬ gance, and different govern¬ ments. 331 , Of, the queftions of place. 343 Chap. III. Of the government of the genitive. 344 Nouns that govern, ¡or are go¬ verned in the genitive, ibid. Annotation on the fuperlative. 345 Remarkable expreffions with the comparative. ibid. The government of adverbs. 347 The reafon of the government of adverbs. 348 Several nouns that are put ia the genitive; 349 Nouns of time, that are put in the accufqtive, or in the ab¬ lative. ibid. The matter and the price ia the ablative. 3^0 Several verbs that govern a genitive. 351 Chap. IV. The government of the dative. 355 The government of the accu- fative. 3J7 Chap. V. Of the palfive verb. 360 That in Greek there are three abfoiute cafes. ' 364 The manner of refolving the abfoiute conftruâion. 363 Whether the nominative cafe be an abfoiute cafe. ' 364 Whether the abfoiute cafe ought always to be referred to a different perfon. 365 Chap. VI. Obfervations on diL ferent governments. 366 I. Differentgovernmentsjoined together. ¡üd. 2. Va- CONTENTS. 2. Variety in tHe feníé by rea- fonof the difference of go¬ vernment. 366 3. Difference of government in verbs compounded with prepofitions. ibid. 4. The expredions changed by virtue of the government. 367 Chap. VII. Obfervations on figurative conilruftion. ibid. I. £llipfis. 367 Firfi lift, of feveral nouns un- derftood in Greek authors. 369 Second lift, of verbs, or par¬ ticiples underftood. 371 Third lift, of prepofitions un¬ derftood. 373 Zeugma. 373 2. Pleonafm. 374 3. Syllepfis. ' ibid. Relative fyllepfis. 375 4. Hyperbaton. 376 BOOK VIII. Containing particular Remarks on all the parts of fpeech. Chap.I. Remarksonthenouns; and firft of the irregularities of conftruâion, vulgarly fancied by the grammarians. 377 Chap. II. Whether the Greeks have an ablative cafe. 379 Chap. III. Conftruâion of nu¬ merals. 383 Combination of numbers. 384 Divers particles made ufe of in the exprefling of numbers. ibid. Chap. IV. Remarks on the ar¬ ticle. 386 Chap. V. That the article is often taken for the demon- ftrative and the relative, or vice verja ; as alfo for tÎç ; and the reafon of thefe chan¬ ges. 388 Chap. VI. Remarks on the pronouns ; and firft of reci¬ procals and relatives. 390 Of pofleflives. 391 Chap. Vlf. Of fome noons de¬ rived from pronouns f and firft of the relatives of qua¬ lity, oTo; and wcro;. 392 Of «croç and rodiroi. 394 Chap^ VIII. Remarks on the verbs. ' • ibid. i. That we muft confider the - nature of the verbs. ibid. Of. and í ' 39^ Chap. IX. That we muft confix der the nature of the tenfes. 397 1. Of the firft aorift. ibid* 2. Of the perfeâ and aorifts. . 398 3. Of the middle aorifts. ibid* Chap. X. That we are to con¬ fider the nature and difpofi- tion of the moods. ibid* 1. Of the indicative, the fub- junâive, and the optative. ibid, 2. Of the imperative and in- ' finitive. 400 3. That the infinitive is not put for the fubjunâive. ibid. 4. The infinitives and partici¬ ples of all tenfes. 401 3. Of verbals in sot. ibid. , Of two more remarkable ex- preifions', and more difficult to refolve. 402 Chap. XI, Remarks on the in¬ declinable particles; and firft of «r». 403 1. Thatcrt is always a rela¬ tive. ' ibid* 2. Ot» niß. ' 406 3. "Or», quam. 407 Chap. XII. Of the prepofitions. ibid. Variation of the fame pfirafe caufed by prepofitions. 408 The CONTEN TS. figttificatlo« df a''-word changed by ' a prepoiition. «' ■ 469 Remarkable figniñcation .of áiri. ^ t • • ' 4''® Pieriphrafis of ¿¡n/pi 'and' -iftp)'. ibtd, DiiEculty concerning'fhofepe? riphrafes. -• "'"*411 Whether to remove the am¬ biguity the verb may be put in the fingular. ibid. Chap. Xlll. Of the particle - ¿Î, ut. "41a Chap. XIV. Of the negative particles. 4^4 Of fitlTTOrt. 415 Chap. XV. Of the particle í». 416 2. "a», with the infinitive and the participles. 417 . 3. "Ak, in interrogations, ibid. 4. "Ar, expletiire ôr teátiñ^án^ and elliptic or nndecftood^ 4»8 • 5. Reniarkable force of thepar^ tide it in abridging, dbid. Chap-XVI. Offomeother par- • -••jitles necelTary for connexion ■''"ortranfition in difcourfe. ibid. 1. Of thofe that conneA things. ibid, 2. Of Ihofe that import' di- AinAion. 419 3. Of thofe that are made ufe of, in the continuance of the difcourfe. ' 420 4. Of thofe that are made ufe of to exprefs a doubt. 421 5. Of thofe that are 'nfed in inferences, or ' conclufions. ^ 422 6. Of adverfative particles. ibid. 'BOOK IX. Of quantity^ accents, diakSls, and poetic licences* Of the quantity of fyllables. Chap. I. Some genefal tules of quantity. . . 423 1. Obfervations On mutes and liquids. ibid, 2. Of long or fliort Ijllables in general. 424 Chap. II. Of the particular rules of quantity. 425 And firft of the three common vowels before the penúltima. ibid. General rule of the three vow¬ els, a., 1, I). ibid. Chap. 111. Of the three com¬ mon vowels of the penúltima. 428 Chap. IV. Of the three com¬ mon vowels at the end of words. 433 Chap. V. Two obfervations concerning the. quantity, of nouns and verbs. 433 3 ' Chap. VI. , On the nature and divifion of accents, of theif general analogy, and that they are not to be confound¬ ed with quantity. 437 Chap. VII. The rules of ac¬ cents; and firA'of nouns. 441 Chap. VIII. Of the accents of verbs. . - 450 Ch ap. IX. Of enclitics. ' 435 Of breathings. 461 Chap. X. Divers obfervations regarding the accents and diA^Aion of words. 463 Chap.XI. Of the four dialeâS in general. 46c Chap. XII. Of the poetic li¬ cences.: 471 Chap. XIII. Obfervations on the liberty of Greek verfifi- catioc. 473 A New NEW AND EASY METHOD OF LEARNING THE GREEK TONGUE. BOOK I. Of Letters and Syllables» C H A P. L ' , 'General âivifion of this work, new method containeth an eafy man- ^ T ^ ner of learning the principles of the Greek tongue and grammar. k.í^!8^j» 'j-j^g Greek grammar is the art of fpeak- ing and writing this language correftly. This language is either to be confidered generally, according to the praftice of the feveral nations that fpoke it ; which is called the common tongue : or particularly, according to the manner of fpeaking in ufe among particular people, which manner we call DIALECTS. B Thefe 2 BOOK I. Thefe dialects are principally four ; viz. the Attic, the Ionic, the Doric, andthe^otic; to which we may reduce fome others lefs known, as the Boeotian, the Cyprian, and fuch like i adding thereto the.poe- tical licences, as we ihall more particularly obferve in the ninth book. Of thefe four the Attic is the moil confiderable, as the mofl: elegant, and moil diffufed through the common tongue -, which lad makes no diilinfl dialedl, but is compounded principally of the Attic, with a mixture of the reil. The parts of the Greek- grammar, whether con- fidered in general with regard to the common tongue, or in particular according to its feveral dialeóls, are two, viz. etymology and fyntax. Etymology treats of feparate words ; and fyntax con- fiders their connexion and ilrudure in difcourfe. Words are compounded of letters and fyllables. Letters are the fmalleil parts of words. The Greeks call them viz. elementa^ or ye»[jíiAoí¡Xt litteray whence cometh the word grammar : as from litt er a the Latins have .fometimes alfo called it litte- ratura^ as may be feen in Quintilian, and in St. Au- guilin in his fécond book of order, chap. 12. Inletters, we are to confider their number, figure, name, power, pronunciation, and divifion : which in¬ cludes the interchanging of thefe letters, according to the relation they bear to each other. G HAP, T 0/Letters íí»i Syllablbs. ' ¿ CHAP. II. Of letters in general» H E Greeks have 24 letters, whofc 6gure, iiame, and power are as follow. Figure. 1. A (s 2. Bß S 3. r yf 4. A ^ 5. E t 6. zCf 7. Hfl 8. @3-9, 9. 11 , 10. K X 11. A A Mf*. Ni» Hg O o n "w w P f p 2 7 yf f ^ u fj^iyx ANNOTATION. Of thefe letters Cadmas introduced i6, from Phoenicia into Greece, where he fettled as early as the time of the firft judges of Ifrael : and thefe letters are, A, B, r. A, E, I, K, A, M, N, O, H, P, S, T, Y; which alone are fuificient to expreis all the different founds of the Greek language ; the other eight were invented afterwards more for conveniency than neceffity, , Of thefe eight Palamedes invented four at the liege of Troy, viz. in the year of the world aSco, according to Petavius, and B 2 upwar4$ O magnum Power, a. b. g- d. c ßort. 2 ds. e long. th. . , i vowel. k, c, L m. n. X. , ó ßort, ' P- r. f., t. u. ph. ch. ps. o long. 4 ' B O O K I. upwards of 250 years after the arrival of Cadmus, viz. s, and the three afpirates, 0, "x; though feme afcribe 0 and x to Epi- ' charmus.' Simonides, whom Eufebius placeth in the 6ift Olympiad, which is near 650 years after the Trojan war, invented the remaining four, viz. h, n, and Z,- V : but the addition of thefe letters fliall hereafter be better accounted for. CHAP. III. Of the àivifion and change of letters. LEtters may be confidered either-alphabetically of arithmetically. Letters taken alphabetically are divided into vowel.«! and confonants ; into (puvmvTx (fup." y^¿y,[AMrot) and cvfAçuvx: which is done by certain'claffes, according to which thefe letters are eafily changed, one for the other. Vowels are thofe which form a found of themfelves: and thefe may be confidered either feparately, or con- jundtively. Vowels taken feparately are divided into long, ihort, and doubtful. -- R u l e I." Of towels long, ihort, and doubtful. fhe long vowels are «, w.- 'The ßort are t, 0. *îhe doubtful Xf t, and u," Examples. The Greeks reckon feven vowels, viz. 2 long,^«x^« t¡ which correfpond, and are oft« 2 íhort,.(2f«j¿£>, AOION for tJnotf ®EON for and the like. . ' Terentianus has very clearly exprclTed the nature of thefe two YOWels t) and u in the following verfes, - ^ Litteram namque E •videmus ejfe ad nra. proximam, Sicut olä a videntur efe vicinte fibi ! ■. » Temporum momenta dißant, non font nativitas. He fays that they diiFer only in quantity, and not in the natural and eifential found, though the long ones are pronounced fuller than the Ihort. Pronunciation of nr«. ^Hra being a long E ought to be pronounced full, as e in the French words bite, fête, &c. whereas Ihould be fliort and clofe, as e final in the French word netteté. But or» ought to have a middle found' betwixt e and a, as there is a relation betweeq it and thefe two vowels, which we ihall often have occafion to obferve. Thus Euftathius, who lived towards the clofe of the twelfth century, fays that ßn, ßo, is a found made in imitatión of the bleating of iheep, and quotes to this purpofe the fallowing verfe of an ancient writer called Cratinus ; . *0 y ÍAÍ6to{, âo'trtf •n^óQarov, ßü, ßo f^éyar ßaSi^u : /í fatuus perinde ac ovis bê, bê, dicens incedit. And the fame is attefted by Varro. ' St. Auguftin, in his fécond book of the Chriftian doilrine, fays that BETA, uuith the fame found and pronunciation, ßgnifieth a letter amongß the Greeks, and an herb among the Latins. And it is thus alfo that Juvenal hath called this letter: Hoc difcunt omnes ante alpha Iß beta puella. This is ftill further demonftrated by the term alphabet, which is ufed to this very day in almoft all vulgar languages, And thefe authorities are fufficient to afcertain not only the pronunciation of n, but alfo that of ß. As they are both yet further proved from antiquity by the word Beel, which is the fame as BîAoç, Belus, fa¬ ther of Ninus king of the Alfyrians, who had divine honours paid him by the Babylonians. Pronunciation of u. ^Clfííya ought alfo to be dillinguiihed from in the pro¬ nunciation: this latt being pronounced on the extremity of the lips J and the other in the hollow of the mouth, as being of a fuller found. . Caninius and Syl|)urgius are both of this opinion : . and Terentianus, who lived before St. Auguitin, teacheth exprefsly tiie fame in thefe verfes ; , Í2 Grajugenum longior, altera eß figura. Alter fonus, temporumque nota variata. B 3 Igitur BOOK I. Igitur fonitum reddere', cum miles, miupri, Retrorsus adaäam modice tenet» linguam, Ri£lu neque magno, fat erit patere labra. At longior alt» traghum fuh oris antra : Mollita rotundis acuk fonum labellis. This difference of o long and fliort ,u alfo found in the Frenclh tongue, where il faute, (faltat) is pronounced differently from une faite (ftulta : ) coße (coña) from une cotte, &C. Pronunciation of v, ' ^ 'Y4't^àv was heretofore pronounced like a French u, whereas th* Latin U was founded like a French eu, as has been Ihewn in the new method of learning the Latin tongue : for the Greek Y, açr cording to Capella, Terentianus, and Prilcian, had a middle found betwixt ou and làra.. Whence Capella faith, that it was pronounced by breathing foftly, and at the fame time clofing the lips. And Ariitophanes in his Plautus deiigning to exprefs the {bund a man makes at a particular fmell, while at the fame time he draws his breath very fall, puts Z, Z, Z, Z, Z, Sec. Hence it appears ^bat the pronunciation of this letter was difiê- rent from that of ». And thofe who pronounce it in this manner, and confequently give the fame Ibund to five or fix other vowels or diphthongs, viz. », v, v, o», t>, u», introduce a firange confufion into the Greek tongue ; as there are a great many words, which it would be then iropoifible to dillinguiih by the found. CHAP. IV, Of diphthongs, Diphthongs are formed of vowels joined together; the word is entirely Greek, doubk founding. They are generally reckoned twelve, which are divided into two claflTes j ßx proper, and fix im¬ proper. Rule II. Of diphthongs proper and improper. 1 1. proper diphthongs are oil, «?, a, svi, oT, o?. 2. Improper a, u, w, nil, m, v'l. Thefe diphthongs are often changed, refolved, or cut off, ' ExaM-Í 0/Letters anà Svllables. 7 Examples. The fix proper are, The fix improper, CCI MocT» Maid, » Thraffa. u itx Eia. . X ^hreßa. vi Tçotx u 'H^úíuí Heredes, XV xvpx Aura. 1 1 * ^ rp }■ ou iiuç e>oms. tv tvye Euge^ i ou oufo» urina, wu wutoî, for l «yrof, îpfe. Vi "Aç'ttvix Harpuia. Ail diphthongs end with a t or a u : hence thefe two vowels are called ¡uhjunPtive^ or following,, and the others prepofitive. 1. The proper-diphthongs are formed of « or of the two ihort vowels i and «, joined each with » and after- wardá with v. The Greeks call them íuiptovo», hnè fa¬ nantes^ becaufe they give the diftinét found of the two vowels. 2. The improper are derived from the proper, as may be fecn in the examples above : but there are two forts -, the one filent, uçmoiy viz. the three fubfcribed, f, IÍ, 0), which have a lurx written under them, only to (hew, that, áccording to the received opinion of the learned, it was no longer pronounced ; for which reafon fome have negledcd alio to fubfcribe it. They ufed however frequently to place it on the fide of capital letters,- as Ai, Hj, Xî«, though afterwards the cuftom prevailed of fubfcribing it to thefe, as well as to the fmaller letters. The others are called male fonanteSy v.xy.l>^moiy be¬ ing moré difficult to pronounce, efpecially nu and wu, by reafon of the long vowel before u. For as to the lail diphthong ui, it fecms to have been placed in this clafs, only to make an equality in the divifion ; fince it may well' pafs for a proper diphthong, as Ramus, Crantzius, and feveral others have ranked it. But it is never ufed except before a vowel, as Herodian the grammarian has obfeçved. 3. Thefe diphthongs are oftentimes changed, either the proper into improper, or vice verfa, according to the relation they bear to each other : or in fome - B 4. other 8 B O O K I. Other particivlar \yay, of which we lhall have occafiofl to Ipeak hereafter. They are often alfo refolved, whe¬ ther thç fubjundive, being marked with two points over'it, makes a feparate fyliable, as Wk for ■nraîç, puer-f Atnoi for A«Tor, Latona-, which is called diasrefis, or divifion : or whether the diphthong is changed into two fimple vowels according to its value, as m into n, or- into Í«, and the like. They aré alfo cut off-, either in part, loíing their prepofitive, as XttVw, linquo^ 'îxittov í (pivyu, fugio^. t(pv- yov ; or their fubjunélive, as xX«»w, xxúu, fl(o ; , color : or altogether, as ¿yu^u^ Att. con¬ grego. Which is fuificient to remark in general, in order to refer hereto what we ihall hereafter more particularly obferve. Pronunciation of proper diphthongs. The pronunciation of thefe diphthongs is almoft fufficiently ex- preiTed in the examples added to the rule. They mull have a double found, fo,as to make the ear diflinguifli two vowels, other- wife they are no longer diphthongs : but this Ihonld be all with the fame breath, and without dividing the voice ; otherwife they would I;)e two feparate vowels. All the vulgar languages have their diphthongs, where the dou¬ ble found is heard in the fame fyllable, without offending the ear, as in French payent, ciel, deux, beau, &c. Hence the Greek tongue ought not to be deprived of thofe which are peculiar to it. Of ay. The diphthong ai therefore requires both thefe letters to be founded, and not an open e, which would confound it with jj. The Romans, according to Quintilian, formerly pronounced this diphthong by an a, and •, in the- fame manner as the Greeks. The fame is likewife atteiled by Sclurus an ancient grammarian, who fays, that the Latins having borrowed this diphthong of the Greeks, and having afterwards changed it for .r, they ßill pro¬ nounced it in fuch a manner^ as to diftinguilh the two vowels. The authority of the poets, who divided aï into two fyllables, as Vir¬ gil in thefe genitives aulHi, piG'ài, Sec. is fufficient to prove, that the found of thofe two letters was diftinguiflied ip the diphthong, otherwife they could never have found an a and an t in the found of a fimple e. The interjection a», aî, being uled as an exprelTion of pain among the Greeks, as may be feen in Ariftophanes, Sophocles, Lucian, and others, has alfo the fame lignification in French, having retailed the fame found. . , Therefore Cy Letters and Stllables. 9 Therefore the right pronunciation of this diphthong is that fvhich has ftill remained in Maia, Graius, Naiades ; and which is pretty near the fame as in thefe French words," fayance, Mayence, payen, ayant. Sec. with this exception, that in French we hear fomething like a filent e. after this diphthong, for which reafon it never precedes a confonant, but has always after it another vowel ; whereas in Greek it is ufed indifcriminately, as well before vowels, as diphthongs, becaufe the » palTeth more nimbly, not in , the leaft partaking of the found of the French filent e : (o that to pronounce it exaftly, it is rcquifite to fuftain the «, and fini/h ihort upon the i, to the end that both letters may have their diilinâ found, as Quintilian bbferves, while they make but one fyllable. Of £1. Et was alfo pronounced by two vowels, and had a fuller found than iSr», Hermogenes, treating of the final cadence of periods, faith, that diphthongs and •vo'wels are generally graceful at the end of luords ; though to this rule It wrfx an exceptioh ; but if they ended luith a Jingle t, as that vowel rather clofes the mouth than fills it, the fenténce then has nothing fonorous or fuhlime. Whereby he manifeftly Ihews,, that though the found of It be lefs full than that of other diph¬ thongs, it is ftill however different from that of a fingle t, fince he m^kes fo particular a diftin¿tion between them. Of au and £u. The other diphthongs are eafy ; av was pronounced as in aurum, autem, only giving it a little more of the a, as iapradifed in fevcc ral provinces in France. Ariftophanes, to exptefs the barking of a dog, makes hiih fay au, aS : and this pronunciation fliould be obferved in IlaûXoç, as well as in Paulus, fince the. Greek word is borrowed of the Latin. Eu is pronounced as in euge, euchariflia, where the e is always founded a little. The opinion of thofe who pronounce lu as ef, a,v as af, is almoft univerfally exploded, not only becaufe there never was a diphthong compounded of a vowel and a confonant, but alfo becaufe there never was fuch a-letter as f\\\ the Greek alphabet. Befides, if the foregoing pronunciation were to ftand, we Ihould fay of inftead of ov i which would be quite ridiculous. Of ot and ou. ■ o» ought to be pronounced as in Oileus ; hoPior hei in Terence; juoi for cut in old authors; proinde,-of two.fyilables in Virgil, and fuch like. Ramus, who has been followed by feveral, fays, that it ought to be pronounced «s the French words moy, toy, foy. But the other pronunciation feems fofter, and more natural, and is , '^ore generally received. As for ou moft people feem to pronounce it tolerably well ; only the 0 ftiould be fuftained a little to produce the double found : " • otherwife lo B o o K î. otberwjfe ît woald have only the force of the Latin u, which was pronounced like ov with a Ample found. This diphthong cannot be better' reprefented to the ear than by the noife of things falling to the ground, pou. I C H A P. V. Of confortants. COnfonants are letters that cannot form a found, unlefs they be joined to vowels. They are divided into mutes, (apwv«) liquids or immutables, (Jyçà «/*£- Tagox«) and double confonants, (ííttA«) ; to which we may add 2. Tbefe according to their rank are eajtly exchanged .for one another. Examples. I. The mutes I 2 3 TT X r £ JL T

therefore ought not to be pronounced like a fimple f, becaufey' has no afpiration. Quintiiian remarks, that Cicero rallied a Greek, who nfed to pronounce Fundanius like ^undaniuf, v\z, Pfhundaniue according to Lipfius, or rather Fhundanius according to Sylburgius. Pronunciation ofß. The pronunciation of ß, which was formerly controverted, fe- veral faying vita inftead of heta, feems now to be univerfally agreed to ; and what has been already mentioned concerning m, is fuiiicient to eftablilh it. ' The old Syrians called it alfo heta, whereas the Hebrews gave it the name of heth. And the ancient Greeks ufed to write heta with an f, whence the Latins have taken only the ñrñ fyilable he. Which made Aufonius fay : Dividium heta, monofyllahum Italicum B, Therefore if the Greeks had pronounced vita, or even hita with an i, the Romans in all appearance would have been to blame not to follow the fame denomination of this letter. Nor will it avail to objeft, that they have fometimes ufed ß in¬ ftead of V confonant, as for Severus ; for this is ho proof that ß was pronounced like , 1» burn: but then it is no longer a t final, becaufe the particle unites into one word : nor is it a r pronounced like a /t, but a real ft; though produced by the change of t, which cannot remain in thç fame word before thefe letters : concerning which fee what \s fur¬ ther: obferved in the fixth book, chap. z. R u l e V. Of double letters, and the letter n Z4; as we fee in the order of books in the Iliad, and elfewhere. The artificial manner is twofold : one by all the letters divided according to their claffes ; the other by fome particular letters. The divifion of letters by clalfes is threefold. The firft is of the digit number or of units : this is done by the eight firft letters with this other character r, which is put in the iixth place to fignify 6, and IS called ETTio^^xoy Fúev, or only. The fécond is of tens, which is done by the eight following letters with this charadler q or which is put in the ninth place to fignify 90, and is called KÍieit». The third clafs is of hundreds, containing the eight lall letters with this other figure which they put alio in the ninth place to fignify 900 ; and they called it fanpi, becaufe it is made of a Jtgma inverted with a w in the middle. Thefe numerical figures may be reprefented thus according to t^eir claffes. I. Units. II. Tens. III. Hundreds. A a' I. I 10. 100. B ß' 2. K a 20. 2 ff 200. T y' 3- A X' 30- T T 300. A ^ 4* M 40. T xf 400. E ¿ 5- N / 50. ^ Ç 500. / r 6. S r 60. ^ X T 4^' 600. z Ç' 7- 0,0- 70. 700. H TÍ 8. n IC 80. il Ú 800. ô y 9- q i 90. ib 900. Thefe letters are all marked with a Ihort ilroke over them : bitt to fignify a thoufand, and fo on, the firoke is put underneath : fo that ec fignifies a thoufand, /3^ two thoufand : in like manner fignifieth ten thoufand ; a hundred thoufand, and fo on. . As for the combination of thefe numbers, there is no difKculty< in it: for inftance, if you put <«, this makes 11 : xß', zz : Xy, 3 .1 • i®4' And if you put aé, with a ilroke under the firfl letter, and another over the lall, this makes 1005, See. Thus ax'* inakes the year 1655. But it will not be amifs to give here a par¬ ticular table of the combination of numbers. Tahlf Of Letters and Syllasles; Table of the combination of numbers. "5 P a ßi y' 2 3 4 5 r V 6 7 «' Ô' 8 9 i lO / X 20 X' 3® / 40 / 1/ 50 r 60 / 6 70 t V 80 i' 90 I» II XX ZI Xaí 5\ jxx 41 / 5' 0« 61 f occ 7\ 'Tid 81 / 91 iß' ly IZ 12 0/ / xp xy zz 23 Xß' Xy' 32- 33 /*ß /w.y 4Z 43 vß' vy 52 53 62 63 oß' oy' 72 73 Trß' Try' 82 83 # 92 '93 l£ 100. 200. 300. 400. iSf 14 15 XÍ' XÍ 24 25 XÍ' Xl 34 35 jl*J' [AS 44 45 >i' vé 54 55 64 65 OlT 0£ 74, 75 ttS^ ttí 84 85 0" ii 94 95 500. 600. 9 ?C •Ô' •r i»i 16 17 18 typ Hr w 26 27 28 Xf' X^ X>i 36 37 38 39 jxr /AH' /Äff" 46 47 48 typ pr PÇ pn 5^/ 57^ 58 Hh 66 67 68 69 or' oti, 0Ô' 76 77 78 79 ttt' Trii ttÔ' 86 87 83 89 ir il iv 4»' 96 97 98 99 700. 800. 900. 1000» ip' w' '9, xft' 29 XÔ' 49 ►Ô' 59, ed' a. The manner of computing by particular letters, is done by thefe fix capitals, I, n, A, H, X, M, each denoting the number of which it forms the initial letter. Thus I fignifies one, becaufe it is taken from ío, which was ufed for una, f , n fignifies five, becaufe it comçs from «r/m, quinqué. A ftands for ten, as coming from if*«, decern. H denotes a hundred, becaufe as it flood formerly for an afpi- ration, it was the initial letter of the word HEKATON, etntum. X denotes a thoufand by reafon of mille, M fignifies ten thoufand, becaufe-of decies mille. And all thefe letters inay be four times doubled (excepting cr, which is never doubled) or multiplied with the refl to form all numbers whatever ; as 11, 2. Ill, 3. IUI, 4. AA, zo. AAA, 30 AAAA, 40. Thus AX, II. AAI, 21. All, 6. AH, iç, &C. But if thefe very letters are inclofed in a great n (excepting r, which is never inclofed, bccaufe an unit cannot be multiplied) this denotes that the number of the letter inclofed, is to be repeated five times. Thus 1a1 is five times ten, viz. 50. lal five times a hundred. j6 B O O K I. \ _ hundred, viz. 500. IjÍ five times a thoufand, viz. 5000, &c. And in the fame manner to combine IaIi, 51. IaIu, 55. I^Ia, 6oi and fo on. ' ' ' , 4^^ i 4*4*4*4^4^4^4*4*4*4'4' 4*4*4*4*4*44* 4*4*^4*4*44'4^ CHAP. VII. Of fyllahles in general. AF T 'E R. having treated of letters, we proceed now to fylJ lables. The word fyllahle cómes from the Greek o-vMafer», to ajftmhle or put together: confequently it is a jun£tion,of two Or more letters. Ncverthelefs there are not only fyllables, but.even intire words of a fingle letter, as in . Latin i, go, the imperative of ei\ and in Greek, S, j&íV,. the mafculine article, fifr. ' Syllables therefore may be divided into fimple and compound : thefimple is that which confifteth of a fingle letter, viz. a vowelj as in the examples above cited : the compound is that which in» eludes two or more letters, fuch as diphthongs, or confonants join¬ ed to vowels or diphthongs, whether the confonant beginneth or endeth thè fyllable. Upon which we*have a few obfervations tO make. . 1. A fyllable in Greek may begin with two confonants, as mittq : or even with three (which cannot happen ih the Hebrew) as rçàyl, gutta. 2. But the fame confonant repeated cannot commence a fylla¬ ble in Greek ; as it can in the Hebrew. %. An afpirate never ends a fyllable : hence it is, that when ¿is doubled in the middle of a word, the former is pronounced with a fmooth breathing, becaufe it finiihes the preceding fyllable. 4. The fame afpirate is never doubled in the fame word, be- taufe in that cafe they muft either both commente the fübfequent fyllable, contrary to tjje fécond obfervation ; or the former mult cn^ the preceding fyllable, contrary to the third. 5. In the putting of fyllables together, the ufual method is fot thofe confonants which can be joined ih the beginning of a word, to be joined alfo in the middle, as e-6yoç, tiaiioti, in the fame man¬ ner as Byiia-icu, to dye. But concerning this I refer the" reader td the trèatife of letters in the Latin method, thap. I4I n. 13. 6. When two mutes commence a fyllable, they muft either be both fmooth, as rirvTr-rott, njerberatUs ejl, and not TÎrv-Çrcci, though it comes from rÎTvÇn, nierheravi : or both intermediate, as /ioj, feptimuf, and ndt îttÎci^oç, though it be derived from íitti, /eptem-, or elfe they muft be both alpirates, as nctwith^ ftanding that the grammarians deduce it from rí-rv-ma.. 7. The mutes of theîaft rank t, í, S, are never placed before the reft. Thus for inftance, we fay tÍxto, parió, and not r'rtaù, though it comes from rixa, and * remains the charaiteriftic; on the contrary we fay «ríjrw, cado, not though it be de¬ rived 0/LettersSyllablES." iy hved from 'xEe acute accent may be on one or other of the three laß fyllableíy whether Jhorty or long. ft he circumflex is only upon a long fyllahlcy which muß be either the laß, or laß but one. , The grave is never but on the laß fyllabky and when another word follows in a fentencCy inßead of an acute. Examples. The accents in Greek, as well as in Latin, cannot be removed further from the laft fyllable than to the antepenúltima. 1. The acute may be placed upon one or other of the three laft lyllables, whether that which receives it be long or ihort; and if the laft of all be ihort, the accent is generally on the antepenultinia j on the contrary,, if it be long, the antepenúltima,- generally fpeaking, cannot be accented. 2. The circumflex is never upon any other fyllable than the laft, or laft but one, which muft. always be long by nature. The grave is only on the laft fyllable, and when an- cther word follows in a fcntence, inftead of an acute. ANNO- Öf íétrtiKS Und ¿vit'ABtEsi ANNOTATION. The grave accent is only a deprefiîon'of the voice. Therefore^ as after having railed the voice upon a lyllable, it mud necelTarily iink upon thofe that follow ; ' thefe fyllables are called grave or harytms, though they be not marked with this accent : for the grave accent is never marked but when another word follows in a fentence, on oxytem or words acutcd on the lad, as &tát ; which in that cafe do change their acute into grave, as ©eo« i/jiSv, Deui noßer, to Ihew that we muft not raife the lad fy liable ; btherwife it would bear upon the following word, and produce the fame efieñ as that of enclitics, namely to be joined to the preceding word. CyBkEATHING Si . The grammarians call breathing (frvcvf*«) the ditfe-i rent force of the voice in pronouncing; Thefe breathings are twofold 5 one weak and fmooth; sl/tAov, which is hgured like a fmall comnia over a word, thus iycu, ego. The other ftrong and rough, íao-tÍ, which is ihaped like a fmall thus fimul. Every vowel in the beginning of a word is marked with one of thefe breathings. The vowel « has always the rough breathing, íi'íwf, aqua : the others commonly the fmooth, as we ihall more particularly obferve in the laft book; » But the mark of the fmooth breathing feems to be quite unneceiT^ry, fince where there is not a rough breathing, we muft fuppofe a fmooth. ANNOTATION. Formerly H was the mark of afpiration among the Greeks, as it is ftill in Latin. For they wrote HEKATON inftead of iKaTon, and IIH, KH, TM, for p, x* And thofe breathings which now ob¬ tain, are the remains of this H, which being fplit into two, the hrd part was ufed for the rough breathing, and the fécond for the fmooth, .as we fee them marked in ancient copies. And in pro- cefs of time thefe two demi-figures came to be rounded a little, to form thofe we now make ufe of c, s. The ancients put the afpiration fometimes in the middle of words, mitis, jud as we ufe an H, in the Latin mibi. CHAP. '20 BOOK I; CHAP.' IX. Of the change^ addition^ and catting off of fylîahîesl Syllables admit of different changes, which gram¬ marians comprize under certain figures, whofc names it will almoft fufficc here to explain, becaufe we ihall fee examples of them hereafter in different places J though we intend to treat of them more am|)ly in the ninth book, in the chapter of poetical licences, as they are moil commonly ufed by poets. Mutation or metathesis, |üt£T«óí(r»?, is a tranfpo- fition of letters or fyllables, as «VíftíVia for aVfífío-«», infinita : for audacia. So in Latin decus from xUJfif : cito from rx-xß ' meus from £/aoç : regó from : parvus from waîif o?, whence alfo is derived tHe French word .* «xóAxÓaf, in French, laquais, quaji Xaxosöaj, &C, Addition or pleonasm, vXeovx^rjMoç, is in the begin¬ ning, the. middle, or the end. ^ That in the beginning is called prosthesis, zr^éo' 6s(nç, as ßxioy, nSxiiy, paululunt : tlxotn, UÍkoti, vi' gin ti : and in Latin natus, gnatus. See. That in the middle, epenthesis, IwévÔîo-k : «yw, ?yo», nyotíovj egi : in Latin relligio for religio. That in the end, paragoge, Tsrafaywyii : A«ya»f, Xóyoi for iixv9oi', veni or vénérant : exdn^Biv for íkxtÍ' çu^iv, atrinque: in Latin amarit for amaverit : palto for Pulfito, Ter. &c. In the end it is called apocope, «Troxo-B-«, as iaxju for iaxfuoi/, lachryma: r¡>é, ad if/um: cçoaya, produce. 2. In other particular circumllances, as to avoid an unpleafant found, an obfcurity, or other like inconveniency, which muft be learned by praftice. The Ionics even affeft this meeting of vowels, without ufingtheapollrophe: whereto we muft refer thefe examples in fcripture. W) l»t, Luc. xv. 7. for Ip' ; ever one. Kara dnoxá- Rom. xvi. 25. and Gal. ii, 2. according to thé revelation % and fuch like. Sometimes an apoftrophe takes place, without any concourfe of vowels ; as craf ©ey for sraçà ©£«, apud Deum, &C. Rule IX. That inftead of ufing an apoftrophe, the two,words are drawn into one. The two vowels are fometimes united by crafts and com- pofition. Examples. The two vowels which meet at the end of one word, and at the beginning of .another, are fometimes united by crafis, and then there refaits but one compound of the two words ; as lypju.«», lyZS», for e'y<5 otft-xi, ego puto, lyù olöx, ego novi • for jtnî tíl^u, non invenero} 0/Lett£rs and Syllables,' invetîero *, wçikiyov, inílead of wgo i^you, ex re,, cpera pretium^ -bt^o ¿Xi'you, paulo ante., &c. ANNOTATION. This union is frequently made between the conjunâion and the following word : and if the word begins with an a. or an e, the crafis is made in » fomerimes fubfcribed, and fometimes not, as »¿iuta. or nxhuct, for X; et iaigua : xxya and xx¡a,oÍ, , for iyu, et ego ; »cj tfeoi, et mihi : kxxsTioí for UeTtoí, et ille : xxxtT for ixtT, et illic : thus xxx, xx<;, xx», xxiri, are ufed inllead of x^ Ix, x^ if, it, and i?rt : but xxt Hands for x^ xt, etfi. Before the diphthong », the contraAion is always in x fubfcrib* ed, as xa^x for x^ eTt«, deittde. But before o, the contra£tion is in ; and if there be an oe, it is then in tf fubfcribed ; asxùro* fori^ oTro», AriHoph. etviiitm- But xùtot comes from x^ itot, et afinum. If the fubfequent fyllable begins with a rough vowel, x is changed into for the reafon abovementioned ; as for x^ OTE, et quod ; e¿ oto?, et ut. This crafis is alfo very common with the mafculine and neuter articles, as atñpairoí, for ô ¿t¡i^, uir ; ó xt9(u7roí, homo : rúp' X'otot, for to àpxdiov, antiquum : túuvíx»*»' for to ¿/awe'p^oeo», indu¬ mentum. . But with this neuter article, o and x are fometimes contra£led in Of, contrary to the common courfe of contra£lion ; as tu^Ao, TupSfot, for to aWio, alterum, to x^&^ot, articulut : and fometimes a fyncope is ufed inílead of a crafis. as rxrxipo^ot, for to xvx^opot, veäis, hajulus : rx^v^tet, for to x^yú^iot, argentum, See. We find alfo in the plural Tâ^^l9í, Ta'^p^ara, for rx xMdv, vera, rx oÊ^;(oeê», áníiqua. Sec. 'O ETEgof, alter, admits of a particular kind of crafis ; foj* though Herodotus hath ovts^oí in the mafculine, and SxTtpot in the neuter« neverthelefs vye generally fay «te^oí in the mafculine, and ^xre^t in the neuter. And fo in the genitive Sxri^u, the dative dxrs- ^a, in the plural Sóóte^oe, alteri : and ^¿re^x, altera. The remainr der both fingular and plural is feldom contraâed. Whoever has a mind to fee this fubje£l more amply difcuíTed, piay read Sjlhurgius, page 279, &c. R U l e X. ( Of V added to words ending in s or i. When words end in t or », they often require v to he added. , Examples. The Greeks have ftill another method of avoiding the concourfe of vowels, which is, by adding a » to the end of words, efpecially if they terminate in t or » ; as for inftance, sÉxoo-ev avígs?, Demofth. viginti viri : 26 BOOK I. XástriV) j) uXXoiç ri(r\v àyçioiÇf Galen. UoflîbnSt Vtl ûUtt quibufpiam agreftibus. uroivrxTrairn) »yxficni Plato, prer* Jus admit or ^ ífíwxí» «utw, ipß dedit^ &c. ANNOTATION. It is for this famereafon that the compounds of the particle «dà take a », when another vowel comes after it, as a»a|ioç for ««1% unvjorthy ; «»óíWt for «óJi»;, me that has no teeth. And that the ne« gative particle », non, takes a *, when a vowel fblloweth, »* I nevBa/jitiv, Hom. non vidi, non audivi. But if the vowel that follows be afpirated, inftead of a * you muft take a x* í»í«»e, «on plt^ eehat ; by the fame analogy as that explained above when treating of the apoftrophe. This » is moreover added by the Attics to the end of the three perfons of verbs in », and in (,'even when a confonant follows; TusrW»», or íTv^et t5to», they firike, or he has flruck him, Whéreís the lonians, inftead of adding^this », cot off the t or t final, to avoid this meeting of vowels ; titrer ¿vros, they beat bins ; which agteei with the rule of apoftrophe abovementioned. ^his is nearly all that appears vjorthy of confideration in treating ^ letters. Thofe who have a mindfor more, may fee the treatife of letters in the Latin method. But as the changes of letters are the firfl founia. tion of dialeSs, I have infested hère an alphabetical lift of them ; ex* traQed chiefly from Caninius, and illuftrated with familiar exa^pm^ taken from the Latin and French tongues. CHA] A lift of the letters ivith th A. V * A e A comes from the Hebrew alepb, as much as to fay ; or rather from the old Syriac alpha. It is put for E, fjiiyi6tt. Ion. /aîyor- flof, magmtudo : turro ! ëyuyt, iyárya, Pindar, egomet. erriete», /Pol. intrha,- retro, where moreover the » is cut. off. Thus in French cÚvo-k, alhure, in- tejjut. It is alfo put for H, efpecially among the ¿S.(A. and Dor. fifta, whence the Latin fama is derived : fo wXnyv, OBXa/yi, plaga í ftnxarh, /uupjar», (»<*- ehíua : /uArnf, /tárrp, mater. For, as Quintilian obferveth, the Latins have particularly affeâed to follow thefe two dialeâs. Hereto we may refer the refolution which the poets make of n into so,, as ñyiv, iiyrn, fraSius fum, &c. A is likewife ufä for O among the Dor. èix.oo-1, tmart, viginti. Thus the Latins from ¿(npiv have taken ara- XII. ir moß conßderable cbangesi tram, though with a long a ; fri)/*i, dico, .parif, dicendus, Cometh fateor, I confefs ; from yiufcft gußabilU, taken from ysiopcai, to taße, (omtd 0/Letters anà Syllables." /lomes guß» ! and ia-Xsy», Jicere, xíyttt ßiiih, and thence hqútr. The French alfo cut ofF », as from ppotheca, louiioug. The poets (ometimes infert it in the iniddle ; ereXai^;, unAavfi;, janitor ¡ táfanrot, nêfiaroç, ctrnu t (MViixti, fiti- jnaÓHnf, manica, a ileeve : fjomem, fgrm- e-nm, ^ol. whencç comes mufarum: »{««»J "viJgre, They alfo cut it oflT; ya^anro^óyot, yXaaToipáj/oi, yai laiig viílUant : íxi- e-Of, tXffítt, profeSus. So from ßa\a- scîw comes buneum : from enaXá/Mi, f^ma : firom yáX»f, ghs s and in French from compaganus, compagnon, 'Arà, tunk, mafci, and ¿(a, fre¬ quently lote their » final j àf, ita<¡ue, igUur, tttique, nempe ¡ âv, cum, màf, whence cometh the Latin per. Hence alfo is it, that their final vowel is fubjeft to feveral changes in compo- fition, as ve ihaU obferv« in the fourth hook. ' Birr« comes from the Hebrew ieti, pc from the old Syriac betia. The \£ol, ufe it inftead of A ; îeX- 6sX<)>rvsc, dolpbtnt! HXsap, ¿tXe«p, and by fyncope and crafis, ßköf, efca. Thus from iit comes bis, twice r from duellum, bellum, M is changed into ß ; imçofjtilr, Isri- .r«C»r, ealumniari. Thus from Jcam- num comes fcabellum: from marmor, the French word marbre. So from yucXf, mcl, pcoxiriet, comes BxÎtIûo, mel 'ex favit auf ero: from comes ߣ(pui^, mui, ßvjpuuui, whence for- 'ptica, &c. B is infrrted after /e. in words form¬ ed by fyncope ¡ yccfjooe, nuptia t ya- f »(»ft yaftCfiJf, gener, fponjus ; ftian- pufia, ftionpcipa, meridies s onfufis/xó- ^risu, or wafofufsiixnue, woffit/JiXuice, adefl, manßt. Where there is more¬ over a change of » into tu, and a fyn¬ cope of « in wet^¿ : [aíXo/juu, (usjutxs- fwu, f*tfg(XefMi, euro : ñ/uafrsf, è/jc- Cfmc, peccaßi. Thus the Latins fay tomburo, for conuro ; and in French thambre from camera i nombre from nu- pterus, ice. The Pamphylians ufed to put ß be¬ fore all vowels, which praftice prc- ^iled alfo among the Cretans yd La¬ cedaemonians : ^uwc, dxiCoc, lumen, lux : atXtof, ßaüXioe, fol t àoSsne, ßtvdaoe, ßoridus, where the a is alio changed into «. The i£ol. never ufed to put ß before E, but when the fucceeding fyllable had *> K> or t; (ànoe, ßfäxoi, pannus •viüs, veßis lacera s firTr,¡, ßfurig, ¿abe^ na, ßagellum. ráfífxei, Ion. gemma, from the He¬ brew gimd, or from the old Syriac gamla, ■ The Attics put it for B; ß^Agete, ylhAgm, pttlcgium : ßkcpdfa, pxé^fa, palpebra. Thus the French of rubut have made rouge, of rabies, rage. The Bwotians on the contrary y ßa- míf, for ytnttíKtc, mulleres ; wheqe msreover an g is fubftituted for ni. It is alfo ufed inftead of A ; u^iyuen, for laiflihjov, verum, bonum, placiium, idoneum. Thus in French from man- dere, manger ; rodere, ronger i viridi- arium, verger: and the-Ital. dinrnum, giorno. Somewhat akin to this is the change the French made of d into j confonant, dies, jour j by reafon of tire likenefs between it and g in their, way of pronouncing. The Attics put it for A} (uóxir, (uóyif, vix, tandem, agre: thus from pûtKXm comes magis j froth rtyiet, ßleo, _ r is alfo added: yXkfuM, l/pput, from Xnjug, lippituda : yvi^, nubee, from yipot, nubilum. Thus in Latin, natus, gnatus ; navus, 'gnavus : and ia French ranunculus, grenouille: rinxare, grincer r vadum, gué for vé, whence the Normans ftill fay, U grand vé, le petit vé : vejpa, guefpe. It is alfo cut off J ydia., dut, terrât iyùi, Bœot. là) for whence the Ita¬ lians have taken their io, the Spaniards JO, and the Freitch fr. < A. AéXt« from, the Hebrew daletb, or deletb, whence deleta, and by fyncope delta i or from the old Syriac delta. It is put for r ; yyó^oi, iyópof, caligo : yö, ií, terra s i iày, that is to fay, ¿ ftd rvv yñv, non per terram. Thus front yXvxti; comes dulcís, and in French from jüngere, joindre, from fulgur, foudre, &c. It is alfo put for Z ; Zsu;, Asù;, piter, whence cometh Aiof, Jovis -, un- lefs you have a. mind to derive it from He : caprea. The Spar¬ tans and Boeotians double it.in the room of the faid Ç j. ftíl», jwiîJa, majfa fari¬ nácea t 28 BOOK I. ruttttt! XfWî«, itiJigro : x®?"» X«iiw> cedo. For X; ie-fih, odor :'ifffjin, ¡3- fetOf fcimus ; xexw/usvo;, Horn, xexsí* fjííioij Find, inßruiius. For N ; tÉiv«, í£o1. vina, and thence tendo. It is added ¡ Sai, pluo, tiaif, plwv'ia : Vtai, 'btho, Jons : ¿vipcç, «viçiç, viri. Thus from prorjum comes prodes ; and in French from tener, tendre ; from eitleres, cendres, tec. It is alfo omitted ; 3sm;, áivsj, gravit, wehemens s fiíMÜot, feóXiiot, plumbum i siáSioe, cadusa For b, is alfo changed into L ; 'Oivmiit, ./Eol. 'fivTe-svç, Vlyjfes s noXi/îïùxnç, Pollux, quafi Pol- dux : tañf, levir for dcvir t táxfum, la- fhryma. 'E>jt(Xè/, E ftort. • It is put for A ; Tsrs-xp«, riaas^a, Ioñ> quatuor ; xÉpxx,. xÉpEx, cornua ; tha, eTte, poßea, adbuc, nonne \ SaXoç, iVtt. Zshoç, vitrum ; tifinç, a£ol. «pÉToi, rebur, vis, potentia. And in the plural paffive by adding vj ^eyó/esisv, for Myófxsia, dicimur, tec. Thus from TáXarrov comes takntum ; from mando, cotr.mendo', from ävra, ante} from eoéXX», or elfe from ßiXkai, pello ; and in French from SXj, fal, du fei. For H; tV«-»v for Sc-«-»v, orÏTli-y, mi¬ nor} whence iaaioo fox Iio-fóco, vinco s vrtyèfienç, a£ol. nrEvôÉe-e-Bf, lugehis ; iann- 6èf, èsTiEÔif, Janus, illafus. Thus in Latin from xpemj, iîSf, comes trepida, and trepido} from ftntu, medeor, and remedium. For o ; ôîsvtéf, ^ol. éîotteî, dentis : «ïtîyi), itùra, dolor. Thus from fiyóx, rigeo : yón, genu : Wfooto^vx, propero. And in Latin vortices, vertices, tec. It is added ; tr,( for îç, mißßi ; ñvht- »E»,, ÉívíavEV, placuit i táoriíoii, JEoi. iiâorstov, folum. Thus in French from fpiritus, ejprit j from fpero, efperer, tec. Alfo in the middle; fxuaUt, Ion. fxuaim, mufarum, tec. from xevÈç, comes xEVEs;, vacuus } from ypafetioi, Xft^ífE- »ef, utens, tec. Which is more ufual among poets; ycsHeßeci, ejfe : fesfevicnro, recordatus eß : &EEiáir, laBíte, comedo ; from /arâ, mina ; from âWot, alius ; from yaví, navis ; from ráim;, nauta, navita. It is alfo added to prepolitions either, at the beginning or end, as l>, sir, Ivi, livi, in, per. Which happens even tq compounds ; ' imitoe, cempitalis ¡ in- ytgdua, leviter vulnero. Thus from wpij comes etr^ori. Dor, for wpocri, ad, ab, apud. Sec, And in Homer wot!, calling off p. This prepolition is frequently in ufe among the Dor. but in compofition it, lofeth i, when anothen vowel follows, as wo'raioror from worianrov for wjóo-- aivov, perJona, vultus, fpecies s fo, wo- vdyo) foe Wforiyx, adduce, admoveo,. admit tot wowpoi for wpovopiö, afpicio, objervo : woridsi in Theoc. for wotiti- flii,' that is wpovTiflsTi or wpo»TÍ9ti, from viBioo, a, appone, compone, imputa. With the article it lofeth i, and makes but one word of two wot7ü for wot! t£, in Head of. wpoj t5, per , hunc : wotIov for wfôç tJv, ad hunc s esTorlàt for wpo; t»y, ad banc ; vrorià/c for wps; -rie, ad bos : wofiù;, ad bas s ' 'wo-i7à, ad bcec. From ¿oro comes ¿oro!, Nicander, d, ab, ex, de, from voto, ¿ora!, Hom. à, ab, Jub ; s being changed into a, before the addition of i. As of w^o the Latins have not only made pro, but alfo pree : for ine^iXyty, Jupereminebat i vTtú^oype, excellent, I 13 alfo added to pronouns ; arv;, irotri, biet to datives plural; Tióyoi;, Xóyota-tv, fermonibus : to participles in the firll aor. rùjaç, tù^hç, qui verbe- ravit í to impariíyÚabic nouns in iong 3<ï BOOK í. at ; fiÍKatf fiíXai;, «igf •' to the accu- iatiees ef the plural feminine in a«; frudentes ; and then they agree in terminatiin with the dative plural VjijWipaif, Jponfas, et Jponfa i to advetba, ñr, nvi, nunc, &c. . I is often left out in the diphthongs ; xeiw, futa, uro : fet¬ ten, major ; woti, •anS>, facto : Ttrjá- feuto;, TET^d/ucjof, guadripartUus. Thus in Latin audaciter, audaBer ; calidum, ealdum ; ¡amina, lamna ; &c. Alfo at the end of words, /asAt, aie/; lr>> ef, &c. Kftffw«, kappa, from the Hebrew tap or caph, or rather from the old Syriac kappa. It is pronounced every where, as in French or in Fngliih e before a. The Ionics put K for n in relatives, and interrogatives J wi;, x»;; iV»f, oxtût, quomodo : etrji, xñ, yud ; wia-oç, xóntj ^uanlus, &c. So, enAt^a, tri¬ pudio, for attiffa, . , Thus in Latin from e-mvflíj comes JcintiOa for fpintUIa^ from katiru, y.tf/t- w(u, Mfijráya, cometk limfuo. So in French from rupet comes rocker, the c, which is all one as x, taking an af- piration. On the contrary we meet with II for K ; wva/xot for uiiaptet, faba. As in Latin luput is derived from Xúxoc ; Jeput from X«yiw?J and mapalia from^ magalia ; for y being akin to x, is fub' jcÀ to the fame change. The Dorics put it for T in fome ad¬ verbs ; woTt, mina, quando : ¿XXoTEj •iXXoxa, interdum, alibi ; . tÓte, toxs, whence tunc : fo from tÍí comes quit in Latin J and from turma, ciurma in Italian. It is fometimes added, as in verbs derived from the future ; à^Éew, xai, placeo : and elfewhere among the poets, '/(*'?> vehicttlum, rota, funis : Cita, Sloia, Find, guando. It is cut off; tmixniJfu, aí^n/ta, gloria, jaBantia. Thus in Latin, , xd- Wfof, aper s n^ixoç, JE.o\. ,tî>moç, talis. it is alfa added to prevent an hiatus ¡ for fen ïn, ose amplias ¡ .as in Xatinßcubiioxß ubi., A. AiftÇî», .from the.Hebrew.Aíjbcí/, or 1Ú1C ^!íií%^úacdambdíi. The Attics put it for ♦ 5 títjW, nltrum ; etnsúpuoY, wlttiftwy, whencl the Latins have uken pubno. Thus áífíoXÍfl, igncrantia, comes from a pri¬ vative, and tfyfuv, ovot, perirus t teeyt- Xoc, nuper natus, from noynç. Thus from w/Mpti comes the Latin lympba^ from Tliyo^fMt comes Palermo a city in Sicily ; from NaùtraxToç, Lepanto 1 town in Achaia ; and from erevixn, the French ^ersyae. M. MÜ, according to the Ionics |uS, froM the Hebrew mem, or from the old Syriac me, the vowel being changed in all prs- bability for no other end than to agree with the following letter ñ. The x£olians ufe it for n ; msdS, ¡Jtarñ, pejfundo, lado, ambulo t vta63ra, /tadSfit, fupplicio affeBa, Thus in. Latin from ümot cmvm» fommts for fopnus. It is added ; ¡xk, vebsculumt htypti^a, lingo. The poetl double it J ipiadev, l/xpu>6sv, didieitt ¡iy.s~t, JEoi. d/upce;, nos. See the pro-, nouns in the following book, "Afst, Mars. It is fometimes rejefled; púa,, ib,, una ; puptSpcai, imitor, for mimitar Í. attifootaiy, fcipio, a flaff. N3, from the Hebrew nun, which has not changed its name either among the ancient or modern Syrians. The Dor. ufe it for a, when there follows a T or a â J uXÔov, nsÖov, venií 0é\Ttreç, ßtnffot, optmus s g>l\ráltt, tfívTÓlo!, amiciffimus, í gúmt, auriga s Pind. IxÉXsra, xÉvro, jubebait Alemán. síXeto, eXct», Irr», and adding y, yéno, cepit. The people of Crete ufed it for I, whence cometh 1» for it, in, Iv ad chorum : and afterwards changing e into I, ir for 1?, ir X> hecaufe it fupplies then the place of V| as vXi^oiAaty taXáy^a/uaty array erraba: Od. o. arXíyy^jeduSus aß, Od. a. maXtftar>^tt,yy6inaíy iterum errantes ; where it is to he obferved that X is changed into x> hy reafon of the other afpirate s wXayfùv, icuncula aerea, from hrhMyw, fercujß : for comes from XiAnx«» fortitus Jum t or elfe from Xiyo), xéxsx's In like manner /* is added inftead of s before ß, ar,'^, +, f* j as 0¡ for ¿X4, tf«, another prefent is derived, wbofe aor. is ifov. _ The Latins vice verfa put x for f ; /uilfa, mucus. The old Attics ufed to change a- into f in the prepolition o-úv; aife/eayas, ^úfxfeaxas, cammilita : but this feems to have been difufed lince the time of Thucydides. The Dor. ufe the fame change in the futures and hrft aor. xXei'iu, dice, celebra, xXeiau, xXafw; xaSlau, xaSi^x, Ixádtfa, from xaSi^ai, /edea, inßdea. Thus from xXeI; comes xXáf, clavist from égvis, «{»ifj avis, ales, araculum, tec. The Ion. change two av into f; ttrak, hf»;» duplex. In like manner the Latins of wáaaaXa; have made paxillus ¡ of miaaa, fix, d;c. O. '0|úix^, little a, fo called to diftin- guilh it from the great «, amega. The -old Syrians called it at, and the ancient Creeks cv. It has a great affinity with a ; fta- malva: cgiras, çgàrae, JEol. exercitus ; b»«i, am, fupra, teCm So in Latin from iay-H, dama. It is ufed fbrsj \.eys¡, dica, Jíbuayes, dixit vgifeaa, ngafxiai, trema, times a igífX», 32 BOO cum, wayMÜftf*!»,. recurro, re' tido, reciprocot. I» Ulc-e manner in La- tinj pendo, pondue, pondero ¡ enritiv, 'libo, Jpondeo : iego, toga i and in French motte from meta ; eróte fi cm cretec. The JSjfA, ufe it for u, changing the impasifyllabic nouns into parifyllabic j erro(, amor ^ i(0(, ou, idem. And in other placet, 0¡a, bora ; and among the poets, iuçu^oi^ot, evçvgoçoç, fpachfus, capax, ampiue: to/joey, eamus, tor Xwfjiiy, Hom. &c. It is fometimes added to the begin¬ ning ; ¡Mogyyio), ¡¡¡Jtogyyiu, abßergo. Thus in Latin eu'Kiyui;, obliquue. It is alio inferted in the middle, 9^2, i^ou, video : ¿Xó», Od. s. for àx2, the imperat. of ¿Xáojuai, erro, palor: ívtógmoí, àvro' vi'jeyo!, per JefuJu: t í, lumen : u, tu, cujus, 11. ß. It is fometimes rejeíled by the Dor. 'AttuaiXaoi, 'AxuWxa; ; HimXcu;, KumXs; ; MtytXaoç, MtvÉXs; ; Aaohxn,, Aojóte. Thus the Latins of wvo; have made pus ; of poó^oc, mors ; of de novo, denuo ; of mopea, nomen ; of ômaâs, ^ pofi ; of i¡oúío, ruo j of ¡¡a/uyof, ramus ; of ¿xÉXXu, cello. And the x£ol. fay, éjus9iv, e-éSsr, fêsy, for sfiioäey, eéoêty, ïoBsy, of -the genitives i/jyio, río, to, formed by re- Iblution, inftead of ipi3, c3, u, met, tui, Jui, By the fame analogy it is that we fay, 'TÚtIe, fur, inflead of viuoit, n. TT", from the Hebrew pbe, of which with a daguejh.thcy make^e. The aïoiians ufe it fometimes for ft, J ijt-ftála, ontfara, oculi s fttr l/xS, • vrtT i/ttS, mecum : ftert^gopuu, wth¡- ¡(O/tat, pratereo, appello, quaro : ftt- tcL^aiOç, vtÉtifcioç, JuOlimis, volans. And fometimes for t j , e-rcXè, eTroXèy ßo/a, amiíJus ; erraXtis, cttoXe!;, mißus, puljus : 'FiTfatrrai, mur^avren, converjas eß : srÉvTt, vrifxm, quinqué ; t^ov tcrí/t-nói- CoXo XH'^'r y* babebant pree maní- bus haJsUia in quinqué cu/pides divifa, The people of Crete in like manner ufedto fay aorítío» for Ttatun, ßadium \ and "EnVvft," for tio-ea.^ti, quatuor. Thus in Latin from aríx"! comes /pi¬ ca ; from toZç, pave. And in French from tigaum, pignon df u;te mai/on. Several adverbs aflume a w to mark the interrogation j ó'flt, ubi, indefi¬ nitely j rnf&i, ubi, by interrogation : ef, ubi, indefinitely ; woX, quo, or ubi, ■by interrogation: n, ubi, quo, And K I. - i qua, or ea ratione, indefinitely J ■qua datione by interrogation, fignifyiag^ alfo quo: tSey, unde, ex quo loco, quare, indefinitely; utóisy, unde, quare, ill interrogation. Likewife feveral that are interrop tive, by calling off w, afliiming an afpirate, become relative s then re-afiuming their w with an 0 b^ote it, they return to be interrogative; •more, quando f on, qui f mors, qua^ do t vru, ubi ? S, cujus f ówS, ubi 7 etróSrv, unde f í$iy, quare ? ittiAtl, quá tora Ï tec, *FS, from the Hebrew refcb, or fion the old Syriac roe. It is often changed into a-, as we have obferved in the method of learning the Latin tongue. It is often reduplicated, but then the xËolians make a tranf- pofition, changing s into s ; niwfiM, xiott'f'fa, ßercuss ¿Miórfio;, ¿XXert^; alienus, and thence alter, F is fometimes loft; alax^f, eùr- j¿í»v, ifOí, turpis, ior, ijpmus : ff»^, fttiuiay, ice;, a moreover being changed into n, longus, ior, ißimus, ^'huS the Dor. fay e-xUntigot for axñnlgoy, Jcepfntm, and hence e-xijeflap^e; jSwiXrù;, rex jeep- trifer, in Hom. (tuuii; for piatgi;, par, vus ; •morí tor •mgof or mgorl, jtdt ftavtHy from ftiftfiu, capto, aar, a. è/uagnoy, infin. ptagireTt, /tamTy, Ion. ;i9xmEiv. In like manner the Latins of ¿^¡» make artusi of Xrxr^e'., leBus', of fitrgiu, metior ¡ of xrrTjaJKf, Centones, &c. and perhaps of irkg, at, J, iT-yfia, from the Hebrew fametb, The Dor. call it a-ky, according t» Herodotus. It is ufed fometimes by fyncope for J ; jhiftty, rii-ftiy, Jeiveramus, The Lacedxmonians ufed to put it forS; Gee;, ms';. In like manner the Athenians, àyutoi;, ¿yaaoç, bonus : So- ftiyk, exfttyk, crebro : as alfo the loi). ßubof, ßuFcoq, profundum, gurges : aid hence aCvao-oc, bottomhjs. Which moreover is a further proof of the relation we have fo often re¬ marked between a and the laft clafs of mutes. ' t It is ufed for »; îsX^iv, îtX.p!ç, del- phinus s /uèv, (t-àc, metißs, 1 be Ado, do th« fame.in regard to the infinitive; teii, 0/Letter s »« lifKt intelltgere : ytXctr, yé>Mt, riaere. And the Dorics dn the Arft ^erfon plural; ■Mofiuç, verieramutt ferpebamuu See the conjuga¬ tions, Book Iii. By the lame analogy, the people oi Crete ufed 3; for frt, erat t die; for ¿tcv, fempert /Jtit tot /uiv, quidemt xaXat for xoXnv, puUhram. And the Latins of eaXtw have made plutf of ar¿¡v, friut, tec. 2 is often added for greater emphafts ; as juguh, maSo, inmilo ! (xä, a/xü, queero ; fxígtca, ofxéf tie, video. The fame praiftice almoft obtained among the old Latins; for they ufed ßUtes for litet : ßlocum for locum, tec. And of si they made fi-, of sl/xi, fum. Sec. as the French of timbra have made fembre. On the contrary, the Ion.' and aSol. frequently rejeâed it; as fxi- X(t|, hederá, taxus.s vyutx^;, fxm^tç, parvus Í rueíÁ^v, utSá^ai, dißpo, di- fpergo s a-qiy, ^v, ßbi. A practice that has been fometimes followed by the J.atins ; 0-, fi. The people of Crete and Megara ufed to add it to the end of words; SiKote, îmahf, ad domums iyt, à-ytc, duc, age. And this perhaps may be the seafon of our faying in the imperative, ex}(> tetie : iorirxft, intende t &iî, pone ; (a, interim, aliquando ; îwe, tîmç, qvam- itiu, tamdiu s Sät, rißt, ubi, ib't ; Säet, riäey, unde, inde; n/xoe, rñfxoe, and rnfxüroe, quando, tune. And in French. amita, tante. It is alfo fometimes cut off; wójTíf; vií(te, vitula, juvenca t and bene# vriifte in Lycoph. Thus front wii^vio comes perna in Latjn, &(, t. 'YdiXh, little u, to diftinguiftl it from the Latin Í/, which Was fuller, •nd founded like the French diphthong ou. It was fometimes put for a, bat not very frequently ; rirroftei rirevgte, quatuor* t yTtáqtw, yXúpiv, fodio, fcalpo. Thus of íyuú\oef the Latins have mad'n uncus. Sometimes for t ; ¿fx^uOiwy, ifxqniCluiiy, qui circum-circa habitat ; r^t^á>Ma, rpi- ifáTteia, galea ires habens crifias. And often for « among the JEqU iyofxa, orv/xa, nomen t fxóyie, fxvyie, vix, agre, Sec, In like manner the Latins ot KofxáSee have mace Numida y of fioXQe, hulbus ; eise, Dcus, Sec, The people of Crete rejefling X, »fed frequently to fuhftitute an u; P èrouiinj 34 B Ó O ¿vKuir, iatejhnt! á>jú>, ¿tixij fubßiUum, The fame has been imi¬ tated by the French; alter, autre! jllvernia, Auvergne, &c. The poets cafting off ir ufe án o; < dyaMç, íyawe, pulcher, fpkndidus : mutyeç, àuUyae, refina«!, tumu/tuofus. We read alfo in HeAod> xavá^a«; for xarafate, confregerU ; from tuSiytufM, rejefting the t, and affuming an v. The Ionics often infert an u after an e ; JMfoç, *oû{oç, ßlius, puer, juvenil, mat, germen, ramus! ¡ge(, ment. Thus of oroXihraç, multipet, fijéis, tu-_ berculum in nare, the Attics make •arwXvsr«;, and the Ion. and Dor. ntú- Äwree. -1 —velf/ti Balbinum polypus Agnee. Hor. In like manner impetuofus, libidintfus, from bogZ, terrear, Jana, turro : iXo/ehn, ov\optm, peßifera, noxia ! OKufjivot, Oiikvfjixoe, Olympus, a moun¬ tain of Theffaly. T is added to fome verbs, in order to form derivatives ; m\r/ia>, vrtoSiai, ple¬ xus fum, farcin, intumefco : imo, sorwo, or changing e into v, ñorúx, and accord¬ ing to the Dor, ¿nvx, Jubeo, clamo, T is alfo fometimes cut off ; «iXAs- srowf, às'xXojrof, velox ! àfristouf, á¡Tí- neof, valent pedibus. In the fame man¬ ner, îiVc», hipes : t¿wro», tripes. Sec. So from aoXaJ comes aXaf, fulcus, and ¿Xaxí^íu, Juico, aro ; as in Latin from vravgev comes par um-, from waujóvwíj, parumper. Sec- «>. /b>'h ot phi, viz, a p afpirated, or at leaft an half p, to foften the let¬ ter a little, becaufe of the roughnefs of the afpiration, which mutt abfolutely be expreffed. Befides the change of this mute into its correfponding letters, as we have Ihewn above, Chap. v. and which niay be obferved here in the word «-.piv, ' from whence comes ßbi, the zEol. moreover ufed

.iw, armilla, V being equivalent to wc, probably âj, retro, rurjus, poßbac, is derivé from iviaas, by cutting off t and et, and by changing afterwards o into a. As from e-q»:, by metathefîs, comes ^rí, and according to the Dorics and from thence ipje, a, urn. It is fometimes dropped ; -^äpeputi âi*f!.eç, arena, littut, SI, "Slfjtsyei, 0 magnum, to diftinguilh it from the little o, micron. It . is fometimes formed of eand s; as ó lyi, âryta, Theocrit. ego, qui ! ri hiufia, Att. Toîvîv/ua, Dor. -rônh/fjta, amicius. See above, Chap. xL Rule iz. Thus of Marci pueri, Publii pueri, they ufed formerly to make Marci, pores, Publipores, to lignify the Haves or fervants 'of Publius and Marcus, &c. The poets change fometimes a into w in the circumflex verbs in ax ; hiio, hZJix, pubefco. The Bceot. praftifed the fame on other occaflons ; ¡¿¡x/esroç, incipiens ; à^sçoc, optimus ; x^içoq. Thus in Latin from àgx, and àfZfnai, comes oro. The Ionics change on- into ei ; ßsiau, ßiiaa, clamabo. In like manner from HI privative and my.a, is derived laívu- ¡OLO;, objcurus, ignobiits. The poets change e into u, irt the firft of bprytons, of which they make circumflex verbs in »« ; rgiorx, rga- orix, S, verto : viym, vu/aáx, i, divi¬ do, Sec, In' like manner from ta\ix comet vcT.'Jiix, navigo, though a baryton; and) 0/Letters and Svelables.' and in the opinion of fome, from fiu, ^'¡B, ßuo. In circumflex verbs in «w,they change • into a J Ha, íáts, iiieftiv, do, damus : jfia, ^áa. 11. e. facto irafci, ftruium rcddo, moleßo. The Ion. and Dor. change s into a ; &, £r, igilur, certe : ßihf ßxi, bovem ¡ ßuet, ßaäi, hohut, &c. - H is often changed into a, to make a fuller found y vihaca, 'aßaaca, for"^ anido : ^n^a, -^á^a, rado, ßringo, per- mulcto : (i¡ynfM, frango', U(a*a,fr«í}ut fum. The old Attics ufed to infert this letter; i^íaiía, dimiß; ¿¡6a, tXaßa, and îaBa, confuevi. Sometimes it is cut off by fyncope; àtriraOtr, ômcBiy, retro, pone ; erjwiiV] mrpiv, and Dor. «¡ív, paulo ante. The Latins have done the fame; uofim, eornix ; or elfe they add an a, as in fxir^a, matrix. From à>àmn% comes vulpes ; for the .^olians added a digamma to it, FaXú- «raf; of which it is proper we take fome notice. Of tht jEoUc digamma. The ^o1. having no rough breath¬ ing, invented another charafter, which they called digamma, from its^flgure, refembling that of two gammas, one over the other, thus, F. From whence the Latins have tiken their great F, 25 which they even ufed inflead of v con- fonant, when there followed a a vowel; as ferFut, DaFus, See. Hence the a6Eoliañs ufed to write FriVve, vinum: Fewrija, vejperat Fs- Helena, See. Hefychius therefore is miflaken in writing lèverai words with a y, which fltould be written with a digamma ; as yiXKii, yi for ôriç aSu ; Jub->^deacon,. for fubdeacon. Thè Greeks call it ¿fît, /uhunio, to unite under., becaufe it ufed to. be put under the words. But inllead of the latter, we often make ufe of the former fmall ilroke between two words, fuh-deacon, &c. The Greeks alfo make ufe of a couchant line, to mark a long fyllable, as in Latin ; likewife for a mark of abbreviation, as Gt, 0tèf, Deus. And for a mark of things taken materially, as to », this letter Zi tS ß, ef this letter ß ; to n/rgoj, this word n/rgoí. 3. Of proper names. The fame mark was alfo' employed in the i6th century for proper names, which they afterwards diftinguiflied from one an¬ other by the addition of certain points. For whereas the ancients never made any difference betwixt thefe and other wofds ; the Ve¬ netian-and Paris printers were the 'firft who devifed to put a fingle line over proper names of men, women, or animals, and their de¬ rivatives, as óíva-a-tví, XJlyßis. To put a line and a point over it, as a mark of the names of • • different people and cations, as Greece ; ÍMufc;, the Greeh, ^ I * * To put this fame line and two points for mountains, as .im, a lion. And fo for the reft. 4. 0/ dialogues and pointing. It is proper alfo to remark, that with refpeñ to dialogues, the perfonages are not only diftinguifhed by putting their names, but likewife by the letters of the alphabet, efpecially where there are but two: A denoting the firft, and B the fécond. But as for pointing, fince it tends more particularly to prevent obfcurity and confufion in fpeech, we fhall treat of it in the in- troduâion to fyntax. Book VII. CHAP. I Letters cv^nnec ted'or a/dretna£ed. ^ii/ öy —"f V ccvToa -/ pa.y A 'As A yitv ^tjv 'yViTeU P*" )uv yvv J^v d a.y 5 ti 't' tiya.1 JMj , HtvdmJtjy 34«?, ¿P'./kx. <^, df. dio,df (i'uv,dïs.dt>e,dos ¿v,iv- ty it iTTtO 'fh. étf?/ (L'.L^.ei'.ei'j U.Uv. tj. t¡r 3iou/, 0a.v tí/ 3^,^. 6tj ,3üv, â/fv âr.ây S'or^. 'Wyov "Tni TTVl Çf-.O' ^ po Qt, ett. ^ct,a7i ffTtf fftw --¿r ^ Ceco etKPitc (T^, (TÛ c^xxj, o«9^. cúeíi ç^lw. fffijy o3l ffiO.G. a>co. al) öV. oTfv ; cccnx, o ^u/a. auttf ffwvtt axni^ S''mnv CUft? ó'Ufíf ew V crZTV O^JO. <>- -77^. cy (jUF T, o'yjfv C«' 7W Tott TtUS Tctp TCtS Tetpéa. re ; lÎw. Ty-rijp çO). -rqs h.nr. h, Tt 3 . 'Ty T •— T* P' ■m. )i, TTDfTiÎ tO^ '^P' ' BOOK II. ' ' « OF WORDS: AND FIRST OF NOUNS, CHAP. I. Definition and divifton of a word, F T E R having treated of letters and fylla- » A ^ bles in the foregoing book, we now come to A word is a found, that fignifieth fomething. The Greek grammarians make eight different forts, which they call parts of fpeech, viz. article, öpoi/ i noun, ouo[*,a ; pronoun, ¿vruwy.í» \ verb, pvfjt-x ; parti¬ ciple, fAtro^ri i adverb, ÈTr/pptjj!*« ; prepofition, zr^ô9e J» f ** eu> > cu uf tut «î» « 3 Í!» 3 . 3 ^ /Aao-a» ^ufa^ tÎÎç /«»(Tllf, T« &c. *H TI/*«, honor., tÎÎç ti[A7¡í, tÏ Tíjuy, t«» Tii*f¡v, 8cc, StSüAXa, KTXI'XAÚS, tjutt«, »IÇ, TJ/UXX«, DÎ, pukx, x«x- i¿€x, perdix, xóxXo^, ÍMctXXa, £uXax«, n?, votner, Tía, })ç, S'üfXXa, Dç, florm, tempefi, tóx/*«, »f, boîdnefs, rajb'. nefs, dtXKx, fit, Sícurx. . 3. Thofe in a pure (that is, where a makes a fyl- lable by itfelf, without being joined to a çonibnant) or ending in fx, ^x, ^x, retain x in all cafes of the lingular number i as, Í ^Xix^ atnicitia, tÇî çiXixt, rv fixíx. See. 9) Aííía, Leda, rîiç'Aiiiaf, rñ Arií», Scc, v xxxv9x, fpina, tÜí xxxi/9xt, ry xxxp9¡c. í «j!*é^a, dies, tÎÎç ^fi.î^xt, T« ANIíOTATION. 'Afiigr«, Pallas ; Nkví'ixk, Naußcai', and ju«£, mina, retain alio a in the genitive and dative, because they are formed by con« tradtion from nouns in » puve : Kxtvcxcía, fctá». . (QíhXx, ^htcla, makes alfo ®ác9i.«r, and <0ixAa. It « nú improper to oh/erve here, that this analogy fetmt the maß natural for all nouns in x, hecaufe this votuel does not love to quit its ßtuation. We find al/o in Jo/ephus 'PáxqX», at. We might even give it as a general rule for nouns fuhfiantivt, fince the termination in x pure is confiderahly the tnofl numerous of nouns ending in X. But 'OS there -are a vafi maty participles, vihith forming their feminine in x, follovj the oiher analogy, by making nt in the genitive, and ti in the dative, nue have preferred this laft for the general rule. the ancient -Latins ufed to fellonu this manner of declining in etc ; vohence terras for terrse ; cfcas/sr cfcs ; Latonasyâr Latons ; pa¬ terfamilias for paterfaxnilias : the latter remains fiill in ufe. Rule IV. Of mafculines^ in AS, or in HS, -of which the gram-" fnarians make the firft declenfion of fimple nouns. J. AS, HS, have OS in the genitive 1 2. And S4 ' B o o k II. 0/ Nouns; , ■ . 2, jínd cafi off f in the vocative. In the other cafes AS follows j ^nd HS follows TifAtj. Examples. 1. Thefe nouns being mafculinc» follow the mafcu.*' line article in the genitive, by making ov : but in the other cafes they are declined like the feminine article, with this exception, that thofe in aç retain « in the fin- gular, in the fame manner as and the others abovementioned. 2. Thefe nouns alfo rejeft í in the vocative,' and are declined thus : S. ó 'Aiíí^£«f, AndreaSf 5 'A»iíf£«, tS 'Ac^^es, tw 'Aví^ífl TOI/ 'AI/Í^E«!/. D. TcS and u'AvâçteCf ro7v *Avi^tonv. ' P. 0» and u 'Ai/i^tKtf TWO 'AvS^tuvy roTç *Av$^ioiiÇi tí»{ 'Ai/JjjÉaç. S. 0 Xfu latrOf &c. ANNOTATION. ' Alveicn is poetical, as alfo 'AvSgtia?, •which Nottnus has ttftd, to fem the tneafure of his Podes» accoriisig to Gaxa. Hereto, it Jiems, nue Jbould alfo refer the ditninutives its vf, nuhith lofe t in the genitive i as ó K»ftv(, rS Kafjiv, rf Ka/*v, ros Kei¡á¡t, Camylus : ô Àtonç, Bacchulus : S Kh»v nultima. The dative plural is in p;, lon^ and often aflames an i final, ia the fame manner as the mafculines in o;, whereof prefently : the fame happens alfo to certain local nouns, which are taken for ad¬ verbs, as ©íSjííTE, Thebis : \ 'ABisna-i, rithenis : and even to thefe, without changing «>. The Ion. form the accufative plural from their Angular, by adding $ ; iiricina;, hrorórexf, deminos, &C. The JEol. and Dor. form their accufative in for ÍS'ftt;, Jedes. Which may be feen all at one view, in the following table. Table of'the ßrß par ify liable declenßon, nuit h its dialeäs. Singular. Nom. « Jon. n »Der. a sielon.tit ntD.uf Voc. OS the nomina¬ tive. s Ion, D Iii n Dor, a { Geoit. fome¬ times «f '&>eD. I ao Mol. ■ fts Ion, Dat. p fome¬ times D. 9 . ID. Ut o». I PL ot, m, ei( di, S Xoyoç, fermo, u xóyj, tS yJhyoVt va %áya, von P^yo», &C. i ô^èf, via, u ief, Tvf óíS, vy éíy, vîif ¿Soy, See, S i homo, a vë vv! ¿yBgúvs, Scc. ANNOTATION. ancient Greeks, before the nevo orthography derived from tU Samians, ufed to write in the genitive vi PJiyo, in the dative voT Asyot. For Longus andfeveral other grammarians attefl, that they wrote o fit s, this being its name, as we have mentioned in the method of learm^ the Latin tongue, and oi for u, whence the Latins came to fay quoi/i the dative. And there is fill to be feen at Rome, on the two Farnefin columns, EN TEI HOAOI TBI AHniAI, EN TCI HEPOAO AFPOI, for III vn iiy vy 'Airir'ny, I» va 'H^úiov iy^à, and the like. We find . Aíya, without a i fubfcrihed, according to the Aiolict and Dorics', whence the Latins have taken their dative in o long, domino, Ific, Rule VIII. Of neuter liouns in ON. ON, following the neuter article^ has three cafes ftr- fe£lly like in every number : Which in the plural terminate in ». Examples. Nouns in ov are neuter, and follow the neutet* àrti« de, having always three cafes plerfedly like, the no¬ minative, vocative, and accufative, which in the plural terminate Of ParistllaBics în.ui and m. 49 terminate in as in Latin. They are therefore de¬ clined thus : N.V.A. O. N.r.A. D.Ah. yf N.V.A. €. D. Ab. S. Qt, oVf. If. I D. ^ u, Ott. I P. », at, oí;, tí lignum, t3 ra Sec, Rule IX. The Attic manner of declining, which grammarians call the fourth declenfion of fimple nouns. I. ^he Attics ufe wç, un, for oç, ov, and in all cafes they put an tt, fubfcribing the i wherever they find it : They likewife make the vocative . .the fame as the nominative. examples. 1. The Attics follow a particular manner of de¬ clining certain nouns, which is to change all the vowels or diphthongs of the preceding terminations, and even the tt, of the neuter plural, into w, fubfcribing the ^ ' wherever they find it. 2. They likewife make the vocative the fame as the nominative, as well here, as every where elfe. Thefe nouns are declined thus : N.r. C. D.Ab. Ac. Sing. 4>ç, a. ot, -0". at, for the neuter nouns, S popultts, rë At«, ra Xta, rot >jiut, TO ivytm, fertile, t5 tvyea, ra eSyia, ScC. ■i aXui, area, rñf ocKa, rj¡ r>¡¥ óÓKat, &C. Nouns in «< that have » long in the penúltima, change it here into t -, as ¡-«¿ç, mvç, templum : A««?, Muí, populus. But if a. be ihort, it continues -, as xâAoç, rudens, koíkus : r»oí, pavo, T«wy ; Aayàf, îepus^ Aflsywî. ANNOTATION. There is ope neuter noun in aq, viz. to xi^íaq, áehitum, rë X^sa i though TO x^sàt, rë x^ta, is nlíb uTed. We likewife meet with TO ¿yñea in Philo, ienä expert : -ú iwtvP^tu, in Plutarch, pU N.y, D.Ab.X N.y. G. D. D. a, ft. I PI. a, at, wq, a, I Ac. aq, aq, ft ■enum. » The Attics often rejeñ » in the accufative, as in thefe five JDOunsp i 'Aiuq, rot "A^a, mount Atbos; ñ euq, rn» oa, aurçra : ? Kf« E 50 B o o K II. 0/ N o u N s. t>)» Ktiiij tht ißt' of Ceçs : i xayù;, to» Itpus • »i kôîç, tí» k«# the ifle of Cos : to» 0tô» »'at«, Deum propitium, as in St. Gregory. Hence it is, that the neuters in o» lofe their » in the common tongue; a».o, aliud: rii>^niSTo, Jantum, tarn grande natu: toíSto,^ tale : toctöt», tantum : as alfo the article ó, and fome pronouns : of which hereafter. But many of thefe nouns are alfo written with a » ; as toibto», too-Sto», &c. to» i&uv, Herod, to» fMyùr, Plut, and others in the fame manner. ^ The common tongue has Ibmetimes aíFe£ted to Atticize,, by forming the vocative like the nominative ; ¿ irof, beus tu : u&tkî whence comes the Latin ó Deus, &c. The Latins have likewife imitated this Attic form of declining, by faying Lethum Androgeot'V'vg, ad TTtontem jîtho, Liv. Ego qui- dem fum Pauli, ego vero Apollo, I Cor. i. where Apollo is a geni¬ tive from the nominative 'ATroXAÙç, and the fame may be faid of the reñ. See the Latin method. Ohfervations on the dialers. The Ionics make the genitive in oio; xóy», Aóyoio. The Dorics change u into u, not on/y'in the genitive lingular, but alfo in the accufative plural; Ta^óyw, tù? Ao'yw;. But fometimes they ufe only an omicron, ^ôyoç ; and this termination agrees with that of the nominative, ó ^ôyoç, and may be moreover an Attic vocative. bj aoyoç, The genitive and dative dual afiiime an » beforè » ; ^óyot». ^óyoii». The Ionics add alfo a » to the dative plural, fof- ?iôyo»ç. as if it came from the lingular., Aóyoto. Tujyo». The poets add fometimes an o to the Attic genitive, t3 MevO^ia, MmXcuo; and fometimes they fubfcribe the u ; tS mí»«. MÍ»wo. or mí»«o, as if it came from the lingular, MÍ»ijk>. All which may be feen at one view in the following table. fable of the fécond parijyllahic declenßon, \ voith its dialeQs. Singular. N, Vocat. «5 D. Ac. 0Ç. At. &Î ■ »», J ov " 1 Ion. ] I 040 [ Dor. 1 " i « J ^ ■} 1 . f '■•J ] Dual* N. A. G. D. 0»»' a < Plural. |N. G. o> D. Ac. ov( Ol( J «çD. Ion. \ 0Ç Sjr ^ OiO-f "f 0>f J to Con- 0/Pa risiíllabics../;; jwj and m. Contracted Nouns. 5» Thefe etmtrafted nouns are as eafy as the preceding, becaufe- iike them they are contraâed through all their cafes, without fuf-, fering fcarce any fort "of change in their termination, as the fol» lonäng table will make appear. . Zing. T)ual. Plur. 'ioç / tz B / L 00? ¿Z OU} a 000 ita íoiv \ \ ta oTsf / •a ¿6) ¿Ol¥ m im Îotç izí \ \ ^ . c7 m oTç cu; t i / / » 001 ¿m OQiÇ OZÇd E ÍC A M P L E Sa o »ooç, mens y t5 voa, j-s; tw v¿^ pw; to»" voovy »ovvy In like manner its compounds, i tDvtfoç, svte;, benevólus ; ô ¿yoo(, ámens, £¡fc. So ô póo^, foîç, fluxuS; à crAôoç,'wXoDç» navigatio ; ó x"®«» X"'"íf lanugo ; ó x^ôoç, %çat/ç, cutis, et corpus amiftum Cute, ^nd their compounds, as à ¡íaretppoOí, xcträppovi;, deíluxust ô xaT^ippooç, xstXip^vç, pulchrifluus, pulchra habeas fluenta, In the fame manner the adjeílives, i kiûlioi;, «wAovj, limplex j íiwxóo;, iiwAoDç, duplex. Their feminine follonus the coniraiiion of feminines, as nue fhall fee hereafter. ' ■ The neuter is contraSed in the fame manner as the mafcuJine, ex¬ cepting that, in the plural, of to, and oa. nve make », t» ôri», àr», efla ; rky^giao»-, ^^va», aurea, í¿c. But the 'Compounds do not contrci3 the three plural cafes in » ; for nve do not fay fura, hut ivtoaf benévola ; in like manner, xaWtppoa, pulchriflua ; tWxo«, navigatu facilia, l^c. Ensen in the genitive Use rather fay, \vwat, ivoc'kiu/, than ivyay, tvor^S,, tsfr. Ecr nuhich nve hanse the authority of Sylburgius, though this remark has efcaped Greifer, Mecjuot, and moß of the gramrdarians. £ a £«0;^ 52 B o o K II. 0/ N o ü N s: £àoç, falvas, is contraQed thus : « s'»'?, tot and to a-ooor, cut, falvuni, Ts{ cáov; and tat cáett, cZf, falvos et falvas : alio t» c¿a, c&, falva, tmhicb is hardly to he found any vshere but in Hejycb, and Suid. fbe remaining cafes are not contraQed. C H A P. V. Of the mparifyllabic declenfion, which grammarians caU the fifth of^ fimple nouns. » RULE X. Terminations of this declenfion. 1. Nouns of the imfiarifyllabic declenfion have^ nine different endings. 2. ^heir fingular increafe is in of, i, « ; I'heir dual terminates in £, oiv : The plural in tí, m, ÍT»ij, mater, 2  ^vyxrn^, filia, 2 ^vyxreg : v Avf/>VTt¡f, 2 A-n[jinrí¡ : where, for this very reaion, the accent is changed or drawn back. 3. To thefe four oxytons, or that have an acute on the laft ; T^xrii^, pater, 2 zj'xrs^ : ixriç, levir, mariti frater, 2 ixc^ : xuilç, vir, 2 xvsç : a-urri^, fervator, 2 ^oi,Çy tnifer, 5 rdxxv. But the oxytons conform to the general rule ; ¿ íji«?, kruffif vinculum^ 5 ¡(akç, &c. And the participles do the fame; íV«í, ßaris^ Z »Vaf, ANNOTATION. All the rules given here hy moß grammarians for the formation ef the vocative, are either falfe, or deficient ; probably from -their wanting to form it by the analogy of the genitive, which hath no relation to this cafe, either in the Greek, or Latin tongue, as we have made appear el/ewhere. For if you pretend with Clenardus and Cani' niOs, that noun's declined in tos or tros, form the vocative from the ge¬ nitive, by rejeSiing os or ros', this proves that IftMs, ¿tros, Jhould make ¿ l/^àt, whereas it makes a tfcxs, and the fame may be faid of the like fort, ; at alfo that KJÂifins, trros, fisould make KtSi/itt, whereas it makes K>¿¡At)s ; and the like in the fame manner. ' And to refirain this rule to barytons declinedin'atros, or otros, as Vojpus has done, would be making StvotpZt to have for its vocative a SitoÇot, whereas it is like the nominative : and Vloa-uiZt, utos (with uj to have 2 Tloa-it^St, whereas it has TlótrstSot, Jhort ; and 'KosoX- Xut, which is alfo declined with a, 'AoróxXuvos, to have 2- 'AoroXAon, whereas it has "AicoXAot. Wherefore I have comprixed all that was necejfary for praQice, in the few words of the rule, which are eafp to retain, and do fufiiciently point out fhe true analogy of this cafe ; intending to floew the application thereof in the examples. V " " ♦ " Ui* V ♦ 4> V " % V ♦ A ♦ V V ♦ ♦ ♦' V ' V 4> Vv V " '♦ W ♦ ♦ V * v vTr CHAP.. VI. Of the other cafes of the imparifyllabic declenfion. 'The formation of the genitive. TFJE genitive of this declenfion admits of a great variety of formations, which correfpond to thofe of the third of the Latins, terminating always in «?, as tbe Latins in is. We (hall range them here in their proper order, according to the final letters abovementioned. I. Thofe ending with a vowel. A ^ Genit. «toç ; ßnp.xros, gradus, tribunal. The names of letters are indeclinable; «Af», ^nrx, y¿¡i¡/.x, itXrx: even thofe of another termination, as ¡ív, pZ. Bat e, v, o, u, are declined, becanfe of the adjetive that goes with them. Ë 4. Nouns 54 B o o K II. 0/ N o u N s. in oxytons i v ¿víúv, lufciniat 5 driSov : n ytXiSùvy hi' rundoy S ;^£A»íév, without removing the accent. JI. By dropping the final ? of the nominative : which happens, 1. To nouns in tuf •, ßxo( : Ô waiàt, laatZyoç, paan, an hymn in Iicnour of J Apollo : TO ^(\ay, ayof, nigrum, atramentum, 1 œ»toç, for participles ; to ri^av, ectroi, which follow their L mafculine. EN ^ E,o{ : TO t/çe,, teçeeoç, tenerum. HN 5 [N < Eiroj : ó "EAA«», Gr ¡ecus : i o-e»^?,, 5,oç, ßren, a kind of Jnfe£l in Pliny, and the name of a fabulous woman. éjioç : ô ersifeu», eeoç, paflor : h çfi», e»oç, mens : o i igm, tvoç, mas : Ô i tiçn», »»o?, tener, teñera : agr,,, agnus, by fyncope makes àç>oî for a^svoi, according to Euftath, unlefs we choofe to derive it from i^, ¿^>o(. »»0Ç : ó htiÇit, tio(, delphin : ii ¿.xr)t, Ttoi;, radius', ô xj í Sli, IN j %im^, litut. The nominatives of thefe nouns frequently end in iç, as ÍEMpl?. f ovoç : TO oroç, majus j and all other neuters of nouns ON < in at. t oetof, for participles ; as to rbirlot, oetoç, verberans. CYN í iÎToioç, deriving it from iia-ovç, hipes. I ovtToç, for participles ; as to rw5t, Stro;, verberaiurum, f vtoi : 0 fíórvv, fsoavtoi, turris, prapugnaculum lignetsm : thofe 3 alio whole ending is in vt or vç j as o ^¿^xvç or C^ó^xvt, j vro(, Phorcys, the Jon of Neptune, and father of Medu/a, for participles ; to ^tvytlt, ¿.nç, jungens. Of the Genitive of Imparisyllabics. 57 ami : as ó xA»«* ramus : S alàr, edZsoi, tevum : IlAá» •tas, Plato : i iMKat, papavtr. otoi : Ô v^ias, wçioreç, ferra : i ô»«ç, hirundo ,* ô xj í ia'tfius, ami, daman, genius i i x^ttrrat, otoi, melsor, icvuvj cOBiS, makes kvk;, by fyncope, for ximt, asroi : ô SttoÇàt, Ztroi, Xenophon^ I2N arrai : i^ixat, artai, draco. In the fame manner the par¬ ticiples, ô rvdlas, osTOi, merherans ; ô rvatas, arrai, qui •verberavit, Likewife all other fécond aoriíls aflive. otrrToç i -tvitas, oSctoç, verberaturus. In the fame manner all other fécond futures aflive : and even the prefent of circumflex verbs coming from w or au : as ■maiZy, ai/nat, faciens : îiikS», orrai, manifeßans. açoî ; ¡íixa^, et^ai, beatus ,* to mxrcc^, a^at, neQar ; 4-«?» «jo?, ßurnus, a ñarling. «toç : to ?wasç, n'Unirai, jecur, hepar. In like manner to í/- AP 4 Aiooç, aoTOî, efca qua animalia capiuntur, illecebra : ría^, adeps: puteas. But the laft thyee are fometimes i contracted ; for we fay îîAîjtoç, mroi, (p^,roi, &c. f h retains g in verfe, making îà^uaprof. HP I n^oi : 5 ZÀf, n^oi. Ser, the name of a people ; alfo the lilk- worm : à f^orn^, aatïçoj, peluis : to îjoç, cor : ñ xng, xn^oi, fatum, fors. , í jo{ : i ctiôif, é|os, ather : à ânj, aër : i ¿rnç» ßella : à íang, le-vir^z hulhand's brother. Several are fyncopated in the genitive ; S eeafn^, pater, •aart^ai, ®-«Tjo{ : ô ótrn^, vir, àvéçoç, ¿»içoç, taking a Í, &c. EIP Í p^d'fulus : v X"?» manus : à ¿tyrix"§, \ pollex ; ô *J Í •aaXvx'^^^, multimanus. Ç ojoç : TO ?Toç, nToçoç, cor, animus. In like manner its com- . ( pound, o xj í jusyaXÍToíg, ojof, magnanimus. t "vjoí : "çoî» fufurro : ô xj i ¡/.á^rv^, ujoj, teßis : to œi>g, tfvçoç, ignis. f oijoç ; à çà^, Çoifoç, fur : à 'X"?» 'X"?®»» fanies tenuior, a le- Y rofity of blood r to eAwf, captura, prada. fiP < ojoî ; ô ogoç, Neßar : ô i änrärw^, áirára^oi, carens patre, j But víu^, aqua, makes vSaroc, as coming from vJa; : L and oxZ^, merda, makes o-xaro;. III. 'Thofe in ^ or ^ form the genitive, according to the power of their doubled letter : whereof 4' takes the firfi clafs of mutes, •cr, ß, tp : and g the fécond, "» y> X ». rxof : ¿ Sàçal, Swjosxi^, peäus, thorax : n xiÍAi|, xóXixo«, /or«- \ lum, calix : o xj í ¡jl¡.í^cí^, axoc, adolefcens : n í^^a-un^, ¿Kw S < TTfxoç, vulpes i changing v into s. I Some take a t with x,. making 4,xtoî : ô «»»I, ácaxTof, ff* ,•  rv|, »vxToij W*. S -yoi : B o O K. H. - Of. Nouws." is Tí rit?» »y®?» àtûdu'i malees Avy*oç* T, , > ' w'«» ,. .. put for 6, by reafon of the folJowing afpirate. «05 : s «WOÇ» ecu/us, vifiis t í >MÍh.et^, sMroj, precella} 0 KvxXa^f airo^f 'Cyclops. - ■ ßoii s "Açaf, "AçaSot, Arabs: i »^h, paluntbms V ^Xí4'» ifàî, veaäi po{ : Kiiv^, Kímfof, fluvius Africa : í kätSä»'}', -í?o^, cok' . ment fcaleu J V. Ifhofe ending in t generally take the laß clafs of mutes^ Tt St ^ i or elfe a y, Mobich fometi'mes retains the r along with it, making yr. And fometimes the ( of the nominative is rejeBedy and the genitive ends in Of pure} thuSy 'ciTof : TO «sToç, feneSus : to «Aa?, íXetrof, fal. «iToç : yíyotf» gi^ast yiyaiToç î ¿íí^iáfTof, fatua i o issai;, 'marros, osunis. ■ In like manner its compounds, a.nsa.i and cófiicact omnis, ' - J ecraf : ô (îÎTm^, f/.í7.otvact niger t ó T^oíf> «»oç, mifer. ií aSoi\ for the feminine, as ti fíotáí, ¡íatm^oí, monas, nnitas: . íMfiocíi, >Mf>.-7(á,iaq, lampas, lucerna or for the common, as Ô *J i (poyàç, Çoyâioç, escul, profugus, ' , aof : ôA£«f, lápis,'>Jiotai, and bycontraâion Xcóof< But thecon- traâed nominative A»;, makes its genitive in A<¿o; acuted. SMTOi : h Sasít Seurií, convivium t To rOítf, reiiT¿;, farista ajuá fubaíla. xiío; : ó xj i ««r?, puer, puella, mxiSoç. {xoíZ V y^avç, y^aoí, anus, •veiula : »«o;,, »où;, tsavis. Mu ttúí and yqtáíi and in the plural ttäv and y^im^ The Ionics fay mî/ç, moç (or by diaereñs v>iví) and in the plural - t^íí for tasf. But the accufative is »ao; for vá»:. ( SOÍ : for the neuter of nouns in vf i as to ¿Ai)$í{, rv ¿Aví»;, ' ¿ verum. ' ' ' revoí : ó xTílí, xrtvoí, peilen : iïç, Ivèç, anus. In like manner j icnSeii, ¿Ííií, nullus ; and other compounds. I iiToç : ó S»/x.ósK» 2»^Ó£»to{, Simois, a river óf Troy : i 'Otoik, í 'OwosvToç, Opus, Opuntis, a city of, Greece : ó pjaçitK» «'wç, venußus. Likewife the participles ; as TvpOeiç, (»rou vet' I lerattts. " / 1 etSoi : i kXs)í, clavis, xAeiS'o;, xAei^I, xAtr^'oc, and xAeÊî : (_ plur. xAeÎî, claves, Matth, xvi.- lg. 5 Eoç and 5oí, according to the Ionics, or EVf, according to ¿ the Attics; ó ßmnXevi, rS ßartXia:, ñof, tof, rex. f ijToç « a/Ê)!î, »foî, kbes : i irôrtç, firat,'veftis. ' In like manner 3 the feminine fubftaAtives derived of an adjeöive; as *axè{, I malus: i *a*ó,T»íí, vtoç, ««/;//«"f-ârfÊof, ¿ ¿f"»- (L T^îç, EjTof, urhanitas, Sec. . - ■ ' HS AIS ES Of the Genitive of Imparisyllabics. 59 fvurit 1.5 rtftSnroi, bonoreUus : íajinnf» ia^i^troí, laure- Iatus ; both contraâed from and ¡¡»ÇpÎpiî, iptoç, : ioAfMKi «Toî, Clemens: OiáXnt, trroi,/Fs^esu. And the like nouns borrowed from the Latin, which gene- Demoflhenes ; i Tgtvgvi, eoç, (riremii : everus et vera, iof : ó içtf, ioff ferpens : n » according to Lafcaris. itoç •. i 71 tÍ(, Ttroí, aliqais, quidam ; and ri;, riro;, quit, interrogative, fix'Of' ntrat. In the fame manner all neur' ~ f «K Í T» Tti^o;, rtixsB ^ 3 *®'" nouns in - J 9T0Ç : for the neater (, beravit. ' OYE^ neater participles, rh rrrvpcf, «ro;, qaod ver^ •00; : ô kj v ^5;, ßoof, hos : & X?^í, x3 xf'oîi tatis : S »5;, »oo;, - mens. ' ' erro; : ó 'ar^axs;, «r^«SHSl'To;, placenta : h 'Owe;, 'owsvto;, Opús^ Opantis ; which are nouns formed by contraâion. srro;: ô oSàc, re ¿¿'óvro;, irer ; and feveral participles, as . iórrof, qai dedit. o^o; :, wè;, rvo^o;, with its compounds, «iwe;, earettt pedihus, &c. e; makes oro;, ' ï^/junêof, ïumhricus» __ ( : ô ¡/Mxa-ç;, fíáxet^of, which is the fame as ¡aAko^, ¡»r \ xet^t, heatus. Rule XII. Nouns which form the accufative in v. Nouns ending in i{, vç, «u?, ou?, /f their, genitive U in Of pure^ make the accufative in v. Examples. We have already obferved, that the accufative is in «, as Tov Tirôivot. There are however feveral is V ; as nouns in »f, uf, «uf, ouc, when they make the genitive in of pure -, as ó of»ç, »of or rof, oçnv, ferpens: è jSoTçuf, racemuSy voç, w : ¿ ô^ùf, ¿^toç, è^ùi/, acutus: 91 voivç, vKoçy naviSy vowv : ßovç, ßéoç, ßovfy, hos. But fome of theiè end alfo in « ; too jSór^ua, h^íx, yíx, or vm, and particularly among the poets. From Atk Cometh alio A»a, fovem, ANNOTATION. Barytons (that is, nouns accented on the laft) in t; and v(, which do not form the genitive in o; pure, admit of both ter' minutions ; i ?^k» «Ío?, tjj» and íj»», lis, contentio : i oíoí, TO» ñriKu^cc and tiríKvv, qui recens advenit. Though the troe reafon of their having the termination in », is becauk the loniß declined them in oç pure : and thus they follow the fame rule as the reft. Among the nouns declined with a fyncope, thefc here, wariç, pater ; (kÎt-oç, mater ; 'venter, are never fyncopated in the accufative lingular, and frequently not even in the genitive or ac¬ cufative plural ; to» htxtîçx, rhy /x-xts^x, t»i» yari^cc, to diftinguifii them from h patria ; i ¡í-vt^x, matrix ; fi yár^x or yxr^i the telly of a bottle, or the ca'viiy of a ßoip or yoeßel. Rule Nom. ô Ttrà», D. S. Tw Tiràtif D. P. toT( TtrZa-t, OÇHÎ, ofn^u Of the Dative ^ Imparisyllabics.. 6i R v l e XIII. Of the dative plural. 1. The dative plural is formed of the ßngular^ hy . inferting 6(m, I ^som, I rv^otn, D. P. roTf rtdfTai, \ XAiiri. | rvTrlua-i.^ ANNOTATION. The red/on of this is, becaufe the penúltima of the dative plural ought never to he lefs in quantity than that of the ßngular. Infomueh, that if the latter ruas long by pofition, the pofition being taken aruay, the lofs of it muß be fupplied hy a diphthong. But if it ßould be a common voruel, as this may pafs for a long one of its orun nature, nothing is then inferted', for inßance, Aiam, Ar<%0->; ír»»T», trêuTt. And if it be ßort, it may continue fo in the plural, at ç^tt, menti, Ççw» ; or it is made long by poßtion, as ¡Axgrvfi, tefti, : ¿At, fall, ¿Acrt, &c. Rule XIV. Dative of nouns ending in a diphthong before or im ^ or \p. I. Nouns ending in a diphthong before q, of in 0, or form the dative plural, hy adding ♦ î 2. Thofe 6z Book: ÍL Of Notnís. ' " I 2. Tbofe which end in uf, and are fyncapated in ¿¿^ dining^ form their dative plural in «Vi. 1 Examples, ' ' - f. Nouns that have a diphthong before form their tfetive plural from the nominative fingular, by adding 1 ; thus, |3a(r»X£uf, (3«o-»X£U(r», rex : ßSc, hos : â^irx^iy rapax : "A^ctrp, "'Agaïf», Arabs.; ôcc. 2. But nouns in »f, that are fyncopatéd in declining^ form their dative plural in *««■», as zj-mrrl^y pater ; w«« nriqoci ■ararçoç, tw -brarf», to~? zrxT^úcrif patrihus. Ifl the fame manner, ¡jínT^cítrtt matrihus : filiO' bus : «»if «V», viris -, and fuch like; ANNOTA TJ ON. Which is •only a foftening ; hecau/e if of njue Jhould make v¿- Tga<7-», it nuottid ht too rough for the fame reafon^ if ¿çi»» «{»n/ otfi for ¿¡Í¥t, agnus, thej^ make ¿gycia-i. • Obfervations on the dialebis of imparifyllabîcs. There remains very little to obferve concerning the dialeâs dt this declenfion, after what has been faid in treating of the others. ' The poets ufe an apocope, or rejedtion, at the end of words,- and almoll in all cafes^ In the nominative in ; iw for iùjua; domusi . In the genitive of nouns in a« declined by «»raç, they cat off Toj; aíflíf, AîavToç and at«», jljacis: ©ô«ç, Qóatrrpi- and 0í«w Though Lafcaris is of opinion, that thefe cafes Ihould be al», ©ó», &C. I They call off the lail fyllable of thé dative, .terminating it flill in t after the apocope ; ©sn for Qénh, Thetidi.!- fodn for ¡Mísv/ir flagello : and fometimes ending it in a, under which they fubfcribe the I ; for- fudori : for MíXuit, Miloni : fo that, thefe nouns conform to the analogy of the parifyllabic declenfion. In the accufative, where there is generally an u after the apo^ cope ; 'AhoXSu for 'AwóWwwas, ApoUintm : iS'^ä for i^Zra, fudorem. In the vocative in at, from whence they leje^ the » j « AÎí}/» ïliçutXsnç» &c. bat appel, latives» fach as glofi^/ui^ ixfmit ingloritts, are declined like ADf*»^cv;, rex, rS ^otTtXto;, Dor. ßafftXtvff and ^ol. ß»r ^ for ßeto-tXiTf, reges : Mrtrîîç for tirweTf, équités, Sec, which is often to be met with in Thucydides. The Ion. form the dative plural in itiri, as ßcw^n(n, from their fingular in «>, ßaniSji ; in like manner vhvt, vUùç, vUi, victrt, filiusi i^ojÁivu eurfor. See. Nouns in sf; are often changed by the ^ol. and Dor. into wherein they have been followed by the Latins, as *Ax;tWkev{» 'A' Achilles. And hence it is, that fometimes they make the genitive Achillis, deriving it then from Achilles ; and fometimes Achillei, by contraâion Achilli, taking it then from Achilleus. In like manner lJlyJfs:s and Vlyffii, Mofts and Mess. Hence alfo it comes, that in the accufative they fay Per/ea and Per/en, See. But thefe fame nouns in x; are declined fometimes parifyllabically and fometimes imparifyllabically ; as », and £•;; Orpheus : and hence it is, that the Latins have feveral nouns of the firft and fifth declenfions. See thenew method of learning the Latin tongue. Lafcaris, lib. iii. enumerates fix or feven different genitives of nouns in tv; ; as 'AxlA^EO{„ in the common tongue ; Ax'WkÉwç, Att. 'a;i»i>iX?i)ç, according to the old Ionics; "a^iWis"«?» according to the new ; > with the accent on the antepe¬ núltima, according to the old ^ol. or "AxÍ^Aíkií. according to the new ; and 'A;i¿íaaio;, accprding to the Bœot. : fbr all which he produces different authorities. The Attics contraâ alfo the genitive and accufative fingular of nouns in £»; pure; as S x""^» tongius, an Attic meafure ; tS x"^"^* ' X®"? », v® x^"» X""' But then the accufative makes its contrac¬ tion into » ; to» jjo/flt, jjo« ; -S Xltí^c»sií, Pirceus t5 ntijam®»;» ûetgoitôi;; to» net^aué», üeigoua, &c. Rule ContraSîîèn «/ÍmpáííisVllabics. 67. Rvle XVII. Of feminines in and », which grammarians call the fourth of concra¿led nouns. J.- ConiraSîed feminines in «ç and make the ohliquei tn iii 01, », o>. 2. ti&e , and the i£ol. in Zt ; tv» xiiSs, Rule XVIII. Of neuters in «{ pure, or in f«ç, which grammarians make the fifth of conirafted nouns, in contrasting «j pari, or ç«ç, t muß be left out : ' , arh'en the genitives take », and the other cafes » : * And if you meet with a 1, you are to fubjcribe it. Examples* In declining thefe nouns, you muft firit call: off r, according to the Ion. after which the contraftion is formed into » in the three genitives ; and into « in the « other cafes : and you fubfcribe 1 in thofe cafes, that had it before thecontradion. Thus; ' T ^ Sin¿. 68 B o o K II. 0/ N o u N s Sing. to x^txiy caro : ra x^tetroçy xf É«eç, x^£«f tm Tí, Xf£Äi, Xfía. Dual. TW X^ÍKTÍy KçÎûtSy Xf£«: TO»/ X^tCtTOlVy XgCCtOlVy Xf£M». Flur. T« X^ixrXy X^iXXy xgix: TW» Xg£OiTW», X^SXUVy Xj9£«»; TOiÇ X^tXCl. Obfervations qn the contrañed nouns. We meet like wife with x^it by contraâion for x^íof, in TheO' critus. The Ion. put here an tin the penúltima in the place of the a; yt^ea for yi^xx, dona : xtgex, xc^xx, cornua : as may be feen in Herodotus. Moreover they ufe the Attic contrañion ; as in the fame author, *gea for xjttœ; whence the dative plural x^éetro-i, in verfe, for x^ixtxxu We fay likewife x^ixna-t and x^txtavti yi^xnat and yi^xttrat ; and fuch like. i Contrasted nouns that vary from the analogy of the preceding. Nouns in v;, vo;, are contraâed in the nominative, vocative, and nccufative plural, forming always their contraâion into » ; ¿ racemus, t5 ßor^vof : of and « ^ôtçvsç, raç ßor^vxf, ßoT^vf. In like manner »s*vç, mortuus : rxxo<;,/pica : ó Ix^Sí, pi/cis ; i içxuç, rttty &c. Nouns in o»; are alfo contraéled in thefe three plural cales ; Ô ßovi, tS ßooc, ios : o¡ and u jSós;, ßovi, r»; jSóa;, ßoili ; and among poets ßä( ; which, as ex makes u, would feem mod natural, were it not that the contraâion of the accufative ought always to be the fame as that of the nominative in imparifyllabics. Comparatives in q;, rS toi, Arißophanes ; to» 'Ajiro^á»q» : thus alfo to» Aq/*o£r9í»too and Aq/M^9f»q» ; ó hrorórví, dominus, to», ^tarc'orttt, and áicrorÓTq», t»{ Jic- sroTtoK and hrorórui, and fuch like. 'o ySí, ra ya, and ra »00;, mens ; ^torac, ra íííro^o; and ííirs, hipes. In the fame manner the other compounds of "» XÇ'"» idem : Xitoç, à, and Xk, Xtrè;, tenuis, ßmplex : whence cometh X»T» and x»T» ; XiTo» and xñ-at ; with feveral others. Frequently from ah imparifyllabic genitive is formed a nomi¬ native, which we decline parifyllabically : thus from f*.i^rvp rv^oi, comes ¡d^rv^oi, ¡ía^v^a, teßis ; from '4^»9v^o;, í 4^)90^0;, •^tóú^a, fyfurro. Thus from to íáx^v, rà íáx^vo;, cometh to íoó- xçvo», rà íotxjte, lacryma. In others the nominative is variouily changed ; as ô ¡cixap ¡ex- xx^of, heatus ; or ¡exxx^i, ¡exxx^roi ; or ¡exxx^iof, ¡exxx^ía. O Maerài, rà Muxà, and ô Mwtrsyç, rà Muxtut;. We fay alfo, Muvxài, Muvxtvî, Moyfis. To yó»v, genu, rà yóyvof. Or, by metatheiis, y8»oç, and rà yótxroc, whence comes the plural yótxrx, by epentheiis yáyxrx, and after¬ wards by fyncope yS»ç» jfÄiW» 'Ô ¡apis, t2 ^«aílç, and by crafis ácíoí } o tS Q| ^á» ; and s ?iàç, PiSoç ;- with feveral others of the like fort. The genitive of the fame noon foroetimes varies, though in the fame declenfion, as í x'k> poct*_ X*?®? » whence comes the dative plural, refîi genitive dual, tami Xe^oî'i'. Some take their cafes from different nominatives ; as 5 yvn, tnuUer, from í yvrail, obfolete ; t3{ yvrtuxèf, rv yvMixi, ntr yv- v»Ty.a, u yvvai, rejeâing the | of the nominative. In the fame manner as we fay fometimes ¿ ítet from rex, Thusaro lac, rëyxXxrot, and even rS yáXx, according tO £ufiáth. afliimes alfo t2 yœXaxros, from y«7uç|, obfolete; whence ceverthelefs comes the dative plural roTt Euftath. *0 Zííií, Jupiter, a Ztv, rS A'»t> vu Ah, tsv AÍ«, from Af;. ' For heretofoi e they ufed to fay. At;, Aio;í Euftath. And ZeÙ; made Ztvs in the acçufative, according to Polycrat. in the fame Euftath. pag. 1387. 24.. The.poets fay ajfo, i Zq», ri Zq>¿;, &c. or even ó Ziíc 01 Zà;, accufat. Zqv or Zar. And'the Boeotians, Asvç, Aq», and Aài>, Some neuters in «ç have the genitive in otro;, as if they came from nouns in a; ; ro Wxf, jecur, W«to;.* ro (with a fmooth ' breathing) ¿lies, taken from with an afpirate, according to .Euftath. TO Jiaj, ç/ra ; ro puteus', ro rt»f, adepsi to ísÁect¡, e/ca, illecebra ; to omx^, utilitas, cibi, petunia ; to uôx^, über, mamma in beßiis ; ro xá^qot|, caput. To which we rouft add alfo the fol* lowing in UÇ ; to Xuv and ftqxárav, pccorum, in Lycopbr. For the laft comes from yv>-ai, yroi, according to Euftath. As alfo «rgóc-un-a and wgoírán m»T», perfona fades ; whence •er^oa-oiotÍTUt and ea^oo'ú'ircíín, in Ho¬ mer : likewife ®-^o€«Toit and te^oSárt, pecudibus : x^boi; and xji* »£«•1, liliis : yi^ónToi; and yfjavi, Jenibus : vkSvyxToif and mxöiyaa-i, affcQionibui ; IRRSGULAR; affeBiomluti aad feveral others : in the fame majoner as the Latins My thmatis and tbmatibus., &c. And we may always feign fuch nominatives, though they are not to be found, in order to form the derivation of thefe cafes} £nce Apollon, lib. iL teacheth, that fuyôMç, woXv;, and yv- »«<1, though not ufed in the nominative, neverthelefs ought not to be confidered as altogether obfolete, becaufe they are to be met with in tha other cafes. Of defeSiive nouns. Some have-only the plural : not only the names of feßivals, as Libtralia ; or of cities, as at 7hehte ; t» Mtya^ap Megara ; which is common with the Latin: but alfo fome others; as Tiç, ¿XTinXai;, ¿MqAoi; ; • accufative, âxxqAaç, aMaO^a: which is rendered by the adverb inwcemt mutuo i or by the nouns alter, altera, alteram, alii, alios. Thele have neither genitive nor dative; rà corpus; to fulgor : to >.iifa<í, rupee, Promontorium: to \^oi, fsuevitas : ti o^eAo;, utilitas : to ß^iraf, ßmulacrum : to osa^,/omnium, , Others are indeclinable'in all their cafes ; as Hebrew and other foreign words; which até alfo indeclinable in Latinlikewife words ihortened by apocope ; ti ^2 for Säfta : ti xá^a or xàçn for ti xàçnvot, cáput : àù xá^a, tuo eapiti, Ëurip. and words lengthen¬ ed by paragoge, as stí^ípt for itiga, altera. But as thefe laß re¬ ceive fome alteration in their penúltima, it behoves us to be morç particular concerning them. Of indeclinaUe noms^ augmented hy or pt». Thefe nouns are to be met with in the parifyllabic and impari- iyllabic declenfions, and are indeclinable both in the Angular and plural. They are formed thus ; Parilyllabics in a change fometimes their »into n Ion. thé accent of the nominative remaining on the fame fyllable; pnly when it is upon the laft it becomes a circumAex, by reafon of » ; as Oi^atiapt, ârayxaivpi,' for Ov^a/ta, Urania, nv^a, nervus, àtayxata, veceßtas. In like manner the feminine participles in ; as ^astofiétrn^i, for ÇanfoiAsun, apparente, &c. Parilyllabics in o; or on, Arft rejeñ ( or v Anal, and the accent is en the penúltima ; as from r^atof, r^arópt, exereitus : from óríoí, ôrtoft, es, oßis'. in the fame manner the pronouns, '»¿to;, »¿to^i,^ spfe, which is alfo found for ipfas in Hom. Imparifyllabics in ot (which are always contrafled nouns) change 0 into t, and retain their accent. Thofe in at, and declined in ovro;, drop the ; of the genitive, and take ft, at the fame timé retaining their accent ; as ox'ît currus, e;^íTf t : xorvAtii«», ôsoçp (oxa, xotvMlifoft, &c, • . F 4 . ■ We ■yi BOOK II. 0/NbuNs; We meet alfo with from ficus, by changing^ A into 0. And for tiut, or pxvai, or ntvai, from >«£>; ; or, according to the Ion. and Dor. »t?;, navis, 'Egé€ítiikewiie for kv^Íí, from kv|, cor, &ç. Í *** '!■ 't' <' It' 't' ■> 'I' ■>'t' ♦ <' ♦ tvv«, tv : 6. SIE, vTx, .' 7. Hp, )tv. When adjetives admit of three terminations, o<: pure and §oi make a,, ov : i. ^¡l others in o? make 71, OV : Examples. i; Adjectives in or pure, or in çoî, form the feminine in X, and the neuter in ov ; as ó xyio^, ñ ¿yíx, to ¿lyiov, fanSîus, a, um : ¿ dvSv^oç, v dv9v§x, to «vÖhjov, floridas, a, um. ■ ' 2. The others in oç make the feminine in n i as xaXof, xaXiî, y.»úv, bonus, pulcher, a, urn : which happens alio to the following nouns, though in of pure -, ó oySooc, oyScri (and not ¿y^óx) obtavus, a, urn : «Vxóoj, ¿vxóri, flmplex, with the other compounds of arxôoç. But the Attics generally make the termination og of jthe common gender, efpecially in compounds and de¬ rivatives ; as 0' « WjUipiXof, TO 7¡sx¡s.(piXov, omnibuS amicus : 0 7^ n x¿^ « tí^jiv, To.Tíjtu, tener, a, um: riçnv feminine is fcarce to be found but among the grata, marians ; whereforè it is better to fay, n rí^up», as wc read it in Euripid. according to the preceding rule. * The common in ttç makes tç, and always belongs to the firft of contrafted nouns ; as o' v «x«9nr,' to «Au- Çif, verus. But t-hoie in ij: formed by contradion have three terminations. See above. _ * 2. The common in i;, makes t ^ ó 9^ »! ïup^x^iç, to Íu. Z^eitüs ; ó 1) fiXoTTctr^iç, TO (fiKónxf^i, ßudiojus ■patria. And thelë are generally compound nouns. The common in uj makes vyô n ¿ííxx^ví, ro aJ«xjV| non lacrymans i and generally thefe are,only compounds. 3. The common in ouj makes oui/ j ó ii -aroAuirsf, to woxivitv, multipes. But ou; contraâed has three terminations. See above. ANNOTATION.- , - ' Seme writers, among whom Clenardus, placé here other a^eSivn of one termination only ; as rapax, ¡Aanec^r beatus. But it ii far more probable, that the Greeks have no fuch adjeSives, and that the abovementioned are of the common gender only : for inßead of to oç- woef, it is better to fay rh àfiroixliMv ; and inßead of ro ¡íáxa^, rut choofe to fay to suíaz/oo». We even find ¡uóiKou^ct in the feminine, bcat^ Vojftus. • Irregular adjeSlives. There are alfo irregular adjeñives ; as 5 «-oxùç, multus, accuf. TO. ®oXüi-, the neuter ro «roxù.' The other cafes, in whatfoever gender or number, are generally taken from «roMo; (which is fometimes to be met with) as t5 ruoMov, rà moXtM ; i moMsi, t?{ woM.ñí, rn moXKn, Sec, But pqets decline moXvf quite through, like 0"^^, whence comes the genitive raoT^ío^: the nominative plural «toX/eç, nsoKíT^ ; the ge¬ nitive moXiiiiv:, the accufaclve woxéotç, moXíT^. They fay alfo in'the nominative «ouxùç. ' . ' ; ■ 11. Of Of /i&e Variatïoiî of Substantive i' » II, Of the variation of fuhfiantives. The fubftantives have alfo their formation or variation, for thé diftinftion of fexcs. " The feminines derived from the parifyllabiç mdfculines in nu are formed, , 1. In TK : as from ó prophetà, comes ti prophetíffk» S «-çorâTiiî, prafeâus, i «rgorár«» praftSa. « vtagdtJurinit marituSf h mx^íxom^, uxor. ^ S Zxófluí, ^cj/tèa, . i S*v6«, mulûr i Scjthia, &C« 2. In ; as, ¿ d'áXTíK, p/alUre ioíius% i p/akria, i «touitÀî, poetat i wo»ít{»«, pottria. 3. In tft; ; as from aihuev^t tihicem çomes »vJwrfift tihiclnai for which we fay alfo From ^tavvnit dominust COmes ^avrSrftt and iientouxt damna. From ixßvovuXnti ptfcium venditor, comes i^vovúi^tm. This termination in takes place alfo in the parifyllabics in «5 5 as, s AÓX05, lupus, 1Í Avxdu»», lupa. Ô .eix. 9 Vitra, pauper, n vata-ax, pauper aligna. And feveral gentiles ; as ô 0çà|, Thrax, Ion, h ®ç^(tx, Tbrejfa.- ■ «.Kç«5, Cretenfis, h K^aax, Crejfa. I otK|, Phoenix, i, ^oitiaax, Phoenijfa. b ICtA(|, Cilix, i> KtAt^tfW, Cilijfa. ^ AíSví, LibpSi i AiÇvaax, hibyjfa. • J There Book II. 0/Nov ms: There are alio feme that end in u», coming from m ; or îi Pf», coming from ; as, ó hfsií, factrdos, mal^ í Mfu», facerios, fem. à au-vrtf, Jervûtor, í ffáriff», Jirtiatrtx. • And the poetics, ó vrftoÇvi, i VfiaCtif», líttulut _ ô $ory>(, dater, i ¡¿ruf», datrix ; nnlefs we de« rive it from îôtjiç. From ix^tt viftra^ mafc. comes "x'hr«, vif era, fottn. CHAP. X. 0/ the comparative and fuperlative degrees. Rule XXI, Of their termination. 1. Regularly the comparative is in re^oç, and the perlative in TKToç : 2. Irregularly they are in uv, and ¡ro^. Examples. , Nouns are compared either regularly, or irre¬ gularly. 1. Regularly the comparative is in tíjoj, and the fuperlative in txtsç % as «ytOí> «yiwrrgof, ayiwraxit» fanSlus, fanStior, fanSiißmus. 2. Irregularly they are formed in uv and rof ; a« xâixoç, malus ; x'flsxiwv, pejoT', xoíxtro?, peffimus:- and this is älmoft as~much as is requifite to remark,for beginners. Manner of forming the comparative. The manner of forming thefe comparatives and fuperlatives, ai alfo the change that is fometimes made in the termination of th« pofitive, may be eafily learnt by the following examples, which we lhall range according to their terminations. . «5 : à fíííiCíf, ^xárrc^;, ¡uXâtrarof, niger, nigrior, nigerrimus t which may be formed from the nenter adding thereto and TœTof. iiç: ô tûiTEÇiç, tva-íQés-tfou tve-sSérxroe, fiíu, magit fius, fiijpmust from the neuter in e?, to eva-iSsí. r ó et^oioç, gloriofus, i»íb|ÓT£jo{, í»á ; as Mo^ot, abovó mentioned. And thofe which have a mort fyllable before o;, make vTtfof and úrxrtí, with an ¡¡fííyx ; as ô àaifoi above mentioned. But Ô xEvo;, vacuus, makes xtuórt^oí, xttórxroí ; and rtuof, ait» gußus, j-EnÔTiçoç» fE'ÔTaToç. Neverthelefs we meet with xsfàrejoç and rirvTt^o; in the belt MSS. to which I think it fafeit to con¬ form. Some that hatre o;, preceded by a doubtful vowel, will admit either of o or « ; as à Íxoí, aqualts, ixSngoí or to-wrtgo; : g >xeti>o;j aptus, ¡xxyóre^of and ixxráre^of. From purpureus, is formed b/ fyncOpe fbr riùrtçoi : uie fame is alfo praftifed in regard to fome others. is'sçoç and ifCiToi. To thefe regular comparifons we may refer thofe in írt(0! nn4 iraro;, though formed irregularly ; as, ô ííxTíOf, loquax, ^(X^ir<9ETo;. And the Attics form a valt number of this ibrt ; as, ô "Kxywi, libidinofus, Xxynrtqof, fixytífxroí, ô ôXtyof, paucus, ¡ííiyir^oí, ¿tiiy'irxrv;, and even ¿>^íyifO(, Thus Ti^moi, jucuttdus, makes nçirrÔTxroi and rí¡viirof» i x?ixÇàii, fuperbtts, xJix^otifxTOi. ', i rnlax^u mendicus, tílaxírxroí, f ó ßA«|, ßupidus, ß^ax^raTOî. g ¿■^oÇxyoi, obßniorum amans, ói^of «yír^cTo;, ' ô ¿xqxTiií, intemperans, xx^xrirxroí, i 4'tuí^í, mendax, ■^iv^trxToç, ' trtçoi and iraraç. Some axe alfo formed by the Attics, and even by the Ionics, în Içs^oi and éravoî ; as, ô avzH^xToi, ßudiofus, xsrisixiirs^ot, xmixitxxnroç. ô xçQotoi, invidia expers, largus, xçdonirt^oi, xÇSonérxrof, whence Eupolis hath taken ¿ipOorsfXTor : juit as Find, hath xxovícsgos j and Apollon, lib. iv. de Synt. viôxfiri^op. ' ô ¿x^xrof, merus, non mixtus, xx¡xTfs-e^o(, xx^xrsrxrof, &C. uírc^oí and ccirxTO^. Seme in «lo« are likewife formed by the Attics In aWs^ù «Éraro;, by fyncope y as, g waXaiè;, vêtus, wx^ixirtçoç, mxXxÍTxTof» In the fame manner, i yt^xioi, ßuex, i-a-xofMioi, tardus \ and fpme others. This yï ^ Book II. tyNoüösT This tenoinátion is foaùd in íbme, without being íyncopatédl as 8 ihofp profriutp thaWt^i, ¡¡»»imroi' As alfo i vovx»í* fuittu j énç, aqualit ; ¡únt, mediifu ; wXixrioç, propinquus ; «4'«oî» /erusp &c* S pbMf« amieusp forms by fyncope çiKrt^oi and ^îâtâtoî} aii4 among poets fixtrot. Att. ^»a«»tîço{ and ^»XaíratTOí. 8 tríiTMp maturuSf makes Wí«r«ÍTígoí, mir»h»T«f, , Irregular comparifotii Among thofe compared irregularly» the following take im aaé troS' ' 8 pukherp naiAUipp xá^^(^o;. 8 aio'xe^p turpii, fiio-xim (lofing g) asiVx'r»«. 8 oUr^tp tniftrabilisp oixriar,, «'xrirvt. I ^ *»>f»>(tt*p iyc^imp tjfSiroî. 8 fáhoip facilisp (»im (cafting off ¡) /¡»»rej, and by fyiierefis fewr. f»rof. In like manner thofe in vçp though they are alfo compared regularly. Ô ßaOvfp profuniuSp ßxßvn^oip ßxivrxro^, and ßxöirof. But from imp I is alfo cut off,, and the preceding confonant changed into two ax ; ßaöim, ßdaa-m. In the fame manner am compared ß^aivi, tardus', y\vxvf, dulcís i i^vf,/uäw's i 'tcuy^p trajus% r»xvu ceUr', ¿xij, vtlox, ß^xx^u brevis; and the like. Cemparifons more irregular than the preceding. There are others fiill more irregular than the preceding; as ^ya9o(, bonus\ »¡AsUm, meliori from whence there is no fuperlative formed. And ßiXcimp 'ßi-XrifoH ' 'I irom /SsAtsjoç, tntltor, prajianttor. x^eiavat, '' x^árirot I ** frOm x^ariii, Or x^arxièç, foriis. ® âçtro; I ' from ''A|6io;, Martius ; "A^í, Mars. Auim, Ayrof I '* from AS for SeA«, or 16/A#;, •volo, quap meliorp optimus, J quern magis volumus. We fometimes meet with ¿yaSúraro;, as in Jofephus anii others,- though it is rejeded by Lucían, as well as xs^t^^aiároTo;, whole polltive xoçv^aToi has already the force of a fuperlative. K»xoç, sualus 5 xMx'uit, pejor ; xÚxíthp peffimut, Likewife \ > or poetically And Ibmetimes xxxdre^i, fiiéyxç, magnus, /xsyirof. Mix^q;, parvus, makes regularly t«toç. And moreover in C ^vxm \ , f i • r x ^the comparative} fuperlative is formed. or Ia«;¿o;, in End:, parvus, l7MTciroi, regno dignißmus. TO f iyoç, rigor, horror ; piyíw», horridior, terrihilior, deterior} fíy»roí, maxime horrendus, . ó &to(, Deus, SevrE|o;, divinior, Horn. -Ó and ó xXtorl'nftßur} (pa^ÔTurof and *XMrTÎr«Toç, furacißmus, i «XÎ*t;iç, fercußir ; «X»j*Ttr«TO{, promptißmus adpercutiendum, ô ■Brârvi, potor «roTÎraro;, bibacißmus. V xçà/xÇi), braßca ; xjor/iÇÔTitToç, ArîAoph. quaß hracißmus for braßcee olentißmus. 3. From a pronoun : al-roftip/ej »¿tôt«toç, as in \AtS.x\.ipßß~ mue among the comic poets. 4. From a verb : Çtçu, fero ; ^s^tíjo?, praßantior, as much as to fay, he who can ccurry more; Çéçrccroc, and alfo (fiçnroq and ■Çtjiroç, praßantißmus. > 5~. From a participle : ô iffuiAÍfoq, validas ; vali- iior ;, iffais.ttsrafnq, validißmus. 6. From an adverb": a,ta, fupra; ¿vúre^oq, fuperior ; imrctrmi fupremus i xira, infra ; xarárc^oq,. inferior ; xaráraraq, Ínfimas i móffu, longe ; toofpÚTs^oq, remotior ; iroffínraToq, remotißmus. In the fame manner ïou, intra ; t^io, extra ; ts^áa-u, ante. But iyyvq, prope, makes tyyurs^oq, éyyúraroí : or lyyiai, syytroip propior, próximas. From Wica, retro, comes pofierior, and óa-íratTo;, pofiremus* " From arç«», mane, mature; •Er^uVaÎTi^oç, maturior •. te^aVaÎTareç, rnaturrimus, omnium primus. From tiij/i, alte; tí4'tro;, altißmus. And in verfe, from eito, comes àçàçrsjoç, dtior.* 7, From a prepofition ; as. From vortç, fuper; ¿a-sç-sço;, fuperior; iorí^raroq, fupremus, and by lyncope ¿Varoç, confuí. From a fuperla- 1 xa^^í(l>l>, pulchrior: xoc^XivTcgor. I pejor : jpfçtUrtqov. w7íor: j¿í»fÓTigov. f pfßttts : 'x"?'foT«g>), feminine in Hip« From ío B o o K II. Of N o ü N 5; From «go, ante\ «rgÓTifo<, prior-, œ-goTotroj; then rejeûing and making a craíis, «g&ro;, primus. Ohfirvations on the dialeSîs of the conïparatîve and fU' perlative. The comparative haiav, melior, is almôft quite poetic ; as alfo the fuperlative Xviro;, eptimus : inltëad Of which in profe we ufe xúat and Initead Of Kputrum, melier, the Ionics and Dorics fay x^hoiit; But xáp/oi» is alfo ufed, as if it came from k^cítví,/or/is, according to the Etymol. Inllead of ßsXrtrof, the Dor. fay ^tmroç, eptimus. Inilead of xaxían, the poets fay xaxtiav, pejor : p^ígjíw», ooç, pejer, ' makes ^t^tíopa, plur. pfEgEtore;; and the dative fyncopated, ;(sgEi ; then by changing the diphthong; vire deterieri. We alfo meet with ^E'g»« for p^sgEÍo»«, x'gEÚá, ;(EfEfo, deteriorem, and x^g^E« for In like manner we find ^Eigfo» and XEÍgofE, from-' whence are formed x"i^'''H'f> filiofp .and JJStgÔTOETOÇ, ViliJpmUS. 'P«ho4 and firoç change a into 9 Ion. putting the 1 after it; fnt^oip facilis J /i»Vo{, facillimus. We likewife find /»»TEgoj^among the poets. MíyxXoí, magnus, hath fometimes in the vocative i».iyx>.t, magu\ and in the comparative jttEya^i/TEgoç, major, among poets. Meí^uv makes Ion. ¡xé^p, major, and Dor. ¡xxa-aap, which is alio taken for ¡Axxçôrtçoç, longier ; in the fame manner as ß^aaaap fot /Sgah^Ego; or ß^xxvrt^of, brtvior. M>xgo(, parvus, makes Dor. ¡/.ixxo;, whence t,he diminut. ptíuv ' parvulus. From 'iaa-up comes lon.taa-oip, minor-, whence ia-a-àa, the fame with ri-Hóu, vinco. Of voXvi the poets and Ionics make «»xù;, multus. See the chapter of adjeâives. In the comparative, for «XeIw», the Attics fay is%.iap, and in the neuter wXe'o», plus, which is taken adverbially. We meet alfo with -Tciitip, Att. and wXevx, Ion. and fo in the other cafes, «XeI- Jtor, E, «, EÇ,' M sV 8l- The four firA Numeral Nouns are declined thus; ' Singular. ^, N. Etç, unus, fúu, una, .cr, unum, * /^ ♦ \ ^ « V T 0« itfOÇf . fJiiecç^ , sydç, D« y « \ « tPtf * i A, - Dual. Nom. Ac. Ava, or, according to the Attics, ^va>, duo. O. D. Avail, and in the feminine and poet, in ths dat. iva). ^ Sometimis Ha is not declined at all, being of all cafes and genders, and taken for duo, dus, duorumi duarum, l¿c. Sometimes it receives the dual article, and fometimes the plural j rà kJ tÍ Ha J " 0» xj T« Ho. " • ' - Ave) is a cafe formed according to the analogy of the plural. Where¬ fore vie fnd it u/ed thus even by St. Luke, Añs xxi. 33. xj luíXiva» HBîjiat àtivasei Heî, etjuíliteum (Paulum) vinciri catenis duabus. We likevoife meet nvith Hài in the genitive, for HaTi. Plural. Nom. ó at tres, tx tjÍ«, tria. Gen. Tgii», trium. Dat. Tgto-t, trihue. Acc. T»í *J T»{ fftïi, tres, rx Tç'tx, tria. In like manner, , Nom. à x! réeex^iç, xj rx ríeex^x, quatuorj, ^ ■ Gen. neex^ai. Dat. Acc. Tuf xj Tx( réerex^xf, rx rieax^x. The Attics fajr, rérrx^ti and rtrrxgx ; in like manner the othei; cafes. Obfervations on the Cardinal Numbers. Numeral nouns from four to an hundred are indeclinable; vrirts, quinqué', t^, fex i iocrx, feptem', ar.ru, oSo', imex, novem \ Hkx, decern. From ten to twenty the leaft number may be placed firft or lad ; thus, '¡.siixx, or Hxx ey, undecim ; HHxx, or Hxx Hu, duodecim ; Hxx Tçttç, or rçixxxihxx, tredecim.—In the fame manner, Stxxrscrex^t^, quaiuordecim ; iixxnivri, quindecim ; hr.xl^, fex- dectm ; iexx¡-nT¿, feptemdecim ; iixxoxru, oiit^deciOi ; Hxxnúxf novemdecim ; eîxoo-t, viginti- From twenty to thirty the fraalleft number is always put lad ; itxoo-i etç, viginti et unus', tlxoei i», viginti unum', ítxoo-t Ho, viginti duo ; &c. r^ixxoirx, triginta. From thirty upwards the conjundion is commonly inferted in the middle ; as r^ixxoirx ^ ti, or,' in one word, r^txxotrxxxá», tri¬ ginta et unum, From thirty to a hundred the tens are all terminated in xxasrx 01 ixoirx, correfponding to the Latin, ginta ; thus, T^t»xí»T», trir G ginta Î í2 book ii." o/t^ovutél ginta% rt9ffá(¿Miru, ^uadraginta% mrnM»r», ^injuaginiä; turra, fixapnta ; ÚíítfAVKotva, feptuûginta ; ôy«i»i*o»T«» oSoginta} imt^turr»,. nomginta ; iiiarot, centum. ■ 'Ztutrif it, ctntum et unum ; inarot Mo, centum et duo, &c, The other hundreds are declinable : «t hatútrut, dueenti ; aí ítaiióa-tat, dueenta ; hatúata, dueentef. In like manner, oí r^tau- am, treeenti ; »i rtaaaçatùatot, quadringenti ; cl nrirraxoauít juiU' genti ; « fexcenti ; el inraxSaut, /eptingenti j oí ixraxí- rut, oßingenti et irttaxérut, nongenti. Ol jjíXtoi, mille i el íi(xí^et, bu mille i o» oí rer^axtfxt^ttot, quater mille', oí inraxtiy^Kut, feptiet milleoí ó*» raxifx'^'o't oSliet nulle ; oí irttaxííX^ot, novier mille. Ót ¡tvetet, deciés mille ; but ytv^ut, with an acute on the pennl« tima, ugnifies infiniti, according to Euftath« oí ítffív^tet, viciet mille Î oí r^ttfíú^ui, triciet mille.} andfoon. , Of Ordinal Numbers. The ordinal numbers end always in o;. Thofe of the firft tea are in to;, except the fécond, the feventh, and the eighth> Thofe of the fecond are compound irouns^ ending alio in to; .* and thofe of the third, and the reft, terminate in ro; ; iit the manner as fol> lows : ' 'O wgZrof, primus ; ô h^tgo;, feeundûs ; o tçîto;, tertius ; S T«gTo;, quartur, ó «ré/iowTe;, quintus ; 5 íkto;, /extus ; ó é'Síojito;, Jep' timus ; ó oyl'oo;, oßavus!i i ttiarof, nonus ; ó Iííxoito;, decimus. 'o ètS'fxaToç, undecimus ; ô ívoxatiíxarof,- duodecimus i i r^ifxai* ■ / iíxarot, decimus tertius. Set. *0 T^raxoro;, tricefimus ; ê xtrretteexoroe, quadragefimus ; ó vuto- *oro;, quinquagejímus ; ó è^orèf, foxagefimus ; o íZSeytvxoréf, feptutw geßmus ; ô ¿y^tgxoro;, eSogeßmus ; ô irttnixeroít nonageßmus ; è íxch TOfè;, centeßmut. ¿ Ítaxorioroí, ducenteßmus ; ô 'Tçwxoo-iorô;, treunteßmus. »X'^^ioro;, milleßmus j ô ík;%(X»oro;, bis milleßmus, &c. ô l'txoijxo^torô;, dtcies milleßmtu. 5 hifiv^torèi, vicies milleßmus. » T{i;f*fçiorô;, tricies milleßmus. Sec. Of Numbert formed by ahßroSiiori. Numbers formed by abftraction are feminine; as ô juovà;, uniftu^ ó titt;, ¿aitas or binatius ; à r^tke, trinîtas or trmärius ; ó quaternitat or quater. nariusi h ve/jixrií, quinariut i il ixràt, ferarius ^ o iertcte, ßptenarius", h iyioii, cfíonartus ; ó èvhù;, povenarius ; ó ÏEKà;, denarius ; ô ixaycrTÎç, centenarius ; ó •¡(f- S-tà.;, millenarius ; ó fxvgtàç, myrtas or decies millenarius ; where the word numerus h always to be underftood. Of Multiplying Numbers. Some are in £;, and denote the fimplicity or maltiplicity of a thing In Itfeif; as ô ¿srXS;, ßmplex ; ó îiwXS;, duplex ; ó rpwXS;, triplex, &c. Others are in- úciee, and fignity proportion ; as d ÍMrXáo«;, duplas ; o TfwrXá^ *ioç, triplusi i tvr^aVhárv;, quadrupíus, tess. There ate other in püet, which chiefly mark the time';, ó TsroiTti"«;, quar. tonus ; ¡I mpunraXee, quintanus ; ó Ixrar«;, Jextanus ; ó ICrc/ucfo;, Jeptimanus } ô ¡yíeeiCof, qui olio dierunt eß\ i Iwe-rar«;, qui nevem ; ó rsxaTar«;; qui decern die rum eß, tec. Thus, wvjsto; XfireSec, febris tertiana; or abfolutely, rfiraïe;, urticutei inragraXet, quartana; ows^araTo;, quintana, See. ■ ANNO- ÓfÑirUÉtLÁL Nouifsr annotation. hr what concerní the letttrt and ßgurtt, by which the Greeh ufed to mark their ènmbers, fee Book i. CIup. fi. Ohférvatîons on the Diaîeiîs of Numeral Nouns. Trom ¿¡t, tarns, coinés c»ç, ton. ; from fiía, utta,- ï», JEoh Its compounds take? 6 for Í, .£ol. and Dor. oóOík« ituU ius ; ovdiv} ntälfUH ; whenck comes t^tide,íi/ ánd i^ieOtíi^o, ni" billfacto. And this O fometimes occurs eren in profe. The compound is alfo refolved« i£ol. and Dor. in two words ; éÜ «îs, tí, nuilus, nullitat', unit tîf, ftsîè î» ;. or, in one word. But Homer oftener makes ufe of Srtç, ire, ëntoi, for éhîf, &C. And the Ionics fay, ¿Síottoi., The poets ufe ^otot and iotà, for Í¿o, ¿uo ; in the dative ^loro-tr, iuohus. Inllead of ricvae^tc, not only the Attics fay tirrec^tc, quatuor', but tooreover the Ionics fay riavt^ic, and even in compounds, reo-o-i^q- «a>T«, quadragitUa. The Dorics fay rtro^tç or tirroçtc, and uie poets wiov^tc or wiaav^tf, and the obliques in the fame manner. The ^61. fay wiaav^tc, whehce Heiych. takes wt&avçu. For itxftvij vigtnti, the Dor. fay fimn; the poets and Ion. Itnoati whence^ comes îetxorèf, vigtfimuí. Inftead of r¡tú>toíroo, triginiu ; •n^ateginorc», quadra^inta ; itof XÓ0-1OÍ, ductnti ; T|i or w; iyàii (^ol. tyZt) or éyúnt. They alio put yet for yt ; lyúvyot. But the Bœot. fay l¿yx and iúyya, where yet does not enter into the cotnpofition of the word, no more than íyáúíie, which is the reafon why it does not draw back the accent. The poets cut off » ; yà for lyù. The Dor. change cr into tj for tri) they fay tv, whence the Latin iu. They alio fay rvm and rvya. The genit. is't5 or rev ; dat. to» ; acc. TÈ or TV, which is here an enclitic, though it be not fo in the , nominative. .ii:>. The genitive lingular If»«, , ¡¡íeTo, See. The Cyprians fay fío, with the digamma; and hence Hefych. is niftaken in reading río. We alfo meet with rs.To, tui, ioTo, fur, in Hom. But lío« lignifies fui, coming from èôç, fuus : and I?oí (with a fmooth brpthing) boni, coming from Ie¿{ or nvc, bonus, formofus, manfuetus. - ' The Of Primitive Pronouns. 85 The Attics joia alfo &er to the genit. ifiéodir, and ¡¡*¿6», or l*é^ip, &c. _ ^ ■ ' The dative$ ljuo<, (m), rot. change ot into iv Dor. rtv r and this lall admits alfo of an e, rut ; and by refoiution, reVv. The poets prefix an < to the pronoun of the third perfon ; lot for o( ; IÎ for , opSl*, as in the nominative. They likewife add an « to the third perlbn dual, for tr^l; and fometimes an o>, trfol or cÇul} and even o-^S, which agrees with the dud of av. Thus the nominative dual afù, and the genitive a^îïtp or ffipup, which are properly from av, are taken for ipß duo, ipforum duorum, ipßs duobus, and then they are derived from i,/ui, Whofe nominative dual aipl is moreover ufed by poets for the accufative fingular of the relative àvrèt, and for aipHf, accufative plural. - The nominative plural is refolved into ce; ; Ion. íijLssí for tii*,sTo, ' &c. This E is alfo preferved in the genitive and accufative. But the poets add thereto an » ; nis,utf, &c. except the accufative apietf, where they do not fay at. The poets moreover fay aipúi; for ipß or ipfos, which is alfo found in Thpcydides. The Dor. fay aÇh fo"" and likewife i|/b, which comes from aips, for (pal. And 4^1 in Hefych. is alfo taken for the accu¬ fative fingular. But thoie dialeâs maf be viewed eafily all together in the fol¬ lowing table. r.d£LE 86 B 90 H II. 0/Pronouns; TABLE ùf the Three Primitive Pronouns, voitb their 1. EGO. Sxnctxlar. N. Éy« " ' Poi't, yà. 1 Ait, ïyayt. Dor.îyùt, tyútv, I and iyútíx, .B. ivyaSfiúyía. G. É/tS and 'Jon, í^e'o, fuo, i and if/.oXù. . Att, É/xÉ6ey, and [ Ífiíodít. ..D, É/xivand^Etí. D. É/tOi < 'fiOt, ^ 1 Att, tfíotyu 1 Dor. ifoiP and . l/XOtVE. A. Ifíl 1 lA, At, Íiítye, E • U A L. • N.? A. i G D. XJ V A Xi • \ J Poet. là'i. \ Dor. íjjíiíe. G. ? ~ { Poet. >mt, and Plural. > ilon. insêi, JEOI. ífifísf, P!Jon. yi[/.sar^ and iusíuii. Dor. ^5,. AEoLifmiut^ut, ÇÔ- »¡AtOT c D. < ÁEol, ujjLjii, ¿ ¿¡ilítS. ÇIon. rifn-ícti, \ V¡¡íúa<;. ' A. < Dor. á/jícíf. I AEol.ififiCii i, íy.¡íe. Oífítt. and and and IL T U, Singular. Att. ffvyt. Dor. tí) (ysis ufed in all cales) tíyn and tiyet. ' V trv k n >. Ç Dor. Ti. \ End. TV, Dual. - \ Í Poet, ffóvi, { JEol. Sft/oe. ^ ' ( ffÇafh» Plural. ilott' Vfiiif. Pei't. vutTte. Dor.ii. AEol. vnyLit^ r Ion. v/xfiului, . .. J and vu.tiat. "'^"¡.Sol.ii.^Ue),, r Dor. vjjui, v¡)ut < .^ol. vimt, ¿ and f Ion. viAsmt, . ^ 1 and vutTa^. "1^°^ i ^Ol. 1^ and ¿í^/oE. f Jon, to, and Sóf. \ At, teOtr, tStr, I sp.«»,BTo,&iír», I asifthejcame L from iS. r Ene/. ^Poet. tqi. Dual. ¿ oÇut,OTcfu. oftr and nfcAt, Plural. S Dor. 0*^1;. Poe't. o^Eiff r Jojs, fftfiuu nfüp < , ¿ Poè't, er^úm. and 9!. r Ion, mpíeof, < Poi't, 0^è. l^Dor. tj'i. II. 0/ Of D ï R I V A T I V E s. ÍB7 II. Of BerivativeSy whether Pojfeßves or Gentiles. There are eight pronouns poflèflîve, which are de- * rived from the three primitives, in the following manner. 1. From the genitive of ly«, which is comes «/»¿ç, Ijuèv, meuSy mefly meum. 2. From o-sj the genitive of cw, comes , fuusy fua^ fuum. 4. From the nominative dual of ly«, which is or >5», is formed »«íxff«ç, «(>, neßery ä, aw, ours, foi: two., 5. From fçeS or «-(pán, the nominative dual of rJ, comes fl-pwÍTifoj, «e, o?, vefiery fz, aw, yours, for two. 6. From the nominative plural of lyw, which is n'/*«?, comes ifAÍri^oíy a¡y c», poßery a, aw, ours, for more than two. 7. From the nominative plural of o-y, comes v/x£T£foî, ■«, ov, vefiery a, aw, yours, for more than two. 8. From vipit^y the nominative plural of 2, comes fçirt^oiy cíy qvy fmsy futty fuumy thclrs, for more than two. From thefe plurals are alfo derived the following two gentiles, »ji*£Í«7rcí, », on, pofiraSy atis -, and v/aíí«- ^oç, veßrasy atis. The interrogative of which is s-oíavof, cuja»? their fecorid root being ¡¿iriSuvy folum j whence alfo cometh ¿xxoSairoçy alio folo natus. Obfervations on the BialeEls of the Pojfeßves. All thefe pronoans follow the parifyllahic declenlion according to their gender, and receive the diale¿ts thereof. The Dor, and poets change a- into r in o-o;, in the fame manner as in crv ; faying toí, from whence the Latin tvus, a, urn. They fometimes infert an i î*tîîç, ni, not ; and thus alfo they fay («f, a, ion, fms, a, iim. The fame Dor. form other polfelEves from the nominaüve plu¬ ral of their own dialeft; faying ¿.¡mí, ¿^»'(poet. »¡»n: l/ih» G 4 and 88 BOOK II. 0/Pronoitws. à, and i, è» .• o-^oi, à, and v, è» ; likewife à, h : inltead of r>i*.trtçof, noßer ; vi/,trsç>u veßer ( o'ÇfTt^ofr ßtus, &C. .The Mo], join the article with the pronoun, and draw back the accent; éVoç, w», róe-o», inñead of o ero¡, í crh, to trif. III. 0/ Bemonfiratives and Relatives. ' There are " two demonftratives, stoj, htc, ««m?, ille % which are both declined like the article, and have the neuter in o, and not in m. The firft takes a T in the beginning, where the article has one. There are two relatives of all perfons," viz. «?, n, S, qui, qua, quod ; and auroi, «, o, ipfe, a, urn. They are both declined like the article. Ohfervaliens ion the Bialeßls of the Bemonfiratives Us7»o(^ and STOÇ ; and of the Relative auVoj. ' The Atf. add a > to the demonllrative pronouns, áros-«, «óm», ^»Tot or TUT«. .In like manner lxE»»oo-t, IkoidI, bKE into the improper )>, or into « only. The Ion. put e before the long vowels, or the final diphthongs of the demonllrative «roç, and of the relative airo?, and their compounds ; aÍTÉ>) for atnri, heec ; rarsa for rara, hujus, &c. avrit for ipfa ; aùrin for »ira, ipßus', in the fame manner Ifutirtu, íatíTsa, &C. The nominative plural is excepted, becaufe the final diphthongs cct and ot are reputed ihort ; aroi, and not ¿teoe, èiee ; ccvreci, and not «.vréai, htece, taken from the demonllrative aro;. In the lame manner in the relative avro\ and aircà, ipß and ip/a. Some fay the fame of the dual, but with lefs foundation. The relative in «¿to?, i^fe, being joined to the article ê airot, il avril, TO avTo Or ravro, IS taken for idem, eadem, idem : and here the Ion. change àv into uv, both in the mafculine and the neuter; ' which they obferve alfo in airoi, even when it is taken for ip/e, but only in the nominative Angular and mafculine: as may be . feen in the following table. 0/Demonstratives «»i Relatives." sp 7ií BLE of the Demonftratîres Ixirnof and aroj, and the Relative »irlf, ' with their Dialeäs. Sing Mafc. Nom. i| (Xfrw; . P. KtiV«; "toor. TW«î ;(iA..lxnw0-i Gen. . , íxtíya r,, «W» u ixetyai Dat. tti . axinrui Accuf. . IxiiVgy " Xi'vw U I. A R . Fem. Nom. ixeíyit xiín TÍ»«' Gen. ixEÍmí Dat. Accuf. D u %om.Ac. "^"^en.Dat. A L. Nom. Ac, ¡xei'rt ' Gen. Dat. txcíyxty ¡flá P L 'U Nom. iki IXETV« ' fc »'"»« Gen. ¡;¿ W»âw aik tic llóljl IxtÍKMf uri «'»'f Accuf. IxEÚtf; xetyaf RAL. Nom. Gen. the fame as Mafc. Dat. ixtíyatt fxeíyrm Accuf. çxeiïaç Si n g v l a r. S 1 n g v l a r. Mafc. Neuter. Fem. ' Mafc. Neuter. Fem. Nom. Nom. Nom. Nom. Nom. Nom. «toç, tic. -ran ttôti) avroçy i^Jc äuto airi Ion. ralro Ion. atrrin Ion. ¿)i/Toc muro «Jtíb A. ûroji WVTOÇ Gen. Gen. Gen. Gen. Gen. Gen. ■rútb A. tstsî I. TSTÉa the fame as Mafc. raúrtit and rxvrivi ravTtí I. auritt ruiürÍH the fame as MafC) ÂiÙTfc and aÙTÉx; / Dat. Dat. Dat. Dat. Dat. Dat. txt« A. rmy, * «t» a. The Dialeâs the fame as in the Mafcnline. fem.*, Dor. Í, t It, Tif, ?> tS, w, tày. «, or, atf, Aft, pti St« IV. Of Of CoikfpouND Pronouns^ <91 IV. 0/ Compound "Pronouns, / There are three compound pronouns, which are formed from the accufative lingular of the primitive, and from the genitive «ut«: thefe are í/*«utS, me'iipfms\ rí«üT*, tut ipfius\ ixxnls^fui ipßits. They have no no. minative, and are declined in the other cafes, like Xeyof, », for the mafculine and thç neuter j ^nd lik? *»/*»» ?f, for the feminine. Mafc. Fem. Neut, Gen. ifjiOiVTXf ipKvrä, Pat. ifJtûtVTUf S/*OlVrV, ljU«VTU. Acc. t[AKVTOV, IjMdiUTlil', C^CtUTO. In the fame manner the other two. The two firft have no plural i but the laft hath, and is declined cither jointly or feparately : thus, iecvT^Vf rfuv avruv} ixuroTg, tr^íítv uiroiq ; |«UT»f, 0-9»; œuT»f. And the other genders in like manner, I This plural agrees to all perfons ; tauTSf, nos ipfoSy ,vos ipfos^fe ipfosy &c.; and fometimes in the lingular, lour», tut ipjius. The compounds of the two lafl: perfons are alfo Ibmetimes contraóbed ; rr»xr, ending always in [uxt ; and the third middle, /xéa-j), which partakes of the other two. (y PROPERtlEá i/Ä VEkSr 9^ two, either in the formation of its tenfes, or in its fig- niñcation ; which we ihall explain in a more particular manner in its proper place. ANHOTÁTION. Theí^e art atß •Verbs in u of a paffive ßgmßcettieni as patior : and othtrs in ¡teu, ef an aSive ßgnificatUn ; as pugno : Some evenftem to have an a3ive andpaffive^ or nenterßgm^ ficaiion ; as vXrfivta, multiplico, crefco, and multiplicor, or rather multiplico me, as the French fay, je me multiplie. See the remarkst Book viii. Of Conjugations^ Su^oy»«». Grammarians commonly reckon thirteen conjuga-» tions V viz. fix barytons, three circumflex, and four o£ - Verbs, in pn. But this great variety of conjugations may be reduced to two i one of verbs in «, and the other of verbs in p.s. The conjugation of verbs in u is thé moít extenfive of the two, and may be divided into two forts} for its verbs are conjugated either .fimply, or with contrac¬ tion, Thofe conjugated fimply are ^called grave or barytons, ßx^ÜTovot-y becaufe, as they are not accented on the lail fyllable, a grave accent is to be underftood. The contradted, are verbs in aw, in, ¿a, which by rea- fon of their accent are called circumflex. The conjugation of the verbs in p.s has not many tenfes j but we muft refer thereto the paflive aorifls of the barytons, which follow the analogy of thii ; adtive conjugation. t C H A P. 11. Otfervations to team eaßly to conjugate. i TO conjugate rightly, four things muft be attend¬ ed to-, whereof two are to be obferved in all tenfes; viz. the charadleriftic, and the termination; and two more which happen only to particular tenfes; name¬ ly, the augment, and the change of the penúltima. Of the CharaFterifiic. The charaâeriftic is *the letter which precedes the termination. ANNOTATION. f Moß grammarians have made ufe of the charaSerißU to dißtnguißs • i ehe conjugations themfelves, pretending that the ßrß confontsnt rf the Í 3 alphahtty '96 . È ÓOK III» O/" V E R B SZ < , , olpbahtt^ wibicb is ß, ivitb tbe two corre/ponding mutes ; tnx. «r tmi Çt Jertjti to mark the ßrfi conjugation, tuhoß verbs of cour/e ended in ßu, vu, (pu, or «TT», tbe «r taking a t along voitb it. fhat the fécond' coufonant, viz, y, vsith its correfpondents k, ^ marked the fécond conjugation, vobofe verbs ended in yu, xu, yu, or àu, tbe * tikevoife taking a t nuitb'it. ^hat the third confonant, viz. i, with its correfpondents r, marked the third conjugation of verbs in iu, ru, 5«, That the fourth confinant, viz. ferved to mark tbe fourth eonjn* gation : and ^ being a double letter comp ofed of a, and being alfi refth' able into two rn, which the Attics change into two rr ; the verbs ^ this conjugation ceme to end in ^u, aa-u, or rr«. That the fifth confonant following, viz. A and * having beat taken already) with its fellow liquids /*> », g, marked tbe fifth cotgn. gation of verbs in Xu, ¡au, tu, g«. That tbe fixtb conjugation was always to have for its tbetraäerißie fome vowel or diphthong, as t, a, i^e. which they call tertninatiog in u pure ; as su, ¿u, i^c. Thefi different clajfes of charaSterifiies deferve to he taken notice of,' forafmuch as they may be of firvice in the formation of tenfes. But there is not the leaf reafon why they fiouldproduce different conjugatieu, fince tbe manner of conjugating is not at all different. Wherefore the ufe of the cbaraQerifiics confifis only to difiinguifit the tenfe, and not the conjugation. The grammarians call it charaSlerißicäm^ or fcrmtt- tham. We fliall divide it into tierce claíTes : the firft of the prefent, the fécond of the future, and the third of the perfedl. The formation of the othet tenfes de¬ pends entirely upon thefe three, as it depends in Latia upon the prefent, the perfect, and the fupine. R U L E 1. Of the Tenfes that have the Charafteriftic of the Prefent. ■ The chara£lerißic of the prefent ferves for the prêter- imperfeSt ; For the fécond future, and fécond aoriß % For the perfeiî and plu-perfe5l middle. Examples. The charadteriilic of the prefent ferves for the tenfes mentioned in the rule. But obferve, that" in verbs in wTw, xTw, fAvu, the Erft, and not the fécond, is reckoned the charaóteriftic. Thus, from Tita, honora, punió, the imperfefî: is íriov, the fe* cond future nZ, the fécond aorift ínov (which happens to he here the fame with, the preter-imperfefl) and the j I Öhferoations to íeañi^o conjucate." ^7 (the perfeft middle lír»« j, where », which is the charac- tériftic, remains always' the fame. But from toVIw, verbero^ having formed the imperfeib îrvi^ov, you fay in the fécond future tuttw, in the fécond aorift ervTror, in the perfeâ: middle rérvirm-, where t, the fécond confonant, is loft, and there remains only # the ciiaracteriftic. R t; L E II. Of the Charadteriftic of the other Tenfes.^ 1. The charaßerifiic of the fir ft future ferves for the firft aorift abtive : alfo For the firft future, and fir ft aorift middle. 2. ^he charaßerifiic of the perfect ferves for the plU'^ perfect, - ExAidPi-Es. 1. The firft future forms the firft aorift, as likewife the firft future and firft aorift middle, which have all the fame charadleriftic j as for inftance, TÎ4I Í I middle, T»i i viz. the prefent and the futures in no-i', the fubjundive in wa-», retaining its «•, and the perfed in «0"l. The tenfes in that is to fay, the imperfed, and the fécond aorifl:, terminate this perfon in ov, like the firft of the fingular. The other tenfes terminate it in cy, or in «v, and form it from the fingular, -viz. the firft aorift from the firft perfon, by adding v •,* the plu-perfed (to which we may- join the paflive aorifts) and the imperative, from the third perfon fingular, by adding trocv ; the optative alfo from the third perfon,- but by adding tv : as may be feen in the following table. ^ ANNOTATION. Concerning the Augment and the Penúltima. There are fill two things to learn, before you can conjugate well ; the augment and the penúltima : but the changes of the penúltima will he ßoewn more conveniently in each tenfe, according to which it often . varies. And as for the augment, the particular rules concerning it will he eafier to retain, when you have learned a little to conjugate. We fiall only remark here, that the augment is nothing elfe but an increafe of quantity, or of letters, prefixed to a verb in fome tenfes as ríu, honore ; erto», honorabam ; rsnxa, honoravi ; îtetîkeii', honora- veram ; as may be Jeen in the following table ; which if the learner will but give himfelf the trouble to compare with the preceding objerva- tions, he will quickly perceive their ufe, in aßßing his memory, anet infiruHing him to conjugate wtth great facility. Ii 2 TABLE iïoci Book III. O^Vërbs7 t A B L E of Conjugation Indicative. Subjunctive. Öptative. 'EyxXicsic ; ôçirisfl. 1 [ ¿«ror«xT>xq. 1 1 sôxrsxq. 'EysrtJf. Inßant. The prefent.. r ai, SIC, SI. 1 1 f ?• 1 I TÍ- Honoro, as, at. 1 TÍ- « Honorem, es, et. I. C, o/usy, trtf ua-tt ' 1 3. C «ifasry STS, An. 1 k tIíi(ar»Tixi(. ^ttfi extenßvus in rem ndn exaSam. The ínsperfeñ. r oy, sc. «• I If "f*'> "• *Et(- ■< Honorabain,a$,at I I 1 Honorareiii,es,et 1. L rre, n, » I 3. C «jttsy. wrs. »a. MtMa». Vttlgo futurum primum. Í4), SIC, «Ï' Honorabo, is, it. O/XSV, STS, HOI. The firft future. 1Ç OIJM, Otc, «« T»-- < Honorem, es, et* 3. ¿ «JUS,, UTS, MST. '£(róf*svo;. Quibufdam futurum rtmotius. The fécond future. Ç ñfUf sic, M*. Ti' < Honorem, es, et. 3. ¿ c~/uEV, STtc, erst. T,' I. r S, sTç, s", I Honorabo, is, it. I r C î^sv, STts, Sri.' I ^açE^l,)^tíölic. Tésn/tu exaSum. Vulgo the firft aorift. Titf-- «c, a. Ti- < Honoraverim, is. O^EV^ ËTS^ OV. I 2* C M/IAEV, ]}T6> W». CV, 6Ç, f3 Honoravi,Ifti, r Ot/UI, 'M* Ti- < Honoraverim, is^t. 3« C nÂçœxsi/xsioç. jidjacens prafenti. The preter-perfeO. TÉ- r «, «c, s. I Xs- ç «>, se, ¡1. Ti»- •< Honoravi, ifti. | tÎ*- Honoraverim, is. I. l, «/.er, «TS, «rh 2. C a>|Usv, STS, airiv "ÈTs- r TÓt- J Í ïwsgo'osTsXrtoî. Pïufquamperftilunu The plu-perfeâ. siy, SIC, SI. Honoraveram. si^sy^ SITE] stray. Iii M/AI, MC, 0^ HonoraviíTem» MfASV, MTS, «eV> Putorum imperandl fomutor ab índlcatívii teiBporîbut fiel ^ 3 M T" r« 5 tC'? ji SB © g xT o ® S? p «I ^ Si *-*> d »7. ^ S M O «1^ 1 §J ■ S S* S. © ■© «^8 5- II? I rir ir ? 1 Infinita feu imperfonalia, quodlibet ferè omnium lemporam formatur fic: f s tM 0 a a s 1 ? I'" If s i>Í ?- 2 3 3 • Participia omnia pmnium fere temporum foimantur quoque fic t O a > ♦d g 5 ? ' 1 y t ? roAy^ - roA^ ■S' E> fi' v«'5*1' 1 ri j? 5^ r îrî • «O m' V ilf ■S ¿5 •j; 'lyt 'lAuoaoq ponb 'asnb 'inl) 'pm 't 'un)eaouo{{ S S S ^ <1 ^ 11 |q 99 > X H »? 1 ^spiic > H •u p» 's* ■n ou <í M >9 W > O )>• < M O & O' o s: <—1 «S ' o b> H H O ' Po ok líí. 0/ Verisí c H .A P. nr. • 0/ Augmenty divided into Syllabic and Temporaf^ TH E augment, as we have already obfcrved, is an increafe prefixed to a verb in certain tenfes. - There are two forts : one fyliable, which confifts in an increafe of fyllables ; and the other temporal, which is made by an increafe of meafure or quantity. But all tenfes are not capable of this increafe. Out of nine Greek tenfes, three are never augmented, viz. the prefent, and the two futures : two are aug-r mented through all the moods, viz. the perfeft, and the paulo-pofl-futurey which is only for the paffive : and four have an augment only in the indicative, viz. the imperfe(5t, and the two aorilisj to which we may join the plu-perfeft (for thofe that are willing to di¬ vide this tenfe according to out® table into firft and fécond) which, out of the indicative, drops the fylla, bic I, that had beeii fuperadded to the augment of the perfeél ; as rfTuta, iitrUm, tît»xo»(*î. But yet it is not quite without an augment, finçe that of the perfe^^ Itill continues. RULE V. Of the Syllabic Augment. %. The fyllabic augment is t prefixed to the imperfeß of a verb beginning with a confçnaat : *î. And then the initial letter of the prefent tenfe repeated in the perfect i ' 3. But if the initial letter be an afpirate, you muß change it into its correfponding tenuis : 4. And there muß be fiill prefixed anotjhex jyllabic t, in the plu perfect. Examples. . i.,The fyllabic augment is nothing elfe-but an f prefixed to the imperfeft of verbs commencing with a eoofonant •, as tw, honore honorabam j tuV7w, I beat ; £TU7r7ov, I did heat. And this £ is alfo retained in the aorifts, as we ihall fee hereafter; mo-«, honoravi\ ÏTu-'hxyVerberavi •, fr^Treif, the fame y Sçç, 3 2. But Of tbt Syllabic Augment. . 103 2. But then the perfeft re-duplicates the initial letter ' of the verb ; as t/w, bonoyo ; rijix», honoravi : tuV7w, verbero -, rírv^x, verberavu 3. Which, if it be an afpirate, muft be changed into Its correfponding tenuis before it. is repeated : thus, ßimulo ; Tsiaxee, ' ßimulavt- (paUut iuteoj mt^oiyx»t btxi. gaudtoi ^ gavifús/um. 4. And the plu-perfeft receives ftill a fyllabic aug¬ ment over and above that of the perfeft i but only in the firft, viz. the perfeft of the indicative i as ríux», ¡rsrUuvt honoraveram. In like manner, rvdlif, verbero ; _ rírvfx, iriTvfstv, a'Oi, averam. /cribo', yéy^afet, iyty^úfsm, /cripfi, eram. inclino ; xexAix», IxcxAtx»», at/i, averam. xgifu, Judico i xsK^ixa, íKtx^ÍKsir, avi, ' averam, ANNOTATION. rfduplication, vohicb tht Greeks call ona^itXeiaianT/of, duplica-' tionem, is al/o ist h/( among the Latins, as vue have made appear in ße Latin method^ thus fallo, fefelli; pello, pepuli; pango, pe- pigi, iäe. > R u .l e VI, Of the Augntient Ç, long by Pofition. 'P is re-duplicated in this augment ; at which time, as alfo whenever the augment s is long by pofition, the increafe of the perfebi is the fame voith that of the imperfebl. Examples, , The letter ^ is always repeated after the fyllabic augment. And then, as alfo whenever t is long by pofition, viz. when it is followed by a double letter, or by two confonants, the augment of the perfeéb is the fame as that of the imperfeâ:, without any redu¬ plication. (isfia, prajicioi ■ tjpjsurro», %'•?'«. • , prtjiciebamj project, tnrtt^a, /emlno ; «rwiigo», tantct^xa, /eminabam, /eminavi, Çu, ßrveo', i'itoi, ï^txct, /ervebam, /erbui. \ía, polio', fho", thy-», poliebam, polivi. '^'¿KXu, canoßdibus ; ï^a^ov, canebam, ■ ceciui, Scc, But a mute and a liquid do not make a fyllable long by pofition', and therefore verbs beginning with them, H 4 'follow 104 Book III. Óf Verbs. 'follow the general rule i as xXivuy inclino i txXmyf xixXi^ XX i and others. A>f5fOTATION. ^he foets do not always repeat the g in the augment ; as pecorlu, tç few ; ígaarro», I did few. Therefore the perfect Jhall then have its «- duplication ; as piorla, to throws^iirro» ; for ipfipa, I have thrown ; for I have been thrown." jfnd in theplu- perfeä 4'®» iílc. 'In like manner pi^t tP do, imperf. íjí^o», aor. I. from whence cometh x.ariçt^»f 1 have finilhed. Rule VIII. Of Verbs that negleft, and others that are indifferent about the Reduplication of the Perfeit. 1. Verbs commencing with yy negleSt the Reduplication of the perfect : 2. And a few others either take it y or negleSI it. Examples. Although Rt. and v, preceded by a mute, do not maki a fyllable long by pofition in Greek; neverthelefs, I. Verbs beginning with yv do not repeat the firfj letter; as yvíw, nofcoy íyvuxxi yyaçl^uy notum reddoy iyvw^ixx ; and fuch like. To vyhicn we may add yjn- yo^iu, vigilOj îy^nyé^nxx. , 'ANNOTATION. The reafon of this is to avoid a cacophony, heeaufe the ear would he offended at the found of yíynuxcí, yiyiugtua, t¿c. ,2. On the contrary, verbs commencing with x1, wly and jAVy fometimes take this reduplication, becaufe thefc, letters make the fyllable common in verfe ; as xf«®/*««» acquire, pofUdeo, xíxrriiAxi : fxvolo¡AXiy tnemini, í And fometimes they negled it ; as fxrv/xxi for xfXTii- H'^h pojfedi ; Ixrax« from xTfi'vp®, oççido ; sxria-fAXi from xT»'^0|t*«», condor, &c. Others do the fame, though the £ be fhort or com¬ mon ; fometimes taking the reduplication, and fome¬ times negleéting it; as, ßt-ardiu, vireo ; lS\¿rnxa, et ßsSxirtiuc. 0a\svu, confuto ; i€éXet>*a, et ßiShXtVKtt. xçvorlu, occulto ; txqvpec., et xtKçvp». ß?.uxiveixai, torpeo \ < iSxáxtvpíCU, et ßt^XaLXivpu». , Çut xa&a^i^tû, purgo, has Ool/ sx«óá¿ixa. . ' ' í . , ç .0/ /¿tf T E M P o I¿ A L A u G M E N t; J05 Rule VIII. Of the Temporal Augment. The temporal augment tonfifts in changing a fiort into a long vowely as alfo « into « ; 2. In which cafe the 1 of the diphthongs 01, is fubfcrihed •, and the diphthong »v is changed into um:. 3. And thefe augments are the fame in all tenfes,. Examples. Ï. The temporal augment is properly no more than the change pf a ihort into a long vowel, according to the corréfponderice of vowels and diphthongs, men¬ tioned in the firfl: book ; on which account Ibme are called mutable, and others immutable. Which is pffeóted thus : Mutable, MfraCoXix«. 5 a '% f n itva, perßcioy • v>vur, e > into s 11 IAsvO», venia, o J L " prabea, 5«u ) f >> tolla, av > into ^ nv ív^áta, augea, ñviana, J L V o'uú^u, . habita, i. Where it is to be obfervcd, that the change of diphthongs follows thap of the vowels, according to pheir prepofitive, the fubjunûive i being fubfcribed, and the V remaining where it was. 3. Thefe temporal augments continue in all the other tenfes capable of augment, and are ever the fame. ANNOTATION. NevertheleA, though aï^u fubfcribes Smp, talleham, yet it does not fubfcribe ^a, the firll aoñft, nor »fxa, the perfeft aftive : wherein feveral are mihaken, fays Caninias; becaufe thefe tenfes come from the future â^S, tallam, which has no t. This is further fliewn by the participle of the firlt aor. a^aii a^wnoe, qui fußulit, and not • allait as it ihould be, if it followed the analogy of the prefent. Thus from (paita, appareo, fat. tpatä, cometh ttpnta and vipnta. But airéa, peta, fubfcribes the firft aor. nriaa, petivi, and refumes «U in the participle anwat, becaufe Jts future is airí¡i7u. Which a general role for'all others of the like nature. Cretßr 10$ Book Illr 0^Verbs7 " Gret/er pretends^ that tht change of a, long into «, and of the pr^et diphthong into improper, is rather a ßmple change than an augment ^ hetaufe, fays he, as the fyllahle- nuas already long, it had itf fw* meaßsres, 'which is all it can have after the change. But 'we muß not imagine, that art could here comprise the 'whole naturalforce and prac¬ tice of the language. For even among fiort and long fyllahles, there were fomeßterter and others longer than the reß, as vise have made ap¬ pear-elf evohere : the common fyllahles having been deemed common for ne ether reafon, hut becaufe as they bad a longer meafure than a Jhort fyllahle, and a jhorter meafure than a long one, it 'was no hard matter to make them pafs for either : and the diphthongs ji, a, having had their fuhjunSive r l^evu. auc-upor, infulto. »levo». ¡ievov. i" v?f»{or. ¿Sfíott, afßmilo. eïxx^or. ilxúoa. V" Ivävro/, dirigo. tSdvm', lv6vf!¡. èrâ^a. •vulnero. urcc^or, ¿ráoe>. The Attics fometimes change « into as so into «u j but morç •f this fort in the next chapter. Exceptions to the rules of the Temporal Augmtn{. Rule X, Verbs that do not change A into H. Gr ». A' is not changed in aw, aiw, aiiôsVcw, oln$í^o¡t,x}^ Examples.- Thefe four verbs retain « through all their tenfes Î «w, fpiro,flo, to diñinguiíh it from íov, taken from £w, fum : a'iw, audio, ai'ov, to diftinguiih it from rito», taken 0//l^ Témporas augment; 107 (aken from ¿U> or «»¡»1, vado: «nOto-rw, infuetus fum^ ¿n'óío-a-oi/, to avoid putting two nti fucceflively : ctv^í^ofA«!^ Udto afficior^faßdio, for tf^e fame reafon. Rule XI. Of Verbs that do not change t into but mak<ï a - Diphthong of k. E, inftead of being changed into t¡t oftentimes takes a 4 after it ; as fame manner^ law, lAtVo'ti), ?XW, CAHW, «6W, tpwt»¡ Ir^XW) £0UW,' '¿TtUy £|-t0w, ipyxPof»,Ci,i^ ^ tf «/9 ' ^ f ■ E X A M P L E S. Several verbs beginning with an t, take a 4 after it, and fo make their temporal augment in et diphthon^^ . as the following; ep¿ü), babe« } fbi®»» haleham» ' In the fame manner, fino i iXía-^a, 'vol-vt, ÍAf, ebfolete, inftead of which we fay, çeî^fAi, capio ; tTXor, cèpt> •. 'íTmu, and its detivatives, iWw and trabo, í&ut ionfitefco ; tçita and ftrp«, irma, ßOf \^va, cufiadlo, tvu, dica ; > twafiM, fiquor. ír'ííta, cottvivtum celebro ; operar. f«, ittduOf and colloco ; tÇa and o¡iou, feded, ANNOTATION. - ''tnea, cTwo», ebxtt retains its augment through all the other moods : «iÇf»ref. , oianmtdu, j ola.^, temo, guher-^'^!''*'^'^', \guherno, guhernatulmo naculum navis, rf ntmis rego. • J OieuiotortoÇtu, J ■ To thefe we muft join oUo/juu, folus ago, from oT«;, fotus. oly.u^tu, dotnum cuflodio, from cußot dotntts, oifAMu, ímpetu ruo, from o7/xo;, /emita, p'vf^* 1 from oTrçoç, eefirum. ploro, from otjxot, hei mihi : Bat the lañ makes o'¡A,a{i>», and ploraba». Hereto may be added oliarw, or dbodvu, turneo-, Stolieu' iiov Tuv op(/uv Herodi. popularium animi intumuo> runt. 1 hough it comes from olSíta, from whence is do; rived ùSmùt, tumidus, inflatus, in Suid. and Hcfych. CHAP. IV. Of the [Augment of Compound Verbs. Compound verbs may be reduced to two claQçs j thofe that are formed of a prepolition and verbj and thofe that are formed of other parts of fpeech. Thofe Of the Auoment of Compounds; ro^ , Thofe that are formed of other parts of fpeech, need not occafion any manner of difficulty; becaufe they agree entirely with the general rules, and receive their fyllabic or temporal augment, exaftly as if they were fimple verbs : «JrojueXcw, Jponte vento ; ^vto/aóxcov : Çihotrofiut philofophor^ ifihofófeov .* (OttCOTS futn^ idem fentioy ¿¡jío^^óvtov. As for thofe that are formed of prepofitions, we muft firft of all recoiled what has been faid concerning the apoilrophe. Book i. page 23, and afterwards take no¬ tice of the following rule. Rule XIV. ' Of tjie Augment of Verbs compounded with Prepo-f litions. 1. The augment in compounds generally fottovùs the pre' pojition: 2. And fometimes precedes it i \ ß. Sometimes it both precedes and follows. Examples. I. Verbs compounded with a prepofition vary great¬ ly, with regard to their augment ; generally fpeaking, however,. it takes place after the prepofition, being the fame in all tenfes as that of the fimple verb ; TSTgoo-gaA- A«, adjicio^ TîTçoo-sêaXXov, from |3«axw, jacio: 軫XA«»y- yiXt^of/íOity lata nuntiOy bonum nuntium afferOy ivvyyiXt' Çc/xnii. Though fometimes the Attics change £u into »U, as we ihall fee in thtf next chapter. Auo-ajffw, morofus fumy ¿ua-Yi^írsv : íua-asTrifw, dißculter aredoy dijfidoy Sv1ry|víf^v y and the like. 2. Some- iío "/Booè IIÎ. Of VE'Rhik • 2. Sometimes however the augment is put beáüttt the prepofitioni, which happens To the compounds of iufj-when it precedes a con* fónant, or an immutable vowel or diphthoilg i Jufr«» j^£M, infetix fiimi .* pudort fieSiOy exeroy iivO-UTiÖV. , • . To the compounds of » privative j df^oviuy incipim fuiity To compounds that make no change in the figni* fieation of the fimplej tvító, dormios xaÔîuX, iàmy ix¿h\i¡¡or (though we alfo meet with xaJèsviav without an augment, and with a circumflex on the penúltima} becaufe all compounds of two fyllables commencii^ with a vowel, that are without an augment, or that liave it in the middle, are thus accented j as o-ui/ay»; COgOy ffvi/fiyov : Tffccçdxcay COflCcdOy ■sfoc^tTxot : xaôflxw, dt- 'VeniOy xx^ñxovf &c. , *AvTióo¡AXiy and Ivxi/Tióojxuiy or contravius futi^ dvxvriúfíxv : tTTca and ivivu, dicOy ^vfJTtVy &c. To Ibme particular compounds when theflmple is ob- , folete; ¿¡ifiirZrirîUy dubiíOy d[*-pKftnTíov: ¿HTitoXUffupplicOy crOy ^vTiéeÁHv: ¿i/Tiíixíuy contra adverfarium agOy «mJ/xw» But there are forne of thefe that receive the aug¬ ment in the middle ; «VoXau«, fruoTy aV/xavoc, and Att. xTfnXciMovy (as we lhall obferve in the next chapter) aggredioKy : iyxu¡Ánx^uy celebrOy îauàty ívíxu¡ji,ix^ov, (where v is repeated by reafon of the follow¬ ing vowel) and iviyxuy.tx(ovy by adding a y. , In like manner, ¿Trtxa^suy auxiliary litixi^iovy Dion. Cair. tw.TJiÍEu«, do operaiHy aom. Í7irir^h\j» JponJeo, receives ibmetimes its augment in the be¬ ginning, as in the firft aor. i/yvij«, in the imperfeâ iiyvxTo ; and lométimes in the middle, as in the perfc£t Iníyiívxt, in the firft aor. éftJyW', from whence comes htíyvria-ínrit, and without an augment, and fjrncopated, ílyváfív». In like manner or ¡yxv^á^a/Mít oppignero, taken from ■ra;¿v¿a>, or tyxoçof, pigms, fometimes takes its augment in the middle, at other times in the beginning, and fometimes goes without any augment at all; which alfo happens to others. Some verbs- have "both the fyllabic and temporal augment; IfímíMúi, tmo, lucror ; and ii¡ji,m\tíxa. i aor. i. Rijv«, &c. • Here it is proper to obferve, that verbs compounded with ír, I*, trvf, where the » and * admit of fome change in the prefent, becaufe of the following confonant, according to what we have remarked in the firll book, alTume here their natural r and x, as often as the augment is in the middle ; as ervi^^^sy'a, comBuro, myí- ÇMyo»: íyxí'"^f inungOi inyx^K»- But as for the particular manner of changing thefe prepofitions, we (hall treat of it at large in Book vi. Chap. 2. Ç H A P. V. Of the Attic and Ionic Augments< ■ R U. L E XV. Df E changed into H, according to the Attic form* *ïbe Attics generally change t into n for their augment \ thus of ttiitvy íívvctpmv, they make ^tuvy ^Swxy.'nvi Exampltes.- TH E Attics, generally fpeaking, change t into n for their augment, whether it makes part of a diphthong or not. Therefore n is changed into y fubfcrlbed, and a# Into nu i as tixœ^w, 4iJßmilo% Imp. tinador, Att. ixagot» tlotû. Jeto, nofco ; Plufp. íííei», Att. ^hiy. cvxoixui, pretor; Imp. Att. hyxoi^w. eiorfílto; Imp. Att. iiv^oy^ Henee with them the ^rllabic augment is alfo changed into the temporal ; as if^iKXovy debehajps líur«/*siv, a\3yá,¡t.v>y ^oterami %ttiXôn-&vy volehamy &c. Rule ïia BOOK III. Of Verb S/ Rule XVI. E prefixed to the Temporal Augment i n refolved intli tx', tt put for Ai or jt*î. 1. the Attics Ukewife prefix to the temporal augment an it which takes the breathing of the prefent: 2. th^ refolve n into ix: 3. And in the perfect they put » infièaà of Xe or ¡u. Examples. 1. The Attics prefix an c to the temporal augment^ particularly to verbs commencing with an t or an 1, whether in the imperfeft, or in the other tenfes capa¬ ble of augment and this £ always retains the breath¬ ing of the prefent i whereas s in the temporal áugment takes a fmo'oth breathing. ¿^xut video't ugxoy, and hágxovt videbàm ; u^xxx, and icSgxxx, vidi. tíyut aperiö ; wy«, and íwya, aperuit from whence comes xv'iAx, the* perfeét middle. See the relblution ^f verbs. Book v. firw, dico ; eTjtov, íTt«, iuitoVt tuvx.' whence «TfOffKi- vovt Tz^ocintrxt allOcutus fum. ' iUt or ix[*it miito-, mxy £»)x«,* tnifii wheiite ^vmxoi intellexi. iixxt aßmiloy conveniens fumy perfedt middle. tÏM and mxx: in like manner, ixwui ixirxy and ioA*«, fperavi: í^yuyfacioy o^yx, and to^yxyfeci: the plu-pcrfeâ of which receives an augment in the middle, as we ihall more particularly obferve in the 20th rule. 2. They refolve « into £»5 as xyvvfAiy or xyxyfrangty \ aor. I. l^Xy Att. ixlx'y whence xxrix^xvy fregerunty ] John xix. 33. xiuy placeoy perfeft middle and tAÍ«, ; participle íató?, &c. 3. They change the augment of the perfedt A£ and /Jit into £i : xi^uy fumOy xíxvfx, and tlxtiçxy fumpfi: fi-d- ^o(/.xiy fortioVy ílfAx^fAXi y from* whence comes í\¡/.xe¡/.íiiXy fatum. ■ ANNOTATION. The Attics alfo join fometinies the fyllabic t to verbs beginning with n or a, though they have no temporal augment. è^ia, meto, perfeä ë^tixx, Att. ; from whence comc* fií¿px.x, imminxi, in Arillophanes. pello, aor. I. us-xy Att. ïuxx, middle ú(7¿[t,i¡r, iuexumt'' Rúlb bf'thi Attic A ¿tí me ht. iij . - Rvle XVII. Of the Attic Reduplicatioh in thé Perfeét. . When a verb begins with a, Jhort^ or iaith o, j, the "Attics add the twofirfl letters of the prefent to the perfeíí^ ■ E x a m p I. È s.. When á verb begins with « fliort, or with either of the two ihort vowels, d, », the common perfeft is Atticized by receiving the two firft letters, of the prcfcnt as Pref. , Com; Eerf. , Att. Perf. , Paf. Perf. 'ttlñtñdiy, ' içtHtt, tty-tiçu, congrego, . ¿y-vys^xecf ' viy-vye¡/xoui S\-Áu, petdo, , Petf.Mid. • annotation. . càdo, tnclino, is álfo re-dup]icated, but changes «j into », Ibecaufe this reduplication ought always to be ihort, making zicvK», according to the grammarians. , Rule XVIII. drhe Third Syllable of the Attic Perfeft made fliort. If the Attic perfebl has more than three fyllables, the third is made ßort, by changing d long vowel into ,a ßort one, and by driving s in the diphthongs «, su, or V in bo, ot>4 ' ■ ' ^ ' Example si • If the Attic perfeét Ihóuld chance to have more than three fyllables, the third fyllable is always ihortened, by changing » and u into their correfponding ihort vowels ij oj and rejefting the prepófitíve of the diphthongs s», su, or the fubjuhétive of ci, m i as for inftance, , . . pref. ' Com. Peff.' Att. Perf. ¿Aáfiei. ¡¡fitixct,- ¿iKriXtxa, molot îçarciâ, ii^árriK», l§»p0T«*«, ' iuterrigá, '¿Xtípai ■ ñXtífoi, - eiXÍXtft», nngo, ' tXeídto, iXtiXvKoe, wenio, "* vroíiMtxec, íyitrófxoixa^ faro, áxáu, ñxiOK», ¿K^Koa, > fuidio* annotation. ^ , We muft except ifiíía, firme, bareó, which makes \r\xce, and without íhortening the third íyliable, (o diflinguiih it from of the verb coutendo., . The Ionics iife alio fometimes this fort of reduplication, in verbs beginning with m ; .as eù^o, capia aïptxâ, ¿çofiçi*» ; whence «>.^ai^x«;(,.in Hérod. y«» Uturiafuii donaius in certaminihus, Con- -^ning iííSbK* and èéyvytx"^ fefolution of verbs. Book v. i ^ :ii4 boôîç hi. 0/verbs; Rule XIX- Of the Plu-pcrfeft of thofe fame Verbs,' The plu'perfe^ of thofe verbs, except i\iv9ù, admits^ moreover, of a temporal augment. Examples. This reduplication remains-in the plu-perfeft Attic; but then the ñril; vowel is changed to make, moreover, a temporal augment ; as, tongrtgmit, "t and > îyiyt{*«, txtitavt, j fódi, ¿kwo», auáivi, íkwóup. • We muft except lAeúOw, vento, Ia^aux«, cAnXuxtt».* and in the middle, ¿aiíavO«, ixnxv^uf ; ever preferving t ia the firft fyllable. Rule XX. Of Pltt-perfe£ls augmented in the Second Syllable. Some Attic plu-perfeSls have the augment in the fécond ßU table as, ioXv», ¿ÚÁiretv ; fogycf, tto^ytiv ; teu», túxHv. Examples. Some preterites of the middle verb having taken a fyllabic augment, according to the Attic form, receive alfo a temporal augment in the fécond fyllable of the plu-perfe¿t, by a fimilar analogy to that of the verbs of the î2th rule, p. 107. "EAttw, _^ero, "perfeft middle oAt«; Att. Uxmi; plu-perfe¿t iuXvttp ! ¡çy», fado, ío^y», iúgytiv t uxm, affimilo, or Jimiiis fum, toix», ¿(¿kiip: inftead of faying iióxirti», vôçystt, rioíxu», with thé temporal augment OQ the ñrft fyllable, like thofe of the preceding rule. Rule XXL Of the Ionic Augment. ' 1. The Ionics give alfo, to the aorißs the redupliçatîeé of the perfed : 2. Which continues the fame in the piu-perfed, within^, any further augment. Examples; 1. The Ionics ufe fometimes in the aoriils the re¬ duplication of the perfeft, ^nd. particularly in the fc- ^ ~ cond; Of the X&'nic Aüömekt. tOnd; and then this reduplication continues in all the fnoods; as xc¿i*vuf labon^ Íx(k¡/.ov, xlkocixo» : rí- eedOf i-xjuSoij xí^átíov i tux«, Hefych. apparo^ ituxov, TÍTUXOV, in the inñnit. rtTMxû»: íxíu, difco^ ÏSxovt Sí- ixov : ^ttó, prebendo^ to», jaîiax^tto» : rd^wy ex- tendOf trayovt rtruyor. Which continues'^in the other moods, as we íhall fee hereafter. Likewife in the middle verb; capio^ íxxtoví lyiiddle, ixuQófjíTítf and accept: rí^vu), deleStOy tCTXÇiréiJifiv : rtv^oiy firuOy TfTup^éjwui» ; ÏTU»0«K»JI*«»,- or tFtvêofJtXty äudiOy fcifcitOfy ZÍlVv9 ÓfJíflV. Which happens even to verbs in as xtxXuô», audiy for xXudi, • imper. from xxu/m, audio. This reduplication is fometimes alfo in the future; as mwiOflV», Horn, for to-íGao-w, from otG:'», confidoy credOy cbfe^or: Heiych. from fA-íya^ or [*íyuv[j.t^ fnifceoy commifceo. They alfo repeat now and then the two firft letters of the preient in the aorifts, in the fame manner as the Attic perfeét above mentioned. Rule xvii. as ä^x^ovy -tí, -í, Lucí, formed from «foi/, without an augment, inftead of from the "verb to catrj or take away % or from to Jit or to accommodate. . 1. The Ionics are fometimes fatisfied with this re¬ duplication in the plu-perfeft, without requiring another iyllabic augment ; as xtxeé^xtn» for txtxa^xtt;', from ad^u, fondeo : ttôtjiAtXiW« for tT£Ô£jt*iX»Wo, from ^£[xsXióofjt.xty fundor^ arts : x£;¿wf«x£ff«i/ for tki^u^nxca-xvy from giotf evadoy proficijcor. ruvpsvxvy Herod, for cxpf from-Tuirl«, verberoy where moreover there is a ihortening of the penúltima, -t { Dor, riiflofitst n - ^ Tviflorrtt like thé dat. finç. of et wwloto-i, [the participle, Oblhrvations On thé Ciialeâs. Tbis Doric anahgy of changing lut into net in the plural it getter^ for all the other tetfet of all verbs ; as in the aoriß, vrl^u,\ui, hé' oro/ctf, from whence feems to he deriosei the French aoriß, nous allâmeSt nous battmes, nous fîmes, the third perfon plural is always like^ the dative plural tf the fet' ticiple of the fame tenfe% rvdiueri, trerberant or verberantibas: ¿af the Dor. mate it like the dative ßngular, rvdlorrt, verberant or vet' beranti. Which is alfo general for allforts of tenfes and verbs. fhey Ukewife which is almoft the fame as if they made them in ßn/y wo-«, ^o-w; according to the relation which 4«* bears to thefé three mutes, |3, t, But becaule the letter r« OMt'ttf. w «W I Firft Fut. 4. íít%í'' Ç> y^Áfatf I ^1 to wrtte» iB¡ rimú, J .ri^u, te beat, 3. Verbs in yw, xu, j^w, xtm, form the firft future in ^w, which is equivalent to yo-w, x of the circumflex accent, are conjugated like the fécond future -, whereof prcfently. In like manner for the middle j ßxil^uy vado-y ßxSi- vefixi and ßxSis[jt.xit vadam : xymi^ofAxt, certOy pugno ; diyayl<70ft,xt and xymvuf/.xiy pugnabo, Which is alio to be obferved in regard to the other moodsas c "oi 'EfiXmi, ^ ^0-sTc; Ti @íZii,oíí fviáfium Mvíec ix^ámocit, »¡^voiát ríi wctrgitít Tan iooUfMmt xTtoanrar ¿^»igóo'io'dtp &C. Beßitt, COK you tußame that very land vjbere the Greeks firß exerted their Uhertjt twill you fee laid vsaße thofe temples, where the vows they offered up ft the gods, rendered them viSorious over the Medes ? tan you aholiß tit rites of your anceßors, and of thofe who laid the foundation of tlm edifice f Here we fee t^fëri inftead of içofMotrt, as he faid beforf MiúeriTts and afterwards in the future. R u t E XXVII. Future in luV», or ccirul J. ^be following verbs y vxíuy fíwy wf«» báif uttoy» make the future in tiiru, 2. But xXfttw, and noduy take scCru. Examples. 1. Diflyllables in tu take a v in the future, after the AEolic form -, wxi», navigo j /i», fluo j fundo j ■arviw, fpiro ; in the future wxtuo-», ftuvw, &c. See the refolution of verbs,. Rule xxxii. ©£w, curroy makes ^-suVeu; middle ^tiropouy > and in Thucyd. ^fufnp.ois', vía, for nato, to fwim, makes »iura and vrttruy according to Euftath. and for neoy to fpiUy it only makes vwu. • , 2. After the fame ^olic form, xXaw, feo, tnake^ jcXttúo'»} and ^idvy or uroy x^uV», Rule XXVIII. Of Futures that receive an Aipirate.' Give an afpirjite to thefe four futureSy KPuy S'tttLui ôvrJ/Vy and Exam-' Of tie First Aorist; 123 Examples. The four futures mentioned in the rule require a rough |)reathing, though their prefent tenfe be without it. bahfot «If. nutrió, 'tv^u, atiendo, SwJ'f. turro, Sji'If. ANNOTATION. Some grammarians pretend, that «|f takes an a/pirate to dißinguiß it from (|f. extra, which has a fmooth breathing : , accendam, ta dißinguijh it from rv'\'a, verberabo; and , nutriam, to dißissguiß it from tç/a)/«, vcrtatn : thefe dijferences are proper to be taken notice of, though th^ do not hold in , which has no other oppoßte word. The true reafon therefore of this change is this : theprefent of thefe verbt bath a fmooth breathing, or a lenis, oriy becaufe of the other afpirate that foUoweth i which being left out in the future, they refume the rough breathing which was natural to them. This isßill plainer in the perfeä, where, for example, the aSive has rtrqcpa, and the middle rh^ofa, with a T in the penúltima, by reafon of the (p that follows: whereas the pajßv» has TcOja^juai, with a 6. becaufe it is not foUowedby another afpirate. There are lèverai barytons which borrow the future of circum* flex verbs ; hí>ja, .naofiai, as if it came from ßatdoiiM, and the like ; of which we lhall treat elfewhere. For it is pommon with the Attics to change the barytonous verbs into circumflex. Some have both futures ; as ßaTOiM, jacio, ßcCKÜ, and ßoc^io-tiS pyfiça, gaudeo, and ■/yi^aa, AndVre^uently they fom a new verb from a regular future; as ¿la, feroi ota-a, fer am i ¿laa, fero', whence ¿tarxt,ferte, U.A. and thç Jiké; of which we fliall give further examples, Book v. Chap. i. Rule XXIX. Formation of the Firft Aorift. The ßrß aorift is formed from the firft future, hy change ing into «, and taking the augment of the imperfeh. Examples. The firft aorift is formed from the firft futuré, changing «into «, and taking the augment of the imperfedi as, t nta, honoro, trw, riaa, ■ trtaa. finia, verbero,. tronío,, riil^a, trvtj/oí. . f?tní{a, fpero, ÍAm^or, tKot'taa, ñítma-a. So that the chara.tooa., Wefimetimes meet with the third perfin plural of this tenfi in aoi, like that of the perfeS ; tl^aàt, Ariftoph. in Nebul. for li^at, ceffe- runt, from 1?*«, cedo : and again, oí, in Avib. for «Ado», vénérant. Though others are of opinion, that this is the third ferfin plural of the perfeQ, by changing k into ^ttd on the contrary, the third perfin plural of the f erfeS in aoi, it fometimes formed in as i tes fçtxani, for tèstp^Mcios, Lycophr. horruerunt, from ^St ov into o ftvyu, /itgio, fvyS i igtvyu, ru3o, ifuyS, • 5. Except that diflyllables change the « of the firft future into u in this fécond future (whether it comes from the diphthong « in the prefent or not) as often as there is a liquid before or after the < ; Before ; as vyjuu, ptico, fut. 1. v>ls^io, fut. 2. take an intermediate infiead of an afpirate. ' examples. Several verbs change alfo their cbafaâènftic in thi^ fécond future. The following take an alpirate inftead of a lenis: Pref. a. Fut. Pref. a. Fut. a^Uf neSOy àpS. ßinrio, tingOy ßxfS, Sútrla, /pelioy Tu^S' S^vvrkty lacero, S¡¡vfS¿ f¿<¿\ay fúOy fa^a, ftarlt». Jacio, ftpS» axá'jcla, fodio, axafü. Théfe take an intermediate inftead of a lenis; Pref, i. Fut. , xcOivA, ecculo, xo¿K'Jé3, ßfMoflo, lado, , xgv^uy, cceulo, x^t43, ¿eculam». , And the following aíTume an interíncdiate írfí Read of an afpirate: Pref. ■ a. Fut. aij.vxfi>, uro, ■ ■ a/ivyS. ' rtf^gtro, 4"^«» annotation'. ^he reafon of thtfe changes is obvious ; the two laß veris maHing in the firß future, and | having the power of ay, they retain this y id the fécond future, becaufe of the affinity it has with the firß. And this analogy will be further illußrated by the next rule. The fitß feven having been formerly in (pa, ßäpu, f^c. and the ether three in ßu, ßfASa, i¿c. they have taken a ess in theprefiht, inßeaiof ß and (p, merely becaufe as a r was injerted, thefe two letters could not go hefore it, for the reafon alledged. Book I. Chap, vii, n. 6.. So that is this T is lofi in the fécondfuture, they refumt their natural charaSerißki Rule XXXV. Pf Verbs in Çw or trda. Severalverhs in make the fécond future in iw, as ççxSZ: ánd others in xyot, tS^wop, are fécond aorißs, which retain the e ; Jhewing at the fame time, that dijßllables nuy ham this penúltima long, by reafon of the augment. But exclufive of that, the penúltima may be alfo long, when a verb of two ßllables begins ^ agOp tiywo But the penúltima may become ßoort in the fécond aoriß offeme of theß werbs, either by refolution, as ñ^a, deleâo, Sí«», îaiot ; aya, Or iyn* (St, frango, vyoi, "ayoi : or by reduplication, as aya, daco, ^701» %yayoi', a^a, apto, n^op, v^a^ot, whence comes a^a^itp, Odyjf. f, fot then the penúltima betontes ante-penultima. RULE XXXVII. Of the Third Perfon Plural in coco. The third perfon plural of the imperfeßl, of both aorißs, and of the optative, is formed in the Boeotian dialed, h) changing [jciv of the ßrfl perfon plural into a-xo. '■Examples. , " v The third perfon plural is equal in fyllables with the firft fingular, as well of the imperfeft, as of the two aoriUs ; íTvorJoo, ervorooíTV\f/x, crvif/xo, - But the Bœotians make it equal to the firft perfon plural, changing pcíp, the laft fyllable of the firft perfon of this number, into cxv: tTVTrlofjcio, verherabamus ', irvorjo' cxo, verherabant-, lrviro¡jcto, verberavimus-, iríorocj^v, ver- beruiverunt : trvtl/xfaio, irutpxcxo. In like manner they fay, ui^ocxo, viderunt, noverunt i Ifjcx^ocxu, didicerunt-, ix^ccxo, Of the pEftFEÇT ànd Pí.UrPERFGT. Igl «xOofl-ac, venerunti for itSovt r\6ot. Thus in the pfaltn, íJbX»ao-«v t»Tç , pronus (um, me inclino, ¡xvirott tansfualt ßxvwvtt very ufuaU In like manner, uCKím», fnratus fum, rather than ix^anoa, from xidma. As alfo imyoAyna, evafi, libera« tus fum, defunâus fum : detrimentum accepi : ioxifrit, folTus fum: and occultatus fum : fepultus fum : iffiÇw, prxcipitatus fum : io/tvyna, abfumptus fum : ÙçùÇait, laceratus fum : confutus fum. CHAP. X. Of the PerfeSt and Plu-perfe£l, Rule XXXVllI. Charafteriftic and Termination of the Petfeft. * ^be termination of the perfeil is in x»: but ibofe that bave \J/w in the future^- make the perfeil in px\ and if they have they make it in y¡c¿. Examples. TH E perfeft terminates always in «, and has gene¬ rally x for its charadteriftic ; as t»w, tít»x«, hono' tavi:, ipxxXcJ, ï^pxÀxxy ceci ni : dav&u, íl»vxx, perfect. But verbs that form their future with a double letter^ take an afpirate for the characleriftic of the perféét, each of them the afpirate correfponding to its double confo- nant;. viz. ^ for «-(Pi tf/u making çx, as tuwI«, rtrvtpx : and x, making as xí^u, die am ^ XiXt^x, dixi ; éf fodiam ; fodi^ &C¿ Neverthelefs ç§i&f»x«, ilvith a H, becaufe of the preceding afpirate p. This tenfe is conjugated thus : »Perfeil, Sing. - - - rirvipa, rirvfxf, rirvft, merherßt/it -tfia 'it\ Dual , - - - - " - niTvtpa.m, rtri^avoa, SriTÍfa/MP, TiTvÇart, rervpeUrt, Dor. rtripctfutf, - - - nrsTvpam, Bœot. - - - - - - TiTvj»». K 2 R^ULE 132 Book m* Of _Verbs^ Rule XXXIX. Of the Penúltima of the Perfeft. • I. The penúltima of the perfeSi is the fame with that of the future. "2. But the t of the future dijfyllahle of verbs in A«, ÇW, is changed here into »: > 3. Ana V into y : 4. Or elfe the » is entirely dropped^ as in dijfyllahles in tivUf ivUy vvu: j;. continues^ hut takes an n after it, without changing t into X. Examples. Ï. The penúltima of the perfeft is taken from that of the future ; as rvirju, Tvtpw, rÍTVipx. ludo ; ouai^ùi, luß. impïeo ; nXiuu, Wn-Xitxa, implevi. yOuia, rideo ; yt\á(Ta, , ytyí>MKa, riß. 2. But verbs in Aw, i/w, çw, aíTume an « in the per- feét, inftead of the t of the future diflyllable. í-íMm, mittoi trafwa, miß. TiUa, tendo', t£»S, r/raxa, tetendi. femino', eve^S, IvBa.^r.ot,, Jeminavi. 3. Thofe in vw change y into y, by reafon of the following X : (puirii), lucto^ Çuvù, wífayKU, luxi, 4. Or elfe they drop it entirely, as in diíTyllables in ' tt-M, Im, and Jyw; for inftance, ^rtisa, interimo, »ritú, ïxTxxa, interemi : (Though the Poets fay, ïxTxyxx.) Mcufo, judice ; kíx^ikx, accußavi. Sv»«, Ímpetu/erar % hvnù, rtôvxx, latus/um. Hereto we may add, according to Cherobofcus, xi^^xUij, lucror J ' xs^^xuZf xé^íxxx, without a >. .!But triflyHables change it ipro y; as, fíoXúvu, polluo% . jtifiiKvyxx. 5. jt* continues, but takes an »1, after it, without re¬ quiring an X to precede, though there fliould be an t in the future diflyllable i as, »s/xoi, pafco ; »=^<3, Htéfj,r,xx, for téti^xx. ß^sfjiu, fremo ; ' Bi'^^ifirixx. r.xfíta, laboro ; xx¡í5, xíxx¡a,r,xx : And by fyncope xtxjmixa, in the fame manner as Js/*w, ßruo,Siiy,nxx: Tl¡s.vu,feco, tít¡j.wx. See Book v. Rulcix. ANNO-j Of the Perfect and Plu-perpect. 135 ANNOTATION. Hereto we, may join ¡úw, ma$uo, ¡ittZ, nt/ntnn» ; for the true rea- fon of this is, becaufe from the futur^ in u there is formed a new. theme in ía, ¡ttnZ, ¡íitía, whence comes fuppofing the fu¬ ture ftmcai and lb for die reft. See the refolucion of verbs. Rule i. Rule XL. 0 for E in the Penúltima. The Attics put 0 for t in preterites dijfyllahle ending in Ct, ß^eX"' Att. ßsS^QX*' ANNOTATION. The fame preterite may come from different verbs : nx» from deleSQ : and from colloco, pono : is alfp in t|ie perfeâ tniddle of wu, vento ; and the firft aorift of tniM, mino. Rule XLI. Formation of the Plu-perfe¿t. ^he pîu-perfeSt comes from the perfect^ takes siv for «, and prefixes its own augment. Examples. The plu-perfe¿t comes from the perfeft, chan^ng « into nv, and prefixing its proper augment : Tvofla, rérvÇet, irirvípítr, v^>'^^raveram, útía, nrvKo,, itvxeir, ptrfeceram. It is conjugated thus : Plu-perfect. {irtTvÇiiv, ÎTtTvÇni, iriTvftt, verheraverattt, 1 ItItS'/I } - ■ - Att. irervipn, • r - ÎTiTvfn, Dual, - - - - - irsrofliiTor, Irtrvftirrif, Ítrerípet/xiv, irirvr^/i*iî, * ■- r rvwm, FerfeSl and Pîu-perfeB. sin? S ftrvfu, rirvftif, rsrv^, ' njerhtravtrlm, or ' ®* ( Ipn. - - - - - - TtTÚ^jis-». - Pual - - - - - rtriiptirot, rttvipnror. pjjjj, Î r$TÍ^aiíni, rtritpvn, rtriÇun, \ Dor. rtrifufitif - - - rtrvfum,' ANNOTATION. Ih conjugating the Jjitlyunäivt, it is cußomary to aJJ «¿c» fi : thtt^ . iccp rvifía, fi verberem. It it not true, as/ome pretend, that the/ub- juttSive has no future, lecaufe the aorißt frequently ßgmfp the time to come in this mood, as-feveral before us have ohferved, VolT. et alii. fFherefore Ramus, Sylburgius, and others, after fbeir example, call , thefetenfes futuues perfect, that is, compofed of the paß and of the future. i The'Greeks ufe here a kind of future by circumlocution, taking the preterite of the participle, and t|ie prefent fubjunâiye of thç verb fubftantive; thus, . Sing. fàv TCTv^f, S, it;, %, verhtravere, -is, -if. Dual lav TiTU^WTi, stw, îtov. Plu/. Ia> tctv^tfi, Sfxa, Sti, Zn. They alfo make ufe of the futore of the verb fpbftantive in thi? circumlocution ; yt-y^a^ùf ío-oijmi, fcripfere. They form likewife thé circumlocution of the preterite by the optative of the fubftantive verb e>D>,'(>«}{, cívi^ as ilvp y*yq«fà(, fcripfijfem ; tînt yty^a^àt, fcripßjfes, &c. Ohfervations on the Dialers. ^ ^ TXr fécond perfon ßngular in 3», is not only for this mood, but gene- , rally for all perfons in »iç, noix, eras, n^d even for thofe in ttç, as oyr ßall fee in the refolution of verbs. The third perfon ßngular in ot, is not only for the aSiye, but alfo for the paffive aorifls, rvçiwi ; for the verbs in ¡as, rtinot ; and for the circumflex verbs, wo»?«-». Hence comes tsMtiot, in Hom. for mxein, ipcreparet, from mxiiu, poet, for mxia. , The poets frequently put ait o inßead of a in the ßrß perfon plural, TvvT«/xir. . ■ , II. 0/O PTAT I VE. The penúltima of the optative is a diphthong in all forts of verbs. The barytons take ot in all tenfes, ex¬ cept the firft aorift, which áíTumes »i, both in the aftive and middle verb, becaufe it comes from the^ of the indicative, from K4; ^ The Plur, •{ 136 Book III. Of Ve r b sJ The paflive aorifts, and the iEolic aorift, take u. The fécond future has a circumflex ; in other rç* Ipeéts it, is the fame with the aorift. This mood is thus conjugated : Prefent and Imperfeß. Sing. - - - Ti/irTotç» rvwcti, vtrhcrartM^ Dual. T - - - TI/TTTOÍTO», • TBWTOIT»!». , TivrotfAcii, TÚtttoití, TvaToie*. , Dor. rvvrot[ii.iff Firß Future. Sing. - - - TV'i'ot, verierent, -w» -Ä« Dual - - - Ti^otTor, Ttil/oÍTij». -p. Í ri-i/oi/jíAf vAJ/oiTe, rv^ottt. Firfl Aorifi. Sing. - - - ró^J/atíf TvyJ^nfs verheravtri^. Dual — - - - rv4/e»ro>, Tt)'4'aÍT>ii'. p. 5 TwI/aet/ii», rú'i^cner. i Dor. Seeend Future. Sing. - - - rvTroTfit, rwoT;, rturo", verherem. Dual r - - - - T tvnoÍTdtf ruToírtir. Ç rvmífííi', Ttwom, TWoît». I Dor. rwoTfUí. , Second Aoriß. ç. 5 rviroiftt, nrvvûti, rvwot, verberaverim. ÎIop. T«T¿íro.^.. Dual 7 - r — 7 T^ÍTOÍTOP, Tt/W0»T9iP« Plur í rvTroifíi», rÍTToiTff rv'jronvm • \ Dor. Perfeß and P¡u-perfe£l. Sing. - - - rerv^oifii, titú^ok» rsrvÇoi, vtrhef^ißtM* Dual ^ - - - - TtTt^íUTO», TÍTU^OÍTÍ)». pi í TeT¿^oi/xsr, TfTvÇotre, rerúfotm. ' I Dor. T6Tt!^8»/X.ÍÍ. ANNOTATION. As the Détins frequently maka ufe of utinam in the optative mood, for a mark of delire; fo the Greeks ufe «ïfli or d'fls ; as lífi« TWToift», utinam verberem. But as thefe adverbs do not determine the perfon, we moreover make ufe of the tyord of which notice ihall be taken in the remarks. Book Viii. Rule XLIII. Of the Firft Aorift .®olic. The AEolic aoriß of the optative comes from the indi' cative aorißf hp infer tinga before ». ' Exam« Of the imferative and Infinitive. 137 Examples. The ^olic aorift of the optative is formed from the aorift of the indicative, by dropping the augment, and putting {( before «. It is conjugated thus: j€o!ic Aorifi. Sing. ' Dual ^ • w^tietro», Plur. rv^iUtrij ré^uxii. The Attics frequently ufe this aoriif; but then it Is only in the fécond and third perfon fingular, and the third plural. CHAP. XII. Of the Imperative and Infinitive. I. The Imperative. Prefcnt and Imperfe«5t. $ing. TT- tlncrt, rvirtha, verbera, -eret. Dual - - - tiÍttíto», mvieritat, verberate, 'treHt, duO. «I C riirrere, rvtrréruax», verberent. {Att. T r - rviTTwTa»». Firft Aorift. Sing. - - - rv^ov, Tvi>¿ra, foc verberenteris. Dual - - - p. t rv'^/xraa-at. , ¿ Att. . - - Tv^ánuf, Second Aorift. Sing. - - - Tvirt, rvicira. Dual . . - Ti/TTSTo», rvirirm. Plur. J TVTTtTs, rvtrtrao'ctrit* Att. « - - Tvnôrruï* Perfe£t and Plu-perfeft. Sing. . - - rérvípt, rtrvípíru, verberaveris or hoc agt Dual - - - TtTtip«'''«», TBrv^irmt, ut poß-modum verberaffi Flur. - - • rerépíTt, Tervipíruaxii, dicaris : * * Where it is plain that this tenfe partakes pretty much of the future. RULE XLIV. Of the Third Perfon Attic. The third perfon plural Attic in the three tenfes of the imperative, ísíum-AiVí and formed from the genitive of the participle. Examples. The Attics terminate the third perfon plural of the prefen^ 138 Book III. Of Vb_rbs; prefent, and of the aortfts, in v-rm^ forming it froth the genitive plural of the participle of the fame tenfes. Examples may be feen above in the conjugation of the imperative. The like happens to circumflex verbs, votstruvf Luci. facianty for ^sr^ivTUVy id^ inetiantuTy ' for {tTwo'av. . ANNOTATION,. imperatiw bath no particular futurcy bp rtafon it is a fort of 4 future itfelf, atcarding to Ramus and Sastäiusy partcJùng of the futtare all its ttnftu Obferyations on the'Dialeâs. 'fht Bceotians and Syraeufians fometimes terminate thefeeond aoriß ¡if Hie thefirfl ; as Tfwo»» «t«, for riens: Á1C01, íruy for ùisty dixeris. And they add the augment of thep^eS^ ^trvft, as lut have obferved Rule xxi. II. The Infinitive. The infinitive in each termination may exprefs every difference of time : we fhall however divide it as wc have doné the other moods, not only to comply with the general practice of grammarians, .but moreover, becaufe indeed it commonly expreffes that kind of time, which is attributed to each termination. r ^ol. "Twrw, or lyrnv. Pref«nt & ImperfeA, rismn, veréerare, - - - < Dor. oivTsf, rumifta, « , C rwri/stm, ' f ^oL TÚ^W. Firft Future, - - - r^uv, vtrleraSurum tffe, Í Dor. Tvjtv ro4*/*ay « C Firft Aorii^ ... . vtrhtrtreife, ■- - Dor. ru^if*it & rv^iftinu f Ion. rvinstf. Second Future&Aotift, rmtívf - - - . J Poet. TfrturEry. f tEol. otntmi. Perfeft Êf Plu-perfeft, veriergvi/p!, - - Dor.TeTvpi/jiiySenTofffeemt Rule XLV. Of the principal Dialefts of the Infinitive. Tü^tíív wakes rvirrtiVf rvtrrtVy TMotrifs.ivxty and rvirrifLu' Examples. The Dorics drop » in the termination tiv of the infi¬ nitive } TuiTTfiv, riiTTtv i Kxtuvy XxtiVy capere ; yeçaigutt ytçxtçtvy tenerarí ; without any neceflity for putting a circumflex, though the laft fyllable becomes fhort. The fame Dorics, as alfo the .®olics, infert an «1 be¬ fore vy either fimple, if they take it from the termination or fubfcribed, if they confider it as coming from 2 tí»: Of the I » F I M I T IV 1. 13^ »» : which they pra¿life in regard to all forts of verbs ; ^cAiiSw for dfiffnire .* Theocr. for xoo-- fitiv, ornare: çthwt or ^»Xw, for fíXí«», amare\ atjd 'drawing back the accent, according to the ^oL çixriy. In all the infinitives ending in tiy, xv, »«1, the Ionics and poets infert j»t before v (¿ailing off the fobjunftive, if there be a diphthong) and then the Attics and Do* rics add fometimes to the laft fyllable, whether it be in the common tongue or not. Examples have been given already in the conjugation of the infinitive ; but fince this happens to all forts of verbs, we ihall add here a more particular table. j Commoii. Ionic, Att. & Do¡r. / TÓwre-i-», rvaTe-fce-r, rvçrré/*e>-»tf _ ^erhtrare% íí|Xo-í»-ir, S^\íi*íi>-eu, ßgnijicart, St-7-teu, Se-^e-», ponerc, S'a-t'-ii-CM, Sé-fM-Uy íóftiP'eu^ dare. Ti/ÇÔift!»-«!, verberatum eJfiJ rtéf-r-eu, ' T>8i-^e-i>, Ttíí/jítr-cu, fonere. Iri-t-M, ifi-ftt-Pt ßare. jrv-'-eut rv-/*s-p, rí-iAt»-eu, the fame. itíí-p-aiy hió-fít'P, iiSiiAtp-»ty dart, inxpù-p-euy hixpv'ne-Pf SnKPv¡/,tp-at, cßendtre. The firfi aoriß conforms likewife to this analogy^ cafiing off the fubjunStive », and changing a, into t j tú^J/«», Tü*|/é- fiiVf Tvtptfjí(i/ett. Except the verbs in xw, ¡AUy vw, gUy in which it receives no change. Sometimes p is reduplicated i for taken from dghy arare. Sometimes the diphthong t » remains} ¿tl¡t.tvxiyfor aíjwtvai, • from ¿nvy flare. Sometimes a fyncope is made ; XlfAtv for »Ílftí», from »in», videre: typ^tv for l-xip-iVy from i-xtiVyhústrc: where you-fee the dfpirate ^ changed into its intermediate y. The lonicsy to get rid of the circumßeXy put an t before tiv in the fécond future and aoriß-y ■ rvvtuy for rvatTyi adding thereto the reduplicatioUy as ^e have obfefved above. Thus in Hom. we find rtxvxiny for -rvxtTvy from rvxuy paro : for . ^ J verbero^ -at, -et. i * ' * ■ ' r ' ¿ vtrbtraim,-ût,.tt, , Fîrft Future. j TÚ^vr, .... - <> , ,, T> 'I . tverheraturut, or a -a,c, Dor. rv.U^d, „«ríwí», », Í. gut, gua, guod, verleravi, -ißt,- ¡¡t, ri nnror, -irret, » Perfeft, • TiTixfiiiç, -ÓTSf, ^ol. T!Ti^«!r, -orref, "J ' « TeTv^v-a, -aç, l gui, gute, guod, verleravi,-ißUU ', T ' ' Í and vcrberavcram^ -tfi, jf, «c# to TÊTv^f, -oroÇf - - - - - J ANNOTATION. The malculine and neuter participles follow the imparifyllabic decleniion ; and the feminine the parifyllabic. Befides the dialeâs above marked, they alfo admit of thofç which are proper to declenfiops. Oi/ervattm Of Participles ; and'the Verb Passive.' 141 ObfervatUms on the Diale£ls. , The ftmmnt in «ur» for w», is according to the JEoUc eu nuell at Doric form ; yúJutw» for ridens ; and in Theocritus wi find even ytiMaet, though perhaps it is for yO^ra,: For when the termination ña-a, is accented^ which happens to the fécond future andfécond aoriß, it is then formed in Saa ; as tAnuaa for iisvñaa, quae reliquit, from >sWa, linquo. The lending the termination of the prefent to the perfeS, as nv^cn for rtrvfof, is more u/ual in the middle verb ; as xtxXÓyiop, -omç, for KtxXnyài, -¿roc, from clango. The fame is alfo praSifed in circumflex verbs ; -orcoc, from MÍa, cogito. The Attics make the mafculine and feminine of the dual both alike : thus Soph, in Eleß. hath ¿i^uióaaifrt, v^áaaotrt, fpeaking of two fiflers, inflead of ¿tfttióaaaa, w^áaauaa ; juß as they fay rù for ra, in the dual of the article. We likevrife meet with InrnXuc and ioríoé'Kuu in the firfi aoriß, for vniis'KÍiaoLC, from 'icXua, în'Kuaa, navigo : and with íyáyac for ùyayat, from aya, duco^ aiFero. CHAP. XIV. Of the Verb Pafftve, and its Terminations. TH E paflive is eafy to conjugate, becaufe, with regard to its augment, charaileriftic, and penúl¬ tima, it depends upon the aitive, from which it forms all its tenfes. So that there remains only the termina¬ tion, which may be retained eafily by means of the following rules. RULE XLVI. Of the Paflive Terminations. The prefent, and both futures, the perfefll, and the fub- junSlive, take ¡xas for their final : but the imperfect, and the plu-perfebl, voith the optative, have pcnv. Examples.' Throughout all the paflive (except the aorifts, which follow the aétive form of conjugating) there are but two terminatfons for the firit perfon, viz. /*at for the prefent, the two futures, the perfeft, and the fub- jundbive; for the^imperfedb, the plu-perfeft, and xhe optative. - Here it is to be obferved, that thofe tenfes, which havi an St or an Ü) before or nwi retain it in the firfi perfon cf all numbers, as likewife in the third perfon plural : but in t4t Book HI. Of Vîrbs." in the ether perfons they change it. Thofe that havi mether vowl preceding the termination^ de not alter it, as may be eafily feen in the next table. Rüle XLVII. Of the Third Perfon lingular and Plural. From /*«> comes t«», and from ¡».w comes ro, which Ut the plural make vrxi, vro. Examples. The tenfes in form the third j^fon fingular in 4«! and thofe in /uup form the fame third perfon in to then by adding a v to both, the plural is termi* nated in vrui or »to ; as liofíxi, bonoror rUrou, honora- tur} TíopT«», honorantur. ANNOTATION. the ftcund perfon, purfuant to the fame analogy, fiouJdhe in aiu,of in tro, as it is fill in the perfeS and plu-perfeS, and even in the prefiní of fome particular verbs: hut the Ionics having rejeäed tie confinant, the Attics made a contraHion into p fub/cribed in the prefiní, and into u in- the insperfeQ : as tí^/xcoi rita-at, tUas, rip, honoror, honoraris : irtofnis, irUco, ItUo, iría, honorabar, honorabaris, itfc. Rule XLVIII. Formation of the other Perfons. The fécond perfon plural of every tenfe and mood, the prefent and perfect of the imperative, as alfo the ■ tenfes in 3-at in the infinitive, are all formed front roil and TO, by changing the t into 6, and by adding a V if the h be alone. Examples. The firft perfon plural is quite eafy. For it is always in hx, coming .from the firft perfon lingular, wherein there is fcarce any room for a miftake. The others are more difficult : they are formed thus; From this third perfon fingular in t«» or to, the fé¬ cond petfon plural is formed in all moods and tenfes. From the fame perfon is alfo formed the prefent and Îîerfedt of the imperative in all perfons; except the econd, (for it has no firft) which comes from the fe-. Cond perfon of the fame tenfe in the indicative, in att forts of verbs palllve. From í'ORlÜAtíON if thé ÍaSSIVE; Í43 prom thence likewife are formed the tenfes in 0«i» - in the infinitive, viz. all but the aorifts. Whereto we might alfo join the fécond and third perfon dual in all tenfes} but of thefe we have faid enough álready. • All thefe formations are made, by changing r into 6, and by adding a v to it, if it be aloné j as tut««, honoratur\ honoraminu But if this T Ihould be accompanied by another con-' . fonant, then, at the fame time that it is changed into é, the other lenis mufl: be changed into an afpirate, ' becaufe, acccnrding to what we have remarked. Book i. Chap. vii. an afpirate cannot "be preceded by a lenis. In which cafe, the Honorabar, aris. ifttSa, te6$, are. 'xttnßvut in rem non exaäamt The imperfeâi 1 " r »juer, «0, «TS. 1 Ti- < Honorarer, eris. 1 2. C ét/atBa, aeBt, Msrk MeMiar. V ul ' SieefJiat, $iey, Sirtrai, Honorabor, eris. . S>wó/ui8a, eeStf errat. ^ futurum primum. The firlt future. J r Berét/jnm, rete, mñ, 1 X(- < Honoror, eris. Ja.' Btirel/xtBa, eeteBt, mn. ri 'Ea-ô/itroç. Quiburdam futurum rtmotius. The fécond future. ' fiee/xat, wn, inrat. j - 1 Ç nFetfetir, iir«e, few«. Honorabor, eris. 1 i Ti- ^ Honoror, eris. .wé(aiBa,iffte-9í,fie-eyrat'\ \ %. ¿ ite-eífiie$a,ireíeÍtfintSt. n«çtk))Xtiâàr;. ■ flw, 0tlí, $llf . 1 Hondratu's ftii, ilH. . Btifttv, Ben, Bne-ar. Tempus txaSlum. Vulgo the firft aorift. 1 c Bs, 6¡¡(, By. 1 f $snr, BiiiKi Bcúi. Tt- < Honoratos' foerim. I xi- < Honoratos fuerim. 1 2. ¿ BSfjta, Bvre, BSn. | 3. { Si'njusy, lívn, lítimt. ■'.r; *Aôç»roç. If "rv, »Ç, e. ^ Honoratos fui, ifti. , »/ttir, ii+s, iwa». tdefinitum tempus. The fécond aoriñ. C 3, yt, ». 1 r £i»r, sí»f, til. Tt- < Honoratos fuerim, I Tt- •< Honoratos fuerimt 2. C S/*ír, ¡¡re, üe-t, t 3* ' stsjusv, tiers, siseos. Ts- ' ;n Uac^etKet/aetof, 'jufti, rai, Ttti. 1 Honoratos foi, ifti. .feeBof.uBt) rrat. Âdjacens prafenti. The r rS¡xat, y, yrat. Ts- < • Vnofual. 1 2. ¿«/ueSo, ñeás, «¡STOI. »reter-perfeft. '£re- ri- a. 'fsrsgtrtnTsXtxof. r 1*1», ere, re, . Honoratos fueram. ,/*e6a, a-Be, vre. ' Plu/quain perfeâum. Thé pi 1 I Tí- 1 . 1 r: u-perfeö. ' fítiv, e, re. \ ' * Unofoah .f*sBa, eBs, rre. Te- C'í""» ?» Mo* honorabor, ¿(l*s6a, ta-êt, errai. Mit ùXiyo» ¡aíMieit. Paulo-poß-futurum. ITs- 1 tiÇ-' ei[Miv, eie, «re. Mo* honorer. [ eífttdaf eiattf «rr*. * Thefe two tenfes, which we have marked as unufual, are generally formed iy circumJ«* cution { as we lhail fee hereafter. n S > Tt(cc»rtyim, five futurum împerandi formatur a primis five Indlcativis temporibua fie 8 <» 5? »? «I o ^ Is ? i;. ?X S* S § d ?- s J k*. O " § i: 9* 2 t S w 99 > H M < m 'Amgí/*1>»ra, infinita feu imperfonalia, quodübet ferè omnium temporum formatur fie» ' 2^ - t5% «n c. ® "" S.x s- fi ' tr c &> « ^ s i> ^ g C • •^3 s A S» 3 Krd O I s K i» C 3 • A ft* ffir? r sa n 3'.' XH O I s a ^ — HJH o T* s ^ 3 s.| 13 •«s m H < n MiTox«! participia omnia omnium fere temporum formantur quoque. fie : d H ? T I - I í 5 J= '«npuEjouoH d Í H 1 H T 1 s s o ? i* ^ s- 5, B, a V 0 ^ ^ SR-" s ■ 1 •R F rv,A^ C£> CD a â ä 2 S 3 V "S *5" Ç «g- m «nv «n^ 2 « 2 • V« V* • - N. '1! '¡VI '¡"J '">ïwot""l '¡^ 'Uin 'e 'snpuetouou I Tl.f I « fit ? * jc •$n4WoaoH > 99 *9 C » if rsi < M ÎS H •tJ" > to. M t4 § S- S •v 4» tn 140 Boole III. O/Verss» CHAP. XV. Of each Paflive Tenfe itt particular: Anà Of the Prefent and ItnperfeS. Prefent. 5 tlmnyMXt rivnit TvwTtT«»» verltrer, 'oriu * S* J I(ja. rivTtcut Dual. - - TvwTÔfiiôo», ^ rivreoBot, rvvmo'iop, p. C rwrifttBa, vvvrtà6if rvvropratt I Ion. rwri^ta^». The prefent paifive is formed from the aftive, by changing into e^âii} tuittw, tutttojuo». Sometimes it is fyncopated ; for o!o/[i«^ puto : x«ji*a» for x¿o[jt,cii, lavor j from whence comes lavatur} ÁsIrSe, lavamini \ ^xvrxty lavantur, Ohfervations on the Dialect. fheßrß per/on plural len. affitmes here a a before 6», 'which is alß fra3ifeà in all the other tenfes. 7he fécond perfon Jingular in ji» is by the Ionics refol'ved into tcu, from •whence it came', tíwtij» Tvirrteu, and adding alfo a », rivrtteu: in like manner in the future ; î TÚ»««», tvmyau In -the fubjunäi've thy refohse it into ««• ; tvwtij«» : for »Xjj, aufe» ras, eligas, £5?^. Rule L. Of Verbs that make the Second Perfon in çdyto'Kiy edo. In like manner the circumflex verbs, Kxvxjdofsxtt 'U[Áxt, glorior\ Kxvp^xcrxif xxv^xiTxtf as we fliall lee more particularly hereafter. And this, is the analogy which has been retained in the paflive of verbs in /*<, as we Ihall fee Book iv. Rule LI. Of the Second Perfon in s». Sometimes the Attics terminate this perfon in u} as pjÍAsi, «»if», til, ¿ Exam- Of the PrefeHt and Imperfeñ. 147 Examples. ïhe Attics.heretofore terminated this fécond perfon ihf»i hence this termination is ftill retained in thefe four verbs i ßs^ofixi, iiolo ; '|3j»Xí», vis : puto j c»£i, putas : videbo j otj/ett videbis : fum^ Jlcty and by contradion tT, es. , . Though we meet alfo with a few more ; mortar j tîÔmî^î», morieris : and fuch like. The ÍmperfeSí. ÍltüírTÓfiMi», ' trimH, yrvwretot VtfhtTáhaT» Dor. iTt/WTo/staii, Ion. • » - - - iréfrrto, VPfrré^xero, Dual. - - - irvyrrô/teôoy, îrvwrtrion, itvirriv^t. f Irwrifü^x, •trvfrrtarêc, irvwrorro. Plur. ^ Dor. hwràfxtaêx. f Ion. ----- IrtiffreoTo. The paffive imperfeft is formed from the adive," changing or into ¿¡Anv ; «tu^toií, irvirrófAnv. Obfervations on the Diale£ls. The Ionics refilve the fécond fer/on a into ts, from whence it was formed ; and the Dorics into iv, hvvrtv. The Ionic manner of conjugating rvorveov.iy.rtt, rvirriaxto, Tt/wrtV- xtT«, is fear ce ufed in the ßrß perfon. Of the other two there aré in- ßances : sraXtmot Od, ¡Mn : in like manner, ymíírxsTo/crat» e/ía- xm, habobatur : ^wcvvo'xcro, cingebatur: mayíffxen, mifcebatur. Like^nife in the plural, rvorritnorro, verberabantur. We alfo meet with «atw-tifltTo, perfuafos clb, for ivMito, Od, ß- Though the reduplication of this tenfe is uncommon ; and therefore fome bane taken it for the fécond aoriß, which ought, however, to have the penúltima ßort, as when Homer fays issmùùe, -Sc«, for eoiBuiii, The third perfon plural in taro is in Homer and Herodotus ; vtrihné- dro, for vnt^épffirr» : it it likewife to jbe met with in the prefent, as alfo in the perfeB and plu-perfeB j where we foall treat of it mote at large. CHAP. 148 -Book III. Of V e r 9 CHAP. XVI. Of the Paßve Futures and Aorifis, Rule LII. Formation of the Firft Future. t. SI of the firß future aSlive makes in the ' paffive : 2. But makes ^diítrojuai, and ^r,Ma-6Ka'o[íCU. ^ porto ¡ XOfMO-a, xojuio-O^o-o/«««. Xg'iiet tingo : XgtB^iroi*eu. ßvo, obthuro} ßva-a, ßva-6ia-oft.ai, i)\,Kvt), trabo ; if^cva-a, ifíKva-6va-o/A.ai. fuu, or 7 tt;aleg « cáaa, favvvni, J I ' ' ^ fícía, percutió ; foiiou, fMobynroftMi. x?^íía, claudo xMiaé-iooftcu. ■4'á>^íi>f fidibus cano ; ■Jl/o.Xä, eil ft/, tollo ¡ àfa, ¿fdna-ofiou. iyeíft/, excito i iysfü, îyefdnaoïnxi, tpaíta, oßendo ; ÇeitZ, (put^/iaoncu. 2. But }J/u makes and ^u, ^^r¡Ma,f r«x6^fo/xai. ttftM, tribuo ; njuS, Mvc/bMjx«, xgita, cerno ; xgttSt xtxgnta, xgi6v xr«fiq9í», it i f^c. î52 Book III. Of V e r b s." tífí. For this is the very advantage of it, that it flsewsyoú In an in¬ fant nsihat you •wanted. Moreover, thofe •who fhrm this ohjeSion do not refleä that úía-ofíai, ÍSfc. though of snore than one fyllahU, are neverthelefs tnere terminations ; •which is fufficiently proved iy their being found in the fame tenfes in ail forts'of verbs. Novo it is alweys aliovoedin the forming of tenfes, to change one termination into another. But if it ßsould he cjked, •why •we have stot rather formed the futures from the aorißs, than the aorißs from the futures ? the reafon is, be- caufe •we chofe to follovo the fame difpoßtion of tenfes in the pajßve as in the aä'ive-, •where it •was requifite^o mention the future before the aorifl, and even before the perfeS, by reafon that the penúltima of thefe tenßs depends upon that of the future, 'Beßdes, it is of very little ßgni- ßcation, •whether the aorifi be placed here firß, and then the future ; or ßrß the future, and then the aoriß ; betaufe either ^way is equal, ßnce by our rule •we learn to derive them both direQly from the future aäive : a tnethod, •which, if I am not greatly mißaken, •will, •with the leaß application, prove extremely ufeful, yyyVWWWW*WWWWWWWWWv WWVWWTWW CHAP. XVII. Of thç PerfeSl, Plu-perfe^l^ and Paulo-poß-future. Rule LVI. FprtTiation of the Perfcft Paffive. 1. From X« of theperfeSl aSlive is formed ¡mm, trait T«», in the paffive. 2. ^a doubles [A, and makes [s.fs.xi, xj/xi, trrxt ; but takes y, and makes •yfA.ai, ^xt, xrxi. 3. iu, rta, 6w, oTTu, affume a -/x^at. • , , Íííyu, dico, XtXe-;¿a, X/Xf-yjutfi. oçvoa-a, fodio, uçis-y(fs, ¿^v-yfsa.i. 3. Verbs in íw, ru, flw, infert here a o- before ¡s.xi : and likewife thofe in -nru (or ctru) when they form the a¿live in xx -, as. Of the Per^eSt Paßvel 153 ' /uUiot i^ti-Ka, ¡ixa>. TÍ«, honore, punto, tírt-xot, rht-fMu. In all thefe verbs, the fécond perlón is in (ron, with a (T, or with a double letter, ; and the third is in TKt, as we have obferved in the rule. The fécond and third perfon dual, as alfo the fécond perfoa plural, are formed from the third perfon fingUt lar, by changing the two fmooth confonants into aÇ>i- rates -, or, if the termination happens to be pure, by inferring a , xtx^ioBoy, KÎxgtoûoy, Plur. J xex^ifiedx, xsx^ioBe, xtx^trrxi. Dor. xix^i¡i.i, Saw»^^», ,' ^t^ixrat, diSuifuttt^ 01 fui, Dui^l. iiûiiyiAiiot, XÉXi;¿9a)', XtX<;(6oir. Plur. îitiUyfiti», ^(Xc7f«ivo> tttrl. ANNOTATION. 7i&r two laß agree tu analogy, for as they com from the futures ^ and |u, thsy retain their double letter in the fécond perfon 4«>> I«« find ajume the lents included in the double letter, in the third perßu, «DT«> and xrcci. 'The firß perfon ought to take an intermediate irfert H'm, as >¿Kiyiítti ; but as there cannot be a ß immediately before ¡tcu, and it would be too harß to fay tirx/è^ui, the ß is therefore chan^ialt f*, and thence is formed rirvfifteu. Of uaiñu, to pcrfuade. Sing. mimtaieeu, vtvtiueu, noiorttarcu, perfuafus futu, W fm, l}ual. ' noefreia/AeOot, ^srttrSot, -wsireiaiop. Pluf. eufvsíufíeñce, noiortiu^s, 'sreorsia-fitpoi eloi. Of oi'jtiw, to hçar. Sing. TixWfsxt, nxuaai, rixnrriu, auditusfum, Otfùp I)ual. iiK¿a-¡jííBo», rixuudos, Ïikhu6op, Plur. ixég-fAcda, ixeaQe, vxua/AstBi tîai. R u t R LVIII. Particular for the Verbs in »«. Nw changes yxa into pLfs-ai, vaoti, »rat. Ybe Attics take a a, and make uífa(r¡ji,xi. Examples. Verbs in vw, which have changed the v into y in the Attic perfeét, becaufe of x, change jt here into 10, il the firft perfon, by reafon of the fubfequent fs., whereas the Attics infert a a. But as there is no impediment In the other perfons, they all retain the y. Thus frpm tpuivuy Tfftçxyxa, apparui, we fay, c- f usi^xiAfMU, msÇupffM^ uoéÇanai, £ Att. viÇaa-fiMi. 1> 19I 5 mi^áfAneio», uoÍ^upSOP, . < p. 5 aTtf¿fA¡At6a, wífatíi, mifafe/ettoi itoî» S ■ * I Att. •csiÇàaiMÎa, ^ Where Of the PerfeSl Paßoel 155 Where it appears that» by the fame analogy, is reduplicated in the third perfon plural, when formed by circumlocution, becaufe it comes from the parti« çiple of the preterite,. ANNOTATION. From this firft perfon Attic comes fpeärum. In like manner from tahefacio% lit/iàçaiiiMu, Att. comes mareor, tabei: from «r«m|»rar, exaeu«, irrito^ v»- Att. COmeth «rceço|v0-^àç, irritatiot But Caninius makes it appear, that this is only for the firfi perlbn, 'becaufe we find in Demofthenes, vx^ú^vtrxi, irritatifunt% futrrcu, devaßati funt ; and the like : and that from véÇatxxt ia derived ¿xo^ánrtí, afft^gratio from vifarrat, nun^ítmit ¿f*)" f hanta, calumniator ; and not aont^xmt, as if we faid nrifxrou ; and in like manner the reA. The verbs, which, agreeably to the Attic form, have taken an • before f» or x'^ Attic perfeâ, refnme here their natural f : ixya, dico,>*>xx*t Att. XjÄox«, pafÄtAty^i««; «rijcte-tv, «a///«, w/sroju- p«, vttmfujLçu : kXíxt^, furor, «txAoÇa, as alfo xitiXx^ífuuf by an analogy agreeable to that of the following rule. Rule LIX. £ changed into « in the Penúltima of the Paflive Perfeft; 1. When çf follows a confinant in the aSîive perfeßi^ it is changed into çx in the paffive ; as írgsfx, 2. But muß he excepted. Examples. 1. Verbs that have « after a confonant in the atStivp perfeft, aflume in the paffive. (■¡iÇa, verfo, Ir^Epoi, retira, verto, rér^tfx, rÍT^a/*/*xu rgífa, nutrió, rsr^efx, TcGgx/AiMit, ♦ The latter affiimès the 6 in the paffive, becaufe it is not followed by ^another afpirate. 2. The following verb retains its e : irriS"^ ßfSgt}(Xi ßiSgtyftau R u l«e LX. Of Verbs that rejeft g from the diphthong fv, Smeti/nes the diphthong to lofith t ; thus^ from rirto^^ fomes TîTuyjiAi^t. pxahf- 15^' book iii. 0^ verbs.- Examples. Some verbs that have tu in the penúltima of the acî tive perfeét, rejeít the prcpoíitive s in the paflivej as, TÍVX"» fabricor, rirtvx»» rsrvyfi,»i. ' Çiùyo, fugiOf ' véÇtvxfi, imiÇvyiMi, In like manner, vaiviofuu, fcifcitor, audio, tBÍirvvfiMt» a-íva, concito, aiervfMu. X'"» fundo, ictx'vicat et xi^von»i. annotation. This kind of fyncope has been already taken notice of, wlien treating of the fatare and aorift : it is alfo met with in feveral nouns verbal ; as confufio, from x*'^t fuga, from fugio : afvKTOf, inevitabilU, from the fame verb; and others of the like fort. rule lxi. Of the Third Perfon Plural Ionic, in the Prefcnt, im- perfe£t, Perfeét, and Plu-perfeéfc Indicative, and likewife in the Optative. Ï. The third perfon plural Ionic, in the poßve prefent, imperfeSl, perfect, plu-perfe5l, and optative, is formed from the third perfon fingular, Í. By infer ting a before rxi or to pure, and ßortening the fyllable that precedes it. 3. fFhen reel or to are not pure, the preceding lenis is to be made an afpirate ; and if there be a c, it is to he < changed into í cr ô : 4. But the optative retains its diphthong before «. Examples. 1. The third perfon plural Ionic of the prefent, imperfeâ, per- feft, and plu-perfeft of the indicative paffive, as alfo of the whole optative (except the. aorills) terminates in arcs or «.to, and is formed from the fingular in t«», or in to : thus, 2. If Tai or to be pure, an a is inferred, whereas in the cotn- men tongue they put aAnd then if there happens to be a long vowel before to« or to, a fliort one muft be put in its Head ; aad if there be a diphthong, the fubjunflive is rejeñed. 3. But if this termination tai or to be impure, fiill the a is in. ferted ; but at the fame time the preceding lenis mull be changed into an afpirate ; and if there happens to be a víirXu-tf*-T««, vé^et'C'^tUf ' ftf^Äp-TÄ«, '. ym'TM» ridt'TaCf li^Ta(| Plur.Ion« tATtUf -¿aT«t| "»TMf 'areUf :X'trat, 'ôetrtUf '■htTMf '^araif ->ÄTÄ», '»reu, 'uraiy 'aratf -«TCM, 'aratf for ( iirrMy «t^iXuvrot^ ' àyâwirFMf riSsatrat, rsTVfÁ/xém >^'k%yfá,iyci il^l, iiçvyfxim slr(> vriir\n9'f*6V9i pff-fxhct f(9Í> IffiOCfxívOi sMy f 4«X/icéyoi Í97Ftl^ÍV9i fiffiy yíwnatj ri&trratf t^wratf from n/xcti, feJeo* '^ikíoí, amfrn àyÎKîifMaiy recuíilho» r^nf*Í9 pono» rvtrratf »verbero» "Kíyo^y dico, fodio» ßrnio, m'idéoiy impleo» cano» í/ifo» . perfundo» 4'^xXft>) pjdlio» cmí^Vf femino» yiyofAai, ßo» ^ídnfMy pono» trabo» ■ In the iame manner the tenfes in ¡irir, that have the terminatioa in TO. «T», I t»ro, "7 f Sm». txt-t-n, I -«TO, > for < SKe i»t«. »nín-rt, | -tars, J ¿ iirt^i}innu And thus the other verbs above mentioned. The optative is changed thus : TÚffTOí-To, aro, T f rvorrotirro, 'rv for < rv^no-oivro, aro, J ¿, Ke;i^á|0tvT0j ^ Ç ryierotfÁW, verBerarer» > from ^ rvfdno'aífAny, verberer» 3 ¿ xf;¿ct¿o(ja*;V) gatvifus eJTem Xfp^ÂgotjUïjv, gatuífus ejem, from Z^ftdeo» ANNOTATION. Tie poets fometimes fiorten the Jiphthong, though it does not precede rcu or ro pure •, as í^t^ííarai, in Horn, for iz^eiy^oora,!,, they have ufed all their endeavours, taken from the third ßngular, lgiçe»rœi. On the contrary, fometimes they omitßsortening the penúltima, even nuhen tou or TO is pure', as Kf)(i¡K¿ia,'cofor míy^ahuoto, irati erant, yrow j¿oXóo- ^oei, irafcor, moleftè fero: ítíiaíaT«» for ísíanrr«», divifi {\xxst, from iaÁá, divido, convivor, fcio. We likevjife meet nuith troCKa^areii, ¿jcu;¿éJaTai, IXjjXéíarat, for IraAf^/roi, or iraXiaicitof tl_ from xofi/cca, ^a, or ca, armo, turbo, concito. ' fhisfame fl is found alfo in fever al verbal nouns in the common tongue, either infiead of the c, or merely by addition ; xAavQ/xcj, fletas, from .. XAMÙ, ffioVÍ^Í ßai/Mt, grados, Jrm ßwu, or ßiui vado, incedo. Rule LXII. Formation of the Plu-perfeét Paiïîve, flu-perfeSi is formed from the perfeSi^ íaká^ fAriv for /««>, and its proper augment. Examples. , The plu-perfeft is formed from its preter-perftft, , by changing ftMi into /adv, and alTuming its proper augment ; t£TUjiajw«(^ TtrúfXfiítiv, Its fécond and third perfons are likewife formed from thofe of the perfeâ, by changing «» into e ; tItv«)/ci, t£tuirt«i ; irsrvtj/of itetutttö. The third pérfon plural ends in »re, when the third perfon fingular is in re pure, according to the forty- feventh rule ; m, accufatus fuit ; s>t£Hf»»To, accufati fuerant', otherwiie it is formed by circumlocution: wherefore it is conjugated thus; ' ^he Plu'perfeSl. Sin?« íTtTy/Afmy, irêrir^Of irirvim, verberatus Oram. C Poet. tTO/A/Aw, and Tv/i/AVf without the augment. Dual. • - - irerbftfiiBor, trirvfOot, trtrvp6»f. \ Dor. irtréiÁfííffB». Ion. îtîtî^âto. . Ohfervations on the Dialekts. i^on/ult ixhat hat lern already /aid in the preceding ruUt pogt is6. 157. "ÀftiçTo, pendebat, in Hem. comes from ¿tlçup erigo, eveho, fui. ¿e^ü, perfe3 nt^xee, pa/ßve changing $ into 0 ; aojftat, DojTai, Ion. aegcen, (from uohence cometh iognq, iorum enfis) pluperfeQ ¿á^iít¡v, íu^oo, augro, changing 0 into u, as ligAv«, *¿^«•£»1», and others mentioned in the twentieth rule. Rule LXIII. Of the Formation of the Paulo-poft-future. * V^he paulo-pofl-future is formed from the fécond perfo* of the perfeSly by inferting e¡*. before at : thus rtru^arf makes TeTvtpo¡Axt. Exam- Fomat'm of the Paulo-poß-future. . isy Examples. The paulo-poft-future is formed from the fécond perfon of the perfedt, by inferting o/* beforé a» i as TfTujMjiAat) rérvij/utf tsTv\po/Mcíf tüox verberabof^ I ßiall be beaten prefently : xiKtyf^on^ ^cm, xcxi^of^cut IJhall be pre- fently Jpoken of. And this tenfe preferves its augment through all the moods. Thus interficiar^ cOmes from (p¿o¡jkatt (r«( : rtTpúa-ofjixi, faucia- bor^ from Tit^wo-xw, taking its tenfes'trom r^úui and fuchlike. ' It is conjugated thus : ! The Paulo-poß-future. " Q. '5 - - TtTa-l/Of*«», rtrvil'tTiu. * ¿ Ion. - " rtrúi^sM. Dual. - - - ■í'tTtílI'ííisflol'» TSTl54'Sa'8o», * rSTV^l'tff-èoP. p. 5 " ■'■'''^4'®/*'®*» TíTiÁl'SírÓí, Ttrvijcorr«». ( Dor. TtTV'Í'Ó/*tO-9úl. ANNOTJVTION. We might have followed here another method of forming this tenfe ; which is, to derive it from the firll future aâive, changing « into 0/Í6U, and prefixing the augment : but this would not do for the verbs in Xa>, ¡na, pu, gu : nevertfaelefs it may ferve for the other verbs, as being much the ihortefi; way. CHAP. XVIII. Of the other Moods^ and the Partuiplet, The SubjunOtive. Prefent and ImperfeSl. Sing. - - - rvwranat, rvvmi, rvTrrntai, uerhereTf Dual. - - - • Twrái/,e6fp, rvvrpiaitp, Tv^m^^op. or Í " wírráfittfl«, rvirT%9^t, TÍvropT»t. -rarer. ' ( Dor. rvatáp.ta^ií. The fécond perfon of this mood is in « fubfcribed, in all tenfes, and in all forts of verbs, wherein it re- íémbles the third perfon a£tive of the fame mood; Tuwtn, verberety or verbereris ; woin faciat^ or fias ; tîÔ«, ponàty ot panaris y &c. though it be from a different reafon ; Ixcaufe this pArfon is formed here by -con- tradion of {«> into «, as we have already obferved when treating of the indicative paffive,. which has alfo its fé¬ cond X^O B o o K ni. 0/ V E R B s: cond perfon the fame with this : whereas the third per- fon adive comes from the third perfon of the indicative in CI, changing c ihort into v long, and fubfcribing i. Firß Future and Aorifi. {• " rvfèSf rvfôp, Ion. tvfútii), fvfOétif, - TvÇÔivtrt, Poet. 5 •íj)«'»» verheratut \ -íw, , íwí, íji, W»» fim, or T>iia1 5 ' ' ----- T«^93TO», Tf^flÍTO», ) » ' l Ion. - - - - TV^OíXTO», " / ®' 5. A~ A~ I fuero, ts, - - rv^Bvjiai', rvfOtiTi, rvfBao'i, I Ion. rvfBéa¡Atf, rvtpdíiortf rtvfdíua-t, I Dor. Tt>^6âi/xtf, - - - - TV^Owm. J Second Future and Aorifi. Sing. í t" " ? ^ i Ion. wffí«, and the reft as above. /Like the preced- Dual. - - - • - - - tvwîto»» tuwîto». i ing tenfe. Plur. - - - - rwSnev, towÎt», TfwSo-«. l ANNOTATION. The aorifts ferve for the futnre in this mood, as we have obferved in regard to the aâive. But there is fometimes a future formed by circumlocution: Tcrv^ftÉraç, »ro^au, tmi, îo'irat, verbera/us fuero, -is, -it, &c. in the fame manner as we form the perfeâ of all verbs that are not in a pure, as may be feen above. Obfervations on the Dialebls. The Ionics in the refolution of the aorißs, add tnortoverai to the third perfon fingular ; rvçBù, rvÇBia ; td^ô?, rvÇBintrt : to 'which the potts add like=wife an t ; vvtpOs'.u, &c. and then changing the proper diphthong into improper ; rvtpBña, rvpBr,iK,í¡tc, Çatrin or (páyri,for Çun, .appareat, from fxUu ; fécond aoriß, tpxmr. PerfeSi and Pîu-perfe^. Sing. ttrvfifiiioi; a, «ç, p, ^ •verheratut fim, orfue- Dual, -rnvft-fiiya %rav, nrot, > rim.-is,-et\ effem,Ot Plur. ttrvfífúytn ¿¡jíey, nre, un. j fuijfem, -es, -et, &C« ANNOTATION. Moil grammarians fay, that this circumlocution ought to be ufed here in all forts of contraâed verbs, whether their termina¬ tion be pure, or impure ; as from Twu, fohvo, fisXviníyai u, vt, i, &c. «■sÍÓü;, perfuadeo, ^(ieu,/olututßm: which is the reafon of my having marked it thus in the tablé of the paffive conjugation. As for the circumlocution, there is no maqner of didiculty in it, ' fince it is to be refolved Amply according to the ordet- of fyntax. T h e ó p t á t i v e. . PrefentMdlmperfeSi,: . Sing. •! - . TvwToi^i)», TvwTBio, TvwToiT«, vtritrortTt tru\ jDnal - " f 'nwT»i(M6otf TveroteOsy, TVBrroio'dts'. Plur. - -I mnrroifuieoy TvirroivOf, Ion. - - 1« "» «.I- r -, TOTrro»«7», Firfi Future. Sing. - rv^Siitf'otjuiir, rvfbno'OM, rv¡p6v^m, verhtref. Dual - • - TofúfiO'eí/iiOoiif rv^dnvoívdiu'. Plur í ' ' W^fiívoivflí, TV^6ííro»»TO. ' '¿Ion. - Tv^fljivofatT«. . , ' Second Future. Sing. - - - rvmn'tnn», tvañomoy rvirvvotro, vtrhertt. Dual - - - n/vi)0'ai^i6«y, rvwivoiohot,- rimo'oiohrir. 5 wimesifwfl«, TWTiô'oivôe, >.\rtnnavitTo. ' \ Ion. - - - -- -- - rvsigvoi^T«. Firß Aoriß. • Sing. - - .Tv^Siíqr, , rx^çdtittfy rvfiún» "I Dual ----- - . rvfdtUro», tv^OhÍti». * Plur í ' ' rvfhtítifiity TV^GeíflTí, wfíttTKrat, I . .{f, &C, * ( Sync. rvfitTfttty TvfBíÍrt, ryf Giít», \ Second Aoriß, Sing. - - - rvmiti', • worúriu rvvtin, *1 • Dual ----- - - Tvírtt^Toy, tvwhÍti)», / frr¿rra/»r_^!» -, , , > O"" /««•«». Plur. í ■ TV,rB«f trxTrtf ireûfi/ : çxTfttVf :ioTf*iv, j^u(roTn*f». Likewifeîn the fécond aorift;TU3r£rf«i», and TUT«», &c. , But the fécond petfon the fécond aocift is not fufceptible of this fyncope, jutu'urf, and not tut««, to diltinguifli it from the fécond perfon plural of the fécond future aâive, indicative mood. ' As for tho third perfon, we might j>efhap$ with greater realbn fay, that it is a change of q in the -firft perfon into t, according to the Boeotic form, like that mentioned in the aoriâs of the indica* tive, vide Rule Iv. Thus from ftw, comes (Tm^ t£int, for Perfeff and Plu-perfe^. . . Sing. Tervju/Kfrof, cm)«, s")«- ^t"), "^verheratusJimtOTfit' Dual rsTv^jucv&i, - - - eíuTo», elírtíry > w/» j ejfem pr fuij' Flur. rtTvuiAsiot^ tlnfiip, ¿írire, títurcíp, j ' &C« ANNOTATION. The tenfe is formed here by circumlocution from the participle and the verb fubftantive, in the fame manner as the fubjunâive. Some, however, infill upon its being formed fiffiply, when ¡te» in the perfeâ indicative is preceded by one of the-fonc vowels above mentioned, «,■>>,$, v, - - - - - . For », lay they, becomes an im|>roper diphthong »; as ftt/co, dißrihuo, tttiftvuMtt, •foi »to, &C. a. is changed into »> : itrclm, interßcio, ¿xrá¡»ai, -fxraiftvit xíóp «m, &c. ' ...... I remains, ^ut becomes long here, though Ihort in the perfeft indicative ; judico, xtxgífí»», "ïo, ?ro,* Sfc. «wopí.í» ft»», perirem,*^à. x. from pôtu, corrumpo,'pert». " V, according to Gaza, followed by Vofiius, is changed into the diphthong!^ Ät4»,yi/w, AsAvft«», ^sXvíft»», t;~o, vîVo, &c. But ac- cording-to C^ninius', Ramus, Sylburgius, and others, it continues by itfell^ ana is'made long :'thus, ... Sing. As>i¿jit»», XiXcio, 'AeXvTo.' t Dual XsA^fteSbr, XeXvs-Go», ^EAt/0'6»». 1 Flur. ^iXviAsßa, AeAvj^Se, ficXviiro, The infMqufßcx (kU Unfe.bai, furpified a /utjeH for this gratU' tuatiçal conteß : fame r^egulating it merely by the analogy of the optative, nvhich is ever tg have « diphthong in the penúltima : axd others judg- ing of it by the nature of this ßiphihctng v», vshicb is ever to an- ether vowel after it. For, beßdes that the etymologicon quotes ^eXí/»t» from an ancient poet, vet ßui>Fp.n», without the augment, for XsAv/t»», ist II. p. and AePíüt» in Oß.,er, 1 4x4 if tregard to psibeä Eußatbius faith^ that Mh-ra is ^ere fpg^-t^iotroi. vsitlp the tonic e^ugspent in the Jifond aerjß ; in that cafe. Jays Caninius, V would hdvt been Jhort, • • - - whereas Mosäf tH ParfifípleT^ l$l 4whft^ U is long : ntoreew, .it n^tsU ¡/sfue bjfdjuf ßz^lfisß-* fion, nuhiib, ntvertheU/s, is^aßi've* ' O ■ folttta ¿íléi\t 0iem\>ri iihluicujuique. Pauh-poß-futare. Sing. - - - TMTV'^oífMiSf TtTvij/oioi, ' títÚi|/mto, mox vcrbtreri Du^l T 'r i»'^ l9it¿4^id6ati Ttni4«V'^*'* p. ''Í -Árv^dífAtieif nrvH>ot«St, Tji É l.kp,^:K ^ x.i.y, E; ''■:Prefent aniP imperfeili Sitig.■ vivra,' ■ ¡&iiirT(^, verierártp vetbífetuTi "ítc, ' ^ ' " Dual T¿WTI^fle», TW5r¥l<7Ítf>i ■' ; PJbí* fíhsrt^dt, . J Tvkrív^t»*' • ' ' " ^ ^ Ohfervátions on the TlialeSlst T'A# Dorks put fimetimes «• for » ; «f Jíío» for iíSa, da. ' Wbkh happens not only to the termination, biet likewife to J he penúltima i at uKotaot, firß aor4 imperéfroitt íxba, audi:' vvaxoto-or, obteinperaf for vváxwop, tf?f.. 1 ... Mrß xiorifl. • Sing. 1 7Í^0DT»» ' tuÇflÎT«, Merlterfitorín, Se^. Dual ■ téfdnrtt, . rvpènrat, Plur.. vvfSnrt, ^Çdnruaeir. - t ^ The paffive aorifts .of the iqiperiitive ought,to «nd in ii ; neverthelefs this is in t», by reafoft bf the pre¬ ceding fl : fo that .we iky -ru^Önri, and not vvfh^u ■ «. - Second,Aorifi. h.- . i ' . . Sing; ..vHortidi,.. ^Avotinui _ foerherotor tu, Dual |T¿5r»)To», rvvierm. Plur.(_ .«»«rqTAWa». , . .. The third perfon lingular, and likewilè the two of the bther nunrtbersj^ affume here ar, and not a Ô, like the firft perfon íihgülaW Thus, in the firft aorifl;,--wc fay Tu^MTw, Tu^SnTov, Tvf6vTue.' and in the fécond aoriít, Avwnru, TvvtiTOVt &C. . . ANÍrO TA tibti. The mptrtnive mrißt are firequenily Jyncopaied'-i as from çiôeigéi, to corrupt, efOa^op, iqiiágnp, f6ú^6t, and taßing off *>, çBàgOt .* from tomes xixqa^t, taken from xtx^Ayoniu, clamo : ffom ¿»¡í- . - Ma' î")0»» i64 Book in. • 0/ VE R B VnGt fmts foie» fitnt ¿aítys^*» -jabeo. See the re/elutien verif. Remark 43. - ' 1 Perfeêi and Pltí-perfeSÍ» Sing. TÍrv4^, rerípío, verieraíut eßo% Sec» Dual TfTv^Oov, rirí^iitPi Plur. rhvfitt Ttrv(pdu9»p, The fécond perfon of the plu-perfeâ imperative, is formed from, the fécond of the plu>perfeâ indicative, by dropping the augment J as hervij/oy rérv^o: i\gÁt^o, AéXt^o.* iwéirtKro, miretro: ägv^Oy ogv^o, ßcc. The third períbn is likewlfe formed from the third, changing TO into Ou, and the preceding lenis (if there be one) into an afpirate i as Irírvirro, rírvpúu : . ixíktx- To, AtXs;¿9u .* iirtviiroy wtvtíaíu, . But if it terminates in TO pure, then a «- muft be inferred ; as Uín^ero : x(x> fiVOu, &c. by the feme analogy as that of the forty- eighth rule. .,' T HE Infinitive. - * V. Prefent and imperfeâ, rvvrwiai, verberari. Firft future, - « - rvfiiatcbapy verheratum irt. Second future, ^ • rwftvtaScu,-iferheratiiumeji. Firft adrift, - r: I ÄOI. Tv^vfitPi Dot. "fvipoiiftepxi. '~Thus from >-x»^¿puy Jateoy - fut. Atio-Gq»«», iDdr7 efblitum eßs. Theoer«, Second aorift, L -^beratumeße. £ iXiOl. rvTTviitp, DOT. rvpni*etxt. Perfeft & plu>perfeâ, ■ vtrvfdat, . wrberatum tße etfuiß, Paulo-poft>future, • Ten^'EO'Oaet, . . áax verberatum tri, • * 1 ' Obfervations on the fMPnf T0f44909p TQ rvi 9 rVWIUCOfAtVO^p i Tvorvjirofitpyif TP TV9n}P'ofAeypr^ i Tvfôuirctp 79 TvÇiitp p rvmiÇf 91 rwtTo'ccp TÍ 7V7rt9, the Mddk Verh. Fir fi Future.., TS rvfOtifftfnifitg T?{ -rv^Qna'oit.inf. rS xvÇdriiroi*itii, Second Future. rS TUffqtrOfAill», T5Î rvwiia'»i*,t»nt' T5 Tt>7)|0-Of(cM.I • Firfi Aorifi. TS TUÇStUTOÎ, TÎi TU^OEtO^f* TS Tt/^9i>T0;« Second ^orifi. TÔ tw/mç, T5Ç TyT-fip^ç, TÔ TVÎTlI'TPi# '*^5 vtrltranJut» whtrandut. verhtratut. verheratvs. Perfe5î and Plu-perfe£i. i tiTtif*ft6»oç, ^ tS verberatus. 71 TETV/X^ÎVt), TÎî TtTVI*llÎltrlff s TO TETOfA/xíirOI'« TS T(Tt>|i(/»|E«. i^ol. &c. Ô TETV>l/Ó^E>0;, t> TfTv4'0/:*iE1}, TO TET(/i]/Ó^E>Orj Paulo-pofi-future. T5 T6TEn|/0/*l»»» T?t TETV\]/0/Of»»;. TS TCTt>4'0JblÉ»tt. «MX virbtrandus. Ohfervatiàns on the BialeSis. The participles agree tu their dialeSs viith the nouns, tsjhofe declen- ßon thy folUiu. In the perfeil the Colics, tafling aivay the augment, dram back the accent to the ante-penultima ; ^XvfAs>o;, ftruck, for See the end of the fifth chapter. CHAP. XIX. Of the Middle Verb in general. > TH E middle re* b is that, which preferveth a fort of a medium between the ailive and pafllve, partaking of both, either in its fignification, or ter¬ mination. M 3 The líe- Soo.fe .ni; .y.E£Bs; The perfeét and plu-peifeft " conform in all moods to the a^iyg .çqiyuggtiQn}» and the other tenfes-to the pafllve. ' Its fignification is- ia-fome tenfes aâive, in others ' paflive: and in fome tenfes, either a¿live or paflive, like the verbs common in Lafiti ; as rlv, çixov, violo amtcüm ; Jiro T? çi»À8, violor ab àmîco ; in regard to which it is difficult to lay. dowrv an^ fixed rules,' practice being the beft mafter. However^ it may be ùbferved that the futures, the aorißs, àMihï'freterites, are of tener taken iñ an aiiive than faffive fenfe, efplciájlf [if it happefti to be a verb that has no aSlive. For even thofe which Caninius takes for paßve in thefe tehfesl (äs vídtiirx, computruij [IS- infanivi ; tetux«, contabuij and the like) are not really fuch ; or, if they be,- it is only becaufe of their na¬ tural jßgmfication, which féèitieth to have fome thing pafftve in all languages whatever y. and is equally fuch in the pre- fent active, put'reico j ¡*xívu, infanio j rnxu, ta- befco, &c. as in the middle. If beftdes thefe, thero are- flill other verbs, which are fometimes confirued in a paßve fehfí-, as $ú6f».xi, nuxxm, front r^ífu, 6fc. tlAs is an ellipfis ; for we muß certainly underßanä íft.x-jrov, or fomething like. Concerning which, fee the Latin me¬ thod in the remarks upon verbs. Chap. i. as likewife what weßall fay hereafter; Book Viii. Chap. viii. The preíéht and imperfeét middle are the fame as the paffive throughout all moods. The other tenfes may be eafily conjugated, by the following table; wherein we have inferted the aorift only at full length; by reafon of its following a particular analogy: whereas all the.other tenfes áre conjugated like thofe of the adive and paffive, whofe termination they borrow. TABLE TABLE of Conjugation for the M i d d l e V e r b. t Indicative. Subjonctive. O p T a T ivb. ImPER'ATIVE, Infinitive. Participles. Fut. 1. Tír-tfuat, ti, trftt, Honorabo, is, it. Tiv-oífcv», mo, «t«. Honorem, es, et. Tia-iffSae Honoratura eflè. Tir-iyxnt, v, ' Honoratos, a, um. Fut. 2. ñ, eïtm. 1 ■ , Ti-ci^nv, oTt, tXrt, - Ti-iîirâtu. Ti-èf*not, ». Aor. i. r ifitiv, a, art, 'Etio-< Honoravi, ifti. (, á[x.(6a, aoSt, am, f »jUSi, vj «rai. 1 Honoraverim, is. Tmt < 1 Honoravero, is. L «jutsa, wdi, atlat. f alfAtiV) au, airo, Tià- < Honoraverim. l ai/xtia, airSi, amo. - r tu, á^ai, Tie- < Honorajo. , (, oe-Se, tie-Sate-av. Tir-itrâai. • ráfxntt, «h t qui hooorayit. ; - 1 quae honoravit. f ifxtvm, ». c, quod honoravit. Aor.2. 'ETI-í/uív, u, ito. TÍ-a>|tuti, It, tiT«i. Ti-oifxm, tu, oiro. Ti-S, iriu. Tt-Mata. Ti-á|iiiTe;, ». Perfeft TíT»-«, aç, f. Honoravi, or, atus fura. Ttri-ai, jf, p. Honoraverim, is, it. TSTi-t, tritt. Honora, ato. TiTi'Évai. Honoraviflê. ' TiTt'ùf, ¿rof, qui hqnoravit et erat. Pla- perfeO. 'ETÍTÍ-IIV, ílf. ^ Honoraveram. Ttri-ti/xi, Ott, M. HonorafTem, es, et. |68 ■ Boqk III. Of Verbs." CHAP. XX. Of the particular tenfei of the Middle Verh^ 'with their DialeSts : And firß, of thofe of the Indicative* ! ".Rule UCV. Formation of the Two Futures Indicative. From rú^a comes rúipo/xxiy and from tdww, rvTraftai. , Examples. The two futures middle are formed from the fu¬ tures aâive : the firft by changing » into o/uat, Tbvj/ojMCKt and the fécond by changing a circum- fiexed into tuttu, Tv¡r^¡*.xit by reaibn of the accent. Wherefore they are conjugated thus : Firß Future. J»- 5 ' * rv^trcuf nitrhtraho. * ¿Dor. . Ion.'-{«t. Dor. -lireu, Doäl. - - - rv^eo'dot, Tinf'tO'Ooi'. Í ' * TWiJ'á/ieÓ«, Tv^eo'Oet rv^o»T»t, ' \ Dor. -¿/xtp-û«, -tó¡Mei», -sMt, -Streu. Second Future. Sincr S ' ' vvwS, Tverelreti, vtrhtraht, ®'£lon. -ioftMi, -tat, -terai. Dual S ' ' '■'"rsftsflor. rweTa-^ot, rwtTaiot, ¿'Ion. -io/iíñot, -ttriov, -étaíoi. Pj^^ f - rvTra/itia, rwtTa^e, rvirStrai. ' \ Ion. -isiu&a, ftaôi, -íotrai. In like manner, the firft future of verbs in Xu, ¡».a, iu, ÇU, bein'g circumflexed, muft be changed here into as ervci^u, femino, firft future a£tive fécond períbn fiytvat, ■ minrat, and not Çciy^, «n?, &c« infinit. tiií0-9at, fá'ytffúíct, and not ihîÎTdai, Sec. 'which come from tia, tdo, to eat ; m'»a\ to drink ; or ^áyu, to eat. See the refolotion of verbs. Role xxv. To tbofe lue may adjoin the following poetics : ßUfuut ßinftatt w ßtüaofMi, vivam : »(oiJMt for nv(Mu, vadam. - The tenfes of the other moods are formedfrom thofe of the indicative» makings proper change of each termination, after Jthe manner of the aäive and pajßve ; as may befeen in the foregoing table. RULE LXVI. Formation of the Two Aorifts. I. 'ïhe two aorifis middle are formed each from the aStive: the firfl by joining ¡nnv to a •» and the fécond iy changing o» into ¿¡nnv. I 2. But a pure, inßead of ná{jitOs>, fT¿4'ao9oi>, íro'^á See Rule xxi. R ii t e LXVII. Formation of the Perfedt Middle. ^he perfe5l middle is formed' from the perfeSl aflive% hut takes its charaSierifiic from the fécond futitre, .examples. The perfeit middle, is formed from the perfeft aftive, taking the charafteriftic of the fccond future, inftead of that of the preterite: tuVtm, tirvtpKy middle rtrvTroe, becaufe the fécond future is rvTrS. In like manner, dico^ middle be¬ caufe of the fécond future j tstXhVa-w, percutió^ tnénXnxxy middle ■stíirXvyxy by reafon of the fécond future trXvyu : ßxdvTUy, noceoy ßiZxx^xy middle ßeSxx^ €«, becaufe of the fécond future ßxxSüy &c. This tenfe is conjugated after the manner of the aftive; thus, 'Perfect. Sing. TÍrov», ■ térvnai, tirmrt. Dual ------ TSTwasTi», TtTt^raT«)'. PI S Terv'uaij.ív, ' ftrvuxtt, TíTvirxa-i, I Dor. TÉT¿3rapTí. Ç ANNOTATION. Verbs iii a pure Ihould follow the fame analogy ; as tia, honore, fécond future aflive rtS, perfeö middle «ti» ; Xvu, folvo, future Xvu, perfeâ middle XsXi'«.* (pva,nafcor, future perfeâ middle eoiÇva: thus âma, audio, ihould make regularly in the fécond future íuoü, ihortening th^ penúltima, whence the perfeâ middle ihould be unufual ; and froiti thence the Attics have formed by reduplication ¿x^xaa, which aloim is received. But there are feveral of thefe verbs in a pure, that want this tenfe, efpecially thofe- which have for their chdraSlerißic one of thefe three diphthongs, etv, ¡v, s; at tango,- contreâo': matoíva, in- ftituo : K^éa, pulfo : xán;, lavo, ífc. Andpolyjyüahlts in vu-, at ¿grúa, ftruo, adorno-: îyjç;^, ifuket, and the perfeâs mid» die, rirtfio. and ¡Aé/xAet. i>t¿yu,fiu£ie, makes vripvy» znd tetptvy», fiugi : ô^iyu, perrígei £^oy», from whence we find è^eyviet for ùçoyvTa, in the participle ; and thence cometh içyvtà, a fathom, or fix feet meafure. .We likewife find quoted from Sophocles, the perfeâ XiKOf» for iKTom^ from x'^ta, ocdde : i^a, moveo, concito, makes Att. o^^«, and Poet, u^o^a,, cendtatus fum, metus fum: í^u, apte, congrue, makes Att. ¿^Ti^et,. Poet. and ; from whence congr/tens, compailus, conveniens. Rule LXIX. Of the Perfeft of feme particular Verbs. 1. "EGw mdktS sTGdc, ttia^et \ '' 2. ¿çu(r. Att.»). - - - lon.-MK. Att. Dual' - - - - - irtrinuro», ÎTtrvntimt, ' Piar í irtrónstist», inrvintrt, - Irtrvmtoat. • ; ' t Dor. -W|buf. _ - - -1 . Att. rriTvmoxt Sc rtrintaxs. It is formed from the perfeft, by changing « into uv, after the manner of the aélive, and prefixing án e, when the perfeft begins with a confonant, as here, ítítvttuh otherwife it has the fame beginning : thus oTJ'oi, novi, otitiv : 'tano^u, fettttnavi, iavó^uv. The exptication of the dialeils marked in this tenfe may be feen in the - aSive voice, as likewife mojl of the following dialers. /Ç H A P. TCXI. Of thé other Mooàs, and the Participles. - T iTE Subjunctive. Firfi Aoriß. Ç ró'^atAxt, tí5'>|/j), vtrheraverim, ®* \ Ion. -««». ' ' , or Dual 7V^Zis.í6ot, t¿4")o"6o», T»4^v8oif. verberavero. p, Ç TV.JyúiA,sa-6a, .TÍiJ Dor. -úi*to6x. ' Second Aoriß. Sing. J''J rvKUfsxi, rvnji, rvnyixxt. Ion. TtxvnaisMt, Ion. -ijat. Dual rinno^ot, ' xinn^n. PI "5 xvoeúiA.tix, xéntio-6e, xúnarexs. Dor.-«>cre«. Perfect and Plu-perfeEl. 5 xixhvnu xixînrv,- -verleravetim, ... • lon.'-«T¿ir;it». Ot * Dual - - - • • xsxlmxoi, rnvnyim. -iffestt, Plur, ttxvvauui, nixiv^xt, xixmcmc. The Ï74 BOOK III» ty Vjbäbs;^ the optative.' Firß Future, Sing, ri^'oto, rv-i/oiTOf Der bittet l^pal . rv^oifudtPf rv^ota^o»,' PI - {w^oifitiaf. Tvi]/ot76i.> VV4^OHTO, * '\ Ion. -tietro, ' Second Future. . - Sing. Tvlrciftti», 'rvvoTo, ^rvwoTra, Pual rvvni/Atdo», rvrnTo^r, Tvmr, PJor { 'ifuB», rvnt7a9tf twoTtr». ' - - -loh. •«W». Firß Aortß. - - - Sing. rv^euo, rv^'enT«, ' verbtraveriift, l^nal rv'^aiiteiot, TtnJ^etMti/. Plur Í Tfil/Äi/AtS«, rv^Mrètf : . £ Jon. -etictru Second Aoriß. Sing. TVItaifitlt, TUVOtO, TVVOtTO, Dual Tt>irotf«e6or, Twiroi^ôo», * wiroía-6i¡it. PI 5 rvmí¡ísd», Tvwota^f, rvvoirro. Ion.-oí«To.' PerfeSl and Plu-ferfeß. Sing. tvtvvoint, títíwoií, ttrivn, verhera^hH,- - Dual - - - . ' 'TiTiiaroJTor, ' ' Tvtviroirn^ PI Í rervmi/jtsv^ TsTi/sroiTe, Terwrott». * l Dor. -oifiisç, The Imperative. Firß Aoriß. Sing. TÍ^at, 'rv'i'ia'Ba, 'verhcrato. Dual Tv^ota^ovf '7'V^ía'^uVm Flur. ri^xo-Ôsp ' 'Fv^íaBütff'apm Second Aoriß. Sing. Ttíora, rvvtrSu, Dual Tvireadtn, Plur. TtT£ir0e, rvvérèujat. Perfect and Plu-perfeSt. Sing. TíTüsrs, ^ . rirviríra, verherai Dual TîTOWSTO», TITVffÍTftí», Plur. Titinttl, TtrVTrÍTUVXt.' The Infinitive.. Firft Future. rb^ta-Bai, merberatum ejji. .Second Future» with a cúcumflex» whereas the tç" . xond.aorift has an acute. ' . - Firft : Of.Ctr^mfltít Vfírhs.r " '^7$ Aoü^ TÍ^oalleús vtrhtram/ß;. IL ». JbiiaaOm, conlag from . fiíJu, _ Thç^aOi;^ 4^V<^qir| poet. ^ . ^cond Aorift/: Tv^c^^fci, vith Acúte oa." ithç peou^gia. I loa» .riTovtfräeu, . , ' ■ ^ jPreter-pc^rfeél.aiid Plu-perfeä» rerv^ní»«». Ion, rfrvwiiMt». Dor. n- vwi/it»»! : as from íéh», and poet. ífUtctt is formed htiifM, , 'Od. «. cominz frpm r/e>re. . ,F A" R T i c i p Í, E s. Firß Future.. ^ Twí'óf»««» ' -vtrUratarMi» mü'Ofi-ítmi .. , ^v^oiténii, ^ ■r>i4">f*ùn» ' Second Future» rvwifietot, TvieVjAha, 'vufm/Antf rv^kt/nífifn, •twkf/^tOt, TtlTTSjKSIfS. ' Firß.^Aorjß, rv^iß,ttiu Twd"»/*/»». fui verheraviti ^'C^x/iinVt Tv^á(iííifr,í, tt/zi'lífupeff. 'tt/ij/úífiíifa.'', , I ' ' ' ■' Second Aoriß,- TUidutÁu wrofMin. ' '■ "rvmjjíín, 9ti.jeoi4.itH, . Freter-perfeSt and Plu-perfeíl. ¡TtTüsríií, T£T»w»T«{,^ I JÍM verberovîtt rtrt/jev»», , nrvjev'totí, or TtTtiroj,' Tirvjeáéoj', verheraverat»' ' . ■•- . T 'Of the Seóoñd Kind of V E R B S in 12: W H 1 C H I s Of CIRCUMFLEX VERBS. CHAP. XXII. ' . , „ Of the Nature of Circumflex Verbs» and of the Manner •of Conjugating them. Circumflex verbs are fo called from îheir,accent; becaufe two fyll^les being drawn into one,, this -accent, which is formed of the^ acute and thegravt^ is marked on dic jRd i ^ fro^. r . - 'Thenc ÏT^ Bobfc III. Cy Verbs7 , There are three forts of circumflex verbs for th^ may come from verbs in t«, or 6u: which has given occafion to grammarians to make three diflerertt conjugations. The contraâion is always formed uniting their charaéteriftk, «, «, o, with the vowel or diphthong of the termination : which happens only in thç prefent and imperfeA of each mood, and of the participle : becaulè it is only in thofe two tenfes that thefe charaâeriftics ^ joined to the termination. The other tenfes are formed according to the rules of barytonous verbs, as we ihall Ihew hereafter, when we have treated of thefe two, which are oftener ufed contraâed than otherwife.- The manner of contraSïing thefe Verhs. Verbs are contrafled .in as natural a manner as nouns i infomuch, that they who have comprehended the general analogy of contraétion, niarked in the ninth rule of the flrlt book, have no occafion to apprehend here any difficulty. - However, we may obferve, that thefe contradlions are. reducible to two clafles: the former, when two ihort vowels are drawn into a diph¬ thong ; as K, tTi tOy 5 ; the latter, when a fliort vowel is loft in the long vowel, or diphthong following •, or that which is leaft fonorous in that which is more fo; as £*], ñi tx, a i toiy o7 ; éuy u. Where you lee, that the vowel which abforbs the other, becomes always long ; as cío, ûi and that the t is fubfcribed, as ciot, f. This will appear more plain in the following tables, after we have reduced to a few rulés all the different modes of contraftion. ' ^ A ■RULE LXX. Of the Verbs in I«, whence grammarians have formed the Firft Conjugation of Contraéis. Ferhs in iu make of tt, and »of elfewhere thej rejeß Í. t ■ Verbs whole termination is in cu, contrail it into ti, and io into » i elfewhere they call away the charader- iftic f, and retain only the termination, t Rule Cy Ctrciimflex Vèrhsl 177 Rule LXXI. Of Verbs in «», whence grammarians have forttied the Second Conjugation of Contrats. Ai, «w, are contraSîed into u ; l>ut where there happens to he a v., it is rejeSted^ and i is fuhfcribed : other' *- wife the contraSlion is in «. In regard to the verbs in««; if after the chafade- riftic «, there happens to be an « or an 0, the contradion is made in « *, otherwife it is in «. But in making thofe contradions, you are not tp confider either the I or the u ; for if there happens to be a u, it is drop¬ ped ; hence «s makes «, as if there had been only «0 and the ««t« is only íigniñed by a point under ; fo that «10» makes « fubfcribed; and «£» makes «: and in like manner the reft. Rule LXXII. Of Verbs in 0«, whence the grammarians form the Third Conjugation of Contrads. Ferhs in cu contrast 0 followed by a fhort vowely or by », into ou ; but if it be followed by a long vowely it contrasts then into «. Otherwife the contraStion is in 0» ; except ouvy which makes »» in the infinitive. As to verbs in 0«, if the charaderiftic be followed by one of the two fliort vowels «, 0, or by the diph¬ thong xy the contradion is then in s.. But if one of the long vowels n or « followeth, the contradion is in « : and if there followeth a diphthong that has a » either in it, or fubfcribed, the contradion is then in St-, except the infinitive, where » is firft dropt, and afterwards oi is contraded into a ; thus ¿uv makes xv, x^va-óuvy xçuo-»»', inaurarcy &c. ANNOTATION. rules are as luellfor the aSlive, as for the pajfue and middle. But to render them more eafy andferviceahUy it is fufficient to form a fimple idea of the common manner of conjugating, as ría, or rvorra ; and aftermoards to contraS the eharaSerißic ft £<|>iX- J Amabam, as, at. 1 I0/U8», iirs, 89», C S/UC», tftt, Sr. 090, ¿89;, ¿89, \ "» fíí f» T'A*- Honore, as, at, I ¿OJU8», ¿8T8, ¿9901. C. art) dTit Ç am', as;, as, I «y, 91;, fin,a- J Honorabam, as, at, I ¿ofitv, ¿Lire, am, L Sfii», «Tf, S?, Subjunctive. ^ 890, 8«;, iy, I « M M I "í .»?» í» ♦'*- J Amem, es, et. I 890JIM», ívrtf ídft. Optative. f tufu, toi;, 809, R M M M I S'A«<» «î» «o ♦iX- J Amarem, es, et. 2. I . I toijue», torrt, 809sr> C ^A*!!» ""''Is / ^ ^ \ s» ffs ?» T'A*- < Honorem, es, et. 2* I . I 090/88», avre, aeiet, V thüffar. r •iX. < tîv, C Amare. • •A- Î*W, itrtg;, Ut, unit, iur»^ tint, Sfa, iftit, t», iunç, St, ùmii • ' • Tí,*. ■< * M> úrtí, Êt, árx, ^ Honora, ato, 'itrt, airnfM, » «rt, awgutf f ««»» Tti*. J ?r, ¿ Honorare. iut, àimt, ut, wvr«;, ÍU9», »6nt, uja, ¿B'Vtt ¿oy, &»fit, Sv, Zmtt - 1 ateur- ^ 1 ■ es, tiruf 1 », if», . Inaura, ato. I Im, atrariu, "•¡ht, ÍT*«y, f ««», Xfuâ-. < wr, 4 Inaurare. • XfMT-'t M im, inmt, St, ûmtl Suva, tint, Ufa, ént, it), itnii, _.ûf, Srrtî, ' « Gaza >vill have it,' that verbs in ¿a fubfcribe « ; ßoxv, clamare : «reí»«», e/urire pretending that_all infinitives ihould have a diphthong, except fiv, viuere, - , The opinion of Gaza. hat heen adopted hy the greateß part of the modern grat^arians. Ramus, Sylhufgius, Crußusy SauSius, Merigon, and others. But Lafcaris in his third hook, treating of x fuhfcrihed, fays that even the Greek grammarians themfel-vet were divided upon this article : and befides the authority of Urban and Caninius, we are told by -Theodoßus, Het-odian, and fame other very ancient gramma¬ rians, that there is this difference between barytonous and circumflex verbi, that the former take their infinitive from the third perfon of the_ prefent indicative, hy adding » ; tiístei, verberat ; tiim», verberare : whereas the Jatttr take it from the third perfon of the imperfedi, hy add- 3 Of the Benfes of Circumflex Verbs, 183 ing ¥, and dropping tbt augment ; as IwoUi, faciebat ; vroisTy, facere : iSóec, clamabat ; ßoa>, clamare : inaarabat ; inau* rare, jind their reafon it, that_ no tenfe ending with », hath before this » another Utter which is not pronounced ; which would he the cafe, if a was to he fuhfcribed in the infinitive. And the jufinefs of this analogy appears fiill further from hence, that if we were to form the infinitive of verbs in iu, from the third per fon prefent, we fisould be obliged from xg^ooT, to make xff"'""* inaurare ; whereas, taking it from the imperfeä tpgçt/o-», we naturally make therefore this ancient formation feems to be the mofi analogical. Moreover, we meet with very ancient MSB. in the king's library, which fußciently afcertain it, though we do not pretend abfolutely to condfmn thé other manner. CHAP. XXIV. Of the Benfes of Circumflex Verbs, which conform to the analogy of the Barytons. Rule LXXV. Of the Penúltima of Circumflex Futures. « di fhort vowel before a circumflex verb is commonly made long in the future. Examples. Circumflex verbs commpnly change their charac- teriftic into its correfponding long vowel in the future, and confequently in the perfeét : thus, ' \ into Î amo, ÇiXioo, , « } ( ßoaa, clamo, ßoiou, ßiScvxa. o into xg^'T^'^t inauro, p(^voú(ra, xtxgóoux». Neverihelefs we mufl except fever al which retain their fhort chara£leriftic. 1. Whether it be i', as ecliiu, ad reverentiam adduco, filiiru : and in like manner d^níu, fufficio ; dxíu, molo ; «*£w, medeor ; j-ííxíw, rixor ; ¿xíu,. perdo -, rth-ív, pcr- ficio; Tf£w, trepido; ^íu, polio. 2. Or oc i as yiXccu, rideo, yexda-u: likewife (puodu, deprehendo ; laxo y ^?iOCCt}y £LmO y video ; vsi^ocu}, tranleo ; vsn^du, tentó ; ç>vçccu, mifceo." yílfo dijfyllables that do not form a vevh in j as ÄAaw, contundo, collido,' 3-a«o-w ; xA«w, frango, ¿AaVcu; çAjc'w, contundo, vçro; ig««, fació, íífí. But N- 4 thofe 184 BOOK III. 0/Verbs. tbofe that form verbs in ¡Aiy change a, into « in the future^ as rxduy TXrfji*», tolcro« rXwu j j^«w, commodoj do utendum ; ç)6ort vowel: and then the verbs fn tu offener snake tau, than ñau ; as ivamu, laudo, approbo, ivatttau, stsM, iäc, always retaining t ßort. RULE LXXVI. Of the Second Future, Second Aorift, and Perfed Middle of Circumflex Verbs. I. Circumflex verbs are either without the fécond fu¬ ture and aorift y and perfeSl middle : Z. Or elfe thy form them from the prefenty after the contraSlion is made^ without making any change in the penúltima. Examples. 1. Circumflex verbs coming from éw, are generally without the fécond future and aorift, and perfeél middle, which is always formed from the two former tenfes. Thofe that come from Iw, or «w, have thefe tenfes jDUt very feldom, and only when the verb, after being contraéíed, does not terminate in u pure j as pxí», fiXw, am'o. 2. And then thefe tenfes are formed naturally from the prefent, after the contradion is made, retaining its charadefiftic and penúltima, and aflfuming always their Of the Paßve and Middle Circumflex. 185 proper augment and termination, without minding the other rules of the penúltima of the fécond aorift, or the fécond future of barytons. The prefent and fécond future are then alike •, as amo et amalo: and thence comes the fé¬ cond aorift, t^tXoui perfeft middle, ttíVíA«, amavi. In like manner, tîAéw, tîAw, pérfido et perficiam^ and ' not t«a« i fécond aorift, íteAoi», and not haXov ; perfeâ: middle, tItíA«, and not t^toA«, perfect: Szvuy fono tt fonabo : Uniravy zná not iSoirov : and not iiioirxy fonavi : tv^éu, invento^ cZ^ovy Luci. and not Zpou, invent. Like wife /uux«», juuxu, mugio et mugtam: xov, fAt[¿vK»y mUgivty &c. ' But fometimes the poets change the ßort penúltima into a long Oney in thefe preterites : thus from a«Aéw, aaa«, loquor, obftrepo, comes A£A«a«, in Eurip. and AíAijA« in the etymologift. From /xsAîw, curo, comes ¡AîfA.n?ix: rórox jiAEju«iA£, Hom. curse funt. Monofyllahles are always deprived of thefe fame tenfes, except the three followingy ex;«» habeo et habebo, from whence cometh xarao-x"?» inhibebis : U-xyvy habui ; (rScuy extinguo, rSuy iirSou : cirxwy , »"r«> Inaurarer, eris, etur, eetfeeßa. Stieße, iune, . tlfttö», eMt, urrii Of the Paßve and Mddle ùrcutnfiex, 187 verbs p á.s s i v e. Imfbrative. Infinitive. Participles. tiK' < * í», tirBu, S, lifSvß Amare, ator. fi«4e, fle^oiirar, ^ iTe^e, liv9«7avt r íraSai, •a- s »"eSai, ' Aa^rl. «>x. i v^naca t»n, for xn^uai, laxant, from which is common in the participle: ytKat, for ridens, IBc. 3. The fame Dorics and Ionics put fometimes ev for the a, which arifes from the contraSion ; as ñyánsvt, for nyáotm, amabant : Tivy, for hçùruy, intcrrogabant : inrtv/ítnp, for inrufmnt, aflatum. Thy are alfo eucuflomed to contraS the verbs in tu and au in other tenfes befldes the prefent andfmperfeS ; which is very frequently done in ßoau, ntu, and Btáofíxt, as may be feen in Theocritus, Herodotus, and others. For example, ma^aßuaac, for •osaqaßoitoac, damans : iSuaáro, for'Äonoaro, damavit: inflúre/tat, jfor imßoi)aoft,at, in« damabo. In like manner, túaaro, for Uoiaaro, intellexit : pua-ifMMf, for nnaáimyQf, inteiligens : múoaí, for imnoat, intdligcns : ittturo, for ipo ÊOOK m. íyVERBSl imivrtt Intellexit. hikevuife far ètctrmt ¿oñfidefá; 9»a£funtt ^i*r»iA.nou cohfiderans» f^e> 6. In vtfbs in ¿a, the tantraSion being made in a, tie pdete by ten Jonie refalutian in/ert another « ; ae ytXáa», for ytXay, ridere : fn);(a>áa0'6«w, for machinari : iiháctono», for tnííaoMiif from hítáti, meridiofé Jf the eontretSion be in u, and the penúltima long, they add another e¡\ as md&ia, wíü, •antiáa, falfo. But if the penúltima be ßsorte they infirt an o', as ¿rrtiu, ¿mù, àtrtiu, occurro : ßoäa, ßoü, ßaia^ clamo; 'whkh th^ conjugate thus : ßoia, ßoiui, ßoaa ; ßoiafttt, ßoaari, ßoitiot ¡ alnuays drawing back the accent. From hence comes Xaiínsrómrt, in Bom. for iplendenti, from tsaymveiti, lucefco, fplendeo: ^óunt, weeping, for yoàoa, fem. part, from ynia, S, lageo. 7. The Dwics alfo, as ht^s been already ebfirved, change the con- traSion • into q. Wherefore in Horn, rq tvs ¿to; ¡¡/.¿st», 11. cape nunc cingulum ; t3 is there for rS, or t«s, from the unufual verb yáif, from nuhence comes reltu, perf. ríraxá and rlrafMct. And ma, xj aim»; is ôpdaPificîoêr i^vat, is the fecond per/on Doric of i^aofiai, ogáioat, ¿gacrai, i^uai, S^vai : or elfe it comes from the jEoI. 8. We liiewi/e find in Hom. litiAsiaro, confideraret, ave already taken notice of in the preceding booky and which we ßiall men¬ tion again in the next chapter. The verbs in v/*» have neither á reduplication, nor a change of the-penúltima j- but v being common," . paiieth-for long in the fingular, and for ihort in the plural.They want both'the ; fubjundive and the optative.' - " I _ Even the other verbs have 'but thme tenfes, the prefent, the imperfeft, and the fécond aorift ; taking the reft from the verbs in «, whence they are derived : . wherefore we ihall firft treat of thefe tenfes, referving to fpeak afterwards of the otheés, which havé hardly ■ any thing particular. And we jfhall begin with repre- fenting theiè three tenfes in a general table, intending to treat afterwards of each feparately, with their dia- ieds and fpecial rules. O TABLE 194 Book IV; Of TABLE of CONJUGATION Indicative. svbjvnctivb. Optative. r. íeo. P«ei. ra- J " ( nfMf vt, «0st pono, is, it. ifMS, ITS, tun. Ion. mot. Tifl- a. Ç S» »f» ?s ¿ ponam, as, at. »TS, Ses. - Imp. ■"tl 'w, »c, «, ponebam, at, at. [ qun>, its, es»*. TA- a. Tinr, tí»í, im, ! ponemm, es, et. [.i(iiptsv,ttiÓt, iwessf. A. s. "eô- 1* «y, «c, a, &c. pofui, iftí, it. Ti9- a. S, pí, p, &c. pofuerim, is, it. ra- 3- SMí, SM, Ac. pofuetim, is, it. II. aa. P«e*. 'r: '»^1, Vit If, fto, as, at. , Oftty, art, S«-i. v- A. ^ w m sm \ •» f<> ?» < fteni, es, et. ¿«fAST, Sea, Ses. Imp. -d 'w, «î, », ftabam, as, at. , 0^, «te, oo-av. •t] OUI», aitit, AW, ftarem, es, et. eMi/it>,aivlt,ai>mu A. 2« 'Er- X. w, », &c.' fteti, ifti, it. •ir- a. S, pi, p, Ac. fteterim, is, if. v- 3- tutu, oúií, OM), Ac. fteterim, is, it. III. oa. Pais. a»- ] ■ a/ii, i)(, »>f, 1 do, as, at. ' cfttr, ort, S«-i. > Ion. ja»"!. "T «» «f» A Ailw < dem, es, et. a. ¿ jest's Imp. 'eí»-. "aw, s»{, m, dabam, as, at. vrt, trm. •• A(lt> a. r eúiT, eúií, eúi, < darem, es, et. ¿ OKptsT, sm7i,wiesn'. A. A. "Ei. 1« m, ett, a>, &C. de^ ifti, it. A()'- a. S, St, S, tec, dederim, is, it. IV. ta. Pres. ZSb>v- " i ' Oft», Oí, 0«, 1 jungo, is, it. 1 vfjitt, vre, ve-h . Ion. ó < pone, ito. ¿•Tt, trrnvtn. Ttfl- &M, ponere. f aJc, hrnt, TiS- < «ira, únt, ¿1», ím{. \i ■ - r y * ' TiB- it, irm, tee, pone, ito. Tt0- tfWu, ' ponere. Ti9- át, bmti ill .1,8^ "V- ừu» ftate. ràt, ¿me, " If- < är», árnt. Cor, ¿mt, , [r « ! C iSr,^ ice, fta, ftato. f- Snu, ftare. f- ¿t, ptnt. f rfi, ir», ùti- J da, dato, ¿on, inmn. alt'* am, dare. C 3}, inte, ai^ < Sfu, émt, ¿í», inte, , o }'• it, ir», &c. da, dato, tee. 3m, dare. b» dt, inte. TlA, VT», Zcvpa- / junge, ito. ¿tin, ir»e-af. ZtiTV- im, ^ jüngere« 1 fie, intt, " Zlt7>* < tía*«, wuf, 1 ¿Ä, lîliTOf. , Il O 2 General íigs böök rvv cy veräs; General Obfervatîons oh the Bialeßs af Verhs in • The Colics and poets give this termination ¡íi to a great number of _ -eireumfiess verbs*—Whence vse- meet-wish Jeme of thefe verbs-vsitbout a. — reduplication, not only osnong tbofe in Vfu, but likeiui/e amonß tbe^ other fort i ai ç»Xe«,' 'tpixoi^h to* love ; * aUla, ulniii, to prail'e ;* «»/«, to «ffifrî - wrw, yévfiít, to-comprehend, pr uoderftandi—Fresn vsbence comes he did lore : im, he did underftand »od;, or JEolic, drawing back the accent, he that un^erftaildeth j and the like.. • ' ' . . , ,i Î In.the fame manner yiSota, to langh, y/Xnfuv.* nxia, to vanquilh« ' /iKfife.i : tO'fK,~'o^itfii'T~*ràiii fofüstAw, ' tO'kitl;'iprílf*rr~"~* fhe poets^ alfo either add, or take away the reduplication of the other ordinary verbs in ¡xt, as the sMofure of their verfe requires in the fame manner as they do with the augmesst of verbs in a. Sometimerthry repeat the~twnfirfi letterrfbr eerednplicatiosey itJits, ¿Ml*', tO;ílray: ¿;i¿f,.'to-be ang^» j pajßve, uKuKitiMci, ¿xá^fiieat. fhe fasne -it obferved in all the other moods. Sometimes they add a ¡o to the atduplication j' miJue,. atwíÓM, asífo- ocM/m, to All : .,v^á.o>, tBiir^áa, mtieor^iiiJít, to bum. Some take their reduplication in the middle j óvía, lutia, itUni**, to aflill: tend others of the like fort. ' ' ... « The poets thange alfo theßori cbaraäerißic for a long stne Jst-the dual and plural ; or vice verfa in theßngular, according to the exigency of the verfe, J The lonians and Baofíans make their reduplication in e ; Írri¡íi, for JlenioLi alßrsimg.j]iifjame in alljothet-jaoBdsl Thus from Scaai, or èvla, Cometh Tt6v>)fii,_ to. die : fromtfia, rirlfiiifei, to fufíer: from tota, temji't to' think, or ConfiàeTi.'lfrom rt>da, óriríMio,, to finiih, ^cr accompliih; which we likewife meet with even in verbs in fci; 'tOù/fxt, to hear, xfic?M^t, from whence~tx^vïïi^ ; tôHëTrkênT x:-h-a-jéu-ii. — . - - 0/ tbe ASlive Benfes in particular, is)ith their Diale£ls : And, firfl of the I n p i c a't i v e. The Prefeni.Tenfe, 4- ^íúyv-vin. Dual — — 2f- ?• Sing. «V 1/*», ßiSufet, .^ol« ' "SUfsLkf 1 . Bceot. w Síi'OSf,' TÍ&-t¡trt, î'r-ro-». Dor. -xre. íiS-wat, Dor. ' -tiTi, Dor. -art. -t7. ' •aot. -or. Of the ASiveten^, and their DialeSis. 19 7, . λ' . 2^ 3. . ■ 4* Dual rii-troift IT-«TO», Ííí-OTO», ■" Çsvyv-vroiit i -nr», j ríd-tTOVf ■ ' íf-XTOVt ' ■ Jíí-OTO», ' ^£Óy»-UTO». Plur." Tiiî-fjttî», iç-»pi._tVf ¿í$-o¡AtVy' - ^íüy»-üj(*í», -- -T/ï-sm, ír-aTí, ííÍ-OTÍ, Çi»iy»-uT£, Tíó-íMTí, íV-afl"í, ^íí'So-t, - . ^£uy»-ví(ri. Ion. -íaa-t. Dor. »«uirt. .Ion. -óoecri, Ion. >1/00-1, _Dor.,-t»Ti.. ' Dor. -órr». Dor. -ww. • .. The third perfon plur^ as we have pbferved in the ^ foregoing book, is like the dative pliural of the parti-¿ ciple in the prefent and future tenfé of all verbs. ThuS / Tiôiiç, évToçy ponenSy nlakes iroTg tàiivvy fonentibus : and • T»0jjjtAi, poHOy makes the third_ perfon plural TíSiro-í, pQ-\ nunt. And in like rnanner the reft.. . - ; ' Hence we lay t^ivyvZ.aEç, yí>Mi, Sic. 0 ■ , , íf^e read in Theocritus too^é^nist,' from «orí. Dor. for wçàç ; and from igia, to fee ; •//irwj/e »««ftE, y}-«« »*áw, .to-owrcome,'^ both in an optativefignifcatiou. ^ But, asweßall demonßrate in the eighth book, thefe three moods are often ufed one for another ; fo that tßere is no manner of necefßty for faying with Caninius, that w( ought- V • 03 ■ rt ■ ipS ' B o o K ÏV. 0/ Vi ft BS. - u turii* »{«jjfti ofuf «roôéjji/«, with m » /ub/crihedt fir hmAí»» «ofl»- (»Uh "f tbi «ptativt. Rule' II. . Formation of the Imperfeá. The imperfeß coming from the prefent^ takes an aug- ment y when it can : it changes pi into v for the , firfiperfony into 9 for the fecohd, and drops it in- tirely in the third. Examples. ' The imperfeft àiTumes an augment, when the com¬ mon rules will admit of it; but fpipt has none, becaufe it begins with an 1, which is an Immutable vowel. See page 106. It is formed from the prefent, changing pi into o for-the firft perfon, into . Imp. trus, »{,' a, flabam, StSiu, !iiS, Imp. iííSit,, Uf, ' », dabam. In like manner in the third perfon plural, hiino, tfuv, iSiSnv. There are a great many other occafions on which thefe verbs ajfume the tenfes of circumflex verbs, as we ßall '■ fee hereafter in the imperative ; and as we pven " meet with inftances in the prefent, zTK¡»Tt6eT, or t¡r«^Ti9a, op- ponit, from : ísfoT, from Móu, for ilSucs, he giveth ; and fuch like. The dialers of this imperfeSl have been already explained elfewhere, O 4 Rule 200 BOOK IV, íy VERBS,' • ' Rule IV,.. . Formatiórv of the Second Aorift. I. the feconà -agrifi is formed fronr^ the tmperfe^^ omitting the reduplication, ' . ,2. It retains its long votoel in the dual and plural^ ex¬ cept t&yiVf ííwvf and from tnfAt. Examples.. 1. The fécond aorift here, as welt as in the other modd.s, whether aftive, or middle,- is always formed from tlie imperfeft, by rejeéling the reduplication, and affuming its proper augment j, as ît»Ôi)i/, ÏGui»; ffíjjí, &C. . . . . 2. It is conjugated in the fame manner as the im- perfeft in 'ßnv, from rtó«/*» ; tiuu from Sí$u-[t,t \ and %v from InfAi, of which we fliall fpeak hereafter: afluming the ihort vowel in the dual and plural. But except thefe three and their compounds, it re¬ tains always its long vowel, as may be feen mimv, here following ; as likewife in ÍQttv, frorti ßxlvui v'adoy and in all thofe that are derived from a verb in. «'«: as alfo in Hyvuv, I have known-, lixuv, I have, been taken -, and others derived frotn a yerb in ów. ANNOTATION. ' Here it is obvious, that the fécond aorift following a different analogy in its formation, from that of barytonous verbs, has no dépendance on the fécond future. Hence .it is alfo that though theie verbs have a fécond aorift, yet they never have a fécond fu¬ ture, as Apollonius attefteth, lib. iv. cap. 6. Second Aoriß, Sing. íi-nv. >r tr-yiv, £Í-cai',' íf-VÍ, ii-uç. sô-»), fr-n. ÍÍ-U. Dual tO-STor, tr-vro». íí-OTOU, £Ö-£TiJI/, Ifvrnv, iS-éruv,. Pluf. tf-mixcv, . î$-oy.cv. W-cre, fr-»iT£, ti-ort. £^flt'augment they hâve alcended, /ir éSñaaf» frsm. JVbiàt Ts./ometmes praéH/èd. even, in the imptrfeQ, èriôsr, for sTÍÓsa-a», and agrees entirely with the analogy of the. aorißt Book 111, .Rule Iv. fivf St», ybr «TvÇÔ)i , ■ ■ , .r O T A T LO t ^ ^he aorift tr»»^ITumes an augment,, though the imperfeû be without it, by reafon that it does not begin with an immutable vowel like the imperfeâ^ this t, being fevered from it. Where- ^fore the « alfuntes the fmobth breathing of the fyllabic augment, though the » of the prefent and of the .imperfeâ hath a rough breathing. But .if after the reduplication » is dropt^ there remain- eth a long Vowel, the augment then is negleâed, becaufe ,the rule does not admit of it. Thus from "np cometh v', miß. The verbs in v/xi want the fécond aorift, 'except the diíTyHables : and then this tenfcis the fame with the imperfeâ ; as Úvp, from to fink, or go under, to drefs, or put on.i exXt/i-y from xXùjni, ta hear, to hearken: whence alfo cometh the third perfon plural, Úup, for ihcap, they hànie cloathed, with a Ihort v, following the fyncope of the preceding. The fame fometimes happeneth alfo to bthér verbs in ^1, that have no teduplication, whofe imperfeft 'and fécond aoriíls are always the^fame; as hve, ipix«» ; to become dry, etrxXi)» : ypüyít, to know, typup, &C.. C fi À P. III. Of the other Moods, and the^ Participles, R.w L E V. 1 " ' Of the Subjundive.. 1. ^he fuhjunStive.hath u. 'infiead of ■», in primitives from ou ; and ot, in thofe from «w. 2. /!he aorifls are formed from the prefent or the im¬ perfeâ-, but t] is reflored to the aorifls that come ^ from primitives in oiu. • E' X A M P L E s; I. H E fubjuhdtive conformeth alfo to the paf- X. five aorifts of barytonous verbs, fave only that derivatives, ^hich come from á primitive in out, retain w, where thefe aorifts have n. And thofe that ]Come from a primitive in au, prelerve a in the fame perfoñs, though feme write them likewife with an ». ' , • • The 202 Boor IV. VeräsV ■ The lècond and third perfon lingular have always an » iubfcribed, after the manner of barytons, which fometimes conftitutes the only difference between the indicative and the fubjunâive. 2i The aorift is formed from the prefcnt or the kn- perfe6b, only by rejeâing the reduplication. But that; of a primitive in refumes its n throughout^ as may ^ be feen in the following examples. The Svbjúnctivé. Preßmt and Imperfe^» Sing. TtO'Uf îç-^Sf ítí'u^f Ion. i«, Ion. (uf Poet. itw. ítius, ^ M or «{. Ion. . Poet. iUif TI0-JÇ, Poet. lUf» Ion. Alf. t.o-y, ' Poet, e, Ion. Aio't. Dual T»0-nT9>, Flur. riO-wjwfV, T»0-«Ti, T»9-«(ri, * Verbs- in: vju want barytons. Ion. Alf. , M ' T-Jf, or y. Ion. tjifft, t — or Utov. /r-aror, or 7¡Tor. iV-ars, or ?Tt. Ion. y(n.' ííf-UT99f ítf-Srov, ítf'UfJitVi ítí-uvi. the fobjunâive, which they borrow of Sing. Ion. Poet. S'liuf Ion. * •> Second Aoriß, rtiw» r«, Ion. Poet, nitt, et fji«. cfs» Ion. rfyft rtUff ??«» rv. Poet. Siúti, I«n. ^f. 9vy ry, Ä?» Ion. Btwi, Ion. AietAi^i.. Ion. iSn* Poet» tn» (»^91# Poet« >íj)»« Poet» et ' yjWI. «nfO-l. Dual Of Mt^i ehà the PañUtpUs^ • 203 Dual rïw» Íoto», !^vroy, gyroff íuTOV» > ' Plur.- ^UfUVi fw/MV) iufitv, Ion» /«fur. Ion; iofut, ' Poet. tUfutt Poet, iiofun, éi , ZOfUH, S'VTti fîiTSi ¿¡Sréf duvtf fSriy iutrt. ^ famy (Wt; et ¿oat, tUian ¿oat, Itbts fuhjunSthe agrees with that of the circumflex terhsy except that thofé in upi retain the a throughout : the two perfons fingulary which ^contrast on into #<, in circumflex verbsy are formed here in u fubfcrihed i which form is quite naturaly itíuiy ítíuy inftead of itíotsy Mot, Obfervations on the Dialebls, Here lUevoi/e the Ionics re/elve the contraSiom rAíoy/orrthoe híoy for $2: .ditffúr» for Bufut: xr(ai/,tri far rráfín, let us kill. The poets join an t to t, to mah a diphthongs r^dttoi and Biioi dtiofut and hsioiAtu ßiio/Mt, for ßofut,. let as go; taken fresst ßiHnyo, to go: thangistg afterwards the proper diphthong into on isnproper, eye, ^y f^e. which happeneth aJfo to harytonous verhsy as we have alreadj obferved. The third perfon fingular in a% is alfo ufed in this aoriß. Therefore of ej we snake fjai} of rip, ripa, i of f tip, riipat, and of r^ rpnat. Rule VI. , Of the Penúltima of the Optative. The optative forms its penúltima by making a diphthong of its charaSterifiic vowel. Examples. The optative alio followeth the pallive áorifl;. But in regard to the penúltima, which muH always be a diphthong, it alTumes in eách fort of verbs its charac» teriftic vowel, to which it joins an >, to make a diph« thong. Hence it ^efembles the Attic optative circum¬ flex, Rule Ixxiv. It likewiie fuffers a fyncope of n in the plural, in the fame mariner as the palfive aorift, according to Rule Ixiv^ And therefore it is conju¬ gated thus : The ao4. BOOK IV. ' 0/" VE n 8,i.' , The Optativ er Prefent and ImperfeSl • Sing. Tiô-fi'nv, iç-etluvy $tS-oly\v*y . Poet. ^Vy Poet; rt^-ttniy If-oúníy • itS-CHTiÇy jmí. tí6-£í>i, îç-eùny M'oífi, in* áti. Dual. t»9-î»'»tov, ♦ ' • r iS-euri'covy cf;í-o»»ito> "f". Tí9-£»nT»)V, ¡camirnvy Plur. zri^-tlnfAcvy ¡S-'«lf*ÍVy Sii'oírifs.t]i, ' Sync. t7fA,s*y Sync. a7¡s,tPf Sync. o7¡A,tp, Tl9-fl>lt£, îç-odriTSy . ■ M-olríTSy tTrey œîtf, , ■ o7ri. rS-iiriffàvy îf-ain II. V, .and ^»uvro, //, a. but they are formed by fyncope from the ba^ ■ rytons,. iuKoifM, and íatsvoíf4.iif, from ix^va, exao> excutio, exeo, and ^ecw0, conviviutn praebeo. Second Aorifi. Srei-mvy fcci-nvj íoí-nvy &c. like the preient. Qhjervations on the Diale5is. 7he Attics change fimetimes the proper diphthong into an improper ; íiíTlíf iány iâc. not i Kv^tof avrcais h toSírtf z Tsm. ii. det tibi . Dominus intelleñum in omnibus: ívoián ccvtù Kv^ío;, zTim.iv. rependat ci Dominus. Liiewifi rni»* rnnct rint for raíi» : Çvvs for Çair,», from dicq : i¡>Sr,r,ii, from ¡¡dórtiAt, to walk, ' to adr' vanee, to afcend, Úfc. ' Rule VII. Formation of the Imperative. 1. Theprefent of the Imperative takes $>, preceded hy- aßortvowel: 2. But Ot is often rejeSedy and the long vowel reflored:. Examples. , 1. The prefent of the irpperative is in Ô», like the paf-, five aoriii, aíTuming before 9» the fliort chara<5teriftic yowelj. A»/ ibe -Participles, ¿05 vowel, proper to .each fort of verbs. But t/Ôît» îs j-written.with; a r^rby reafon of the 0 which goes:be¬ fore s thus;. ' T H - Ï M p E k A 7 i V 5. ' ' Sing.'T»9-tTr, " ' ' 7," í»'í-o0»,. Çeuyi«-û0i, ' ./Eol.'»yi, ' JEo\. ■ .£ol. »9i, ' Sync. 1), Sync. « or n. Sync. «. Sync. ». TÍ9-£T«, ír-aTW, ¡^myv-úrt). Dual TtO-eror, Tr-aror, ' - Sli-orovy ^ívyv^vro», - • T»0-£Twv, ífcti-uvi ' - iiS-ôrmt ' Çtvyv-vrmi Plur; T»0-£T£, »r-«T£j iíí-ony ' ^tvyv-vre% n^-sTUffxVi Ir-ctTurxVf ' iiS'-órwfxVf ÇtvyvrVTurx». The Mol, and poets retain hérè the long vowel ; îxh'tw, have pity: ^iXnO«,'love thou : m0»,-think or conßder : ' wí/AírXnS», fill : í»í«0í, give. And hence it comeSf thaty • < « 2. The fyllable 0, is frequently rejefted^ and the long charafteriftic retafihed in the common tongue; as TÍ01I for T»0»iT» or t»'0£tj : Tri for irrßt : • and «Va for 7ra0i. In like manner rirXa, fuffer, or endure, for ri- TXa0»; x3if*irXn, J?//, for rir»jt*irX»0i'.', xfiiiiAVti, for Xfiifn/aOi, &C. ' ' Î . In the fame manner thofe in v¡aí j ll^iiyw, join, rip. for ^íúyvüét : ' írúci/u, S. Gregory, for ítUwét, ^hew oc demonfiratec which agrees pith the third pérfon of the 'imperfeSl, rejeSUng the augment ; to which perfon the im¬ perative hath an entire relation in. all forts of verbs abtive: jufi as in verbs paßve ii bears an analogy to,the fécond perfon of the fame tenfej fl^herefore, ' . ' As the imperfed circuniflèx is moft ia'ufe, fo the ■ imperative is "borrowed from thence: tí9u, put-, l^x, appoint -, give -, .taken frpm t»0«í »Vw, í»íw. See , above, page 1^9, "Rule iii. ' ' ' i Rule'VIII,. Formation of the. Second, lAorift, Imperative. 40 * I. Ihe fecond-dorifi of verbs in [it,t fiom -eci, 'is' in ' « ; and that of SíSvfjíi in oç : ' - • > . >' . ' The reß form it from-the prefent, by changing their jbort vowel into a long one. ' Exam- px>$ B o Q fç IV. Of Ye It ®ß Examples. 1. T|ie fécond aorift of verbs in ¡tt, derived frônî thofe in iu, terminates in ç: S-t«, ti%u> ; retaining its ihort vowels through all perfons. In like manner ioÇf iirtù. Hence comes babe: vvte^ dicy or fequere: feri ?ç, mitte, from «rp^üíjMi, iHfAi. And lb their compounds, mnrtf, die : incumbe: hfc^^ee, obfia, cohibe, &c. 2. The reft forn) ^eir aorift from the prefent, bjr calling away the reduplicaron, as has been ipentioned, and putting their long vowel for a Ihort one i üAhßa: yycilOi, nofce: Second Aoriß, - Sing. Â-tç, d-iru, f-vru, i-ivut Dual d- (Toy, r*4r«r, \ &-iru>, firtßii, í-án»,' Piar. S-ítc, s"vri, b-órt, ^-ÍTucar, ^•óruff»** Rule IX. Of the Penúltima of the Infinitive. 1. The infinitive requires its fiort cbaraßerißic. * 2. Verbs derived from $t», as alfo make a diph- t thong of this ßort vowel in the fécond aoriß :. 3. The fécond aorifls of all other verbs affume their long vowel. Examples. 1. The infinitive followeth likewilè the pailive aorift, terminating in vxi ; but it takes its ihort cha- radteriftic before the termination of the prefent in each conjugation. 2. The fécond aorift of verbs derived from primi¬ tives in in, make a diphthong of this vowel; and SiSufiki does the fame. 3. In every other kind, of verb, this aorift afiumes its long vowel, as in the imperative. And the rea- fon is, becaufe of the circumflex accent, which is natural to it, and cannot be on ai^ other than a fyllable long by nature.^ ' The lästig VHíél , s Infinitive, Prefent, TiO-/v<(i> tfdvtth ííí^éifM* Second Aorífi. fweu, ^ Ohfervations on the Diakßs, Vht inßmtive tonformtb likemft to the ofudogy of barjtmt, at tified Book Hi. Rtue Ixv. From ei>»i it formed ñf*** attd fn¡uMu .* »rátcUf xT^fWKy and xrbfuteuf intcrficerc, í¡íe, ^ ' v l £ ' Terminations of the Participles. ^be Participles of tbefe verbs end in uç, ck, »ç, vç. Examples. The participles, as well of the prefent as of the aorift, following the paflive aorift, are terminated in $ : but they retain their charafteriftic before the termina¬ tion, in verbs derived from primitives in ao or vu ; , changing it into a diphthong, in verbs. derived from primitives in tu, or in ¿u. ' Prefent and ImperfeSi. s TtS-iif. iriot : ¿rrot : iti-tst» érroç t (ivyn-vf, i riS-MO'«, líeiif : tr'äo'a, áout : hi-Sffa, értif : (tvy>-'vaa, ínf, T¿ TtS-i». trroi : ír-»yp ùnroç s M-itt irrot : Çtvyt-vr, vrr«$. The fécond aorift is formed from the preíént, by dropping the reduplication ; r«;> rdyroii i¿C, bémoç. C H A P. IV. Of the Paßve and Middle Voice of Verbs in ft», ' Rule XL Formation of the Paflive. Ti&tf fiort cbaraSlerifiic mufi precede f»«» in verbs pctf- five i changing it into a diphthong in the optfltive ; The fécond perfon is in «ra» or a-o j but the others ton» form to barytonous verbs : The fubjunßive is regulated by the a^ive: And the imperative ends in '-U/[A£9as, Ti0-£(j-0£, íV-Ä(r0£, Síí-oa-^í, ■ ^cvyv-vr^B, ri9-íVTXi, 'If-avTXi, ííí-cvrxi, i^svyn vvrxi. Ion. tXTai, » ■ . ^ Obfervations oñ the Dialebîs. Inßead offrying in the fecund yerjon. rl^taan îratrai,' fhe Ionics' rejedl the confonant, and fay riScxt,'^ ¡Vaai, -vo9os. • < , ÍTt9-to9ny, ir-áo9v', - iit^óf*t9oí, - tÇttryy-£o9ny, ' ÍTt0-e/UfO(»« !r-ó(*(9ee. iíi^-ó/Á.$9», l&oy>-hftí9eep Plur.< 1 lTÍ0*ta0(, 7r-ow9e, iííí-oo9i. iÇv'yr-vo9s, 1 lT»0-irro, iiii-orrt. i^ivys-vm. L Ion. -f»To. • Second Aorifi Middle. ii-ifjint, is"á/*vi', , ií-é/iífii', ' í6-ioo, n, ¡r-aoo, ai, îS'-too, H, âù-tro, !r-arc. fi-»Te,.&C, Seldom ufed. 1 - 1 Ohfertiations on the DialeSîs. Vhe fécond perfon fingular admits of à contrdSion here in tbefe toxi ttnfes, ffter having rcjeSed the confinant ; 'Mdsoo, MBto, iriênc tra- oo, -0,0, •«, \¿c. iSíSooo, -00, -a. But the Dorics change a into et»; Itidet», lítísi», f^c. The fame is alfi praélifed in tbe imperative, •which, as we have already ohferved, follows the analogy of the feconi perfin of the imperfeS pajfive. The Subjunctive. Prefent and ImperfeSl. f rtd-Zixat, ts-SuM, hS-SiACtt, ■ Sing. < T»d-q, if-à, Sti-u, ¿ t»9-ÎT»i*cny pojjimy has an acute on the ante-penultima, becaufe we do not fay vi\iM in the aétive. See the optative here following. Sftconi Aoriß ^àâh. Sí, rî*, Äw, SSrat, Seo. . rñrcttf Sùreu.- • Tbit aérifi u alvoayt tonjugated with du- n, though the paßve huptrftS efieU' times ajjumes an a ¡ agreeably to what we have obferved o^ the ofHve, ' The Optative. Prefent and ImperfeSi. nSutifcVf ír-aí;«r. Tt9-. St^-oí/eeSoff Tt9')trir9«,, tf-OÙor6ù»f SiS-otadoy, T»fi-íí^9)),, ir-aiaftf. ^>}'-oia9ig,. . ■r,9-it;*69». ¡S^-iai/eeíet. StS- aijt*c9a. ,Tt(l-Std6s, îr-oùirûtt rtd-iTrro, ir-aùvra. Sii-oTtra. Ion. ciara. Ion. atara. Ion. ciara. . . ANNOTATION. Tlih Knfe, as alfo the followipg, includes its charaâerlllical vowel in its diphthong, after the manner of the aftive. The fé¬ cond and third perfon are marked with a circumflex on the penúl¬ tima in all numbers (except the third perfoQ dual, which has ah acute,'by rtafonof thelail fyllable being iongj when the optative of the aâive is in ufe : otherwife, they have an acute on the ante¬ penúltima, as Si/totifAiis, Svpouo, ^isayrod fojfem. -et. &C. becaufe we do not fay iymji*» in the aâive, according to what hath been obferved in the fubjunâive ; coafeqoently its optative ívtaítit mud be unufual too. Second Aoriß Middle. Sit;*)},, • ffliij«)},, íoí/Jíriy. S.ro, fccio. I SoTo. SifTO. TotXra.- Sotto. Obfervations oir the DialeSiS;. 7he Poets fometisnts fay Sai;*))''» Saiia, SoîVo, infead- &c. as if it cam from íflófMj,, in the indieati-ve, like érvjrá/*)}». THE Of the Benfes of Verhs in /»»f 211 THE IlllPERATIVE.' Prefent and ImperfeSt, ' 'TÎtïf»» i'tiocrit Çtéywn, ' • Ion. «d. ■ Att. ». Att. 0, . Att. »; • • • Tt6í(r6». tr¿a-6u, ^ívytvciu. It is conjugated atteir tKè mániier of barytons. It is alfo fyncopated ái ih the Imperfèdt indicative, r/ófo-o, Tíóío, tÎÔsj ànd Dor. çu ,* tfuero.i '«Oi. -« (í/íofl-o, 'tôf -«r Second ^orifi Middle. S, I ^ riva., », S. ôiffSu, THE iMFiiífTívE; Prèfent ànd Tmperfeèl. tiitàiùtf 'ra^Ät, ' ^¡¿ynvo'Seit. Je follows thé termination and formation of ha^ fytons. Second Aoriß Middle. dfVOcti, fiaOûUt - T H E P A R. T I C I P L E S. They alio follow the endings and fdräatioh of ba« rytons. . Prefent and Imperfect'. 7t6é¡tti»íf ¡r»i*tn(t ^tvyi>v¡isttí», Second Aorîfi Middle. Scjucuof, rófuro;, Si(/íip»t. > ■■ -> Ç H A P. V. Of the Tenfes of Verhs in that conform to the analogy of the ßarytomus Conjugation. • For the Active. THESÈ tenfes aré borrowed from the primitives in «, from whence are formed the verbs in ft», as the foregoing, f/bm r«»» íéw, whence comes, . ^ The Firß Future. Sne^Uf TW0t iútru, ^ ftnatn. fiaho. dabo. jungam. P 2 There 212 B O O K IV. .0/ V E ^ B í,: There «are only feme particulars to oblérve, whith we íhall comprize in a few words. , ANNOTATION. The future of thefe verbs retains fometUnes the reduplication, as íiíáa-a, I will rive, taken from I will run awajt taken from Sieptftt, ta run away, < r ' B^ule xil Of the Firft Aorift. ÜbefoUowtng aoriflsput k« for; sônHit, mxyííukoh Examples. The firft- aorift ought to be formed from the firft future; as from taV«, irnir«. But we meet with three here in x«,.which change their charañeriftic i(ro/A«i, . do6i)s in w p.ure, to have, it foiftetimes long, and fometimes Oiort ; as su, scu, or ^a-w ; ¿u, óo-w, or (¿ffu, &c. Thus ^rom Silu, ^svu, comes rsi^rofAxty - (with a T in the firft fyllable, by reafon of the follow- ing Í}: from raVw, fÄÖ'fivojttar; from íów, door«, do.ôaV«- fAxs i and the like. firß Aorißf ' .Irtönif, ffcídvv^ Ido'fl«». ■ It is formed regularly frop the future, patting Ona for finVo/*«», and prefixing the augment. - l. i f ■ • ; Rule XV. Of the Penúltima of the Pretcrperfedt. Aéíwxa makes ¿s$o[j.xi, with, the penulthsuL^ort i hut rihixpi takes Tßsiy,xt> •ExampIes. • The perfedt is' regularly formed from the aftive, changing «« into (axi, and- a^Tuming a. Ihort vowel in the'penúltima, for the reafons above mentioned in. the future ; as ¿éíuxx, ^ííofAxi. But t»'Ôî«x«, having aflumed St in the penuhima of the adlive, continues to keep it in the paflivé, beçaufe of a particular dialed! j and ■ therefore thefe preterites arpto be formed thus : PerfeSif Of fb$ ^eñftí ef P'erhs in ¡kil 21 j PerftS, TiflnfMMji ir»t*ca, iiíb/teu. Plu'petfeS, , z T Tf " Iráftw^ ihünn', Paulo'poß-/ü(urt, ' - - - nSií^o/tai,' ir^ofiMf "• ' Subjunctive. Futarf miAoriß, «03, . ráS3, ¡iiÚS^ Likç «03, ¿age 20?. Î'rtiufiMf K ¡rS/nuff hià/tcut' «0?, • Jf«, i^íy, ' Like the prefent, page 209. optative., P/'tß Puturí, • - - Ttérto'oiiJítítf r»6fivoi¡Mi»f ¿'o0i)0'o>^t)ií, Firß Aoriß, - - . - . «0fíij,, rxhU't ¿iít'm, %±«-r ■ Pottlo-poß-future, -í - nhiuciiieiir, îftwoijiiit, hiouoif^w . * ' Imperative. Fitß Futi&e àni Aoriß, -•* - W0iiT», ' i*«0iiTi, íóSvn. Ir; £t: ■ Inpinitivb. Fifß Future,' - - - - Tf0«o'c90«i, ra04«90«i, 0'o09«0'O(m; /V^ Aoriß, - - .1 . vtBvMi, r«03>«», j'«0«)rai. ' Perftü and Plu-perfe¿l, -" rt6tTo6cct, iráo^ctt, „ Pctuie-poßfuture, « - » Tt0«»0'i9'0ai, •'îr»^e»0»»,' . « »'TO . ' . participles. Firß future, - « - • Tt6iiioi, iodtioi¡*tiio^, Firß Aeriß,^ - - , . ra0eîf, ,&)0eîi, PerfeS and Plu^perfeS, - • r<0Mfw>'e{, • êr»/«»oi, ' ílsío/tíroí, Pauh-poß'futurer. ~ m0nró/(eio;-, ireío6i*ft9(, StSioifitftim Für the Middle Verb. We haver already obferved, that its fécond aorift conformed to the imperfeft paflive through , all the moodsj as we have put it. , ; The prefent and iipperfeft are the fame with the paflive, as in all other forts of verbs. So that there- remain only two tenfes. . I ^4 ' The ii6 ' ,poor ly. .qf verís. I The firil future and firft aorift, whidi are formed reguhrly from their a£ti^e in all moods : "thiis from the future atflivc, fvrát is formed the Firß Future Middle,' Indie. ' Optat. . Infin. ' Partícipe ' Sicrofiteíi, : Svo'oí/x.tir, fiao¡Á,cUs , no'tifMif, , rvat^cUf fnaifAtvot, ' ^üffOfieUf iüa'tifjiTtf, , íú^fffdtu, iufo/jittoi. The adrift is formed in the fame manner. From f^wxi (rv(rx, iSuKXy comes the Firß Aoriß Middle, . . . - tírixáixpv, feldom ufed. ' . ^ Indicat. ' Subj. Optat. Imp. Infin. Part. íne- feâives; and theothers, which differ wider from the faid analogy, though they have more tcnfes than the former. Thefe defcrve lo bé particularly taken notice of, be- caufe, as tliey are in frequent ufe^ they may puzzle thofe who are not well acquainted with- them. ' In order to-facilitate the conjugation of thefe Irre-^ gulars, we- ihall refer them* to the regulars, according- to their characfteriftics j where wç mqft always remem¬ ber their général analogy, which is, to have ,a long vowel in the lingular, and à fhort one in the dual and plural." For' attending lo -this analogy, and obferving fome particulars, which we lhall comprize in a few iules, thefe verbs will bè eafily imprinted in the me-. rnory, which otherwife are apt to create trouble even to ihpfe who have made fome progrefs in the language. Of Irreguiar Verht and Derivatives, 217 ' We may divide thcfe irregulars into three clalTes ; the firft derived from the verb marked with a Imooth breathing; the fécond from U, with a rough breathing; and the third from a different verb from 1«. - - The dialeâs of thefe verbs arc almoft the fame as thofe of the foregoing. . , ■ 1 WVVvWWWWyVvWWWWWWWWvWVTV TT'1'99'Vf » c H A P. VI. : Of Derivatives from iw, with a fmootb breathing: 4adfirfi, ■ » Of hy.\t fumy I am. ■ RULE XVl. Formation of this Verb, From iu, Vfith a fmooth hreathingy comes I»/*» ; it makes the fingular in î7ç, í7, Ip, and the plural in 9 \ 9 y 9 \ - iiTfAîUy ITh * - ' I Exl AMPLES. The fubftarttive verb tlfjii is formed from íuy lam^ from whence regularly it (hould make U¡*i : but i&uegleâs the reduplication, and does not fo much as, change t into \y for fear of confounding it with »/*}, J fay. It only adds < to f, to lengthen its penúltima, which it retains in the ffrff and fçcond perfon lingular, dropping it ia the third, as alio in the dual and plural, except the laft. It takes an acute on the laft fyllable, to diffinguiih it from {7|U(, to gOy marked with a circum¬ flex on the firft, of which we (hall fpeak hereafter. For dififyllables in have naturally this accent ; as yvufiiy to know ! to enter : xXvjui, to hear y. &c. This verb is conjugated according to the following table, after which we (hall give each tenfe in pai;ticu -» ' I K D I Ç À T I V £. SvnjuNJCTivp. Optative, - [mpeKative. Ínfinitive. PAaTIClPLBf. Pref. Sing, ilfiî, lîj "^#7 tip tri»' Sum^ es, eft, Flur. 107*^, tri, « t ' * «, ^î, ?» Sitp, is, it, v ' ¥ y 16t, IfUp ' Es, efto, «r», trucrai. t « y ' * • • fitvaii Effe. «r, erroi» ' Qui. eft. y iWCtf «iTfK, Qux eft. ^ it ^ OK, «rroç, C^od eft. ' Imp. « Sing, hp hf V yel ht Er^m, «S, at, Flur, 3/*ír, Ît£, Ser«*». \ it tt »t Uíí9^ UlJÇf UV], ËiTem» es, çt, ¿rtfjítVf uf¡rtf fiJST'^r, > 1 Li - M ID DL E « , , Imp. Sing. Sero, «TO, Eram, çr Fueram, ' Flur. ij*t6a, ^ M HDO 430 •O O » P» D> V thf «/«, fuqi. ^ Í D I C,A T I Y E. ^ ^ Prefent: ' sing. ' iîfii. " «î<» vel ' Iri. • 'Dot. ï/t/Ai, ' Poet.-êri« and»«. ; Mol'^yMf andîmi. i. Dual ------ ircf, îfo». Plur. io'ftir, ' isi, , iW,. Po^t. «ífíer, Poet. »TC» Dor. $frî. • - and I/»»« ' ^lOl.ivTtf^on.Stg't, ■ Dor. Poet.'cis^0-<. ' The çompoundk: are coojugated in £he ianse manner, but draw back the accent: zrcl^ut 7ffoí^í(r¡Áit/t ZFctçsçSy'^uei^iUTi. ' Obfervatimi on the DiakäS. E?{ the /ectttj per/on, nahich paffes for an enclitic, is regular, 'eeming ftmstbefirß, ly changing ¡it into t, accerJivg to.the generaLa»alogy : at t>8«p, ridnc iiitufti, (sfc, l^cfftof'/ays, it is repeated four times in Homer, hut he might have fajid above fifteftt timei. Neverthçt-, left is'mere ufual in prffe,^ but it voill hardly he found in the above- mentioned poet, except in the thirteenth verfe of his Battle^of the Progs s Seüe, TÍf eï ; Hofpes, quis es ? sind this fécond perfon Jeems to be rather derivedfrom the tniddle for tofAM Jhoidd naffirsdfy, mçke tji, and ac¬ cording tp the Attics £f(, and^aftervoarttf by confraßion tl. ■ '"Em for «»er» it %>ety rare, hut it is^ ufed foy Uert, licet, andfor íntr», infant, from the verb ïi-si/*». ' ' * The other, dialeSs are^ marked fuffcientlj in the conjugation of the pre- ■ fent, their analogy having Seen already explained. ThePrench,noon cites, or Toun êtes, fems to be derivedfrom the fécond perfon,iru or «w. . , Rules;to • e . Of ché ImperfeíK • I. The, tmpp'feSl makesíí î er retaining ■ ' n in ail numbers, 2.. But «1» Jignifies alfo ivi anà dixi : t for s5. i : " "1 The Dual adds a a, efpecially among the poets, nror, Sri», ajfuming the Jhort vowel troy, or troy, from whence feems to be deri-i/ed the French nous eftions; as nous fumes feems to proceed from the plural But the poets ufe alfo the Jhort vowel in thii numhesr, ifcty, tri, " tJc. wherein they conform to the regular analogy. Severalf/ncopate the third perfon plural, as xy for ^aay, iJíi» for ptteray, they had known ; but it is not Jo very frequent. But 1» is likewife the firß perfon of the fécond aoriß middle of íxfci, to go, vide page 227; and, moreover, the firß perfon of the imperfeä of -» 5t»», ^ ^0», Plur. u/tty, irtf , '¿¡at. Dor. Sfttf, Poet, tiufuy, ' tioftty, tcc. From thence comes ¡aertlut according to Eußath, ínter* iim, ácquiram. optative. Sing, tiny, tino, tin, * Poet, ioifu, I . iotf, tot, ' Dual • - - - , - - (»iTor} . tlnrny, Plur. tiniitt, tinri, tin«r«e$slr, • and >in Plato; . ' ■ • comes ' 3 ttaax, j like Ttöet;. ^ • , Middle 222 ,BO6K IV, 0/ Mddle. " The fubftaiitive Verb hath likéwîlè its tniddlè, from whence it takes the imperfed and the future. For from the prefeht middle, Ihdulá be from whence comes the impeifed «jiui», and the future irofAut, I N D I C A T J ^ Er^ - - - ■ Jmperfe£i. ^ . Sing; wo,- nto, traih, àt, at» .Dual w^or, , wdniv,' PlÙr. ^i6eéi ' 4êr0(, " »»tb'. ' ^ 1. . Ion. tœro, Poeti.itcntbtHom.'. Pirß Fuinn." Sing, fffoiiáti !ah, loiidi, "Poet. iö'ö'Ofiaii' '■ "iö-ö-sT«». .Dor.- iaaiSfixtf Ía-afíu,- - Dnal iaáfceOot, fcrsTdoy, -iate^Ofr 'ta-6ov, - . Plur. iaôfAeix, ía-eo-6e,. . taotrai, •töBa. O P T A T ï W E. Sing. îtrotjuiiF, ' ' oto, . ¿tro, &C. Poet., iaaóíf/uiy. , From whence cömes v»^fo-oi¡íviv, affortm, »vtaotf/fnt, ahfortnf. Infin. £«3-8«». - , ^art. Mfístbí. >. ■ ' Poet. Utar&ftinf, • • _ ANNOTATION. Clenardus, and the common grammarians, take for the' plu-perfe£l of ) but it is better to take it for the impeffeâ of ifA-eu, Thus Euripides fays lyà «F^oíóriif éx í/xiir tir.ym, that is,' tgt tiberorum proditor non tram, I did not betrag them. We read likewiiô. oja^ínA-nv, aderam, I wat there, in Demoithenes,^and others. CS A#; m Of tip-i and ïnjxi, ¿0, ' vàdo,. Rule XVIII. Of the Formation of From £« is formed ttay and théhcé ^»¡tAi,.vado, which caßs away e from the dual and plural, 3 Exam- Of the F»hs uft.% and fiift-ty eo, vado, 223' . Examples. ^ ÏHIS verb «/*» is likewife derived from £«, marked with a fmooth breathing." For, the poets firft- ged it into «w, from whence if/*» has been taken, which is fometimes rendered by the prefent, eo^ I go \ and oftener by the future, I will go. Juft as the French mean fometimes the future, when they fay in the prçiènt, je m*en vas: ' Hence the future of this verb is obfoletej though Homer has made ufe of the middle, uoítohí Od. 0. It preferves the diphthong u in the fingular of the prefent and imperfeft, juft as the régulât verbs have' their long vowel; and in .the dual and plural it has » only (as they have their ibort vowel only) whereas /»w, has i only in the prefent of thefe two numbers, excepting the third perfon, which in both refumes the diphthong. This verb is conjugated thus : t Indicative Active. Prefent. ' Sing. »/Ai, or cT, ¿¡at, eo^ I gt. Dual ?roi>, tTo». Plur. ïre, t7v, plur. vxílf/ítvy iync. «£/«£»' and v/*tuy ■iveramus,. In the fame manner, £7rfJ«jt*£v, eruperamus : v^ocxff.tvy accejferamus. Likewife «£<«, ««, iveratis : exiver.atis. . / . . Firfl Aorifi Should be uvxy whence comes the third perfon plural, tivxvy and thence ^a-xvy ^ïcai', and Hiarxv ; as alio the third perfon dual, ttrdrfivy Act. luvxTtiv, The compound, /t*£T£r sfeiti, by droppings, or from «vai, by fyncopej of which we lhall fpeak in the next rule. Obfervations on the BialeSis. The ufual dialeflts are to be found alfo in this verb ; Att. 'luteuy and UfMtaif Dor. >¡*1» and ií¡íi», &c. Participles. Second Aoriß. *lùvy lévTOiy îaa-a, luv. From the indicative aorift ïov, ANNOTATION. Others will have it, that là» is the prelent tenfe, obfervin? at the fame time that there are three prefent participles acuted ; iu>. Urn, going, (which feems rather in that cafe to come from »«fii, whereof anon :) mù», vadeñs, walking: and ¡¿v, qui eß, for m, from /urn, to be. The Middle Verb. PreterperfeSl. e7«, alfo from the poetic verb sîw, Att. ?«, by re folution ii'«, riï«f, ris: and this perfon is the fame with the third perfon of the imperfeft aftive. Plur. rajusr, fync. înft-iVy we have gone : from whence comes dir^fiiivy abiimvis. • Plu-perfe£t, "Hsir, abieram : whence comes arrsi and lirarrsi, Lu- cian, redierat : Jirsi, tranfiveraty Herod. hi^Hy Lucian, narraverat : Sii^jtvo.vy narraveranty Id. ' n^orsi) jii6 Book ^IV. 0/ Vbups." n^o««, egrtjfus fueratf Plut. ¡AtTvut perfecutus fue- rat, Óion. Caff. tVy«, venerat, fuccufrerat, Lucian. Third perfon plural «í», lovrcç ; fitriótirtí ixxrov, Gaza, folliciting every body : fttriovrt^, rn" x'gtTVK, Bafil, embracing virtue. In the Middle Verb. The prefent is ufi.x\. -, from whence comes Itrxi, he goes away ; ItvTxt, they go away, S The Formátíon of fuf«,' hitttol íij The participle Apollonius, going ai^ay. , The fécond aorift ?», 1 went ; froiñ whence comes wêcgvft I arrived^ I was jufi come,. The imperative ftir«, U intellexi. In the plural : its compound ¿víixx^ivy fynco- pated âvvft.tvy dimißtnus... The Attics prefix here a fyllabic augment, faying iwxy tvtnxxy trvvim». Second Aoriß. Sing. Vf, Vi, V. Dual í'réf, tTV». Flur. íf*íf, íTi, 'Icxv. From whence comes pramiferunt. It is formed from the imperfeft, by calling away the rçduplica- tion. Perfeif. eTk« with ft, Boeot. fór like rs^tixx. From thence comes the plu-perfeft tlixciv, the participle fixas, its compound d^nxùs, ^ui äimißt ; infinitive ¿ftixéuxi, dimißße. But from the perfeél ¿ of which the Poets make a diphthong, Cw, Cvs, Cv: dimifero. In like manner tía, vvs, vv xvlvx liom, remiferit, by adding the vowel ' Optative, ' formation of îtip», mitto, 229 Optative. Prefent.. ^ hin» and Second aorift, un»» Imperative. Prefent. «ôi, »(T«, &c. Second Aorifi. tfy truy like àtç. From thence come the compounds vçéti, pramitte: «^îç, dimitte: xà6eç, demitte. Infinitive. Prefent. Vi»ouy demittere : dfihaty dimittère. Second Aorifi. ETj-«», its compound ¿íot (like nr-oo above mentioned) commißr confcitit fum, intellexi : à aviîixett, Mark vi. jz. for they did not underßand' But the Attics change a into ¡MíxstThcu, Horn, in pttgnam commißt, where, we find a lylUbic c after the prepofition, which makes a double augment. And fometimes this «-is put before, i^uinx», at, t. Sec. CHAP. • Pomátton of fedeo, CHAP. IX. Of "lEMAI, "HMAT, WEIMAI. Rule XXIir. Formation of concuptfco, coming from ?«, with a rough breatUng^ ex-- prejfes defire. " . Examples. This verb is ufed in the prefent paflive, tto-oM, like ftOtjKfft,: its compound I defire. ImpeHedl, î, îfdfjm». But it is fcarce ufed except in thefe two" tenles. ANNOTATION. This verb Ibmetimes iignifiei te go» but with â fort of an eager- nefs or defire.* Homer fays> olxaii U¡t,ÍDut, of thofe who were , returning to their country. Therefore this, verb is properly the paflive of fq/Ki, mitte, which implies that a pérfoñ has a ilrong de« ^re of fomething. ' ' *HMAI, fedeó, to fit. Rule XXIV. or the Formation of Î. */*«!, with a rough breathing, cornés likewife from 'iu .• 2. Retaining its u, it is often taken for the preterite. 3. But iXiTfAai and tXofjiiiv are from i^e[*xi', n inàutus fuerat. . Participle, Future, ío*« or Firft aorifl: aâive, tTr« and tco*«, aç, c, / àreffedy I bave placed. Infinitive, íTros» and i, ojwoct, tr«». Dor. xtiffS/Mt, and xstg'ivf/icu. Imperative, xtTa-o. Infinitive, xua-6»i. Participle, "xiTfAiiios. The following compounds draw back their accent : «vxxfijMxt, / repofe : iTr/xn/Axi, Í leaH upon : ÍKÍxstfAXtf I , am in fucb a difpoftthn : but in the infinitive they re¬ tain it, wifixtro-O«», circumjacere. ANNOTATION. •We likewife read in Horn. Od; «■. ««»t«», from the barytonous verb xiof/Lut ; nnd in the ùnperfeâ, xíano, without an augment. In the fubjundlive, xíu¡im, from whence xaTetxéurrat, Lucian, fuhja* ttanti cvyxirtrat, Plato, eoitfiata, compofitafit, R Ü 1. e XXVÍ. Of "Icrxji*», fcio, cognofco. "la-«]!*» conforms to and is frequently fyncppated. Examples. "Iv)!/*» is formed from î(r»w, fcio, to know, .without the reduplication. It is fyncopated in feveral places, and conjugated after the manner of frnpt, thus. I n' d" i c a t i v e. Sing. jV«/*», . Itxí, • tffXTfè Dor. Dual íVaTor, iTXTO». Sync. • troy, or. tCXfJiiV, ITXTÍ, í(7XTl. Plur. Sync. Iffftty, Dor. is-Ei(fromVrhence' comes the compound xirtre,.ye know) ta-ota-i. With the accent on the antepenúltima, as alfo in, the I participle io-Äf, ;«i'TOf, Torf Uxti, fcientibus, contrary-to the common cuftom of verbs in /*», according to which it ihould be Itxí, like îfxi •, Itrxa-t, like Ifxirt, &c. The imperfeft, Iffnu, xs, «, like ÎV«!-. Third plural, ía-xa-av, fync. Uxv, fciebant. But Itxv imports alfo ihant, from £»/*i above mentioned. Imperative, Uxh, Itxtu, fync. fo-fl», »r«, &c. But io-öi fignifies likewife eßo, from tl/xî, ßtm, as above, page 221. Third Formation.of dico^ • Third plural, Wdruvavy iync. trur«i« and fr&w. In like manner its cômpoui^d^, dmvh for o-uvtWi, confcius fis. Rule XX.VII. Of the Middle Formation. The mîàMe ír«/*««,. loith a fmooth. breatbing^ afumes, a T, and forms Examples, . The, middle vetb of ttniii is í Examples. ç«j!*î is formed from ça«, without the reduplication, and is irregular with regard to the acxent. Th.e Active. Prefent. Sing, çiift.1, çj)ç (with J fubfcribed) fna-]. Dor' fa/M. ' Dor. Çarî.' Dual Çarôv, ÇXTOV. Flur. ç«ji*£i', Çars. çaa-i. Dor. Çixitù The accent upon the laft fyllable, though in the participle we fay, çàf, avrè?, tok çâa-i, with a circum¬ flex. And the reafon is, becaufe it paflès for an enclitic throughout the plur^ in the fame.manner as «'/«î, fum. But its compounds draw back the accent ; Karaç»- /*!, Iajfure^ xxToc^xrt : airéç«/«i, Idenjf^KTréfxo't: «1Î//.Ç5)/«!, I agreSy o-u/AÇan. In 2^6 Book ÏV. 0/ Verbs. ' In every thing elfe it agrees with • thus, Imperfe¿lí, ifv», like ipii', and, without the aug¬ ment, fvít and fÍírúetf And calling away *[ç, ?. See Rule XVII. Likewiie in the prelent, ^jui, «to*», for &c. Second aoriil, like : which happens here to be the fame with the imperfe£t : and this is the cafe of all verbs in jut, that are without a reduplication ; as Txijji*», / fuffety trXnv : ywf*«, ! kttow^ tyvuv : I tçiiVi tfrit and, according to the Dorics, tç» : avToç ífoif ipfe dixit. , In the dual, {^»roi/, tfnrii»»' Plural, t^urty tftio'ay. It retains the long ti, whereas the imperfeft alTumes the ihort « ; wherein it conforms to ernv. In the other moods the prefent is the fame with thé fécond aoriil. Subjunólive, ça, çvî, çv, like rw. • Optative, çxinv, like fxítiv. Imperative, çàèt, i¿o for çaVo, Horn. Infinitive, (pxtr^xi. ' - Participle, çix[Atm. ^be End of the Fourth Book. B o o K V. CytEFECTIVE VE'RBSi A N p Of the Investigation of the Theme, or Resolution of Verbs. f having reprefented in the twapre- f ^ ^ ceding books the general analogy of both that is, of verbs in «, and of verbs in |i*i, with their principal irregulari- > tics i it is fit now we treat of thofe, which are irregular by defeft, as wanting feveral tenfes. This will be ferviceable, not only towards laying a foundation for the inveftigation of the theme or refolution of verbs, of 'which we lhall treat in the fixth and the enfuing chap¬ ters of this book i but moreover, towards acquiring a completer knowledge of this language by the analogy of the derivation of thefe verbs, wherein a great part of its fertility confitls. For moft of thefe verbs are irregular for no other reafon,- but becaufe they either form, or are formed from other verbs ; whence it comes to pafs,. that the primitives are grown unufual in the prefent and imperfedt, having left thefe tenfes to their derivatives; or, on the contrary^ the derivatives being ufed only in the prefent and imperfcd, ' their defeat in the other tenfes is fupplied by their primitives : thus Çxvu being derived from the ancient verb ferves 238 Book V. Q/" Defbctives. ferves for the prefeht and tmperfeâ} and xtíSw fupplies ks place in the other tenfes. We may therèfore divide the defcftive verbs in genera} into two claflTes : one of verbs, that have only the pre- fent and imperfeft î and the other of verbs, that have neither of thofe tenles, biit fome othèrs : and each of thefe two claÛès includes verbs in w, and verbs in [tt. iVi iVi tVf fctil áfc l^t ItftilKfc litililVa 1^1 1^* Al A» Al 1^, ^TTTT'4* i TvTTT VTVT 4*TvTVTt'TvTTTTTV V C H A P. 1. Of Defeftives, that have only the Prefent and Imperfeft. firß vf Verbs ijt «. y£ R B S in that have only the prefent and imperfect, may ' be divided generally into two branches, one of verbs in u pare, and the outer of verbs in u impure. I. DefeSiives in u pure. Defeflives in u pure, are, « • I'. Verbs of imitation or refemblanch in áu: xeXa»*««', to be. ilackijH^, or bordering upon black : %(«&>, to be as white as /now f yaXiiwáa, to be at refi, to have a great ferenity of countenance. 2. Likewife verbs of defire ih áa : ß»ío¡s-*^, to promife, from ' Some Veris in ù. of the Preßnt mi ImperfeSí, 23 p Some of thefe change i into as from vim comes mniu, to fall: from «(íyofíat, ôfvypâafiMi, to defirtt &c. But if thefe verbs Mppen to be derived from thofe in then other verbs in fu are formed from thence ; as from at^ôuû, M^táut and to mingle: from mreéfir, mrfáa, virnifiít, pando, to open: from vOmu, mivxiut mvit'Kn(u,~to approach: from oxiiiuf .aKtStáu, and oxiihi/ti, to di/perfe, to dijßpdtei or, rejecting the firft letter, and >tíhtiiA,t : from »¡i/jixa', to hang up, comes xgiju- vxv, and x^ifinfu, retaining c ; afterwards Kpi/tr*»/, and x^/xnjjKi, changing 1 into n ; whence xgnyktlu a high or perpendicular rocii a precipice. 5. Poetics in xu»\ nt^a, luçxia, likewUé in its Bead K$¡»íga, to mix : oxîSiui, okí^xíu, to fcatter : XiXaío/x«>, to deßre, 6. Verbs in ci» derived from a future : yxiitu, to marry ; yxfJi- oa, ya/iWiiu, to long to be married : vtíKsfííu, to nuage nuar ; woAt- f/Áoa, vot^ixriireia, to be eager for nuar: or ßqaaxa, to eat i ß^ixra, ß^aoeia, to be hungry : ¿diu Or -oft,at, to fee ; ¿■^u, ó4'<í<», to deßre to fee. But we are not to confound with thefe, other verbs which the poets form from a prefent in iu, inferting t, and which have the fame fignification with their primitives ; ás peio from pía, toßonu : i$ixtía from tztxiu, to nurangle, or difpute. Likewife n^tia, to per- feü, or fittifo, from teXéu : x^xnlo, to overcome, from x^xria. See. J. Polyfyllables in íuxma, Joßenu : fnyva, to break : oStt- liu, to extinguiß ; and others of the like fort : from whence come the verbs in vpu, of which we lhall treat hereafter. 8. All verbs in via : ¿Xvía, to be forely troubled and vexed in mind: iyvia, to accompany, or to nuait upom ixviu, to be married % though we read the future oxiou in Ariftoph, calling away the fubjunâive S' from the penúltima, IL Defeßives in m impure. We íhall range them here according to the order of the confo- nant preceding a ; and we have one general remark to make, that feveral of thofe verbs, which have two confonants before a, are defeâives ; as , Verbs in Biî preceded by another confonant : pii/.?a, to nubirl, or turn about : ipi^a, to feed, or to paßure. Even or (péÇopixt, to run anuay, to be afraid, has but very few tenfes of its. own ; no more than a&a, to honour: neverthelefs IxíSh», in Sophocles; for ixtçdnv, comes from á6af to defend, íiúxa, Sluxcíía, to purfue. tifsM, n¡úiiÉ>, to paflure,

lyu, ' Ç\tyi6a, to burn, çiitu, tpdtxvBa, to corrupt, ¡/.itva, /MxvOa, ta-dtminißj. tía, ^ taha, to eat. i^tixa, Jhake. ' Likewife »x^oimu, to be heavy, and 'x^oieeu, to be hated, the futures of which feem as if they came from a verb in a pure, âx()é in Hom. í^íu, by reduplicatioi; iiigiaxa, to run away, ' t : etglu, àçtaxu, placeo, to pleafe, to he agreeable. r : ¿fiííu, âxivaxu, to grow, to increafe, from the future whence we mull alfo derive all thofe that have an » or a in the penúltima, fítáo/jioif, futnre by reduplication ¡itis-tiaxuf to remind, or put in mind. I : Kvéa, xviaxu, to conceive : ti^íu, tv^íaxu, to ßnd or invent : Fteiu, rtqiaxu, to deprive : cCtla, áxíaxa, toftize ox take; .miu, by reduplication wtvia-xu, to give to drink. 0 : ßou, ßoa-xu, to paßure, br give forage, a : future ßtuau, ßniaxu ¡ frota whence comes ¿.taStá- erxícróíst, to rife to life, in Plato : âfiSflu, whence is" formed €xSv, in Plato, Ariltopbanes, and Suidas, future iftHtLuau, and thence ¿¡xS\áay.u, to mi/carry, or to procure a mi/carriage ; we likewife find ¿¡xSyta-xa : ß^oa, ßßutru, ß^laxa, and by reduplication ß^^üaxu, to feed, to eat : in like manner xn^áaxu, to wound. * ' ^ ' V, y.i. Vtrhs in SI of the Prefent and Imperfilî. 241 . i) : fíMu, ntêvaita, toikeJuilrutJti üu, hí¡v<7xa, to drefs. From çàa comes çô^ku, mfd^xu, .alio mfaioxu, and m- ÇçCtiffKO^, ' , Verbs in BAfî, KAn> 4>An} as , u take cart of t from )ucXs/x«i< xixXo/iMh to command, from xtXojM». tCÇKu, to owt, from ôçstAw» Pólyfyllablesin fAAß ; as . . StpiitAo, to fiare about ; likewife 0S!^?Au, to loath, from ßiia, pedo^ foeteo, &c. Ver|bs that have only A pure before n ; as dÖM, tobe •willing: ¡úfiM, to tàke care of: xéA*>, to command: , or »0 ; as 1 «Xto'6/0, oXw^aUu, labor, to Jlip, or fall : ß»a, ßaitu, gradior, to •walk. The 3d of polyfyllables in El'Nß ; as <[iatUu, luceo, to fi)ine% from (paita, or (páa : a}\.túta, effiigip, to Jhun, from à>Mu, &c. But diflyllables are generally regular, as we ihall fee in the re« folution of verbs. The 4th of divers verbs in INß, and T'Nß ; as rtw, luo, to ptg, or atone for : idvru, dirigO, to conduS, to direS, to correQ. The 5 th of derivatives in Nß, preceded by a confonant; as •mipta, to kill, derived from Çtta. And of thefe fome change the vowel ; as from Sixa, ^¿xtu, mor« deo, to bite. fcttu, fAfita, maneo, to remain. ytta, yiytofuMt, fio, to become. mha, mÍTta, and eotrita, cado, to fall. The verb mita, laboro, fatago, to take pains, to be hujy, is alio defeâive : its perfedl middle is minota, from whence comes wó^o;, labour i but the prefent is very fcarce, though Eullathius mentions it. UttofiLat is often repeated in Homer. Verbs in mfl, or znOMAI. twofcat, 'éavo/cat, fequor, tofollovo.. itina, itianu, dico, to fay, which forms of itfelf the future . i/i^u i and makes likewife inaníioa, after the manner of circumflex verbs. Verbs in TPß formed by fyncope. iy^oftat, from íysó^tfíat, to ajfemble, îyçoftat, from lyA^ofiai, to be fiirred up, or a'wakened ; from whence we find in Hefych. Uéy^f, for i^eyí^c. Some poetics in SZß ; as nrai^áaa-a,. to fiare, or look about : àr.iis-cu, to be accufinmedt, , R àysâaaa. . ^ / 242 èook V. Of Defectives.' ¿ytáffffu, tí he ignorant of: ántrntrau, to he empty t mfoeliß» : hiaaa, Horn, for Iniru, to fay- ^ ^ Derivatives in nxn, or KTíí, which change the c of their pri¬ mitives into » ; is nréru, mÍTrlai to fall i fixa, rítíla, to bring forth a child : Inita, ¡yiflat to fay. But '('vfia, to throw. Or to caß, though derived from fiita, -is neverthelefs regular. "XffX'-'y habeo, to have, derived from (x&i, changing < into 1, and inferting o- ; as %ña.í^a, íot iva, fubeo, to go under i ßxa, or ßaita, to'go i t^iya, to fay: likewife for Ttigf, to break, to fpoil: h>á)ç, one that makes a noife. In like manner finctu^ía, to bave confidence, formed from «s- fotOa, the perfeft middle of isííOa, to perfuade, has neverthelefs its preterperfeft, as appears from the nouns verbal «resroifl))«-»?» ííA\sc\?i,\Confidence, ajfurance,- And \r'f,xa, flo, formed from Irotx.x, has the plu-perfeñ middle tlrixity. See Book III. Chap. iii. Rule 11; • Verbs of a gradual derivation, feveral of which are in A'zil ; as ¿^1-«, oKvira, ¿íKvaxa, ccKvax-a^a, to draw back. S^eta, ígátrsí, í^áa-xa, ^^axa-á^a, to run away. i?i.áu, íXáau, riKaa-xa, iiXecarxi^a, vagor, to wander up and down, f^a, etixa, iXxvu, îtixvrâ, èjixvfà^a, to draw, CT drag, i^ora, i^orv^a, ¡^Tvrá^a, to creep. , , Others in a'zCI ; as r^ioca-, r^otrH, r^ciTtaXi^a, to turn, to change, ■ Í0 return ; likewife irffouoityi^a. Or Verhs in Mí of the Prefent and ImperfeSi. 245 Or in Z3f2 ; as ßin, ߣ»o, ßiSa^e/t ta goy to vaalk, to civanct ; for which we find ßtöiia'%>)fu, to run aviay ; 2. aor. 'úgat, which is not only a third perf. plur. for sÍ^dí*«», but moreover a ill ling, for é'ígtit. Thorn. ' Magift. in Eclog. In like manner in its compounds, ¿■nsS'gav, Sié- S'gat ; ^ the optat. ¿woi'gaíyiit, íta^gctU» ; the infin. úm^gáncíi, Sixígá- »ai ; part, àiroiçàç, It comes from .ígá«, whence alfo is formed Mgáa-xa, of which hereafter. . Avvet/jicn, to be able, to have povoer and authority ; ímperf.»iJti»íé» ¡jLitf, and Att. ü'vvu/.ci!« ; fubjunA. ; optat. infin. èvfoia^ai ; part. It borrows its other tenfes from ^vtáo' juat ; whence comes the future ^»qo-ojuui ; i. aor. úvm6vii ¡ perf. Mvmfioii. 'Egetftai, to love ; imperf. : it takes its other tenfes from s / "Ern/Jít, tofland', the jffefent indicat, is not ufed ; but it has the optat. Irai»», from whence comes ¿^crai»», alfißerem } the infinit, lrá»a>, ßare. Its primitive is rá». "idlayicu, tofy% imperf. idláfitis i 2. aor. mid. Isf!«ju»»; infinit, oólásrOat ; part. vlxf*fnç. But the fécond aor. aA. is IWV ¡ .from R 2 whence 244' Book v.' cy Defectives^ ' t^beiipe cones the infin. miHw; part, tíláu as formed from îvnii'* It is derived from títáo, whence is borrowed the tft. fut. } perf. vt^ec/tat, with an «. And WI«m is formed by iync. irom vfláa, by which figure we likewife fay h^i/xv, «IiVÔ«», and WI«- (tinf, from wirofMu, which is of the fame fignification. to know. We have already taken notice of its conjuga* tion in the preceding book. * Kifyv/A.it to mix, makes the imperf. Ixi^ng» ; infin. xtptitcu ; part* iapitf. But it borrows its other tenfes from of which we ihall treat hereafter in Kíx^fif*', inftead of which we alio fay xix^áa, to Und% 3. perf. plur. xtxçS» ; part. : pafiT. xíxí»i*»h from whence comes the part, It has of x/i^" future '* $Xi^ffa} the perf. xsx^r.Ku i but having borrowtd, and x^t, but alfo with Ariftoph. t> x^sjAonsde, utinam fufpet^fitis. As firom envroua we not only fay but likewife >míro¡t,cu, 'Ovíniii, toajjifi', infin. itttámti pafiT. ótifa¡A»t ; infin. ieiiaadaii part, ontáisení. We find alfo without reduplication Íta¡s.eu, ¡paí- fívv, ipxa-Bcct. It comes from ¿pxa, whence is formed the future. épvcofjixt. Ilt^píi/xi, to fell', infin. ; part, ; pafiT. j infin. •migpxtrdxt ; part. ví^px¡*ípo(. It borrows its future and its other tenfes of vs^xa, or elfe of wtx^xxxa., to fell. nixhpi/^i, or «rí(xa-XD/*», impleo, to fill (inAead of which we likewile fay mtxf^xa, and mtisvXxa ;) the imperf. ixivXrip} the infin. 'ertfi'n^pxi ; the palT. mlfixXxjiXP i imperf. ixpfíxXxiiítiP î infin. art^- nrf^xxdxt ; part, wtjxarxá/xero; ; imper. iiAir'ixXri, Att. inAead of Iju.- v'ixXxdt, or Hom. it comes from m^xM, whence alio is formed the future midtxa ; i. aor. îirTvnxx ; perf. esíx\yii*xp, 1. aor. irr>^>idvip'; though they may be alfo derived from , ïlivç/ii^i, or míjÁw^riisi, iaceudo, to burn i imperf. ivl/iw^r,p} infin. vnjíir^xpxi ; whence comes the compound ¡iA,xi/*v(xpat, AriAoph. part. ^tfAirçxi'i pafiT. ; imperf. ÍTPi4.x¡xfx,fiv,; infin. wIjk.* w^xirdxi ; part. It borrows its other tenfes from m^xa, or nTßiida ■; as the fir A future } i. aor. ; 1. fut. pair, m^nodnxoix.xi ; 1. aor. Iv^vcrdvp ; perf. wiv^xitxi. TI^ía/¿xi, to buy, (the etymol. mentions the aâ. w^ta^i ; but it is obfolete) the imperf. ixgix¡A.riP, fubjunâ. arpíai/xa», optât, «rgtaípta», infin. w^Í(X(76«>, part, «v^xx/uero;. It comes from «rgiá», whence alfo is formed the imperf. Iw^ixao, and Att. And the lA. aor. mid. ¿Tr^tá/xar, which is the fame with the imperf. above mentioned, whether it comes from the aâ. aor. in x pure, fm^px, according to the 31A Rule of Book III. Chap. viii. or whether it is formed Verls in MI cf the Prefent and ImperfeSl. "245 formed by fync. for whence comes the fécond perfon ívijiÁcuy Ion. iiTfiáa, by crafi^ Iwfía, ' emißi- ZxíSímin, ípargo, te /cattery the paíT. cKiha/caty ímperf. Iá- fíf», infini axíípoff'Sai, part, axtítáfítpoí. It comes from axtUa, whence alfo ís formed the fut. axiiuvu, the ift aor. icxticura,, the perf. íaxíiaa¡ÁMty the ift aor. iaxtici^6nt, i. fut. ffxtiecffdntrofMip. From thence likewife axt^ínvut takes its tenfes, which are the fame with the above mentioned. ' to die, makes in the third perfon plur. nStZot, like îràn ; imperat. rsOpaút, like TraSt, or réOraa-o, like lir»6o ; opt« riSpetiti', infin. rtdráv«». We lhall fpeak of the other tenfes in the refolution of verbs. Chap. Vlll. Rule xxvii. TsT^ttfit, to fuffer, to endure, alfo makes in the third perfon plur. 'rt6^à<7•^, opt. TiTXaííi», imper. rÍT^aSt, and Att. t/tx«, infin. n- vXamt, 2. aor. iTfitit, rXaití», rXîitcu, rTià;. But it borrows of rXatii the future and the perf. rsrXtix«. Tír^yi/^i, to pierce, or tuake a hole, borrows of r^ía, the future r^ierf. pair, iitxa, /pirahat ; part, ¿h/iítot, /pirantes ; the third perf. plur. IS aturi, which draws back the accent. The part, ¿d; conforms to the analogy of the reft. This verb comes from ííu, which is not ufed ; even m¡».t is only •for poets. to tie, imperf. iííhit, infin. Mitcu, part. hhif. Its pri¬ mitive is itu, from whence comes the future inoa, the ift aor. th- act, the fut. pair. ís^óatiJMt, i. aor. perf. iíit¡ji,at. eXinm, to know ; opt. títínr, infin. ti^ttat. The fubjufifit. tï^a may be derived not only from s'S)i¡*i, but alfo from tî^éa, whence comes the fut. eiSnf|u.>j or htKuvu, tofltfw ; fut. híia, I aor. perf. ya, pair. ^íhiy/íuh I. fut. htxßiatjuu, I. aor. i^^íxfir|p, comiog from hUa. In like manner ¿vohUfviit, to flm», to prove > vko- iilxuv/jLh to point out, to fieva, to fuggeß% to demoußrate. lEt^ynvfjit, or tîçrtiu, to inelo/e, to ßout up ; the ift fut. {. aor. the perf. palT. and the ift aor. pad*. lí'g- come from "Envfn, or hpva, to àrefs% the ift fut. toa, the lü aor. ¿oa, the ill aor. mid. tía-¿¡*r.p, perf. palf. eTjxat (whence comes the part. tiftípoí) and the fut. palT. ioènooiMt, are taken from ía, But its comptiund ¿¡iÇptppviJieu, and à/epUiJiat, is more fre¬ quently ufed ; fut. ¿¡/.ppéa-u, and Att. ¿jupiü; from whence comes vr^ia,nattered, as x^uyè^ is ufed inileadof x^nya%,prote£ior, defender, 'púnrvpíi, or pamva, roboro, to ßrengthen, takes from póa, the fat. púau>, perf. ippaxx, pair. ippupMt, plu-perf. ippùpmi, imper. íppaxo, ippúo6a, vale, valeat, infin. Ippüx^xt. jSinvpu, or o€snva, to extinguiß, borrows of the unufual oZía, the fut. , which will be of no little advantage : oppohte to them I (hall place the verbs that are ufed in the prefent, and from whence the others borrow what they want, following herein Sylburgus's method, which mult contribute greatly to theinvefligation of the theme: I ihall moreover adjoin the lignification of the verbs, which will render them (till more nfeful. Verbs fcarce qr Ve^bs received or unufual. ufual. *Ay¿onxtf and «y«- xyxfíxx : to ad^irOy to he furpriz- ed. xyvúuy and xyvvft-i to break. nics, and xvixm : to pUafCy to ohlige% ali.tvítía : to roll, xxia-xu : to takoy to catch, dxçixvwy and xX^xvu : to inventy t9 fnd. ¿f*x^Txvu : to erry to fin. ¿[*Çxiirxuy xfÀ,ÇxKTxxvu : and xf*,%x¿-> (Txu : likewife «jnêxuo-x», and x[t,~ ÇxvTxxi/u : to hlunty to make dully to mifcarry. K¡j,^iívv\)¡Á.iy .eèfAficvvvcûy and x/xçitrxu j to drefsy to clothcy to go into, ¿vxxiim,» to wäficy to confumC;^ : ^0 pleafey to oblige. ' " Ter?? ÇOfAXly '!Ayuí, frangoy *A.$ÍU)y A¡a-$sof*x(y *Ax$íuy 'Àxfuy *Axéuy and «AWjtAt, ^fiXfxtay [Ay-ot^ritày *'A[jt,^,(íU,y » ^AVXXÓui^y *A^íuy • BefeSihes in il ufed in other Ténfesí 249 Verbs fcarce or Verbs received or unufual. ' ufual. Au'giw, «u^«, and «u'gai/w • to increafe. : to be opprejfed with griefs B<%w> Paivu, and, among the poets, |3i- Cmo) and ßi€fi[jn : to gOy to walky . to advance» B/wjai, and ßiaoTtu : to live. ^XccFfUy ßxxi-dvu to hudy to ßooot up. Bxiuy ßaxxu : to throwy to dart. Bxcw, and ßxuf/ity ßxci)y SifiM : to build. Aóxuy $oxíu : to feemy to appéaVy to be of opinion. Aiuy : to give. A^xfjituy and içtfAUy, r^íyu : to run. A^xvy fugioy Sif^xxuy Bod SliçutfAi '. to tukoflight. AvvxofAxty Sivx¡i.xi'. tobe able, to be capable of. 'Auw, and ivvwy and ^i^uVxw : to go into. 'EôîXtw, i^íXu : to be willing. El^iUy and eUxy or in-lrx/xxt : to know. E?j9w, xyoçtw : to fajy to pronouncBy ta * harangue. 'Eîw, eOy to go. E?w, mittOy 7n¡jt,t : to throw, to fend. 'ßxxuy ' ixx-Jm : to drive, to incite. Verbs » } i ¡o Book Verbs fcarce or unufual. *EXsv6uj *'Ex«, and £Aa«, 'Ecfyxw, 'Eytíxccf "Evt^Ut 'Evuriríuf Eojua», "JEttcü, 'Ef£W, •i- > «/ Ejspcw, ^ "Ei"»)/*», EvgiUf . 'E^9£0|*«1, 'E\piVf "Eu, eoy "EUy fumy "Ew, induOy "Euy mittOy "Ew, colloco^ Zfjyuy ZiUy CtngOy &tXiUy ©£W, pOtlOf Ql/CCUy &0^iUy > IJfl/W, '100«, "ixOfJiXly Xf(Oju.at, Kix^ctyuy K£A£C^«i, Xf^<Í£W, IV. 0/ Defectives.' Verbs received or ufual. ifX®/**'' '^PP^oacb. - »l^iu : to takcy to keepy to condemn. fi^uy fero : to carry y to bring. IkiVttw, poet, to fayy to relate. . ?/!*«» r to fit downy to be feated. dyo^ivuy and iff-ira, poet, to fayy to /peak. Íeofíon : to aßy to inquire, ctyoçtvu : to fayy to fpeak in public, tffw : to be lofiy to periß. frayai : to ßandy to be fieady. ív§í«y«, and ^«^«) puyvvuy and çùywfjn: to buruy to fcarce, roaß. Xxi^íuy and j(M^íuy ;¿«»f« ; to rejoice. Xóuy * j¿«»»ú«, and j¿«M»uj«i. : to throw up the ground. Xf«w, and xí^rí¡At r to lend. Xçiuy ^uvvvuy and ^mvv[*t : to colour, "íúuy «6i« : to pujhy to impel. C H A P. IV. Of Verbs in /»» that are unufual in the Prefent. , i There are moreover fome verbs in ¡ju, which though unufual in the prefent and the imperfeâ, have notwithftanding the ufe of the fécond aorift, with its depending tenfes. Among thofe that are derived from a verb in A'n, there are two. I. EkX?|mi, unufual in the prefent, makes the 2d aor. etrx^ni', I am parched up, optat. c^cclny, inñn. o-xXijysct. Its 'compound Airi Info- much, that from the lit aor. iC^araf, for example, they form iS^uxf, fÇ^ui, and fo for the reft. This feems to be countenanced by the etymol. when he fays that inívXuf is a fync. of and that the participle imnxùi, is inftead of lortwXúa-aí. Moreover Euftath. teacheth, that xxàç is better derived by a fync. from xAÚoaí, than formed from xA?/xt. Among thofe that come from verbs in V'n, we find, 1. Avfu, to go into, to drefs, z. aor. i^v», vç, v. See. iniin. H- part. voa, i»; and the prefent imperat. íiru. In like manner its compound ùirûv», vnoiv»at, iwo^ùi 4 the imperat. vTtóSudi. The remainder is taken from the primitive í¿u, fut. íúg-a, tîfr. 2. v/4,t, tofpring, to rife, 2, aor. Í(foi, iniin. fvion, part. Çv(, Çvoec, fut. The rell cornes from fva, Çvoa. 3. K>iv/xi, to hearken, mentioned alfo by the etymol. has only the imperat. xAtiOi, audi, plai, xAî/ti, auditC' CHAP. V. Of DefeSlives that have only the Third P erf on. DEfeûives of the third perfon are thofe which grammarians call imperfonals, by reafon of their having only the ufe of the third perfon : but this denomination is abfurd, as we have proved 3 . . Of DefeSIhes that have only the Third Per/on. 255 in thç method of learning the Latin tongne, and is applicable to the infinitive only, which is firiOly imperfonal, as having neither number nor perfon. We ihall take notice here of fome of thele verbs. 'Avixtt and wfoiiitu, convenir, it is meet} iivtu and it was meet, or proper, , it is judged proper', v(ttAer, it is the praQice, it is cußomary ; IpíXet, it was cußomaty. oportet, it behoveth. It comes from by dropping the lail fyllable: which makes it very ftrange that Apollon, fliould puzzle himfelf fo prodigiouily in his third book, .Chap. XV. to know whether and Ar are adverbs or not. The imperf. is or xs?'* behoved ¡ the fut. xç*®""» behove, &C. Its compound íitóygyi, it is fuffictenfi ¿w«x§''» fufficieuti the infin. ¿woxçî», to be fuficient, by apocope, for ¿aroxj?»«».' We likewife find in the pafiive xiyirai, it is reported', there remains ; and fuch others. In the fat. tï^otreu, it will be quickly faid. In the perf. îytar»^, it has been known ; tl^reu, it has betn faid', ixsrai, it has been heard ; it was fo dejiined. Sec. ' To thefe we may add the mid. ûSs^îtcu, it happens', ioré^x't's^o it occurs, it offers ; and the like. The RESOLUTION o/- VERBS; o R INVESTIGATION THEME. ¿a. V ♦ 4 " " " ♦ • " • 4 4 + ♦ ♦ ♦ V V V " " CHAP. VI. Of the Nature and Manner of the Inveßigation of the Theme. « TH E prefent of verbs is by the Greeks called theme, and this verb comes from rWvfit, pono ; becaufe it is the firft tenfe, and is laid as a foundation for the red. The , I 256 Book V. Cy Defect i ve s. - > The manner therefore of finding the theme is to reduce all the tenfes to their prefent : which fuppofeth a complete knowledge óf " the conjugation of verbs in a, barytons as well as circumflex ; and of the regular and irregular verbs in ^ ; and implieth alfo a per« feâ knowledge of the manner of forming thefe tenfes: the fimpleft and eafiefl; being without doubt that which we have followed in the conjugations, reducing the greatefl part of the tenfes at oncie to the aäive future ; without making fo great a circuit as is com¬ monly praâifed, which only fatigues the underllanding, and renders it lefs capable to judge readily of the right dieme of the verb. Wherefore, if I phance to meet with the ift aor. pafl*. ¿çènr, I perceive immediately, that it comes from the ift future pafl*. ôç>^- or from the aâive ; and confequently that its theme mud be in ßu, ira, a alone, which is the ift aor. of ¡jíivu} Ipajftd ßrß, being compofed of and ought to be coiifidered ai ífvf only, which comes from ßxim, or ßvf^i, to walk. But becaufe, as we have made appear in the preceding chapters, there are a vaft number of defeâive verbs, fome of which have only one fort of tenfes, and others another ; it often falls out in Greek, that a verb fliall derive its tenfes from feveral themes, though fome- times obfolete or unufual, and which even are not to be always met with in the Lexicon. ' Hence in that cafe recourfe may be had to the preceding table of Chap. III. which points out the ufual themes correfponding to' thofe that are unufual. Neverthelefs, as it is very proper that thefe matters fliould be a little better digefted for beginners, and as thefe unufual themes, never falling in our way, cannot be fuppofed to offer themfelves eafily to the mind ; and moreover as there are feveral particulars to be obferved in ibme tenfes and verbs, which it is impoilible to reduce always to this general analogy, I have therefore comprized all thefe difficulties in the following rules, which will be fb much the more ufeful, as they are eafy to retain, and include at the fame time all that can be defired upon this fubjeâ< R U L £ I. ( General for the Inveftigation of the Theme. I. ^he derivative generally borrovas its tenfes from its primitive t 2. But Inveßigation of the Themél 257 â. But the primitives form their tenfes either îy change ing a circumflex verb into a baryton^ 3. Or a baryton into a circumflex^ 4. Which is often taken from the fécond future ; 5. Otberwife the primitives deduce their tenfes from different themes put together. Examples. In order to find out the theme, yte muft obferve here in general, 1. That if the verbs are derivatives, they generally form the tenfes that are wanting from their primitives ; as to tome, derived from »'*«, ,from thence borrows the future »lo/xa», and the 2d aor. ixófttii' : in the like manner feveral others, which we lhall fee hereafter. 2. But if the verb be a primitive, it frequently forms its tenfes from itfelf : Either by changing the circumflex verb into a baryton, which is a very common practice with the Attjcs ; thus Tofjitu, to marry, making regularly ya¡ívoa, i aor. lyetuna», borrows alfo of yafiu, ¡yrifta, from whence comes the participle yrifioí, ÁOXÍU, videor, I feem, forming from itfelf the fut. ioxíaréi, i. aor. iSóx))a-ct, perf. híóxnxa. ; forms alfo from íóxa the fut. perf. paff. íííoyfMu, i. aor. part. íó^ets i ^tom whence comes the neuter having found proper, 'slOta, to pußj, to run againß, forming the fut. in Heíych. borrows alfo of u^a the fut. ufu ; paíT. ; i. aor. Îae-a ; pafl*. iúix6r,xx, lateo, to he hid, fiidu, i^x6a, fix6iu, ftifixdmx, difco, to learn. ■ vanbu, 'CTxOù, crxOsa, wsvxônxx, patior, tofnfier, mi^u, 'EXfju, imu^iu, fut. cragíío-o/ia», pedo. Its compound xitaotx^nco^xi. In Arilloph, ■ as above, ;¿a^ííroft«í, vixàçu*«, and others of the fame fort. To theft we may likewife refer the verbs in faa, that alTume an n in the perf, as if it came from a fut. in ia-u. -For Iwoeßigätion-àf the Theme» 259 For the I ft fut. of thefe verbs being in » circumflex, can of itfelf form by extenfion a verb in íu» See Book III. Rule xxxix. 5. Excepting the above mentioned cafes, the primitive verbs derive their tenfes from two or more different themes put together, as we fhall fee in the fequel, intending to comprize all tbefe verbs in three chapters : the firft fhall be of thofe that borrow their tenfes of their primitives ; the fécond of thofe that derive them from divers fynonymous verbs, either drawn from themfelVes, or col- leâed from elfewhere ; and the third of thofe, which conforming in fome meafure to the general analogy,, have; neverthelefs fome.. thing particular, either with regard to the augment, or to the ad¬ dition or omiflion of fome fyllable, or fpme other extraordinary manner. CHAP. VIÏ. Of derivative Verbs that borrow their Tenfes of their Primitives,. AS this cliapter is particularly defigned for derivatives, which muft be reduced to their primitives by certain general rules, it will be therefore more convenient and ufeful, to range thefe verbs according to the order of their termination, as Sw, vm, »v, *va, and the like, and not according to the alphabetical order, which we fhall however conform to in the two enfuing chapters. Rule II. Of Sváíu, HirivíeOf libo, following cwtííuf takes oiruruf and iVWSiX», ' Examples. "Ziritia, libo, to offer up, to faerifice, makes its ift fut. «rsîw, from the unufual verb whence it is formed according to the .£olic manner, which is to change the fubjnnâive vowel into a conibnant, as ffvípfa, to Jvvi, &c. From auúcto comes the ift fut. paff. Aa-a, Thofe with an c ; as i^ioxa, topleafe', âçioa, v^cxct, from the verb taken from the zd fat. of u^o, to fit, to accommodate. Even thofe that change the penúltima of the primitive into • in the prefent, conform neverthelefs to this primitive in thofe tenfes, - which they borrow from thence ; as E¿|íî fee Book III. Chap. xvi. Rule 52 and 54. The zd aor. a£t. is regular ; fee Book III. Rule Ixxvi. ' M}?í¡TXa, to go aivay, to depart, from ¡/.oXia, rxru, m». Pvtoxa, tofiomo, from fviu, noa, tixai. Srsf'ioxa, to deprive, from nou, nxx. tiWvTxu, to finiß, to complete, from Ts^e'v, i, èibo, fut. ncr'toa, I. aor. »«rttra, the infjn. wier»!, the part, v'ta-xc. 'Steçîctkw, to deprive, to cut off, to take aviay ; fut. rtgño-u, aor. irtgicat, the pair. rEçiôàfo/.tai, ■ perf. Is-£^>)xa, ' palT. íré^-i JUKI, as if it came from regiu. Thofe with an oí as Bidu, to call, fut. xa>^a-a, and ; from whence comes xixxirxa, to call: from mt^áa, fut. migora, and m^áru ; whence we have roiw^ao-xw, to fell. ; Others add fome letters ; as from ^áa, ^»rxa, or mtçàrxa, are , formed alfo mtpavrxa, and mttp^airxa, dico, to fay. • R Ü L E V, Of Verbs in XKD that have the fécond aorift in ¿¿v. ri)f«(rxM and íííf «Vx« take their tenfes from aw ;. hut their aorift, ending in av, comes from and Examples. Tfi^âirxu, fenefco, to wax old, fut. comes from to be old. . But the ad aor. is íyn^x]> ; whence comes the infin. ym^ávou, to be old, (its compound xarayti^ami) and the part, yiçaç, amç, broken with age, taken from yigu;*», like ¡rifx». Aiífiáe-xa, fugio,. to take flight ; I. fut. h\áira, I. aor. eS'^arec, perf. Sé^^axac, from ; in like manner ¿íoro^^^áo-xa, to run away, from Sia^ii^clo-xa, to e/cape, to get away: , ' We likewife meet with ^úca. Ion, from whence the opt. Ihould be inllead of which Arifiotle has ufed the Attic kvoS^árt, aufugeret. ' The zd aor. is eS^av, a; in like manner ¿orsS^ar, ^uS'^ar, for âoréSfvi', íisíjí)»: and in the 3d perf. plur, alfo éíga», axsSi^a», by fynC. for àotsi^etrett, from In the other moods this aor. conforms to trn/xt ; in the optat. í^xínr, the infin. part. and its compóunds in the like manner. ' e 53 Rule 262 Book V. 0/Defectives.' R u l e VI. Of Verbs in 2kn that form the fécond aorift in m. *Ax»Vxw, ß^ci(rxu, jStwíTxw, afiä , takt their tènfes from verbs in ow \ hut their fécond aorifi is in uvt comity from W/A» i and the w is continued through all the moods. Examples. Thofe three verbs likewife borrow their tenfes from verbs ia « pure ; but they take their ad äor. from a verb in which re¬ tains u through all the moods. *AKiffx.o, to take, ,ot ¿AttrxDju.«!, to be taitnt borrows of iaSta the future ¿Aivo'iv. and íXucofíctt} perf. qX&ixai. and. by refolntion. lá- paíT. Hxu/xai, (fee Book 111. Rule xvi.) from whence comes a\aa-ti, eaptivity ; ¿Xwroj, captive. It borrows of (like the ad aor. ItxAwr. which retains the u through,all the moods, and is conjugated thus : Sing. lixAvr. îa\u. Dual . . . ItxAurof. isLhúrriv, Plur. ... iáXuri, iátioauv. The fubjunftive is »xü, ¿xJ j opt. ¿Xo»«», and m- fin. ; part. ¿xà;. ó>toí, But take notice here, that all thefe tenfes, rirtyf/,eu, 2. aorift añ. étíxoi>, the mid. hmi/wp, perf. mid. títok» ¡ /rom whence comes tóxo;, delivery. Of the Verbs in Nib. We ßrall range, the verbt in ne eueording to the five elafiit ahem ment totted. Chap. /. ^he \fi of verbs in óm» ; the zd in alta ; the ^d in tipu ¡ the i^b in ira and vpu ; and the ^th in pu, preceded by a eonfonastt. Which fitall be all comprisoed in the follovting rules. Rule VIII. Of Verbs in ¿va. " 1. Verbs in ¿va take their tenfes from their primitives^ and m<^ be^derived either from ««, or from tat as av^tu, to increale. 2. Others are derived from, a verb in a impuret bj changing a into ¿vuy as Indvafrom íxw. 3. In others the antepenúltima often ajfumes a v, thus from Alió« comes K»v^%vut from rtuj^Uf rvy^dva. Examples. i. Verbs in átu may be derived from a primitive in ¿u, or in tu, and from thence take their tenfes ; as Kx^trccpu, to eflablifi, to fix, to re-eflahlifl), to refiore, to re-inflatCt from xadtráu, fat. íi^u, perf. úkx, like xetfiirxjut. KJmpu, to break, to Jhatter, from pO\iu, ¿uru, rii^t^xpu, to fill, from erXáu, «tru. Others are derived from a verb in íu ; as AfMtgrxpu, to go aflrey, to err, to fin, from iftOi^riu, fut. &¡ea^ níau, perf. 2. aor. ^¡Axgrop. Avixpu, augeo, to increafe, to augment, from xi^ta, xi^niru, lit nor. ii0^no/««u, to be hated or envied, from {¡aofieu, 'll/iva, to fit down, to repofe, to defcend, from í§e«, i^ncru. Kixitu, to find, to compa/s, to invent, to approach, to meet, to lay hold of, from xpyfa, noa, m». Matixpa, to learn, to under/and, to know, to difcover, to inßruB, to teach, to he informed, from fcxßtu, fut. ¡cxßho-oiAxt, perf. ¡itftiinxa, 2. aor. tfixßop, 'Oa^^xívofíxt, odoror, to fmell, makes its future ¡op^trofxap, from c(TÇçàoi>,ut ; as likewife the zd aor. mid. ¿op^ófciít, the infin. iaf vi¬ ciât, the part. ôoÇqôiAim. . 2. Others come from a verb in « impure, changing only a into ¿ta', is Bnyánii, zcao, to whet, from^nyx, fat, Bó^u, ift aorift iQv^x, the iniin. Bvixi. toßt down, to go to the bottom, from fut. 'ou, beíides X^koa, from \^ia, above mentioned! \xipu, to come, to arrive, to lay hold of, to touch, from Ixtr, fut. "iofiat, i. aor. íxó/cvp. 'Onlcíne, to fee,, to perceive, to difcover, from ínlu or ovlofíxt, fut. e^o/jLXt, pair, l. aOT. SpßriP, And fome of thefe frequently make their antepenúltima Ihort, being formed oftentimes from the fécond future ; as XlvpßxtDi/iXi, to hear fay, to difcover, to know, to inquire, to he iu' formed, is formed from wèSiAxi, zd fut. of or£¿óo/xa» ; from whence it takes its litfiit. mxtía-ojjLXi, zd aor. mid. But the palCve preterite is véorva-i^x}, inltead of mimvaftcu, in the fame manner as rÍTvxrxi, it has been got ready, prepared, or ftted, for ac¬ cording to the, 60th rule of the third book. And from miirvrx* comes ixorvroi in Dion, Thucyd. and others, publißed, divulged, or heard of', as xtpvxroç for xfevxrof, unavoidable, from Çsvyx, /«gio. 3. But thefe verbs alTume frequently a > or a 7, or a ft, if the fubfequent confonant requireth. Thus from deleâo, topleafe, to rejoice, zd fut. x'^ü, is formed xtixta, placeo ; lâ future rara ; ift aor. ?i7a; zd fut. «Jä. From thence likewife arifeth another circumflex verb, ¿íia ; fut. ¿íva-a, according to the firil rule ; and the reft in the fame manner. Axyx^*"t to draw lots, to obtain, to enjoy, to compafs, from ¡ I ft fut. and >,ii^oftxi, or hx^oftxp % zd aor. itvxx'" > f*'^* X« ; perf. ait. eiMx», Att. for XtXnx* » f«>™ whence comes the pair. slXny/ttpoi, eaji far by lots. But the perf. mid." >ÁXoyx», comes regularly from the verb tdyx"». AxftSxpa, to take,-to catch, to receive, to fall upon, to furprife, to undertake, to fuffer, to conviS, to condemn, from xißx j fut. ' * Inveßigation of thé Theme.' 2^5 fuet; p'erf. 2d aor. zd fat. futSS, whence comes KeiftSeitu, ^ Ae€»6»>0, to he eoneealeJt from >-i6u, iff fut. Xiicru, 2d fut. ?m6S, 2d. aor. ífMÍot, perf. mid. XiíAqO«, paff*. x/Xt)(ta6»t, part, oo^^jtuvo;. 2. The following verbs are excepted from this rule, and form their tenfes regularly from themfelves. fut« It comes from íj^áu, to Jo, to plot, or eott' trivt a thing. ©muúm, fut« ^mjí»»5, I ft aor. idi^/JMrcc, Or idifftriM, to htàt, to ferment. ^»Ua, fut« f»>5, from fáa, to fiint, to appear. - Xa'ma, fut« from hio, to gape, to traei, to ht open' mouthed, 'tiraUa, fut« firavZ, from rtim, toßretch, to bend. Ttr^ai»», or rerqaUu, to pierce, to make a bole, fut« arS ; from whence comes the ift aorift rtr^qyein Hom. for rtr^ane, theinfin. in Hefych. for rer^afoti, which is found in Theophr. the part. Tirgita(, the paiT. nrçeaiStif in Suidas. It is formed from r^áti, and perhaps fome others. But obferve here the fame redu¬ plication as in verbs in /xt. Some even terminate in áw and otíw, as' »ííáro and oli»ua, from oth'a, to fvoell. 3. Others have a twofold perfeâ and future, deriving them from a verb in iu, and likewife forming them regularly from them¬ felves ; as Kt^htirco, to gain, takes from xtxí^hiKoe, From Itfelf, xe^iarS, xtxí^íayxec, iftaor. txs^ocm. 'E^vúaíya,' to be red, to redden, takes from vnu, txa, ti/tat ; whence comes to, ruber. From itfelf it has ¡gv6atZ ; whence comes the ift aor. part. .Attic, in Hefych. for Rule XI. Of Verbs in lím. Polyfyllahks in tim take their fenfes from their Primitives. Examples. Pclyfyllables in tUu borrow their tenfes of the verbs from whence they are derived ; as (pxúm, toßine, to appear, from to ßun, to efcape, from cCKiva : i^etUa, to tpueßion, from c^ojua», &C« DiíTyllables generally fpeaking are regular ; as Sebio, toßrike % xreUa, to kill I riUa, to ßretch or bend ; fut. St»«, xTttZ, tuZ, See. Antefignanus excepts two or three ; as ¿i>u, to cover, to clothe j cet»» and ofjutt, to wound. Rule XII. Of Verbs in Im and ¿va. ^Iva and ¿va frequently borrow their future and preterite of verbs in a pure. Examples. Verbs in INíí borrow their tenfes of verbs in íw, though un- nfual. Tita, Inveßigatiott of the theme. zSj ta pay, ta putàjh or itpuntßed, from ria,fiîvo, fut. r'ura. to dry, ta ht pbtbifical, from ton/uma ; ift aor. ipdwx, perf. pafl*. ^pOtjMu. Verbs in TNß do the fame ; as Aiiu, ta eauceal ana's felf, to ßnk, as the fun, uohen it fatteth ; ift fut. Sóouf perf. iíhnutí the 2d aor. is Hvs, taken from ^^1. 'limita, toplacSfto eßablifo, ^ from ¡Sl¡¿ai fut. ¡í'^ixu ; aor. ¡ífuna, whence comes ¡'¿¡»vo-c in Plato. Rule XIII. Of 'EXftur«. 1. 'Exaúr« borrows of ixoiu the futures IxaVw, IXw j 2. the aoriß nXxax, txxrx i 3. the perfeSt íxiíxax«.- Examplës. 1. to puß, to incite, to drive, to nsave, formed front itdio, (firft by changing it into iXxéru, and afterwards by inferting », 'Oixifo) from thence borrows the lil fut. itiiou, and the 2d ¡tú}. 2. The ifi. aor. nfMua, or without the augment íxxva, the 3d peribn i>ana>, fync. they have pußed or driven. 3. The perf. Att. lAqAax«, plu'-perf. 3d plur. 'iioat, Att. •toa,, they have driven i paxt.'iktyMxuc, arrived : perf. pafl*. ífMiActi, or contrary to the opinion of Scotus. From the firft comes the lil aor. I have been driven ; and from the fécond, iXctaiiM, a copper-piate. Rule XIV. Of IxViOfAXll 'ixrto/xai borrows of tx0jiA«i ; t^o¡*xtj lyfuxtl Examples. ^ 'hidofiM, or ixtS/Am, to come, to arrive, borrows its tenfes of txofMu ; fut. ï^ofiMt :. perf. tyfuu. Second ^aorift Ixíiua» ; the infin. ¡xíaíat ; part. : thus ¿^ix»S/xa^ to come, to arrivai veni ; àçTxro, Flut, venerat ; ico. Rule XV. Of Verbs in vu impure. Nw of att impure termination is regulated by its primi- tive i thus SxxvUf from diíxw, makes 'iSxxov, S*i^u, $t$it^x. Examples. Verbs in >*> impure follow the fame analogy as the preceding, being always regulated by their primitives. Thus iâxtu, to bite, coming from ^xa, like it nfakes the ill fut. ad. whence comes the paffive ixx^ña-ofíMi the ill aor. the perf. ^éhx», frona whence the palT. ííííiyftiau j the 2d aor. fiaxo,. Sec. 0 Thus fiinDu, to remain, conforms to (cíta, whence it takes the perf. mid. ¡cénom. Book III. Rule IxLx. Tiynofcxt in the next chapter follows yíta. ilma;,- to fall, conforms to 'osíta, nípta, poetic, follows pida, to kill, to put to death. See. Rule 26í Book V. Of Defectives,' Rule XVI. Of Verbs in »VU or VVfJLlt ßnd the 'Theme of verbs in vu«, nvfjuy or wiwy pvufitj ' toe have only to change thefe fyllahles into u. Examples: Verbs in tla and wynf or, with a double »», in nia and »xt/iu, fonm their tenfes from their primitive, which is eaiily found out, only by changing thele fyllables into u. Thus it will appear that fome of thefe verbs come from others in ¿a, iuy or iu, whether they take a fîngle or a double * The reduplication qf the v is found in the following verbs t WST«-», tBttofnia, or ureTi-nt)/**, to open* xe^a,-nía, or xtgd-nvfiiy to mix» xopi'iif xopt-nia, Or xogi-nvfii,^ to cly. cZé-a, aÇt-nvat Or a€é'nvf/,tf to çuenci» But verbs in ¿a change o into ; as ^¿-u, ^a-tpva, or ^á-nvfíPf to gird. ^ ygi'Uf ^a-ptiuy or y(g¿-y>v¡Á,i, to colour, yfi-a, yf)-ipia. Or p^ú'tpvfMt to throw up the ground, (i-u, fa-pfiu, or (ú-ptvjíty to ßrengthen. Some come from diflyllables in ya, xu, or x" i ^ ^tvy-o, ^ivy-pva, Or ^tiy-pv/tt, to jotHy hlx^a, itiK-tia, Or hix-pv/ii, to ßfCW. I ax-or"*» to be vexed or troubled. In like manner oX^pv^u, to inclofe ox fiut up i ¡Áypvfítp to ntitt- gki ftó^ypviÁP, or ó/*ógy,v/xi, to wipe ; oXypvyu, to Open, &c. But there are fome whofe primitives were formerly perhaps in ule, which we now find terminated in vva or rru ; as tontea, esny' púa, -'yvfAi, to fiick or join together % estáicaa, .rty-pitii, or -'»v/*,, to ßrike, to weep ; pviro-a, fvy-pia, -'»y/x», to break, to ßatter ; t^ás-a-a, ç^ay-pia, to iuclofi, to ßut up. Whofe tenfes are always formed according to the rule of the unufual verbs niíiya, mXÍiy.a, (r,ya, (p^áya. ^ "Aypvitp may be from ¿ya, or from ua-aa, according to the etymologift, whence comes its compound xariaatn in Artemidorus. Thofe in are regular. "Og-w, óg-»¿w, or Sg-pv/jii, to trouble, to excite. Rule XVII. Of fome particular Verbs in vvwor »uf». 1. Krlvvvfjity derived from nnlvuy from thence forms its tenfes ; as alfo nrra^fu/*», from nrrod^u ; 2. Verbs derived from a circumflex, from thence like' wife form their tenfes. - . Examples. 1. The following verbs borrow their tenfes of their primitives ; but the diphthong lofes the fécond vowel ; 'thus *Tei-,w, xr'pp-pvyct, to kill} trrai'fu, «rág-ry/x«», to fneexe. . 2. Se- Itmfiigait&ñ of the. Thmél i6^ ' t. Several even form their tenfes from the örcnmilex verbs« from whence they are derived; Either by inferting the fyllable »» before fu ; as to ßrewt So^tù>, Só^-tv/iUf to leap, ¡¡ii'tif iffSf oft-w/xi, to fwear» Or only by inferting an v« and changing the accent ; as * Kiii-S, Mtfvfu, to move. "A^tv/tcu, to change, to buy, comes either from «¿Igt», te taÍ4 away, as -Brri^tviteu from mrai^a ; or elfe from a!¡Sf*eu, to taie, as ^ó^nvfuct from So^S/xat. All the verbs, mentioned in the two preceding rules, have either a fingle or double > beTore ¿a. But there are fome dilTyllables, which are terminated in a dif-> &rent manner, whereof we fliall treat in the following rule. Rule XVIII. Of o'aau« or oxxvfAt. 'Oxxvu and oxxvft.t horrow their tenfes of ôxia, 'oxy^ia, or «AXv/x>, to deßrey, to kill, t^ ruin, to die. It comes from c>Aa, fut. i^M, from whence arifeth the circumflex ôxéa : and thence the fut. o>iaa, the perf. wXtx«, Att. ôXwAtx», (fee Book III. Rule xvii.) the ad aor. uXot, mid. infin. part, the perf. mid. u\et, Att. oXuA«. In like manner from its compound ¿votAva, or àntixxvfu, the ifl fut. is âwoKiou, the zd àiciAà, Sec, - ' ANNOTATION. ' "ligofteü feemt al/o to beformed by f>ne, from i^vo/uu, tO prelerve, tO prote£t, whence comes the fut. Ifútro^at. - 'li^/ceu, ßems to be a preterite, not only becaufe it imports fltum efle, but moreover by reafon that ¡Sigvodat and have the ac^ cent of the preterite, and not of the prefent. From what has been faid, it will be eafy to judge of the manner of forming asfd conjugating the verbs in vfct. Jt will only be requifite to know, which of their tenfes are in ufe ; and this we have fufjcienfly fiewn already in the fécond and in the fourth chapters. CHAP. vni. Of Verbs that borrow their Tenfes of others fynonymous, or of Verbs of the fame Signification, fome of which may .be conftdered as their primitives, or as their derivatives. R U L £ XIX. Of 'Ayo^fuw. J. 'Ayofiw borrows of tvu its two aorifis tîirov, utcx, and retains every-where the augment sr. , 2. From 470 Book V. Cy Defectives; 4. From ipttû or fiu it takes the future in -u'«-«, whence are derived iffti/Accii Ipfiiinui 'and f)ldnVo/lA«U Examples. I. * \ Votiva, It pronounce, to harangue, forms regularly' its firft future ¿yo^iíaa, firft aorift iySftvaet, 2. It borrows of eïva, which in the prefent is nnufual, the ift aor. ilna, ,and the 2d íTwo», dixi, I haw/aid i which retain every« where their augment, as in the imperat. die, in the part.' fliràn, nuho has /aid. 3. It borrows.of whence by apocope has been formed (ía, to fay, to /peak, the unufual fut. fia» or î^naa, whence comes the perf. ti'^qxa (the augment in n, like thofe of the 11th Rule of the 3d Book) paft*. tï^riiA.ctt, or tffuftat, the fat. paft*. in Thu« cyd. I. aor. eî^éénp, and dropping t, s^i6n>, or reduplicating ipfóOfip, as if it came from fnau ; likewife Ippöno with an < in • the penúltima. From hence are derived feveral nouns ; as /¡¡fi», a word ; fíate, et/eatehe a firuf, a rhetorician' Rule XX. Of Algéu. Ai^íu takes sTaoV} tÍÁÓftfiVf and fometimes iÍkoí^ ù>,d[s.nv.\ Ex A M F L E s. Atrito, or aiçéotJMt, to take, ti choofe, forms regularly the fut, ttlfiaopica, and the perf. nfOfsett, Its firft aor. alTumes an < inftead of u in the penúltima of and in the like manner in the ift fut. al^e6ícro/*»i. See Rule Iii. and liv. of Book HI. It borrows of îA», capio, the 2d aor. eT^oy, whence comes the infin. lAsr,, the mid. ilxoptny, i>íía6at, .The ift aor. eTaw is hardly to be met with ; but we find the mid. lîtuxfsvn Rule XXI. Of ¿Xtviito snd xuXtvSiu. 'Axivifw making its future in nV«, borrows alfo laa from ¿xíu -, • xvxlvSuy or xvXivíiu, forms its future after the fame manner. Examples. 'AAitîsÂ), to roll, forms regularly the fut. ¿AivJnV« ; but it bor¬ rows alfo aXtaa of its primitive ¿\íu. Its fynonymous verb KviiUSa, or xvXiyíia, forms regularly xvAiv« Sóaa ; likewife xv^itru from xvAÍiif. In like manner its compounds II^Aix«;, evolvißi, Ariftoph. i^a^íaeií, è volutabro excitons. ' Rule XXII. I. B«»v« borrows almcß all its tenfes of its primitive ßxu. 4." From Jnveßigation of the Theme. 271^ 2« From itfelf it takes ß^etfAftcctf and the aor.'ltdy^mv : But itw comes from ßiSttfAt, as alfo the imperative ßx6i : 4. fometimes this imperative is fyncopatedy as |3«, xxTxSx. Ex À MP t ES. 1. vado» /o go, toimalk, fcdlows the rule of the other verbs in »Uu of ¿e preceding chapter, taking from its primitive ßiu the fat. ßv^a, or ßiiffo[Mui the lil aor. iSwiiAnti the perf. ßtSv*»} fync. ßtS»»} plwr, ßtSa/tn fot ßtSiicctftit} pla-perf. êëiSv- xsty, and tSeSitin 3. plur. ¡StSxii cording to the 53th Rule of Book III. and the iB aor. palT. íSáyOvr, whence comes io»^iS4y6v)', and avre€¿y6tiy, in Dion Caffius. From itfelf it forms the imperf. tS»my, whence comes vvyiSeuyt, Dion Caffius, it happened. We find alio ßeiiyt, without the aug¬ ment, he walked. 3. It borrows of ßi^nfiu (whence comes ßt\'4Ai/ke»v, sAiíAbOa, &c. See Book III. Rule xvii. 'Rule XXV. ' Of 'Ea-ô»». 1. 'Efl-ôiw borrows of tí« «i«, and m», which is changed into tinx« and líiííoxa ; 2. Thence, in the perfeSl paßve, it takes íSñSo[s.xi and 3. Thence alfo ^it has in the fécond future middle, íÍ8fs.xt, or ííoji*«» : and from pxyu it borrows tpxyUfs.xi, '> ^ rough breaching, according to Book V. Rule xxviii. mid. e|«/xai. From thence comes w«¿é|i}re, iñ aor. of the fubjun£t. in Cebes. . 2. It borrows of o'W'if ftey, or follow, from airrifu ; and Sèç from &c. The perf. paff. is toxtf-ai, ïaxtoat, tcxfccn, whence comes ox^tq;, fufferable ; its compound a^xircç, unfufferahle ; as alfo erxloiç, habit, di/pofition', the 2d aorift paff. \<7xßyiP is likewife from thence. • Infomuch that it may he faid, that the atrrifs, which affume an Is in the penúltima, tv^s&rip, y^cOnv, ippí6ii¡p, and the like, may "be formed regularly from the perfeSl pajpve of the verbs in ¡/.t : and like- wife, that verbal nouns, with a long vowel, are generally derived from circumflex verbs ; whereas tbofe that have a Jhort vowel, are de¬ rived from verbs in p.!, which affume a jhort vowel in the penúltima of the pajjive perfeSl, whence thofe nouns are derived. Thus ¿0, it has the future the perfeâ TtOviix« and rí&ieca, like ßtQjixet, ßtScta, ivi i tçrtvM,, iraa, ßetit and thence may be derived the 3d perfon plural rt9p£tri, by con* traâion, for Te6>áaa-t; and likewift the infinitive rtBrUrat, with an £ circumflexed, for rtdrabo». The Boeotians alfo form the perfeâ in n, r/6.(ixa, whence comet ' the part. nBtetxéíí, and riOraírat, afterwards' calling away the >, riBveùii, and among the poets likewife rsöttihf, dead. c 4. But we find alfo ríBmfíi, which makes the reduplication in t, and is conjugated like "rv/c-i, whence we may alfo' derive the 3d perf. plur. redtàai, like irHai ; unlefs we Ihould choofe to derive it from the perfeâ, according to what has been already faid. The imperfeâ is riBnaBt ; the optative rsBta'nir ; the infinitive reBtdrcu { , the participle tíO.»;. Rule XXVIII. Of naV;^;«. 1. n«(rp¿cj formt from nrjiô« the future -atítrofjíeti infieaà of Tswofjíou i from nrr'Ôw likewife it has ssraöo» : 2. Its preterites are from •nTcc^íu, •nrtsraôxxai 3. And from nravfiisvw, uTiVovô«. Examples. I. Xlciax'-', patior, to fußer, to endure', imperf. tKaer^i, Dion Caifius. Fut. wtiö-Ojuaw, ¡ ßall or nuill fußer, inltead of «río-o^ai, alTuming iKinllead of the n of whence it derives its tenfes. But erciaojuai, I luill believe, / voill obey, comes from notíB¿/*ai, the pair, of 'mttB0, to perfuade, • ' 3 " The Inv^igathn tf the Theme. 275 The ad aor. ¡WttSM comes from'the famii vn6*>, whole fécond fut. H ««601» the infin. uraBuu part. vaBùr. , The a£L perf. is mtráSnx»., from «»6ía>, formed from the 2d iàt. ««6« ; the perf. mid. is «'«orO«, by inferring 6, inltead of > trínwth from «mt«» laioro ; the part, «Mrsfâùir» cTOf. 3. Otherwife «cvo>6« may be derived from ivandira» te fuffer^ as íilítMYXf* i which feems the moft reafonable, úqce the » is likewife changed elfewhere into 0: whence Epicharmus in the e^mot fays rnvwrx* palTus eft» èe hat fuffered. See Book IH. Rule Ixviii. in the annotation. Rule XXIX. - Of llco'o'u. IliVir«,. or TfftTTta, takes its future^ -preterite., ànd aoriß from ztíirlu. Examples. ntíTiTu, Att. mirra, borrows of the old verb miitia, to hotl, to . • digeß, to fofttnr to eafe, to make boil, the lit. fut. «/>]/&; the lit aor. i the paff. mpOitroiMu, iirifirit ¡ perf. mimiinxu , Rule XXX. Of ním. 1. ním has from -nrtu, -sTisitect, and íirm : 2. From zréu it takes wwe-«, mn-Mx«, and -a-STroftxif with a ßort 0 •. 3. In the imperative it has from tb7[*i ; and uuh ■ from trufai. Examples. 1. nlv«, coming from «i<», to drink, forms regularly the 2d fnt. whence comes viûoèat ; but it formeth alfo mitiMu, «»<• om, I nuilt drink and the 2d aor. cWior, / have drunk ; like çàyo^ (Sófíxi, •!««•, I noill eat. See Rule XXV. 2. It borrows of mia the fut. ¡múoa, perf. aâ. «fV&x«; But in the pair, it hath mimftxi with an (according to the analogy of the verbs in /*») whence comes móftx, drink, potion, phyßc ; «í«f» drink, or the manner or cußom of drinking together', and feveral others. The lit fat. «o6^ofc«t», ifi aoy. imdrit. 3. From thence alfo comes the imperat. «Sô», whence «rv/s- irwOi, compota i as-it takes from arr^««. Rule XXXI. Of lltVJu. 1. ütTtJa, from Tfftiu, makes rsicta, vtrtox : 2. From zrttru comes -a-tíríu, which forms ■zts ; the iñ aor. epptvaa, which is very little ufed; part, feiaeií. See Book III. Rule xxvii. 2. It takes from pvíu, the ill fat. fvvau, very little ufed ; the mid. fv^aofiut ; perf. a£l. eppvrncoi. 'Sppvn* is the imperf. or the 2d aor. a£l. of pímpit, fluo, evanefco ; or elle it is the 2d aor. palT. of pv(v, though pvS after contraâion is in u pure: the fame mull be faid of the infin. pvñteu, and of the part. pve)i, 'PvS may he either the zdfut, aß. of ptvu, fluo ; or the pref.fuh- junß. of pviifAi, fluam ; or the zd aor. of the aß. or paff. fubjunß. of the fame vfci, to break in pieces ; pî|ai, to have broke ; mtfppñ^ai, to have broke all round. Wherefore xctrappatOrií, cataraßa, a cafcade or fall of water, ought to be derived from pcloa'a, to break, whofe compound is Kxrxppxrau, to precipitate. But xara^àxlriç, which is likewife ufed, and is alfo taken for the bar of a door, as well as the other, comes from ctgiaau, which flgnifies the fame as pácra-a, whence is formed xxrx^xaau, with « Jingle Ç ; inflead of which we find alfo áppxocra, whence avt- appáoou, to batter one againll the other ; but crvppxa-o-a tomes from pxcaas R U L E Inveßigation of jthe Theme. 277 Rule XXXIII. Of Zfúw'and Xíúo/*«»« 1. 2iü«, from fAa., whence comes ^^¡AOf, a race i a courier, a poßilitM, a proßitute, a dromedary ; a hare, Hefych. likewife feveral other nouns. The zd fut. mid. i^aiA^iAOii is taken from the aâ. ^^»iaZ. 3. From thence alfo is formed by refolution a verb in iu, ¡Ata, whence comes the perf. aâ. M^áfAw», &c. T 3 Rule 1*]% Book V. Cy DEFÉtrivEs^ Rule XXXVI. Of VirKT^uíofA.Ctl» *'íwit the imper. iviax»» Ion. ivooxÍH iniin. part. V7ri>a-xól*e*0f, We find likewife the future vVorvaviAXi, promittam ; but it is derived from vípírafíxt, to (barge one's felf nuitb, or to be anßwerabh fort whence comes alfo the fécond aorift hvin)-. Rule XXXVII. Of fero. 1. ^içu) takes its futures from DM i 2. Its aorifis -K«, 'Xev, from ivtyxu ; 3. Its paffive and middle preterites from : 4. It borrows alfo pfn'trwfrom ; and ip^v; from tppfpii. Examples. «h/çw, fero, to carry, to fvffer, takes what tenfes it wants from four different themes. 1. It takes its futures from ota, the a£t. otaa, mid. eta-oftxt, 'pair. oiVôîîs-o/xflsi. Likewife the paff« aor. the infin. »«rOi»«!, part, oîo-flsîç, the gerund oír/o», ferendum ; proferendunt' 2. It takes its aoriib from iyíyxa ; the ift aor. a£l. nny»*, liée Book III. Rule xxxi.) infin. itéyKea, part. itíyKetr, mid. steyxa/sn», whence comes the optat. inyxxno, Lucin. utinam ferat, and the imperative of its compound, àitlnyxxi, defer. The 2d aor. «reyxo», infin. Ivsyxsrir, part. Ivfyxùv. But the Ionics fay Iff ixm, ill aoriit mix«, parf. mix«;, mid. hti- xá^íi», and, with the augment, nynxu. 3. It borrows of ití-yjt the Att. perf. mid. ; ítetítoxa, 'Cxcellui, J have furp^ed \ ÍTrentox», intuit ; where we meet with 0 after the manner of diflyllables, as if it came from the fimple tX<^- Sc® Book III. Rule Ixviii. The jft fut. paff. htx^ri(To¡t.xt, ill aor. r,y(x^ti,, part. perf. iwyjuan. Thus itcupi^o, to raife, to bring back, to recover one's health •, ímíx^nf, being a little recovered. 4. It borrows alfo the fut. and the aor. from Çt^ia ; Xyhich is either formed by tranfpofition from psç«, or, by fyncope, from its derivative Ço^éa, (p^ío-, which is oftener ufed in compounds; as sUpflu, infero, imperf. fliéç^uy, lit fut. tUp^íia-a, lit aor. eiiiÇpa-u, perf. iîçtpçDx» ; iicp^èu, to tarry avjay,_to put out, • i it fut. (xpçjjo'w, III aor. i^ipentra, i ill aor. part, driven, or put out, retaining x»} by íync. iéí/jniix». Ká/jtva, xa¡xü, to be tired ; mk¿i4,iiík», xÍK¡í7iKa, ixix¡íí)x.iaoit, Dion CaíCus, 3d'plur. plu-perf. Tifjitu, to eut, TEjuü, iirtftmce, rírfíwa ; paíT. tirftinicu. Thas KCí^sti, to cali\ fut. xaXéaa and vo'u ; perf. xsxáfítixa, and by fync. xf^ia-a, xix^voxa ; palT. xlxXDfíUi ; paulo-poft>fut. Xix^^ao/iai. Tltqxróa, to end, to bounds perf. for «EErtgárufxat, and by a ad fyncope ; 3d perf. miot^arxi, it is decreed, whence comes lieiicga-ca, Dion, fatis deßinatum fuit', «r£Wç4i/*i»o{, fatal. Plut. Thus from olo/sai, to think, by fync. is formed oTjusi ; imperf. > f C tiofiriv, lync. ufíri», ' Thus from ó^eÍXs», to owe, comes ; of which hereafter. And in the fame manner feveral others, which may be feen in their proper place. Rule XL. Of "Ayu. 1. ''Ayu tnakes «^u, ¿'yx*» dyno^x : 2. The aorifi %yov makes Hyxyov, from whence the other moods take »ydyu, ¿yxyoifAt, xyxyt, dyx-\ yi7iti_ xyxyùv. Examples. 1. "Aya, duco, to lead, to think, to aSl, forms the fut. í^a, perf. Sx», and, by reduplication, but inllead of thefe preterites we likewife make ufe of ¿yíox®, which is formed by inferring 0 ; and the Boeotians fay alfo ¿yeíox«, changing d into u. 2. The zd aor. is ^yov, whence is formed nyayai and tiyxyofixiti. By inferring yc^, which is retained through all the other moods y fubjundl. ¿yáy ; optat. ¿yáyu/xi ; imperat. ayayc ; inñn, âyxysTtj and the part, à àyayàv, inllead of which IS ¿lío \licd atycù'yitÇf fle¬ uch. as coming from ccyá'yyi¡s%. ANNOTATI ON. "Ajú» follows alfo the fame analogy, n^ot, íjajo», whence comes' the fart, in Horn. Rule XLI. Of 'AvaAiVxu. 'Ai/aA»'¡rxu varies its augment, making the perfehl xvx-^ Aux«, «v"/)Aux«, and ryx'M%x, Examples. 'AvcOkirxa, to confume, to aholiß), to laviß>, is compofed of xa, and follows its fimple; but admits of great variety with regard tq Inveßigation of the Eherne. 281 to its augment. For beiides the perf. confumpß, without the augment, as alio we fay likewife with the augment of the fimple, and %té¿Kan», with the augment before the prepolition. In like manner the ift aor. ¿»«X«?«, ¿i'^X0O'«, and ^ráxuo-»; the pair. perf. ítí'Ku\).a,i and plu-perf. ¿noxú- fit)». Thefe tenfes are all derived from ¿»«xó», which is ufed even in the pref. and the imperf. as ¿»áxe», Ariftoph. in/umbanty for ¿»«Xev; pref. infin. ¿»»xSv, Thucyd. part, ¿naxéficv«;, Xenopb. and likewife ¿»axSro, 3d perf. of the palT. imperf. In like manner the other compounds of this verb, l^aniaXto'xu, to lay out pion^ for a things to confume- tntirtly, &c. See kWvjxu above. Chap.'VII. Rule VI. Rule ^Lll. Of ^Avoíyu, 'Ai/si'yw is compounded of ¿v» and otyu : it receives the augment of the fmple ; has an t infer ted afterwards j and changes the « of the prepofttion into jj. Examples. 'Aniyuf^ to go out, to open, compounded of ¿>1% and t*ya, takes the augment of the limpie, changing o> into a fubfcribed, to which the Attics add afterwards an t, and fometimes they even change the a of the prepolition into % in the beginning : thus this verb re¬ ceives three different forts of augments; for inftance, the ill aor. aft. ¿»£»1« ; perf. ¿v£v;¿ix ; ■pzff, áiéay¡Mu ; mid. ¿»»7« and perf. part. mid. iitsayùç, ¿roq, &c. The ill aor. paff. ¿te^6v» and hnáytnt, or, with the augment of the fimple only, ¿v¿xPn»i I have been opened- We meet alfo with ^»017-») in the 3d perf. of the 2d paff. aor. and with in the 3d perf. of the ift aâ. aor. where the augment is only ufed in the beginning. Moreover we find in the ill fut, mid. ¿mynaoiMUf as if it came from kmyiu. Rule XLIII. Of 'Acwyw, or ¿myiu, 'Avwyw, or dmyioi, makes the imperfect »vuyovy the per-^ feSl middle ¿vwy»y the imperative Examples. 'Avúya, or àtayla, to command, forms regularly the ill aor. v'uf«. Its imperf. is iruyov, inllead of ri'oyo», or even áttíysi ; perf. mid. atajya for ^tuya^ 2d aor. imperat. jube, for ¿lúyndty which pomes from útúyo¡i,M, Rule XLIV. Of Auíu and íotíoft-oíil Aa»M either forms it¡ tenfes regularly y or drops u Examples. AaSu, or JWtojbiaet, to divide, to entertain at table, to burn. It forms its tenfes regularly ; as> thç fut. : mid. imuroiiety, among the poets. - ' Afterwards, ' z82 Book v. 0/ Defectives; Afterwards, by dropping >, it makes ; the ift fut.^ palT. Secirßi^ffieci f I ft aor. Ú¿a'6ri»i perf« Íúccír/teut But htiu, to learn, having formed the ad fot. iaZ, from thence makes a new theme, ^uíu ; whence comes the rft fot. iaitcu ; mid. ¿»áirofcat ; the pe^. ítíátiiut, I have kamt ; paíT. íí^ávi*»», J bamt been taught. We meet alfo "with the ad aor. aâ. of or the ad aor. paftT. of íaíu, ad fot. íaZ, whence comes the part. ^etiU, inow' ing, or having learned ; as, from xeúu comes x«etf, hurnt^ Rule, XLV. Of Aiíí«. i. Attiu ftiakes ítí(ru, StíuKw,' . 2. The middle Sííctxx i 3. Tèe plural Í£Ío/x«ji*£> is by fyncope changed into Sí- Soty[A.cv : 4. The Ionics ufe SíSi» inflead of SíSoix» : 5. The imperative is SíSt^t. Examples. 1. AeiSt), te fear, to he afraid, forms regularly the fat. Stía», the perf. SíSuxu. 2. The perf. mid. is SsSoixa inftead of SíSotS», to avoid patting three Í fucceffively. 3. Bat the plural híoíxxfitp is changed into SíSotyi*t>, by fyn¬ cope, in the fame manner as foty^ce» for ¡oíxa/xtr, vijt fumu$% ixè- fitt for È^éo/xc)', lavahamus. ' 4. Inftead of SíSotxx, the Ionics ufe ií^tx, calling away the », end -the prepofitive o, from whence comes the infinitive Seíwxt, and the participle ithài, éroç. 5. The imperative is he tbea afraid, and among the poets StíSi6t, as if they came from ÍéSti»i and htStiAt. Some will have it, that SiStx is formed regularly from Sin, th run away, or from Si'ix, (. R u l £ XLVI. Of Ti'iSu, tlSiu, and ttSn/xt. J. EiSa makes tUofM» and tlSov, ^nd fometimes omits t: 2. The Attics change the aorifl í¡trc¿/*riv into hurcífAtiv'. 3. The perfect middle is ofSai but oTia? forms alfo elSxa^x, eT(r6x. 4« From $]Sri<7u, 'iíSwx, ílSvxciv, comes sTí«, tíSuv, xSau» And from ííS^ifAtVi'vSiÍTí, ^Selaw, comes ^¡jixi ; ad aor. t'^Sor, But it frequently drops the e, ïtfoftou, »ío» ; which itobferves likewife in the other moods : ISotfii, '¿Ss, iSetri putt. ¡Sût. 2. The Inv£ßigation of the Eherne, 283 2. The iftaor. mid. êlfim*, and adding 1, Att. iwánwf. J. The perf. mid. diiu, oJizf, JEol. o(Set9-Í», andfync. We have already talen natke, that thit addition 6^ theßllable 6ctJa the perfont terminated in a, is very common, as sKsùei, is, or ibis ; Strdtt, eras j'««fvo-e«, aderas, «r adfuifli, interfoifti; tardai di¬ cebas, or dixifti ; imitvcrÚa, eraperís ; mhaheet biberis ; ^udÚoip er yí^^ot, But uftMr, er, without the augment, o^tXon, it often explained lyan aduerh, utinam ego ; ¿¡ç>c\s(, or utinam tu ; ¿¡ftPa, er oft^, utinam iile ; or, in a better manner, by the verb debeo, utinam debuiflenf, tsfr. Of vohicb we fiall fpeak more particularly in the eighth book. • From içyda is alfo formed likewife ô^y^aiu), and ôfXi^ Tiítu, to run in debt, to be fined. 2. to throw, to fend, to firike, forms,from itfelf the ad aor. mid. iSaKi¡in', zd fut. ßaXH, whence, according to the firft rule, Ihould be formed eSaXo,, froth whence the fut. ßxT^^a-a in Arifioph. But there is another formed by fync. ßxca (for ßa^iä) whence comes the perf. pafl*. ift fut. ftui, ift aor. iSPiiBvr, whence comes the part. ßf^n^tU, iäus, and by fync. /SaeIj. From ßxia is alfo formed whence the zd aor. of the optat. tpid. ßMi^ny, ß\tio, J wißt thou hadfi been firuck, \ R uY e L. Of MtXw. , I. Mixta forms t Att. ¿x» » '">* no really % from whence comes UTE, ¿¿'s,, ñeque, neither, and éhí¡jía(, by no means. To forbid; (do, no, not', whence comes r-vst and ¡».tíSí, and imiapwe, not at allí To grant ; iTir, tltt Ji, well, be it fo, fuppofing it fo. Sec. To interrogate,, either in regard to place; wsfli, «5, «Î, B, ubi, where?' wôÔeit, é'ôir, unde, from whence? ntóoi, quö, whither ? w?, qua, which wey ?' Or time ; món, and wqrixa, when^ Or quantity; how much? aroffúxtc, how'oftenf wo- if how many different weys ? weawx?» in how many fiapet ? Or quality ; mue, how ?' torrt^uf, in what manner ? • 4. Relation, as thofe which denote comparifon : f^aXAs», more ; qtt»r, lefs. Reiêmblance; ¿í, as, in the manner as, as if \ memç, in the , fame manner as ; xa9à, xetéaore^, Horuf, Sec. jufi as ; urv; and ¿70, jufi fo ; 0ÎI!, fo, thus. Sec, Order; sir«, afterwards, next} í|i5,í, and Ipnlîî» henceforward. AiTem- ' Of Aíharhs* 287 Aflemblage ; ttgethtTf ¡at tie fmt tme\ •Si*S, jointly^ alon with i avXKíiShítf inavowdt in fl>ort, . Separation.; atwt witboutt exeeft} fiptratelyi except, unleft. To which we may add ibme others* as thole that exprefs the caufe, (MX«* becau/e, by reafon of',ot conjeûore, tauç, rix*» /""" ebaaee i rvx'h perhaps ; and futb like» InterjeSiions. The Greeks include the inteijeâions among the adverbs ; as To call, a. Si to mock, Í» ; to rejoice, IS ; to laugh, à, », ha, ba ; to difcourage, a, » ; to congratulate* tlyi ; to admire* S, Cpiv, ßaSai, aran»), papa! To exprefs grief, «<, ii, %a, in, bei, ben, eben, ^ Indignation, in, S, ben. Menacing, èai, <0(e. And fome others* which may be learnt by praâice. ANNOTATION. The fame adverb or intetjeâion may be ufed ift different ligniffcations, becanfe they exprefs only the term or manner of the aflion, independently of the fubjed. Thus adverbs of place are frequently taken for thofe of time, or via verja, as ¿rwdo, i juferiiri ¡eco, ot tempere, or even demio, again, anew ; fvSx, ibi, turn, CO tempore, then, at that time. Some become adverbs of quality, as «vü ; which way, how, in what manner f Some are applied to feveral diff^nces of time or place ; as el, ubi, and que, where, or whither ? el.hn q>ó€oc, Pfal. ubi non erat timor, where there wat no oteaßon of'being afraid i « Shíma, Plut, quo refpicerti évSáie, or êrreûlba, hie and hue ; ixit, ii/ic and U/ue ; ¿xXaxS, a/ibi and aSo ; erayrap^S, omnibus in locis, and in omnes locos, every where i Wfásfle*, ab anteriori parte, in anteriori parte, and in anteriorem partem i wñ, qua, ubi, and quoi and in like manner I and Stnt 'ill, an adverb of refemblance, from whence ut is derived, may be ufed com¬ paratively, and li'gnify, juß as, as if i may be relative to time, and fignify, after that ; may likewife ftand for at, fo much, very, exceedingly, tec. as ¿j rcixtfa, quam celerrime, exceeding quick, &c. See the remarks. Book IX. It is alfo obfervable, that the Greeks frequently make ufe of adverbs, where the Latins put prepofitions, as without ; inrit, except ¡ fctra^v, between, among ¡ £yx, upon, tcc, , ' IT. Accidents. The accidental properties of adverbs are, their derivation and comparifon. Derivation is fo very peculiar to adverbs, that there are hardly any other but derivatives. There are however fome few primitives, as ,S,, nunc, «0-ZV .' humi, 9» the ground s heti, yef- terday. See. The derivatives are talfen from'almoil all the other parts of fpeech, and efpecially from nouns, as the following examples will make appear. The 288 Book VI. Of Indecunable Particles." The local adverbs denote the diverfity of place, according td the difference of their terminations : thus, thofe in o6>, o>, ßg' oOcy, the place or the nify the place from whence one place whither where one it. fett ota. As from a city Meya^ofitjOrMf- Mtyctçiùetf to ef Greece. • ya^oT, to be at come from Me- Megara. gara. Ov^atoí, Cœ- ev^anÚt, to be in ovganítr, tocome lum, heaven. heaven. from heaven. Olxoi, domus, a houfe. oíxóSt, or «txo>, otKoOtp, to come to be at home. from home. **4'»?» nltitudo, v4'»6»» and in ¿iJ^óBer, from a- heighth. Ifom. ¿i]/», and hove. 24"» by fync. to be above. AvToí,ípCe,htm- airó6t,ibi,there.. avTÓÍtv, inde, from thence. Ixt~, illic, it. where he it. ■ f'lf' £K9;,llle, htt 'Oftoç for «ùtoç, rVrm.inHefych. • the fame plate. ixttôtp, illinc, from where he it. ¡¡AM, together, in ô/xô6e», from the one goet. Mtyá^etíi, to go to Megara. ov^apoth, or »• Ç»p6(rt, ■ to go to heaven. oIxópSí, poetic, o'xaitE,in profe, to go home. ¿4'»ví, to go up. uvróoe, eo, thi¬ ther. ixiia-e, illb> to where he is. to the' fame place, fame place. TlZç, apToí, all. ooàpToit, or ra- comx^^óOEv.un- tsapTx^óa-e, ther nrupTCíx^p dequaqae,yre»s qnoqaoverfus, ubique, every- all parte. towards every where. fide. Adverbs derived from prepofitions have but the fame termina¬ tion to Cxprefs the place where one is, and the place where one goes to ; as From ¿v», apo, apu6ip, fupra and furfum, è fupernis. above. from above, xarci, xura, xáru^ip, infra or deorfum, ab inferis, below. from below. The proper names of towns, that follow the feminine article, form their adverbs in no-i or acri (which are properly ablatives, as we have already obferved) with the point under, or without it, in z6ip, or a9ep, and ,in a^s ; as 'AÛîlyai, Athenae, Athens. Olympia. 'A6W»)<7Í, 'Aflímfle», 'AÚxpa^s, to he at Athens, from Athens. ■ to go to Athens. *OXwftwía,«, ubi, «9», unde, uh^ hoc, hie, •where. from njahence, here, hither. '2{, qui» oT, quo, uhi. ' bometimes the adverbs form thefe derivations from themfelves : X«/*é9eir, OU the ground. from the ground. to the ground. The adverbs of quality in 0« come from the genitive plural in at ; as from o'ofof, nnife} trapZt, profe •with violence, from violent. Adverbs are formed alio from verbs ; as iiZt and ipegüe, fuccef- Jively, in order, from cxo/ki», to have ; future I'lo/xnu : 'lía, lo, be¬ hold, from tiíéu, to fee : (whence comes the Latin enj from iith, infpice, fee. Such alfo are thofe terminated in ^nt ; as avMjßinit, comprehenßm^ from o'v>AaiJiSávu, comprehendo. x^vSStit, fecretly, from x^vdla, to hide. ¿^irdyStit, rapidly, from í^á^a, to /natch. X^ht, abundantly, from x«"» *" Likewife in r> ; as 'jEiiAijrts-», in Greek ; /«fiaïrî, in Latin ; iÇçaVs-}, in Hebrew', from . fa¡juti^a, íCg«/§¡,,, &C. But there are fome that may be IndiiFerently derived from a noun, or from a verb ; as x**?'?» feparately, from x"?»«» t place ; or from x'^i'^^t*ai, to feparate. Even fome verbs are taken adverbially ; as íyiti, age, agite: tpíqc, fuppofe, for example : 'Ä, come on, courage ; which are the im¬ peratives of iya, tpiga, andrljur, to go. In like manner ope^ot; eç, t, utinam debuiffem, es, et ; or ó fi debuijfem, es, et. See Book VIH. Adverbs are alfo fuiceptible of comparifon, though not all,, but feveral. U : When 290 Book VI. Of Indeclinablb partictes. When the adverb of the pofitive degree comes from a genitive plural in at, the comparative adverb proceeds likewife fi-om the . genitive of the comparative, and the fuperlative from the genitive of the fuperlative, changing » into o- ; as From wi/i ; vo^àrtçof, ; comes ir¿ tives is formed, we ufe adverbially the neuter of the comparative and fuperlative, as well as the aborve mentioned heuter of the pofi¬ tive, both in the lingular and in the plural. Thus we fay rxxp, rxx^Ti^tt, T(»;£»r«, celeriter, celerius, ctUrrimt ; likewife txx^t, ' inllead of which we fay alfo ^xxvnt, Att. hxtrot.- We likewife fay iL, bene ; ßi^rur, melius ; ßiXnr», »ptimi, ^o^v and much ; te^iat and mJJat, more ; -wXtTror, .t^x^ ,«» exceffive deal. * The neuter of thefe adverbs afliimes fometimes an article ; as r¿ w^ÙTot, rx « Att« Ivf« cum, witb. And twelve diflyllables« viz. 1. «^(, Ion. de, circum, citra, pro, propter, tf, about, m tbiifide, for, becaufe. 2. it», per, in, advcrfus, through, agmnfitfeparately. 3. &rri, pro, (i. e. vice) propter, for, infiead, becauft. 4. àori, a, ab, ex, de, from,'face. 5. St», propter, per, in, becaufe, for, through, among. 6. ini, fuper, de, in, propter, ad, coram, verfus, prater, tee., upon, of, concerning, in, for, becaufe, before, towards, befides, be* yond. Sec, , 7. n»rà, de, è, ex, in, adverfus, contra, fecnndum, per, pro« tec. of, concerning, into, againf, according, infiead, through, for. 8. lur», cum, poft, in, inter, with, after, in, among. 9.' m»^», à, ex, apod, contra, prope, juxta, per, inter, ultra, pra, &c. from, with, oppojite, near, next, according, by, among, be¬ yond, See. 10. de, pro, propter, circa, circnm, in, erga, concern- ing, for, becaufe, about, towards. Sec, < 11. iule, fuper, pra, propter, fupra, ultra, above, upon, infiead, for, becaufe, beyond. 12. ¿«0« fab, ab, under, by. Sec. II. The infeparable prepofitions are twelve, viz. », »^, &<« ßf, ßS, S», Sic, Ç», ),», Â(, >1, (X. And ¡¡» is fometimes nfed (ot h» i as ^Co^sf for StáSoSiOí, diabolos, calnmniator, devil, fiattderer* , i II. Of the Force of Prepoßtions in Compoßtion. The bufinefs of prepofitions is to communicate their force to the words which they compofe. R U L E I. ' Of Inief)arable Prepoíition?. 1. ^be following eight, í^i, ßn, d«, A«, aI, ßgT, are augmentative in compoßtion. U 2 2. Ave 292 Book VI. 0/ Indeclinablï Particles. 2. Aùf denotes dißcuUy or trouble : 3. Ni and expreß privation : 4. But »ij fometimes augments i 5. A" ßgnißes privation^ coUeSiión^ and increaß of force. Examples. 1. The following prepofitions augment : ; as mery bitter : meß ittußrtoui. It is commonly derived from te fit, to be eonvetiient, ot from Mars, the God ef luar. cgi : i^íS^e/xoí, to roar excejßvely, from tg¿a, to love, or from WEfi, towards. 05 : 0aX»ftiáíii, to be very hungry, from 03(, an ox, becaufe of its bignefs. And for the fame reafon we make ufe alfo of ¡Woj; as ♦Tsroyiiííjitw», ene ef an elevatedgemus, taken from "irwoi, a horfe. ioL ; ia^oiEoç, all bloody, from iarù, denfus, thick. : fàésoç, meß divine, admirable, from Çta, to be hot. xà: Xm^t«»)!, " pelvis, a great bafen, from xà, valde, greatly, and ya'iia, hifco, to be open, becaufe of its widenefs ; xàÇfoç, a glutton, from xi and devourer. It comes from >«,10,, to fee^ to deßre, to enjty. x>: Xiá^c», agito, quaß, valdè ago, to agitate, to torment, from Xiixv, valdè. : ß^tvscvof, án epithet of Mars, clamorous, heard from afar. 2. Av; expreíTes always fome trouble or difEculty, or misfor¬ tune ; itçxoXoç, difficult, morefe : ^vi;rv)(iia, to be unhappy. The reverfe of which is sJ; as ctixoXo;, eafy, good-humoured', zlyx)yy- pattioiif from xs\ie6o(, the road* ^ ' But fometimes it makes nö alteration at all in the íigniñcation ; as £r«x''f' rax^f' fpica, aa ear of torn* rR U L £ II. The Force of Separable Prepofitions in Compofition« 1. ^hefe fivSf xar«, arri, íicí, zrapä^ citbcT aug¬ menta or change the ßgnification of the ßmple : 2. ^hefefivey tlç, My to laugh at : itavtrS, to dijbeliéve, KATA\ xaria^lu, to devour : xaraf^opía, to defpife, nAPA\ wa^ty&iiO^y to throw a a law-breaker, great way: 2. There are five which only augment the fignification. > '£!£, tUaxia, exaudio, to hear plainly,^ , *££, i^irctixcci, to be abfent from one*s felf, IIEPf, «rrçixaXX«;, pervenuftos, extremely handfome, ETV, o-vMXTtX^;, plané perficio, to fniß completely. 'YIIE^P, ivs^ixaUofMu, nimis ii^anio, to be flark mad. 3. There is one, which fometimes augments, and fometimes ditniniihes, viz. Ilçàt, «rçoçwào-pj;«, to be Very much affeSed', wçoçàirrof«»», to totuh fligbtly. ; 4. Another, that changes and diminiihes, viz. Mst¿, lAtraÇsXivitp, to. change defign ; ¡».craneT», to repent ; Sei», to diffuade ; líirayyí^tw, elutriare, to pour out of one vejfel into another. And another which diminilheth only. Tiro, ¿iroÍEÍíii, fubveiftor, to befomewhat afraid. .-ANNOTATION, * It fs very common to fee two or three prepofitions together in the fame word; as from Xcr,fu, fto, to ßand, comes iyiçrtfu, to raift, to excite •, iontviçn/iu, to rai/e "py to ßir up, Sec, ¡'ofii, mitto, ta fend ; to go out, to go awoj, to put out ^ vtafe^lnf^t, to go furtber, to fetid further j «VTiVajEji'of«, to furfue, to oppofe, ■ ' O 3 to 294 Book VI. Indeclinable Particles. t> mea ; irrnr¡aMre*>aiiAím, to tntUifate, to prevent % ¿moemf^¿yv, to' lead an army againß. There are likewife feme inftances among the Latins, fui- ebjeurus, fubahfurdus, Cic. «. de Orat. and ftich ethers. But k will net be amifs to ^ve here a larger lift of the figmftcation of thefe ptepofitions. . ' I,iß pf tht PrepoßtipHt, nubtrtim is given a mere exftttßvt Fievs nf their. Force in Compoßtion. * Amn ft is frequently explained by eircum, or by the old Latin prepo- lition am, which has been recMved even in the French language ; it often ez- preiTeth doubt or ambiguity, as will ap¬ pear in the following examples. *A^u>€«Xo;, ambiguous, doubtful, con¬ troverted', undetermined, unrefolved. 'Aft^iiOf, ampbiiiout, living Jome- times in the neater,, and Jomelimes on land, 'Afcfiiit^éoi, to doubt, to bold a tbing as probable. Afcftkro), to embrace, to noarm, to be occupied, to prepare, to take care. It comes from iota, operor, to do, to a^. 'Afepmtiçgipti, circumverto, to turn about. to difpute, to debate, to doubt. A¡*^of**(, double-mouthed} deceitfuf, treacherous. 'ana', 1. fgniñes repetition, being equivalent to the infeparable re of the Latins ; as 'AtaßiiXai, retardo, to delay. 'AveXa/uCaMti, refmno, to rejume. 2. It exprelTetb beighth or elevation in the fame manner as èeto>, fur/uns ; thus à'ja,ridn(tt, {»(pendo,-lo bang up. 'Amßaivce, afcendo, to afcend. 'Asaßtia^ee, to make ajeend, to put on, 'Ataßkbaet, to look up, or to look again. 'anti'. Implies, t. oppoftion j' as 'Avná{a, to rejtfi, to hinder, to Juc- etur. 'A-mßalm, to refß, to refuje, to bin¬ der. 'ArriKayyitsa, to fue one in their turn, to appeal from judgment, to have one's eauje reviewed. 'AnCKiyeä, to contradilf, to difpute, to alledge contrary reafons, to reply. 2. Equality Í as when Homer calls UlylTes ¿ïTÎêsw, equal to Cod, like unto God. ^ 3. Some fort of duty, or return ; as *AvT(h'S';, reciprocal love. 4. Cömparifonj as 'Arrifjooro;, equal, of equal value, or weight. It comes from ^etrv, which lignifies the turn of the fcaies. 'ATUf, properly fignifeth the place from whence one parteth, or is dif- tans, like a, or ab, or de of the tins : and therefore includes firft a tstn gation or fcparation ; as 'Avópnpu, nego, J deny. 'Avayoftiio, to forbid, to hinder, to refufe, to defpond, to fail. 'AsreXysw, didoleo, triftitiam depono, to begin to be comforted, to give over grieving. 'Áwofíoitst, difplicet mihi, it is difa- greeable to me. 'Aitsgyofuu, abeo, to be gone, to die, to run away. 'Amptaydiyie, dedifco, to unlearn. 'Avo^áa, parce ac tenuiter vivo, to live fparingly. 'AwsîiwrtXX», to divide, to go from, to repulfe, to feparate. 'Aotrpniouia, to difavow, to rejefi, to repel, to repudiate ; to forbid, to refufe ; to abfolve, to dijmifs, to difcharge ) to defpair, to enped no more good of a thing. 2. It includeth a force of augment, ing, which often correfponds with the intro or inter, or de of the Latins } as 'Amßiorlv, intingo, immergo, to dip, • to plunge,' to wet. ' ^Avcßii^oftm, to ufe violence, to repulfe, to conßrain, to take great care. 'Aottbsumie, demonftro, to demonßrate, to prove, to reprefent, to exprefs, to de¬ clare, to deßgn, to eßablijh, A1A\ anl'wers f rft to the infepara. ble di or dis of the Latins ; as Autt^to-iç, divjlio, divißon. Aiafokñ, diftinñio, dißinSion. tua&oio), to divulge, to proclaim. AMXfú«), to difcern, to difiinguijh, to feparatCf Of Prep^tiùns, 295 ftparate, tt üfperje, t» «mmm«, u Judge, Ußaifr, ttaíjolve. t» tttie ftparateh, to Jeparate, to dißiuguißt, to interpye, to interrupt, to bin£r j to embrace, to of- fembk, to counts i to govern ¡ to eon- ceive, tt examine, to take counfel, to be of opinion, toefioU^. AiaXÓjñfoae, todifcourfe, to confer to¬ gether-, from whence comes a dialogue i h&Kvcrtc, a dialeS, or pecu¬ liarity of language i haMerucèt dialeSic, the art of reafoning, or difcourfng. 2« It figniñes the bme es trans or. per ; for inftance, \Ato(S.v, pervidere»*)« penetrate, to fee through, Lutßainn, tranfire, to paft through, to go beyond. ^uißiKKv, to traverfe, to pafs or pierce through i and Metaphorically, tojlander, to render odious ; to deceive, to accufe ; from whence comes hißc^-ot, diabolus, a fanderer, an accufer, ^laiHotfu, to divulge, to difiribute, to give, to fpread from one to the other, to difperfe. . ■ AteXXaTTw, to change, to pafs, to dif¬ fer, to make up a difference, to appoint, to reconcile, Mummtet, to work, to perfeS, to culti¬ vate, to exercife, to apply, to fuffer, to be in trouble. , to pervert, to invert, to intimidate, to corrupt, to falfify. 'EIZ, Att. ic, denotes motion. to introduce, to affemhle. 'EtraputÁM), to come, to approach, U retire, EhBIMim, to attack, to fall upon, to make incurßons, to ^ommit boflilitiet, *EN imports the fiate and difpofition, the abode and ßtuation ; babitum and fitum, fays Vergaraj correfponding to the Latin ie. 'EnerXe;, armatus, armed, 'Eyxtirui, incumbit, it threatens us, it preffes us, it it near, it is imminent, 'E/xftmt, permanet, be perffls, he continues firm, 'E3, before a vowel, or Ix before a confonaot. 'E^ifyogeúoi, to declare publickly, to re¬ late, to tell or recite at length, 'Ellf, anfwers to the Latin fuper, always lignifying fome addition or in- creafe, 'EmrHn/M, impono, r« Êtpofe, to add, to put the finijhing hand, to conclude, 'Evißaim, confcendo, to mount, to go, to walk, 'Enútinoi, whatfoever caufcib an ad- ' ditítnai fain or nffUSion, from fain. • Sometimes it diminilheth. 'EvbMntoc, albicans, wbitiß, drawing towards white, ' 'EvvutXei, blackifi. ' KATA\ 1. augments the lignification. UvtmpogtUsít, przgravare, tt weigh beany, tofrefs downwards, ' z. It gives it a bad fenfe. KaTex^wiv, to condemn, fitsm tt^tet, to judgat Kare^epí^ojueí au, I condemn you, from to be of opinion, to give one's fuffrage. líaraj(¡¡ciiftíu, to abufe, to ufe >r«a free- fy, to give ill treatment, to infult one. It comes from vefitfuu, to ufe, 3. It fignibes below, juft in the Cime manner as «árw, infra. i KerefioÍMiv, to go down, to dejiend, to fit down again, from ßtum, to walk. META^, denotes firft a change, cor» relponding to the Latin trans. Mtrafugfio), to tranform, to transfi¬ gúrate. Ueraßaiw, to pafs further, to make et digreffon. , Wherefore it frequently changes the fignification of the fimple ; as MsTaSkiiteitai, dedoceo, to teach one the contrary of what he has already karnt^ as much as to fay, to make one fiep over to a new doSrine, Msreenos, to change opiniott, to repent, to do penance. l/ttre£u\üo/MU, to alter one's defign, to take a new refolution, to repent, ^ z. It fignifies a participation or com* munication, ' correfponding to inter, among, withi MtruiMieiim, particeps fio, I am made partaker.} as much as to fay, J take among, or with the refi. Hence the participle is called fxeroyti, becaufe it partaketh of the nature of the verb. IIAPA^, correfponds to the Latin prater, but fometimes it augments the fignification J as to be violent} vrafoffcio), to be extremely violent, topuß ■tkings to extremity. > napofibw, to irritate, to provoke. Sometimes it deftroys or changes it : wofavofxiu, to trefpafs againfi the laws ; whence comes vtuyiiniMc, a wicked fel¬ low, a law-breaker, noftioiír, to deceive, to fcduce, to im- fefe upon, > nafxxftaiila, an embaffy, or commif- fion not rightly difcbarged, or not rightly undertaken. U 4 H»(«- "296 Book VI. Of Indeclinable Particles. Hafoppm'y, tobfe »tie's ftnfet» t»rwe, ïlgo(a^asg£h6aif ta tait avoáy ßiU ta be mad. stmre. Sometimes it tnarjcs proximity or ïïfatsyyuSerQiu, ta aafwer fir, ta be refemblance, corresponding to the La- beundfir. tin ad : wapé^e/Aai, aflideo, Jßt nesets Sometimes it diroinilhes the Egnifi- Tlapträt, to be equal, to refemble. cation : mqttitrlofMt, leviter attingo, ta TIEFÍ, corresponds, I. to rirormí «tri- touch ßightly. ¡¡■péfiia, circumSerentia, circumference. 'xnz'P, fuper, denotes, i. excefs and circomdare, tofurround. addition. ns^ifftiTosrelsvetr, to lay ßege to, to 'Votiyjctrpa, unreafonable, beyond mear block up, fire. %. It anfwers to ^rr, and augments 'Xvigt'^nfst, to put an, ta put before, the iignification s to uje a to put over ca to prefer, to prolong, circumlocution I whence comes 'Tmpßeäm, to exceed, to paft be-. Sic, Horn, peritas, learned. , yond. , pergaudens, 'Toaqauoim^eo,'to dart further ^ imp- Tlt¡t\inrot, very fid, or affiiSed. • Svaot, very croft or troublefome. Jh^ylnrat «trávrair, fi furpaß'es, or h 2. Excellency > imqépfoi, to excel, above all the viorld. 'Tvsgev, exceeding vieil. nPO', l}ath almoft the fame force as Likewife advantage or perfedlion : the Latinox pro; vriocueSfJUu, prae- varigus^oc, revenger, defender. fero ; to prefer ; the porch. 'Xmpaomcic, proteSlor. Tlpekiyttt, prxdico, to foretell. ^ori(rs¡o;, fiperior, more ancient, more ^ Tlgucafjuu, to put before, to prefer, ta excellent, greater, preferable, eßablifi iaà ordain over others, to pre- ' *T*«T9ç, by Syncope for iifri{T«T«f,Ä- ßitute. \ preme, fovereign. It is generally taken Ilqo\afjiiim, to preoccupy, to prevent. for a confuí, orfirß magißrate. Sometimes it is reduplicated ; mpo- But Sometimes vxé¡ fignilies depth, otiataTaiyht, one viho throws himfelf juft as altus in Latin. forward (antrorfum) with violence, 3. It marks relation, in the fame Apoll. •tBfmpmukttiiii.tvoc, one who manner as pro or vice's iixtpfsix't^h throws himfelf at another's feet in a fip- pugno pro, to fgbt for. pliant pofiure. 'TIIO', Sub, under s veroríínfAi, to fup- nPO'2, corresponds to, the Latin ad, pofe, to eßablifh a principle, to give a or" infiper, and generally augments the pledge. iignification, denoting force, repetition, 'TmoKSirai, Subjacet, is under. ora particular afliduity: «r^icáyw, ad- 'TvmÚu, Subaudio, aufculto, obe- ^iico, to lead, to bring, tc approach, to offer, dio, to hear with fubmifpon, to obey, to II^ofTÍénfu, to propofé, to add, to com- be ready, pare, to put over. Oftentimes it diminilhes, juft as fub HgocriSeficu, the fame ; and, moreover, in Latin : úteS.^yv¡oc, Subargenteus, draw- - to follow the advice of feme body, to fa- ing towards filver, tbat partakes of the vour him, to give him your mote, to be nature of ßlver. (tttaçhed to him. ' 'TwoSóexoXo;, fomewhat diffeult, of Ptyofcboysa, in S. Dionyf. f» be at- a temper fomewhat troublefome. tacbcd to any thing, or to place one's 'Xvi)r>.ot^oc, fubpallidus, fomewhat heart and affeBion in it. pale, or palifh. ANNOTATION. 93« liß might ha've been carried on to a greater length ; hut as I percei'ved that this ivould lead me too far, and in fame meafure exceed the limits of a Grammar, tu here it fußcet h to lay dotun the general rules of each article, and to illuflrate them tuith a fetu examples ; I hatte therefore rrfer-ved the remainder for another tuork, tuhich may foon follo'iu this', Jhould the Public reap from it the benefit I intended. I fball endeavour alfo to give in our mother-tongue a fpecimen of the copi- oufnefs of the Greek, in the different explicatiotfs of its çhoicefi words, by a continual concatenation of etymclqgies. ' Of Of PrepüßHons'» igj Of the Change of thefe Prepoßtions in Compowids. Prepofitions are freqaently fnbjeâ to ibme change or alteration in compolition : which happens in two different manners. They lofe their vowel, when the verb commenceth with a vowel ; and if this vowel of the verb is marked with a rough breathing, the t and the v of the prepofition are changed into their afpirates d, and p ; as /« takt away, or to be taken away, from iofo and to take', which has been already explained. Book I. Chap. xi. of Apoftroph. We muff except and es^l, which retain their vowel ; aregiE- Xu, to contain, tofurround ; es^oiya, to produce, to advancf. But wçà, when it is followed by an t or an o, makes a contraflion in 8, according to the Attics ; as mç>éx into/x before ¡a into 7before X, y, X i ^ before X ; and ovu changes it into o or g before another o- or or fometimes drops it intirely before o- or as 'E/aSuí, arme, • Xu/uSúwi;, cotmerfathn. 'Euníúl», to fall into. IvfAwioita, to meet together. - 'EfAijá¡Of*at, to te carried into. to te carried together. living, animated, Ei/A^faixof,■unanimous, of the fame mind. 'Efoftim, to perfiß. ' EvfAfohm, to flay together. 'EyxaXvoPioi, to cover. ZvynaKíoéta, to cover. ^EyysiíAÍ\t>, to vsinter. 2vyxei/A0(o>, to nointer together. 'Eyy¡i^, to infcribe. ' Euyyfáfu, to write together. 'EXXa/uvw, to illuminate. 2»XXá/xgrÍa), to illuminate together. Iveovfw, to tear, to drag. Ev^vriv, to difcufs, to examine. . SvçtsMm, contraho, io hind up, to tie Evf^iotioe, to Jow together, to mend, to fafl, to fold one int^ another. patch. \ 'Asa, Kara, and vta^à, lofe alio their final a. among the Poets, and eliewhere, even before a confonant, and are upon that account liable to changes in their preceding confonant, that have fome relation to thofe above mentioned,: but the t of aar for Kara, when it precedes or xt niuft be changed into their fmooth corre- fpondents w or x ; when it precedes $, y, Í, or or, as alfo the liquids I*, "> ?f it mult be changed into the fame letters, as will appear by the following examples. *Arà, iyttXii«, iXXú»i for áyXúii>, to 'A/xSsXitjyî;, Hefycb. for isaßo\te(- refolve, to dijjilve, to undo ;. whence yoc, cunCtator, one that delays, or puts comes ¿XXúuí-a for àyaXiîair», diflolv- off. , ing ; iXXúss-xOT, Ion. for ¿ysXuoy, Od. a. 'ànir-ya, »yatr^ji«, fuffer. V. 150. J dijjilved. 'AraxttXiii, àyxa.'Ktu, to recal. *AvaTayvv, ¿yrayéa;, to dart upwards. This change is made alfo in nouns j 'Assyeyov, aAXtym, to make a cdKíH:oi¡, for though ¿vi governs its cafe, never- to cho'o/e. thelcfs it is frequently joined in one 'Asaßalsoir, i/jcßalson, mounting. word; dyi vreiiot, ¿femiúr, aerofs the 'AvaëaXXùfAtèa, »,xß«XXiii/xtÖa, let us field-, ¿vaía'yoxaí, »yîs'vaxac, among the defer, or prolong, re^ds ; ays ßeofAoT^, ¿lAßtifMii, upon the altars ¡ 298 Book VI. Q/" Indeclinable Particles. altan \ ¡oHl fiiiya, äft/tty», vety Big i Àvà ifi/^91, amidß tbtttuffatrti ifcviKayii fot àtàmihayot, Bf fea. Likewife, äiafxiyivt, ¿fafuyUt, eoU' fufedlyi ávi9r,¡t(, i/enifet, UÚae, maim- td, íec, KATA^f xoToSvwv», KarSriaxe», to die ; xaréêan, xárSan, he is dead. Kar^aXt, xiCßaAi, he has overthrown. KxTc^timi?. MXXftirMVi to leave, to abandon. Tiatsmot, SL&vmn, to fall. Karaft^ttaa, tu^^ura, fattening, ca- reßng with the band, U. c. Henamtiresa», noatttvpTetaes, Theoc. eonceived in thefir A aaraiiitM, naiivnu, to''^ plunge in the water. Karáextffét, sti^toèi, retain. II. Kara)(eüaai, to pour out, KuTamiaat, namCaat, having made a fign. Karoft^ett, sut/oftl^aç, cotttiûieaa, having mingled. - . KaraxtUrrtt, natat^omt, lying down to fieep. Karafivet, itaft,fÀvee, tofittt, tofink with too much weight, to lean, or how down. With nouns : sutra nogupnr, KaxM¡u- plir, ex vertice, from the topi autí nn- Utr, nairmiiiy, from thefield. Kaftí/iiam, uofjífMroi, from the middle Katà ^¿*A¡et, siasepiAapi, per phale- ras, acroft the harnefs. Kar» foot, xaf/ow, along with the fiream. ' Kari Xavipn, tuXKetotáfnt, per ilia, through the fianks, tee. t¡APA\ vrafadifsoot, wa¿ééf*0n(, comparing i wagridii, wapnthiï, he com¬ pares. nafafainn, wapaitm, wiring, af- fijling, whence comes Parmeno, in Terence. The compoonds of a verb beginning with a ç, and of a prepo* lition ending with a vowel, repeat the ¿ in the middle, as inrtppv, to flovj upon. See fía. Book V. Chap. viii. CHAP. III. Of ConjunSitons or Connexions^ trúoíttrfAoi. COnjun£lions are either iignificative or expletive. The fignificative aré Conjunâives, o-fpcrAsxrixol : xat, and n, yue, 8cc. Disjunctives, íix^suxlixoi : », out, and its compounds qret, *4/»»» five. ConceiHves, fivoBtrtxct : xas, x«ícrs¿, etíi, although, Adverfatives, itoLrnufcetrtxo) ; ^è, vero, but, which anfwers to p.\t, quidem,/Wrr.f ; ¿xxà, fed, but} Ôpw;, tarnen, neverthelefi. Caufatives, txtTioXoyixot : ya.^, en im, for ; Tr«, ut, that ; oicat, quo, that ; t'vt^ and ivsl, fiquidem, fince; whence comes irrtiih, liquidem, quandoquidem, whereas. Conclulives, cvXXoyiriKo. : Sr, igitur, ergo,/¿rrç/ôrr ; tshocs^, quapropter, wherefore ; likewife roisvt, rayúgros, rotyagSs, igitur, therefore. Conditionals, e!, às,fi; whence comes làr, and by contradion w, and fuch like. The expletive, wXujiwpiaíTixoí, are thofe which fignify nothing in particular, but ferve only to embelliih and fill up the fentence ; as we^, To>, and among the poets /a, ^»s. See. See Book IX. Chapter of the Enclitics. rhi sedond Part of this Book. rJÏ75 Second Partßenut tbtftvtrtdmetbedst »fedby tbt Greeks in tbecompoßtion and derivation of tbeir nounst one great fonree of tbe copioufnefs of tbeir language' And tbh being joined to vohat voe bave faid relating to tbe derivation of verbs in tbe preceding bookf Chap. I. and II. will be of very great fervice to abofe who have a ntind to learn feveral words derived from the fame root. But as this fappofetb fome previous knowledge of the roots, without which tbe advautagei that might be derived from this treatife, as well at from " other methods founded thereon, would be very inconfiderable : vje fiall publijh very foon, God willing, A new and eajy Method of learning attd retaining the Greek Roots*, adapted to tender capcuities, and of more ufe than one would imagine, chap. iv. Of Derivative Nouns ; And firfi of tbofe that are derived from other Nouns. Nouns are derived from all parts of fpeech, except con- junfUons. .Hence it was improper to ipeak of their deriva» tion, before we had treated of all the parts of fpeech in particular. Thus from ■mí^voi, anno fuperiori, comes what it of the laß year: from íatú,yeßerday, comes heftemus, what is of yeßerday: from vot\g, fuper, upon, comes ¿'«-«tot, confuí, a ßrß maglßrate ; and fuch others. £at the mofi common derivation is made from nouns and verbs. From nouns, there are fix different forts of derivatives, i. Pa¬ tronymics. 2. Gentiles. 3. Fofleflives. 4. Diminutives. 5. Aug- mentatives. 6. Thofe that are particularly called denominatives. i. Fatronymics. Nouns of parentage or family, which the Greeks call patrony¬ mics, are thofe, which being taken for the name of-the father or grandfather, are given afterwards to all his defcendants. They are of two forts, mafculine and feminine. The masculines are terminated in AHZ, and come from ge¬ nitives in u and in p;. Wheii the genitive in u comes from a noun in of impure, the patronymic is in »¿ij; ; as rS Kgóm, Saturni, ofSaturn\ ô K^otíínf, Saturnios, belonging to Sgturn. When it comes from of pure, or from a noun in «f or in «if, the patronymic is in aim ; as rS AivsUt, i * This'work was tranflated a few years ago, and printed for J. Nourfe in the Strand. AEnece, 30O BOOK VI. ^nea ; ó Aín»h¡it ^neades : tS 'I^óth, Hippeta ; ô 'imrtráíiKf Hippotades : tS Adí^rn, Laerite j ó AatçriàSntt Laertiadet, by in- ferting ». From the genitiva in í; comes ; as r?; Artriof, Latonf, Ampfytrlouis i i 'Afii,pirçvariiiii(f and inferting a, 'Aft^trgvonainí' But the Ionics change ííat into íar ; as ô K^oním, S K^oyiay, Satur« nius, belonging to Saturn, The feminines arein «k, »i. A( and t; come from the mafculines in calling away ín; as i fon to Sol ; h 'f^Pnàç, daughter to Sel: ê fon of Priam j v daughter to Priam, Feminines in m come generally from a genitive in « ; tS 'OvAayu, Oeeani ; h 'nxtayiyyi, the daughter of the Ocean. And if n happens to be pure, then an a is inlerted, as rS 'Ax^yaUe, v 'Ax^tnáyn, daughter of Atrißm. But ¿yn comes fomecimes from iuy ; as ô 'He- TÍay, 71 'Hsriúytiy the daughter of Etion, Of all thefe nouns, thofe in uy are of the imparilyllabic declen* lion, and the reft of the parifyllabic. II. Gentiles, The national or gentile nouns of the masculine gender are commonly terminated in T>!{ ; as from í Tvágni, Sparta ; ô Svagriár»);, et Spartan : » "Hirstçoç, Epirus ; ô 'Ha-EtgwTJjç, an Epirote, eùof} as from aî 'AG^eau, Athens ; ô 'AGuraro;, an Athenian : i 'Pú¡í7i, Rome ; ¿ 'PufMuoc, a Roman, lo; ; as from q Babylon ; « BaSvi^yios, a Babylonian : ri Bf ^izcTto», Byzantium ; ô a Byzantine. IVÇI as from v 'AXi^átí^noí, Alexandria ; ô 'AAE|ac>l¿Ei>;, an Alex¬ andrian : TO Xiyioy, a promontoty near to Athens ; ô r«»»evs, one who lives near that promontory. There are likewife fome foreign terminations, adopted by the Greeks; as ÎVoç; To'Píyto», Reggio, a town in Italyi ô Pijymç, one of Reggie, . ivoç: as ^ Ní(ri¿i(, Nißbis, a city on the River Tigris-, ¿ Nt<7»C)!>«{E a citizen of Nißbis: ñ 'tx^áraya, Ecbatana, a city of Media ; S 'E*- £«Tav9i»o{, an inhabitant of Ecbatana. Some have a double termination ; as q 'AfiMOi'ut, a town of Pontus : ô A¡Á.cíc-tvf, and A¡i.aotínni : h the iße of Délos ; í AiAtoç, and A>íAítí){. The Feminines are frequently terminated in o-a; as ^ K^aox, a woman of Crete, from Kjír», the iße of Crete or Candia in the Me¬ diterranean fea. See Book II. Chap. ix. Oftentimes they conform to the common rule of adje£lives ; as « A6r,yaToi, an Athenian, ú 'Aétiyecío; an Athenian woman ; and fç- veral others. Sometimes they are formed after the manner of patronymics; as ô Eiy»£¿{, i Tiyeiaç, a male or female inhabitant of the town of Sigeum: i It«Xoç, an- Italian, ¿"iraX»?, an Italian woman. Some are formed without any fort of analogy ; as I a Trojan, or Tros, the founder of Troy : i 'o^uo-da^, a city of Maßa, > or Nouns derhed from other Nouns. 301 W tf Ihtria. 6r the citizens of the fame flace. Whère we fee there is no change of gender, which is changed neverthelefs in others ; as at Xlccaaa^áíeu, à tomen of Perfia ; oi Tlecacrecçyàixt, the inhabi¬ tants of that country. III. Pojfeßves. Poífeflives are derived both from proper, and'from appellative nouns ; and fometimes they end in £02 or in 102. t, Am- phiareus ; ô taxillus, a fmf 11 die, from ¿rçœyoXoç, talus, a die. «1 ; as ô . a little buffoon, from a buffoon. v| ; as 4 cmriKuy^, a little cave, from ro omifMior, fpelunca, a cave or cavern., > u i zs il xe^iù, vulpécula, from it xt^aàiiv, vulpes, a fox. Some have an equal number of fyllables with their primitives : as in i; : q ancillula, from v ancilla, a fervant maid: xjq»»;, fonticulus, from xçiitq, fons, a fountain. «I : D Xi8a|, a pebble, from ô Xi9o(, a flone. lyf : Í Çyvtyl, veflcula, from q çiox, vélica, a bladder. Some have more fyllables than their primitives ; whereof fome >are , Mafcttlines terminated in Oí : yaurí^oí, from yxvrvi, a mariner, toxoi : ô áyS^avícrxoí, homuccio, a little man, from »yú^unof, homo. iXOf s ô éVcrip^oç, quantulus, how fmall, from ôVoç, poet, i'iro-oç, fuantus ; miffig^i, reddifle, a little red, from lovèfoi, red, ¡Xyi ' » xvX(^i>o;, calicuIuSI a fmall cup, from à xúM^, calix. vfiií, or vxxlç : q ¿TçaxTtiXiç, Or -vXXiç, a fort of thorn, from 5 «T^axToî, a diflaff, becaufe the ancients were ufed to make it of thofe thorns. vXo; : 302 ' B o o ¿ VI. «xo$ ! S fiittniKau ßttoßt dîmmttivtt from the Doric nonn • fUK<* K«{, for parvasv Hule, hvf : i a little Cupid, from i Cupitf^ or love, im : ó ¡iagím, a little fool, from » a fool, m'. it?í¿Soí, a bov), or hrauebi uxMt, a Jhtall iovt, or branch. Feminines ending in ' ' tM« : 4 TMÍttMM, Iznula, a fmall eoat, from h ímT»», a fort of coat, or gown. ^ toKn : h ¡Att^xKÍoxn, a young girl, and in the mafcnline ó fttifcf xioxof, a young lad, from ô xai v [cdçct^, ayoutb, a by, or girl: va*- bionri, a young girl, from veu(, a by. Or girl. »X"> ' n a fmall town, from ù wóX»í, a town, or city. ¿Kvn : ù vtSá-xini, a little barrel, from • ieí6o;. a barrel. «ca2;, or oí>3Íi : « tpvoa^U, a fmall bladder, from q ^oa, a blad¬ der. tixif : or : q ¿m¡onv>.U, a little rival, from ó ¿rrsgarvt, a rival.. Neuters terminated in lay, which have an acute fometimes on the penúltima, and fometimes on the antepenúltima ; as rà /3»6x>ay, a little book, from q a book : ro wiiiw, a low, or poor genius, ffom ó >3(, mens. Likewife rxcxn^ia», Glycerium, from y>,vKVf, àv\c\s,_^eet. ' But fometimes • is only the fubjunâive of a diphthong before oy ; as rà yvvccio», muliercula, a little woman, from yvm, a woman. Several in lay have the increafe of two fyllables ; as to xo^ínos, a little girl, from xagq, a girl : to watçiiiay, a little father, from ó vasTqç, a father : ro ßiS>.vi^tot, a little book, from q ßiS\oi, a beoki and many others. It frequently happeneth, that diíFerent forts of diminutives are formed from the fame noun ; as from xá^q, a girl, comes q xajíir* xq, TO xaçiay. To xo^iotoi, ro xo^íomoo, and to xa^i^ay ; and in like manner the reft. We find alfo examples hereof in Latin ; as from cißa, a box, Cometh cißula. Mart, cißella, Ter. and cißellula, Plaut. ANNO. TATION. We alfo meet with diminatives of proper names ; which, as they diminish the figoification, fo they frequently diminifli the number of fyUables. We may re> dace them to their diflferent terminations ; as^ I £ç : à ZnvSj, Zenas, from ó Znwíayjoí, Zenodonis s t Kaa-/ux;, Cofmus, from i K¿a-/xuf¡ moäeß: ( 0suî2;, Tbcndas, from á BfoHnot, Theodoßus, by changing »» into Ev, Ion. and au into su. Dor. à @oftS,ç, Thsnus, from à ^av/*áoio(, admirablt. : á 'rá$'a^, 'o little Rbodiatt, from à 'róhac, a Rhodian. t( : « 'liáyaira-a, according to the etymolog. Vf. i Atcifv;, according to Euftath. from aietvoice, Dionyfins, belonging to Bacchus. a> : i KM h Safftpiù, Sappho, from « Sapphira. Others have an equal number of fyllables with their primitives} as'foms in uXXcç ; à ©{ávuXXo?, Thrafyllus, from ó ©{«wxXäf, "Thraßcles. And others exceed the number of their primitives ; as fome mafculines in tKv; e à ZtaiXe;, Zoilus, from â (cvàc, Irving ; à XatjíXac, Cbeerilus, from y^as^a;} a hog. And if the X happens to be redoubled, the accent is drawn back} as • MfyiXXa;, Megillus, from ¡aiyaq, magnus, great, ^ 3 «5f! * ^ Noiins derived from otba^ Nounsl 305 tWc! { MSnty PMlitmty from i M fritnit i ' Cíarínut, from $ X^'f» f'" O' favtitr, ty»C s »'AfMirtxoiy Amynticui, from i 'Aftvtfraft ÄHfntat. uñí i 'H^irúni, Htfbteßhny from ó Vukan: i 'AtrltUy JEtiony from • ¿itíC) a» tagli' vX<; : iXf^vTut, Cbrtgylus, ftomiX^/tat, Cbrmat i SifitúAtf, Sim/hsy from i rifiùty camuu Some feminines in iXXa : % Iljá^iXXa, PnxîUa, from è fraCKee, aSUn» vXAa : n KTíévXXÓ, Cufylta, from i xtî»;/ acquißtitny ma : ^'Hjma, Erinna, from ri ff, ver, tbe fpring. iXv : ê MnrtxVf Mítica, from fjuirtc, prudence, couufel, et : i ^Ara^à), Anaxe, from è hedí, a ling ; h 9taw», ñeáno, from « i A, änay et goddeft. i/XAi; ! i 'A/jMçiKtîi, Amarylßs, from i ipiifa, a ditch or channel, And finally fome neuters in ^ ^ ttwHi ri SaMiu», Xantbidiuniy from i UeMfc, Xanthiat, a ßave, fo ealled,~ 1)ecsufe of his red hair. This is all that grammarians ob&rve in particular concerning diminutives ; though we muft take notice, that t^ie diminutive termination is not alwa)rs a mark of diminution; as from i Xí"^» gfldc from áfyvfttr Igyúí^r ßhtr t. from ntúfan, múfena, aßock t from riixf, rttxwr, a realU V. Augmentatives, As the diminutives generally denote fometbing foft and agree¬ able, fo the augmentatives generally import fomething contempti¬ ble in the perfon. Infomuch, that as the Latins called labrtmty thofe -that had great lips ; fihnes, thofe that had large eyebrows: in like manner the Greeks called them from xetAo;-, to;, tht lip ; 0Xífágaii»(, from ßXt^afor, the eyelid» Likewife from yráBot, the jaw, yrxQat, a great eater, tne that hat a large jam: hold, rafoi a /maggerer, a hullj: «Aa- Tvc, bread ; TlAcirur, Plato, fo called by reafon of his broad flioul- ders : wxStoî,' riches ; TlKÚrm, tbe god of bell, and-of riches. All thefe nouns are declined in «rs;. But we find others in »%, that augment the fignification, and mark at the fame time a fort of contempt ; as wXSro«, riches ; wx»» T«|, a rich fellom'x tioc, young i ña%, one that aSs the young fellom, that endeavours to cotueal his age : ro'ixot, a floic, of a particular feQ of philofophers ; rua|> one that a3s tbe floic : a great eater ; AàÇça,^,' a fea rnolf, from its voracioufnefs. Sometimes thofe of this termination are diminutives ; as woavi, a thicken ; vitrea^, a little chicken. See above. VI. Denominatives. Denominatives admit of various terminations, whereof the fol¬ lowing are the principal. \ For the mafcuUnes, HS: Ô oixfru;, verna, a bond flave, fromsoTxa;, a houfc, i fiirtii, a plebeian, from i ^i/coç, the people. OS : Ô cmsioiioe, fludious, .careful, from 5 aosuin, cart, applica¬ tion. • « «r«iiTo~oç, of every form, or fajhion, from ri «»», all. ' Ô h^inoc, heavenly, from £ heaven, inmnli, belonging to a horft, from £ 'otosou é rw 304 BOOK VI. ■ ô í-u/tvXtu a great talÂer, from ri ré/*«, tJie mmh j where we £nd aUb an 0 for an 0. ô fertile, from 0 xa^o;, ^ruit, « ¿Xi)6»»o<, true, from 5 xa» x ôAuÔjjç, true. , I ¿»fljîçèç, jferrV, from to á»6oí, a fewer. ^ OT'ZIOX : Ô ix3ir»o{, voluntary, from ô Ix«», willing. Ô vTukrmt daily coming, never failing, from ô vebicb is to come. Eir : ô »gi^teable, from 5 X'^ê'î» ®' favour. i ¿¡Mc6Sctc, fandy, from h fmtd. íi^ ; ó ¿tfívsfMt, vinea, a vineyard, from n íynsiXo;, a vine tree. Likewife ¿ íafyár, a place planted voitb laurel trees, from ^á^m, a laurel tree ¡ o ¡Xaiúy, a place planted voitb olive trees, from ^ lAœ~a, an olive tree ; ¿ oUl», a voine cellar, from ô óítof, wine. ' O'AHZ : ó xoii h íiiBúirií, foty, or made of flones, from xido(, a fonei ô x«< » ra^axái'Oi, turbulent, violent, from n Ta^x)¿¡, a tumult. AN, in fome few ; as ¿ Itoc, a companion ; ô Irài', from whence comes the vocat. u rít, ô amice, O my friend: ô /«cvrof, vety big, u ¡ityiriv, whence comes mgiflanes in Latin, the great, tbe power¬ ful. There are fome that take divers terminations ; as from n fand, comes ô xui ri ifoobaiiic and ¿/ixOin;, fandy. For the Feminines, THZ : h xocxÓTiir, malice, iniquity, from ó xoixo;, wicked, malicious', i rxxÚTKf, fwiftnefs, readinefs, from i rxy^oc, fwift, quick. EIA ; h íva-íSttx, piety, from ô xa» i evaeShí, pious: ¿ ha-wortl», lordjbip, fovereignty, from ô ¿straroTJjí, lord, maßer. lA : i lirvxiu, felicity, good luck, from ó xa» i evruxv;, happy. Hereto we may refer thofe in o»a from adjeâives in nc ; as iljtoix, benevolence, good-will, from ó tSmc, well-affeQed: v hif- fotx, a loojene/s, from hápfuí, taken from ítappéa, to flow, to run. YNH: i ítxa»oa¿»5!» juflice, îiQici i'txxtof, juf ; it autp^uavtri, tern- peratue, wijdom, modefiy, from % aú^^ut, temperate, wife, modefl. To thefe we may likewife add the feminines in r»;, r|»{, and ,T$»a, derived from the mafculines in rnc, which have been already mentioned. Book II. Chap. ix. WTWTWWW VVTWVVT ♦ WTW C H À P. V. Of Derivatives from Verbs. Besides the participles, there are a vaft number of nouns derived from verbs, whether adjeilives or fubllantives, which in general are called Verbals, whereof fome follow the a£live fig- nif cation, and others the palTive. Thefe nouns are always formed from a lingular perfon, rejeA- ing the augment, if there happens to be any, and changing the termi- îfottni derived frop Verbs. .305 tenniaation ; and they are formed in 'die aâiye> paffive, and middle voice. I. From the ABtve. ' The aôire is formed from the prefent, and from the fecond aorill, and fometimes frOm the perfefl, and the firft aorift. From the presikt come the feminines in H or in EIA, of the parifyllabic declenfion, which generally denote Ibnie aäion or power ; as q tixti, viffory, from To »vercomt ; q Xq6q» tblivion, from Aqß«, to he hid\ reign, regal power, froxa. ßetaifuiu, to reign ; ¿tsAtí«, /ervitude, from ibKtia, fervio, to fer-ve, to he a fleme. To thefe we may join the feminine imparifyllabtcs in I£, and the lieuters in 0£, which are alfo derived from a prefent middle ; as q tax, power, from ivtaiAxt, to hé able ; to eTji)«! to;, form, appearance, from lïi«, to fee ; yito^, toç, race, kind, from yttofccti, gignor, to he hern, to he produced- ^ And the adjeâives in h2 : ô xoù q avnp(ti(, •«<, continual, from vvH)(a, contineo, conneâo, to join and put together. From the second aorist are derived the pa)-ifyllal)ic featx- nines in H or in £A ; as ^e¿^, lot, frön XajaeTt, to obtain ly lot i q iií», form, idea, from Ihîr, to fee. And the impErifyllabic neucers in 0$: To «ràfioç, pafßon, from mecOtTt, to fufferi to 'KÍ-gfx, to;, lot, from the aorift to acquire ly lot. And the adjeâives in HS ; as ó xxl q íXAiq-q;, »cd ri iXAtsri;, itßitute, abandoned, from to fail. From the perpect we may remark doSrine, fcienee, inflruSion, from Mxaxa, ^a, StHíxx», to teach ; ' rx^xyj, trouble, difiurhance, from rx^xaa-a, |ió, rt^x^xx», to trouble ; ipii, contaS, from ¿sr1oi, s]/"» to touch, inftead of which is rather ufed xtrloftxf. From the pirst aorist, íó|á, glory, opinion, from Soxia, ^a, tià^x, to beliebe, to think, to feem ; Sqxq, theca, a cafe, from tdn- XX, the 1 ft aorift of riOqjui, to put. II. From the Poßve. The paffive forms them from the firft, fecond, and third per* fon íingular of the preterperfeâ. From the first person they are formed in MA, MH, MOSj and MHN ; fp that n continues always to be the charaâeriftic. Thofe in MA are neuters and imparifyllabics ; to mçxyixx, xrot, aûien, thing, bußnefs, negotium, from mtn^ayfixt, I have done i rl (pxa-f/M, ntißon, from reifuaiAxt, Ate. for «¡¿(fx^fcxt, I have ap¬ peared ; to ilfix, a garment, from tTjuai, taken from '¿a, to cloaih, where it retains the augment ; rl xxix^fcx, purgation, from xxhxi- {«, to tleanfe, to purge. Thofe in MH are parifyllabic. feminines: q ô4ntuu, iXii/im, merciful ; from yvia, to k^tovj, iytaoftm, ytáfíat, one that Jhewetb, OT one that learnetb. And fronr thefe arife the fubftantives in yMoiim i as tAic leoovn, merey, charity ; f/unicoaiin, memory ; and fach like. From the second person come the nouns in IS and lA; a» from diSus es,, n c«$i 'word, or ^iSion : mvnd\wa,\, faSus es, i woiso-i;, poetry ; iypuoeu, cognsttts es, n ypmop^, notiose, knowledge i rtdvoat, facrijicatus es, 4 %va\a,, facrißce ; ii^oKÍitoweu, exploratus es, it íoKm»oi», proof, experiesue, examen i irciftao», ^ompti parcßi; n ironMcoia, readinf/s. And here we are to take particular notice of the compounds of of,^ sti, !o( ; as from xtxgwat, judicatus es ; « ónt^ví*, confußon» nssant of order, or judgment : rÍT«|a>, ordinatus es ; ivret^a, order, or difpofition : min^uiay, rem geffifti j St/fwga^ioti mifcarriage, or ill fuccefs in one's euterprixe. Some verbs in clívu have both terminations ; as vy^aUa, to wet, vy^avoM, from whence vy^xrovi, and vy^ewM, bussseBation', irj^ayiw, to dry, tivfxroat, and exßecation. Where, ge¬ nerally fpeaking, thofe in o-i; are taken in an aâive fenfe ; as ¿y^ayertç, humtQafion J 'warming : and thofe in oía, paf- Hvely ; as Bt^¡Aaa-ia, beat ; vy^aoia, humidity. The adjetives in BIOS, or EIMOS, are formed like the nouns in o-K, and are generally taken in a paffive fenfe, expreíEng fome fort of aptitude in the fubjeâ} as Savf/A^a, to admire, "nBaufiaoas i Savfiáoiof, 'wonderful : iqáa, to fee, a^aoat ; ó^áotioof, wifible i XgáoiJtai, to ufe i xivoifioç, uftful: móu, to drinks méorieof, and mÓTiieoi, potable. Neverthelefs, uaQú^a-tof is of an aâive fignihca- tion, purgati've, from ¡ta6aí^u, to purge. From the third person are deritei> fubftantives and ad- jeâives of divers terminations, parifyllabic and imparifyllabic, of an aâive or paiSve fighification, or of both together. They have always a t for their charaâeriftic, and we ihall give them here ac¬ cording to their order. • • THS, THP, TiîP, are commonly fubftantives of the mafculinb gender, which denote the perfon, and are taken in an aâive fenfe, correfponding frequently to the Latin nouns in TOR, and to thofe which the French terminate in TEÜR. THS is parifyllabic, and in polyfyllables is generally marked with an acute on the laft ; as étao/tat, to look, vêdéarat} Seanç, fpeâator, a fpeäator. Likewi/e avt^if, redemptor, a redeemer', ^ixarm, a judge : from hvrçu», to ranfom ; to judge. But diflyllables have an acute on the firft: «¿¿rq; « feller, a mer¬ chant ; Nouns derived from Verhs, ' ■ 307 fearful', uaírvu creator % íúrm, agiw, á heuefaStri 9¿tik, a /acrißcer : from iBur^írxM, ta fell ; t^íu, to tremble ; krí^ai to ereate ; Hu, do» to gitue ; dú<»» ¡o facrijice, to kill : though there k fome exception with regard to the accent. THP is acuted on the laft fyilable : eitt, to fante ; ataureu, a-u» faviour z to fell', «rta-foraw, wçatT»»^, fi feller. Some of thefe degenerate in their iignification, denoting ra* tber ibme kind of inftrnment ; as ^oxvv^, the mfe, or nofirils, fron (niaera, to blonu ont^s tuß ; ■^fvxrvç, 'a tißern to keep the , pur- Î|aterium» purgatory} ßaarlirn^r, afmt} xoifívró^tot, a church-yardp, rom KotftM, to fleep. To thofe in TAP we may refer the nouns in TO'PIA, and TO'PION ; as kxifu^ a phyfician ; áxtrogíot, the art of phyfic ; from hxiofteu, medeor, to cure, ^n like manner from tÛm, to fee, or from tactfutt, to know, cometh friog» knowing} and from thence trogioc, hifidry, knowledge, refiarch, defire of inowing,9.Xià. irógtoi>,a figUj or argument of one's attaining to the knowledge of any thing.. • X 2 'Thofe 3O8 Book VI. . Tbofein TPOS, TP A, and TPON, ieem to be formed by lyocope from others in rvpi»» But thofe in. TPOS refume the nature of the fubflantive fiom whence they are derived. Thus and ¡ar^oç fignify the iàme thing ; as ¿At-w, ivicied, ftmicious, and îktvç, a ph^ficiani from whence defcenid the adjeâives in •>. ^metimet they iignify an inflrument : iuú and pxeyir;«, a ditch, or cavity for burning /wine, from tva, and fXayi^u, uftulo, to burn at a /low fire ; «traXatr^«, a wreftlipg place, a fencing fcbooL ' The etymologiil writes >Mr^*,for a bathing-place, with a circum¬ flex on the firft ; and for the water wherewith one bafbet, with an acute on the laft. - Thofe in TPON denote alfo fometimes the prize and recom- pence, h^ioxo,. to teach, Síícacl^te, the maßer's pay ; the price of redemption, or prefervation, from aú^a, to prefirve, tojfave. We likewife meet with a $ for a r at the end of fon^e of thele nouns; as ¿XoJ'íOgix, a wallowing place i a pool, or pond', and aà^aù^,, fcopss, a broom, from óAhÍíu, to wallow, or tumble i MXvf/iSáu, to fwim, or bathe Hoglu, and angSu, to fweep. ' IV. Ibree other Terminations derived from the fame Perfon, viz, toj, rtov, and tuç. - Tor comes from the fame perfon, and frequently denotes a paf. ■five fignification : woinro?, faflibilis, feafible, from erottw, to do ; hard to boil, from, wia-liv, Coquo, to boil i iiáxnrof,. thcA 'may be heard, or, granted, from íxáa, audio, to hear', $i^cttrtvrof, curabiiis, curable, from Bs^antlu, to cure ; Ixriof, the fame, from icKOjuoi, to cure. Thus Ariftotle, 8th Metaph. fays, that ó¿«r>x«r is TO ivt¿¡A,tnv what has the power of feting ; and on the contra¬ ry tq»Toy, ro ivfifievo» èçaoia», what is vifible. • Sometimes they fignify duty ; as Ariltotle fays, that r« xoXà, good things, are ioramerci, commendable ; that is, they are not only ttfually praifed, but moreover ought, and deferve to bepraifed. Sometimes they are taken for the participle of the preterperfcô, ■ iyxoftreoc, dileflus, beloved', IxXexto;, eleâus, chofew, from xyxteiu, to love, éxX/yoi, to choofe. Sometimes they are taken in an aflive fenfe : whstÔî, prudent, iw telligent, from (ru»í»/i», to know, to underfiand', jgweroi, creeping, from tpyca ; ferpo, to creep. , " j Sometimes they have both fignifications : hitxrot, potens et ; poífibilis, potent and pojfible, from ivtx/Axt, pofium', xytKxya^, eme \ that has nor laughed, or that has not been laughed at. Sometimes they have a triple fignification, viz. adive, and paf- five, and that of the timë in which the thing is done: .ttxrii, falltvy Nouns derived frm Verls'. 309 falhw grmnd. land newfy phnghtd., tbi aßion «fntw ploughing, and the tinu new ploughing, from náo, to renew. Likewife ô ¿¡tnrlt, meßt iä nußt tempus, (as in French la moiffon u taken for either) from ùgÀm, to reap î from aro, to plough ; ¿Xoarí«, the time for tbrtßing, or the threßting it/elf', Tfvynrof, the vintagee fitom vfuyia, to gather grapes for the vintage. ' The Grammarians have attempted to dißinguiß thefe differentßgsiiß- eations, by the difference of the accent ; hut their rule is very precdrious, eu Sylbmrgiusßevoeth in his Grammar, page 259. For Âtnmonius and the etymologiß contradiff one smother flatly, about the word ifuvsot : and even Heßchius is inconßßent with himfelf, taking ífMirof, with the ac" tent on the firfl, for the harveft ; and ifivrou with the ascent on the laß, for harveft time j and, on the contrary, taking rgúyvcou with . the accent on theßrß, for the time of vintage ; and, with the accent en the laß, for the vintage itfeJf. In compounds the accent is drawn back: aigBtroc, invißblei eafy to catch. Which happeneth alio when a prepolition it Joined to the fimple nouns in TOZ : aveiertf, compounded-, exaudibilis, Celebris. But thoie that are derived merely from a cám-> pound verb, are acuted on the laft fyllable : «xAnrit, eleâns, chofen\ ionhvimrhf, deßrabU. TEON correfponds to the Latin gernnds ; from >áyu, to fay, Xt- Xix1«i, Xix7foi>, dicendnm, it muß be faid: but hereof we ihall treat more at large in the eighth book. > But they are likewife formed from unufual verbs $ as «trior, fe- rendum, it muß be borne ; pV<«r, dicendum, it nmß be feud, from the unufual verbs oU, and fi». And from thence come the ad» jeâives in tof, », or ; as tirios, olri», tirite, ferendus, a, um. i TTS among the poets proceeds alfo from this fame perfon, and fmnetimes denotes art, addrefs,\ot capacity of doing a thing: xtfiogi-, cithara tusk, third perfon of the perfêâ' paffive xmñá^ir»', xt8«jtrv{, the art of playing on the guitar, Likewifo o^x?>rvs, the art of dancing, from if^itfutt ; ¿yt^vrvs, eloquence, or the art of Jpeaking, from »ytqútfuu, concionor, to harangue, to fpeak in public. And fometimes it marks the aâion ; as iivrvs, efus, eating, from tiu, edo, to eat. ANNOTATION. Tbefe verbal nouns derived from a paffive preterperfeâ, do not always retain the vowel of the perfeft. For thoie that change the s into a, have their a tellored to them here : to nouriß ; Ttd^aptptxi, ti dfi/tfui, cattle ft fer^ feed I cuilf», te few ; taetayeai, vô ewéjjutt, feed. The X is alfo changed fometimes into s : iv¡í», te fad, te invent ; tvft/eai, rt tvpiiM, and tvftfea, inventien t ystiefiuu, fe, yeyiweeu, h ^frsvtc, generatieni ifaift», aufere, ri à^ai^Sfia, what it carried away ; á à^at^vic, ab¬ latio, taüiag away ; e »at h ¿va^i^treç, that cannet he taken away. From fs^», te run away (whence ^xTè;> in Sophocles, that can, or eugbt tt ha aveidedj cometh Hftanet, unavoidable, Ihortemng the penúltima; which is agreeable to the analogy already lyDarlced, Book III. Rule Ix. Sometimes the a is dropt : yrMr, te knew ; iyimrai, • ^rwric, for ye»riç, eafy te knew : " eeleur ; nijfgeiafMu, rè celeur. Sometimes it is added : iiStifet, to tie ; iiitfeat, i itrfeit, a chain. And fome¬ times another confonant is infected ; te dance ; w^x/xtu, i isgyh/eis, dancing : exatfw, te ¡cap ; texayMi, t exa^ptis, leaping, agility. In like man- Uçr aexfsès, growth, dryneß, from ai», ficco, te dry, X 3 V. From Book VI.- V. T^rom the Terfeèt Middle. From the perfeâ middle are derived thofe in H: Tçtp»; to nomrißti rírfofa, 4 rgefVf nouriflment. Iq lifce Manner, «rXtiyii, s 'wauna, from' ikrxévvM, plango, to ßrikt ; ivtr*« x4, epiftola, an epiftle,.{tom UnrtMM, to write a Utter i fvyè, fu« ga, flight, from ftiyo, to run: tiwtff ; amih, htfle, from ieftitto, to hafltn. OZ baryton^ which is commonly taken in > paffive fenfe : to twifl, to torment, ír^of», r^»t, the eelic, or hellyeuh ; likewife f6ó^o(, corruption, lofs, mortedity, from fdeifa, to eorrt^t ; eotigtt, feed, time of flowing, from 0W<í^«, .re fow. I'here are feme formed even from nnnfual verbs: ró«««, partus, the time of delivery, .or the fruit whereof a iveman is delivered, from T«e&>, to bring forth a child ; pitot, murder, from p»», to kill. Likewife mint, labour ; pôÇof, terror ; from the poetic verbs wire« fuct, to be poor ; p^ofuu, to terrify with threats. OZ, acoted, is taken aâively ; as rofshi, he that eutteth ; one that can bear, fertile { rogèt, poitsted, penetrating, fubtil, from O'tifie, tero, to aßiS, to wear out, to torment. Neverthelefs, Xstar«;, I remaining, is of a paffive fignification, and comes from Xeiwti, lin* quo, to leave. In like manner IvtXoierof, and ¿sréxetiref. Some are taken in either fenfe; as to eut, rhof»», « ropiot cutting, or tópou a part cut off, whence Comes the word tome, ñná iropiii feâio, the atlion of cutting. But they take an a inftead of an n, if there happens to be a f before : (^ziqa, to corrupt, à pfioç», corruption : in like manner the carrying, or carriage, from pf^»; owo^«, fowing, from encttfu. But fr^m xtt^v, to fltave, KÍ>t»fU, comes uov^à, flsaving, by inferring v. ETZ, acuted, is taken in an adive fenfo : pdo^cvf, eorttsptor, from to corrupt i vwoçivç, a fewer, from 'oect^a, to flow. IMOZ is padlve : owi^tpot, what is commonly fown. Thits íóxtfttf, confltderable, valuabU, comes from hxiu, videor, / feem ; and authorized, or approved of, from iixpp»', to receive } ¿fíXtpot, ufeful, from..ùpcX/iv, to ajflfl. ANON : TO |óa,o,, an images *n idol, from |/», to carve ; wówáe- for, a cake, from vhrlu, to make boil. From ;t{«, to pour out, comes XÓotfo», xUswi, and <*■ tunnel, or funnel, and by contraâion likewife ;u2»oç, and S : 4 pxo|, a flame, from ^\lyo, i6 burn ; 4 fui, a rent, from fitrtra, to break ; perfed middle ïffuy». V : «rorgaÇxàiJ', fquint-eyed, from va^ecSfJvo, to fquisst, - ANNOTATION. • _ There ore alfe nouns derived from certain participles, which ought to be meo- tioned here along with the derivatives from verbs; as from tlfii, to be, in. Sea, being, is formed Si ioia, eflence. From whence the Compounds intaai», abfence, Vaforta, prejence ; izaría,, authority ; prraeria, participation ; wefiiwí», abundance. 'Exúauc, voluntary ; ¿itáruc, involuntary ; are alfo derived from ixvva, voleos, vWingi and ixura, invita, nolens, knwilUng. ' CHAP. Confundí of divers Nounsl CHAP. VI. Of "Compound Wordsy and particularly of iTouns. Besides what has been hinted with refpeâ to compounds in the fécond chapter, when treating of piepoiitions, it is proper m remark here, that there are compounds of four or five particles together; as &r«>;jVwoT3r, bvwßevtr it be •, to tie end that, as. Sometimes we find two nouns jmned to ,a particle ; as aataiífiot, Uttlt duration, anftaftmabh "t ¿^(açtrorôxim, a fine child, but nssitb difficulty brought into the nuorld, or « uuoman who it dtUvertd of a fine child, but has had a very bard labour. But we ièldem meet with three nouns together, in pure authors, though we find fuch in Lycophron, ßuvJMdaimroi, built by a ftraytd covsi tpiSmvhófíeuiMf, a relation, or one of the fame blood i which founds a little too harfii. The corak-'Writers indeed divert themfelves with compofing monftrous long ones, as may be feen in Arifiophanes, where, among others, we find one at thé end of his 'Zxusdia. compofed eight and twenty words ; which fiiews the great fertility of this language in the formation of its compounds.' But moft worthy of onjr notice, are the nouns compofed of two words, wherein we are to remark particularly the final of the firft word, which may be either a boon, or a verb. I. Compounds of Two Nouns. There are fome, though very few, compounded of two nomi* natives ; as Nt«woAi$, Naples, from fí», new, and woAtf, a city ; vmxftMyijix, umbratilis pugna, fencing ; 'Hgaufdni, Hercules, Juno- nis gloria, from anà tisáoi, glory. Thofe compounded with the nominative Siof, fometimes retain as a Dea datus, given by God,'Ariit. hatred towards God, Ariftoph. and fometimes they lofe o ; as hsf mieiof, great, divine, admirable i Hie unto God, admirable} biffccTor, an oracle. Nouns in f¿^ot, a Unk^bey t ri<¡>»fn^(Of, esu that 'wears-a crowu. And this is particularly praâifed, when there is a feries of fhort fyllables. ' The Dorics change fometimes 9 into « : a mùrtberer ; 'Açyo^o/rii, 'Agyi^ówjt, and inferting «, 'Afyttfómif, tkefiayer of firgus. 3ome have tri inlêrted after this « : nñUofus j «■itrtAao;, Protefilaus : for nfoiroAao;, &C. I Somç have alfo an t infested after a: ¿ibtwór^, a,trjtveller, ¿¿oo- 'rvosof, a plowman. ' Some even afliime ou : (Moamó^íut, balf grey ; ¿tcfeuft^, pssre, • finçere, glittering, for ¿x^oÇçtinK, pnlefs tye Äould derive it from axtfatoÇatrte, < 'f'he Attics retain a in their noons : Xitifiçof, apubUe road', nn- nógof, sdituus, a fexton. In like manner in the fifth of contraâs; xç/a;, aro;, ; x^tntofnia,, vifçeratiQ« dißfibatioa, and divifioa of flejb. 1 The compounds of yod«,, tbe earth, change oftentimes »( iitto t in the firñ fyllable, and a into w in the fecond : ytaiurçot, a geo' metrician yiat^ç, yca^yof, a tiller of the eartb ; yt«>jipoe, a bill, Neverthelefs we read yanoiors;, a beflower, or difiributer of land. And thofe which put the other word before, are generally termi* Bated in »»; : fítXatóynti, black foil ; iniytiof, terreflrial, or creep¬ ing on tbe ground. Sometimes the fird word is contraAed : QioxvÍÜik, &tixoíibiif, ^hucydides ; ©eoíámoe, 7beodofius ; »io/xtfia, »»/xiKÍa, neo« menia, tbe new moon. When the fécond word begins with an t, the Attics contraA it into » ; Avxôiç/o;, Avx»^;, Lycurgus ; ivritxoe, 'vrSxof, eunucb, one that takes care of the bed. And others admit of other contrac« tiens, which agree with the general analogy. Thofe from ôju», fimul, are not contracted : SfMsSnit, of tbe fame mation or family, anid not ójitaO»?;. We likewife fay «¿toítÍj, of the fame year, one year old. i The compounds of xoWi«;, ánd ájx®«» change • into i : Km>aU ■fxaxof, Callimacbus ', á^;¿mxTíi>», architeS. ■ ' Some are formed from the dative, t man full of gefiure, a dancer} a mountcùneer ; ôçct;^a^xo;, brafs, copper. When two confonants follow, the t of the diphthong » is call away: nouriflsod in the mountains ; tyxixlvntf, one that makes a noife yoith bis pike. ■ • * , Others are formed from the dative plural : ¿^lairoofoi, an bigb- gander i »«wiriaro^o;, ttairigable, Spme Compounds of divers Nouns* 31 ^ Some from the accníátive: prudenty ,compos mentis; tíSf^Aíty a ßave, • Several are formed from the nominative« or accufative neuter : generous y coserageous ; /avirv^x**, animi deliquium,^«««* tug, or fainting away. Sometimes they are fyncopated : to fpoil, to wafie ; ¡uew fine, bloody, cruel. Some have a o inferred, to prevent the concourfe of feveral fliort fyllables : fruitful, that affords wherewithal to live. Some form a diphthong : foíMa, to dare, to undertake, to endure x raíMÍtoa^tí, mferable. Thofe of the fécond aorift follow the fame analogy, taking fometimes c : tShsxo,, I have bit ; iauúBvfeof, biting, fatyrical: and fometimes >: eX»0«i>, J have been hid ; X»dtpfioyyof, what hinders the recolUSing of a word. In like manner from 4^1, ferö, late, comes one that begins late to fludy. Thofe that come from the future, alTume commonly an c h'iSa, to fear ; Sttotíaíftui,, fearful, one that has a religious, or fuper- ' fiitious confcience ; otia, to firake ; oi\oo, oiuAx^a,, earth-Jhaking, an epithet of Neptune : i^ia, oa, to draw to deliver, to preferve ; Ifva-'moXtf, proteQorefs, or patronefs of a town. Thofe that are formed from a circumflex, alTume fometimes a fliort fyllable inflead of a long one : tv^ou, IJhallfind ; one that invents new words, eloquent. Verbs that have an • in the penúltima of the future, aflTume an • in the compounds : I will mingle ; f.i|óSq|, halffavage, halfabeafix ßqiotr, 1 will make heavy, ß^toiiMxoi, terrible, wat* Hke. We find alfo fome compounds that take their fécond part from a future in 4", or | ; as from I will rub ; verna, a bond flave, a fervant that is born in a family ; reTw, 1 ßall be brought to bed', »»AXítíI, one that has fine children', Isriril, near her When > 314 BOOK VI. , When the fécond word begins with a vowel, the vowel of die £rft word is cat off*: f tijbft«», to aißain, to /parti mu that/aves his bor/ts : 1 voill tbrovsi fíif/oavit, eat that rusts aviay, after having caß off his hstekler. nétri, quinqué,fometimes retains the final : vtrrtaiftyyoft that has five pipes, or holes i vshith bath five beds. Sometimes it is changed into « : wcw«xXt;«i', werraímt,/rueyears old, that lafts five years, and that happesuth everyfi/th year. '£|, fex, fix, «admits alio of an « ; that hssthfix beds ; and that has fix years, Ftom hvti), oâo, eight, we form iteruwut, and oftener ¿xn»«««, tfi- eight feet. We fa/ tiniatráiios, and tintaarái^»», 0/ tvsenty Jurlongs. From 'ExIsTcr, a hundred, comes M«rfrr«çx«f» a. eenturion, a eaptain o/a hundred men ; ÍKarorráx'*?* ffittt has a hundred hattdst ^ol. ÍKaróyx**?' ^fohyl. one that commands a thou/and/otdiers, a colonel. Tçtixorrdi and others of the like fort, joined to trot, a year, are contrafied in u, Att. Tfiaxorraínt, »xohtvisk, thirty years old | rergaxtrrérvi, /orty years old, &c. See the fécond Book, Chap. xi. ' of Numerals. This is all I could find, worthy of notice, concerning com¬ pounds. Ufe will point out feveral other little ptu-ticolar changes, which may be eafier learnt by reading, than, by any grammatical difcourfe ; though whoever is defirous, may fee ¿em at length in Caninius and Scotus. Hitherto we have treated what relates to Etymology, vk. to words feparately confidered. We muft now proceed to what regards their confiru^tion and arrangement in a fentence. The End of the Sixth Boor. B O O K VU. Of the G R E E K , S Y N T A X. L IntroduSion to Syntax. HOUGH it be the opinion of Quintilian» that bojra ought to be inftraâed io^ the Gre^ tongue before the -Latin, and in reality it be very proper (as we have obferved in the Preface) to let them make feme pro» grefs in this language, before they are led into the beauties of the Roman eloquence : yet as ¿e Latin rudiments are fomewhat eafier than the Greek, they are of co^rfe more proper ibr youth to be firft made acquainted'with; eonlequently the ieneral rules and principles, wherein the two languages agree, are tteft to be treated of in the Latin Grammar. ' I fliall uiercfore comprize in this book no more precifely than what the Greek va» ries in from the Latin, judging it quite unneceflary to repeat, how an adjeâive agrees with its fubftantive, or a verb with its nomi« native, and fuch other rules, that are exaâly uniform in both languages, and have been already fuffioiently explained in the JVew mttboi of Uarntng the Latin tongue*. ■ But it will not be amifs to repeat here thf property of each cale, whereby we have Ihewn, that The nominatíve agrees always with the verb, to form a fentence, viz. to makefenfe: lyù ego amo. Ido îovci So that as a fenténce cannot fubiift without a noun ^nd a verb, there is no nominative that does not refer to fome verb eXprefled, or under» ftood ; and no verb, that hath not its nominative either expre0ëd or underftood. The vocative alfo agreeth ibmetimes with the verb ^ in the fécond perfpn, and is never ufed but to point out the perfon to whom the difcourfe is addreíTed -, as fvXx^ó» f*iy Ku^ts, orf lir» re» tlXvuroiy Pialm XV. pfO* Jerve me^ 0 Lordy far in thee have I put my truft. a Lately tranllated and printed for J. Uonrfe in the Strand. The 3I6 Book VII. Thé genitive marks the pôÛelïbr, or generally thé* thing of which fomething elíé is faid, as ñ '''* Kygis, the grace of Jefus Chrift ; or palfively, as lî tü A»oî lirtSaAí,'Juft. Mart." the confpiracies formed againß Jupiter. And this taie is always governed, either by a noun fubftantive, as in the preceding examples, or by a prepofition, as tS ßaetxiuiy before the king ; no adjeâive, nor verb, being allowed to ahume a genitive, but upon one of thefe two accounts, as we Biall demonilrate hereafter. The dative marks the relation or tendency of the aâion fignified by the verb ; or the thing exprefled by ' the noun, and the end towards which it tends; as . wxvrct Lin. to God every thing is eajy. The accufative denotes the fubjeét that receives the aâion of the verb, as dyainía-ets kv^top top 0eóp 0*8, thmt ßalt love the Lord thy God ; or elfe it agrees with the infinitive, as í« ipX xafltÍV, I mufi be concealed', or it is governed by a prepofition, as ipï, concerning mci Thè ablative, which in the Greek always refembles the dative both in the fingular and plural, is however difiinguilhed from it by the government, being con- ftantly governed by a prepofition, either exprefled or underflood ; as ry ßxtnXtT, near the king : ip rH -aóxtt, in the city, &c. * II. Change of Syllables by reafon of the Conßrublion. But before uot enter upon nubat relates to thefe governments in parti- tular, it is proper to obferve, that the conflruSion or arrangement frequently occafions fame alteration in the fyllables. at nuell at in the voords ; vibicb may he reduced to four or five different beads. 1. Itchanges the accent: for the acute, which is on the lalt fyllable of a word, is turned into a grave in every part of a fen- tence, except the end of a period; as íyahot, *a¡ x^xrtçot «'Xí*«tÍí. Horn, a good kittg, and a flout foldier. Sometimes it occafions the intire omifiion of the accent, as in the Enclitics ; whereof we ihall treat in the ninth book. 2. It alters the quantity, either by lengthening the fliort iylla^ bles, as in this heinifiich of Homer ; Oleif as in the fame poet ; - J *£» i/iviffll, II._ II. 9*er the ferefls reil the fl»oä of pre. For here the diphthongs if and », which are naturally long, are made fliort, by reafon of the following vowel. 3. Jt occafions the lofs of fome letter : thus frequently lofes the final «, when it is followed by a confonant ; ¿/u« ¿tu ««1 Sruí 'X'*'» Ariftot. to be and at the fame time not to be in fueh a dif- fofition. We alfo fay ayg. and for ixt^ ^»<1 ^ far eu, until. Thus a vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word is frequently rqeâed, when the following word begins with a. vowel ; which is marked by an apoftrophe, as we have obferved Book I. Rule viiL And if the fubiequent vowel happens to have a rough breathing, the lenis which concludes the preceding word is changed into an afpirate ; as ip' npü, inftead of «v« vfûr, in us, in our power. • And fometimes this elifion is the canfe that the two words form but one, and have only one accent ; as nwya, for xeù iyù. Se ego, und I: which may happen either bycontraâion, according to the ninth rule of the firft book; or by fyncope, as according to Enfiath. for rl a chariot ; and in Ariftoph.' for tS ntetTÎçe, nofiri, op ours. 4. It canfes a letter to be inferted : thus a r is put after * or >, according to the tenth-rule of the firft book, itxoeio inftead of iixoei, twenty men. Thus ¿, su, aftiimes a x before another vowel, as ûx lAr, é mbiiuw, Horn.- I have neither ßen nor heard of him. 5. Finally it changes the letters, as the fmooth confonants into afpirates, either in the apoftrophe (above mentioned n. 3.) or upon other occafions, as ¿x f<*r ix, when an afpirate followeth ; ¿x itian, Horn. s>. did not pleafe. Or the afpirates into fmooth con> fonants, as we have obferved Book 1. Rule iii.. Or even other letters, as Ix for î|, when a vowel followeth ; 'Ex IlvXe, ii, 'Aorivf yaivf ■ II. a. From Pylos (of Pelopon nefas) a very remote place. Let this fufiice to remark by the way ; becaufe the praâice thereof will appear in the fequel of this book, where having com¬ prized all that particularly regards the Greek conftruâion, in fourteen rules very eafy to retain, I have endeavoured to illuftrate them with a great variety of examples, equally entertaining for their fignification, and proper for the fyntax, to the end that they may prove both agreeable and ufeful to thofe who will be at the trouble of reading them. III. Of Pointing. We muft alfo obferve tflat pointing, or the manner of making ftops and paufes in difconrfe, belongs properly to fyntax, as it ferves to fix the fenfe, and to determine the members and pe¬ riods. , . This Book VIL This fubjeâ is difcaíTed more at large in die treatife of letters« Chap. XV. in the New method of learning the Leain tongue. Where» Aire to cut fliort here, I fliali only obierve, that the panfes and dillinâions In difcoorfe are natural : but the marks by which they are fignified, are arbitrary and artihcial. ' Thefe natural panfes are of three forts. .One» which only a gentle breathing to fuftain the difcoorfe, and is called »¿ftfta, viz> fragment, becaufe it interrupts our fpeech. The fécond is itill femewhat greater, and contains fpme feafe in it$ wherefore it is called »àxou, memher. The third is that, which completes the fenfe, or finilbes the featence, and is called period, or perfeS dtßinSien, nùdia nyier,. The Latins ufe at prefent for their irft paofe, the comma or vir» gula ( , ) ( for their fécond, the two points (i) i and a fingle point to terminate the period. But the ancients, whether Greek or Latin, made ufe of the pmnt alone for all thefe differences, only placing it diffenpntly, to make the change of paufes. To mark the end of a period, and a perfeâ (iiftinâion, they placed the point near the top of the laft word. To iignify the middle paufe, they placed it in the ntid- - die: but to exprefs the breathing, they placed it at the bottom, and almoft under the laff letter, wherefore it was Rillfiá fuidißinßio» Atad for this we have the authority of Diomedes* Donatus, and St. Ifidore ; wherein Gaza, Vergara, and Voffius, are miftaken. See the New method of learning the Latin tongue. This manner of point¬ ing may be ftill feen in feveral excellent manuferipts. Butnt pre« fent moft of the Greek printed books diftinguifli the middle paufe by the point on the toj> of the laff word; and the full paofe by the point at the bottom : but this is contrary to the pra^ice of the ancients, which Valefius has endeavoured to revive in his Eufebioa, But when the fenfe is imperfeâ, he makes ufe of the comma, like the reft. ■ The Greeks ufe a different mark of interrogation frmn the Latins; For whereas in Latin they put a point and a commu over it ( 1} » in Greek-they put the point and the comma under it ( > ) >• .which in Latin ferves for a middle punfluaQOn between a comma only, and the two points. The point of admiration is the fame in both languages, being a fmali perpendicular line lyith a point underneath it, thus ( ! ). 'ihe [ 3>9 ] Ith GREEK SYNTAX, fi far as it differs from the h at lïi, ' C H A P. I. How far the Greek Concord differs from the Latin, t R U L £ I. To diftipguiih Attraâion from Government. -t ^be ßrß Rule of the Greek Syntax^ is to dißinguiß Attraction from Government, Exampi.$s. TH E firft rule we are to obferve, for better un- deHlanding the Greek conftruftion, is to diftin- , guilh ATTRACTION from government: for, as we nave obferved in the Latin Method, it is peculiar to the Greek language, to make a cafe, that has its own concord, or government, draw fometimes to itfelf another noun, which is not at all governed by the verb, to which it ihould naturally refer : thus, for in- ftance, they fay, nvmSx ¡¡/.»vrS uu, Plato; / ant very fenfible that I am wife: where trotpot m refers to the nominative of o-úvot^«,. viz. iyù, which is underftoqd. £¿^iJt9i«T(,Demoíl;h.^0Z( know you area8ing wrong: where «ííxSkt« refers to «-«utm which precedes. Xxoir¿[jíívoi tvçKTXo» ¿$x¡j.üg xXXtaç raro ¿txirç»^x[At- j-of, Ifocr. after having fully conßdered the matter^ I found I could not compafs it in any other manner ; where bixv^x^xf*ei/eç is drawn^to the nominative by o*xon-8jufvo;, inilead of faying jkè itxwçx^x/AsvoVf or iixv^x^xtr^xt. KxTnyé{4'nv íí ■srxçx xu¡jum$mv rtv^ Avtrl/xxp^oç 'ixxXtTrOf BokÓtioí jub vi ipxlviTO zo ,yívoi xy¿xx6ev xtra /AíVflí 34o Book VII. Greëk Syntax. l*-tfní is «¿»avti, asyso-ô«» rîç 'AttixÎç, Lucian î / w/VÄ a certain play-ivrigbt, named LyßmachuSy who was evidently a Boeotian by nation^ hut ftill would make us be¬ lieve he came from the very heart of Attica : where we find à^ihri in the ablative, drawn by vroniTy, which goes before, notwithftanding there is a conftruftioñ of the nominative between them, Av riod. Tirà Si rat Çvrut xai rnt ixfvceaf xaxlat ysoçyat ^iga,irivóiA,ivx cyta/Mt' olor ' ríf j^ètf xuí rät úft,vyS¿\at rài vi- x^ori^uí, '¿rat Siarç<)6t7cai ro v^of rv rtAip^oç, cÇita wtvxtK Xt» ôraqot rvf itrtfiátxi fúcoi SitXaSítra Si^atrai, elf svx^vrixt fjttraSíÍMsct -rórt rs BafiL where we find rà$ ¿iiíof kèit, . &c. in the accufative, attraâed by rh xaxiat, and governed by tyiu¡íet, which goes before, though naturally it Ihould be in the nominative, agreeing with ít«rgi)6i»i>Mci, which come after. If^e have feen feme plantt, which by the care and indußry of the gardener have been cured of their ■ natural imperfeSion : fuch as pomegranates, too four', or almond trees, too hitter, which being cut through near the root, and grafted after¬ wards with the cyon of a pitch tree, lofe the malignity of their juici, and are rendered very ferviceable. This attraâion of the fame cafe happens fometimes to quite dif¬ ferent things, or perfons: V ¡Ásvéígs fût ¡itÇvt variât, tlví^ riiof cBítotrof, it w^áru 4i^vyàt, Sopocl. inftead of tÎTtg rit ecBtti : ego verb libero pâtre nata fui: qui, li qnifquam alius Phrygum, ' potens opibus fuit. Fit hocy fays Crulius, quia cafus cafum trahit, viz. the genitive var(of, attraâs the other genitive slvi^ ritoi chttotrof. AîT yà^ ¿xo^úG»< tTvaci rät cxoorùt xai ràf v^á^íif, ûf sSsiif rut y.arà "Kóytit Sia rut átetxtíut xaro^úsfcstut, Baßl. in Afcet. where we • fee xaroç6«|U(W, which is found in all copies, in the plural, at¬ traâed by rut ¿taixeíut; whereas one would think, it ought to be xarog^syJts, referring to sSetlf. It is fit that our aäions fbould be proportioned to our defigns, fince no reafonable end can be rightly obtained by unproportionable meant. R V L E Of the.Relative. i R t; I. E II. Of the Relative. Thus the relative agrees with the antecedent in cafe ^ TO?; oT; infiead of â . Ex AMPLES. ■ It is .by, virtue of this attraâion that the Greek re¬ lative agrees frequently in cafe with its antecedent (which ^Idom happens in Latin) a$ in the example given in the Rule, iis utor quibus babeo, infiead of quas habeo, I make ufe of vohat I have. ■In like manner, to kvts y twoí- .«« ^nVíT«!, Ezek. xviii. in his nghteoufnefs that he hath done be flsall live. 'Aireddpv 1» rû vapoex-lwjMocn w twolnotVy Ibid, he ßall die in the fin that he bath committed. -K«» dviççs-^iv Ix wecowv deyed. Ou)c »riv dirtív Çfivrxy rSrc ¿ ml, Ariftt nothings çan be truer than that^ from which_ we infer the truth of the conclufion. K«» «Jr« ovfiÇetimvt ç^içovrt ¡*iv tt ytvMxi, í^u ívPíUf Fiat, and it happenedy that turning the ßone of his ring inwards^ he. became invißbU^ and turning it outwards^ he was vißble : ' where, we find, rpc>o»T(> «Viíx^, and in the dative, by reafon of «vr$ that precedes. In like manner, irftçvxo» ßfXrtVoK ¿vxvruv »vi^úiruv £x«, juft as Lucián lays, ovlíu «x-trov v^xHíov tx pixZv »ixa« we are not allowed to commit treachery for the fake of a vißory. In the dative : tw íl fjôuî firir«» to d'avjaa^ficy Plut. admiration follows joy. In the accufative : xara to xa» tlíívxtf accord» ing to their knowledge and ahiUty. O»' â'avoif, i to âcj*tvot xaXoVf xJt to 3'k^tx{(|i, *AXXx TO Taura xaXu; ¿i*çértç ixIsXtfxt. Plut. Ncc pulchrum duxere tnori, nec vivere pulchrum. Sed pulchrum pulchrè fi quis utrumque facit : I'he deceafed did not think that honour confified meerly in either living or dyings but in living and dying honour» ably. In the ablative : to ttxxtitv £r»v lo tm j^çîîtoa» faxxxopy í iv TM x'fXT?TÔa», Ariftot. riches conjifi rather in the ufe than in the pojfeffton. "Eo rw wii^up aJroF, Matth, xiii. and whilfi he fowed. ^Eytptro ip rw rip e^Xop gwtxíTirOxi xùru ùxéeip top XÓyop rS 0£x, Luke V. faâum cft tür« bam imminere illi, ad audiendum verbum Dei ; that iSy dum immineret -, and it came to pafs that as the people prejfed upon him^ to hear the word of Qod. ♦ • ' ANNOTATION. manner■ of fupptying the Gerund in Greek. From hence it comes that the infinitive in Greek rupplieth eafily the ufe of the Latin gerunds and Tupines ; becaufe thefe are nothing more than real nouns, as well as the infinitive, accord* ing to what we have obferved in the Latin method. When the article happens to be made ufe of, then its genitive is put for the gerund in di ; as rS moticrat, faciendi ; or rather faâionis gra¬ tia, of doing : the dative or ablative ru is pqt for the gerund in doi and the neuter ro for tHb gerund in dum. Though it is often exprelTed without the article : ¿xoprí^ttv, jaculandi peritns, an excellent archer. AZxs figtir, ferendum de^t, he gave it tn carry. y 3 Infinitive Book V. Greek Syntax. Infinitive governed by a Prepoßtien. OfttMims there is au elUpßs pf the prepefithn, as in the preteiing exampUt iüxf çégnsf m'sí, 'm¡i( ad ferendum. Thus in f^irgiJ, JEsuiá^ J. Árgenti magnum dat ferre talentum. that is, ad ferendum, to iarrj. , - In like sttatmer iusai ai y^vraíítsf tv^iaxett rlytae, Eurip. women are quick in dnding devices. 0¿ hiyiis hirii, ¿Mm aiyat ¿tíósaroft Epicharm. thai {cnows neither how to fpeak, nor how to hold his tongue. KaXof iSu«, pretty to behold, ftshaudi QavfjM lit- adat, wonderful to fee. Olx iiia ¿xáur,' Ifoer. things nnpleafant 'to hear. Which the Latins frequently render hy ihe fupine in u. Mirabile vifu, jucundum auditu, ife* *a vouT» virxi''» tavra ro- fíiíoí flyttr lirai xafir, Ifocr, qus turpia fa£lu font, ea ne diâu quidem honefta exiilimes. The prepoßtien is likeivife undtrßood, when the infinitive is put with verbs of motion ; i iS àrù^ùwa ¿r* riSdt Siay.otr¿6iirxt, ¿Ma íiaxo^ rricai, MattbJ the Son of man is not come to be ferved, but to fervc. i inot tö atb^vsre ¡¡¡ri'ñoai kot aaaai to ávopmtíot, Luke xix. for the Son of man is come to feek and to fave that which was loll.. ■ ' ■dtfd from thence Horace has borrowed Audáx omnia perpeti Gens humana ruit. Od. Hi. Lib. i. — Quidllbet impotens fperare. Od. xxxviii. and a great maty more of this fort of phrafes ; for he affeHed in a particular manner to imitate the Greek turn of expreffion. This ellipfis of the prepqßion is found likewife in the paßiv'e infini¬ tive i 'Ogy(t>Uoí 'OXtîftirioç àmÇi^toèai, Hom. dificilis efi Heus ad repügnandum, or ad, repugnari, it is a difficult thing to withfiand God. How as an infinitive may he governed by a prepofitmn, fio it may 0^0 by açTtr which has often the force of one; as in Plut. ocTt a^ros lirai ^Sltrai, ¡xn Tur ^^lur luMstotTur tu àtbçùvu, i ß'iof aÙTÙ yírvrar, infomuch that there is reafon to apprehend, that if the race of brutes fhould happen to be extinâ, man himfelf would be no better t^n a brute. Difficulties relating to the Government of the Infinitive. Grammarians take notice of Jeverdl irregularities, pretending that there is frequently a tranfition from one cafe to another ; as Seófxcba Vfiur, fxiT Uvoiat ¿x^oáaaohai Tut Xiye/xstut, irßvfxfibirTOf ort, t^c. ifocr. we entreat you to lend a favourable ear to what we fay to you, confidering that, \¿c. where hév/xtiúctraf, they pretend, is in- fiead of ¡ibvfxnbítrut : but an the ^entrary it is an ellipfis of the accufat. ifcíií, underfiood before, as if is had been, ító/xe6a vfxùt ¡xit litoíat vfxS-i ¿ygoáaaerdai, à vobis requirihíus, ut vos cum benevolentia audiatis : and then írbvfxnbctraf;, which followeth, is by iftSj at- tra¿led to the accufati ve, which agrees with the general rule. Of the Ihfinitîve, 327 dná nahtu XenaphiHf J^utiing »f. Secrates, faîtbt ufn ti>, smd égxùrra /t^poßttg ¡»vrosf before the itßniti've ïx»» : ta eum vaidi pernea effet p^detu, ettsa tansen facili sis eff eontentum } having but very little, he was neverthelels very well fatisfied. Bttt at the Greet infinitive may have before it either a ttomituUive, er em eueufative, it may happen, that in one member of a period there fisall be one of theft cafes, and in the other another ; vohich feems to have tfcaped the generality 4^ grammarians} as ri ¡iit fivfutxif flvfUtf xtnv ovxfiat mx^eO^ettra, neu ri «vo^^áx({ xvrit irifa*üo6eu m^rigor. Dem» l.ómit here an infinite multitude of perfons who have been fo often declared viâorious, as I wave mentioning alfo how often I have been crowned myfelf : vtbtrt vot fee fovfint in the esccufative, vshich rffers to nsKn^yfiow, and avrit in the nonfiuative agreeing with ir>- favZo'deu, Tür ¡th >J>yen tfti nv^tot tevrof elpat, t»y ^ rw rvxvt. Plat, he faid, that he could command his words, but that fortune was the miftrefs of events. And this 'corroborates the retneerk tf Sanßius, which is, that the tonjunSioñs. do not properly join the cafes, or governments, -as the fenfe and the things themfelves ; stow the fenfe fubfifts in this connexion^ fince the Greek itfinitive mty as well have one cafe before it as another. Of this we have inflantes alfo among the Latins, eu in Cicero, mihi enim videbatur quifquam effe beatusnofle, cuni in malb elTet : in malis autem fapientem eflfe poiTe, fi eiwnt ulla corporb aut fortunas mala. Tufiul. 5. Sometimes the infimtive is tmderftood in the fécond member ; as >*yuf a - hi ra Sn/MTiKÜ ¿img . ixhiaxàt *»rà ovy- y^àpv», o >i6yy rni iv/Aertxèf, á roT( m^yiexot yuaoxofúttsf, Demoft. pro corona : for yuaoxoiúusí being in the accu/ative fup- pofeth iTy«i, whereas the nominative txjiehvx»;, which goes before, refers to the verb f^íyud which creeUes the whole diffculty you enu« merate the qualities wherewith a popular perfón ought to be en« 'dowed, like unto one that is defcribing a ilatue which he has agreed for with the artift; juft as if a man's words, and not his aâions, were an indication of hb popularity. Rule IV. Of Participles. ne Greek participles are elegantly joined to verhsy to exprefs the different moods. Examples. The participles form a confiderable elegance in the Greek language, b^expreiling moil of what we Ihouid fignify by the other moods : which is fometimes a kind of attraâion ; as ¿y»iruv ¡s,t íiaré^u, for fot ¿ya- vavy continue to love me, tvvoictv ^»«rrXw rí Y 4 ' uÓMif 328 , Bo o k vii. Greek Syntax. w©Xí», Dem. how confiant and. unalterable the affeSiion is^ which I have for the city. "AçBx^toç u» Si»Ts\tTt Philo, he remains uncorrupted to the lafi, OJ xr^uVo/Aai for f iXftii, I Jhall never ceafe to love,, ISàvp for memini videre, I remember to have feen. ®tov ¿ zr^oírÚTfiv íp^wi». Soph. / Jhall not ceafe to have God for my protestor, Soph, for tTxçx^oiÇy you have difiurbed.. *A fAxXtfu tl^t ^xvfjkxrxiy Greg, the things which he mofi admired. OJ vMvtevxv fixrnv uro- vhrti', non intellexerunt fe fruftra laborantes, thiy did not perceive that th^ had laboured in vain. ^6xpti yxç xvxXi(rxó[*t»o» •arxvy Aríftot. for every thing is previoußy confumed. IJ^eifOxtrxv ¿^{XÖ^re? t?ç vóXiufy Theoph. they went out of the town before. IvvrlhvTxi .ax(ç,/Plut. Simonides faidy he had never been foTry for being filenty but very often for having fpoken. ANNOTATION. Thefe exprefîions are more ufual with the fubfiantive verb; ?« i?>) tfixóíti/*of ¿•¡rstílofúf, hecau/e he had killed Nicodemus. Xx^iç x'^í" Ir»» i rUluaa ccil, Sophocl. ene favour always begets another. Oá 6¿ta, to be hid} and others. Ovx vicñ^x"' "*»• Oemolth. he was not an enemy. '^O rvyx»"' içarZr ae. Plat, what I ajk of you. Tettidnru ra, urí rule t Of the Neutral Plural. 329 'RULE V. A Neuter Piural joined to the Verb in the Singular. ' A neuter plural frequently - requires the verb in the finguloTy as Çàx ' ^ EXAMPLES. A neuter plural is oftentimes joined to a verb in the fingular, efpecially among the Attics; as animalia currit, for currunt, the animals run. iix^xx- xtixá Ir» «Tfça, things appear plainer when compared together. ' IltigS TOI» •B'XSroi» xx\ x7si/*«ra xxrxTxsvx^en/' iff ¿i Tx fAiu reí"» xiroXxSity S7nrxf*évotç' xlií/xxrx ¿í rùTç ^ñ But there are four, others that have the firll two of thofe cafes, viz. the genitive and the accufative ; and ßx that have all three, viz. the genitive, the accufative, and the ablative. They may be all fecn in the rule. Bat Of Prepoßtiom, 331 Sut I ßaU give here aliß ef than attarMng to their alphahetiea^ order, to the end tb^ may he the taßer found: and at the fame time Iball point out their naturalforce, their properties, and the particular eUgoMiet thg produce in difcourfe, in a more copious manner than is eußontaty among grammarians, becaufe the advantage to be reaped from thence it very conJidertAli- t 'AMOi, aprepofition, which governs properly anfwers to in, or isfer, ot three cafes, and has a great affinity the Latins. Wherefore it generally with «i(i; whereof hereafter. It com* denotes /ome repetition, or continu* menl^ denotes the circumference, or ance : it is likewife employed in dura- citcuit, wherefore it is uibd to fignify tion, in paffing through, and in funi* proximity, agreement, or the relation litudes, whether to mark refemblance, of tíme and things ; including fre^ueht- equali^r, or oppofition ; as likewife in ly a relation to the thin'g lignified m the things done at different times, cafe it governs, as will appear by the tAiÀ ni ipi, per montes, thraugb the enfuing examples. ssuautams. With the oemitive; *A/u^ nvt 'Avà tw mora/xlv wxtnr, Herodot. to viKitiç, Herod, seer the eity. 'A/upt faii againß the current, nrmt, ene trmUe begets metber. *Arà with the time. Tuf f àftfi, Apollo, y»r ber Jake, 'Ati wSr ¡rcf, every year, oUSu t' dftpl. Id. Jer the love tf rbec.. 'Arà 'xfiea, in band, but, 'Ati Kfireç, Plut, by force, noitb 'Eçi I'* «»lip pófwv d|iepi LMfiitm all bit might, lutXà, Pindar, it it the dtay of man to 'Avà via 'E\Xdht, through Greece, Jpeak alnuayt well of the Goat, 'Avà vív ßiw, during life, 'Ajupî ififm è y<(opà, Lucian, a 'Avà n^érra, as it happent, treutife concerning the ftart, 'Avà çôfus cp^tiv, to have in «né't mouths wjth the Accusative, which to talk of ten of any thing. it more ufual : 'Ajupi tsifjum 1;^« rà 'Avàcv^eTvot tivi, to he often in one't wvXXà, Lucian, / am generally emptied mouth. about my firge, Oi dfcpl ym ¡xtrn;, 'Avà f*í(ot, Horn, by pieces, one by Jabourers, ot plowmen, ^ one. 'Ajup' i\tL iXret 'Axfuhç, Hom, to 'Avà orfúrae, among the firfi, drive the Greeks towards the fea, 'Avà nir avrif A¿yw, Clem. Alext 'Aferpi rà í^hfváxovra Im, Lucian, andrin. eâdem ratione, in the like man' about feventy years, ser. / VifMs nohtcSne, pionyf. Knnetftáfea soi i^h>, àvà ¿ysútv fsMst, Halicar, the lanes enaHed concerning any cinnamon and fpike, of each an ounce s thing. in which fenfe it is frequently ufed by O! oftp! Ttflci/jun, Hom. to fignify,' phyficians. , according to Èuftatb. ipfe Priamut. fieri awl 'tapsaiose àvà .«vim «ai eiicvri O! à^pi TÔv Kû^vv, Cyrus and hit at- riAturS» xaraXmrv, Xipha ~ tendants, ot retinue. fpeiking of Auguftus, fo that he leß to Tmc à,up' abrèv togtrpifose, Eufeb. to the Ramans five and twenty drachms a the guards that were about Um. See head, vegi hereafter. Likewife àvà «vsvri, jßve by five. With the ablative: 'a^pc *Avà íavó^ev laa^ev, Matth, xx. tbey ' fair pciyn toreärra, iseiabin, Herodot. received every man a peny, atque hsc quidem de bello tot & canta 'Avà iMTprTàtUm, about two meafures, díÁa fint, enough hat been /aid of war, or two meafures each. 'A/upi ÏI TÜ Marino a-àrëe. Id. for *Avà ptiro», in the middle, middling, what relates to her death, 'Ajiapi yu- moderately. vaixi, Hom. for a woman, 'Avà among the poets fometimes af- 'AAXà xai àjup' ^Otuañot, for the love, fumes an ablative; as àvà fi«i,u«7e, or for the fake of Ulyjfet. ^ ' ufiojn the altars, Xguoia ¿vi anhulgy, 'A/api çiSiat, circa peftus, about, or with a nlden fceptre. near the fiomacb. Hom. Theocr. We find it, in the book of Reve- *A/up* ipsotaa tiiaaro rtúpgsa xoX^, lations, joined to a nominative, but Hom. he put on his fine armour. it is by an ellipfis of its own cafe i 'ana', a prepofition, which is gene, àvà efe ÏMtfof t»v osnSKin» nt if tvi; rally joined to an accusative, and psagyaglra, that is ta fay, u; Ikock TWV 332 Book VII. Greek Syntax. Tär vtíKáwTf ' ivà îv», «f» fee. tveiy Jtveral gate was of ene peart, Rev.*xi. XI. ^Vhich faflage the author of the Idiotifms does not feem to have rightly underftood. 'anti', a prepofition, whidi gene^ rally denotes fome reciprocation, op. pofitioo, permutation, or contparifon of things. It governs always a geni¬ tive, and anfwers to the Latinar» j as "£v árd' tri;, unus pro alio, one far another. 'Avt* «yadü» nanti 'ytytwreu, Thu- cyd. they are turned from good to evil. BanAeii; ¿rrí ¡xv^tn içi ffarurräi, the ting alone is worth ten thoufand men. oi ¿yaSol ¿*rí /autfiit otíaát nelaïdasapud Thucyd. lib. I. good peo¬ ple ere grateful for thefmalleß favours. 'Arrl ifiS, inßead of me. 'Avt! woXfiOr, for feveral. 'Avrs vrt(tioXeUu, pro velamlne, in¬ ßead of a vail, KsXor àrri dverS aú/xarot ¿Bivam ió^ao inutaraXki^aaíat, Ifocr. it is a fne thing to change a mortal body for im¬ mortal glorf. 'Arri nanSv áirávrwy nar ¿ya9m ira ri- Beifxnr, I value one honeß man above all the wicked people in the world. 'AvtI vroM J by virtue of what Í for what Î Sometimes it is taken for propter: irff ¡ra, propter hoc, upon this accounts itS' ¿r, propterea quod, becaufe, by reafon that. 'Ano", a prepolition, correfponding to' the Latin à or ah, and denotes from whence a thing conies, or the place of parting, with the fpace of time. It is commonly joined with inanimates, as essafi is with animates, though fometimea. they are taken one for the other. 'Airo ni£r, à navibus, from the foips'. 'A4>' i'lrirorv èir' mat, ab equis ad afi¬ nos, from horfes to aßet, a proverb. Am @eS xsñ vtirta iifxßfXBm àsl t.íyftr, rt suà tosir. Plato, all our thoughts and words ßould begin with God. Whence it is ufed to mark the manner, or the caufe, and time ; àsrà tixns, ^ chance. 'Am ooeaVr.t, by inclination. 'Am tS vrafax(ñfxct, immediately. 'Am tS ^(orifxa, prudently. 'Avo wfoadva ùSfiçS, Ecclef. vili. Contra faciem contumeliofi„ againß a violent and abufeful man. Sometimes it denotes the profellion or way of living, or the nation and feâj ap oi ivi rñt çoât, Stoics, qui font ab ea dilciplina, Cic. Oi ¿vi vi vrtpvára. Peripatetics, It alfo denotes thofe that are no longer in employment : ol ¿3« -rif; hva- •srtUt, Herodot. confular men, thofe who are out of thàr confsdßip. Oi ¿vi tS; ffarvylat, qui imperto defunéli funt, whofe time of comsnand is expired. 'Avi vra&eet, juß out of their infancy. 'Avi aíKvsyyot, at the joussd of the trumpet. • ^Avi hivra, Hom. after fupper. 'Am vär ôérXaw, without arms. It is joined with the paffive infiead of bvi. 'ExXcXcypúvoi ¿wo tS Sí5, Clem. Alexandrin, eleâi à Deo, the ehofen of God. Tavrat (vragßsrat) ^oe-ir ¿iro rZr ¿i» 'nçao'urrZv staToAtooíñtut, Fauft. they fay they were ßoned by thofe of the ofpofste fafiion. Sometimes it draws back the accent, and then it feems to mark a greater diftance, as if it ftood for ävoOtr, pro- cal, afar off\ *» 'at fxsv vosyt «wo -rîf y»; iyhom, Xiphil. beistg now very dißant from the land. 'awo exowS, beyond the mark, prwter fcopum, te praeter intentionem, fays Bssdeesss. 'Avorta, alienum à moribus, viz. abfurd and improper ; or elfe contrary to good behaviour. Budseoa. The oppofite is Wfit r^óva, what is proper, or decent. *Awo vr^byfxvtet, improper, imperti¬ nent : «wo ««<¿5, unfeaj'onable s «wo yoí- ¡xnt, à fententia, againß his opinion. 'Avo tixÓTo;, non verifimile, impro¬ bable. "avo dufxa, non ex animi fententia, difagreeable, contrary to inclination. AIA', a prepofition, which properly Cometh from itUeo, to divide. Where¬ fore it denotes properly the middle, the traverfing or going through, and, as it were, the pafifage of things or aftions. Hence it is joined with time and Awo tS vr(opav5, or ¿wo wS q>ava¿S,^ place : it fignifies the caufe, the end. openly, puhlickly 'Awo X'S'fs f* ff 3, or vifjotint V*t- {or, every ßftb day.. And fo for the other numbersj where it i$ to be ob> ienred, that in ihefe phraíés the gent- tive plural may be put with the num¬ ber l^ified, or the genitive lingular with the adjeâive of the ordinal num¬ ber, as may be feen more at large in the . next book. AidTiXi»;, to the tnd, continually. At* aiSoor, fir ever i tut trarroc, al- vtcys t ' hi xi^ru, fir a long vthUe, or after a long time. alá au t5t« àv ifAtae» yitono, thit might he better effeBed through your meant. Alá ^rlxaitr, uei hà UioH, a medicine made of palm and rojete Hi ßnaiSn, made of herbt juicet. BtdfMora hi yiXadlot yaípttt», Athen. food made of milk. Alá yfit^m, to verite with hk. KmfMU iti voMS, vill'get very difi tant fiom one another. Qavf*i(a* ri hi vUiçu, to admire .^fe thingt that we fee only ly great intervak e which may be faid of time, or place: of things which we either fee but ludom, or whkh are very re- .mote from us. Am virhut ti yñfaf iiáyar, that fpendt his old-age in forrow. Aid ffoagfir tlmTr, to tell coneifely, ami in few words s hi vtatSre» siviir, to tell proBxly, or diffufely. Ai* tttaxymt ix""» refpeß, to have an eßeem fir : if alaximt Xa/uSániv, to he affronted, to take a thing as a difiomur. Ai* oia-rii XoCsii', to have pity, ^f ietfAtMc xlyciy, re Jpeak corredly and with propriety. • Ai* aXrutt syta, to blame, to accufe t h' alTiat snwi, to he blamed, to be ac- cufed. Ai* ài^sXsikr rlSte-êcu, to appr^riate a thing, and turn it to one's own ufe. Al* ¿hvpiUc ylnohai, to be reduced to defpair, or to extremity. Ai* dv^MXtútc yívt;0M, to be in fafity. riysoBai ti hi foiau, to be between, to be in the middle. ' - - Matin yisiaStu ni tld foiau, to have lu middle. Aid dtaen, among, or amidß the ißandt. Aid «lávTM i^ioç S«K(, Herodot. «d«ve all, worthy of conßderation. Aid ix^"> i' "ot only to havefn hand, or in one's hands ^ but alfo to keep a ßrid hand ever, or to take care. With th* accusative it com¬ monly marks the final, or efficient caufe. ,. < Aid vs TdSra ygá^ot, I write this for you. oS ti' i,wl, Demofth. non p^r me, it is not sty fault. Ai* ttlrrit, through his means, or in- terpoßtion ; orfor bit fake, or conßdera¬ tion } or in rejpeß to him. Lucian. Ai* Sr T¿««rw; in what manner f by what means f 'Axha'art ¿vña ovpsÇuMio/Aet to7; vlio- X^Cs hi my vfAtrigay ¿vay9¡i>mUy, Bafil, Ißen to the advice we give to the poor, ^ compelled to it by your inhumanity. Aid T* tma xai /uiXar eupia, Horn. per arma aCrumqtte cruorem, Euftath. tid ;(yXSr, made of pretends, that tid with an occolatiTe is for xard. Núara h' ¿fsHgeainy, Od. o. per almam noAem, during this heavenly night. Sometimes it it anderftood : ' r^wmi Vthoic, putynaipiviot vtgl âçv, tor tid vthoto, Hom.' they come croft the ßelds to fight againß the town. El'z, or 'CZ, a prepofition anfwer- ing to the Latin in, and properly comes from iifu, rs; wherefore it generally marks the motion towards fome term or objeA, to which the thing tendeth as towards its end ; and it governs only an accufative. BÎC laxXas-Mn, to the ajfembly, to the church. Eic iggpna, to the prince's apartment. 'Aythtynsy tit rty Itgyorta, be made a report to tbe prince. iSyuf cí; ten tà^en, well affeiled to- , wards the people. 'AftafTavtiy eic ti«», to offend a perfon. Blc Barihtsoy' láytiy, to pronounce a panegyric on St. Baßl. 'tfomt sic 'MeiiOaoya, a hymn in bo- tteur of Apollo. EÎ; üC^in, in eontumeliam. *Ec túnafíin, or êc to tonorin, pro viribus, as well as he could, according ' to his abiRty. Ai»Ce£xa/utnoc eic tvc Maxetónac, Pau- fanias, having been traduced to the Ma¬ cedonians. fSuXifAtyet uirny it my *A9anai»n ipi- xiav Sl»(áX>ein, Thucyd. being willing to traduce bim for the friendfhip he pro- feffed fir the Athenians. EyxXá^ST» eic où; 'ASmalut, Thucyd. crimes lasd to (be charge of the Athenians. 334 Book Vlí. Greek*Syntax. Eff T»» «ga'mß ibe fetptt, Hit Sf Xiytfff to lohijfor int« onc^t tari < BÍ; ixorSi', oimt a bundreit ' Eí{ hmrffu/jMrttfa" voluftUout uftt. Eic T® TUX*"** obtain any tbingt ' tit mita/Mn wa^iyfa yfAfnanra, Ifoci*. to furnijh the expttue of the war. ' E>c tí wgórifoe xSi¡jí!¡KO)t, from the meadcws, Oi Ix TÎ; debt, the Stoics. Ot Ix TÎ; 'Afuolriyu ßahr.t, the Areopagites. 'ix f lira»; ioBeit, implanted by nature. Oi if íxánt, nepotes ÍIÜU^ hit poflt' rtty. 'Ef e^ot, front alt eternity, at aU all times, eiter. 'Ex wuiien, from one's infancy. *Ex x'fW, fiom the hand, with the band, by the hand. *EX t7; ¿go; Xx/uCdssafixi, to take hold of by the tail. 'Bseriniptett, ex legibus, purfuant to thelaws. ' 'Ef d pra^o, after dinner., 'Ek réru, sind in the plural Ix TÍ- t»v, deinde, after this, or becau/e of this. 'Ef im*t\vt, en the furfaee, 'Ex wtfeSKi, round about. 'Ex weiXXtt ti wtftntot, with a great deal more. Tà; ix ç^rsUt ix pttyUta IvodtOwro nvfjtpo^, 7 hucyd. he made that expe¬ dition with vafl lofs. 'Ex tSt siWTorr, as much as in me Res, ateording to my powers Ix t»> Msyopoiton, at much as I am able. 'Eu vwairne iwi^usAiix;, with futb care, with fueb diligence. 'Ex fs^St, fadicitSs, from the root. *Ex OsS, Divinitùs, Divinely, by Di¬ vine affiflanee. 'En seofHat ioroiwi, he did it from his heart, or with all his heart. ^ 'Ex «mxS swXxetr, he formed it of clay. 'Ex T«w îïiâv ygsftÁroa, with sny own money. Sometimes If fignifies cxcefs: if aximei »^^;ati, Lucian, praeter om- nes perpetué palles, you are always paler than atty body elfe. 'EN, in, a prepofition, it comes firom it, for ; is fometimes changed intOv; and the people of Crete ufed to fay sr X'>^> chorum, into the aj'embly. By the fame ana¬ logy the Latin in comes from dt, which was firft changed into 1;, and afterwards into !r; .whence Hefiod. faith ly foot, for si; pi®;. Juft as we fay delpbis or delphin, a dolphin : as alfo, fanguis, or fanguen, blood. It commonly marks the term of reft, or the ftate in which a thing is " wherefore it only governs an ablative. *Ev o'x», in domo, at home. 'Evàyotf, in foro, in the snarket, in the aßembty. 'Er ixuT» Ceai, to be fenflble, to be one's fetf. 'Et i/ui Irl, in me eft, it depends upon me. , 'Ev wsAtxi;, xx! inortltst, Xenoph. with their fields and darts, 'É» Of Prepoßtions, 'Bf rtfir», ((ubatld. XcV) """ tvhile, 'Er rtvimt ftifrv(n, beftrt fo maiy witneffiu 'E> «T; %>, among nohtm he noot. 'Er V»! iuuicaTtf before tbejujget. *Bt TOTMC imároéi, unde^ueb confuís. 'Hnieinç ir Marmoht, Xeooph. hav¬ ing been defeated before Mantineea} where it ftandi for ad, or etrcum. 'KietçtySmt ¡stKirat iv ñ EixiXU, Thucyd. fending armed men into Sicily where it is put to flgnify in, and ex- preiTeth motion, though in the ab¬ lative. Tw haXotAr, S» i» w«xx5 Ipcyn* vairm i* irwoi ¡\íy*> Xt^'? i^Xtadat, Plato, to free you htßantly from the heavy load offtander, nobichyou have fo long laid under. Where we find the firll iv for the duration of time, and the fecpnd for the precife time in the £ime governlhent. *Ev 4»Cf ffvoi, to be in fear. 'Er onm tirai Tin, to be incenfed agdinß any body. *Ev tytOAtJutftt iTvai, fo be indißed, lo have a crime laid to one's charge. 'Ev oItw iZvoi, to be accufed, to be tbarged noitb. 'Er fuvó^ii i7v(ti, to be able, to be in favour. 'Ev naifS, vel iv xaxS, feafonably, op¬ portunely, at a favourable conjunßure. 'Erráxft, diligent^, at the frß op¬ portunity. *Ev îu«, jußly with reafon. *Ev t5 ¡ifMiÊ •tr,r xfi* ivorofeSr, ex humero manum amputans, cutting off hh arm from the ßoulder, 'Ev ^offjiiind ici, it it inßead of a medicine. 'Ev inS nfur iXiXnat, Heb. i. hath fpeken unto us by his Son. Sometimes the ablative is under- fiood: iv Ün, fubaud. rime, in bellt iv hhtncxXtf, fubaud. tÔKa, in doßorit, fup. domo, in the ntaßer's houfe. Kay, without the accent, for x«2 Iv ; as xày TUT», and even in this i and herein. 'EIll', a prepofition that comes from tsea, fe<]uor, and is joined with three cali», according to which it varies its fignification. With the cemitive it marks the time, or the place precifely,-and thb thing under confideration ; corre- fponding to the Latin fub, iitf and fuper. 'Eirî ¿¡xorrot TtubotxfV, Gaxa, fub principe Pythodoro, under the govern' ment of Pytbodorus. 335 'E«' IftS, meS artate, in my time. 'Ew! t7; pë(, fuper terram, upon the ground. 'Eerl Ifint tirai, to be in a ßrange tountry. 'Em ercXXwv, among divert things, or ' relating to divers things. "■'ewi TÎf iíerñf, for pleafure. 'E-si voairtn in iheprefenee of fo many witneffes. Eirï fût tï- y>ú/xs; «■»pfOwiV, I*! H t5{ yX»mi{ e-ipiiv, isrl is tS or¿ía- értt) otJS« Thefe are the three qua¬ lifications dcfired by Plutarch in young people ; moderation andprudettte in their mittds, ßlence in their tongues, and mo- deßt in their countenances. This prepofition frequently denotes the office or employment of a perfon, the fame as à or ab in Latin. 'Ew! TÎV istof^ron, à fecretis, a fe- eretary, 'O iwl tSv 0aat>jxZt apfayiivr, à regiis figillis, the iee^r of the feal, the lord keeper. 'O M vit ßetailattSr xpipärsar, the fuperintetîdant. *0 iari' tSv (vdwSv, or. ini*trwr hó- yetr, ipublicit rationibus. Oî Iff} rùt txtm(lar, or Uirirär, tbe maßer of requeßs. Ol M TÜ Ta/uuu, the king's treafurer, Budzus. Oí iff' l^ualaç, or w iff' i^tíatoit, the magißrates, tbofe that are in power, or ■authority. 'Effí TfiSr, iffí Ttrráfw, three and four and four. 'Effí piSutyyif áyiiv, to lead on both wings of an army, • 'Effi niguf, protenfo cornu, to lead one wing. 'Ef' laurS, of bimfelf, of bis own ac¬ cord ; and Ibmetimes by bimfelf, in par¬ ticular. 'Effl tSv 'EXXimxáyy «róXí«v, Ariftot. , among all tbe dries of Greece. 'Eff' ¿vtt^ipis-icTnTa inohi^soii, by unqueßionable authority, by indubitable proof. nicoc lib; Iff} @eâv, calling tbe Gods to witnefs his promije. 'Effí TÜv ît{5v ofAoaóaat, to fwear by the facred vißims. 'Eff} vSv vofMon, fuper faßt viBimis. Sometimes Iff} with a genitive de¬ notes a motion : àffoirXésvTSç Iw' olxv;, drawing direOly towards home. KÁvtevSe» Iff} I^^^Ei, Zozimus, and from thence be went towards Thrace. But the poets generally ufe the abla¬ tive in this fenfe : Iwi vawrir Ixaiiriiv, to puß, to run towards theßdps. With 33^ Book VII; Grçek Syntax. Wit* the accusative it fre¬ quently marks a motion^ towards a thing, and fometiroes fitiiation, or near- neft, or the duration of lime, a(id cor- refpor d$ to the Latin fupèr. *Etri tis young children the fuccejfion of the empire, 'Eni wr», thereupon^ as iv t¿t», herein. i 'Ef' iyXy imifxu, it depends en us. 'Eni T(áse-rt ptiyiaSai, to fight againß the Trojans. 'E^' hpiSf wofaeouvi^trat, be is pre¬ paring! or getting ready againß us. n«iiV Iwi Tin, to fubmit a thing to one's judgment, or to put a thing in one's power. ' > 'Eos' avrm wome-úfxsBa, ni netSro, I.ucian, let us take his advice in this, let us refer it to his judgment. 'Earl jvtmç, attder eertain elaufes. Or cetiditions. *Eiri nèv», or i Kark çv6oç iCaAs, he hit him 6n the ßomach, Oi xad* vipeot, the letws re- • lating to excefs, Kark ofárof, by force, by violence, Kar' ivifa, by heads, Kara qûAa, by tribes, Kark pma, ory«ma;, every month, Kard eroAuc, from town to town, Kark wvAtr, in the ciy, or concerning ' the city, Kark fomrrïa, among the briars, KaS' tfOfUa » Xtsiar, Ariftides, to fee, or to trajßck, 'Adeyaunr xard ri i/vkaoa sTvat, to be fubjeSs of tbe Athenians, Tk Ixar' tfxfaa-a, things that are only in appearance, Tk tuff intifanv, things that are real ' and folid, Kard Sopan Thucyd. expofed to the north, Kar* étrsç, at every word, Kark vSy Wfoxxpt, it fueeeeds accordl', ing to his deßre, Kara ^aaiAÍac y^ífípura, according- to the king's patents, Kad' ciisr, along the road, Kark x^gf s/utrw, they ßaid in tbe country r nark, on tbe ground, 'O xaè' hpMt ysyookt, or only i naff nputi one born among us, one of our time, or contemporary t oi xar* ipi, thofe ofr my age, ny contemporaries, Kark minra, generally, ihtirely, with- ' out exception, ' Kark @in, divinely, Kark retuiin, carefully, diligently, Kark xai^ôr, feafonahly, Kark xoV/uor, decently, Kara Aé¿iy, literally, to tbe letter. Z . Kark 33Í BOOK VII^ jlari \SyMf rafonatly, orfroforliM' thly. •* ' • ■ • 1C«T4 «áSiTW, perptndicularl^' ICAT& rèj SBTX« thy tatk more amt than thy found dead MieSf phir ^am prcp numero ;nor> toorum. Kar» tî» bjfifXtean haitf, pro fa- cultatibus, in prifortiott to bis eirtum- ßances. • , ^ ' ' • 'Karà rSoeatf pro loctt, aeeerding to the nature, atßtuation oftheplaeet. ■ .mará wtvwa,'Thnicyd. becauje of po¬ verty, through poverty. ■Keaà ixtrâietimca joined with an ASL ATivE^'but only among the poetcj and then it is taken for in, ah, at do i » Mr' itiapt, in ntontihut, de montihut, > It is Mo oled by ctrcumlocuäon with ' the article: si aar' àyofio, viz. iyogam, the harrifiert, or the market-people. ' < -it is foraetimes. underllood: pdput 03(, vori aptuojâf '/¡utt yot i^if ai; an ox, though hig it it, is drove along the road roitb a fmatl mhip. Sopb. that is,'mt4 wXsv^, magnus per, or fecundum jatus. la- like manner ZiW r* Sn/Mt, xui rib wo- tfiSa, nomine w patria Cyrus. And hence the Latins have borrowed catera Craius, ■fra€htsmembra, 'tee. meta', a prepofition, which is ge¬ nerally joined with two cafe», the ge¬ nitive and the accu&tive ; and foms- - times among' the poets with the ah- latrae. - j With the cinitive it denotes conjaridlion, or onion, the fame as eum in Latin. > ' Mid' m ri HxMÓr Icio, jusr' Ixifrov à ©lä;, thy of oohofe ßdejufiice is, bave'' ' God of their ßde.- Mird rate tToai, to be of a per fon's party, to. be rvith him. Grb^x^ Syntax; . Mar* exiysii tiren, a üttU efktr thhf (txA xe^s /<"*'' «fifi fwrh ririt, afier this, " Msid rèr ßie», during ¡fe. BUd* hfAi^at, rabile dey laßt, *0; ftt (ter' ifitae ^óXXit, ruho engages me in a laoa-futt, or in quarrels. xiard oñae ix«!w(t, Horn, to ptsfh toe tOards the jbips. itérés re yëi> m2 hÍKstrauo hytfsiuo ta bold for him ; fits' öorim, cum armis, > fenfe. iaaytpvritreai Plot, declaring him fy- preme commander both by fid änd land. "hxm Jitf iiwririe fjsisLaMe, Hefiod, he finned agdinß the ibmortal gods. ■ With the ablative, -which happens but feidomi it is taken for turn, in, or inter. • 'Aßfth Utm fttrh aqloio, Apollon, fodtis inieront cum iis, they entered in¬ to an allianee with them. ' • Merd H ofie-it Se-oa hhiet, H. 0. inter eos I rumor pererebtefcebat, the report fieoa amongß them. IIAPA', a prepofition that is joined with three cafes. - 'With the «enititz it marks the term of departure, efpeeially front' p'erfonS, ' being; foldoffl ufed with ina¬ nimates, but among the poets f as ne;' ~ ljup Í3oái, it -give in ny name, or to pay raitb ny money { as à me, in Latin. ■ ' ' " n»;tvi>juei wofd rod;, / come from fueb aperfon. - . i - . • 'Eyù it Olía alrm, Srt roetf airS àfsi, ' John vii. ego foio eum, (on/MÍrt(if, wifer after danger.. . i Mir' illyor, a little after. we; avTonii Luke X. qus apud' illos fueb things as they'' ¡Tk flint, gkte. We read alio, werd r3 ©s», againß God himfelf. na(k 9iSn Ml wag itbgdxon, before - God and men. • • Ttesgk wéarat du\vym, above all the divines. »With the accosatite it com¬ monly marks the caufe, the means,'» and the method or inllrument of do¬ ing or communicating a' thing, or'' the motion it has towards a term or objefV, as alfo the defeâ or excefs of fueb motion. na;d OS «xdsv, I came towards you. n«;d tvv «liny ivcrv/xf, you are more miferahle than you deferve. ' ' ba;d ,t)f iBr^oßtionsl tMtírary t» KepeBuaita, Ibfi $sg4ai, nihili facete, to bave notßeem. ^ nofd fäufiur, by end hit ßrength, and likewife beneath hit ßrength, ' Ttaf fxtiVos nrávt« nñ wiXsi ylrsrai t' iyeAt, through him the republic recaves all the hlefßngt it enjyt, nojd tStw ¿6v/*3n w»m(, he difpi- rítt aU the world, tlag' Svar ni re&Ttvfta, throughout the whole arny, ■Ttagi nSro piyon ri rSo 'EXX^wr we&yfJMra, herein conßßt the ßrength of Creeee, T¿ wet^ iftitf what in us lies, what depends on us, our free will, nofd «roXd, by. a great deal, nigaylmro wag» essXv TaSs Zafimy, IMonyf. Halicamaf. thy obtained d con- ßderable advantage over the Sabines, ' Itof» Wo>àriqtfj there is a great deal wanting, it it farfort, na;d esoXb tí; ¿fía;, vaßly beneath tés dignity, nofà vexb tísg véguat nareeßuiehen ÜXSts, he falls very fort of the glery aC' quired by our laß year's fuccefu TIagà wo\ii sXts-dai SXwr, be was very - fat from taking the town. The contraiy of wag» voXù, is wag» pustgfi wag sXiygv, and wagi Sgayb ; as wag» fjuxgiis ixSov wcnti parum ablauere à Viâoria, thy went, or were very near Ataining the vidory, Tlag' OUygfToe sXdsiV, proximi abefle, to come very near, to be within very little. • T¿ wa^ ayshh IxBótrte wadeTv, Sionyf Halicarn. havingfuffered a great deal, and being to Juffervery Joon a great deal morei or novaluefor, to-defpife, ila^ tso-üto» íttdIIi!; MgeegSTt,^fo conßdtrahly were his forces diminifed at his return, ' Haga reaSros â* iflfvyt tô; hdnot' reu;, Hetbdot. tantum non effugit per- fequentium manus, he had like to efcape thofe that were in parfu'x of him ; that is to fay, he was takpn, but he was within very little of hot being taken. This anfwets ezadly to the Latin tantum, which fometimes lignifies fo great, ■ and fometimes onfy s tantum non montes áureos pollicens, Ter. that is to fay, promißng him every thing, but golden mountains, TIapa' is ufed alb in comparifons, and that in different Ibapes'. Hag' iavrot fevHsa imriittn hydro, be thought no -body as fit for^ it as h 'lmfelf, Tsv cgarryyoo wag» wàvraç rbç sy rm wlCKas tiHaufehaayrae îJiráfii», to com¬ part a general to all thofe who in former times were famous for military atcbieve- ments, '■ Tioga rät "»tgùt, according to the tîmety as it happens. It also masks alternations wagi rgdt hpisgete, or rgsm» hfolgat, every third dey ; inftead of which we alfo fay,- wagi rgirm, Underftanding hftigav, and in like manner wag» púas, from, dey -to day, ' rignrs; xai vsarini wag' tta nvfeorogsvS- fistes, the old and the young men walked intermixed one with the other j as when between two old men there is a young 'man, and between two young hi» there is an old man. Z * But 340 Book VIL Greek Syntax. But »»{' ita oftener fignifies *)eteft ant, or bttaufe of one only. ^ , 'Enotrifu «rXnyàr oraj» Imnw- fottot, ¿Mngßrß a blow to one, and then to another. With th* ablativb, ««{i ge- nerally denotes the ^lace of reft. na;à Tc"; l/ufuXiei; ig xf^' , to fee by the way, to took at eareleßy ; ero^cie-SaXX«, to ßing into, or throw into eareleßy, or without heeding. Sometimes it aug¬ ments and marks an excefs of temerity; as ma^ts^unioi, to expofe one's felf rafily to danger. Sometimes it utterly deftroys it; wafmoiMet, to violate the laws. Sometimes it fignifies proximity, as the Latin ad ; wags^o/e-tu, allideo, I ßt near, I fit neat to. See Book VI. Chap. ii. riEFf, a prepolition, which governs three cafes, but more rarely the ab¬ lative, and admits of various lignifica¬ tions. With thb genitive it fre¬ quently marks the final caiife ;> as ori^ vät w^trrtitn ^»Xwrixsr, he quarrels for rank, or fuperiority, ns^l tveXXS Ictv a¡¡sTo$at to X^S'^s St will he of very great importance to have that place taken, ns^ woXX3 wotttadat, or tlSea-dat, nagni facere, to have a great value for, Mviiv ix« woisni oreji t- ¿>i(o;, I don't know what to do with that man, T« X5* wctsw urtjl tvi iyxtt^vs-Eu;, what is ßt to be done with regard to • that undertaking, nsfl mgoiofiaç rStor x^lyoo, I charge him with treajon, Ashwc /Ltqvi Kol wegi avTu vsorrsçlmev, Herodot. fearing Uß thy ßrould revolt againfi him, nt¡l m MXXa^av tù; Tvotuikavön mtxj^n^uírut, Dionyf. Halicarnaf, for whom he exchanged the prifonert that ■ were from Tu/cnlum, r nifi íotánon inarra, rov 2mmiot àoro- hl^avTtç, Dionyf Halicar, giving the ■,nmmmtd of every thing to Sidnnius, iii« warrif ssxiiv, to be 'fully deter¬ mined, to be deßrotts of all things, Tl &y iitroi/wir 'Aróru aal XfsXiT« mß tSv i/jiS Kanyognairron ; Lucían, what fball we feey to Anytus and Melitus itsy aeeufers f 'Egeevqt vent, to enquire about aty thing, ns{i fÁ¿xtrdeu, to ßght for hit life, nt{2 atniue, near the den. With the accusative it al¬ ways marks proximity, contiguity, or the ftate of one thing with regard to another. 'AyaoÍKaot mgi vaSva 7v, Aeeßlaut't whole thoughts were bent upon this, 'Orn wtjt Tqy èeeaysyhtf DemoftK. I being ready to depart. ''Hy a íbutráBtuu', he was a ßave to his pleajures ; exprelfing rather the habit, than the aft. Iltgi wrnSi*; luti xúXuut; s^sy, He¬ rodot. he fpent all hit time in Jacrißeing and drinking. Tí ws¿> ijul, what toneernt tnt, or, as for me, as for my part. In the firft fenfe rà is a nominative, in the fécond it is an accufative that fuppofeth sueri, * ntgi roSgot, about the mountain, near the mountain, ns{2 iptse Ugar, during, or about din¬ ner time, OÍ TI wt(i ruf wóJía iyínm, being near the town, ne^v^a wf^ veog^gati httngrria, pur¬ ple ought to be compared with purple, tuf^srrai to ^ixsy wsjl to ^xójusvoy, Plato, lovers are blind with regard to what thy love, Túmt Si mgi inia iti, ßse lays about nine eggs, 1l wtgi tit Oe3; fvetCeia, piey, or duty towards the Gods, IIsjl tùc oavrñ ynint 'neatugysiv, to be wicked to one's parents, nc{< Sirtr qX>a, towards funßt. £íc Ito; qhi vrsp vru iySonuofvo iXq- Xax«;, Herodot. being now about four- fcore years old, ns^i vtiSa,, ad pedem, i. e. apte, commode, juß ßtting, properly, patly, à propos, it is alfo ufed with an ablative, not only by poets, but even, though' not fo. often, by orators : mgi Sugi, Homer, about the fpear, nsgi TÏ x«'P XP^®' SanrÜMl 'fígiii, Plato, to wear a gold ring on ondt ßig'^l rtíf! Softirloit Siupdsígorro, Thucydide!, thty were ülltd with javelins, ' nul Of "Prèpofititnù Tti^ TM« figmt, Xenoph. m tbt ßmacb. ^ Pcripkrafis. 0¡ «njt rà ii(í, the ^ritßtf or mhú- ßcrt tf the altar.' It is alfo uléd in the fame manner of pcriphrafis, as fo that « Tor'AXs^airj^«', for inftance, fometimes fignifies Atexattder fometimes Alex¬ ander t attendantt, and fometimes Alex¬ ander with bis attendants. See Book VIII. Chap. xii. nFO\ a prepofition that governs a ctKiTivs only, and anfwers to the Latin ante, free, or pre ; as ' !!{• Svjûr, prae foribus, ante januam, iefere the deer. n¿o t5 woxs/uv, be/ere the war. W(i aigttreu, Hetodot. be prefers war te peace. • IJfo rS ßaetiMet, he/ere the king, in the prefence. II{0 «p0a\UM>i before his eyes. Hp weKkäf irSv, maty years befere. eroXXS ysió|UEv)iw> èfeig».- 'H^wovt« wgè tSn inciten, Herodot« < thy defended the cenfuls. ■ lip tSn liien fsi^sreu, be fights fer hit freperty. IT(» }óx« itaecimc, fup. irl, the tnafier is above, or preferable te the fervant. Up weutiç SaniV, Eurip. te die fer bit child. Ol vrp hftSc, fup. ytyevitte, eur an- eefiort, eur predecejfers. ■ npo^z, a prepolition, that is joined with three cafes. With -thï oenitivk it gene¬ rally marks the term of departure, the fame as inti, or wag», and anfwers to the Latin à, or ab} as vgl; 8e9 t' iyaii, bona quae funt à Deo, theblef- fingt that proceed from God. 'EXaùâigov sTmt vpl; vcçTgô;, te btft^ee ' ef the father's ftde. I In thisfenfeit is ufed after the verbs paflive : vgl; ietivten Ztgaeciitadcu, to he valued by every body. Thence alfo comes the fbllowing ele¬ gant phrafes : vgl; rñ; 0oXä; içl, è re fenatus eft, it concerns the Jenate, it is ferviceable to the Jenate. Ilgl; rñ; vvXaei;, ujeful to the city. rigl; iftin içi, it is eur affair, it con¬ cerns us, it is eur duty. ng ; tS ^svyirrec {¡srEÎV, à reo dicere, tejpeai in favour ef the criminal, as much as tp fay, to fpeai at from him. S4t It likewife lignifies the manner, the end, and relation. ' hgl; ¿rl'gl; svysrS;, like a man ef beneur. Ilgl; ¿Xl;, towards.the fea, near the fea. Ilfèf tniç In àyaSS } ef what ufe* it it f what is it good for f ngl; Xlyd, feafenably, eppertuiiely, i fropes. Oi vgl; aXfta-ret, eur relatietfs, our kindred, thefeef the fame bleed. ngl; xoxS or, fertsicious, hurtful. Sometimes it fignifies prefences vgl; TS OaSr fjMUigen, in prefence ef the happy Gods J and fometimes it is ufed in fwear- ing, vgl; @f5, per Deum. Hgl; cpgâgli' siaxxáttee^at, te be reconciled te one's enemy, lUiXEÎTai 11; vgl; ri igyigtet, it eeßt twice as much, ngl; xH"» f"' fiveur, out of com- plaifance, ngc;äxXo« Ça, te conform to another perjen's way ef living. d. I • ngls 34» Book VII. Greek Svhta*; ttfit Imc» ofptrtuneiy, tptfy, ¿ prtpûs> ■ 'o WM ft, v/bat rtlatíí t» Thui the relative« are'denominated bjr philofopbers. Eut when w^t rl » ufed in interrogation, it fignilies, quor- {vmi^wbat tt tbisftrf ietobatpurpefe , riwrot w¡it vi, to be hufy about feme' thing. , ip^iTr w|âç ^arrof} te render' ûtie"* Jelf agreeable to every ext. Tk w^ ¿Met xaX« ¿Márr Ariftot. r¿9 exebänge their own goods for otbert. Jipe nírrpt ímktI^uY) to itek againß the pricks, I Tlpe ¿»¡eatitf in favour of the au' dience. Upe é¡yn*f. out anger. Upe bíat, dp force. n^( únegSoXáe, by exce/s, Iljoi fùdar, in friindßip. Upe k^ofUr, in plenty, IIj^C feajonablyf à probot. Upe dajtCiuu, carefully, exaeify, I Upe ¿XítSeuir, truly, really, Ilfic abtdn, voitb the found of tSf pipe, prflute, n^; hfÂÀe epoda, the friendßip that fuhfißs betvieen us. Upe ¡¿dqr fup. ypippra, perpehdi- tularly. Upe ravra, thereupon, after thisi Upe à^uofea,^ according to bis dignity, 'aKX¿ yevykreit wpe tk rçau/xaret, Flut, fed inter vulnera nafcitur. With the ablative it generally denotes proximity, or identity, njôç to"; orwi», at his feet. Ufie ti mixes, mar cíe town. Upe iavrâ, in bimfelf, n¿le TÚT«; ôxoe tri, totus eft in Ulis, Hör. he is quite taken up with it, be thinks of nothing elfe. Upe is rtnote, moreover, njJe ruTue, fignifietb alfo, with them, at their houfe, . Oi mpe Ta~c núxt^i, Herodot. cup' bearers. , SYN, Att. STS, a prepoCtlon that governs tt>e ablative, and correfponds intirely to the Latin cum, with, 2in QeS, with God, with CoeTs help, Ihy Xiyco, with reafon, agreeably to reafon. , 20» «>1 Cms, to be of one's party, to be of bis fide, 2ù> tñe «é/uetc, according te the laws, 2ÔV Ho, two and two. 2ùy tpse, three and three, &«. This prepofitkm is frequently under* .Hood} as "Exà^i» airS ppmyS, ni ppurUotm, Plut. in'Denetr. be tMk both general and arng. 'TlIE*?, fuper, upon, a prepofition that is joined with the ¿eninve and accB&tive s the fignification of it will < appear by the following examples. - .'^itr thx ^bmitivb s fkynts ttptn the roof, ; *T*ij S» l 'Tos Xlif/mn âf/fras, t» begjm vsith tim^ or power. the Perfans. ' 'to).od» «rtXir> Kib urbein> near tbe 'H înA rdXXot; yenfthn i^itaits *be tetan. taking ef the tevm iy the Cauls. Ci'Toi edr, «¿rds'ixtwv;, fob idem' j'^•aii rfitiñntUif ùfMgriitJum, iy rta- tamga^. aient the Jasaè tvnf. ^ . . Jen .ef hit nan tranfgrejßens. . iovrtr tro te reduce under ' 'Toi tñ ' wetiatt hraimaStu, te ht hit eietOenee. ' ' * ; _ cemmendeâ fer bis poetry. ' , O! ^oi xtifuts Dk>nyf. Halicar, tbeje • 'Toi otsx^r âiwa«;. Herodi. hecauft thu are ia ether peepk^s powere • ef bis debauebery. , t ^ . Ve likev^fe srpad, ûad 'vii* 'Ewebmtà^ieurrfrùttciràxit.^eetùitt pedem referre, M retire, he fubdued tbe vhtle province of Phocis, ANNOTATION, ' bave 'f collthei whal te ttu appeared, meß tutejbtjs *» regard to the geverntuent of prepoßfions à and moboever will be at tbe trouble of reading ibis liß a few timet over, I do not at all doubt, but be will be foon capable of forming a rigbt idea of theirfignißcatioH,fo at to uu- Jkrßtmd them in authort. However, if thereßill remain aty dijßcultiet, tb^ will btremoved in tbe next book, tbap, xii. ' R U L.E VII. Of tiiè Quêtions of Placé. T * ' i * The queßions of place are anßhered by adverbs % Or by the following prèpofitions : The quefiion ubi, by \v with the ablative ; The queßion qüö, tU with the acciifative ; Theqkeßion unde, || with the genitive \ díñd the queßion qua, by hi alfo with a genilive,^ Examples. The qüeftíbns of place are all very eafy in the Greek} for they are anfwered either by an adverb of place, as'Afljji'««-», Athehis*, to be at Athens-, *Á9>ív«^£, Athenas, to go to Athens í 'ÁÓr'miÓív, ex urbe Athena« rum, to come from Athens-, yt'xxh others that may be feen in the fixth book, Chap. i. , Or elfe they are tnfwered by a prepofition adapted to each queftion, in all forts of nouns, whether of great or fmall places, h *Pwp»», at Rome-, tU 'PtS/anv, in urbem Romam, to Rome -, U '?¿ft.tíí, from Rome I Z 4 íiít 344 ■ Book VIL Greek Syntax. Sk¿ yïç x«i ^»xeí inftead of faying, h tñ xoiry, pueri nut meettm funt in cuhili. Bui; we may probably un¿erftaíid there a participle of motion with the verb of reft; as- ix9órrtf iSvt, inftead of qx9«r, according to what we have faid Rule IV. Though it is obfervaUe, that fome- times the repofeis put in the accufative, and the motion in the ablative ; whereof feveral examples may be feen in the preceding lift, in the prepoiitions i; and ». Whence it proceeds, that in Latin the prepoiition in, which anAvers to thofe two prepoiitions, is fometimes put with the accufative of reft, and ibmetimes with the ablative of motion, according as we have ihewn elfewhere. " i CHAP. Ill, Of the Government of the Gemtive. .Rui,e VIIL Nouns that govern, orare governed in the Genitive. 1. 7he-primitivepronoun is ufed in the genitive infiead of the nominative of the poffefftve, as zretrvf fta : 2. A genitive is alfo required after verbals compounded with a ; 3. after comparatives ; 4. and after feveral adverts. 5. Nouns, Signifying the caufe, are alio put in the genitive : 6. 'As- likewife nouns euprejftng price-, '^.matter-, %. part-, 9. or time. Examples.« Í« /T^HE genitive, as we have obferved in the Latin I method, always denotes pofleifion ; wherefore the Greeks frequently put this cafe of the pronoun às (AS, pater mei, inllead of faying, pater meus, * " " my Government of the Genitive^ 345 ny father: çiXoj the friend of us, infteadof ^ar friend.- . . 2. They alfo put this cafe after verbal nouns com- pofed of a privative, becaufe they confider them as fubftantives ; «xöi«Tof tí? who has notjeen the truth: TIf lr< JSxoç ^XtíT» âfÇOVTH UV i Ëuripid« an fervusñlie^ qui caret mortis metu ? can that man be deemed a ßave^ that is_ under no apprehenfion of death ? 3. After cptñpárátives ; f/*S, major mty greater ^an she:. xai copùnçôiy AEfchin. the_ wifeß of men are fometimes^ mifiaken : «vx^^íxí ¡j^u^ov ¿k íft xaxóv* «ütÍ zr«\ttç T*' eWwnvy « í' ¿vctçâTxç olxxç rtOti&iy Soph. there is no one greater evil than anarchy : it deßroys p)bole townsy and fafs waße their buildings : ¿^^uv ¡*nífvl v(«swtíy èV aJî xçtiTvuv Ifi Tuv àp^ofjkévuvy Cyrus apud- Plut, no body is fit to commandy. unlefs he excells in goodnefs thofe that are to obey hijn. . ^ .... . ANNOTATION. ■ - We have mi mentioned here the fuperlative, vobich alfi governs - é genitive, becaufe it-is the fame government at the Latin i at aótru» itd^íílra» Ikxeuitaroi, ^heog. omnium hominum jußifßmus, thç jufteít of all XfíVCíy ' ñuhich muß herefolved- bj the prepofition, jkß at Ludan fays,' iyà í-naaüt i xceíAím ÍSo^x, I was reputed the handfoinefi of all. / '• The reafen of the government of the comparative lies alfo in the pre^' poßtion', for /MÍ^at $fx.S, is as-much as to fiy, hr], or m^o i/tS, the fame as in Latin, major me, that is, prs me, or pro me. Who excelleth in comparifon to me; where vse find an exaä con- < fonssity betv/een both languages, if not in the cafe, .at leafi in the caufe of the government, which it the dependence on the prepofition, ' Remarkable Expreßons with the Comparative. Sometimes the comparative aflames the particle h (as the Latina ufe guam) either with its government of the genitive, as ¿¡sixno-x ¿ftWir ^ vfM/t ; or with the cafe attraâed by that of the preced* ing 'verb, ifiTt, Horn, verfatns fum cum for- tioribns viris quam eflis vos, I have converfed with braver tuen than «0«; or by inferring aprepofition with an accufative ; tKKína n nrgof rl Karißu/sM ro/xt^to smxi ritt ií^a.,, to think the honouf inferior to the merit of the adion. Mii^oais n xarà rhs wagx«"«» ¿oías, Thucyd, majoribus quam pro fuarSm facnltatum diodo, greater than their fortunet would permit : or elfe with àf ; as ftei^a » àç ra ?\¿ya m ar. tïvot. Dem, majora quam ut aliqnis explicare ea verbis poflit, frestíer than it is pojfible for words to exprefsi or finally with the in¬ finitive; '34^ Bo ok Vil. GitÊik Stktaz; ^nitive; as i*ii(up n Sfre figup, m greM to he endured, Whicli laé been introduced only to prevent ambiguity, or to adorn the fen<«. tence ; thoi^ iS>metimes they negleâ ufing thefe circumlocutions, as kÚMmp IV mouTp oiptinPt Ati&ot, inflead of xáWttp éh orttf upfí^í, h i6p$ín(, it is more eemmendahle to /ert)^ one's friends tbast ßremgers : where it is obfervable, that the genitive ¡BpiíJp is go^ vemed by the comparative, though there is an accufative berore whkh we pud fuppofe to oe done by virtue of the prepofi» tion underfiood. ■ ,i i ^ There is likewiie aitother fort of periphrafia with Àe prepofi- tions, withontq: v\siopo( ¡í^vf mecoùMuoÎP iíiíiemt',tíeh, xiiu beweis founted vsorthj of more glory than Mofes ; that is, ¿s ràM/âr(/s8 noitb Mofes, *YrJ>imythe teamed^ " tbofe that are vèrfed in the arts and fciences, . Ol íxtís iiiyau, tbofe that do not concern themfehes^with the feU-, tuces. "Eg« ßfX«», eJctra tela, extra aleain» out of danger, %*yùf xaraf«?, propè diras, near mäledißion. TjixS rut. dy¡ut>, far from the fields,. nópp« rïç viroiéreuçf far from the fubjeQ.' Opx dniAiv rïc.not far from dntiocb. " iTléigeiv T« 'lo^^áca, the Other fide of Jordan, nifa TO-ao-Jif imynViwf, exceeding all.recital, or narrative, '^E¡Á,v^ov6ív íKtívuv rdrruVi to place before them. K^oí^c» «vurií» %^uv,Jhe cries after us. ''EWpu vdvrmt above all. 'TaroxfeTM rS^ (ruxîjç, under a fig-tree. Mfrágy li/wwv x«» .Jjuwy, between you and us. ICuxxód» râ round about the thronè, 'Eiavriov vfiuvy in your prefencè. Adverbs of hiding and coiicealing: x^v^« rm äx- -XMy, unknown to the refi. AiéÔf« without his father's knowledge. Of reparation : «.nu xa/xaVs, without trouble. Ourf fniftiróa'tov dvtv çjuoyot'ar, TSTAXTO; à^frtÎf x^oyiiu 1;^«», Procop, there is no real fatisfaíiion in feafis with" out concordy nor in riches without virtue, ùd-gx ixtívwv, without them. "Extoî «í»'y«y, 'without pain. 'iStà t«u ^«y, feparately by one's felf. Of exception : wx^y axx«y, excepting the refi. Xm^îç rwy £Ífí)j(*£y«y, exclufive of what hath been faid. Ti y«g> MtáSuvov T8T0, ¿X xvtv [AtyxXuv lyyívtTxi |uiSonietiines the adverb is in the jniddle : rvt iSi»t etuut pemofih. moved hy. a privgd* , - : -> Jieafon of^the Government of thefe Adverbs. ^ Semeiimee-hrs heeaufe of their having the force of a noun fuhßax' tivet for'tu the French Jay, lors du concile de Trente ; fo the Greeke fay, \hitirt rà tra«, when, or at what t)tne of the year, Av4 the fame may be faid of fevtral others, though it it true that the modern idioms do not alvsayi anjhoer to the cleamefs of the Greek expreßon. Sometimes a prepofition is underßood ; as rmot yf^m, that is to fay, 'rmot.'yáfm, in ctgus grtttiam, in, whofe favour; x'C" being a real accufative from gratia : juß as 'when Arißotle fays, vtranZs Ííuíiy, inñar fluviorum, we muß underßand xaríi like inltar, 'which being a real noun, as 'well as nMmp\u, fuppoftth ad; adinßar, aftífr the manner, like. Sometimes it is a divißon : maunuyóoi fit ha^^áftoí, Eufeb. he would travel all over the world, or through all parts of the world. ' Sometimes 'we find thefe adverbs 'with other governments, but then it is by virtue of fotnething elfe ; as iyyvt ir» rri xotKia, Arißot. is near the belly, where ri Ko«Ata is the dative of relation. "lAto» ilau. Hem. into Troy, where'^lT^to, is the accufative of motion. And then tsaa is the fame as the prefoßtien "'t« Sometimes Government of ;Mverhl *349 , SitttttMt are put ah/elutelj : în fyyvt r^wtiautt, Tbue/i, near ' ^tcchnndred years. Several Nouns governed In the Genitive:. We likewife put,in the genitive, by virtue of,a noun or prepoßtion underftood, 5« Xhe caufe, or why î uvtIv ¿^trr,ç^ lup. he loves him for his virtue: et rriç fopUtt fup. wif», he thinks you happy for your Voifdom, 6. Nouns exprefling price: uvne¿f«.n» ivo ¿ÇoxZv, I bought it for two pence. 7' Matter: ■envoínrcu x/ô», it is made of ßone: or with the prepofition, Ix Xi'dx. 8. Part : twiov t» oä», which is akin to the French phrafe, fai bu du vin-, that is to fay, part, and not aU the wine. Auxov ruv &rm xçxrS, Prov. luputn auri- ,bus teneo, I have hold of the wolf by the ears. Lucian has put a prepofition here, Ix Xxft.%xvto^xt, to take hold of by the tail. • 9. Time, either of duration and anfwering to the Latin quamdiu-, -aiyrt oXuv trim, during five whole years : or the precife time, and anfwering to quando xi*içxi, x«i »UXTOÇ fAiXtrxv, to meditate night and day, ANNOTATION. Nouns of Time, that are put in ¡the Accufative, or in the Ablative. The time either precife, or of duration, is put alfo in the accu¬ fative, or the ablative, either with or without a prepofition, as in Latin. But we have mentioned in the rule, only what was parti¬ cular to the Greek. . Thus we fay for the precife time, r» avrp or with the nofition, it TV «¿TV rtftiç», the fame day. To» feit ^ctfiSra, tJ tjoç, fup. Kara, fyeme quidem, aflate vero. II«» tÍ «ç^^awrvTs h«pt|o» alitctiMt, Bafil. tue ought to reverence every thing that is re- markttble for antiquity. We likewife fay for the duration of time, ó*t¿ x«> í«« or elfe it îriot, during eighteen years. TqtTf oXnt ftv»«i, or iwi during three tubole months ¡avoXvt yjf>tot, or ísrí woAw» ■ygátot, during a'long time. "Om tooiwt j¿jó»o» «^xôl» ¿xóXarof /s.ttei, tSto»' hT »oftí^ti» to» ««>xeV«To», Juftin. tue ought to think that man very unhappy, tuho 6vts a long tinte in bit tuickedne/s vsith impunity. 356 fiôoîk yil. ^xmtax. 1 ^ TO dirov, M« ¿SbeíoK lral>, «M* lyíjflw«» uc)M^ |ejwi>ot, Plttti thus the voitkid thatfeem to eftape immédiate vengeante for their trims, are not punißed later, hut ^ger ; nor does jufiiti overtake them vshen they art old, hut thty mÚíip poa-xvroít to feeU ox, touch a fick perfon, 11. We mull except verbs of feeing, which govern an accufative in quality of aflives: Luke viii. to fee you. OiSivx Kxtwti Afts ix. he faw no man. - Verbs of the other fenfes have aifo fometimes the fame force ; as ¿í îysvrxTo to Síu^y John ii. when he had tafled the water. See Rule Xi. i 12. Caring and negleding: vf*ûv ¿th xvtsa-Sxty Plato, to take no care of us. 2« í' » ovtí m, Ariftoph. I won^t mind you. 'AfAtXtTi tup fixupy Xenoph. you negle^ 'your , friends.. *CLXiy¿^sp t«i» xotpupy líber, they neglected the affairs of the commonwealth. *íív ¡aítx¡ji.íxhp xpxyxny which we muß certainly repent. 13. Undertaking, endeavouring, beginning, pur- fuing, &c. vxovxy 1 aim at the mark. IIsigx ' fering from the Latin. Reafon of this ConfiruSlion. Non» in the lafl^eniioned, at alfo in thofe that are particular to the Greeks. 'it is eafy to fee that the government depends hut on three things \ 'either on a prepoßtion underßood, or an accufative underßood, vthich in' dudes the right government of thé verb (having elfevohere proved that no verb, either Greek or Latin, (an govern really of itfelf a genitive) or on ÍU)!», xàçtr, or evs*» Ukevsife underßood. 7hus vahen vae fay. ¿pÍTi/xt as rSp ÉyxXig/LtiÍT&iV, Dem. abíbivo te .criminum, vae muß underßand Hudp or yjapir, as Demoßhenes hita- felf faid, XmaípánTet yçaÇtip ¡ceüp íouútctí. Cteíiphontcm íacrarum tabuiarum reum agebas : or elfe vae muß fuppofe a prepoßtion. as Xenofh. húna as crsç» Sa^ár», 1 charge you with a capital crime. I'ut tpiSut ¡/.siÁsnao,* I/her. remember tby friends, ßp- at he has expreßid it elfevabere. £/*»Î£r0»ç wsj» tomimi 7u»ai*of, you re¬ member this woman ; br vae muß underßand itiiyiP», memoriam, Xoyia/MP, cogitationem, or fome fuch thing. 'S.lçysip tîî ^oíK¿aani, Plut, to drive from the lea, fup. ¿srí, 'as in Xenoph. iita rup »¡ax^ûp uuXiaai. to hinder one from com¬ mitting Ihameful things. Silius Italiens has expreßid himfelf in the fame manner : ^Captae prohibere nequiret Cum 1*06008 aquilie Lib. vi. . r Tap au¡Á¿ra>p Ivi/xlAorrai, Xenoph. they take care of the body .; , jufi as Apul. fays, curare corporis, ^"¡r muß underßand vss^i or iots^. rktup «¿tor; /xeTiei, Ifocr. they take care of this. MsKstup J/niç yüp xotpüp. Id. to take care of the public affairs. 'E?iiv9e^â as rë, Eurip. I free you from this toil, fup, cano.' 'as in S. Matth, vi. pvaat ¿oro rS loepii^S. libera nos à malo. Livy has in the genitive, levarant »nimvtn religioais. £¿i>q; xoipupsTp. Herodi. ledUelfe confortem. In like manner Plautut. paternum feryutp fui participant confilii,^«/. vts^i, or the accufative. f-í^oí, partem, Ifocr. T5p xtpSbpep-wMTrop /xÉgo; fts^í^naip, they will filare moñ of the dangers. ' Sometimet Government of the Genitive. 'iemetimts they join two geuitivee with the fame 'verb, one of 'which it governed by a prepofition underßood, as in the preceding exampleti and the fécond by a noun exprejfed or underßood, which noun is governed by a verb, or in fome other manner ; as xetrtiyo^S on íorátro» rät rtrrá^at, JEfch- accufo tui (fup. malitiani) de omnibus quatuor rebus, I lay tbefe four articles to your charge. T»i yaç ¿* iyioxixo rut ùt^^ùi ¿gtríí > Dem. who could help ad¬ miring the generofity of thofe men ? ^here is governed by the verb ¿yátratro ; and ¿çstîç by ittr-i underßood : or elfo à^trvc muß be the cafe belonging to the verb, and rut àt^^ût muß be governed by ßs^vtnc itfelf. Which Virgil has imiiated, lib. xii. Juftitiasne prius mirer, bellive laborum ? *0» ot> lA^TTovof rut iSotHit coroivoat, hyfias, whom you had leis value for, than for your pleafures. Where è\àrrotoç governs rü» iíotüt, as a comparative, and is governed itfelf hym^) or mgo under' ßood ; agreeably to what this author fays elfevshere, weçî éítto( iyutro, pro nihUo putahant, they fet but very little value. And Ifocrates, woXXS vroitioaii^tit, I ihould value very much, I Ihould have a great efieem for. And in liie manner the reß. I CHAP. ly. ' Government of the Dative, and of the Accufative. R U L E X.. Of the Dative. I. Verhs of adoring or fupplicàtîng, 2. admonißing, 3. fighting, 4. converfing, following, 6.. overtaking and running, 7. as alfo verbs compounded with ¿¡où, all govern a dative cafe. 'Examples. The dative, as we have obferved in the Latin method, pnarks in all languages the relation of the aûion of the verb ; that is to fay, the attribute by which it is fliewn, that fomething is done or happens to another : wherefore this cafe may be put almoft every where, in Greek, as well as in Latin. But here I have Only taken notice of what feems more particular to the former language •, as after, I. Verbs of adorihg or fupplicating: ■bt^oskovuv tS Qiu, to adore or worßip God. Eíp^soien QtoTç, fuppli- care Diis, to pray to the Gods. A a 2 2. Verba 35^ Book VIL Greek Syntax; , 2- Verbs of admoniihing or reprimanding : KeXmV» Sat to eotntnand the people. Tln^áro[*.oíí «rot o-uv r¿iMai vVoTtOf(r&xi, Ifocr» J.ßall endeavour to advife you in a few words. Arif*VTgtoi ¿ $«Xdj£uç n.To\tfiectu rf ßäifiXtt zrx^vu rx wt^\ ßxxtMiXfKxinyii^ovixi ßtSx/a xrcííríxí, xxlxvxyivcStrxtuijf X yx^ el fixoi toTí ßxi' xiAfio^firsTv [â\v, i^l^tivSi i*ii, PlatO, 'iou may difpute but not quarrel abotit 'words. " hocl. by nuhicb of her friends perfuaded? 'Si rt jffXs'nóp (X rZt xoXeutap nimnia^, iputrtot iyú cot, I^ucian, if your fiat ter er s have doue you emy barm, I am not to blanu. ' Sometimes the prepofition is underftood, and the genitive is put without it : moXXi iKetrrufMu Aia^tpu, Dem. I am inferior to JEf" thinet in feveral things. 'HrrScdoti rap ov/jtfofSp, Ifocr. toßub under misfortunes. Nitít/o; tioatintpot, Ath. afiante, to his belly. Rule XIV. That in the Greek there are three abfolute cafes. I. Hhe genitive is fometimes made an abfolute cafe ; 2. this happens fometimes alfo to the accufative j 3. and fometimes to the ablative. Examples. By an abfolute c^e we underftand the participle pr verbal noun with its fubftantive, which feems inde- piendent in difcourfe, though it is governed by a pre-^ pofition underftood. I. Thus ¿Sz Book Vih Greek Syntax. 1. Thus becaufe the Greeks have prepoíítibns of three diSerenc governments, we may obferve that they. have therefore .three abfolutc cafes, the moil ufual of which is the genitive ; as ifis n-«^c»Tor, me prasiente, in my prefence. Térz j* «»toç toíst», Arift. which hung thus, Xstf*uMç ííu ¿»íj^eíjno'aj', Thocyd. fup, Traço'fToç, th¡y retired towards the beginning of winter, Kx\ x^xtTvotf i^£Tçx)çn\KrSf Xenoph. fup. îéoktoç, and he had like to break his neck^ by throwing him down. 'EaÔcît«» Í£, as they were come. "Tiwroj woXAw, Xenoph. as it rained very hard. lAvUKoynUrrocyitbeingfabled. ©sS íiíó»«?, icylti ç9o»eç. K«i /An íiióvrofy fAnSii/ I Latin. 1. The inftrament: lipct bedrück him tioith bis fwerd, fap, I», as in Eurip. «» mMyùu pierced by a dart} and in the Scriptare, in virga ferrea, tvitb eat iron rod. 2. The manner : xai tSto, ¿ >áyu ¡mu», ¿xa' Arifiot. and this net only by mords, but al/o by deeds, "o f óatt ¿y»9o(, x»i ¿ya- 6é>> vátTvt mttçtxriKoi, Greg, ' NyíT. be that is good by nature, and giver of all shot is good. rv»à t« Ktaiusfíitn, rnt rnc 4'vX'í ¿/Mffíait tfífai'i', Democr. apad Stob, a woman that embellißses her fate, di/cle/eth the deformity of her mind. The prepofition is ufed here thus: lxT»o(Tç«ere;Demofih. Stsastner?yef «k Id. ob quae gaadebant, for wbicb thy rejoiced. í^t •srXir^, Xenoph. elatus ob divitiess. At!* re; iwi fuiit» ¡míXKh, p(»¡^eiif Koii ri^vtaieu, n s» rf rut vmoxiut tvigyinTt', Philo, the greateß pleafure and delight of kings ought to confiß in doing good to {heir fubjeQs. An accufative may alfo be pot here along with a prepofition ; Sii xce^i^iat xai fthotrntat, hSit rät iirap ayaBut ¿tÚKurot «rí^vxr, ' Demolíh. there is no one blejsng in stature, but what is attainable through labour andinduflry. At' ¿¿ytixuf ivcxii^arx ir». Id. the commoneß attd eaßeß of things are ■Srendtrtd dißcult by laxisufs and effeminacy. - 3. The efficient caafe ; as ixr (An xxfcrn rte« sin/, Arillot. unlefi he be affiiQtd with fossse dißemper, fiip. isrt, as he has put it elfe- where : çfiôvo;, x¿ir«r iv' ¿AXarçUtt xyx6o~í, invidentia eft segritado propter alterius res fecundas, Cic. envy is an utuafinefs at other peoplds ' profperity. We may alio underftand here aít¡tpr^i¡y the prtpeßtion: ivi vváru* Ahkís Ifitranot, xai T.e^itUi, under the confalíhip of Lucius Pifo, and Aulus Gnbioius. ßnd in Ludan ; aiipttSwft iw) wct^rrof, à^âfiwf S h¿M»oi r» api vrafaxtiiMMtt &c. repente mitüßer tollens ea qua tibi erant appeßta» of a fudden the fervant taking away, though yon was flill preíint» what was fet before you. Where it is nsißble that >«-< ««¿¿rra; istbt /ante as cu maprroi, te prsfente. T'hus in Xenepb. Só^arra it -vaSrat ni ¡s,tt rçartvfMiret hís vero decretis, exercitus abierunt; that is to fay, fstri reâh» things having been ordered thus, the armies marched away. ■ . Semetinus they put the partitipk in theßngular : ií^»p itisTr raSrxe irro^cvo^iö«. Plato in Prot, after we had taken this refolution, we fet out upon our journey. Where Budàut ßermifes /orne nstßake, though with very Utile foundation, ßnte we find atfo in Xtstopb. iá^aus it retvrei, ati^v^en ëyo wotñaat, having .approved of thefe things, they ordered ihem to be done. We findai/oHot, it being proper: itñ'axp, it having been proper: ixhxóistpot, it being likely to hap« pen, or poffible : àxaèh, having been heard : yty^iifMPot, it having been written ; and fuch like. But as, when we Jay, leftum eft, vifum eft, ffid. we are to underfiand ro legere, ts videre, iäc. according to what we have proved in the Latin method ; fo when we fay we muß underfiand no t infomuch that it muß be confirsud fur« ¿¿I»» ioxtTo rocvrá, l¿c. after having found proper to approve thefe things, or after the approbation of thefe things had been agreed to. Where there are two confiruSione (juß as when in Latin we fay, tempos legendi libros) one of ió^ap ioxtîp, which is the eon- iord of an adjeSive and a fubfiantive ; and the other tf ioxtit recSr«, which is the government of an adive, and fo for the refi. The Latins have fotnetissus imitated this neuter and abfolute esçpreffionp at T. Livy, et ne ibi quidem nunciato quo pergerent, tantum con« vocatos milites commonnit qua via omnes irent, fäe. Whether the Nominative can be an abfolute cafe. Some grammarians are of opinion, that the Greeks make ufe of all tafes, except the vocative, for the abfolute eonßruäion. But we have already faid enough to prove, that what thy call a dative abfolute is in reality an ablative ; which foall be yet further evinced in theneset book. Chap, ii. So that the quefiion muß he reduced to thé nominative only, which thy pretend to be taken in an abfolstte fenfe, in examples ' fimilar to thefe here: ¿poíiaPref. rS aáfiucTet muXui yUtrou «ig, Arißot. as fpon as they open the pores of the body, fire is kindled anew. But on the contrary there is no nominative, but what fuppofetb its verb ; as here ¿poi^apreç for otxp ipoi^aprtf Sri, which is < she fame as cipoi^a/ri, esccording to what we have obferved in tbe~ fourth rule. tloMq (i r^arii) ara, à várnt Irai moXeuf vvor Sé^arbai, Thticyd. that is to fay, Sri yiç, or inti yàç vroXKn ara rvyxá'ti, tic. for the troops being fo very numerous, no town will be able to hold them. Likewife when we fay, Srui i/il^ai, every day ; as in Tbucyd. crai hfi.i^as .os^oihxSfSPoi, expe£ling every day': and in Gaza, in his tranjlation of Tully upon Old-Age, orai ifii^ai íirv^rn/xípop páparos StèiSi, for the Latin, mortem omnibus boris itttpemfenlem timens, afraid of ' Of Ahfoiute Cafáí ' ^65 •f death impending every moment : iut tie pr^er eenfiruBim of k h Ô0WI iiaip h aêraTt Si9íu(, (¡fe. being afraid as many days as he had left to live» Horace has imitated this cenßruäioa^ meiere be/oftf Non fi trecenis, quotquot eunt dies, Aqike ! places iilacrymabilem ^ ■ ' Pintona tanris, läe. Lib. it. Od. 14. jyhicb may be exfrejjid thus in Greek t Ov^ ar T^tanómotf Saeu ft/AÎgcetp Z piiiTem, ¿iiéut^vrop nAarve« TccvçDif Karaprgivme, no, not even if yon ftrove to footh every day the relentlefi Floto with a facrifice of three hundred oxen; ff^bere it is plaitty that '¿aat is no. atore an abfolute ca/e, than quotquot dies ; and at quotquot dies titttß be referred to eunt, fo ooett Juppofetb «a|í^orra(, prz* tereunt, orfome otherfucb merb. Lut if moo chance to meet nuitb San- in one viord, as in Ludan and others, it is tien an admerb, attd it thereforeßtbjeS to no dijpute. They pretend atfo, that t|or, and tie like neuter participUtp are nominatives abfolute : but vie have juß nova made appear, tbctt they tare accufatives, vibich fuppofe »»ri, or Jome other prepoßtion. Wherefore, / think, vie may conclude, that there are no more abfolute tefes, bifides the three above mentioned, vi», the genitive, the accufa- thoe, and the ablative : and that vie are not to form aiy other idea ef the nominative, but that of a cafe, vihich has alviays a relation to fame verb, either expreffed or underßood, conformably to the fundamental rule given in the imroduSion to this fynteue. Whether the abfolute Cafe ought alw^s to refer -to' a different per fon. This abfolute cafe may refer to the fame perfon, or to the fame thing fiat faall be exprejfed before^ or after by another cafe, as vie have fhevm in the Latin method ; and examples hereof are more common in Greek than in Latin. Hfofipiiuv ry ti»x" «wa«/tís», Xahórrtf ■ tsj fé>MKat, ¿ta, ri oxorMoi pu à •ar^oiSéreap etorùp, rS ht rS ntfotttpou avrils âirurarayipTos tS ¿pípn, n paramacarop, ,fbuçpd. Where vie find not only v^oiSoptup ainüp in the genitive abfolute, refer¬ ring nevertbelef s to the fentinel exprejfed by fbluxxas in the accujativei but Hkeviifa KaraMoárrap. They drew near to the enemy's ramparts, unobferved by the fentinel, who could not fee them for the dark> nefs of the night, nor hear the noife of their approach, by reafoa of the blullering of the wind. ©iS TO y tîçy,KÔo'* «îToî *eçji*5, to xasnior íti xatoinfioup nrûop Tnáfirvs ovv àvift, ypápTos, ¿s «{"lAio» 0¿* aAÔo,, l'pa pi) A/*t§' vvor^áaa ruí. Eurip. in Hel» Where vie find ypípros in the genitive abfolute, uotviithßanding it refers to immediately faeceding. I have heard the voice of the god Mercury, who told me I ihould live fome time yet in the famous country of Sparta with my huiband, it being known to him that £ did not care to come to Troy, leil I ihould bed with a firanger. Tliffas 366 Book VIL Greek Syntax. tliffof if Tw II(X«vsní9!mi> Xvctfrmrüt VftaÇfvrSf tnrta» rúrrtif mtfi 'Af>i»ií»t» ÇtXet»6^ùve)f avrat ianií^ítn, Polyetn. Strati^. Iii. vi. Pyrrhus tnarchiog towards Peloponnefns. gave a very kiod reception to the Lacedsmonian ambafladors« that came throu^ Arcadia to meet him. CHAP. VI. Obfervätions on different Governments. r I. Different Governments joined together. A Verb may admit of different governments in the fame ex« preffion. according to the different rules explained above ; as. 1. A genitive with a dative. vXtottxrH rérp a», 1 furpa/tyt» t» this. 2. A genitive, and an accufative. HoiimS di>en, Matth, xxv. and he fitall feparate them from one another. £1 fin Urnon w rf; HS, if you won't get out of the road. Some verbs govern one time a genitive by reafon of their prepo¬ fition, and another time an accnfative, becaufe of their fignifica- tion : TtxMfs ¿pS, Soph, keep away from your children. Xiina f ¿Mí* àtpùo, Dero, laying afÙt all tbt refi. Likewife, itwd^a n rät àitagria», I free you from your fins. 'Auoíéu at tit ifumot. I taie of your cloatbt ; and the like. Some admit of a difference of government by virtue of the pre¬ pofition wherewith they are compounded, which governs different cafos: vvt^naat rS orvgys, Herodot. they paffed the tower. Tv; iyanio vvi^ntoA, Chryf. to be mounted above the beavetu. T«r •sn^Pfovvm;, Lucian, undervaluing others, 'tvtgpgtw ras oXXas israrrotí. Plut, the fame. IV. Sthe Expreßvn changed by the Government. Sometimes the phrafe is changed by djfferent governments, which import the fame thing ; as xamyogù an m^íoavea, or wfittoMi, I accufe your, treafon : or e-s «rgeWíat, I accuji you of treafon. 'Avorton an t3{ àa'uiu Or o"ol rn* ¿oía», or at t5ç èatat, or at m» iaiat, I deprive you of your fuhflanct. Xitnui» tpMura àft/xgrâiut, or ««oçvàrom (both by attraction) or ¿/»«fría», or «15« rñt íftagriat I am fenfibU of my error. Which is foificient for examples. CHAP. VII. Obfervations on figurative ConfiruSlion. • WE fliall obferve here the fame order as in the Latin me¬ thod, reducing all thefe figures to four. ^ I. That which marks the want of fome word in a fentcpce, and iscailed ellipsis, pf which the zeugma tnakes apart. a. That 368 Book vil Greek Syntax. a. That which marks a redundancy of fomething in a fentence^ and is called pleonasm. , ^ 3. That which niarks/ome difproportioh and difagreementinthe parts of a fentence, and is called syllepsis. 4. That which marks the inverfion of the natural order, and is called HYPERBATON. We lhall treat of thefe figures here in ' very few words, as we foppofe the reader to have acquired fome knowledge of them al^ ready from what we have faid elfèwhere. _ I. Ellipßs. The general maxims of this figure Ai'uft be taken from thé Latin method. But there is not one more neceffary than that of the word or underflood. As when they put the adjedive neuter for a feminine fubilantive : to wpoo xai rl 'Amx»> 'EAAÁJbf, tht beauty and the elegancy of the Greek tongue.', that is to fay, rà o'o^oit When they put a neuter with the fubilantive feminine : ovx ¿y«- fior evoAuxotçowiv, Horn, the government of many is not good, is pemi- tious. Hotwo* i avKopimu Dem. an informer is an abominable thing, Xarácio» xai oVftv^trót irt (pü^i ßtSeuof, Plut, a confiant friend is rare, -and hard to be found. QiTot i ¿Avótiot x«ù vxtrat ¡tio xyahZt Sioíi, msecrrut Si ànOgùvoiç Plato apud Plut, truth is a divine thing, and the four ce of all blejßngs to the gods, and to men. Sometimes they put the fubilantive ; as ¿dátarop ^ Setoe, Epiñet. truth is an immortal thing. Sometimes they exprefs it along with the other noun in the ge- nitive ; as to jKuo-tx«; Synef. mufick, juil as Phsedrus has put res cibi for cihus. *Erefyi íí ô Kxtxx¡ vortffvüf tv» ¿Si^fny, xß/nm 'Sxv/ixf-o», ¿i AÉyETou, yvpxiKof yppoji,tP7ip, Plut. de Auguilo. Ccefor •was exceeding fond of his fifier, who by all accounts was a wonderful fine woman. This fame noun is underilood, when they put a genitive inilead of a nominative; which is more ufual with the Attics: si'Se /mI tÚt» tS ¿yo(63 y/voiTo, fup. res, or Supxytf, facultas, I wißt I could be fo happy. ' Likewife when they put t^ m^ùrx for w^wrof ; as Itrit ' Ahp¡pxUiP, nxm^urx, Lucian, keep thou the firft rank among the Atheniasu. When the article is put with an adverb or with a prepoiition, a participle mull be underilood agreeing with this article, if it be not expreiled ; as rrtp lmwo>Stç aínx, fup. uaxp, the fiefis -on the furface, Ariñot. Toîç pvp (fup. ao"») xoù tok «rçôrtçor (fup. ytyovóo») Id. to thofe that are at prefent, and to thofe that have been formerly. *H xóxAv »tPPíxtí, fup. yiponsppi. Id. a circular snotion. In like man¬ ner, when we fay to eaxKxi, formerly, to -m^p, before, to »S», or t» pijp, nunc, now, we are to underftand v^xyyM, or in the plural vp^xyyxTx, according to prefent matters od affairs, ^ A participle muil alfo be underilood when we lay, rx xxr Hyo^xp, fup. o»T« or ytpoytpx, fbrenfia, things relating to the bar. *0 Iv è^xp^Ti;, fup. UP, who art in heaven, *H xpu ßx9\\p\x, fup. nnx, the kingdom of heaven. Ol y.tù''iyxi, fup. iró¡t,tpot, poileri nofiri, our Of the Figure EUipfisl 369 %Hrpoßtrtty. "t» é» orivl ¡íé^Hí, or xetrí ¡"■(¿»i, Tup. twu, lîogula'* lia, things taken fiparateîj, or in particular, 0» I» ra réX«, fu p. «mç, that ate in employment, orpoß. And in like manner the reft. But it will not be amifs to give here, for the greater eafe of jotfng beginners, particular lifts of thofe words that are moft com¬ monly underftood among Greek authors, after the manner obferved with regard to Latin authors, in the'Latin method« F I R S t LIST« Of feveral Nouns unäerßood in Cfeèk Authors. MASCULINES. ^ *ANOPnnos IS underftood^ when we' lay, Tor wan, tÍc vrxjiv, defundtum, a "àtad man. Kl'NAYNON, or AFO'MON, when we fay, or Sien rey tn¡i or iarif to run the r'ß of one's life. MY'eoz, when we lay, man «(rrç ; 4v&ir have you faid f for #«ci> (sXin, as in Latin, aufculta pa'ucis,/«^. verbis, hearken a little, OfNOÎI, when we fay, n faeroXúy W tvm; or' si; svvàr tumCiKkir, Theocr. really you drank agréât deal as y du was going to bed. irrPETO'z, wheA we we fay, "Kits -rji- heiat, difcutit tertiahas, ftp, tebres, it tures a tertian agttt. ^ tOli Blt>N, when 'we fajr, (MraX. iima, xs-mXiiw, to end bis life, to die, TPO'nOT, when we fay, i yij ¿yñ¡ «rs; SX wayrà; Ssáuus tin sviráSeiav, this man ßrives every toay to move the paf- Jlons, Dionyf. Halicarn'. de Ifocr. "TITOOZ, when we fay, »; ßaSin ècec- 'ftiSsie ! how profoundly you ßept i XPO'NOS, when we fay, aX koaUs, jjstjuSye; kai ijo; Sif/ctáraT« fúret, HippocV. ventres hyemis & veris, fup. tempore calidiores, ' the belly is naturally hottefl in winter and fpring. *Ek iBaKeuS, a long timeßnce : iià fsaxfS, Stà woXXS, jam longo intervallo, a long rime ago : Ivtút», Thucyd. mean while. FEMININES. Ál'zeHTIZ, or "oZMtf, when we fay, mrXBev ß^ota ¡as wgorsCaXs $ unde mihi bo* mines odor altapfus tß f ra~K, xn'PAN, when we fay, 1'; mtoktfMt, tit watflia, in hofticum, fup, folum, into an enemy's country ; in pa- triaih, fup. te'rram, regiuuei#, irito hit native country. FAflTzZA, or OßNH'j when we fay, b 'EXXimxè, v 'attí; the Greek tongue, the Attif ttngsu. rpammh\ when we fay, «r^;ô(âv)y' ad perpendiculum. As alio, irr' S'^Seút;, direñly, perpendicularly, al'kh, when we fay, tnr It! SavárM ■x¡níjxtn, fentenced to die. 'B(lintn XaCsfv, fup. iUsn, to caß ene't. adverjary by default, or for want of appearing in court. AO'SA, when we fay, tuttiyt tnr èficàr, meâopinione, meâ fcntentiâ, ac¬ cording to my opinion, , . A0PA\ when we fay, àXaiTixë, Xi- eVTÜ, ¿¡nrñ, ttSg.ç, See. vulpina, leonina, urßna, himtulina; tec. fup. pellis, afaxmh^, when we fay, p^ixúvr àiwTeftca, mille drach'mis emi, to coß à tbirufand drachms. 'eiuztoaai'Z, or fome fuch word, when we fay, iv tcut t3 ßxaiXso>( ÍA nrXaTç, in diplomatis regis, iii the king'n letters patent. , 'haiki'a, when we fay, Ix via;, fupx' bXixiV;, from one's youth. In like man-«- ner, Ix via, Ix fMt¡atúa, Ix araiiie, as là Latin, à puero, ■, . 'HME'pa, wheh we fay, ly t5 itrsáan, the day before, the dey fol¬ lowing. 'H eá/x8|oy, é avfsos, to-day, to-morrow. Tin xu(iar SfeoXtpsTvi fop. ¡¡feí¡av, va- dimoniurn promittere, to promtfe to ap¬ pear before the 'day appointed. Sud. tä; Xugiaç ¿moXeitreadas, or icSfsTaàae, vadimonium deferere, to mifs appearing ât the day appointed. Bud. for xi/¿úe i$ taken for the fixt day, as that on which the affair is to be decided. morpa, or mepi'z, when we fay, eiflf, hac,/»p. /««!{«, parte, on this ftdt. Metjsîv tüv !5-r,y, fup. aequam portionem metiri, to render like for like. lni the fame manner, sane, nfes. asiaf, ex aequo, ex femilTe, i. e. ex aequa & dimidiàta, fup. parte, ejually, or by half. NAT"z, when we fay, rfsi¡itc, mr- Ti)X5VT6{o;, a galley with three rows of ears, a galley with ffty oars : ,-Sia\e*Tix«», largiiirit, teij*, grammaticam, rbetoricam, dialec- ticam, medicam, fabrilém, fuf. artem, grammar, rhetoric, logic, phyfic, the me¬ chanic arts. ■ TIMHX TIMitPfAN, or 'AMOI- BH'N, with the accufative à^tav, nc- cording to Budaeus ; as tw íve- Tiysi», to fuffer the punipment that one deferves. ■ TPAIIE'ZHI, when we fay, ¿irá tñf aiitre airndpitSa, we pall be fed from the Jame table. " ^ XEfP, when we fay, rñ îefw, ñ ¿giçsgf, dextrâ, ñitifíri, Jup. manu, to the right, to the left. Likewife àwXsTy ¿¡x^irsgatc, haurire duabus,yi, TO Si or vrgof fecov/xígiav, Ariften. one fart of the country is towards the north, and the other towards the Jouth. Kafl' Ï TO~c Ssfuott avtsyytai, where it joins to the potilders. To tie aÙTÔy »xoy, fup. fcigoc, quantum in fe fuit, as much as in him lay. To fios coriCáXXcy, quantum in me fuit, as much as was intrußed to my care. Sometimes in one member of a fen- tence the feminine (jtuga. is underftood, and in the other the neuter fiigoc ; at nixwtiac fúr Stoy £rai, TsrârSrai Si tm h/jUoss, Lucian, dsmsdia ex parte Deum effe, altera parte dimidia eße mortuum. me'tpon, when we fay, oijj S/uoiot ÔXX' idya pfei'fUf scgsBsinre, Thucyd. you would not be eßeemed equal, but fome- what inferior, TlAiCeOE, when we fay, to cgan- omxit, TO yevTixiy, to oîxSTueiy, Sec. mili- tum coetui, the JoUiery ; nautarum, the erew} praedonum, a gang ef rehbersi famulorum. ■ • t)f the'Figure ÉUi^ï. à traïn^ or rtttnue of at- ^Ohatoriiffl, tatdanttm ■ , ZifMA, when we fay^ m^tCxiijuí-. Vk «-loiint lui yoffm, indutos fiadonenx ibper nudo, ¡up, corpote^iavmg a I'l- ■ntn cloth caß about bis naked body. • TOT~TO> ' in making ufe of thefe, 'termes iiriiufttf demonßratton ; ^iág- yof/Mf craft, or policy ; anfostm, indiciumil w-proof i "nu/jA^ua, a mark, or- TConjeSure, and fuch like { as iSrai; ñ xoaút harídtm 'irárrat àvdjtfn'o;, aurore- fíit rst ¡aa rñt xoxoS'aijuoyút; Íti/xtu¡yóf. Te*fci(Ut &s (fup. i-ÜT» ift) repm/osnt mOKKd oioivZái, xa! (Mçsyôjxem tutgri^ü- n, tcc. PluC. To this ßate are all men reduced by vice, of itfelf a fufficient in- ßrument of mifery. A proof nohereof is, that Jevtral arejilent, even nohen their limbs ate mangled, and hear with patience thet orture tfßripesi &c. , " " 'TAfiP, when we fay, tAter- tas, calida lavari, to bathe in warm water, ■Vvxgto «rtvur, fcigidam bibere, ùquam, to drink cold water. Unlets we ftould choofe to underftand Xergsy in the £rft, and wó/oa in the fécond. ^ OA'PMAKON, when we fay, ¿Urlioroii, ■Ifn antidote, or f aguoxeta, when we fay, •tn'hiTsr, 3?* «©E'rMA, when we ¡fáy^ •, ^tyyoorm, ua) ír¡(W, xoi yufeuKÎôieta Lucian,-they ¡peak with a low, Jqueak- ing, and effeminate voice, , xp^Tma, ornPA'rMA, we have already, mentioned it as one of the moft general, rules ; but we are to underftand it like- wife, when we fay, ¿rí' ötb, ¿vB' Sy, UV, quamobrem i for what ? As alfo i^- sqi* 5, quamobrem,- propter quod, or propter ilia quse, on which accouM, dee' caufe of which, and the like. ADJECTIVES UNDERSTOOD. Sometimes adjeOiveS are underftood } as 'AnAAiTN, when we way, If iv¡xo», à teneris unguiculis, yi-em axe's youth, or tender yearsc 'en, or ©A'tEPON, when we fay, /cnii ivoTv qiSio-ai i/xaqruoa, n xaKÜoat hfsSíci n o-^âç aùrèi ßtiattiaSat, that is to fay, îiw"v SirsfOT, that they may not fail its one of theje two things, either in hurting us, orßrengtheningtbemfelves,^ "OAOÏ, when we fay, itk ßlu, dur¬ ing life ; tù, vuxrof, Ariftoph. all night. nOAAOTi% when we fay, îià xé*"s and when it is taken for a long fpace o| time, for a long while. SECOND LIST. Of Verk, or Participles underßood. AeCn, when we fay, &en Sirxf pû- li{5 (fup. îtTv) auvrfiSivai, Plut, ¡o that he had like once to have been crujhed to pieces, • nsgiifssive Xi^' aaraçërat ri Sttvípsva rSv vrgay/xárm ; tamdiu ex- ^efiavit donee res turbart coeptas com- poneret, word for word, expeftavit Umpus quantum componere, fup. iSn or ix^öv, with sl( or ¿>; coot tie uaraçrirat, he fiaid as long as was ne- eeffaryfor queUing the infurreSion. In like manner, vspiy.tmre rà airSn ïnaçot ia-èi ¿oto^nv, Thucyd. that is to fay, öoov If TO iociÇôv,^gathering each as much as was requifite for hart fuhfißtnce, Ei'Ml', iT, ifi, when we fay, río yif fti xeXà;, yiyae vrovoc, |^urip. fup, sj-î, it is a great ßavery to lead a vicious life. MeraéoXô wirtm yXvstb, Id. change is agreeable in every thing, ■ ' "âç îBot, ut mos, jup, eft, as eußomary. st st 'Efor puj/tili, fup4 Ifi, st is pertnittei to run away, l/ikewife, *ßN, when we fdy, «1 xofl' hpMt, fup. óiTSf, thofe of our time. Which is very ufual with the ad¬ verbs ! im, above i uirie, below: etri- Xai, formerly ; ayav, im¡iyuv, exceed- ingly, exceffively : and the like. See above. AHIITE'ON, fumendum, accipiendum, when we read in commentators and fcholiafts, itti »otvü, a communi, when we are to underftand a word that hag been mentioned already, or to infer it from the fenfe. 'ENAE'XETAl, when we fay, ys- yafjcoxttç, oaa yestai fiptai-flisveu, Lucian, you were never married, that we know "f' . ^ nA'2Xß, TtNOMAI, or nPOAAO- KA'íí, when we fay, ri yèiç, or ri íi ¿X- X» n i as ri aXXd }ct^v¡JLSn, xtvhrguéií ¿juao'oç Sm ^larEXttv; that is to íay^ ri yà^ etv wád»í) 9r vr^QÇ^OKWiiaç : 3 b A '372 3OOK, VII. GREEK SyNTA<¡ ^bat df* eon ytu txpeS frtmywr /«»»- tuft, ht U e»Kti«ue alwayt in ignoranet t ■ Kn^muut àvtban'v viro •nra.vmt «í»" tnnUt' ti y¡t( tu äx^o, fup. yi»om,yoa »ngbt ti it a/raid Uß your temtrity dt- (h^ycn ; fot wiat elfe can happen from ilA'sxn, or noiE^n, when we fay, iyí^M> à» nnrtá^orra «;üv ; boon could I forbear laughing, feeing Une tbut toy and pUy tbe fool t nrozTA'TT«, when we fiyj éï' «{¿TTiir, bene afere, er fairere, yah gm, gaudere,. fup. jobeo, I faiuteyouo I bid you a good mrrom, • ZYNE'bm, when we fay, ij itSratt , toben it was heard. *E«ruSS) if^euBtu, after be wat arrrued, TfQETAI, or KEl'TAI, ponitur, or }acet\ when we fay, tut pex- medium, to denote • thing faid in A parentbefit. • THIRD LIST. Of Prepoßtions unàerfiood. *hVrtí, ought to be underftood, when we fay, witn Ikhteait j Xenoph. that is to fay, hti wicu ; what doet be take for teaching? hhie-xii fjitabS, Lucían, betaket money for teaching, 'axio", or npo'z, in verbs of un- derftanifing, knowing, inftruâing : Sirs; ixàaiati (ta. Dem. that is to fay, Sm' t/LtS, or s/uS, what you will learn of me. Thus A£ts ix. iuhun Alto woXKüe mgi tS J have beard by maty of thit man. And in Soph. taSt* iuáuo eir^ táXay, to bear thefe things from the fervants. Thus 'AITO^ is aJfo underftood in verbs of diftance, of delivering, par¬ taking, and others. See Rule XI. AIA^ ought alfo to be underftood; when fpeaking of the caufe ; as ta TMaÎT» Hraívw 'AynríXam, Xehoph. I xommend Ageßlaut for thit ; that is to fay, hi ri touñra, becaufe of this. Or when fpeaking of a place through which one paftes : ¡(xurai mtúu, Horn. for hA mSioio, they came acroft the feldt. ' El'ZV when fpeaking of tbe end or manner : ùiiv viroie, Ariftot. making no ufe of this ; that is to fay, si; ith, for nothing, or in nothing. , 'EK, AIA\ 'ïn£>, nEPl", or the like, In the genitive of the caufe, or part. Mt(it^f*at m TÏf ¿•gançtetf, I charge youxwith ingratitude i that is to fay, in Ctmeg ¿■gagçUf, orñixa. K;:/u at tS troû;, that is to fay, I» vS wcîif, J hang you by the foot. n\n(S iptáXr,, Cíaro;, viz. I» ¡¡htTO(, I fll the vial with water, TÏf le-flÎTOi XaCójMsvoí, Lucian, taking bold of him by the coat ; that is to fay, ix vñc iadiÍTOc, as in another place he fays, Ix TÏf ¿¡St XainÇânadas, to take bold of by the tail. Likewife, in mentioning the fit ther or fourcer ^ ¿yoBit ■manipett fup. ix, born of good parentt ; as Ifo- crates fays, i^tf if nam, of whom tb^ were born. 'en, in names Of places : MofoSSn, for iv tAofaSSn, at Marathon. In exprefling the time precifely, i/xipf, in ipsa die, that very day. Or the manner or caufe : iitífit ióXot, i x¡áru, Hom. be killed ihn not fairly, but by treachery. MÄ yaufii aofln, (tn t' ¿Xxs, (xk v' I»« «r\ÚT«, Phocyl. don^t be proud of your knowledge, nor of your ßrength, nor riches ¡ or in your knowledge, &c. where it is obvious, that h or Irl is un* derftood in the two firft members, as it is exprefled in the laft. 'Eni\ in mentioning the motive, tho final or efficient caufe t à vä (tn xa6u- ^"vai Tavra atfjavmfxtu, efrs rS y¡afli< àitofuTttr, Dem. I do not boaß of having loß thefe things, nor of having avoided this accufation ; that is to fay, ini vS, for this, or because of this ; as ia another place he fays, Et, quantum in te eft, fo^ your part, as much as it in your power. Tor -rgmtu, ad hunc modum, Cic. thus, in this manner. Tèr naxscrie, quam celetrime, at quick as poßble. 'A¡yjn, or tïv i¡)^, ab, in initio^ ía tbe beginning, ice. - t>/ the MMpßsl la l,îk6 naancf^ '¿xx* to xt}<í/MNVy )MT$)nr MfTÎf ñxsfxe», Plato, but are tve teme, as the faying it, a day after the feafi ! that ia to fay, natà to XqM^im. Art,'Ira 2%, eld'H, utpote, at, to. tait s ímcóto; troXifttt, ítt nisuçet Sit feiytcet ifeSireer« at Jibeed tbith a terrible panick. Likewif« in the quantity of time or place! ¡tscimtmi, b(lived a bun- , dredyears} T(túv.h/t*tgcít ¡Siy, that it to. lay, *«fl* trium dictum iter, tr per iter, tbree days jeurney. This prepofition muft alio beundcr* flood, when the grammarians fay that irtw, verum, true, is fuperfluous, at m A'riftoph. in Nub. where he intro» duces Sotrates fpeaking to Strepfiades, who was Atting lire to the top of his houfe 1- ates t( tvyit??. Its», swi tS tiynt i that is to fay, aar' iriw, in good trutb, friend, tobat art tbeu doing atop ^ sty boufe f Likewife when we fay, r(r|pr,'or Ira, petinde seque, atque, ajt, tbe fame as, as natch as^ - 'Jem v3em dsr* Üp^Strs xtt(} fUXaiy, 11.; y, for they all bated bim as dtatl) itfelf, ' fit, to Í' fiXX' â73 6iç, fpecie quidem hoc, re autem illud, this in appearance, but in reality that. When verbs govern two accufatives, there is always- one depending on this prepofition. See Rulezi. and xil. Thus when Apollon, fayt stk 'Ay* Twwwi if he-are, that is to fay, star' 'Ay» riitniv, rabat be bad contrived againß Antiope, IIEPIV when fpeaking of a part : en» yfrv TÀ eni\n, Ariftoph. to bane a pain in one's legs ; that is to fay, mpi rlt ernSiXn, or aarà. With verbs of accufing : hthte» &ayd- ta, to accufe one of a capital crime, viz. en{t daydru, as we read in Xe- Qophon. nPO^S is often underftood vtith the. infinitive.. See Rule iv. rr'N in the ablative of the Infini¬ ment or cawfe i aitrole ôsrx«?;, ipfit ar- mis ; ¡vrdCt SaXalCç, ipßs tonßUis, In the fignification of the Latin cum, with ! m¡tuóftme XfXiott iwXi- reuç ß{ ri ivi @¡áiuK, Thucyd. snarcb- tng raitb a tboufand men ' teruardt ñrace : S; avroT; Sofaes steil firvott au» ravorrm. Philo, robom be funk into tbe fea together raitb their ' tbariett and borfes,. Élfípjf of the Government of Prepoßttons, Sometimes we find an. etlipfis of the government of prepofitions : it f ighaç immSit ¿ytífofot, 11. a. for 1; etirnr tma, roe put failors aboard the fbip in pro- ' per time s Mue^iy rt, Wfit, Lucian, fup. tovto, it is but a trifie in eonrparifon te ' tbit, Zeugéa,. The zeugma, which is a kind of eiliplis, wherein a word is un¬ derftood that has been already mentioned in the fentence, may be feen in the following examples : ù mxiiitoaroít fi» »sott au^goavtn, toT{ il «rjsu-ÇaTÎçoit mot^afvitet, roTf ii rtritticrt wXStoç, roTf Si raXtuaiott aóo-- foí ifi, plut, edticatíon it a check to youth, a tomfort to, the oU, a treafure to the poor, and an ornament to the rich. Here the -verb irio which is exprefted but once, muft be underftood four times. Tvti^eîi SsT rà ^iXy, fnavfwcttstgyttt' *a» o-o^éuXtviiy, fh. avtsm- ÇuXeôtiy' avffcc^rv^tî», ¡vn avn^avaerott' neu cvtetwy^ftt, tn Ali», ftj avtetStntît, Plut, rue ought to join ruith our friend in his good, -hut not in his bad aQions ; to tonfult ruith him, but not to devi/e mi/' thief ruith him ; to fupport him in truth, but not in fraud or df (tit} to Jhare ruith him yt hit misfortunes, hut not in his iniquity z, where the verb Su, which is mentioned but once,, muft be under¬ ftood eight times. Bvfgoctst as otXSto.ç tat^-ysrStrec' neu wí/soo wsXXà ptîj fsgsf- sSyra* sc») Só^cc rsfáfíttt' *«î àSo^icc fs» çOosùfttoi, Plut, tv/// màie you chearful,^ by putting it in your porutr to do good to a great ,B b i tnany^ '|74- boo îc VIÏ. ' gkttk' syntax; '^anj%-pmtríy, hy freeing you from caret honourf iy oddiHgJufirtto. you t and obfcurtlyt by fcreeningyou from envy. The verb tvfgoufi? aiall be underilood here alfo four times. 0¿ fdaíirat âài wrrat 5 «ÄtW ¿í« móytfio» S fin rgocrtvífittof*- iíi Ánfáí i oixoçtit' ¿Si (Tvxotpárrny ó nritnt' ¿^ ought (O be Underñood feven times in the £rfl member ; and the verb S(hn ten times in the [fécond member of this paffage;r which is i^ahe curious to obferve, • fc. . - . à s . * n. Pkonafm» „ *. M • , The following exprellions may be confidered as examples of pleonafm : traían; for vsa't^itc. Indis, play, youjef : •*«* tltat for Ixôii', libens, willingly: ¿tortù», abiii, he it gone away. In the fame manner Virgil fays, latratu turbabit agent. To the pleohafm we mull refer what the grammarians call U re ora^a^xíí^is, viz. according to Henry Stephen, in bis book Do . DialeSo '-Attíca, when two words are paralleled, hs it wére, -in a ■ fentence, which differ neverthelefs not fo mach in reality as in appearance; as v/hen we read-in Homer, -^¿vcCrór re, 'fU^ot in\ mó^efióe re, ¡láyete ri, and in Lucr. prtelia fä pugnas. It is alio a pleonafm to fay, tlerete fáesu, Xenoph. Kai ri» 'Arc* ¿yv» ery.í/'^ aiiTet. ti'UtTe, ¿x tpánai, ¿t xaf^üe o¡roxoe~ i and that _ Ayjlages Jfaid then in raillery, do not you fee^ bow gracefully be pours out the wine ? Though'Wè may fay with Sanftius in his MiriSrvaVlhat when We read, iÇri fáucci, çàiai is oftentimes the accafative ôf íip», which, as a noun verbal, governs the accufatlve that comes after, fo as to ' make iwo fen tencas: juilas when we fay in hiún, pugnandum ef pugnan,'fot'pugnandum ef, ro pugnaiep'ugnam. See, in the Latin ineihcdj, the remarks on gerunds. * • III.' '■Syllepßs.^ ■ '■ " The fighfe of fyllepiis âppèïrs'iii ¿ender i ■'ré;rjh'çl\e,'^nry dear 'fen,' whère' if refers to iil, fili, nnderftood': 'çi^oer» ró^oe, Anacr. a,child that carried a bow ; where it rcfefs to thé mafcUline 'hlfo unde'rllood '. "¡iii^axttt: liroyßci .Syocf. jóvenes • feIicií5!hi;'í,7/_;^yí>léMr.* rviva al; Íiíri >5?, PhiL girie'that do hot vsit: à btatiiîful damßl,. &C. t • Of the^'JRelativi Syllepßs. In number : $»« tmmalia curriu See above. Rule V. But we cannot call it ¿riârly a iyilepfis, when a dual is joined with a plural, iince the çonftrùâion may be ftill natural, by reafon that there are properly only two aumbert, one ibi the unit, and.the Other, for that which exceeds the unit, whether two or more. Hence Diomedes, book ihews, that the ancient Greeks never Aifed the4aal number, which has been quite negleâed by the .bo¬ dies, and after their-example by the Latins. I WHprefore we may fay, rgéxfiri, ambo currunt, tlr^ htib tun: we may allb fay, uai or f^onreH, .Secrattt and Plato are coming : -pay it is more elegant, as alio more ufual io put the verb in the plural. But it is tnore extraordinary ,to fee the verb in the dual, with a noun in the plural, though we meet with fome examplefr:thereof ; as ti vutf îço*, Horn, i/^ou are kit. ciildrfn,, . i In gender and number : r^xnêiç »¡vé^rai t''' lOtM, Luke ü; mdtitMdo tietlifiit oxereitút laudantium Dtum, inftead óf «búpvr,:laudanti$,.affi«/r«/«^£/'tke ktofuenly hoß.pra^ng God- , , ' ■■ Relative Syllepßs, ; - - l Tbe relàfivn fyiïepfis may be'Ióund in Thucyd. and others, as book a», yvratxeixf rt ci^irnf, oaxi tS» iv p^tigeíx-ta'orTílUf IcniaB^yeu, hut if it it proper I ßoould mention the virtue of thofe women, that are juß. become widows ; where óV«», which is put in- fiead of «1, qua, refers to the women that are not mentioned, but included in the lignification of the words yvmyxúxc ¿^ctxí. To this fame figure we mull refer fome other more difiicult paf> fages of this author : to ' lirvxft, ol os» "ñc tvirqtortráryii cut, uaortq oï h fit» nv», rtXevrnu ùfxsTt dl tsiocnt, ibid. which word .for word may be tranflated thus ; falicitas autem, quodhoneßijpmum, .fortiuntur, ut Uli nunc exitum, vos vero, dolorem. : where the relative 01, qui, can by no means agree with the neuter tvrofi(; ; lb that we muft fuppofeits antecedent by the fenfe to which it relates, as if it were, to ivTv^f tÚt«» éfî», oî &t, &c. ôf<£»V- i.vwvi, fup. ¡Xcíx,t An>irti6iif trti^&reu rv wóXii xaruo'Ktvá^tt, we- muß not endeavour to ruin and deßroy that fovier and flrengtby vibicb. Diopitbes bat ßrove to give to thit city. nniXfiçotioi vfMÜt i^iXtaOat T«r haSoXiity it> v/tut Iv «roAXy Xi'*V ?p¿(Ts, reivrr,» ii> àraai óxíy^ Pl^tO, inftead of foying, tart« X(^(Wtío^ vfjiZr it ¿Tan iWiya p(^óta raúrnt tftXíff'óíM itaSofàitt S» ¿ftft; it tooM^ xfóty 'X'Tt ; you muß endeavour inflantly to blot out of- your memory tbt calumny, vibicb bat been imprinted tbere for ft long a time. ' The interruption of the qrder of coherency, which grammarians call ¿raxóxaOor, may be fouqd in Greek as well a» in Latín : r««« Xv^etKUOiOit xfi(TatrX))|i; ¿x ÓAíyi) iyíttro, ô^Strif, Sic, Thucyd. that is to fay, '¿rat igütrif ¡¡oat, whereas; according to the natural order of conftruâion, it ihould be SfSoi, to make it agree with Zv^aKuo'utf^ the Syracufant'Viere not a little ßrprized, feeing, -pr viben. tbey, favit, &Ç, ^be End of the Seventh Book. ¿in « ■ fi 00£ égtTtftf Aytfit)fit,f,fiftf,h§iifi>^,t,f,t,rfif'^g->^^»g^ ♦T *' "TTTTTT*TT Vf' B -0, 0 K VIII. -rCONTAINlNâ PARTI GUI, AR itEMARKS ; ;; ON ALL THt ' ' PARTS OF SPEECH, r ■ ' „„, Ufeful for underftanding perfc^ly ; the Greek Authors,' ' !{)^^(^PTER having given a general idea of tboGreet: ^ conftrnâion in the foregoing book, and in the rales ^ > there explained, I have thought proper to fnbjoin here fome particular remarks on the feveral parts of fpeech, wfO ' as I have done in the lAtiir msthod,-ia order to point put in a clear manner the diÇerent properties of this language; and the renions of their being nfed in dilcourfe ;. which will not A little contribute to-'A perfe^ nnderdanding of-die .Greek Authors, . i ; r: I 7 ^ C H A P. I. ' Remarks on the Nouns, . )4nd firfi of the IrreguJarittes^ which Grammarians fup-* pofe to be in fheir Conftru£tion. ^ C - ^ The Attics nfed always to make their vocative likh thenoml« native; whence feveral, in imitation of them, have made ule of the nominative infteaa of the vocative: ^ «, meus eceílus. Da, anime- mi : fo it íhould be demonßrated, that a vocative may be put with a verb of the third perfon^ -as'tf' it Were aWominative ; for exam« pie, Dat, amme mi, like Dat meus ocellus ; of which it will be impof« fibkxo^ndanfxamplcv " . -r •. . . , , «•' Wherfefoi«, tvfaem ^mmarians fayi ^t'Jirnóv« ejufs Neßori "Live, nubens-cogens Jupiter % S Qvéra, Thyeßes,. and the like words in Homer and others, are vocatives inftead of nominatives, they are nndoobtedly miftaken, thefe being all real nominatives, as we can deihonftrate froin the following verfe trf' an. epigram quoted by Euftath, J I'Tlcur^ ^ Natus/um genitore Kopana. Whew the word, doling. the verfe, he might as well have put koWáW» -ii -Äothihg-bnt- 'the nhceffity -of ¡íérving 'the imeafuro was the occafion of putting one cafe inftead of another. But this change of cafes is not tolerated in any language. And when -liotner fays, J, Aviano uvTt / ' u " ji( rurjúsTl¡yefiés f^amemnonirel/quiíg^aniiiíbffyiz. fceptrup«) the nrtklei ¿ is'a iplainrargument. that /9t>^(¡»dSia. rS Synef. calamifatis,- and the like; which is not a difagreement of the:gender, but a fign^ «itbef that ttefe nonns' were formerly of the mafculine gender^ or that the fante article was nfbd for both genders,""See the irregulars; Book II. Chap, vii.' ^ The fame may bé faidbf the following Attic phraies : »ícrtf Tusfc« Soph, a famu$.zjudgment y not'that the Attics joined a feitti« '^nme with a mafculine,. as fome ipretend,'(which Would tea down¬ right folecifm) but beeaufethe âdjeâivds In •; bad among the At* tics that termination common for both genders, as the termination ■(ramong thfcLatins.^'i .» i i • " . They likewile will have it tbarbne cafe-is put for another :'as ' ff« Í» fWT» »00» 7ia,t0^iyyßra «îîoç, Hefiod, where they fay that ffi is for dci. But in. reality ai is the accufative of the'verb, and vóü« the • t^ccufative of the- prepofitirm lavri underftood.' Lei net eMwdrJ farms and appearantes impofe upenyonr judgment. • .. o * And that an adjeâive is put ■for afubllantive ; as i'àf ¿yatii, «éj«r»| ■ &.K»x.h Seweirete ^irsi^et, Hefiód. dotiatie bona, 'tafiritCnserhinedaiä nsvrtifera : where- they fay, is inftead of à^etyv: 'but On âie contrary, ¿^t Greek Ablative. ' 3^1 à^ative abfolate,whlcli.fuppofiiig ñ|i«w>ísrelérfedto thtMlè thai fpeak, v(e6etMof*tP6i(t nehi$ fntfirentihm : fo that ic may b0 tranflated- thnai if is fit i.-. XofMWf t which is ftill confirmed by the commentator» who fays it h an enaliage. But .we have already ibewn in the Latin method» that thefe imaginary changes of one cafe for another, without any teafon, are downright folecifms. It follows therefore, that as the conllruâioa is abfolute, even in the opinion of the fchoHaft, we have only to iHck to that of the ablative, in order to fiad out the tight meaning. Likewife, when the fame Thucydides fays, rpe *I*r- vox^Ítu o»t» to i\vmoii, à{ avrä rtyyó>^, tcc. Hippocrates being towards Délos, as newswas brought him, &c. It is natural to fuppofe, that na o,T» is a real ablative abfolute, ipfo exiflente, fince we fee thefubfequent a-îna, which makes the relative café, viz. the dative, forming another conllruftion, and a fécond fentence. Other ex¬ amples of this Greek ablative may be feen in the preceding book, in the ruletjf the abfolute cafe. From all that has been hitherto faid, we may fairly infer, that the Greek tongue admits of an ablative cafe, as.well as the Latin: ud'I believe that there are but few who will refufe to approve of my opinion, efpecidly when they come to refleft on .the vaft ad¬ vantage that, rnoft, neceifarily accrue from hence to young begin¬ ners, by reafon of the analogy between the two languages in an infinite number of conftruftions that depend on this cafe. Yet if any perfon Ihould ftill find fault with this principle, I muft tell him, that it is not my opinion only he finds fault with, but likewife that of fev'eral very learned men, as Sanflius, Sçiop- pius, Frifchlinus, and others, who with great judgment have efta- blilhed this cafe. " - \ CHAP. III. Confiru£iion of Numeráis. ^ ' , ' ' ' WHAT the Latins exprefs by unde, duode, the Greeks çxplain by the participle of ItV, which they either putjn the genitive abfolute, or in the cafe of the noun that governs thç number want¬ ing. In the genitive, as for undeviginti annos natus, nineteen years old, they fay, ítyi t'xo¡r,, Loe iiotToç, that is to fay, twenty • years old, wanting one, uno deficiente : or elfe, •ytyovùc «'«ovi, «►o{ i/oura, 'that is to fay, trn ííotra. sïxoai, years to which one is wanting to make up twenty^ In like manner, ivoi"» ^íotra. ixaro» í-rn, duodecentcni anni, ninety-eight years old ; h/di, ieéo-aç ir.aroe /¡(.i&i, duo- decentenas minas. And in the genitive, v^uiy.orra .hk&sr; rjiiçtK, .undetriginta triremes, nine and twenty gallies. Avdït stxaai «rSfuro», duodeviginti homines, eigisteen men, and'the-like. • .1 They 5^4 ' B ö ^ k VliL They likennle fife the neuter» •>«; iíof tltuvit unJeviginti : Wiiëirë tre inuft onderfiaitd xetri ¡(o» for ^orrof, twenty, lacking one. For as they fay, hit ixiys, $iTp to fignify within very little, wheré they might have put iiomi, A> that is a ibrt of a nouii, and fnpplies the place of an absolute cafe, foppofing x«r<» : fo when they fay, (cèt ittf, we muft explain it, xarà. iíot aceirätag to the dtfi' tiency of one, fuppofittg the wànt of one. But they have another method of exprefling this manner of )-eckoning, by making ufe of the' ablative of the Ordinal noons for < the greater number i as ftiS; TÇMxory inlieadof ¡mú; itwiK T^táxorr» T^iguf. In like manner, {poçoiorrôf tlxtrÇ ¿pú^áv^i and then this ablative is the cafe of the mannerj or of the efficient caufe, as if it were, vigefimo homine, uno támen deficiente, with a twentieth man (inftead of with twenty men) except one that wat wanting. Fot to. exprefs one perfon along with feveral others; they nie the following.phrafes, very much akin to the French, lui einquiénte, Itii dixième: Ssptx>*í^i, WfcWIo; avrèf, Thncydi Xenoeli- Jes, who wat thefifth in numhet, that is to fay, four more eJong with him. They likewiie fay, Xwoe À>r a thoafand horfe, as if it were; millenarius equitatus, "wo;, for ixntic, an infinite nttmbef of horfe ; and the like. When they have a mind to exprefs a number and a half, they put vfci together with the number exceeding the other: thus to exprefs two talents and a half, they fay, r^tro» iii*.pT0>.aprop, tertinm femitalentom, two talents and the moiety of a third', and in like manner the reft, , II. Comhinátiofl of Numheri, In the combination of numbers, when a leiTer number is pttt ftrft, it is commonly joined by a conjunâion with the greater ; as ßaaiXivaetf irùp ncro-a^eíxaíhx», HerJ having reigned fbtirteeit years. When the greater number is put firft, the conjunâion is ofteá added, often omitted : thus Plut, fpeaking of Cicero, ihÇxyn) TO» Tjá;¿»)Xo» (K t5 Ço^tiu «çoTtivaj, froç txeîVo ytyopùf i^Jixorop, xaî ri» TaçTo», his head was firuck off, as he ßretcbed it out of the litters heing at that time three/core and four years old. Asxxrto-(, «rço;, lw(, wtfl, oiis,q>,, maqa, vni^, iyyvc, iyyvraroi, //.oMri, tBÜc, wù, Ixrèf, ¿(, ¿m), cirop, oTo», inápu, rif, ¿gi6/cq, «¡M'wp, itMTSUP, juíup, Xettr«», Siup, olfMU, Scc, as, I. 'inwíen Comhinatîon of Numhers. 3^5 * It 'Wviof «Îî «xT«x(crp¿(>.>s; »ysi, XenOph. he brings nuitb him abosa tight thou/and hor/e, '£; ipiçsci JVaxoai»; icai t'xoo'i is,áXircí Tp í|ójy cOcXoyrcvt Thucyd. there were about two hundred and twenty tnen, that were refolded to /ally osa. 2t £Ta^iot T|RexoirT« Toî; êxarop, Xenoph# a hundred and thirty furlongs, triginta fupra centum. 'AwwXorro aira» «rçèç iv^axoytof, Id. there died about /even hundred. 3. 'Oxrà Iw» toT( ípyevnxotTa i'rn ßtSttiixis, Lucían» he lived ninety-eight years. 'Éiiíooat uirZt ixára îsr) ixru fdöta^ xorvXn' víarof, Thucyd« ' lib. 7t th^ gave each of them hal/ a pint of water during eight months» 4. Fog^Kxvo; me^l trti «ra ytyoyàc r^tfxaihx», avroxçàra^ ¿ttíeíp^Sn, Herodi. Gordian was protlaimed'emperor about the age of thirteen. ¡. Er» yiyonp àfiÇii sí itnroxotT», Ôr rà Insinxcsra, " . in Lucían, about ninety years old', near ninety years of age. 6. IIixç' sir» TocrSroi, Plut, fo maty, within ene¡ only one wanting to make up fo many. 7. fk vnttmuotreo yi^as, Lucian, an old man above fourfcort years of age. , ' . '8. 'Aicixtsypoii tyyvi T^taxoir« rut 'i'tfyZs, Xcnoph. thy killed about thiry of the light hor/e. 9. "Ersirur lyy¿T»Tdi Xsiwom« tí» not much left than fix thoufand bcrfe^ ' TÍrat xttpáXxtot mírru» yíytirai, Xfttroirof •erttriiucííixa ráxetnaf Lyf. the whole fum amounts within very little to fifteen talents. 24.. 'zSecai^tvae ivoTt ^sonTU, Or ^eá»roi»> Of ^vo7s Sior, Of íüo~» îe~», Tca-a-a^áxonra trn, he reigned eight and thirty years. H •i/vx}i ctxfi&^u flrtji tí £»o{ •mttrrtxcvTa irn, Arift- the mind comes to its full perfeSion near the age^ of forty-nine» See the foregoing article. ■ C H A P. IV. Remarks en the Article. The ofEce of the article is the fame in Greek as in almoß all the modern languages, which is to exprefs the thing in a more preciie and particular manner. Wherefore the gramma« rians tell us, that it introduces us into a fécond kiifd of know¬ ledge, EÎ( ^Et/Tf^ei yrio-iv, leading us from a general to a particular idea ; as in St. Matt. ii. when he fays of the wife men, 'ùirttc rir úfí^a, xa.) íX&áiiTeí it;, T4» etxía», tu^o» rà enatSiot, videntes fiellam» ÍA intrantes domum, invenerunt puerum. Thefe three words, ßellat domas, and puer, are determined by the article from their general lignification to an individual one, which imports .herein certain fiar, viz. that which they had feen in the Eaft, and whereof he had fpoke l^efore : a certain houfe, viz. that of Bethlehem : and a urtain child, viz. he whom they were in fearch of. The article denotes alfo an emphafis and a particular excellency } which the Latins have endeavoured to exprefs by their pronoun ille, as Alexander Ule, that great Alexander i which feems to have been fplit in two, to form the two French articles or pronouns il (which is alfo ufed by the Italians for their article) and le. Thus when St. John anfwers, ovx ilft ô Xjirèç, John i. I am net the Chrifi ; that is to fay, that Chrifl whom you enquire for : and when they aiked him, i e) av ¡ art thou that prophet ? viz. ' the excellent prophet who has been promifed us. Thus Theophylaftus on St. Matt. ch. xvi. obferves, that St. Peter, in the confefiion which he made of his faith in Chriil, does not fay, (tù J ô X^h-Ôî tS ©eS, without the article, tu es Chrifius fi- lius ; but íx>om-o$ 1» ^'<¡Za, Demofth. Philip was quite frightened. Though, for the generality, the article is feldom put before thefe nouns, becaufe they are fufficiently determined of themfelves. 2. In the infcrip|ions of books: wiçî tS o»toç, Plato, of being: tS Id. of falßood: «tçl t?î ngo»oiaç, Ariílot. of Pro¬ vidence. Though we find them fometimes without the article : wfji itxx'm, Plato, de julio, of jußice : iti^i »¿/ais. Id. de lege, of the laws ; and fuch like. 3. Sometimes one article ferves for two fubftantives : rl» «Ato» km) arqx, indead of xxi t» Aridot. about the fun and the fiars. II. With Adjetives, 1. When they are before their fubdantive : ô aofog 'A^trorixnt íteO^éysrxi, the learned Arißot le treats of. 2. When the adjeâive follows the fubdantive, and is meant as the fubje£l of the propolition : ô xyx^íg ir«» that good man is king. For if the adjeilive is without the article, it is then the attribute of the propolition : Wíxtu, ¿yxdóg lr>», Plato is a good man. 3. When two nouns are put in the fame cafe, by reafon of the fubdantive verb exprelfed or underdood, that which is the fubjeft of the propolition alTumes the article; as I» 4çx? » Aóyag, xxi S Aóyoj 5» wfèç ©so»" Kxî ©so? ?» ó Aáy «, John i. in principio erat illud Verbura, & Verbum illud erat apud Deum, & illud Verbum erat Deus : in the beginningmuas the Word, and that Word was with God, and that Word was God. 4. But if the two nouns are both together the fubjeft, or are go¬ verned by a verb, they have each their article : Uxyôetx í yv,íi 'AÇgaîaTB, Panihtea, wife of Abradates, ^HAGo» i{ to» "OXo/ítcop to ^foç, they arrived at the mount Olympus. G c 2 s- Two 388 BOOK-. VIII. 5. Two or more articles may elegantly meet in the fame period; and the elegance is Hill greater, when the words are ranged fo, as. to make fomething intermediate between the firll and fécond arti¬ cle, and the nouns to which they bear relation : oí rn» c;(o>r(;, or elfe, oí rq» rat úorúnut f^orríí» tho/e that hofve the cart of every thing. 6. In nouns of number the article is never put, but when it re- prefents the antecedent, or marks fome determinate thing : è et; C^íí^^s■euof, Kcu ó eTiçoç Ti^ánví, the one a Pharijee, and the Other a Pub¬ lican. AaSàif Si TUfotrrt xoù rè; íp¿6va(, Luke ix. taking the five leaves, and tvso fifoes. Otherwife it is omitted, as the fame Evangeliil faid a little be¬ fore : tia-h rii/iip wim xai «grot kou S¿o tve have five loaves, and twofißes. III. ¡^ith Prononns, Interrogatives, and Indefinites. 'o «¿Toç, idetn : tS avrù, ejufdetn'. 0 rU, *«» «ó f«!» iaíiMtíf tiri, Hefiod. Uli quidem funt damones. ' The other cafes are ufed in the fame manner : to ulytro», Lucian, lâ alii, for o it (dytrot Ir", but what is moß tonfiderahle. Ilt^t rtx'at rat, oa-ect rrtfi raSrot liri, Plato, concerning thofe arte that treat of thefe things', where rZt is for rhrat. Ei ro xat ro lorot»- att ¿tO^arrof 3to;, ¿x ¿t ¿TréSant, Dem. this man had done fitch and fuch things, he had not been dead ; where to is for t5to. Hence it is that we often find w^o tS, or in one word m^orS, for T¿Tu TS xgÓMi, ante hoc tempos, heretofore. And in the diftri- bution of the members of a period, ô fxb, ó it, for hie vero. Hie quidem ; or ille vero, hic quidem ; or alter quidem, alter verb, ice. We likewife read the prepofitive article for the interrogative ri;, quis, which is very ufual with the Attics : tS in ruvreo Idya ; Dem. cujus rei gratia haec dico>? but to what purpofe do I fay this ? As alfo for the indefinite tÎ; : lî ü ru ÍomT ruvrco. Dem, fii coi verö hxc videntur, but if any one is of this opinion. The prepofitive article is alfo put for the indefinite t<; : ó; in Thucyd. he difcovers who he is. And in the divifions i; idtt, ntàt it. Dem. for ntàç ¡At, rtvotc j'è, alias quidem, alias vero. *0; ¡/Xt rrtau, o; Ü /ctOvtt, i Cor. xi. and one is hungry, and the other is drunken. For tí{ interrogative: t¡/ci, x' ¿(p* ors nrar^oí yiyáf. Soph, having told who I was, and who was my father. Sometimes they are joined together: ó'ít»;, qui quidem, and the poets, otk, Horn. óV»; a-^íot% tiaoim;. 'Ontet is alfo the neuter plural for írtta. But the other genders and cafes of this noun are alfo in ufe, by declining both parts ; as ñ^ára. vtriv* i\wiict Thucyd. he afked him what hopes he had. Which is a demonftrative proof, that «r»; comes from the relative o;, and not fr^m the prepofitive article S : befides, the article à has only a breathing, whereas éV»; hath both a breathing and an accpnt, in the fame manner as the relative ó;. ► The orators frequently put ora for » and «r»,oç, cujus ; ira for y and arm, cui : but very feldom oto» for o, or óWwo», quem : thus í>6' oris fignifieth cujus gratia : iq>' ortj, qua in re. C c 3 . It 390 BOOK VIII. It is alfo-taken for the demonfirative, ô; »»] Herod, hie vtl tilt. Whereto we tnuft refer the following expredions, tut S, or tu% Sro, if ^tttufque for eoufque dum. As alio in the relative of quality, livt fu» Jo; vt, Lucian, tell me uuhat fort of s man he t/uas. Ilota; yv»atxo; virt^. Soph, for 'what fort of a w«'. man ; for woro; comes from oTo;, and oTo; from ô;, as quails from qua. , A, .A jdta-A, .At. A. , CHAP. VI. Remarks on the Pronouns. I. Of Reciprocals and Relatives. The rule of the reciprocals if fui, % companies it : ¡»vrSt ¿•yaorZfi.e,, tve love ourfelves j iavrèt »•/»^»re, ye loveyourfelves : êavrà; ¿yaorZish thy love themfelves. See. Thus in Xenophon* Virtue fpeaking to Pleafure* faith* ovru mouhvtit rst î»vr2i sst, fie inllituis amicos tui iplius? for tuos : is it thus thou inßrußeß thy friends ? And in St. Luke xvi. Osotieart iavroît ç'Avt, pake to yourfelves friends, IL Of Poffeßves, As we have proved in the Latin method* contrary to the opinion of Valla* that the genitives mei, tui, fui, were (to exprefs ourfelves in the grammatical phrafe) taken aâively and paffively ; fo* in Greek, the genitives IjuS or /xS* o2, and §* are taken aftively and palfively* though Gaza teacheth the contrary. Aâively* as ó pÍAo; 1*3, for ii*ot, my friend, he whom I love. Paffively* as wçoç fita» ifsä. Soph, in fpite of me, ufing violence to me. Ov yàç Kt^xv^a, ßi» riftZv «»x«'» "TÍticyd. for thy ^i^ "0* poffejßon of the ,ijle of Corfu, in fpite of us. And on the other hand* even the poflellives frequently imply a pallive figniAcation ; *al f*ot ¿xdso-Bvt, «¿»oí» yàç ¿^Z rjí eí, plato, ne mihi fuccenfeas* dicam enim tuà benevolentiâ, that is te fay, for the love with which you are beloved by me, and not, with which you love me', .-in the fame manner as Tereiice fays, facile fcies deßderio id fieri tuo, inftead of tui. And Thucyd. xai èa aieôxverat rat A»xs¡cui*otítit tpóSa ra ûitirè^a eooT^i/^teiíovrat, timore noíiro* yiz, for the fear thy have of us. Which may be thus tranflated; and he does not perceive, that the Lacedamonians are defirous of de¬ claring war, from the apprehenfion they have of our power. Now as the Latins fojnetimes join a genitive with a pofleffiye, as tuum hominis fimplicis peSus vidimus, Cic. fo the fame pradtice obtains among the Greeks; '¿>Mt *' urot rora^Zn tS *«- xo¡aít*o,oí[ Ludan, hi vero omnino res meas hominis infelicis dila¬ pidant* they fquander away all nyfubßance, wretch that 1 am ! C c 4 CHAP. B p o K VIII. CHAP. VII. Of fome Kouns derived from Pronouns. I. Of the Relatives of polity y oToç and uoToç. OI^CX, quality without interrogation, comes from qui, in the fume manner as qualis comes from qua, wherefore it is fometimes rendered by quit. This noun being one of thofe which the grammarians call rela¬ tives ef quality, which have only a relation in the fenfe, and not in the conftruâion, it fuppofeth always rotàrof, to which it ought to refer, and which is even fometimes expreiled ; as tí tü; ¿yytXíeci TotSrór lr>y, oToy tnt vróM', the tiews ivas fucb as -made the •while tovsss rejoice ; word for word, fuch as to make the town rejoice : oTsk uçt as H> Stephen fays, or sior la^oc eCç^Sitai: which the author of the Idiotifms does not feem to have rightly underflood, when be fays that tvÇ^Sivas is for as, or tvÇ^àsai ívsatr at, ' X^ilicwife in Dem. 2. Olynth. Toíáraí ái6¡¿7ruí, oíaj fuèvaùétraf ôqx^'^~ ùas rotavt'a, ola iyù tvt óxtS cr|05 v/iáf ¿tofoáy yéXcyro;, we de not aä fo as to 'maie eurfelves ridiculous. Ând it muâ always be taken in this fenfe; as in Xenoph. «juir; iytofitv roTc o'loti tb tifiut xat ifiTr ^(aXsTrqy oroXtTtiat citai iti/MK^aTtat, we are very fenfible that democracy is to fuch as you and us a difagree- able fort of government ; that is to fay, loîq rotéroiç oÏoîî, After this manner Virgil fays, ' partis alii bipatentibus adfunt ; Millia quoi magnis nunquam venere Mycenis. For tot milUa quot nunquam venere. Wherefore we muft not follow fome, in faying that olof is id that cafe put for ¡¡¡jloioc, like, fince it really ftands for itfelf ; for this notion of one word being put for another, proceeds very often from a fuperficial knowledge of the Greek tongue and grammar. Therefore Budasus, and after him the author of the Idiotifms, exprefs themfelves improperly, by faying that oToj, with the infi¬ nitive, is fometimes taken for promtus, expeditus, cupidus, prcnut, frenuMS ; for inllance, ^atót n œraôày, olo( V» ttn^ictai ru (piúyotn, Hill implies toiStoç qy, oToj, having received this ill ufage, he was juf ready to accufe him. Even when it is rendeied by peffum, it muft refer to this ellipfis ; as in Ariftot. ¿m' ¿% olo( moisit âya9û(, fed qui minimi pofßt bonos reddere, that is to fay, à toiStoç oÎoç, non potis reddere ; for potis Comes from woroj, taken from oT«ç. Likewifein the neuter, otó) Of o I' o 2. 393 tlót Ti tvgtTxiiirj Locian, peíis eß invenirt (for potis was formerly of all genders, as we have proved elfewhere) or poßhile, eß invenirt, that is to fay, tale eß ut potis fit inveniri : ovx «íój ré tíft», according to Budaeus, imports nolo, renuo, invitus focio i but properly it figni- fies,'/ am not fach, that is, I cannot, or I am net in fucb a difpofition. Moreover, they fometimes ufe the neater plural, as in Herod* lib. 2. moMiai e»0-t it uv ¿x ot¿ rs lr> wAsiiv (where you may obferve ¿x oTà, according to the Ionics, inftead of oT £eth only ; the fame thing happens to the Greek Ôtrb; and roo-Srof. The firft figniiication is very natural and common ; the fécond may be feeo in the following examples : xu\ íáiá n; int-yilrov eaof virnnyxit, eíra ¿»«»çeîr«». Plut, fomebody taking a torch, only juß put it near, and afterwards took it away : rot nùAotrk, ual Saoi i m»^ótrct mó^e[s.ot, Thucyd. the approaching, andaltnoßpre/ent war', it is thus Terence fays, tantum non montes auri pollicens. In like man¬ ner we fay, ôo-o» »*, taot ¿itora, for ferè, almoß. Toa-Srot vwwnùt. Dem, fi hoc unum addidero, homing only this one thing to fay j íetiGeíí vfiut roa-Srot, idem, id unum à vobis deprecatus, having only this one thing to beg of you. CHAP. YIII. Remarks on the Verbs. I. 'ïhat we muß conftder the Nature of the Verbs, AS a verb may be confidered differently in difcourfe, fo it may admit of different effeds in conflruâion : thus all the verbs adjeñive being of themfelves either aâive or paffive, neverthelefs,' becaufe they may be confidered either as making their aöion pafs to another fubjeâ, which is properly the nature of a verb aâive, or as confining it within themfelves, which is what we call a verb neuter or abfolute ; hence it is, that verbs a£tive are fometimes taken abfolutely, and fometimes paffively ; as « t?î «rXvy?« àtaÇii- çar. Plato, ex iûu convalefcens, fup. iavrot, feipfum, as in French, fe portant bien ; in the fame manner 'as Demoílhenes fays, àts>.aÇtt tavror, recollegit fe, he recovered himfelf Thus fignifies evolvere, and e,\&h\, to difentangle, toefcape', wçoàyitt, producere, and progredi, to produce, and to advance ; .xaraXtísi», diffolvere, and diverfari to loofe, and to lodge ; ixi^QoM-nt, to exceed, to pafs : be¬ caufe we are to underftand here the accufative, either of a recipro¬ cal, or of another noun. « Likewife ÍMípí^nt, différé, viz. fe, aut aliud: ¿oroiOAúrra vwl a-S, lileror à te, that is to fay, knothXira ¡it huí cu, I deliver myfelf through your means : texó» elf a,iça;, cenfeor in vires, that is to fay, jue, I put myfelf on the lifl, or I caufe myfelf to be put, tendo, pertingo, pervenio, &c. rà, Sí eÎç HMvoXx ¿rcuceí/*9rlsi, AriAot. here vero inter fefe mutuo reßeüuntur Iß recidunt: e» f-o ¿eí rcc eteçai ro!í Itéçoiî yttófjíína. Plato, nißper mutuam generationem fequen- lia priorum in locum fußcerentur, that is to fay, if they did not put themfelves in the place, f they did not fucceed one another. Among thefe, fome that are of an aélive force, are, neverthelefs,' tranilated by a verb paffive ; but this is not by changing their na¬ ture, but by an agreement of the.fenfe; as itx>,xii.Çà.va, recrear,' viz. ^be Nature of the Verbs. ^95 «Z. ¿mXdi/Sáta rot tSt, J tome to myfelf, I recover my fpirits: »a,rx- í¿a, moríor, diílblvor» I die, viz. KurxXúa rot ßtot, vi/am folvo : and in like manner the reft. On the contrary, the neuters become aflives : Pfalm cxxxvii, vivificabis me, thou viilt revive me: «»ílgaj ivr' airít iQy¡(Tz, Herod, viros eis impofuit, be placed me over them : avtutódyvot airo, Dio/cor, fac ut una ferveat, make them boil together : ßoat rù; ti¡».uc, to implore the ajßßance of the laws : rvt amx-a^trtt iaxp^^otas, jus Grsec. Rom. lib. 3. tonfuram abolevit, properly fpeaking, odari fecit, he gave his hair time to grow, and threw afide the monkiflo toss- fure, which he had been compelled to wear : which come from the verbs ^xa, vivo\ ßxUa,gradior j l^ia,ferveo', ßoxa, clamo', otior. , ■ ' , Likewife ír^avxf ßxivett, ib comic writers,yèr fulgura ex ocnlis vibrare, to dart lightning from one's, eyes ; ßxiwotrif, atare- tiotrti, Bafil. thea caß fire from their eyes and noftrils. Some aftuming a pailive government, feem likewife to take a pa0ive lignificadon ; as xretiavtt vreo rSt itxxrSt, damnatus eft à judicibus, he was condemned to death by the judges ; ¿rré6xttt vreo yu- laixof ÇagiAxxif, Lucian, he was poijoned by his wife ; though in ^rigour xrrtdaiet fignifies no more thanmortuus eft, he died', and the prepofition, with its cafe, denotes the caufe of that death. This conftrudion has been copied by the Latins, nihil valentius à quo in- tereat, Cic. periit ab Annibale, Plin. mori ah enfe, Lucan. The fame may be faid of others, which are deemed paflive in the fenfe, by reafon of our common manner of tranflating them ; as íoxéa, videor ; but it properly implies, appareo, 1 appear, I feem: liioxtti, and tiioxtfiiit, laudor, celebror ; but properly it fignifies in- clareo, I make myfelf known : yi^a, plenus fum ; but properly it im¬ ports, plenitudinem babeo, feu refero, I run over, loverfiow : sotxa, ajfimilatus fum, vifus fum ; but its right lignification is, apparui, conveni, imaginem retuli, 1 hear a Ukenefs, or re/emjlance to. Sec, ífsxyjt T» tot«» o-^iac iiotii, Lucian, the pleafure of the fight furpajfes all others, that is to fay, there is nothing heats it, aliquid in- viáum refert, redolet. Hereto we may refer the verbs, which we have mentioned» Book III. Chap, xix, explaining the nature of the middle verb. The verbs pafiive are alfo put fometimes abfolutely, and then we muft underftand the prepofition with its cafe; as yv¡t,tx{s6' nxar, utinam non vicifiem, fwould to God I had not o'vercome, or I •wiß that I had not •vanquißed. Likewife in Eurip. iaÍotot TO» ßsxoXo» otKnaat, •would to God this to^w-herd badntver li'vedthere. And in Dem. vaiiSñ it, » ¡citror v^iXt, avtíQn, ßnce thofe things are come to pafs, •which it •were to be •wißed never had. This explication is fo very probable, that we frequently find this optative particle exprelTed ; as in Horn, atd' SfeMr /ctîiai wa^^ íá^a which when perfeâly underílood^ fays Henry Stephen, contributes ~ vaftly to an adequate knowledge of the Greek and French lan¬ guages ; and, on the contrary, the want of underflanding it, caufeth great obfcurity in many paflages. The difference of the three preterites, the imparfe£l, the perfeS, and plu-perfeâ, "^is the fame in Greek as in Latin} but there re¬ mains fome difficulty with regard to the aorifts. I. Of the firfl Aoriß. Sanñius gives the name of aorift to the fécond only, which (eems to be more undetermined than the firft, ipafmuch'as it is oftener put than the firft for different tenfes, prefent, pad, or future ; and as for the firft, he calls ^t as much as to fay, leviter * prseteritus, jufl tm» paß ; which is agreeable to the explication of Cafaubon in his Exercitations on Baronius's Annlals, where treating of the coming of the wife men, he fays, that tS 'ivaS ytméíyní, Ciriß» nato, denotes a much later time, than if he had put yeyetyn- Itém, which would fignify that it happened a long time fince. This is alfo the opinion of Voffius in the laft edition of his Greek gram- . mar, and in his Differtation t/e anno natali Chrifli: which they feem to have learned of H. Stephen in his book of the conformity betnxun the Greek and French languages. This writer had been formerly iff" opinion, that the Greek aorift is the fame with the French pe^eft indefinite, when ivy, je fis, f allay, je lus, wherein he agrees with Budieus in his Commentaries ; but afterwards he began to queftiqn it ; and, without coming to any decifion, he takes notice of a very common application of this Greek aorift, which is to ex- prefs the time lately paft, and agreeably to thefe expreffions, asfcoso as he feels the heat, heprefently melts ; if .1 do .hut hear the noife of a moufe, I am immediately anuake', and fuch like : as we may fee in y this verfe of Homer, / 'Oç xt QtoTf èirnr6Î9»)t«n, jixáXa t' ékXvo» avru, Horn. Whofoever fuhmits to the Gods, they prefently bear him,. And he obferves that / am immediately anuake, is taken for I stwake ; and the latter implies an hahit, or facility in auoaking. Likewiie in Demofthenes, luygon ¡uti iiixvae enírtoít a very fmall accident in naar'ruins and defiroys everything. This ufe of the aorift inftead of the prefent, frequently happens in the imperative and the infinitive, in the middle as well as the aftive, but more feldom in the paffive, except when the aâive is difufed, as the grammarians obferve : but herein there is no di- ftinâion made between the aorifts, as Sanâius would fain have it ; and it is unqueftionabldj that they are frequently put, for one ano¬ ther, as well as the futures, though Sanâius calls the fecond futurum remotius, as I have obferved in the beginning to treat of the verbs. 39^ Book VIII. II. Of the Perfect and the Aorifis. 1. The firlt aoriils paffive of the verbs in oftai, which have no aâive voice, are generally taken aâively, and fometimespailively; as Sta^éyojjMt, I difcourfei ^ have difcmrftd, or /poke i ¡áo/^ai, I cure i teie-èfUt one that cures, or is cured ; vraeuSixo/Jicu, I receive i toagu^íx^íi;, one that receives, or is received', ífáo/t«»,*/ conßder, ¡contémplate', ContfivaTpXztai faxet, I have confidered, or luftratus fum, I have been confidered, ox ob/erved. In like manner ^a7rar>>6si( for one that has fquandered all} 3^al^£%6ï»a» for in»Xs|aa-6«», to have difcourfed j ra» ther than the middle ií%.a.Qrj, I behaved vsell, voith circum/pec- tion ; If/cco-dctf for one that has done, or performed ; iteteon^stc for ha,tori<7-¿nmi, qui excogitavit, one that has cosstrived, ox invented', and Aich like. ^ The perfeâ paíTive is alfo ufed in the fame manner ; as htiMty- fjMt, I have di/cour/ed ; tvísíeiyjiia», I have ßsevin ; «Ert«roíi)jua», / have done ; iwTgsa-io-ju.ai, I have di/pofed : sragaí/ífiy/Kai, / have re' ceived : and'it is thefe that properly correfpond to the Latin verbs common, becaufe they have both fignifications under a paffive ter-' mination, which is not always the cafe of the middle verb, for this in feveral tenfes retains the aAive termination. The verbs paflive that have two aoriils, oftener ufe the fécond than the fir ft ; as «a-^ÎTTop.«!, 1 have been beaten, rather than In like manner Ippxytii, I have been broke j «§«•«- yri,, I have been taken a-way ; ít^ó.'tc'oi, I have been changed, or / have takenflight-, from the verbs Tfévo^«», and the like. III. Of the middle Aorifis. Among the middle aorifts the firft is commonly ufed in both fignifications, but the fécond is oftener met with in the aâive fenfe; for example, ut^éofíat, etAó^a», I have taken, I have cho/en, more ufual than / have been taken, or cho/en, as the author of the Idiotifms obfervev ♦ 'I' ♦ 'Í't' 't' <' i' ♦ 't' • CHAP. X. That we are to confider the Nature and Difpofition of the Moods. * I. Of the Indicative, the SubjunStive, and the Optative. The difpofition of the moods, which I have followed in the third book, putting the indicative, the fnbjunñive, the op¬ tative, the imperative, and the infinitive, one after another, is cer¬ tainly the moft natural ; for as the imperative and the infinitive are not properly moods, the bell way is to place them at the end of the verb : and whereas the fubjun£live has a much greater affinity with the indicative, than the optative has, as may be feen in Apoll, book iii. chap. 29. it is very proper it Ihould follow next to it.- 5 As Ithe Nature of the Mooàs. 399 As the firft aorift of this mood raarketh alfo the time to coma, one might imagine at firft, that it would be better to form it from the fat. indicat. as rv^a, jn, p, from r¿4^íi/, ck, But this cannot be, as Apollon, obferves 'in the fame place, not only becaufe the changes that are made in the aorift indicat. though not in the fut. are communicated to this tenfe in the fubjunflive; paflure, fat. >f|Kw, firft aorift, Ínt/Act, fubjunft. »siftu ; toßng, : but moreover, becaufe the changes that are made in the fut.- and not in the aorifts, are not communicated to the fub- junftive, as , to think, fut. »ofxío-a, Att. aor. hófAurcí, fubjunâ. to¡Á optative. Ei yàq 7*1» avrn» nra^ti^ó/x.sda vorX^ í/^íü» aúrS» vr^o^vfiiar. Dem. for if nue had difcovered the fame refolution in our own caufe ; , fi enim eamdem in noftra ipforum caufa alacritatem oftendillimus, \âc. where we fee an indicative for a fubjunâive, viz. for ' Et jut» vregi icattS rito; wgáy/xscTo; «rgovríOero Asyci», Dem. inftead of w^ortd^Tixi, if he defigned to fpeak of any nevo fuhjeS. , 'Again, et fit» yotg ¿p' eanahítref ¿estXoero roe wáXe/xae, Id. foc ¿eéXatero, fi enim à nobis perfuafi bellum hoc fufcepiíTent, f thty bad undertaken this war at our perfuafitfn. 0¿íi» wáiroTe ccvTv» ut' tJnrot, are círoíva», ip' y Xen. liihil unquam ei vel didum abs me, vel fadum eft/quo erubuir, for erubuerit, 1 never faid, or did any thing to her to make her hlußo. Where the aor. indicat. ptrxú»6n is for the optat. a* aîcrxv'^eU- *H ¡íúiÁTiXoí ¿ero rû» eaorafíü» è wíett w^oTtgo», n o"û»Taçà|et, Ariß, camelas è fluviis non bibit, antequam eos conturbabit, for contur- baiit ; the camel troubles the river water before he drinks of it : for , aorra^eie in the opt, or entta^x^n in the fubjund. Which is very common with the Attics, even when they put the conjundion be¬ fore it; eïereç rt? vfA» Tot tSt, Dem. Olynt. i. . fi quis vobis mentem adhibebit,/«C adhibuerit: if any body will lißen to you vuitb attention. The optative is alfo put for the indicat. Aíerxt^goc St 4>tXoKXéee VfÜTot èçtoTÎcraç, oç TBç xxi KogieGía; xxTXK^iAtiitrui, ri et« «|io; mahiTi, &c. Xenoph. Lyfandercum ex Philocle, ^ui Andrios & Corinthios praecipites egerat, quaefiviflet, quâ pœnâ dignus efiTet, &c. Lyfander having aßed PhilocUs, who had ordtrtdtbtAndrians and tbg 400 Book VIII. the Corintbiant to be tumbled from a precipite, what puniflment' he defervtd. Where we fee xxTaxçv/^'VO'M, aor. ^ol. opt. for xix^/jinixtt, the plu-perfe¿l indicative. Likewife in Plato, eXiyeç ¿ti Ztvî rht ^xawerímt «•íjit4/»u rorç where míi/.^as is for ÏTref/d^t, a Jove dicebas immiiTam hominibus juftitiam fuifle.j»«» Jaid that Jupiter bad fentjußice among mankind. Which is very commoo, when there happens to be a par« tide, as on, ô;, ofvsç, i'çrtç, i'eot, ore, &C. U. 0/ the Imperative and the Infinitive, The imperative, as we have obferved Book III. may pafs for a future : and it is ridiculous, lays Apollon, book i. chap. 50. to think otherwife, iince it is not cuilomary to command things pall, or prefent, but only thofe that are to be executed after being com- mandled, and of courfe things to come. Wherefore the Hebrews have made it their firft future, and the Greeks ufe it frequently to exprefs the time to come: oTvô' »>â içàj-o», Eurip. for í^áo-íij, fcis ergo quid fox,, for quiid faâurus fis ; do you know what you are fo do? OTo-fl'í'n woiijo-or. Men, for «troteo'»;, fcio te fadurumT/know you will do it. As, on the contrary, they often ufe the future for commanding. But the author of the Idiotifms is miftaken in faying, that the imperative is put for the infinitive. For in the example which he gives from Dem. ímdeif ifiH, roeSro,' 'ívxtret ûxéevre, xfíyare, ¡av nr^óre^or nr^o^.afí^áyere : where he pretends that x^ítare IS for x^bctv, and xj^oXajdiittre for 'Br¡o?i.aide¿teiy : the fentence is abib- lute, id à oportet, it is -neceffary ; or eo^oeixn, convenir, it is proper. Of fome fuch thing : we Jhould avoid bearing falfe witnefu and fay no¬ thing but what is true. The prefent of the imperative^ fays Apollon, book i. chap. 30. idenotes only the commencement of the adtion ; exaoriha ràç ¿.¡Aori- ?^»î, let him begin to work in- the vineyard. But the aorilt implies the future aâion accomplilhed: oy.»^xru rà? ifAisiKai, let him have worked or dug in the vineyard. Wherefore Ramus, and thofe that have fol¬ lowed him; as Sylburgus and others, call thefe aorifts, as alfo the perf. imperat. futures perfeO, that is to fay, which denote the future thing accomplilhcd, partaking at once of the future and-the perfeâ. III. Jjhat the Infinitive is never put for the Subftantive. It is alfo a mifiake, which the author of the Idiotifms has given into, to imagine that the infinitive is put for the fubjunñive, when Dem. fays, to raro y^ótpa' wXtr» Iwî tsî tow»;. Ir «î{ at n .tworo;. For wXeTr makes here an abfolute fentence, and . ought to be ccnfidered as a noun, according to what we have obferved The Nàtwré of the Moodsl lAblèrvéd !n the third role of tho foregoiog book, p. 324 ; which inay be refblved in Latin by ntmpt : hoc decretnm edo, nempt navi'^ gare ad ea loca, in quibus Philippus eile poterit, my opinion is, to lot the fleet fleer towards wbatfoever plate Philip is in. For there is a wide difference between faying, that this expreffion is in the fame lignification as ut ntmigareturt and that the infinitive is put there fat ut navigarttur % which it certainly is notj iince it can.be ex¬ plained in its natural force. ^ ' ■ And it is obfervablé, that the change of moods can be only of thofe three, which we put tt^ether in our tables^ and of which we have given inftances in the nm number of this chapter, becaufe thefe moods are frequently nothing more than a difference of ter¬ mination in each tenfe : but never of the imperative for the infini. ' tive ; which are quite different things; It is therefore wrong in Surfin, and feveral other grammari¬ ans» to fay, that.the infinitive is pnt for the fubjunftive, when it is joined with î>%, ¿in, and the like particles ; as M ¿çr* nvxfl»,' horto te nt cönfeqnaris, I aJvi/eyou to a3 fo as to obtain it. ¿Su«; antequam pœnas dedeiis, before you are punifledt for the infinitive is there as a fort of a noun, and ¿in rvxf* is as if it were, tanquam ad confequi, or ad confecntionem, I odvifeyou to the purfuit, that is to fay, toaSfo as to tompafsyour end i and in like manner the reft. ' . lY. Ipßmtives and Participles of all Tenfet. The infinitive and participles may, as we have obfervedelfewherè, denote all the difiperences of time. It is for this reafon that with fit their prefent frequently marks the future, as we ihall ihew in the chapter of Indeclinable Particles. But this may be alfo feen in thefe examples : lUot nt» vwi^ at ÇoSSrrat, mtnitBeunr, ¡x"'* 1^"»- prefent he has marked the future: it it very lihly thai they will be confirmed in their erverflon, by reafon tf the mifchiefs tbty apprehend, and of thofe they have already fuffered, KmivMvtii .yàç x«t tí ne h wotxíXfMiT« Stáftttoi ¿»»Mvdlt», fiotiSdres rt, iysiaheu àt «¿re» nvaeiy, eíM.' én ¿¡iftMot Plato, 7. deRep.jrs» will fuppofe perhaps that ht rather fancies thefe things than fees them with his eyes. Where we find, that rovmri which feeqis a future, and which feems a pre« fent, nevérthelefs exprefs both the fame time. The fame may be faid of the participle : icKSm ^1 (uo^Hrcat, 0; uftMot ftaxfifdyUi ¿vtç etvrot, Xenoph, for alios mercede conducunt, quaff melius fuá causa pugnaturi fint quam ipfimet, they have foreigners in their pay, juft as if they would fight better than themfelves in their own caufe. -V. Of Verbals in (or. Verbals in í®» anfwer to the gerunds in dam., They generally govern the fame cafe with their verb, and muftbe refolved in thie fame manner as the Latin gerunds, confidering them merely as nouns fubftantivej but frequcritly including a fort of neceffity of duty, agreeably to what we have obferved in the Latin method, in Dd the Book VUh the lematics on gerunds« Chap. L Mni/coMÙrlor 0áyop irytfi&p» wotiMcu ro ßto, Balil, the wife num ought to avoid being governed by vain-gUry^ and the opinion of the multitude ; but be Jhould take right reafon for the rule of his aäiont: reahu woiqrtx»- tig« torary nrrtp áxoriop veùa-t. Plato, that is to iky, to ¿utóup ravr» vooóra nrrop âuoriop iat/. See. the more poetical tbefe things are, the left they ought to be heard by children. The Attics, who particularly affeñ the plural for the fingular, put alio thefe nouns in the plural : ¿ítxtíp roc 'aSupuíoc, xeu unXtfimi» tlpeu, Thucyd. that the Athenians ufed them ill, and therefore thtynmß declare war : rm u^xfchrrm iu) marp ¿uosriop. Soph, we muß obey the magißrates in every thing ; where áxorí» is for ¿xartor, by a kind of fyllepfis, cognate to that of animalia currit, of which we have ipoken in the foregoing book. Rule V. If the fubftantive is expreffed, then tkefe verbal nouns retain their nature of adjeâives, and agree with the fubftantive in the fame manner as other adjeâives ; as ô ¿yaiit ¡lópof jtfiPtTÍof, Arift, the good man alone ought to be honoured. Of two Expreßons more remarkable^ and. more dißcult to refolve. But if the conftruâion be different, then the noun in or is a fub¬ ftantive, that has the fame government with its verb ; as oXup alna ¿(xriop, xa} reé^tr isripu roTc içyoTf ifet^fioriop, fup, itTojuir, Xucian in his rules for writing hiftory, we. have mentioned with what fort of an exordium we muß begin, and what order we muß oh- fcrve in things. Where á^rtor, incipiendum, ought to be confidered as a verbal fubftantive, which governs the cafe of its verb, as here Àç)yiP o1»p in the accufative; and we muft refolve ifa^fMs-íop in the fame manner. But if after thefe nouns there happens to be another accufative that agrees with them, as with the infinitive, it is becaufe they in¬ clude the force and aâion of the verb; as in Plutarch, xai fUfivriop ruvra Bavfiá^ipráf yi Hi xa} ^n^ëpraf, and thefe things ought to be imi¬ tated by thofe that admire them, and are moved by them. And in an¬ other place, ipaçfMriop rSro xa) roT^ ôjuoioi;, xuíivopreí tÙ; fiiya tp^o- pSrraf iiri roT^ á|íoi;, he who has a mind to refrain young people that raife difurbanccs on account of trifles, muß apply thisto ßmi- lar occajions. ' CHAP. Rmarki CH ,**0 *t 1.' 40'^ CHAP. XI. Remarks on the Indeclinabjle Particles. And firfi of ofi. WE have already made mention in the fixth book. Chap. T. ^ of divers words which commonly pafs for adverbs, though in reality they are not fuch« but are either an accufative governed by xar«, or an ablative governed by vù», h, íñl, or fome fach prepofition. Bat it is proper to treat here Ibparately of ibmd of theAs particles. I. That ort is always a Relative, The grammarians fiequentiy make ort pafs for a conjunflion« which they render by the Latin fuit/, and difiingnilh it from 0, rtt feparated by a comma, which they fay is a relative : bat this dif* tinâion feems to be quite arbitrary, this word being almoft always the neater of the relative, 0, to which the Attics have joined rt, as they do to feveral others} faying alfd in the mafculine i'trtt, in the feminine qn;, as in the neater ort. This we can make appear in the feveral nfes wherein this word is received, which will be a very great help towards the explication of feveral difficult phrafes. In order to proceeid more methodically, we ihall beg the reader' torecolleô what we have diffufely proved in the Generali Grammar« Part II. Chap. ix. concerning the nature of the relative, which is« that it has fomething in common with all the other pronouns, in^ afmuch as it is put inftead of a noun ; and fomething particular in this, that it ferves as a conne&ion to join an accelfory propofition to its principal. ,We have proved in the fame place,'that the Latin fued, which among the grammarians pafles for an adverb or conjunâion, is, in reality, this very relative, but divefted of its office of à pronoun, and retaining no more than that of joining« where.it happens to be, one propofition to another. Now though I do not pretend abfolutely to deny, that the Greek !ri may oftentimes agree in fignification with the Latin j as •5 «îy ïr» ifíft.itaa't xœxcîVoi r<»% rófiotf. Ludan, fcio quod leges ipil, fervabunt, I am very fenfibU that they nuill obferve the lams : Sn ¡Ae' ^ tf /tw te y ^ ^ «TI rsiwtSnft.eu, tsre t» r<¡i ragragy »»f*», avrs; Idem, quàd ñeque vinâns fim, ñeque in tártaro, etiam ipfe vides« Opinor, 1 fancy you are fenfible yourfelf, that 1 ám neither fettered, nor in hellt sîwi» »rt ßi^trat, Xenoph. he hasfmdthat he ismillingi Yet, I cannot help thinking, that, to confider it rightly, Sr» is fre¬ quently ftript of its office of conjunâion, which is more peculiar to the Latin quod, and only retains that of a pronoun. ' In order to render this more cafy to comprehend, we mufi ob^ ferve« that the Greeks, ¿n imitation of the Hebrews, (as we have made appear in our General Grammar) frequently ufe detached expreffions, which are put almoft abfolutely, as we have already taken notice of in the preceding chapters : thus in the New Tefia-i ment, when the priefts and Levites fent to St. John the Baptift, to D d z aflt 404 Book VIII.' -, a(k him who he was; the text fays, »t interre^areiit turn. Tu qtùstff ¡V« ttirït, Xv tU t1 ; Johft i« that is, to Iky theik words . to him, 2v rii t1 ; ffho art thm ? ^ ' Now this is the fignification «rt generally bears, which feems to be owing to the cußom of the Attics, who, as Vergara fays, book iii. chap. 2^.gaudeta geminare vocabulaidem polUutia: whereto he wants lis to refer not only ort, but likewife after the verbs xiyu, and the like, as in this palfage which he quotes from ^fop, tv; M Ça/tdinK, ¿i oí |3¿xo^ot ¡tai oí «rotfttMf ¡m vviSxlvorro, illa vero relpon- dente,ßf anjviering thut ; bubulci & paftores me fibi infeßam fuf' picabantur, the cowherds and the ßefherdt looked tpou me at their ' enemy. And this is fo far true, that the fentence may frequently fnbfift without thefe particles, and even they are Ibmetimes omitted ; as in Thucyd. book i. rSro» it» /tíytióf re rS tXttf ¿x iHrarro iXiñi* xoù ¿/*a Alyvwlius oí tXttot, hunc enim [regem Amyr- tasum] propter paludis magmtudinem expugnare nequivemnt : fäßmnl qui A qtù paludes illas incolunt,/unt .Mgyptiorum helUcoßffimi : whefe we fee it is all one as if he had ikid, xal ¿^¿, bene dixißi, quia viruta non babeo. There are feveral other places in the famé inter¬ preter. Rtnutrhs 'en "O T I» "40$ pnttr, where en is thus rendered by ysW or fu/af and where' it would have been more proper to have omitted it ; as in St. John x. Xtyu vfu», Sn tyo ilfii i Sóf» fwi wjoCaTon', atnettt amtn, dieo n/thU, quia ego /urn oßium ovium ; where quia is fuper- 'luous : and in the (eventh chap, oí ¡At i>Aot ixiyop, en ¿ya6é( incf quidam euim dieeiaut, quia bouut eßi where it is vifible that this quia is of no manner of ufe. It is alfoin this fenfe we mull take on, where H. Stephen, in his book de Dial. Att, fays, that it ought to be taken for enimvero, or aempe ; as in St. Mark vii. « ¿uex^i^tit ort xa.\Zt Tivv» Hoaietf Ifim» tu» verex^tTar, ' which he explains by faut quidem, enimvero, bene. Sec. Whereas, according to our principle, the fenfe is quite natural to fay, at ille re/pondent dixit hoc, xaidit. Sec. Hence the interpreter has left out this en, having put fimply, . dixit i bene prophetavit, &c. In like manner in St. Luke xix. fd- yat Sn, ti Sytuf xai ov, which H. Stephen renders by nempe, velß tu noJTes : whereas it is ftill all the fame, dicens hoc, faying this, melom S V \ \ W «r o VIZ* ib syvuç KM avo I am not ignorant that this «n may be rendered by various par¬ ticles, and diverfified in feveral forms ; but I maintain that its na¬ tural force agrees with our principle, according to which it is the ^ bttfinefs of the tranflator to invent divers turns to exprefs it. Thus when Tully tranflates Srt by nam, as in this example from Plato, aWi» Tv; lítyírm yíyemp iftt, Srt rût' tdp Xíyup wiçt rS marrèf Mye/itpup éSA( íp eren ifpv6v, pí/Aíp ¡xím fAiV qXto», ¡apit* u^ctpop ¡Sopreip, rerum optimarum cognitionem oculi nobis attulerunt : nam bac qute eß habita de univtrfitaie oratio à mbis, baud unquam effet in¬ venta, fi neqpse fidera, neque fol, tuque ceelum fub oculorum afpeäum ca- dere potuiffet : it is plain that this nam is a caufal particle, which has the fame force withfiquidem, or eo quod, this eo being an abla¬ tive of the manner, juft as on is an accufative, which alfo denotes it in Greek, and fuppofes xarù ; whence it is that in Latin we frequently do not write eo quod, but only qu:d, which alfo fuppofeth a prepofition. The Greek of Plato may be therefore tranflated thus, the fight is of very great fervue to us ; for it is certain that vie fiould never have undertaken this difcourfe concerning the univerfe, if vie had not beheld the ßars, the fun, and the heavens that encompaft us. It is thus alio we mull refolve on in interrogations, as in the New - Tellament, when the difciples alked Chrift, why they had not been able to caft out the devil : Sn iiAiit ôx. tiSiipídiifcsp ¡xSa^Íp aire ; vii^ have vie not been able to caß him out ? that is to fay, *aô' on, or luán ; juft as quare is put for qua de re, which imports the fame as quamobrem. Tí on avpífupíi6pi vftTp j Xenopb. cur fic conipiratum - eft à vobis ? vihy have you thus confpiredf For it is obfervable, that this on is ofteii governed by a prepo¬ fition exprelTed or undeffiood, as in Polyb. Hift. i. oTf««» mirtoi éi*,e>s>yn(rtpp, Storp xai ^í«» «oXÓ n rx( ¿«rtXtívoi'To wçô rir ¿9ri( a¿rS, Aâ. ii. wéet» God bath raiftd up, having looftd the pains of death, becau/e it vsas not pojjsble that heßould be holden of it» üere we fee xetbórt, where he might have put Su only, xtxd' Su, as St. Bafil has put it in a paflage, wherein he (hews that external goods are contemptible : ¿ fMtot xad' Sn faSíat í^tt rw r» itutTÍa ÓXX' ort fciiít ¿yaúilt ivtareu rèf xtxrv/^imi ¿•goren Xf~>, not only becaufe they are fubjeä very eafily to change, but snore' over becaufe they cannot communicate any goodneft to thofe that are in pojfeffion of them. Where it is manifeft, that the latter Su fuppofes xarà, which is expreíTed in the former. Thus St. Luke, fpeaking of the father and mother of St. John the Baptift, fays, xai ¿x vr avroif rixtot, xec^óu i 'iXiaaSer n* r<<é«, and th^ had no child, bc' taufe that Elizabeth was barren. And lower down, fdô5, Zax"'' fía, Síou tiftixtigên i ^ítiaíf v àwéâv, ¡tai TtfiXtjitjuftq i ôiSf, &c. Matth, vti. quam angußaporta- eß, lâ ar3a via eß qua dutit ad vitam, that is to fay, nah' on, quantum, or in quantum. And hereby we find out a manner of explaining thefe little parenthefes («3 oT^ ort) which feem to embarrafs grammarians; as ßiJiofiiMi wgo mirtup, St ¡aiMm ilynt yitifcottvotroit, su oiJ* on, TXf woMe; viro¡Á,imota, Dem. antequam ad ea }quer tut rem pertinent dicere aggredtor, eorum vos admonitos effe volo, quorum tarnen eptime (bene hot ftio, or rather fat ftio) meminißis, that is to fay, for I kttovt it ven vsell, or nubith'you all remember, I am very fure, Ovç aneunsc, sv olS" Sn, rSrot rit fwyot ¿xvkóoits. Id. nam vos omnes» fat fcio, aliquid hac de re jam audiviftis, for 1 inoiv very vieil that you have all heard it mentioned. And in like manner the reft. And this is fui&cient to prove, that it is not lefs true, perhaps, of Sn than of quod, of which we have treated in the Latin method| that they are both nothing more than real relatives. CHAP. XII, , ôf Prepoßtions. NOtwithllandîng that what we have faid concerning prepo- fitions in the preceding book. Chap, II. is fuificient to ihew their force and different beauties, as alfo to facilitate the under- D d 4. ^ . flanding '4O8 Boor VIII, ftanding of them ; yet we. have thought proper to mat;e fome dltionaf remarks upon them here, whether with t-egard to their manner of diverfifying the phrafe, or to the particular difficulties which they fometimes create. . AMe>f andllEPf, imply the iame thing, but they are frei^nently joined together ip verfe ; at ifiiTi ^ weg« xgvn» Ugiif x»r» ífíofiuii, 11, ßf VDftfftrtd /aerifica on the /acred altars near the foun» tain, which we fometimes find even in componnds $ Ç», Horn, turned about, Ud round. Çut m» is much more ufual ip profe. See their periphrafe lower down. Numb. 5. 'ana\ aia\ kata\ are made ufe of all three in the divifion of numbers ; as àt» ¡¿0, fMO and two, xar» ¡míp», every month : it' hut every fifth y ear > But thk difiribution is exprefiéd alfo in other different manners : ifian avrtti ¿no'rùiAur í¿o Siio, hflark vi. ana began to fend them out two and two : which partakes of the Hebrew phrafe. El« Íx»roí, each in particular: ixarot, of fixty each : xar* «»ig« «*«<■«», each feparately. In like manner, 0 x«6' txaror, each in particular : i xaB* ixdmr, each female in particular : or xetd' ira, each tifien feparatelj, Likewiie with vvt, virivo, <ñtr^tr%, two and two^ three and three.. See the fore* going book. Chap. fl. 'BIX ^nd 'EN are fometimes in the Scripture in a particular meaning, which proceeds from the Hebrew ; as lyii ü a/y» ¿/m»* M)] ôfMaar oXtif, ¡inrt I» i¡ar^, finrt tU U^ó^v/ta, Matth. V. hut I fay unto you. Swear not at all, neither ly heaven, nor by Jerufalem. PivS /xot ii( ©tor vnt^amtt^p, xar tlf orxor magaÇvyvf, Ffalm XXX. Be t^ou tome as a God that is my protector, and as a houfe of refuge. II. Variation of the fame Phrafe caufed ly Prepoßtions. As there^is hardly an expreffion but may be rendered by a pre* pofition, according to what we have ffiewp in thç Latin method, fo there is nothing that contributes more to vary ùiç phrafe. for example : . T 0 fay, with all my ftrength, or, as much as lam able, we may put If it/»«/xiii, T« tt( Sótafítr : x«r« i);»«/xi» : 00-0» in' l/xot : ¿aot aBí' toç, fup.. xarà, or even Irl, eß, jult as we fay, om ic;»«/xif : like* wife 00-0» Svaràt, Or «rgof 000» Svraror, Or even otra bvrarà : tlf 000» vxa ívráfieuf : . 000» tí; ijut qxi» : 000», or «r«g' 000», Or x«ô' 000», or 1^' 000», or ip' ora, xaB* o bira/iar : ip' 000» «rXtrro», ' Again, TO l/oë '/.ctgo;, fup. x«r«, _or xar'~ifA,avrS ^tgo; : xarà ri î^to» jiotgo; : TO in' ifiot^ TO x«t' i^t : rtf ijnM : TO in* 1^1 îxo» Again, otó» Tt : oTó; rt ¿¡ and OT0» n »>»«>, as much as poJfibU. To exprefs quickly, diligently, .we may put ,1» rí^tr'. 00» Ta;^«: »«T« rá^: : i(d rayyon : il« T«;^»;: ira rayyap : I; ráxof. We fay alfo, without a'prepofition, 000» ráxof, rax«, ráxrra (where we may underiland x«rà) and raxitu, where we may upder* fiand it«, though feveral take thefe Words for adverbs. \^e fay likewife -tjx' T^xuf, and î»5» «¿rí Qf Prepoßtioml • '40^ To exprels, of ; ¿>d' '¿th : ¿tr ¿r : íp' vrf» ; ip' ^ : «p* oT{ * ¡y oîç.* Ip' OTO : Ip' o : «y«ç* o ; xecd' o, í»' o eùnèvrcit.^ To &y> entirefyf we find x»G* ÔA«-: to ^ oAoy : to viroXoi : wm» t» rmwo», fup.. xocT», as they put it fometimés, xaTà •mcirr» r^vor, v»m r^iroy fup. h. And adverbiallyi teárrf^í, vremriJûif, •acuri' aun, and the like. I III. T¿á Signification of a Word changed ly a PrepoßtioH.„ But as nothing is more apt to deceive people than the diflevence of lignification, which the fame word receives by ;:eafon of a different prepofition, which, asVergara fays, has impofed upon fevefal tranf. lators, it is proper to give here feme inftances of this variety in the fame noun, over and above thofe which we have given of dif> ferent forts in the lift of the fécond' chapter in the preceding ^oJc. nèii XToioÇf the foot. Ton if weoi» àyfSvtf, tb^ do POt as mucb at fie •what lies iefera tbeir feet : wgo« toÎç «roo-b «¿t» ?f, be ruas at bis feet : netri aiioft infiasstlj, imsnediately : •aetqi •miixi, prefintly, tbat infant, and mérito according to Vergara : wigl «róíi», fit to one's foot, aptly, à propos, anveniently . ix «roj^f iîWcto, be fotiorued clofi to bit heels y be tam/e tlofi behind bim, Likewife ¡/trrofùi yísofiaí aoi, I am an hindrance to jets, I lie in your ruay, or I go tet meet you ; the fame as If or fttgih, inßessd, fir, in tht plait ef, vice, loco. : ¿ç h rp tSp nat Den. as tntnùts, fir enemies : is ihtlt 'riduuat rà tifnirs^a, Heliod. yen have had no eßtem fir us : it or xari ly turns, feparatefy, apart, esse after another : w î» ¡m^u, vi ivi ist^t, particular things, things taken feparately, each apart : vi xa6' ix»rot, the lane : it píett víéiofiat, or «ootiîoSeu, the fane as «r nea^igrf, to do a thistgßigbtly, negÜgesstly, not to mittd much, nottjoht tvery ssneafiabout a thing. IV. RenmrkahU Signißcation of *kito. *Avo, with the genitive which it governs, not only fignifiea diftance, as iu-o vñt nmv^Hbiffar from his country ; or the facceffioo- of tine, as ion rät ix$ítví. Plut, at the expiration of that fühlte employment ; bnt alio the feâ or profeffion that a perfon foU lows, or the kind of life that one takes up with, as d iwi vZt ¡jucSx' ¡tÁrut, Laert. the mathematicians : «> inl Çt^oooÇiott ««ù t^éyat, thofe that profefs philofophy and polite literature : «> ivo tS Iltgivivu, the Peripatetics, Adien. et iico vZf "Svoac, Lucían, the Stoics : ot iui Svfiixtif, the comedians, as Budseus expounds it ; for is pro« perly that place in the theatre, which was allotted for the fingers, and nuficians. ' Thus 0Î ini vñí ixxXvoiaf, in St. Bafil, lignifies the Chriliians, ii ^uißant, cyc/unt ab ecclefia, as the tranflator has accurately rendered It : tn/Ht it nrgoc vii( iwi vxt ixxXqo-iec; Irt Ti$ Tióyof engl vSt itotxgtñtf vur viivaf, in Hexan, horn. 3. but now vue muß /peak agatnß thofe that are in the church, or thai are of the church. And Jufiinian ñ niftaken in a difcourfe of his for the fifth general council againft Origen, who was condenned therein, in alledging this paflage, as if St. Bafil underñood iwi vñt ixxStioíaf, for thofe gui ab ecclefia,exci'* derant, or as if he néant here that Origen had been expelled the church. For it appears by the fequel, that this father defigns ta point out in this palTage rather the Chriftian church in oppofiuon to paganifm, whereof he had fpoken before, than the catholic church' in oppofition tp herefy. And it is evident that he and the other fathers, as St. Athanaf. never looked upon Origen as a perfon out of the comnunion of the church, but as an ecclefiaftic author who lived and died in it, though charged with feveral errors. V. Periphraßs of arid vreç). The periphralis formed by thefe two prepofitions along with the article, is very common,'and admits of two remarkable figni« fications. The firft to denote the principal perfon ; as «> vi> *0^l» .for 'OgÇivf, Orpheus', ot wrigl OtTtivtror xal 'AX/lavîço,, Plot. and Alexander : oí migî Xuxgivv, Socrates : xal mo>Aoi fx vZt *l»-~ ícíía, thrirddtioar vrgif vis wrigi tit Mig^a, xai Magia» î,» wtaga/Avdx'' cutva* Of Prepoßtionsl 411 »Ufr M eiiràt, John îi. atul ma/y of the J tuet tarnt to Martha and Mary to comfort them> . ËxpreiSon^ of this íbrt, fays H. Stephen, iêem to have been contrived originally for philofophers and great men, whereby noc only their perfon was marked, bat alfo their difciplesand their re'* tinue. Infomuch that it was a piece of Greek vanity, to render it ^ afterwards common in difconrfe, in order to mention a perlón with greater air and oflentatron ; in the fame manner as the modems nfer the words lordfiip, excelle/tcy, highnefs, reverence, eminente, majtfijp. hline/s, Sec, to exprels with a greater mark of refpeâ not the thing; but the perfon. - The fécond lignification is to denote at the fame time, both the chief perfon, and his retinae or attendants ; as ot -rif KSgor, , for Cyrus and his foldiers : ot ¿¿¡//pï to» 'Eorlxe^o», Epicttrus and his ftä. To thefe we may fubjoin a third, which is very natural, viz. to mark the retinae or attendants, and not the perfon: roi; «v« TO» ^o^vpó^otf, < Eufeb. to his guard. It is in this lalt fenfe we muft underlland thofe phrafes that have an ellipfis ; as o> wcçl ra, it^à, fup. ifùçuwot, thofe that art tmpU/ytd in the facrifices, viz. the prießs, VI. Difficulty concerning thefe Peripbrofes. Thefe periphrafes being liable to difiFerent interpretations, are frequently the occafion of ambiguity in difcourfe. Hence in Thucyd. ot ¿¡/.(p) ntiaatS^of, by fome is underfiood Pifander only, and by others Pifander veith his attendants. In Xenophon, ot, ¿/*fi rif Kt/for by fome is underftood Cyrus only, and by others Cyrus and his foldiers. In the A£ls, chap. xii. ot IIocvAa», is by the ancient interpreter rendered Paulus & qui cum eo erant, Paul and thofe that were along with him ; though, in St. John xi. he has ttanllated re^of ràt Má^doc» kou Motgtot», ad Martham iff Mariam, Now when there is a noun joined with an article, or fome parti« ciple, which has.a relation to it, and which governs it in the genitive, it feemeth, fays H. Stephen, that there is fcarce any room to quellion its implying a multitude: ot 'a^xeo-íXcoo» 'A*»î»/«fltiV.oi, Plut, we muft not explain it, Arceftlaus the Academic, but Arcefilaus and his followers the Academics. Likewife in^the life of Galba, vMTs-oí t<5» «»éj» TtytAXio» x»t Nv^ptíio» É» ttfty yíyo»ó- r«», feveral friends ofTigellus and Nymphidius. And in the life of Demetrius, oí í» wígt to» d/xKn^ia, mûmc fût äotro íspya6xi rot xga« tS»t«, Sec. that is to fay, Phalereus and all his retinue, according to Budseus. Likewife in St. Bafil, in his treatife on the true faith, avttrHaf is tSto xai ot crijt to» ¡sMxá^iot IIsTfo» xotí laáttnt fexOt/rai rSÁv^íu, that is to lay, St. Peter, St. John, and other apoßles of the J^ord. yii. Whether to remote the AmhtguUy the Verb may he put in the Singular. But it is proper to enquire, whether when we intend to mark the perfon only by this periphrafis, it be not allowed to put the . verb in the lingular, • g Budseus, 4IÍ BOOK VIIL Bndaeus, In his Commentaries, is of opinion that it may be pnt by a figure, viz. a fyliepfis : which H. Stephen feems to favour in his Theiaurus; and Syiburgus confirms it, to remove, he fays, all ambiguity. Gretfer teaches the fame; and Surfin in his gram* mar gives for^ inftance thefe expreffions, ot mgl rl* ÎPuytp Paulus dixit, St. Paul bos/aid. Neverthelefs, the only authority for all this is a pafiage of He¬ rodotus, which having been given by Budaeus, has afterwards been laid hold of by the red, though it íéems to be a very weak founda¬ tion. It is taken from the firft book, chap. Ixii. and is thus quoted by Budseus : kcù Tlita-íf-gctrot, ¿f ig/Jwôivrsç Ix M«- faSâiiof, vira» im ri »fv, im rvvri aunófnf, ¿mxpttrat im IloeX- Títirííof 'A9v>»ít>( Ugif, K»* ít'm íStro rà ov^et. But it is certain that fome ancient editions, as that of Aldus, put ¿rnxdiTM in the fingular, and tOmro in the plural. It is alfo, obfervable, that the editions of Paul and H. Stephen have this very fame reading, and that Syiburgus, in his notes which are at the end of this author, makes no fort of emendation. Moreover Vallabas tranflated it in the plural, perrucerunt and pafueruut, wherein the French tranflators agree with him. Wherefore the pafTage may be rendered thus : but Pißßratus, and thofe that nutre mith hinti march' tug out of Marathon., advanced tonuards the tonun, and having drofunt together, they took pofl at the temple of Minerva of Paliene, and put. them/elves in readine/s for battle.. True it is that H. Stephen, in revifing the Latin tranflation of Valla, has refiored pervenit, and tx adverfi arma pojuit. But having made no alteration in the Greek text, as he might have done, according to the ancient editions, he leaves this expreflion ftill moré dubious, fince he feems to have de- Îarted from what he quoted in his Thefaurus. I fhould therefore e glad to find fome further authority to refolve this difficulty ; efpecially as there leems very little foundation for putting the verb in the fingular from this paflage, becaufe having the nouns and participles in the plural, ôg/in6én-ti and ovnínm, it feems to deter¬ mine abfolutely a plural, according to what I have remarked above. And'indeed, how could they be otherwife than feverat, fince he talks of people that were drawn together î ■ > CHAP. XIII, Of the Particle w?, ut. • s is derived from Sç, according to the etymolo^ift. It is fufceptible of fo many different lignifications, in the va¬ rious ufes which it is applied to, ^that H. Stephen, in his Thefaur rus, is of opinion that it may be taken fometimes for an adverb, fometimes for a 8t, udnam, would to God, as ut in Latin. It is put after other adverbs, in order to augment the fighifica- tton : vortqfvût ùi miré admodum Istpr, it is furprifing how ^leafed I am. '^uft as T ully fays, incredibile eß quam valde^audeam, Vrt^vSf 'ài ßaXo/Mu, 1 ardently defire. ¿t he it frodtgioufly fad. But properly this is, mir urn, ut, otquomodo trifiit eß'. and in the fame manner the reft. It likewife bears this lignification, udien it is taken for quam hf way of admiration : it ¿qyaxéo» erqayfi.* irtt ! quam molefia res eft, quam dura 1 O what a dißcult thing it is 1 Even when it is taken ' for quod, as «Vt, it is fiill in the fig- nification of ut, as a particle of fimilitude ; as he faid it is na wonder, H-nit it'h^tt ^avisacóe Ir», that is to fay, he hasßewn bow it is no wonder. 1 fay that he has done this, ydya it avtot «ivoídxi, that is to fày, how, or in what manner he has done it. It is fometimes joined even with on ; as dorip ry (pá^axi, it oro ixpivo fn» telling him that if he made aiy difßcsslty to, &c. We likewife fay, it t'6s, quod utinam, which God grant. _ 'fit is alfo rendered by nam, enim,/ôr ; and fometimes by quan- doquidem,^«rr, whereas, forafmuch. 'Clt hxin UUxrrai, Thucyd^ for ¿*'sT» yàç, fays eùa^roit Demofth. for «¿14 yi^ faniaireu, «vsXXë Stt, Tvt yiirnivo/Atnif ¿iw ix« ¿x îx" voaavrm aofiar. moph. metno ne non habeam tantam lapientiam, I am afraid 1 frtdl not be fo wife, Mq Siunm ù( ix qlíotf xftdtvlqo-irat. Idem, non eft qnod metnatis ne non jncnnde fitis dormitnri, do net be afraid that jeu ßall not ßeep at your eafe. See in the New method of the l ¿^5« ric •t\- rioi, John XX. fi quorum remiferitis peccata, toho/e/oeveif Hns ye remit. But it is ri'equently a potential particle, ivmriKoe, though being fometimes repeated, it is aUb called Tixor, a redundant or expletive particle. It is joined with almoft all tenfes and moods ; examples whereof are very common. But with the indicative iris equivalent to the fubjunâive, becaufe of the conditiohal force which it includes : thus the French often feiider in the indicarive with a conjunñion,' what the Latins would exprefs in the fubjunâive, ß j'aveis aimé forß amavifem ; quand je fayhit, for cum facerem} s'il a fait, for ßfeeerit. « Thus ive fay, ih thé imperfeA indicative, hi .Itaat iitarrat. Dem. eílént enim, or efle poflent f and hy no meant erant) utilifiimi omnium,/«r they moould be the moßfetviceahle ofall. At alfo in the perfeû, contrary to the opinion of Gaza, tyà ¡u* iftTf ruf »¿¡Mi, ol'uf a,p a¡t.nt ¿ftM/iaráriif- iaiaOeu rv «róXii,' Luciao, J have given you fuch latus as 1 thought vtould be moß condst^ tive to the good of this city.' Likewife in the aoriUs, 'as in Synefius, Who writing to his bro- dier concerning a murder, with which a perfon was ¿hafged with¬ out being known for certain to have committed it, fays, thát wé tnuft equally dilbelieve the accufed, and the accufers : tip ¡aIp Sri toiStSf Iro' uçr' ti *cà f/M «rtsroíiixer, ¿30C la'oiijo'tr Íp, him, becäuß "iß be has not committed it, be was, however, capable of fuch an aSion : tuf ii xai /tr) nOiiaeiprai Srt ovpttrXetcap up, and thoft, hecassfe if they havi' mot really forged this accufation, yet they were malicious enough to doit, "Where it is vifible that hp fimply denotes an apparent probability of the aâion. Hence this particle with the aoriUs is frequently rendered by the Elu-perfeñ of the fubjunétive, where it' not only denotes a prO- ability, but fometimes even a kind of certainty of the futuré eíFeñ r up Hp pvpi tnnoUiitp, îwfu^tp. Dem. nihil eofum quae npnc fecit, prseftitiBet, he would have done nothing of what he has dont, EÎ Si {ùh, 'tiwop Slp vfMP, John xiv. z. if it were not fi, I would havt told you. Jlilxut UP h oúxuif xat trmoSa *u6v/ttput, /^trtponoap, Luke X. 13. th^ had a great while ago repented, fitting in fackcloth and afioesi Therefore in St. John iv. where Chrift fays to the Samaritaá woman, ct rjm tx» Su^iÙp t5 0iS, xal tí( Ir»» S tdyup ;r> »jrárc hotro, e^ttr at y. 'AXXot h mttiat pit ui at o; rrçavvatev. At hißoria nou tefferit Gracie, suc opponere Thueydidi Salußium vereor. III. "Av in Interrogations. *A'r is alfo ufed in interrogations : où yàç àt xú¡M)t ¿worácr««; : où yàg àt WMîe'AOo»; f*« on «sfo; roÓMt, à».à «rço; o»*i«r, ÔW» xitàatoç meiftn ; ^fch. could you make a place revolt ? could you have the courage to approach by yourfelf, 1 do not fay towards a town, but even towards a finóle houfe, whère there was any danger f . E e Thus . È o o K - VIIÍ; Thits «rheB 'Terence txyitßneret vtro tu ilhm factre hétcf fintrtm ittum ^ Adelph. aâ. 5. fe. 4.^ it nay be thus rendered inn Greek, áv yàç »t Ixcrtof ri» &i» t»otî vg¿m»r» ; a» lyù wouUyou fuffcr him toMä thus f Ifußir him f and the reft in the fane manner. lVt*Av expleiivCi cr redundant\ and ellipticy cr under- flood. *A» Is an expletive, when it happens to be repeated in the fame period ; as yttSfu»»» y í» oto» ^c^o/mv. áyawaefietí ri à» km cIkiT» SucKt/Çt^iZirte. evÍMfiófOí ôgdflv àxçt€S( /liio» meXirtia», PlatO in Poli¬ tic. for if a prince wasfuth as nue have dtfcrihed, he nuould gain the love of his fuhjeßs, and might reign peaceably over them, conformng ta tht only true rules of government. Úecfcí» oh y ¿jíost^u» óx^»»í* avitig íV »'» h* k» ¿Xy¿»M( arXio», Soph, for being here nuitb me» you are iroublefomei but if you go anuay, perhaps you voill he no long^fo. This particle is alfo fometimes nnderfiood. rií rot vs^ip^i tvio'tt ooiihvrM A^mu» ; Eurip. henu is if poflible for aty of the Greeks to fubmit to you vaillin^ly f for et» mtoùiin. In like manner, km it /snyi i Zivt Stíí-noi» avrof, xai x"î"* urçovx^nos ri rr^Zy/st», Lucian, and if Jupiter himfelf had not inter- pofed, tbey nuould have come to blonus ; talking of the dilpate of the three goddeíTes concerning the golden apple. y. Remarkable Force of the Particle in abbreviating. This particle has a very remarkable force in difcourfe. inafmuch as it includes within itfelf the lignification of a verb nnderfiood. according to Budaens which contributes vafily to concifenefs ; as rooavrn» vnotnoasro aveSi» So»».vaxsn,Si imi. Phyficians and lawyers only have the privilege of killing peeplty withotsí being put to death for it. Sometimes after fi.it they do not put but ¿ fow ¿Mm, or pnly, tarnen, neverthelefs, but, notvsilhßauding, Tv^ivç rot ¡Mt ttit itfiac, ¿mA fsMXysr^, H, t. Tydeus was but of afmall fixe, but be was a fioutfoldier, ' *Aorocmf fiit tláixaii oí «roc^tóm; irOá^e, tavrct pLiyir» fáaxtst ilteu' xeù ftoAirœ airsívf ¿|»a t» wóAct, wtgí at at avrol /uMuai oviAuMvut* é ¡ítit óm' sí *aï ÍMut ritut XiKTc» fA» ¿«rfÓT<¿« 9*» T¡¡» ctiríai ytmt Plate in Ttm» qaocirca nobis fie cerno efiTe faciendum» ut de otroque nos qui* dem dicamus genere caufarum, Ck. de Univerfo, twbereforeyjiuet it is fe, I think it is fit we Jhould treat here ef heth thofe ferts of taufes,, "Ert Si ferves fw a connexion to add a frelb proof, after having produced already'feveral arguments, and is' rendered by jam, jam^ vero, prseterea, moreover y hefidesy likewife, &c. m Si ro7t máStat» ¿xoxaoiittxá$ ¿ity ¡uMcvtM xeù ¿tupsiúify Arifiot, i. de ^orihns. ' jamvero, quum, &c. and being moreover a fiave to his fajfions^ it will be of m manner of fervice to him to hear thefe things, VI. Of adverfative Particles, K»i rot is joined either with the fubjunñive, or with the opta« tive : x»i to» ti' ytmr »» núrt^Vy n MaxtSm cin)^ xara^qonZo 'a9))« ouiat ; Dem. quanquam quid tam novum elTe poteft, quam Macedo» nëm quendam eíTe qui Athenienfes defpiciat ? but what can ,be mort furprisíingy than to fee a Macedonian de/pife the Athenians f Kar is put with the fttbjunâive, and Se with the indicative : ex-p amples of which are very common. . Kaivig is put fometimes without a verb, along with the participle;' bSviiaTos at @sZi toaio-tn ¿mriisy xcilort^ iito rt tlxirvs xeà àtory xcíiat íesoSá^tm Asyso-ir, Plato in Timao ; where yiywui refers to \ Kiff fJbilff ¡IbVi \>Vf »VP, Oi, P», Tie 6. The long vowels, and even the diphthongs, may be (horten- ed, when they, happen to precede another vowel or diphthong, particularly at the end of words, becaufe the Greeks are not ob¬ liged to make elifions ; as in the firfl Iliad, "A^ùi IXííy' « il xtp S>xt> Ixa/xai. Auferam : Ule autem indignabitur ad quem venero. Which has been fometimes imitated by the Latins, as we have made appear in the Latin method. 7. The fame happens fometimes, even when the following word beglnneth with a confonant ; as, x, alterum, fn the compounds of ; as ^asro^toc, lapidicina, quarry : \cf T¿ro{, lapicida, a flone-cutter : hivfsMTÓxoí, brought to bed of twins, 16. Before x> taken from rgoxvf. Ion. rough. II. Of I before the Penúltima. 1. I is long before a vowel, in íáojxo», to heal, to cure: len^it et phyfician : iáo-i/xo;, curable : inrnq, a phyfician : iv^a, to cry out, to make a noife : ivyn, fi\s\\m, whiflling •, loyy.oc, the faine: iuxjMit purfttit of the enemy : HU^oç, a mountain of Theffaly : Iltejia, Tlsigtoi, IImçîÎîç, themufes. 2. In the compbunds of iof, poifon ; toCóAo;, venomous, that cafl^ forth poifon : ¡op^íasga, qua fagittis gaudet. And in iiojieu, to think, to judge. purfuit i mgoioltç, purfuit. TlnxUu, to fatten : Xana, to gladden : p^wróeíí, fnowy : 4>8>vrq(, of Phi hi a... ' ' It is alfo long before confonants in the following words; as, 3. Before ß, in ¿XtlóaTToy, Nicand. fale tinâum, dipt in fait. 4. Before y, it is almoil always long : pyó«, rigeo, to be fliff with cold. , C" ' 5. Before í, in mSvu, to flow, to fpurt up: nt^vTOi, a proper^ name : Hefiod. a fwallow, ' 6. Before $, in í6¿tu, dirigo, II. d'. but it is ihort in HeBod, as alfo XûvtTug, a direSor or governor, and fuch like. • 7. Before x, in IxiaXot, fupplication: ¡xíou>(, a fuppliant : nxAa, to overcome : 4>oi»xÓ6i(, a Phcenician : Çgsxaydof and Çgtxà^iii, dread-, ful, terrible. 8. Before A, in IXor, favourable, propitious : XPîvoiiç, limofus, muddy: ¡Rocíos, in troops, in crowds : itiMofoi, propitiation: ¡ítiAítíá- rcy, meliloti a Jort of herb : ójxtAaío», in crowds : i/xA/«, to co». verfe : oaXsa, to heap up, to preß upon : to kifs : ■/j.t.iiui, to feed : rà, a thoufand : aíoj, a thoufandth : "ix».,, the city of Troy. 9. Before ¡s., in ße'F«"» to be angry, to gnafl) one^s teeth, to threaten : i/ítigu, to defire : deflrable : /xt^co/xa>, td imitate-: fil/Lr.fjLX, a pattern or tnodel to imitate : /iij«.«Toç, imitable. Likewife in the compounds and derivatives of tsfn, honour j, Ti/xto;, honour-'^ able : made of packthread. 10. Be> I hefm the PenuUtm«, . lo. Before r, in all verbs in Uíu as unía, tt mve : tútvm, the fame : ana in y'miMu, to be, or to he made, tt he pre/ent : yvtwntwt to knew : íímirtí, a nmhirling, or turning round : iitvus, whirling, turning round; i^irsof, a wild fig: Itiot, the hind part of the heaat ¿k¡o6ípi», firß fruits : muúaxu, to adviß, to reclaisit « per/ou t om- to hurt, to prejudice : taken from a dolphin t fiyuta, to lead, to conduQ. ■ . 11. Before , a kind of mufcles : ftuXtxio, to gnajh with one's teeth : aTtiXofxou, rxv>.iviei, cv\xa, and avhsvu, to plunder : from ,Uc, a place planted with trees. 13. Before^, in to whirl round, to turn roupd,:. tu- tpoofAUi, to be proud : tv^oiau'oí, proud, vain : tvpo¡Aa»iei, pride, in/olence. 14. Before x* to t" snafio with one's teeth : ß^vxiop»*, to roar : a-fAvxoiAut, to burn. 15. Y is doubtful in the following words; ßining like fire : ovqi^a, to play upon the flute ; Çv^xu, to knead : and hvyitrg, a daughter : whofe other cafes have v long, as we have obferved al¬ ready. CHAP. III. Of the three common Vowels of the Penúltima. I. Of A "Pemltima. i. A Is long before a vowel, in levir, a- brother-in-law : láui, genitive plural bonorum : xfáasí, the head : Xaïyl» * pebble: Aai^, Naî'ç, llToXE^ctVç, proper names: Avxáa,, Mco- Xáuy, and fuch like proper names : noott^iut, Neptune : mxyÇia^i;, refplendent of all fides. ' 2. In Of A 'Penúltima: s. In appellatives in ao( ; as Xciou tie people : and its derivatives; ttciit a temple ; affinis, a relation, 3. In the compounds of ía, /piro ; as hlvuttug violently ; «Ataqf« blowing upon the/ea. 4. In the compounds of ».tgia, to mix ; as one that is of et good temper or eonflitution. 5. Likewife in thofe of iV|, violence or impetuofity^ or of ¿Ww," to ruß) upon ; as troXváVl, violenta impetuous, 6. In verbs in m, when there precedes an s or a ¿ ; as^ iiut to fuffery to permit ; mtçia, to go through, 7. In the^olic genitives in too, and in «0»: as Áhtíao, [/Eneas AUtáat, jEtrearum. 8. As often as the Doric » comes from a ; as for íyirnu^, ßrong, ßout, proud, A is likewife long. 9. Before y, in íarfhct tint cannot he broke \ disyv;, 'chryßal, ice's îVçTçayiî, unfortunates opgayi^, afealj Tayàç, dux, a captain, 10! Before in inuioç, a Icu^uey ; á»0^, a proper name. 13. Before «r, in"Evairo;, the name of a river : 'ixnvi, the name if a wind : XI^mscoí, a proper name; and Attic xwxi and íxx», all, which are (hort Ionic. 16. Before Ç, in pleafant, agreeable', xx^h, fquilla, j. Before o, in the penúltima of the future of verbs" in xu, or g«0 ; as ùx^oxoco, I will hear ; trti^xoa, I will try, 18. In a fale ; çà guiar is long by pofxtion : fvi/xoi, with the penúltima long, Be- caufe of its being long in In the fame manner the plural long, by reafon of the Ungular lA^fdi, taken from iA/««»;, lumbricus, a warm, , • 21, Be- "4^0 Book IX." Of Qvantitv.' 21. Before r, in aaro;, hurtful i äy.^»r»t, meram, pure, otitt* mixed imnt ; á»í»roí, incurable ; ¿irX«Toç, very large ; ítrúgarott execrable i dtarof, vißblei i^arof, the fame; ¿ó^ro;, invifible', hie vt^wToi, dif^ult to pa/s through i Xofc^e,- a phyfcian \ Kaigartç, the name of a river i x^arhç, crater, a ¿ate/; nad p^¿ru¡, of the fame tribe, ' - In the names of precious ftones : ¿;¿án);, an agate ; yuyírot. In gentiles in «to;, whofe feminines are in »rt; ; as Zn-a^Tiár»;, ' a- Spartan, See. Except TaJdírttt, Ac^f^árin, "Za^fíúrve, "Sav^o- fuirni, ■ ' ■ 22. Before in »«x"* maie a noife, with its derivatives; ngayye,. roughs with its compounds. 23. It is common in fome others ; ns èA^, aër, the air ; ía^, a Jvjord', afinedrefsi «j»{, one that it vHthout a nofe \ ¡»x^t a noife.. II. Cy I "Penúltima. 1. I is long before a vowel in the Ionic feminines ; as ¿/m for filia, fadneff, and fuch like. '' 2. In àtûi, to be fad', and its derivatives. 3. In aíxía, and aUiv, a viound', xo-Aa, duß% xatia, a nefl i Jiíar, valde, a great deal^i ê^i^ia, a fijhing'rod ; except when they are fliortened by licence. ' 4. 0|ro>, a cable ; tvy'^, motacilla ; mir,g or miti^, piuguis ; xiar, a pillar ; miu>, fat ; «s-gít», ferra, a faiu, ^ 5. In ^8»«, to corrupt ; to anoint ; «rjí«, to faiu. 6. In the greateft part of the comparatives in 'lur^ as ßeXc'iut, better : but their neuter is oftener ihort. 7. In diíTyilables in to;, that are acuted on the laft : x|ti;,. aries, a ram ; to;, poifon, an arroiu : but 10;, unus, is Ihort. Before confonants it is alfo long in thefe words, vi2. 8. Before &, in ¿y.^iZ\u diligent, exaä, with its derivatives ; îçt«rt6)), mildew or blafling ; to prefs, to cruf) ; i€i(, a kind of bird', rtSj), pruina, hoar froß. 9. Before y, in mAiyoe, choaking ; pyoe, txceft of cold ; ayi, filence. 10. Before in AXtiit, convolution', xAíit, nettle, miíai, a foun¬ tain ; a fwallow ; foftuefs, voluptuoufnefs, I I. Before $, in |3^íów, to be heavy orßeepy ; ß^ißof, heavinefs ; , t^tGti;, heavy ; t^i6e¡, a wool-cewder, a fervaut-maid, a labourer, or worker at the harveß', igtôiùf, the fame; iOv;, .reâus, ßraighti xgtSn, barley ; £>8ùi>, a mountain of Thracia. 12. Before*,- in xixt»;, vis, robur, ßrength', ¿xixv(, weak; ríxv, vißory ; ^oiAxn, Thatnicia ; tpi^ixx, dread or fear, the roaring of the fea, the faking with an ague, or through cold. 13. Before X, in igyiXof, white clay; îxùf, mud; xcíXi», cunila, M kind of herb ; »toytXo; or »toytxi;, new-born ; ofttXoç, 4 crowd or multitude;' wtítXo», a cord to bind the feet with; wXa;, a hat, an .arrow, a club ; cr/MXot^, taxus, a yew tree ; o-yxtXn, a penknife, a fljoemaker^s cutting-knife. ; onTXo^, a fpot ; •»I'tXo;, thin, fender ; p^iXo;, pabulum, food, forage. la. Be- Of I Penúltima, 431 ' 14* Before'fx« m foret % ProJirpîtUj ïpStfiOf, brave, ßout ; a ladder ; Xíftot, hunger, famine ; a buffoon ; oifMf, flat-nofed i torn, packthread, a halter •, ti/mi, honottr; irtiMf, one that is not honoured : and in compounds terminating in tp; ; as brave, valiant. 15. Before », in 7¿¿i»o;, a kind of frog ; iginèf, a vaild fig-tree ; 5a¡í,ttot, thick, frequent ; t|Í»«|, feu a fort of three-cornered fieve ; nuild lettice ; xXiim, a bed ; pi»ôç, Jkin ; ;(«^l»s;, a bridle { Kaftá^iya, a pefiilential lake in Sicily ; xcé/xi»o;, a furnace $ triXmr, parJUy, and feveral others terminating in «»o;, or i»o». , )Ve muil except, i. nouns of matter ; as ¿'¿mo;, oak, whofe feminines however make the penúltima long ; as (MTívSSítn, made of lead. 2. Triflyllables in »m, whofe firft is long ; as á|ín), « hatchet ; íarim, a gift ; î^|»»i), the name of an herb ; veritim, a fight, 3. Thefe two diifyllables, f\vn, a file ; Jim, vortex. But it is alfo long in verbs in isa or íyo/Axt ; as «Ai»», to incline ¡ »giw, to judge ; "yUofi»!, to be, to be made. 16. Before en, in pifcator, afifierman ; Euri- pusi i/tiru, to give impertinent language', invn, injurious language i fun, the Jhooting of an arrow ; «»»woj," a niggardly fellovs -, <»*»«•»», or «ntíw»», fcipio, a ftaff. ' Before q it is ihort, conforming thus to the general rule ; how¬ ever Irus, and If of, holy, are excepted. It is alfo ihort before r, except *Ay;gioTiç, BfKnvf, names of men. 17. Before t, in âxinrot, wolfs bane, a kind of herb % >CKnuf,the defcent of a mountain ; Airo», a ragged flsirt ; A»to?, fimplt, mean j irnof, defpifed, junpuniped ; oTrof, frumentum, wheat ; T»t«», T¿ít«», Típuf, proper names', (pirvf, a father', Çfirta, to fret, to ■ fume, to make a noife. Likewiie in nouns ending in nr,, kttf, mç ; as 'AÇfo^irn, Venus ; onWmf, armed ; ô»~t»ç, a fort of herb. We muft however excepi «g»T»ç, a judge, and fuch like nouns formed from verbs that ihorten the penúltima of the perfeâ. 18. Before^, in yfTfof, i, a net', XsftÇof, an ifiandf l(pt, ve¬ hemently, with its derivatives and compounds ; ri ; as ^e¿yi>t>/xi, to join. In the oblique cafes and plural number of the pronouns of the lecond perfon ; as ¿/xE(, danger ; oçxuyoç, the name of a fifi ; ^nyoç, common, and fuch like compounds of avr ; yv>y¡, a woman, with its compounds ; fsvro, pretext, excu/e, OdylT. f. 10. Before w, in ygwo?, booked', tdixn, fadnefsi raivum, broad- footed. 11. Before ç, in iyxv^a., anchor, or the name of a town ; ¿ai^tv- gÀç, filt, beaten by the fea, or falling into thefea with noife ; yipv^x, ts bridge % yw^oç, ádrele-, xtviîçD, afirtofinfirumenf, xv^oç, autho¬ rity ; aáípü^a, fpoils, or booty ; qXv^x, a fort of grain j itiyv^oe, a fort of herb ; «¡j-airi/go;, the tree or plant, of which paper was made ; w'toço», bran ; the ebbing of the fea -, w^o;, wheat i p-iîçjyl, a fiute ; a-pv^x, a hammer ; tv^oí, cheefe. In a word, ail the nouns in t/joç, that have a long fyllable be¬ fore the penúltima, whether by pofition, or by nature ; as oily foe, miferable-, firong. In Of t Penúltima. In all verbs In : as to mix, to knead ; oi^o, to drag, ft dram. 12. Before o- it is almoft always long, excepting verbals in vne, which have it ihort ; as Aüo-íí, loo/ening ; nature •, X""'":» fu- fio, infußon, pouring out j and fuch like. ' 13-. Before t it is long in verbals in ¿txç, ¿t5?ç, and Cr»?; and an informer', /tJtmriç, the fame ; wgeerÇùTiç, an old momatii Likewile in ítítígmou not cried for, not mept for ; cän\, a noife } tempos vefpertinum, tbe evening ; yu^vrli, a Quiver •, Yia- xvTof, Cócytus, a river of belli lolutor, a deliverer i nntô- raç, an advifer', fvru^, n deliverer', púrn, ruta, rue, a kind of herb-, fotof, drawn', o'xvtoç, ßin. 14. Before in xé^v^o;, the bark, or rind, the fiell', KvÇof, crooked ; %voç tow j , rvfof, fmoak, pride, arrogance. 15. Before in Vitalis, vitàl ; vobicb " hatters the malls', rv/nSa^tixoi:, a robber of fepulcbres : and in all the verbs in ¿xa} as t^vx", attero, to break, to fpoil ; ß^6xa, frendeo, Itrideo, to fume, to gnà/h mith one's teeth : and in ß^vxn, ftridor, noißi the foul', ^ carving tool i one that makes a great noife. \6. It is common in Içùxa, to' dram hack, to hinder', iâto/iOf, mknomn ; vSiu§, aqua ; and in the greatell part of the verbs in la. G H A P. IV. Of the three cotnmon Vowels at the End of Words. i Of A final. I I. TT is long in the feminines taken from the malculine in o;; as ^ Stxaiet, juß, from i»xa»oi ; ky'iot, holy ; ¿g^jaía, ancient ; olntia, domeßic ; a-iSnqict, of iron ; xotSa^à, pure. The following three poetics are excepted ; crown», venerable i " mitrufoi, ripe ; íí«, divine ', which their accent Iheweth. 2. In all nouns in ia ; as f»xi«, friehdßip ; aotpia, mifdom ; imdv/cia, deßre, cupidity ; pomer ; hymona, gdvernment ; trocía, hißory i •mtvia, poverty', Kacwaíoxía, Cappadocia', ToCKar'ia, Galatia. 3. In noúns ín eí«, proceeding from verbs in tía ; as ßacrtXeiec, kingdom,' reign, royal pomer', from ßcurtf^tva, to reign; la-Kúa., fervi- tude, from ¿iiXsnw. But thp others in st« are Ihort ; as ßacrixsi«, a queen, tàken from ßaa-iXivf,' a king; «xiflsi«, truth, coming from «Aîjôàç, true ; likewife 'AÂslàsi'çsia, Alexandria, and the reft. 4. In thofe in í«, S«, §« ; as Aí J«, a proper name ; Má^fl«, Martha; vy-le», the day; xái», aplace, Qt coutfiry ; x'^îàtjoy. Ff 5. In 434 Book IX. Çf CIvantity; ' 5. Iii thofe preceded by two confonaots ; as íy^tt, booty ot/yoilf i vtr^a, a roek. 6. In feveral nouns in of two or more fyllables ; as ctXii- the moon ; MaU, the mother of Mercury ; 'A6r)v»ia, Minerva^ which■ appears always by the accent'; for if a /inal was Ihort, the penúltima, as we ihall Ihew hereafter, would be circum- flexed. ■ 7. In the vocatives of proper names in aj of the parifyllabic de- clenfion ; as Aïnla. But the vocative of nouns in m is fliort ; as £ a prophet, a 8. In the vocatives alio of proper names imparifyllabic; as náa- aœ, é Pallas. But in appellatives the vocative is mort. g. In the dual of parifyllabics that follow the feminine ; as r» fittaa, t'use mu/es ; tÙ AÎmÎs, ttuo JEneas's, &c. 10. A» final is long in imparifyllabic mafculines. acuted; as Tirác, Tlatát, Tlát. But the compounds of this laß are ihort ; as aiii/irotSf all. 11. la yaldè, 'very much i tías, E'van, an exclamation of. joy' ' iz. In the accufative fingular of parifyllabic mafculines; asAl- JEneam. But the feminines are ihort; as /«Sera», mufam. Wherein it always conforms to thé quanity of the nominative. 13. In monofyllables in «1 ; as xáag, caput, the head % 4'»?* ot ßarling. But the conjunâion yxg is fl>ort, and generally all other words terminating in except the mafculines and feminines. For, according to Neander, all nouns of thofe two genders that end in a liquid, make the laß fyllable long, except haypy%^ and uxor, a 'wife. 14. In the mafculines in £<> that, are not accented on the laß ; as Ahtiaç, JEneas ; as alfo ivœç, all, and its compounds. Except iííy»i, great, and a flone. Likewife nouns de» rived from xe^aivva ; as xjàç, the head, the fießs, ; hippos- eras, a fort of compounded wine. 15. The nominative and genitive fingular of parifyllabic nouns in etc, together with the accufative plural, as well of the faid nouns, as of thole in et, have et long ; as £ TlvQayi^ac, r3 Ilvôetyô^et, rùf HvBctyá^af} t5 Ahtix for Abttv ; ri¡c xfíí^ac, did, and tete ii¡Á,í^eti,' dies, the days ; tî; tí/xk;, for honoris, and ríe rtuíc, honores: though fometimes we find thefe accufatives Ihortened by li-' cence. The poets moreover do frequently fliorten the accufatives of the pronouns ii¡jtlac, nos i and.v/xca;, .ña-uy, &c. ^ Of I ßnal. I. I is long in the names of the letters |r, 4'« os7. . z. In the demonßrative additions of the Attics : rurl, this: Siv gt here : sun, nunc, no'W', iroJi, this here. 3. la 0/ r final. " ' 435 3- In diiiyilables acuted ; a hoot or ßocktng ; e-^jayîç, a ftal i likewife a woman that bears arms. ^ 4> In nouns of a.double termination: ¿xrlfi àxrh. the fun-heamy StXçU, hxÇi», a dolphin ; /.ç, naris, the noßril. ß. In the obliques of nouns in k or $t, »»oj, either of the fore going nouns, as /»»< /»»j y or of others, as xif, »»¿j, a fntall wormi except Tti, ¡u¿s. Of T final, > ' * " 1. It is long in the names of the letters, »Ii, ■ 2. In T¿,' for av, tu," thou. . ' 3. In-adverbs in t; ; asf^erxiv, ainong', fMiT Ia\nouns of á double termination ; as nnd çé^icvy, à fea-god. 6. In the accufative of noù'ns tfiat have the nominative long, thofe two cafes being, always equal with regard to the quantity of tVe Tail fyflable ; as fn-vt, a moufe,',, mud. • , . j \ . J. In.-the-nouns-, in vg, wSg,-ignis, yiirvj ftágwg, a martyr i a wttnejt. - ^ , 8. In monofyllables in vç J zsjßf, a mouße y au;, a hog. , 5. In fubllantives which, having the final acuted or.circumflex- <|d, are-Reclined in or pure ; ¿xXvç, afog',Vtdií, mud i Tsjfiùç, aproj)er näme y mißry i\ó)0ir<»ç, of the truth ; raj ¿MSilaç, tht truths. / ■ 3. The final quantity of the nominative is retained in the oblique cafes of nouns that increafe ; as ^ógxv», (pó^xwoí, aßa-god. We mult, except, firit, the nouns in ug, which have v fliort in the obliques, contrary to the nature of the nominatives y as «ùg, F f 2 «rvgàî, 43® ' Of Nocns and Vbrbs^ mrvfif, Jßfti fwifTtiç, fiá|Tt>|Of, a martyr, atnîtutfu To which W6 naît join i ÍKí, ¿Xo<, fait. Secondly, Diflyllabic feminines in n, that have the penúltima long by nature, and are declined in ¡oí, have the penúltima of the other ¿afes long ; as w/mî, T¡of, ioots, ßochings. Likewife polifyllables compounded of three ihort ones; as «vXoxftf«!;, t¡oí, a tufi of hair, 4. Likewife thofe that form the genitive in 6of ; as o^mç, >60«, a hiri or fowl « except >ú¡vi, v6of, an helmtt, and thoie that have the nominative terminated in vf ; as ¡x^ví, a fiß> ; «njXœjKVf, Hoí, ptlamys, a kind of fiß. 5. When a doiwtful vowel before 4 or | in the nominative, is ihort there by nature, it is made long in the obliques ; as utoi, a palm-tree, or a phoenix i tyof, a graft'hopper •, /¿I, fayof, a grape-fione ; ygw)/, vwof, a griffiny t/yoç, a cuckoo ; iñ^kt uKot, a herald, or crier. On the contrary, has « long in the nominative, and fltort in the obliques ; as alio avhot^, »xb;, a ridge of land. II. Of Verbs. 1. The quantity of the penultima.of each tenfe of the verbs in w, continues in all the other derivative tenfes. Except the fecOnd future, and fécond aorift, which have the penúltima ihort ; as tt^na, to judge ; fécond future oguS, fécond aorift txghof ; di-óxxu, to fing, <^ica, I •«;«//»»//>.** though fometimes wc find them fliort by licence. 3. The penúltima is alfo long in exf»a, J havejudged ; rÍTvpa, J have beaten ; and itvdu or tomé, , 4. Verbs ift v¡a.. have u long in the lingular of the preient and imperleâ of the indicative aâive : but in the plural of the faid tenfes U is ihort ; as likewife through all the paiSve. THE £ 437 3 THE . SECOND PART BOOK. Of the GREEK ACCENTS. CHAP. VI. Of the nature and divifion of Accents^ of their general Analogy^ and that they are, not to be confounded with Siuantity. Accents are nothing elfe but certain fonall markt, ' which have been introduced into difcourfe to fix the pro¬ nunciation, and render it eafy to flrangers. Hence the ancient Greeks, to whom this pronunciation was natural, never ufed fuch marks, as is demonilrated from Arlflotle, from infcriptions, and ancient medals. It is not eafy to determine the time, when they were firlt ufed : probably not till after the Romans began to be more curious of learning the Greek tongue, and to fend their children to ñudy at Athens, that is, a little before Cicero's time. I. Three Sorts of Accents. The inflexions of the voice may be all reduced to three fbrts, according to what we have obferved in our Latin method : hence the Greeks, as well as the Latins, had only three kinds of accents, viz. the acute, which raifes the voice ; the grave, which deprefles it; and the circumflex compounded of both, which denotes the elevation and depreflion of the voice in the fame fyllable. This we have already touched upon. Book I. Chap. viii. and ihall now explain more largely, ib as to render all the rules, which are de¬ livered upon this fubjeâ, more intelligible, and at the fame time more eafy to be remembered. All words ought naturally to have an acute, becaufe it is almoll impoíTible to pronounce any word, without giving it fome eleva¬ tion. But becaufe the voice being once raifed, muft necefferily fink again, this finking may be upon the fame fyllable, or upon the following : if it be upon the fame fyllable, thence arifeth a circumflex ; but if it be upon the' following fyllables^ they have no accent marked ; but^ grave is underAood, whence tbey are all called barytons. The grave therefore is not properly an accent, but a privation or finking of the accent. For which reafon it is never marked but in the middle of a period, and at the end of words, which Ihould naturally have an acute, to Ihew, that thofe words do not entirely F f 3 . raife '438 BOOK IX. Qfií^ccENTsr raife the final fyllable, but only fuftain it a little: fullain it, I fay, becaufe it is natural to the voice ever to fuftain fome particular fyl- lable in each word, otherwife it would fink too much : nor do they raife it intirely, becaufe this elevation would feem to bear lb far upon the fubfequent word, as to draw it to itfelf, which can oilly |)appen to the enclitics : thçrefqr'e, as we (hall fee hereafter, the acute accent is not difplaced, nor changed into a grave, when it is followed by an enclitic. II. Tiheir general Analogy. Now it'is the nature of the ear, fays Cicero, never to judge of the accents of words, but by the three laft fyllables, no more than of the final cadence of a period, but by the three lafl words. Hence the accent, wl^ecber in Greek or Latin, is never drawn back farther than the antepenúltima. And if the modern Greeks fometimes remove it to the pre-antepenúltima,, that is, the fourth fyllable from the laß, that is only a confequence of barbarifm, which has corrupted all that was moft beautiâil in their language, and moil harmonious in their ancient pronunciation. The accent therefore, after its elevation, cannot have more than two fyllables to follow it, which will include two or at moft ihrt$ times or meafures, but never four, that is, after the accent there are never two long fyllables. Infomuch, that if the two laft be ihort, the accent may without any difticulty be upon the antepenúltima iii Greek, as it is always in Latin ; as "Aytof, Dominus, &c. But if the two laft are long, the accent can never be drawn back further than the penúltima, both in Greek and Latin ; as ¿yí^ÚTruí, formo' /os, ice. And if the penúltima fhould happen tobe long, an4 thq Jaft fhort, a circnmflex accent may be upon this penúltima, either in Greek ot Latin ; as formofus, cùia». In all which inftances there are no more than two times of finking the voice after the accent, and never more than two fyllables, either in Greek or Latin. But there is ftill this difference between the Greeks and the La¬ tins, thàt out of the three meafures of finking, which may follow. the accent, the Greeks do not permit there ihonld be two on the laft fyllable, though they allow them on the penúltima ; as ¿1» On the contrary, the Latins do not allow, that.two of thefe times or meafures Ihould be upon the penúltima which fol¬ lows the accent, though they fuffier them to be upon the laft; as Dóminos. Whence it is faid, that the Greeks regulate their accent by the ultima, and the Latins by the penúltima. Wherein, I think, the rule of the latter is much caiier than that of the Greeks, be¬ caufe, although the laft happens to be frequently changed, either in declining or conjugating, their accent, neverthelefs, generally re¬ mains unvaried (utlefs it be in the increafe of words) being the fame in Dominus, for inftance, zsinDominos. Whereas the Greeks are frequently obliged to change, as in «»Bçwiroç, and the like* Hence alfo it proceeds, that the circumflex is never thrown further back than the penúltima; becaufe this accent including in itfelf the elevation and finking of the voice, marks already one meafufe of finking on the very fyllable, on which it is founded ; info- Analí^y of Acctnts ', 4.3Í5 ll)!bmucli, that if there were yet two iyllables following it, it would ifeem as if we funk the voice three times after the accent. For «rS/*» heilig as if it were aiofiei, confequently, if one was to fay 5.^ S c4 44«. as eio;» Dens, A grave underftood on C 5.. the laft 1. i^vroiiXf God. 2. vraffi^vrofXt as, íermo, a di/courfe. 3. to^ava^o^uTot»,' as ar- homo, à mau. me^aoráfiiva,' as Ttoaf/íSf orno, I adorn. are always reputed ihort at the end of a word, except it be in the tenfes of the optative. Thus TfTv^oi, the third perfon of the preterit of the optative, hath the . accent on the penúltima, becaufe the final o> is long in this mood. But ¿»Ofun-oi, homines, has the accent on the antepenúltima, becaufe CI final is reputed ihort out of the optative mood. But if there happens to be any other letter after et at the end of a word, this rule does not take place ; wherefore hominibus, hath the accent on the penúltima, by reafon that ms is long, and therefor« {he accient cannot be upon the antepenúltima* ANNOTATION. We might have alfo ihid, that the laft being ihort, the accent is commonlj' apon the antepenúltima : but this is not fo general, though it may be remarked as a very common rule. For, • 1. In all barytonous verbs, the tenfes of more than two fyllables, and whofe laft. is ihort, have always an acute upon the antepenúltima ; as iTvarlw, tstv^, tint- Tqusr, STwIlTC. 2. Tbofe nouns which alTume a ihort vowel in their vocative, throw back the accent of the nominative to the antepenúltima; fuch p, i. proper names in a; s Imtfi-nt, S Socrates ; ^vrSint, ¿ liiehenç, Soßhenes, proper naines. 2. Thefe four nouns in a;, which make the vocative in a: « iinrórne, S iée-erora^ «lord i ifivnint, S fjwtritra, naife, prudent^ i tigvénf, él tigúora, ene that feet at a dißaace ; ô ¿xaxáTac, H ¿icÓKvra, nvithout malice, 3. The following likewife throw back the accent in thofe cafes which have the laft ihort i á ^vyàreç, v ^úyeare^, a daughter, accuû ^rvyarça, dual ^vyarçe, plur. iúyar¡t(: but the dat. in iat is-long, &vyç, a debtor. 4. The compounds of yéXaç, laughter', as xMriyCKu^, aroçf laughter: ftXóyshe*;, aire;, one that loves to laugh. annotation. The reafon why the compounds of yéxeif follow this analogy of the accent, is becaufe they are often declined parifyllabically, like the foregoing : for as we fay ysXwe, yéXwTo;, and ysXaf, yi'kKj fo we fay fnXoysXttif, wrof, and fuXo^/sXei;, w. But the reafon why thefe Attic nouns in w; and or, declined parifyllabically, are accented on the antepenúltima, is becaufe they were thus accented in the comr mon termination e; and m. Juft as the Attic genitive Sfiac and others are ac¬ cented on the antepenúltima, becaufe this was the accent they had in the com¬ mon and fo the Ionics ine«, as Aîvei», are accented on the antepenulti. ma, merely to retain the accent on the fame fyllable, on which it was placed, in. the common Ahiiu. Infomuch that this rule is in fuch a manner an exception to the foregoing, that it ferves to corroborate the firft, which is that of always retaining the accent on the fame fyllable. Whereto we may add, that thofe words which have the laft long, and are accented on tne antepenúltima, do con¬ form to the analogy of the Latins, inafmuch as the penúltima is always Aort ; wherefore,- if it Aould happen to be long, they Aorten it, as MiriXae;, Ms>íxe«c. Rule IV, Of the circumflex Accent in particular. When ike penúltima is long, and followed by a fhort fyllable, either it has no accent, ■ or it muß have a cir- cunßex. Examples. Of Partffllabtc. Nounsl 445, Examples. A circumflex accent can never take place but on a iyllable' long by nature ; becaufe, as we have obferved, it neceffarily includes the elevation and depreflion of the voice on the fame iyllable. Now the long fyllables are u, and all the diphthongs {except ai and 0» final, which were excepted in Rule II.) and fometimes the common ones, a, », v, as we have (hewn, when treating of quantity. ~ ^ - Therefore if the penúltima being long, and followed by a Ihort fyllable, is to have an accent, it mufl abfolutely be a circumflex ; as ttStr», mu/a : (paSuTa, amantem, loving. I fay, if it is to bave an accent, for it may by its nature- be without one ; as wXÔvîoç, a rieb man. But if the final is long, the penúltima cannot be circumfiexed, though it may be acnted, purfuant-to ^e analogy explained in the preceding chapter. Thus changes its circumflex into an acute in the genitive and dative, /*é»^ (and not ôvyùii^ fanäarum, OSi/of, it ; ávrvf genitive plural Terwu^ for all:gonders, futt5,> fuay tieirt i genitive plural as wdl for th« mafcniioe a«> theféminioe, • ■ - RüJLB VIT. . - " Mönofyllablcs^dfeclined with'Iñcreáfé. " ^ )f. Monofyílables declined'wUb InCreaft have the ßfiat fylîahle of the genitive and dative circumflexed, if it happens to be long, and 'dcuted, if it he ßort: 2. But participles, ,and\'[i(; interrogative^ retain the . accent on the fame fyl^ble : 3.1 Likçwifè'rgwi, h^i', VXÍ, 2?, ztxiil and in the genitive inavi are acuud'on theßrß'ßllabldf • t ■* s I t L 4 ^ ^ 4 ..O raXAMPLES. • r. ; I. Monofyílables declined with increafe, have always an accent on the lafl, in the genitivcCând'datiVè-of all numbers. And this aceent-is>a-circumflex„ whenthe laft fyllable happens'to he cap.* able of it, that is to fayy ^cntt isdong by.nature f otherwifetlmyr have an acute;. • \ - . ,. . \ - Inall otbercafes, the accent reniainson the fame fyllablewher«; it was in the nominative,.purfuantto the foft .rule; but if it waSt an acuteiq.thernominative, iiCisj:haDged into a- circumflex in thefe cafes, when the fyllàble is long, becaufe the fyllable added;' by increafe is there fhort, according to' the añalo¿y of the fourth rule. Thus i tit band, makes X"i'» X'^g«* Dual Plural 3 Ti Accent tin the CvMraBtpn^ 447 To «Vf, fíe fire, makes «vçèç, «¿ç». Plural «»f«, «v$«fr,; &c. ANNOTATION. 1. We likewife fay . tives, yinaMOi, yutuixi, ywicuxâo, yvyat^l. 2. The monofyllable participles, and the inteirogatire : oic,gold% rdngtot, aànific, ofi iron i x^^ti bra3tttt\ igyógtott' àgyvgii, ofifihferl rh /uoXiSfm, fwXiC^S, leaden, Likewife fome others; as Xi- not, Sç ¡in, ñ¡ tot, St, af thread j wogfigtot, 5;, qf purple ; fooUtof, q>unxS;, punieeut, l ^ ' The fame is praâifed in regard to fome fobftantives; as ê disx^iise;, St, fra- tris ftlius, a nephew en the brother"t fide ; doyargthot, St, filise fiiius, a grand¬ child on the daughter's f.dt, ' But wemuft except the compound nouns, which, as we Aall obferve in' the lith Rule, always draw back the accent : thu^ from fuS comes Hfemt, of two pounds weight, or worth. From ^f, fSt, a courfe, or fiream, comes ueûd^ut, having a fine fiream. From X!^' ¡"nugo, comes ¿xtut, fine languine, im- berbis, tec, ' 'A$góot is irregular, for having the accent on the penúltima, it throws it back, when contraâed, as äSgut, 'hick, clefe, * Rule Of Prepoßtim^ àhd of Words y ¿cc¿ 44^ / Rule IX. Of Prepoíitions, and of Words that have the laft Syllable cut off. • « 1, Prepqfitions bave thé accent on the laß Syllable : 2. But when they follow their cafe y the accent is drawn back» ^ > - Bxcepi 'Àkîs and ' 4. They all lofe their accenty woen the ßnal fylläble is cut off. - ' 5. A declinable word kfing its final jyllabky does nob lofe its accenty but draws it back. * examples. t; PrepoâtioQs of two fyÜables have alfo tlie accent on the laft $ aa ivl, ab, : maçi, with, frtm : in, iit,i among poets. But CM fyncopated for mn> ¡mt» for fccVcnr for «rá^src, &c. retain the accent of the word from whibh they are taken, and which ma^ be confidered as their primitive, according to what wO have faid in the ftrft rule. 2. The prepofitions draw back their accent to the penúltima, when they are preceded by the cafo which they govern ; as rira* toncertting this : Aíor m¿^», from Jupiter. In like nianner S* Upv ia-o, from nubom hefprung. 3. But hci and «>», per, do not draw back the accent t and the reafon is, that they may be difiinguilhed from the vocative, 2 it», S rex ; and from the accufative, rot áí», Jovem, Jupiter. 4. Prepofitions lofo their accent, when there is an elifion of the fyllable on which it was marked; as i^,'frum me: »»r itBgu- wS, ageùnfi the man. ' ' 5.'But when this elifion happensTto a declinable word, the ac« cent which was on the laft is drawn back to the penúltima, and always continues acute, even if this penúltima fiiould happen to be long, becaufo the laft is no longer confidered ; asinwo^X' ix"» ' have maty things : îc»»' tWaOcc, he hasfuffered hardfiips : ^«Xcw' cr»i^ tb^ are difficult. ' Rule X. Of Nouns in of formed from the pretcrperfeft Middle.' i. Uouns in of formed from the. preterperfeU middle, and joined to another noun, raife the penúltima when aSiive ; ' z. -And thepenultifpa when, paffive. Examples. i. Nouns in oí, compounded of a preterperfeft middle and a noun, have the. acceot on the penúltima, when they are taken G g aâivelys 450 Boqk IX. (y Accents; - ââively } as a prattr, a thatterer ; ârSiiofénif a murderer ; oMOMfMf. one that bas care of a family.i 4tÇ»xrôpof, one that tills with a fwordi >Morçifeiy one that maintains ihepeople\ @ the accent is thrown back on the antepenúltima; as íx^vópayof, ottewhois devonredhjßß)\ 6¿So?u)(, one that is firttck with a fione : @i¿rcKofy horn of God ; Tusó* ngs^ou maintained by the people. annotation. If they are compounded of a prepofition, they draw back the accent to die ante*. penúltima; as xstsX.)«;, a eataloeut or ntts ÜnCKtt, twice ploughed, ~Whicb agrees with the general analogy of the compounds of the following rule. Rule XI. Of Words compounded with fome Particles; Nouns compounded tsiilh «, «u, «Ve, í», draw hack, the accent to the antepenúltima, . , Exahpees. Compound words often draw back the accent to the antepenol- tima, and particularly thofe compounded with fome particles ; as aaopoi, ignorant, imprudent, from aofèç, wife ; iSvatt, one that has good children, from woùî;, a fon ox daughter i ^vftv^srof, hard to find % vnati'^oc, o, i, a woman fuhjeS. to her hufband ; SUf/vxoi, doubh'mini- ed. In like manner ¿rTÍ;¿j(ro{, antichrifiy evtiy^oi, a fellow-fervanti wi^U^yoi, curious ; Karâo-Komç, a fpy, &C. To thefe we may add the compounds of two nouns ; as Ço;, a philofopher, from a friend, and aofoi, wife\ ihites^ a ruler of the people', ííxá^oyoí, the deeálegue. But here it will not always hold true. For initance, we fay with the accent on the lad, very beautiful ; rough, unpleafant ; tvn€ii(, pious ; úa-iShí, impious', a captain of robbers', SavfscíTisgyif, a worker of miracles ; and others, which.cannot be reduced to par¬ ticular rules, but mud be left to obfervation. CHAP. VIII. , Of the Accents of Verbs. ■* Rule XIL ' General for all Tenfes. ^he accent of verbs is drawn hack as far as it can gOy except fome particular rule interferes. Examples. T he mod general rule that can be given for the accents of verbs, is, that they are always removed as far back as pof- fible, that is, to the aijitepénultlma, unkfs there be fomepardcular 3 . rule of the Accents of Verhl ^5| joie that requires them to be put forwarder,* as when the laft fyl- lable happens to be long ; in which cafe the accent muft be on the penúltima, purfuant to Rule 11. But if the verb happens to be a diflyllable, then the accent muft be of courfe on the penúltima, be it circumflex or acute, according to the capacity of the word ; where fpecial regard is to be had to Ûie V final, which though feldom long, yet is commonly fo in ibn^e tenies of the verbs in jut, as i^ivytOf for which reafon they are accented on the penúltima. There are only fome tenfes, which naturally are accented con¬ trary to this general rule, and which the three following rules will render eafy to retain. Rule XIII. I Of the Tenfes that have a Circumflex on the laft. 1. The lafi fyllahle of the fecónd future in w, uoitb all its derivatives^, is circumflexed : ■ 2. As alfo the fécond aoriß of the inßnitive active : 3. Likewife the fécond aoriß middle of the imperative : 4. Together with the pajftve aoriß s in the fubjunSlive \ as alfo the fuhjun^ive aorißs of verbs in p. Examples. ,The fécond future of the indicative aâive has a circumflex on die laft, as alfo the firft future of verbs in ><.0, ft.a, m, ^u, which is always like the fécond. And this accent is continued on the fame iyllable, or that which anfwers to it, through all perfons, in the feveral dependent tenfes ; provided, however, they are capable of it; otherwifis the accent is changed, purfuant to the general rules above mentioned. , 1. Thus we fay twwÎç, rvstT, verberabo, -is, -it, I luill hat ; plnr. TiwSfcs», &c. in the optative rvrnXfu, oí?, o7 ; in the infinitive rtmut ; participle tuwS», üfto?, verberaturus ; fécond fu¬ ture middle tvirofMUy tu«?, tuwsTt«» ; infinitive, Twwsîirôa». 2. The (ècond aorift of the infinitive aftive alfo requires a cir¬ cumflex, Tture«*, in the fame manner as the fécond future. But the fecónd aorift of the participle has an acute, tvvúp, qui verberavit, having beaten. 3. The fécond aorift of^ the imperative middle is likewife cir¬ cumflexed, Ttiw«, rviréaia, rvirs, ij-átou, ipirápou, Sec. In the fécond aorift, as tïte», rüvat, SSr«», &c. As for the paflive of thefe verbs, they follow the general rules of the other paflive verbs in their accent, as well as in their conjuga¬ tion. And with regard to the fécond aorift middle, it is included above, in the examples of the aorifts in «t. ANNO TA XION. We may therefore take notice here of the difference of accent, whereby the three firft aorifts, which agree in termination, are often diftinguiihed ; at , ■ . 5 I" thx ottativx ACTivr, with an acute on the pen- ^iXnriu, amaveri , ^ ultima, becaufe the laft is long, according to Rule II. r In THx IMPERATIVS MÍooLS, with the acccnt On thc *¡Xiiecu^'ania j ^ antepenúltima, by leafon that the laft ñ Ihort, according I to the faid Rule ll. SIn the iNFiKiTivE ACTIVE, the acccot On thepenul' tima, by this prefent rule ; which is a circumflex, be¬ caufe at is reckoned ihort, except in the optative, accord¬ ing to Rule II. But Of the Accents of Verls '. 45^ But you are to obferve, that in and the like, the accent is the fame Úitough all the jthree tenfes, becaufe, having no more than two fyllables, it can¬ not throw it further back in the imperative ; and aa the » ia Ihort^, it cannot be «¡Kumflexed in the infinitive. Rule XV. Of the Accent of Participles. X. ^he participle in «î of the middle and aSttve voice ; as alfo the fécond aorifi aStive^ and the two aorißs paßve^ muß have an acute on the laß fyllables 2. But the participles in o-a; and ¡/.tva are acuted on the penúltima : 3. And the participles in ¿¡itvot, on the antepenúltima. Examples. I. The participles terminating in with mega, have either a grave or an acute accent on the laft. Such are thole of the preterit, as well adive, rtrvfàt pro; ; ôtoç, fi^c. as middle, nrvuàf, ÓTOÍ, The fécond aorift aâive reqnirep alfo the fame accent, rwùe, inof : as alfo the two aorifts paflive, rof Oil;, trro; ; rvvùf, ítrof. The verbs in fu muft have alfo the fame accent, vtddc, or $ck, ' fnof ; ¡roi(, ecrr«; ; aaa, áe'vf, &C. ¿Mvf, vir», &e. a. The firft aorift aâive, terminating in a»(, takes an acute on the penúltima, as rv^liof, ço^ia-»!. As alfo the preterit palSve in ¡jiivot, as rtrvftfíítoí, ro;. 3. The other participles paffive, terminated in ófccroc, have the accent on the antepenúltima ; as the prefent rwlé/uttot, the firft future Ty^6))(ró/xí»oí, the paulo»poft-future Ttrt^q/tenK.. Rule XVI. Of feme particular Imperatives. J. An acute upon the laß makes a dißin£lion between the fécond aoriß indicative, and the following im¬ peratives, elirl, sXÔt, f Jç£, lit, AaêÈ. 2. Thefe fécond aorißs, ¿¡pUg, tçxtts, and £ir»X«0», afO accented on the penúltima. Examples. 1. The above imperatives ought to be accented on the firft fyl- lable, purfuantto the preceding rules; but, contrary to the cnftom of the reft, they hâve either an acute or a grave on the laft, as may be feen in the rule ; thus fiws, come, &c. to diftin- guilh them from the fécond aorift indicative of the fame verbs, eîwi, he has/aid', Mt, he is come-, tv^t, he has found ■. "Jl for iTiis, he has feen ; for e?JSt, he has taken. Neverthelefs, thefe very imperatives draw back their accent, when compounded, according to the praâice of other, verbs, of which we (hall treat in the following "rule j as thou run, about ; tivet, do thoußnd. G g 3 a. Thefe 454 Book. IX. 0/Accênts, 2. Thefe fécond aorifts of the imperative middle ihonld nata* rally have a circumflex on the laft. purfuant to the third rule* whereas they have an acute on the penúltima: ¿ipí*e, perveníf : Tgáw», convertí, or tonvertere, from r^swu, vertO> / tur» i \m>>éA\3, oblivtfcere, from to forget. Rule XVII. Of compound Verbs. 1. Compound verbs frequently draw back their accent ; 2. But, contrary to this rule, the circumflex keeps its place, when it happens to be upon the laß, or when it proceeds from a crafis or contra^ion, • 3. fPhe äorifl and the preterperfeSt retain their accent in the infinitive -, 4. As likewife in the participles ; 5. And in the other moods, when the verbs happen to be dijfyllables, and have the firft fyllable long. 6. To thefe we may join the verbs in MI in the fub- junáive and the optative : 7. And the compounds of ù/m, except the prefent and! . the imperative. Examples. Í. Compound verbs draw back the accent of their fimple to the antepenúltima, as well as the nouns : as from fedeo, / ßt% xi¿6vy.ai, the fame: KUfiat, jaceo. I lie down¡ circum- jaceo : turn thou ; wjorgtil/a»» exhort thou : çà9i, fey thou f ■ a-¿¡/.(pa6t, confeß, &c. "Eç, mitte, fend thou ; xáBtí, di mitte. let go', S(î, put thou y xdruBiq, quit thou : Sof, give : àm^o^, reßore, 2. But the circumflex accent remains oftentimes on the fame fyllable, or that which is correiponding to it, as well in the deri¬ vatives as in the compounds, when it happens tOibe on the laft: from reXS, I viill fend, it remains in fií\Siíaí : ¿n'orc^à- fíoti, &c^ er when it refults from a crafis orcontradion ; nitrvfBxù, iT-vvÔAaç, M, to break : to bend, to /horten : iiro^- to leap upon: lírawjfiü», to correä, to reQify : eagoyß, he pours all out, &C, 3. The aorifts and preterits retain alfo the accent of their fimple. in the firfi place, in all forts of infinitives; as ehai, to be, to go ; ¿.■jciTtat, to retire', lUiïmt, to enter (but if t,he penúltima happens to be ihort, the accent is changed into an acute ; as ímíveu, tUUtat, becaufe the circumflex cannot be upon a ihort fyllable) : to have a/cended : iragaiiJofrfia», noct^ei^oBvucii, to be given, to be de¬ livered ; œa^aiôvô«». to give, to dtliver : ateîiTai, th^ have been fent avuay. 4. In the participles; as slxùi;, one that has fent : àipiixùi, one that has fut hack : ilftoi, having fent ¡ ¿n'fciyo;, having releafed or Of the Accents of Verhsl 4^5 or difmtjfed : viyo»«ç, born ; «rfoye-yotàt, ßrfl'loru : jSiç, ¿taSíf, x«- T«Çàî, haviftg mounted,-hwving de/cended: taien, etm- ^ized, eoneeived, ice, , 5. Thofe two tenfes retain líkewife the accent of their limpie in the other moods, when they are diflyllable, and the firft happens to belong; as ¡ hadi x«Tt^o», I contained : à^tTxu, in-the preterperfea, and «í^x», in the aorifl, I bane difiniffed: 5«?«, I teeoe touched, I have faßened : xaBñfa, the fame : from íx» rio/tM, to come .* i/fXyftou, I am come : ùÇtTSov, I haue carried aiut^ i uemTuop, I ha<ùe accufed : avrxxa, I have underßood : to eu§oÍH t miç,ióyo« irí, by reafon that this acute cannot reach fo far as the end of tiiefe two additional fyllables. But if the enclitic is a mônofyllable, it feems then-to be a dif. pritable point. Modern grammarians maintain that this monofyl« lable always lofes its accent, as Piéyot n», But the ancients have not declared themfelves fufficiently upon the fubjeâ: and I do not know whether this rule will not bear a diftinâion, in order to conform to the general analogy of pronunciation ; which is, that if after this acute on the penúltima, there follows a Ihort mo> nofyllabic enclitic, it really lofes its accent, xóyof re, rvTrla t c-s, accerdtng U me OP thee: mgl trS, i /x5, of yeu or me : àm i/u3 xoi ai, for you and me. Of which there are innumerable examples in Stephen's New Teftament, and in all the other books which they printed from the excellent manufcripts of the King'« Jibraty^ and which have been faithfully copied by all the reft. Rule XX. When the Acute is on the Penúltima.' ^hen the penúltima is acutedy the monofyllable enclitic lofeth its accent î hut the dijjjfllabk preferves it -, as dvíg» r», XÔyoç Ifi. Examples. Wheu a word hath an acute on the penúltima, the enclitic of one fyllable lofeth its accent ; as hoys; (M), my di/courfe i ae\a. ce, your bufiand ; pt/ço; t». Jome part. But a word of two fyllabies keeps its accent ; as hoyo; Irl, it is' 0 di/courfe i wàv o ¿x Ix mirtaç ífua^TÍ» êft, Rom. i. vibat/oevtr pra^ €teds not from faitb, is ßn. ANNOTATION. I follow here the common opinion, eoncerniog which I refer the reader to what has been faid in the beginning of the chapter. There are fome who think, that if the penultima be long by pofition, and the laft ftiort, the enclitic throws back its accent on the laft fyllable of this word j as irí-fá ptoi, uva. \ but this rule is exploded by many ; and we may venture to fay, that it is vifibly falfe, and contrary to the nature and general analogy of pro,* nunciation, becaufe it puts two acutes and two elevations fucceftively. « Rule Of EncUtîcf,; ■ 459 R tr L E XXL When the Acute or the Circumflex is on the Final. ■ When an acute or a circumflex is at the end of a voord^ the following enclitic hath no accent % hut then the acute is not i as ufually\ changed into a grave. Example^ When a word is marked with an acote or a circumflex on the final fyllable, the enclitic, which follow3, lofeth its accent. But then the acute continues without'being changed into a grave in the middle of a period, as is ufually praûifed : becaufe it muft raife this final fyllable of the word, in order to predominate in the foU lowing enclitic, fo as to make, of the two, but one word, at lead, with refpeâ to the pronunciation; as 3eÓ{ God fays, and not 0toi nor &só( In like manner, 0tù /x», to my Godt é<¡ú ffoi, imoe he to thee : QtS yàç Itr/x», for tioe hehng to God, &C. annotation. I comply here liicewife with the common opinion, though it Is very probable, that when after a circumflex on the laft, there foUoweth an enclitic fliflyllable, it ought to preferve its accent; as et» fivctti becaufe tMs circumflex having already had a depreflion on the laft fyllable of the preceding word, it ia difficult to conceive hovy it can have two fyllables more of depreffion. Rule XXII. When there happen to be feveral Enclitics fucceflively.' When two enclitics go together, the accent of the laft muß be transferred to the firft. Examples. When two or more enclitics follow one another, the accent of the laft is given to that which precedes ; that is, an acute or a circumflex, if the fyllable require it ; as ri/wW. ptf nnc, fomebody ßriket me : aüuLÓ, ptS ti»» traget, íiírara». Kôçtoî (u5 tr», it is my Lord : and then thefe enclitics throwing back their accents upon one another, the laft muft of courfe gq without, as may be feen in the laft example. annotation. I fpeak here acoording to the common opinion, and to the prañice which now obtains ; though, according to the general principle above explained, it appears to me, that it is really the general analogy of the language, never to have two fucceffive elevations : purfuant to which I fhould choofe to fay, Kvjiiç âç-î, without accenting fta, rather than Kûçwç ftS ir», &c. And my conjeiturc may be fupported by feveral examples of the New Tefta- ment, in the royal editions of the Louvre of Rob. Stephen and Plantin; and in Pafor's Remarks ; as MaSnj«» /«a iré, Jf»"' Má(Tv¡ yág Irí» ó ©làf, Rom. i. 9. 'is^u/órcgít /ua Ir»», Matth, iii. Ii. 'O 'aragaíMf ¡ue roí, Joan. xix. ii. Mi tí;/Ota ío?» ¿«pjtva tTvai, 2 Cor. xi. i6. where /us retains its accent; and feveral others, which are not errors of ' tranfcribers, but remains of the old pronunciation» Thefe authorities may be further corroborated from reafon, if w« do but con- lider well the nature of enclitics. For fince an enclitic implies no more, than to adhere '460 Book IX. Of AöcentsT adhere in fueh a manner to the preceding word, as to make, as It were, hot OM word with it ; one would think that thia property cannot eafily agree with feveral words fucccffivdy, and therefore when one of thefe enclitic words has preceded, and is joined to the foregoing word, the following can no longer be confideied as an enclitic, but as a feparate word, which therefore ought to retain its own par¬ ticular accent, in the fame manner as thqr retain it in the government of prepofi- tioflS, as we have already obferved. Though in this, as In every thing elfe, I liibTnit to the judgment of the learned. I have only one thing further to add, as a proof of thefe rules having been fre- <|ueiAly forged by modern grammarians, or adapted to their conveniency, which it, that not only the ancients, but even thofe the laft century, di> not always agree with tíiem, as appears from Vergara, a very learned grammarian, who flourilhed about a hundred and fifty years ago. n. Whtihtrtat tught to pronounce the tvio Accents, futUcb are marked ttpotf a Wordfollovoed hy an. Enclitic. ' It is proper to take notice here, that whenfoever an enclitic throws back ks ac¬ cent on the end of a word, it ought always to be pronounced, notwithftanding the opinion of modern grammarians. Vetgara fays, that they ought both to be pro¬ nounced as much as pofiible, and I believe he is in the right. But if one only is to be pronounced, 1 think it ought rather to be the laft than the firft. IH. When the Esulitic does not thron» hack its Accent. The enclitics frequently retain their accent, without throwing it back on the prdceding word, which happens, I. To avoid a cacophony; as ¿n tielCals-a^ vl ¡¡/uafTW, AAs xrv. / have Commuted no crime againfi Cafar : "where ni retains its accent, by reafon that if if ,cafi it back, the found would be very difagreeable. n. To give a greater emphafis ; » ¿XX' h ai, Rom. xi. dwr it U the- ret* tlet hears you s where ai retains its accent : s ilidii ad, i Tim. i\i nobtcb bat been gvveu you s where ad retains it alfo. The enclitics preferve likewife their accent in the beginning of • period, and even after a comma, becaufe then they are no longer enclitics, fince they do not adhere to thd preceding word; as ad iiaoi, Luke iv. I will give tbee. Vtadatu, wdldytt, Lukexiv. Toutigman, I fey unto tbee, arije-, «¡retains its ac¬ cent, becaufe it cannot be joined to nadant in the conftruâion, but to Xcpw, which governs it ; hence it does not adhere to the preceding word, but agrees with the following, and therefore is not an enclitic. But I fancy, tbat if theforegoing infiancee be proper^ confdered, tbey will greatly tot robórate what we bave aemaneod above,' namdy, tbat tbofe enclitic* are not al¬ ways enclitics, and tbat tbe rules wbicb are given concerning tbem, are not alwayt agreeable to tbe praSice of tbe ancients 1 infomucb tbat we bave reafon to be upon our ^ giifird, wifnevor we fee tbem repugnant to tbe natural principle abivementioned. Rule XXIII. When trt takes an Accent. . WhenXfi is at the beginning ef a period, its ßrß fyU lahle is marked with an acute ; as alfo when jt follows thefe words, ¿k, ¿xkx, ù, tôfj'xitî, tuto, îrh » tSt* 9f *r». Examples. When a period begins with Ut, its firâ fyllable is Inarked with an acute ; as Ut pth, efi quidem. Likewife when Ut follows thefe words, à* ¿xxà, &c. as à* t'r» Suirèc, he is not mortal : ¿xx'îV-'p tltrtiv, hut rwe may fay : rùr' U* i but we fay alfo in one word tot- rri, it is ev^tt this. ^ Of Enclitics^ 461 Bat if the final IS n^ cat off*) Tttré iftf then ¡n has no accent» hat throws it back upön tó, according to the foregoing rale. % Rule XXIV. Of Words that have no Accent. "■ • « X** e»>»» ft «'t* »«• 1. O, »!> 0»» a», «f, ÍÍ, tr, 8, «X, uii. ix, í¿, Ifave no accent : 2. But ¿ takes an acute at 4he clofe of a periodo as likewife £$ at the end of a verfe^ Examples. 1. All the above monofyllables are without an accent ; but the four firft, which are the nominative mafculine atad feminine of the Ïrepofitive article fingolar and plural, and t>i> at, as, have a rough reathing, the reil a fmooth one. ■ ' * 2. Neverthelefs a takes an acate at the end of a period, as alfo at the end of a verfe. ANNOTATION. ^ All thofe words however may have the accent of the following enclitic, pnr- fuant to the preceding rules, ficut, a$ ; ehi(, fi quis, if aiy My, See. "aç admits alfo of an accent on divers occafions. 1. When it follows tha word to which it refers i wtXiav; &(, like dn hatchet, a. When it is employed in fimiles ; as S>i ùeein, »; fáro, S>e having that fpoke. Sec. 3. When it is joined to èSè or pnii. 'axx* ¿$* &e, hut not even fo. 4. When we lay, ■(-<» ék, this may be in feme meafure. And the reafon of this is, heeaufe Hç noith the accent it taken for rit, which ufe J to he put infiead of Srue, dius, as Henry Stephen ohferves, arid at may be feen in feveral pajfages of Homer. For which reafon when mt is put alfo for opceet, tarnen, neverthelefs, it requires an accent, and feme even infifl upon its being a circumßex, at refulting from the junSure of two fyllables ; but Henry Stephen is of a different opi¬ nion, and it is more probable that it it a Jyncope, than a eontraSion. Rule XXV. Of Breathings. f. The article and the relative, 2. the letters 1. and f, require a rough breathing. 4. I at the beginning of pronouns has a fmooth breath^ ing j as alfo «jtoç. All the other pronouns have a rough breathing -, as alfo £, fe, himfelf. 6. The fyllabic augment i has a fmooth breathing, e*- cept iVax«. y. ft in compounds^ has alfo a fmooth breathing, except »stic, «aiktîç.* 8, The Attic t reduplicated, tales the breathing of the verb. 9. Trepo- îfçi Book IX.. of accents; • 9. Prepefitions are marked with a fmootb HreatUng if 10. jif alfo conjmSHonsy except a few. Examples. We ihall only mention a word or two in regard to breathings« leaving the reft to the nfe of authors, or didtionaries. Only ob- ferve, that the breathing'of the nominative goes'through all the other calés, as that of the prefent is generally continued in all the tenfes; and that of the primitive through idl the derivatives and compounds. But we muft alfo oblérvC« ' ]. That the article ¿, i, and the relative o«, v, 0, have always a rough breathing. For which is in the room of a vocative, is not an article, but an adverb. 'I'he article has only a breath¬ ing in thofe cafes which begin with a vowel r and only an accent in thofe which begin with a confonant, as rJ ; whereas the relative has always a breathing and an accent together, as », &c. , 2. All words beginning with the vowel v, have alfo a rough breathing ; the other vowels and diphthongs have more frequently a fmooth one. 3. Among the confonants there are four which take a rough breathing, viz. the three mutes x, t, (for which there have been charadters purpofely invented, ç, x» lo that there is no occafion for our treating furthey of them here) and the letter ^ in the beginning of words, ds pá/^v, robur, ßrengtb. But if in the middle of a word, there happens to be two fucceffively, as in «réppui the former takes a fmooth breathing, becaufe it terminates the pre¬ ceding fyllable; and the latter has a rough breathing; concerning which I refer the reader to what has been faid Book 1. Chap. viii. 4. All pronouns that begin with an e, have a fmooth breathing ; .as iyù, t/is, me i ixunof, he: as alfo ecùto;, ipfe, himfelf. 5. All the other vowels of the pronouns have a rough breathing ; as nos, ive ; »to;, ille, he ; likewife t, fe, him/ilf: whence its compound îuvrS, and by aphasrelis avrS, fui ipfiue, takes alfo a rough one. 6. A in ■ compofition has commonly a fmooth breathing ; as cé^act;, nvithout children. Thefe two however are rough : ¿Avirt;, a chain : ¿hi for alhi, pluto, hell. ~ 7. The fyliable augment f has alfo. a fmooth breathing; as tTvnipt, îrcrvÇiiy, tcc. But sraxct, the preterperfedt of .rq/ot, ßo, ip ßand, as well as its derivatives irài, ßans, have a rough one : from thence alfo comes Irsx», to ßänd ßedfaß. 8. The Attic t prefixed to verbs, which begin with an « or », retain the breathing of the prefent ; as l/ee% lá^ax», J hâve ßen} o'moxoéa, pincerna fum, I am a cup-hearev, ^ /o»** out wine. 9. Prepofitions and conjundtions have likewife a fmooth breath¬ ing, except a few, fuch as Ua., owui, e»x«, &c. which muß bo learnt by pradtice. CHAP, Qbfervatîpns regaräng the Accents» C H A P. X. •y 3» - Divers Obfcrvations in regard to Accents and the Di- , • ftinélion of Words. I, That, the Accents are ufeful in pointing out the Quan¬ tity ^ and how, IT is proper to obferve here, that as the rules of quantity are the foundation of the rules of accents : in like manner the accents are frequently of ufe, in leading' us to the knowledge of quantity, by rifing from the efieñ^ to the caufe. For inftance, when the acute is on the antepenúltima, we may infer that the laft iyilable is Ihorf, fave only the Attic words, which have been al¬ ready excepted. The laft is likewiíé íhorf, when the penúltima is circumllexed g and, on the contrary, it is long itfelf, when marked with a circum¬ flex. The laft is alfo long, when a penúltima long by nature is ónly marited with an acuie ; by reafon that if the laft was ihort, the penúltima would be circumflexed. . But when the laft is Ihort by nature, and the penúltima is only acuted, we may conclude that the penúltima is alfo ihort j becaufe if it were long, it would have a circumflex.- Of all which, ex¬ amples may be feen above,-without there being any neceflity foe repeating them here. ' . ^ ■ We may likewife find out the quantity of the nominative fingu- lar by the accent of the other cafes, or of the other numbers ; and that of a primitive by its derivatives, or vice njerfa. Thus we fee, that the nouns in 'ent, not formed of a verb, have the penúltima long} as woXiriKt ^ citizen,' becaufe in the plural this « is cir¬ cumflexed, airo), &c. But the dialefts frequently change the accent and the breath¬ ing, as alfo the orthography, as we lhall fee hereafter. nr. That '4^4 Book IX. Of A c c e n t «]?' III. That the Accent and Breathing help to dißingütßi fever al Words. The accent and breathing are frequently of nfe in diftingnilh» ing feveral words from one anotheri as tl, if ; tï, es, /éou art i «f.hic, hf. S, quod, whitb: i, hsec, ß)e% v, quse, which: 4,-Telf «r, quam, than, alioqui, otherwi/e ; v, dixit, ht has /aid, or erat, ¡ft was', fit, ht may ht S, cui, to whotd', fax, &c. qua, which wccy ; ubi, whert ; as alio fsow, in ordtr to, inafmuch as. Sec. ■ * In like manner, í»m, but ; alia, other things ; Sfsoi, e, fht Jhouldtr : ¿/*èî, crutl: hoßilt things ; tnmity : tiot, hegotth', etoi, thwart: x¡ípa, Ijudgt', *{1,2, I will judge', r{(€Xi9, rack or forment i crooked: alive i ^o,, an animal: uvio(, TO, glotyi xvSof, i, difgrace: ¡»¿n, alone i ¡Mtm, amanßon, IIV. ^bat fome Words happen to have the fame Accents in different Significations. Sometimes words are neither diftinguilhed 1)7 the accent, nor by the breathing ; the difference therefore muft be found out by the fenfe, and by the context ; Mu,a\>i,where', u, cujus, of whom t 4n, eratis, ye were ; nrt, litis, ye may he .* i^tvpZrt, invefiigatis, ' ye Jearch ; Ij««,««, invefligate, fearch ye : yttunaeot, cognoicant, tbçt- know', yivaoxBoi, cognofcentibus, to theft that know: I, tv (i» dative lingular) ^ (third fing. fut. aâ. indi- cat.) oe S ou, Deut, xxviii. 57. in the aßliäion wherewith thy enemy will opprefs thee : mtioofJMt, I will perfuade, ot I will be¬ lieve or obey, taken from mtí6u ; eaúooficu, 1 flsaJl fuffer, for «á« e'o/xai, taken from whence comes vxoxu, to Jujfer: « miopf, tui, a potion or draught i • wsirt;, to;, abujband: neverthelefs% ¡AT,,, ti'èf, a month: trnoat Ho (aorift of the firft- aâive) t pre/ented two of them, Aâs i. 23. oî irwap mó(fo6» (aorift of the fécond aâive) who food at a dißancefrom him, Luke xvü. 12. v. Other Means to diftinguijh Words. : Since we are upon this fubjeâ, it will not be improper to obferve, that there are fevéral other methods of diftinguilhing between words : as by the gender ; ¿X;, ¿Xo;, ô fait ; aX;, áXo;, ñ, the fea s ßÜTOi, u, i, a bramble-buß ; ßarof, », ô, a fort of liquid mtafure. By the vowel t ,2ro;, », with an omega, the back ; ,óto;, », the fouth wind. By the confonant : ,ó6o;, », fpurius, a baßard; ,áro;, », the foutlr wind. By the diphthongs : lort, upon', Itret, whereas. And thofe who rollow the right pronunciation, as pointed out and explained in the firft book, have this advantage, that not only they contraâ in a very Ihort time the habit of diftinguilhing a vaft multitude of words; but that even in pronouncing they render th* diftin£lion fenfible to their hearers. TH& C 4^5 í THE « THIRD PART, y this BOOK, # CyDIALECTS and POETIC LICENCES, CHA P.' XL i Of the "Four DialeSis in General. WHAT regards the particular of each dialeâ, has beea alreadjr fuffictently explained in its relpefUve place in the preceding books : yet it is proper to make a recapitula» tion, id order to give the reader a general idea thereof ; and to point out at the fame time the different countries or province» where thofe dialeâs obtmned, as alfo the authors that made ufe of them. 1. The Attic is that which was ufed at Athens» and in the adja« cent country. The principal writers in this dialed, are Thucydit des» Ariffophanes» Plato» Ifocrates, Xenophon, and Demofthenes. 2. The Ionic differed very little from the ancient Attic ; but having afterwards found its way to fome towns of Afia Minor* and to the adjacent iilands, which were colonies of the Athenian» and Achaians (among which are reckoned Samos, Miletus, Ephe- fus» Smyrna, and fome others) it imbibed, as it were, a new tine-; ture» and fell greatly ihort of that delicacy, which the Athenians afterwards attained to. Hippocrates and Herodotus made ufe of this dialed. . > . 5. The Doric was ufed firft among the Lacedsemonians, and the inhabitants of Argos ; afterwards in Epirus, Libya, Sicily, Rhodes»' and Crete, This dialed was ufed by Archimedes aud Theocritus (both of Syracufe) and Pindar. 4. The .^olic was fpoken at firft among the Bœotians and their neighbours ; it pafled afterwards into JEoWz, a province of Afia Minor, between Ionia and Myfia, which incliided ten cities, all Greek colonies. The chief writers were Sappho and Alceus,' of whofe works very little is now extant. But we find it alfo occa» lionally mingled in Theocritus, Pindar, Homer, and others. The difference of^times has introduced a great difference into thefe very dialeds.^ For inftance, in the Attic, the ftile of Demoi- thenes is quite another thing from that of Thucydides : and the Ionic dialed, as obfcrved above, has not continued invariably the fame ; thofe of Afia fpeaking it differently from the old lonians of H h ' Greece» - 460 Book IX. .0/Dialects; Greece, who followed the ancient language of Athens. The fame may be fmd of the Dorians and folian s. But as to what regards thefe four dialeâs in general, we (hall comprize all that is proper to remark upon the fubjeâ, in the four following rules. Rule XXVI. General Properties of the Attic Dialed. I. ^he Attic dtakSi loves contraStionSy 1. As alfo the joining of words : 3. It often changes v into 0, ^y -and r ; 4. It cafls away 1 from ti : 5. It changes 0 into w : 6. It joins %y to the end of words : 7. And t to the end of adverbs. Examples. i. The Attics love contrarions; and to their dialeñ principally belong the contraâed nouns, and circumflex verbs« of which we have treated in the fécond and third books. a. But they are not only fond of contradingfyllablesin the famé word, they likewife unite different words by a figure caUed syna- LAPHA, of which there are feven different forts. The iff by elifion, when a vowel or diphthong between two words is cut off": for •ro.-a.iro, idem, the /ame : xd; for xeà tit, & ad, and to. The 2d by crafis, when two vowels or diphthongs are mingled, fo as not to retain the found : r'af/M for to, é/xà, mea, my goods : for operas pretium, 'worth 'while : vçovrtèiisin» for proponebam. The 3d by fynacrefis, when the fyllables are united, fo as to re¬ tain, neverthelefs, all their letters : NrgDi'ist, Nuçîitç, the Nereids. The 4th by elifion and crafis both together, when one vowel is droptto make acontraâion of the other two: l/xo! í«éxtt, ífAeí¿xi^, it feemtd to me : tS ihyiot, rúXyttt, doloris, of pain. The 5th by elifion and fynserefis: l/xst vvoiins, iisnnoSvptt, mihi fubit, it comes into my mind. The 6th by crafis and fynaerefis : ¿ alvsAot, «s-oXo«, a goat-herd : lyù) oíí«, iya^a, I knovs very 'well. The yth by elifion, crafis, and fynaerefis: b tn Ai6$titíay I, t'aOiost»«, in .Ethiopia. AN NUTATION. Tkis'fynalsepha happens alfo without contraction, when the firft vowel of the fécond word is rejefted : ¡xh t'f® for ¡xii I do not find : fxi ■ort^sfsn' for /¡xñ imyi- fsiy, not to impoje : ¿ \íg tor 2 ätegf ó man : & 'yaBè fot 2 àyaSc, my goodfriend. But this is praCtifed chiefly by poets. See Book I. Rule ix. Several of thefe contrarions may occur likewife in the other dialeCts. But that which the Attics make in x, is rather in «, according to the Dorics ; as eltn for xeti ifsrs, and he faid. The Dorics make alfo in a> the contraction, which the Attics have in u: - viontvjtix its TS ivh-ixxt garment t it yù for ó ¿y». It àfor i tJ, jiri ear. 3. The Of the Attic DiáÍeíi. ' '467 3. The Attics change <7 into í¡mí for dt î/^oi, Ma, fleo, to nioeep : xaía, K¿a, aro, to bum : Iraî^of, írágo;^ afriend, Likewife 1; for ik, ad, towards: wXtsi for w^troi, more, ANNOTATION. The etymolo^ft ^dds allb m ; as ¡ani for vwS, tt do : but this is feldom met with, except among poets; no more than wmîts for «tmsïti, yodos erswf for_ «»IÜV, doing ; and the like. 5. They change 0 into a : xdf, tbe people: MsssXoo;, Úoti- Meuelaus : tdoi, nàt, a temple : and fach like. Where you may likewife obferve the change of « into i in the penaltima, but. this happens only when the « is long, for the reafon above men» tioned, Rule III. 6. They add the fyllable vr to the end of feveral words, giving it a circumflex accent, except in ¿xa», non, (to diftinguifli it from «xSir, tberefore) and imo vero. Thus they fay, ôtiSi for «, , n, quid, tubat : èrripSo for errtpcc, quem, wbicb : ÔTotofSr, qualif- cumque, vobicbfoever : ôarofSi', eeub, vobichyou pleafe : ùawtçat, i« tbe fame manner as, &C. 7. They frequently join 1 to the end of adverbs : krav, tbus : »VSI, nunc, novo : ¿x't non, and Ion. ¿xt. Which they alfo prac- tife in regard to the pronouns 3rs; and íkoTpoí, Ule, as we have made appear elfewhere. They fay alfo »«»îi for »v» it, nunc vero : ó4» for «4« to com« pounds ; as one fbai begins to fiudy late in life, ANNOTATION, Belides this, tbe Attics have feveral phrafcs and expreifiohs quite peculiar to, tbcmfelves; fomeof which have been taken notice of in tbe Syntax, and tbe reft niuft be learned by yraflice. Rule XXVII. Of the Ionic Diale6t in general. 1. The lonians, on the contrary, extend and refolvc words : therefore, 2. They drop a confonant^ 3. Or ajfume an t-, 4. And make two fylîahîes of one, 5. They change to and » into su : 6. Likewife « and t into n, 7. They add o-r to the dative: 8. Sometimes they ajfume, and fometimes they drop a 9. They rejeSt the afpirates : • . Hh z to. And 46? Book ,IX. Of Di^aíects. 10. uáSíi put X for w Í 11. And chànge the genitive h mio on. " . . 1 £XAMPL£S. 1.' The Tonians are quite oppofite to, the new Attics in this, that they delight to extend and relblve words ; inibmuch that they conilantly refolve the contraâlbn, faying for^'Egixvt, Ma-' €ury ; rao; for »Sf, the mind ; and always put the nouns and verbs uncOntraâed, ' ' 2. They frequently^ rejeél a confonant, in order to produce a conconrie of vowels ; as xgíarot. x^íaot, carnii ; rídlteuf verberaris; lîÇ«, libe, .3. Ând if the^ cannot rejeô thq confonaiit« they infert an t, in order to effeâ this hiatus or gaping : AImU» for Aínín, Macs, oj JEn$as : fceercwr for ¡jístrúii, taufarum, of the mufis: In like manner, KgÍMor for x^mti the lily : for a brotbet : for fotile i íiitéit, tve ; and fuch like. By the fame analogy they refolve a. long into a« ; as êétGxs; for «6x0;, a battle ; and they put «t or » before » in nouns ending in this long vowel, which is fometimes changed into « ; as ¿foyxoiti, or ¿noyxoiet, for ¿váyxv, necejpty. In ihort, by the fame analogy they refolve the diphthongs, - ' s> into ijV : 'fín)¡ÁtÍt>, fnnití'iú», a monument t ¿XigO^V« for àXnift», truth.: xAvl» for xAiia, topraife, toJhut. '• et into ))» : facile : ©¿yl, ©iji»!» a Thracian. ■ ' y into etot : ahi, ùoilh), a fing, UV into UV : íiMvrta for iftuvrd, mei ipßus : ^úv/ta for huvftu, a miracle or 'wonder, ' J. They change t« and »into tv. «rxío»^ a»; WKtv., more: «Xfo«V» mr^cviií, piares ; tootStrt, wonvcrt, faciunt, they ¿o, 6. They change ««.into n : T(? for votjKEÎaç, a flenx/ard.: wgnvi for mild : ikixowç for hixwo, a minißer or deacon. Likewife into t : Stiéoftu. from Ssío, the fame with Seáo/tui, to tontemplate, to admire : Tirir for Tnit : Tgtil for a fpar-ho'wk : AUp for XÉ«», ve>y much. 7. They form the dative plural of parifyllabic nouns in : t^yowi, ftva-riat for Pwyotf, /tirutf, See, See Book II. Chap. iii. and iv. H. Sometimes they infert > : xHtof for xe»o;, empty : t"ui for lu;, tsntil : eImx« for ïmxa, gratiâ, yèr the fake of: •mout, or w«ti) for «79«, grafi. Sometimes they rejeft it : for demonßration : (tt^up, x^iaaup, mXsup for ¡tei^up, bigger ; x^eiauup, better ; mXfiup, ^ more : S^Xs« for S^Xee«, female, &c. 9. They rejeâ the afpirates: Ifo^up for IÇo^àp, to fie, to look into. 10. They put x for m : xuf foi tmUo, how. 11. They form In oic, inllead of a, the genitive of the poriíyl» labios,in 0; ; as X970;, 7>éyn, Xéyoio, difiourfi. , Of the Doric Ditdeáit¡ 4^^ R u t E XXVIII. ' Of' the Doric Dialeâ in general. i. The Dorians chango n, «, e, 0, an4, a into o^: -2. They likewife change v into z : 3. a and eta into «.• 4. They cafi away » from the infinitive ; 5. And put the feminine plural infiead of the finguUr, Exaimples. 1. The Dorians make the vowel « predominate almoft every where : hence they put a for I z ftéyudoç for f*iy$6o(, bignefs : r¿¡i.to for rénno, to eut z ;, ukeq from the Ionic itavitçj' clavis. ■ Or, if they do confider the fubjunâive>vowel, they change h into «( : iïxh atxa, fi: am, five, mhtther, coming from ai for ft, fi: f9ai§a for , ta terrupt, tec, which however is more rare. a, for n : jwAr for ¡sà», a month : vntjiàf for. ceotfA», a fisephtrd s xà^vi for x?^v|,' a herald : ifwifna., for lAot/xqi>. from ai^fu, to fhop/e : iÇat for iÇnr, 1 ¿ave /aid. Which happens not only to the fécond fyllable, but to the refi alfo : for Çn/sn, fama. renown : táoat for Sioa^, gui ligavit : àfùif for hitttt, nos, tec. And this change is common to them with the ^olians. with this difference, that the ^olians make » ihort, whereas the Doriana have it long. a for a : iîxart for cixovi, twenty : iooa for ooa or aoa-a, gua^^ (umguf. ' • a for a : Aîteie, for Ai,tin, ^neee : ygvoa for ygvoa, tec, a for a, in the genitive plural of nouns that follow the feminine article 2 AiteTa, for AintH, : rtfAM, for ti/x»,, bonorum, tec. And ellewhere, Tloouiar for Xlooti^Z,, Neptune : . ms^arof for firß, tec. 2, They change » into ji fubfcribed : xadtvS^, for xaOtííet,, to fitep : aaS?» for aaCtîV, to take. 5. They change a into a: ftas-aj for ¡eéo»;, mu/as: tJayo: for aôyaç, formones, &c. ^ Likewife a.v intou: «aa| for «Jaa|, fulcus, a ridge, and by fyn- COpe ¿al : for a wound, from rgúo for r^aia. .4. They caft away''i from the infinitive: aaÇ«» for aaCsr,, to take. 5, They freguently put the plural of the feminine infiead of the fino-ular : xaaàç for xaa«,, puUbram : vopà; for oofr,,, fapientem. See. R U L s 470- * Book IX. Of Dialects." Rule XXIX. Of the ^olic Dialeâ in general, I. ^be MoUans reje£l the afpiration\ '• 2. And draw hack the accent i ß. they change » into ai : ' 4. lAkewife Zv into ¿m : 5. For strxv they take eura» ; _ 6. And put ß before f •' 7. They change two into two vv : ,8. In feveral things they agrte with-the Dorians, and are followed by the Latins^ Examples. I, « ' 1.- The ^olians rejeñ the rough breathing, and are fatisfied with the fmooth one : for iifíí^x, the day, 2. They generally draw back the accent : vÍTa¡Mt for vrorxiMf, a river : xóAo; for xaXof,' band/erne, 3. They pot a^for x only: x.x\xCi for xoxAf, pulthras, fil^xtf for ftlx«;, blaci : rxXxif for rxXx^, miferahle. In like manner for mTfXf, vretvxi for vurx,- from vnrx»>, to be hungry, 4. They put im for m in the genitive plural of nouns that fol¬ low the feminine : xlmxm, ¡mxxui, forxlttiüp, fueaut ; jull as in the lingular they refolve » into ««. 3. They put ova for wx : w¿Wlotv» for Tvdluax, jua verberat t ¡áoTitxp for ft-eaxp, mu/am, &C. ' é. They put ß for ^ inftead of the rough breathing : ß^Hor for fóíb», a ro/e : ß^vrii^ for fvrvç, a bridle. Whence the poets fay, ii[dêçorop for infMcgrov, I bave tranfgreffed, from ¿¡xxgrxpu, to Jtu, changing the breathing ; where you have alfo a tranipofition of ^ and a change of x into 0. 7. They change two itji into two w : ívirxrx for ífi¡Mrx, tb» tyesy the fight, 8. They agree in a great many things with the Dorians, and are followed by the Latins almoft in every thing, as we have obferved in the Latin grammar. Infomuch that if the writings of thofe who ufed this dialed! had been tranfmitted down to us,, we Ihould pro¬ bably difcover a very great agreement between it and the Latin, not only with regard to the words, but alfo to the phrafeology. annotation. We may therefore obferve, according to Strabo, that, properly fpeaking, there are only two principal dialeâs ; the ^olic referring to the Doric, and the Ionic to the Attic. For the lonians, as we have obferved already, were of Atticaj Hence it is, that to this very day we give the name of hmau Sea to that between prcece and Italy. CHAP. Of "Poetic "Licences', 'j^^t CHAP.' XII. . Of Poetic Licences, After having treated of the principal dialeñs in general, it is proper to take notice of the licence^ commonly ufed by poets, which are much greater in the Greek than in the Latía tongoe ; which made Cicero, z. de Oratore, fay, that they fpoke a fort of foreign language quite peculiar to themfelves, and hardly at all underftood by thofe who were not ufed to it. ' , 1. They lengthen the ihort fyHables, which is called [xnctrc;, txtmßen, or diaftole, lengthening. 2. They fliorten the long fyllables, which Is called «rvroXv,- fyftole, foortening. Whereto we may refer as well the change of long vowels into fliort, as the refolution of diphthongs, though it be made not only in order to (horten, but likewife to multiply the' number of fyllables^ which is called hai^erit, diareßt, or divißon. ^ 3. They cut off, add, or tranfpofe the letters or fyllables, as we have already hinted in the ninth chapter of the firft book, and as we ihall (hew here more particularly, in fuch a manner as will render ' the writings both of poets and -orators more eafy to be underitood. I. Of the Manner in which Poets lengthen Syllables, 1. By changing the (hort vowels into their proper long ones, and s into s, as we have feen on feveral occafions. 2. By lengthening the three common vowels, a, 1, v, 3. By changing tot. or tt into » ; as tp^ñroi for ç^totroi, futeU from r« Pçtaç, a well : for ßeß. 4. By changing the Ihort vowels, t, 0, as likewife « or v, into diphthongs. Whether into o : 'Ef/itletf for 'Eyjtlotf, Mercury : ífuTo for t/xf«, mei, of me «/*£(£{ for i/x££ç, nos : £»«g for («g, ver, the ffring i which is taken from the lonians. Or into £v : as StioiAai for iioficti, indigeo, I want : tSao for eÍx, line, let thou, permit thou: which comes from the ^olians. Or into 0» : as yt^MÍa» for ytXiut, ridens, laughing : hyuoUait for iytitiatii, ignoravit, he did not know. Or into a : àxoà; for ôA«à;, hurtful : £>XvXa9« for Ix^xvS«, / ant arrived. Or into as : altrif for ¿trof, aquila, an eagle. Or into otv : avu( for auf, the aurora : «¿rsg for ¿ràg : which comes from the ^olians. 5. By reduplicating the fame confonant ; as S, ÍSÍtiam for tSti" «V, he was afraid : X, £XXaC£» for £XaÇ£», he has received : ¡*, ift- ^ogo; for ¿/-togo;, unhappy ; and in like manner the reft. ^ . 6. By inferring another confonant : «rlóx«;, WloXf,»,;, for tváXK, a city : and -aroXE^oç, war : ígíySSíwo; for. égíáVwoí latifonus, where the y is inferced purpofely to give a more diftinft found to the word. II. 0/ BOOK «IX, Cy Di alé CTS.'. II. Of the Manner in which Poetsßorten SyüaUes. 1. By changing the long voweb into ihort ones, and n alfo into . ' - " ^ 2. By ihortening the three comman voweb, «, i, v. 3. By refolving v into ta or aa ; as nyw, táyvt, JiraSut funtt from iyrvfjitf to break .* vaint, ¿ç/ér yitm, from iruf ledo, to iiirt. > Or a long into at ; as ¿0Xo;, ítBXof, a combat : likèwife ta into (to} as Çatit lux, light, 4. By putting two points on the top, and dividing the diph« thongs into two fyllables ; as ¿íadu for aMa, to hear, to breathe ; ¡¡¿ta for «VTW, to crj out : iüjjíúiíiif for tvfttXm, fraxintee haßte peri' tut : and in like manner the reft. But fi is fometimes refolved into two t»; as lé^ya for tl^u, toßnt up, to inclofe : or into v'i, xXsji; for xAci;, a key. In the improper diphthongs, a is changed into ai ; as aftvi for u, F luto : or into «ft ; as in ^u, ¿tíSit, to fing. ti is changed into qV : Asrst, a robber, ff into ¿'t : >Mt», yJiia*, better. Sec, 5. By rejeñing one of the voweb ; as for tlSneu, I fiait know : iitia for nSita, fiweet, agreeable : for ¿Wgt, formed from hó^vi, by metathefis, which comes from íí^v, hafta, a fpear. Whereto we muft refer the rejeâing of the temporal aagmént, according to the lonians ; as lyftgó^, for from to awake : iyot for qyo,, 1 have conduced: íMv for flAtir, I have taken, &c. See Book III. Rule xxi. III. Of Addition or Pleonafm. This addition is made in the beginning, either by adding a vowel ; as ¿«o-p^fr.ç for aa-y^iroi, intolerableíq», Ion. for ?», eram or erat ; qq, for q,, tram : iu^a for i\a, I have entangled, from ugù, to intangle. Or an augmentative particle ; as t|i, «¿1, and others, which have been mentioned. Book VI. Chap. ii. In the middle, viz. after the firft letter or clfewhere, either by adding a vowel ; as ^«á,9q, for f^«,6q,, apparui. Likewife in the third perfon plural pallive in rat or to. See Book III. Rule Ixi« In the patronymics in Ä« : IlqÂqVàiqç for IlqXítí'qí, Achilles, . ©/sto{ for Siîiç, divine : q/Aiof for qXtoç, the fun, (where the rough breathing is changed according to the .£ol.) rtt, or reh for Tiv or «TS», tibi. ' Tlri^ùw fot urtiía or vri^ía, to leap .* âXo»/xf,si fbr ¿Xu/jietBt or ¿^aófíttoi, wandering, from úTíáa, to wander, ©oaixoç, a feat, for Sâixoç ; ou for 5, cujus : ßt^ti^iaro for JSsÇ^q- «TO, third perfon plural Ion. of ßa^a or ß)da, to cafi, 'O/ioiïoç for or o/xo".;, like ; i^yoiit for t^óyot*, fermohtbus, , IIoXtqTq? for BTo^irqç, a citizen : xjiq,«» for x¿q,o,, perfice, from *gai»«, tofinifi, 3 Or Of Poetic LicenceSi ÀJi * Ör by adding a ¿oníbnant ; as iovtt for taw, /« yâjf .• íavat fot ía»f, inftead of q«-«», erant» Or a fyllable ; as imriot for ¡tíoh, tundum. At the END, by adding a vowel : qiforv, vel, or', vvun foe -iin¡, after that : rtv for tí, for what. Áayuo for tMya, frofli >Myàf, à hart. And in like manner all the genitives of parifyllabics in or m. ' TtráMvt or T»T«iii^vtt,. Ion. regem: yX«» for the afpie of the eye. The like is prañifed with regard tp the prepofitions *etr», which reje£t their final vowel, even before confonants : bot then it foe it» changes its r, as we have obferved in the fizth book. Chap. ii. . Or by omitting a confbnant; as «nix« for «rÁxi», etgai». Or by cutting off a fy liable; as 'An-óxx» for 'Atóx^ai»«, ApoUinem f for x^Í/Á-voi, or barley. Or even two fyllables; as /« for /aîio» or eqfily: cax for itinfit, reforge, rifi. , Sometimes we.find this aphatrefis in the beginning as «fell as the end of a word, at the fame time ; as aiu for ht did prtt Jerve, or for aiu^t, do thou fre/erve. V. Of Tranfpoftltom anâÇhangtSt , Thefe changes, which are called raetathefes or tranfpofitions^ happen, 1. In thé mere difpofition of the letters .: wh;ch ù eftjen done, either to lengthen the vowel ; ßi^hrou |x«rayX'oç, tdmtfjíeu, &c. for ir^aorof, À path : ß^iotroit very koanty s «jcvXaye;, terrible ; ftífeo^et,. I have divided ; aíavfuu, / have moved'. Or to (horten it ; ti^xxct, k^xÍI» ; for ítrafSor, they have deflroyedthey havefeen\ xa^iicn the hearty and fach like. Or to augment or diminiih a fy liable; hegu for froip a fpear. 2. In the change of the declenfion, taking a cafe in the analogy, of the imparifyllabic declenfiOo. for the parifyllabic, or vite verja ; asóXxi (ox i\xx^ßrength,povier, &c, .See Chap. VIII. Bookll. p.68, ' 3. Changing the termination, together with the common and received analogy of a word ; xExX«y sf». II. 1?. 9%e'tfydns were frightened when they faw-itis J^ottedferpenif . Though fome will have it* that the o is long there by virtue of the accent ; and this is the opinion of the commentator of He* phxftion. > Some even go fo far as to fay, that the roiigh breathing pro^ duccth this effeâ ; as ... ■* *£«( ó toùdS a^iACun x«t» K«t x«t«. svfmf'. v Wbilß be resolved tbe/e things in bis mind. , > Where lot is drawn into one fyllable, and ó becomes long by virtue of the afpiration. ' And this is alfo the opinion of Eufiathius. They have likewife rednndantverfes; tbsa bàve over' sued above their meafure. • ' . r- ' In a word, the liberty of their verfification is lb vafily great, that every thing feems to be allowed them. In which refpeét the' Latins ate tied down by much feverer laws, as Martial witneffeth» ~ when he apologizes for not having been able to nfe the word Earinsu in verfe. > . .. ' . » ** Dicunt £«gi>>oi> temen Poè'tet, ' ' , . Sed Gretti, quitus eft nihil sstgestuHSt ^ \ Et quos^A^tu 'Açtî, deeet/onare: ^ ' ' Nobis non liest ejfe tam difertis, ^ . Slui mu/as eolimus feveriores. ^ Lib. 9. Epig. li. ^ This is not however fo much owing ta the defeâ of their. poetry, as to the natural copioufnefs of their language, which has' a prodigious facility of diverfifying .things in a thouland forms,; either in the inflexion of nouns and verbs, or in the derivation and, compofition of words, or in the firuâure of their verfes, which ever preferve their beauty, and feem to be particularly adapted to joia, 'all the embelliihments of art with the majefly of eloquence. Graiis ingeniuml Graiis dedit ore rotsessdo. Mu/a loqui, f reefer laudem, nullius avaris. Hor. in Art. Poet«- F I N I S. \ # 3 5556 004 946 802 M ■ f ■i ^y